SIEMON by ITT INGENIERIA

SIEMON N E T W O R K

C A B L I N G

S O L U T I O N S

CATALOG

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

LETTER FROM CARL SIEMON the d to e t u b i contr have o h es w ice ploye m e n off n o o m m e e i . aS of Si mers ted to ands custo tury. s a n u c e i e o d d c i h a is de the t rld-w han r wo ction u ute to ore t e s o b ed in i m r h e t r a fo erv open eac s s n i t e o y r a l g l e h m o t loca tice catal of Sie ices w ill no This ent to cess n off w c o m t u i u s m o e m i d ERP og, y ew S r com th an catal ith an g ou go, n grow s n . w i a i t a h s t s h r n r i ig wse yea mer 5 yea rgent highl custo u bro g two for 1 nd A d orld o l a l l n w a e a e t l e i As yo w a s h in th ast c d us ction la, C here our l serve ezue ransa f w t n o e d e d a m g V e h so dia, rintin that t-bas the p terne stem an, In n y e p i s c a e J n P r i R S tu irst ly, G ip the M as fu ld's f y, Ita r l n l d o e a e e 10 w c w h m a r T e l s e . h p a t G with 2003 gory istics we re ry of , cate ation 004, al log v a d 2 b o e u o l y n n n l g n in Ja In Ju Scree bles &D i ng IP uced t ena TP & y in R d a U r o t h r t s vergi t 6 u n n i d m o G e n s c t t i 0 s c 1 our u nd ur sy g of ols. prod on is ng a ad o n i i o i t t e t r l g e a t r e v n f r o e f r t o o e rt em supp nues n inn sive o it Eth uppo conti iemo ehen igab s r S s G p o f b t o a m 0 on L . nteed ble 1 mple ost co Siem esign uara vaila r exa he m g t a e er s h s y t l e l tch d m o d a a e n i i l t temb v c s A p r o y 5 e e r s 4 . S p r m d J e s n n t R fib com g. In iemo beyo oduc -pull stron XGLO and of pr et. S push d k d T y r y n n l r i a a E a a S d fam able US m ution GBA ielde The ins st revol g 10 n the a i A sh n a i R m g d ears. E e h n r t y T u i i l r emon c n y 7 w e n f n o i f o ma ns ord ed Si iem m c o z r S i i e t t o h , n f s a y c g t c y tr a reco e US ng s appli ndus tch p cabli ide th use a our i s n dePa t o n e a u t i l p o B s e hoic our o tems new ange and le to rs a c g Sys ny ch b e n a i a l m c m b tners o r t a n e s a o C h u t p c m n our With r US d Sie iemo rt lue to nd S es ou . adde a e v n v i e o o g uppo i t g t w s n u S , l d i d 4 U n o g n s e 0 n i 20 be a lling in the -end tion a to br entia able en se og to nd-to itted l r c e e e a m t b f n f n a i m s o o c ha his gy d is co Siem Siem staff find t n of hnolo ify a c o u n c i e t o t o e i y , p d m s n e ad r to hope catio he Si ally o d we ted, t d edu n e a l n a c b a , o a t l g c are ppor ainin r you ng su gh tr i e u ly, o v o g e r r n s th ncere ro i r u Whe e S o m y usto u for ser c nk yo a h t end-u We ces. servi on tool. . Siem ent l u N f l e r d us Ca Presi

REFERENCE GUIDE WEB RESOURCES

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Meets category 5e ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 & B.2 and class D requirements of ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition specifications. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 100 MHz. This classification is a superset of CATEGORY 5.

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS

Meets category 6 ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 and class E requirements of ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition specifications. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 250 MHz. This classification is a superset of CATEGORY 5e.

COPPER PATCH PANELS

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS

MapIT INTELLIGENT PATCHING

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM AND PROTECTION

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS

STANDARDS UPDATE

GLOSSARY

INDEX

PERFORMANCE MARKINGS Meets category 3 ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 & B.2 and class C requirements of ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition specifications. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 16 MHz.

Meets category 6 TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Draft* and ISO/IEC 11801 Edition 2 proposed amendment 1 draft requirements. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 500 MHz. This classification is a superset of CATEGORY 6. Performance exceeds draft category 7 and meets class F ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition specifications. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 600 MHz. This classification is an electrical superset of CATEGORY 6. *At the time of this catalog printing ANEXT test methods were under study.

SAFETY MARKINGS Communications Circuit Accessory Listed per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 1863 or Secondary Protectors for Communications Circuits Listed per Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 497A, or non-metallic surface raceway and fittings Listed per UL 5A. Certification by Underwriters Laboratories to United States Standards and C22.2 Canadian Telecommunications Standards. Certification by the Canadian Standards Association to C22.2 Canadian Telecommunications Standards. Electromagnetic Compatibility according to Article 10 of European Council Directive 89/336/EEC.

ORDERING INFORMATION FOCUS products are the most popular Siemon products and should always be readily available at your local Siemon distributor. FOCUS products are identified by the FOCUS symbol and are also distinguished with red text. If a FOCUS item is not available at your local distributor, please contact Siemon Customer Service for prompt resolution.

Bulk project packs are the most economical and environmentally friendly way to purchase products for large projects. Less packaging means fewer packages to open and less waste to clean up, which saves time and money. Bulk pack products are identified by the bulk pack symbol.

ISO 9001:2002 and 14001 Because we are continuously improving our products, Siemon reserves the right to change specifications and availability without prior notice. For other product options, please call Customer Service.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

GLOBAL SOLUTIONS

n business, information is everything. And with each passing day comes a new

technological advance, a better, faster, more robust IT application — an application that will help you leave the competition behind. But your IT success

comes with a price. With every advance comes an exponential rise in bandwidth and data integrity needs. The application that can carry your organization into the future exists, or soon will. But you must ask yourself — is my IT infrastructure ready? At its most basic and vital stage, an organization’s IT infrastructure depends wholly on its structured cabling system.

It is the physical link upon which everything else

depends. No longer just the foundation of your network, structured cabling is the foundation for business success. Today, at nearly any point on the globe, there is an increasing necessity for instantly accessible information. The expectation that data, voice and video be perpetually at our fingertips places enormous demand on an organization’s cabling system. Business, like technology, advances. Successful organizations routinely require 100, even 1000 times the bandwidth they did just 10 years ago. Bandwidth intensive internet-based applications like video or voice over IP, combined with forward-looking industry standards, drive speeds of 1Gb/s, 10Gb/s, and beyond. Now, more than ever before, the successful business must focus on the IT basics — an organization’s ability to distribute vital information across the globe is paramount to success, and that ability is only as good as the infrastructure that must bear the load. With over 100 years of advancements and manufacturing excellence, Siemon continues to globally offer our customers the finest IT infrastructure solutions available.

e design, develop, manufacture

and support the products that organizations need to build an IT

infrastructure capable of serving strategic business needs today and well into the future. A solid structured cabling system, designed to handle future applications and bandwidth demands, will ensure return on investment, both in the cabling itself, as well as those layers that rely upon it. To ensure that Siemon remains well ahead of the technological curve, the company participates extensively in the development of industry standards.

We do this to guarantee that the

standards are both aggressive and forwardlooking, so that our valued customers can confidently plan their IT futures.

Siemon has

earned this position of authority with a worldrenowned reputation for quality and advanced performance. It is one of the few manufacturers to hold both the environmental certificate of ISO 14001 and the ISO 9001:2000 certificate. In a critical world, Siemon remains its own most powerful critic. If over 100 years of manufacturing and service has taught us anything, it is that an organization can never rest in its pursuit of excellence.

We measure our processes against

stringent performance metrics such as on-time delivery, product quality, and forecast accuracy. We continually monitor and adjust these top criteria, all for the goal of measurable customer satisfaction, the world over. With offices and training facilities in every major market worldwide, Siemon is a true global company that will always deliver upon its promise to provide the best network cabling solutions on the market today. Rely on our experience. Allow Siemon to help you build the foundation for your business success.

GLOBAL NETWORK

With the right infrastructure, the right amount of bandwidth, the right Certified Installersâ&#x201E;˘, Consultant/Architect Program, Project Assistance Program and World Class Training...Imagine the possibilities.

Siemon offers a global service and support network. We have an array of support services developed to ensure that every Siemon Cabling SystemÂŽ sold anywhere in the world is designed and installed to exceed the highest quality and performance standards.

ur global network of certified installers are available worldwide. All of our

installers are:

• Highly trained on design, installation, and administration of The Siemon Cabling System® • Provide consistent high quality installations worldwide • Supported by a dedicated Siemon Company support team (Training Support Services) on registration, design, warranty, new product development, troubleshooting and project support • Provide customers with a cabling system that exceeds standard ANSI and ISO requirements.

A simplified Process: The Siemon Project Assistance team takes the lead to simplify your projects by: • Providing a single point of contact for referrals • Pre-qualifying contractors and maintaining a comprehensive global database • Utilizing our global resources to address international installation requirements • Ensuring the quality and standardization of your design and installation

By leveraging Siemon internal resources and the resources of our worldwide allies, Siemon’s Project Assistance Program provides a referral service so you can be assured of consistent quality installations and the best performing systems — anywhere in the world.

W O R L D ’ S L E A D I N G O R G A N I Z AT I O N S S P E C I F Y S I E M O N BANKING/INSURANCE ABN AMRO Holding American Express AMP Bank of China Bank of New York Bank One Beijing Financial Bureau Blue Cross Blue Shield BMP Paibas BMW Financial Services Cendanat Center Bank Charles Schwab Chubb Citi Group Commonwealth Bank Credit Suisse Czech National Bank Deloitte & Touche Deutsch Bank Discover Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette Ernst & Young First Boston Goldman Sachs HSBC ING Group JP Morgan Chase Lehman Brothers Mastercard International Merrill Lynch Morgan Stanley NASDAQ National Reserve Bank National Westminster Bank PacifiCorp Pricewaterhouse Coopers Progressive Insurance Tullet & Tokyo Forex Washington Mutual Zurich Financial Services EDUCATION Baylor College of Medicine Brigham Young University Boston College Camdon County College Dartmouth College Davidson College East Carolina University Emory University Georgetown University Harvard University Nevada State College Oxford University Princeton University Rice University Ramapo College Rowan University Salt Lake Community College Seattle University Texas Southern University Tulane University Thomas Jefferson Library University of Alabama at Birmingham University of Florida University of Madrid University of Mexico University of North Carolina/Charlotte University of Pennsylvania University of Technology Sydney University of Utah Utah Valley State College Washington and Lee University Washington University of St. Louis Western Kentucky University Westminster College (SLC, UT) Yale University GOVERNMENT BAE Systems Beijing Water Authority City of Westminster City of Wyoming

Civil Aviation Safety Authority Defense Threat Reduction Center FBI IRS Job Corps National Guard National Weather Center New South Wales Police Parliament House Australia Scottish Hydro Electric State of Connecticut United Nations U.S. Army USDA U.S. Department of Energy U.S. Federal Court System U.S. Coast Guard U.S. Marine Corps U.S. Navy U.S. Post Office Washington Visitor Center HEALTHCARE/PHARMACEUTICAL Abbot Laboratories Advance PCS Astra Zeneca Baylor Medical Center Children’s Hospital Philadelphia Clinic Leicester Royal Infirmary Conemaugh Valley Hospital Deaconess Medical Center DeKalb Medical Center Eli Lilly Gems Metropolitan Family Health Imperial Cancer Research Fund Johnson & Johnson Kaiser Permanente—Kaiser Koolau Mayo Clinic Merck National Institute of Health Novartis PaciCare Health Systems Princeton Medical Center Sacred Heart Medical Center Salisbury Health Authority Sanarfi/Aventis Tenant Healthcare Wilcox Memorial Hospital Yale–New Haven Hospital MANUFACTURING/INDUSTRIAL American Electric Power Archer Daniels Midland BASF Beijing National Wealth Plaza BMW Ciba Geigy Cincinnati Milacron CMS Energy Coca Cola Con Edison Conoco Phillips Daimler Chrysler Delphi Dow Chemical DuPont EDS Exxon Ford Motor Company General Electric General Motors Georgia Pacific Halliburton Hyundai Electronics LG Electronics Imation Ingersol Rand Johnson & Johnson Kuala Lumpur City Center Matsushita Merck Microsoft Midland Nestlé Olin

Petronas PeopleSoft Ray-O-Vac Raytheon Ricoh Robert Bosch Royal Dutch Shell Group Sara Lee Seagate Malaysia Sino Chemical Group Sony Southern State Power Sysco Toyota Motors Volkswagen XCEL Energy Xerox RETAIL Ace Hardware Advanced Autoparts Albertsons Amazon.com Best Buy Clopay Circuit City Coles Myer Federated Stores Fujitsu Hollywood Video J. Crew KMart Lowes News Corp Nieman Marcus Sears Sotheby’s Staples Target Toys “R” Us Walgreens Wal*Mart Woolworths TELECOMMUNICATIONS AOL/Time Warner AT&T Cellular One China Telecommunications Comcast Computer Sciences Corporation General DataComm HBO Hewlett Packard Honeywell IBM MCI Worldcom Mitel Motorola NEC NOKIA Nortel Networks Qwest Shanghai Telephone Institute Siemens Business Communications Sprint Telecom Italia Telestra Unisys U.S. West TRANSPORTATION Dallas International Airport Federal Aviation Administration Japan Tourist Bureau Long Island Railroad Malaysian Airlines Ministry of Railways Port Authority of New York Southwest Airlines Toronto Airport United Airlines UPS Air France Group Union Pacific

WEB RESOURCES Web Resources

System Overview

WEB RESOURCES

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

WEB.A

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SYSTEM OVERVIEW Web Resources

WHAT SYSTEM IS RIGHT FOR YOU? When designing a cabling infrastructure, a single factor (i.e. — initial cost) is often the deciding characteristic of the system selected. However, once all elements are considered, a design with higher initial cost may have a lower overall cost of ownership. It is important that designers are familiar with capabilities of different solutions available to make the best selection possible. Bandwidth is only one of many factors driving an organization’s decision to install a specific type of cabling — other important factors include its ability to provide a reliable and durable platform for information transfer; accommodate ongoing infrastructure changes; and support a wide array of telecommunications applications and copper equipment. Over the past several years, industry experts have predicted that twisted-pair would be replaced by fiber. Yet over time, its replacement by fiber for long haul public network connections has been more than offset by its use as the pre-eminent media for IP connections to end-point devices. Twisted-pair cabling owes its staying power to many factors, not least of which is the continuing collaboration between manufacturers that have continued to push performance, reliability and value of this media and associated network equipment to new heights. The fact is that both copper and fiber have specific advantages and provide unique solutions for today’s cabling infrastructure needs. Clearly, optical fiber has a bandwidth advantage, especially for public networks, backbone cabling and data centers. In these places, optical fiber is dominant and will continue to be so because of its ability to provide reach and throughput for applications that are increasingly bandwidth hungry at the core of the network. For IP connections, copper has been tracking with fiber in terms of throughput, and has been able to retain its cost advantage albeit with greater restrictions on length. Industry standards have locked-in an implementation model for copper that is widely accepted and applicable to the vast majority of installations. The 100-meter channel for horizontal cabling is an important anchor point in a rapidly evolving industry. It provides a solid foundation on which to build technological advancements for twisted-pair cabling and the equipment to which it connects. WILL YOUR NETWORK BE READY? Tomorrow’s networks will be a conglomeration of data services, voice services, building control and automation, security services, and new visual services for both voice and data, and other transmissions yet to be dreamed. How do you ensure that your network will be able to handle this explosion of information? At the heart of every network is the structured cabling system. The cabling infrastructure, so often overlooked when designing networks, provides the path on which data is transmitted. Ensuring that your cabling infrastructure is properly installed and maintained, and designing your cabling with sufficient bandwidth to run current and future applications, are the most fundamental means of creating a high-performance network. When planning your network, start with installing a high-quality high performance cabling system. It is the foundation for your business success.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

SECTION CONTENTS COPPER SYSTEMS TERA® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.2 10G 6™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.3 SYSTEM 6® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.4 PREMIUM 5e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.5 ®

FIBER SYSTEMS

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

XGLO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.6 LightSystem® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.7 Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

B.1

SYSTEM OVERVIEW Web Resources

System Overview

TERA®

ERA is Siemon’s fully shielded 10G ip™ solution exceeding ISO/IEC category 7/class F specifications. The TERA

connector system can support simultaneous, multiple applications including voice, high-speed LAN services and

broadband video — all via a single cable and outlet. TERA’s revolutionary compact design and 1-, 2-, and 4-pair modularity MapIT Intelligent Patching

enable easy administration of several applications in one 4-pair outlet, allowing significant cost savings in materials and labor. In addition to supporting 10 Gb/s, TERA provides twice the bandwidth of the category 7/class F specifications — 1.2GHz.

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

over each pair. It is the only non-RJ category 7/class F industry-standard connector recognized within ISO/IEC 11801 Ed. 2.0.

TERA OUTLET

(page 1.2, 1.3) T7F-01-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair TERA outlet

TERA VIDEO BALUN CORD

TERA PLUGS

TERA-MAX® PATCH PANELS, 1RMS

TERA PATCH CORDS

TM-PNL-16-01 . TM-PNL-16 . . . TM-PNL-24-01 . TM-PNL-24 . . .

(page 3.2) T7P4-B(XX)-1 . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair TERA plug (page 3.3) Cat 7, 4-pair, TERA-to-TERA Cat 7, 1-pair, TERA-to-TERA Cat 6, 4-pair, TERA-to-MC 6, T568B Cat 6, 4-pair, TERA-to-MC 6, T568A Cat 5e, 2-pair, TERA-to-MC 5, 10/100BASE-T T2UT-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . Cat 5e, 2-pair, TERA-to-MC 5, Token Ring T1U1-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . 1-pair TERA-to-6 position plug, Voice Use 1st (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.28 ft), 02 = 2m (6.56 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.84 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify boot color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green T4-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . T1-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . T4A-(XX)M-B(XX)L . T4T-(XX)M-B(XX)L . T2E2-(XX)M-B(XX)L

. . . . .

Index

B.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

(page 3.3) T1VC-(XX)M-B01L. . . . . . . 1-pair TERA-to-PAL connector . . . .

. . . .

16-port 16-port 24-port 24-port

panel, panel, panel, panel,

(page 2.3)

black metallic black metallic

MAX FACEPLATES

(page 1.13) MX-FP-S-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang, 1-port MX-FP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang, 2-port MX-FP-S-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang, 3-port MX-FP-S-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang, 4-port MX-FP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang, 6-port Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory

TERA CABLE For Siemon TERA cable ordering information visit www.siemon.com/go/cable.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW Web Resources

10G 6™

0G 6 is Siemon’s category 6 augmented 10G ip™ Solution and the world’s most advanced UTP and Screened cabling

system. 10GBASE-T is specifically engineered to handle the increasing performance demands of emerging and converging

applications such as voice over IP, IP video and building automation systems. 10G 6 provides superior channel performance to

Industrial Products

at least 500 MHz. It’s ability to support 10GBASE-T makes it ideal for delivering the most advanced IP-based applications to MapIT Intelligent Patching

the desktop.

10G 6 MAX® MODULES

(page 1.4, 1.5) 10GMX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Angled module, T568A/B 10GMX-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . Flat module, T568A/B 10GMX-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . Keystone module, T568A/B Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white

10G 6 BLADEPATCH™

(page 3.4, 3.5) 10GBP-(XX)-(XX). . . . . . . . 10G 6 RJ45 patch cord, T568A/B Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green

10G 6 MC® PATCH CORDS

(page 3.6) 10GMC-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . 10G 6 MC, double-ended, colormatching jacket/boot, T568A/B Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green

10G 6 PATCH PANELS

(page 2.4) 10GX-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-port panel, T568A/B, 1 RMS 10GX-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-port panel, T568A/B, 2 RMS

S210 Connecting Block System

S210® CONNECTING BLOCKS

S110 Connecting Block System

(page 9.2, 9.3)

S210AB2-64FT . . . . . . . .64-pair, S210 field termination kit S210AB2-128FT . . . . . . . 128-pair, S210 field termination kit S210AB2-192FT . . . . . . . 192-pair, S210 field termination kit

10G MAX FACEPLATES

(page 1.12) 10GMX-FP-S-02-(XX). . . . . Single gang, 2-port 10GMX-FP-S-04-(XX). . . . . Single gang, 4-port 10GMX-FP-D-06-(XX) . . . . Double gang, 6-port 10GMX-FP-D-08-(XX) . . . . Double gang, 8-port Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory

10G 6 CABLE

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

For Siemon 10G 6 cable and qualified cable ally part numbers visit www.siemon.com/go/cableally. Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

B.3

SYSTEM OVERVIEW Web Resources

System Overview

SYSTEM 6®

ystem 6 represents exceptional value, with margin on all parameters beyond category 6 and Power Sum ACR out to 250 MHz. From the telecommunications room to the work area, all Siemon System 6 products exceed connecting hardware and

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

channel performance specifications set forth for category 6 by the TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC.

MAX® 6 MODULES

(page 1.5) MX6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled module, T568A/B MX6-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Flat module, T568A/B MX6-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Keystone module, T568A/B

S110 Connecting Block System

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

MC® 6 MODULAR PATCH CORDS

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

(page 3.7) MC6-8-T-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . MC 6, double-ended, color-matching jacket/boot, T568A/B Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green MC6-8T-(XX)-B01IP . . . . . .MC 6 VoIP, double ended, white cord, black boot, T568A/B Use (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.)

HD® 6 PATCH PANELS HD6-16 . HD6-24 . HD6-32 . HD6-48 . HD6-96 .

. . . . .

16-port 24-port 32-port 48-port 96-port

(page 2.5) panel, T568A/B, 1 panel, T568A/B, 1 panel, T568A/B, 2 panel, T568A/B, 2 panel, T568A/B, 4

RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS

S210® CONNECTING BLOCKS

(page 9.3) S210AB2-64FT . . . . 64-pair, S210 field termination kit S210AB2-128FT . . . 128-pair, S210 field termination kit S210AB2-192FT . . . 192-pair, S210 field termination kit

MAX FACEPLATES

(page 1.13) MX-FP-S-01-(XX). . . . Single gang, 1-port MX-FP-S-02-(XX). . . . Single gang, 2-port MX-FP-S-03-(XX). . . . Single gang, 3-port MX-FP-S-04-(XX). . . . Single gang, 4-port MX-FP-S-06-(XX). . . . Single gang, 6-port Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory

SYSTEM 6 CABLE For Siemon System 6 cable and qualified cable ally part numbers visit www.siemon.com/go/cableally.

Index

B.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SYSTEM OVERVIEW Web Resources

PREMIUM 5e®

remium 5e cabling solution is guaranteed to provide transmission performance margins in excess of industry standards

Industrial Products

for category 5e parameters, and has been independently verified to perform to 160 MHz, making it ideal for supporting

Gigabit Ethernet applications.

MapIT Intelligent Patching

MAX® 5e MODULES

(page 1.6) MX5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled module, T568A/B MX5-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Flat module, T568A/B MX5-K(XX). . . . . . . . . . . Keystone module, T568A/B

S110® WIRING BLOCKS

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white

66 WIRING BLOCKS

MC® 5 MODULAR PATCH CORDS

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

PREMIUM 5e CABLE

Standards Update

(page 9.3) S210A(X)2-50FT . . . 50-pair, S110 field termination kit S210A(X)2-100FT . . 100-pair, S110 field termination kit S210A(X)2-300FT . . 300-pair, S110 field termination kit

(page 3.10) MC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)C . . . . . MC 5, double-ended, color-matching jacket/boot, T568A/B Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green

HD5® PATCH PANELS HD5-16 HD5-24 HD5-32 HD5-48 HD5-96

. . . . .

(page 2.6) 16-port panel, T568A/B, 24-port panel, T568A/B, 32-port panel, T568A/B, 48-port panel, T568A/B, 96-port panel, T568A/B,

1 1 2 2 4

RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

(page 11.2, 11.3) S66-M1-50 . . . . . . 50-pair, S66 connecting block

MAX FACEPLATES

For Siemon Premium 5e cable and qualified cable ally part numbers visit www.siemon.com/go/cableally.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

B.5

SYSTEM OVERVIEW Web Resources

System Overview

XGLO™

art of Siemon’s 10G ip™ solution, the XGLO fiber system is ideal for next generation backbone or fiber-to-the-desk

Industrial Products

applications. XGLO cable assemblies feature premium fiber meeting IEEE 802.3 10 Gigabit Ethernet Standard as well

as IEC-60793-2-10 and TIA-492AAAC specifications for laser bandwidth Differential Mode Delay (DMD) specifications. XGLO utilizes laser-optimized fiber for superior transmission performance for 1G or 10G Ethernet applications.

MapIT Intelligent Patching

RACK MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (RIC) S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

(page 4.2, 4.3) RIC3-24-01. . . . . RIC3-36-01. . . . . RIC3-48-01. . . . . RIC3-72-01. . . . .

. . . .

24364872-

to to to to

96-port, 2 RMS, black 144-port, 2 RMS, black 192-port, 3 RMS, black 288-port, 4 RMS, black

LC QUICK-PACK™ ADAPTER PLATES

(page 4.6) RIC-F-LC12-01 . . . . . . . . . 6 duplex LC adapters (12 fibers), beige adapters RIC-F-LC16-01 . . . . . . . . . 4 quad LC adapters (16 fibers), beige adapters RIC-F-LC24-01 . . . . . . . . . 6 Quad LC adapters (24 fibers), beige adapters RIC-F-LCU12-01 . . . . . . . . 6 duplex LC adapters (12 fibers), blue adapters RIC-F-LCU16-01 . . . . . . . . 8 duplex LC adapters (16 fibers), blue adapters RIC-F-LCU24-01 . . . . . . . . 12 duplex LC adapters (24 fibers), blue adapters

LC JUMPERS & PIGTAILS

Glossary

Index

B.6

(page 5.2, 5.3) XGLO 50/125µm MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS FJ2-LCLC5L-(XX)AQ. . . . . . LC to LC aqua duplex jumper Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

XGLO 50/125µm MULTIMODE SIMPLEX BUFFERED PIGTAILS FP1B-LC5L-01AQ . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, aqua, 1m (3.3 ft.) XGLO SINGLEMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS FJ2-LCULCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . LC to LC yellow duplex jumper Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.) XGLO SINGLEMODE SIMPLEX BUFFERED PIGTAILS FP1B-LCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, 1m (3.3 ft.)

LC CONNECTORS

(page 5.6) FC1-LC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . LC Simplex connector, multimode, buffered fiber, beige boot FC1-LC-SM-B02 . . . . . . . . LC Simplex connector, singlemode, buffered fiber, white boot XGLO SC system also available. Contact our Technical Support Department for more information.

XGLO FIBER CABLE For Siemon XGLO fiber cable and qualified cable ally part numbers visit www.siemon.com/go/cableally.

SYSTEM OVERVIEW Web Resources

LIGHTSYSTEM®

ightSystem is ideal for companies that do not yet require a 10 gigabit system, yet need a high-performance system that can

Industrial Products

support Gigabit Ethernet applications. Assemblies are available in standard lengths of 1, 2, 3, and 5 meters. All jumpers

are manufactured using the finest quality connectors and OFNR riser grade fiber. The Rack Mount Interconnect Center provides high-density fiber protection, management and distribution. All products forming Siemon’s LightSystem cabling system are

MapIT Intelligent Patching

designed for ease of installation, optimum reliability, maximum bandwidth and proven transmission distance.

RACK MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (RIC) (page 4.2, 4.3) RIC3-24-01. . . . . RIC3-36-01. . . . . RIC3-48-01. . . . . RIC3-72-01. . . . .

. . . .

24364872-

to to to to

96-port, 2 RMS, black 144-port, 2 RMS, black 192-port, 3 RMS, black 288-port, 4 RMS, black

SC QUICK-PACK™ ADAPTER PLATES

(page 4.6) RIC-F-SC6-01 . . . . . . . . . 3 duplex SC adapters (6 fibers) RIC-F-SC8-01 . . . . . . . . . 4 duplex SC adapters (8 fibers) RIC-F-SC12-01. . . . . . . . . 6 duplex SC adapters (12 fibers)

SC JUMPERS & PIGTAILS

(page 5.4, 5.5)

MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS FJ2-SCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . SC to SC orange duplex jumper MULTIMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS (BUFFERED, 900 MICRON) FP1B-SC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, orange, 1m (3.3 ft.) SINGLEMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS FJ2-SCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . SC to SC yellow duplex jumper

SINGLEMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS (BUFFERED, 900 MICRON) FP1B-SCU-01 . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, yellow, 1m (3.3 ft.) Use (X) to specify multimode fiber type: “—” = 62.5/125µm fiber (orange), 6 = 62.5/125µm fiber (gray), 5 = 50/125µm fiber (orange) Use (XX) to specify cable length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

SC CONNECTORS

(page 5.7) FC2-SC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . Duplex multimode, buffered fiber, two beige boots FC2-SC-SM-B02. . . . . . . . Duplex singlemode, buffered fiber, two white boots SC adapters are “universal” to support multimode and singlemode. LightSystem LC, ST and MT-RJ systems also available. Contact our Technical Support Department for more information. Cost effective Fiber Connect Panel and ValuLight Jumpers also available. See pages 4.8 and 5.5 for more information.

LIGHTSYSTEM FIBER CABLE

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

For Siemon LightSystem fiber cable and qualified cable ally part numbers visit www.siemon.com/go/cableally. Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

B.7

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

TERA®

MAX® SERIES

CT® SERIES

SM® SERIES

(pages1.2 – 1.3)

(pages 1.4 – 1.11)

(pages 1.16 – 1.21)

(pages 1.32 – 1.33)

Product Broadband Video, Applications Date, Voice

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Connectors

Media Types S/FTP (fully shielded)

Termination Non-Impact Types

Mounting Flush, Surface, Options Rack

S210 Connecting Block System

Capacity Single Gang: 1-6 (Ports) Double Gang: 1-12

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Options

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Colors

Ideal for surface mount work area applications where outlet boxes are not practical. Supports a variety of copper, fiber, and coax outlets.

MAX Modules

CT Couplers

MX-SM Bezels, Flat MAX Modules

F/UTP (screened), Coax, Fiber, Video

UTP, Coax, Fiber, Video

S310, Tool-less, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-TYPE, RCA, SVHS, HD15

S110, S310, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-Type, RCA, SVHS

S110, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-Type, RCA

Wall, Surface

Surface

Single Gang: 1-6 Ports Double Gang: 1-12 Ports

Single Gang: 1-4 Ports Double Gang: 1-8 Ports (with dual CT Couplers)

1-6 Ports

Stand-off Rings, Surface Mounting Boxes, Service Fitting Plates, Hinged Doors

Magnets, Shutter Door

All products not available in all colors.

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.0

CT Couplers provide a robust solution for medium density work area requirements. Flat couplers can also be mounted in CT patch panels.

Category

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Compact design allows modules to be side-stacked in faceplates for maximum density. Ideal solution for any combination of copper, fiber, or coax outlets. Flat MAX modules can also be used in MAX patch panels.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS TERA® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 – 1.3 TERA 4-Pair Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 10G 6™ MAX® Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 – 1.5 MAX 6 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 MAX 5e Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 MAX 3 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 Tool-Less MAX Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 – 1.8 Tool-Less MAX 3 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MAX Fiber Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MAX Outlet Blanks and Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 Coax MAX Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 MAX Audio/Video Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 Screened 10G 6 MAX Modules . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 – 1.11 Screened MAX 5e Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 MAX Modular Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12 – 1.13 10G MAX Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12 Tamper-Proof MAX Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 Stainless Steel MAX Faceplate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MAX Duplex and Designer® Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MAX Modular Mounting Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 Wall Phone Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MAX Service Fitting Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15 MAX Modular Furniture Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15 CT® 6 Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16 – 1.17 Angled CT 6 Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 Flat CT 6 Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 CT 5e Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18 – 1.19 Flat CT 3 Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 Fiber Adapter CT Coupler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 Coax CT Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 Video and Other CT Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22 – 1.23 Stainless Steel CT Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 Modular Furniture Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 CT Service Fitting Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 CT Modular Furniture Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 MAX Surface Mounting Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 Stand-off Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 Sheetrock Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 MAX British Faceplates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 MAX Australian/Italian Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 MAX International Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 British CT Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 British Surface Mount Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 International CT Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CT International Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 Multi-User Telecommunications Outlet Assembly (MUTOA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28 – 1.29 MAX MUTOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29 CT MUTOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29 Fiber Outlet Box (FOB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30 – 1.31 Fiber Bezels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 MX-SM® Surface Mount Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32 – 1.33 MX-SM Bezels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33 Modular Y-Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 Modular 4-Way Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 6-Port SP5 Surface Pack Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 Harmonicas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 Modular RS232 Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

SIEMON-USA

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

For nearly a third of Watertown’s 300-year history, the residents of this town at the edge of Connecticut’s picturesque Litchfield Hills have

Industrial Products

shared their home with the Siemon Company. Through over 100 years of quality, service, innovation and value, Siemon has grown from the artificial staghorn knife handles of the early years to 30A connecting blocks in the 1920s, to 66 blocks in the 1960s, to the new century’s most innovative cabling products. Holding over 400 patents, Siemon is no stranger to firsts. From the first full-compliant 5e cabling system (4 years before standards ratification), to the first Cat 6/Class E and Cat 7/Class F cabling systems Siemon has continually led the industry, raising every expectation along the way. That longstanding drive towards innovation has been irreversibly tied to the desire to share the lessons learned and expertise forged. In that spirit, Siemon developed the industry’s most comprehensive training program, equipping a wide support network of Certified Installers and consultants.

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Siemon Network Cabling Solutions, The Foundation for Your Business Success

W W W

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

1.1

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

TERA ®

nvented in 1999, long before its time and subsequently chosen as an industry standard interface for category 7/class F, the Siemon TERA is by far the highest performing twisted--pair copper connector in the world. When installed as part of a TERA solution, each pair delivers almost 1.2 GHz per pair — twice the bandwidth of category 7/class F specifications. This extra bandwidth is critical for demanding applications like broadband video, with an upper frequency requirement of 862 MHz. Broadband video, high speed data and voice applications can be supported using a single 4-pair fully shielded (S/FTP) cable. TERA patch cords come in 1-, 2-, and 4-pair options to support multiple applications in one 4-pair outlet. TERA outlets can be used in both the work area and in the telecommunications room.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

available via colored boots 2

S210 Connecting Block System

Plug Identification — Plug-port identification

Hinged Door — Outlets include a hinged door to prevent exposure to dust and other contaminates

Fully Shielded — Terminates category 7/Class F fully shielded (S/FTP) cable — virtually eliminates alien crosstalk

Shielded Termination — Connector assures proper termination of cable shield — no additional crimping or processes required for grounding cable

Compact Design — Slim, compact design allows outlets to be side-stacked and inserted from either the front or rear of faceplates

Quadrant Isolation — Shielded quadrant design

Standard Compliant Interface — TERA’s ability to

fully isolates pairs for optimum NEXT performance share one 4-pair cable and outlet to support multiple applications can save significant material and installation costs (see diagram next page)

Easy Installation

Mounting Options

TERA Patch Cords

CPT-T tool reduces preparation and termination time to less than three minutes.

Outlets are compatible with all MAX series mounting hardware.

TERA patch cords are available in 1-, 2- and 4-pair options to support multiple voice, video and data applications over a single cable/outlet.

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

TERA 4-PAIR OUTLET ®

TERA outlets are the industry’s highest performing network cabling connectors. Outlets accept 1-, 2- and 4-pair plugs and terminate fully shielded category 7/class F cables. TERA outlets can be used in both the work area and in the telecommunications room.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Part #

Description

Copper Patch Panels

T7F-01-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . TERA 4-pair outlet with black door, icon and boot

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

TERA Patch Cords pages 3.2 – 3.3, TERA Patch Panels pages 2.2 – 2.3, MAX Faceplates pages 1.12 – 1.15

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

TERA® CABLE SHARING

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Up to four simultaneous applications can be served from a single 4-pair, S/FTP cable and TERA outlet saving significant materials, labor and space. (Broadband video, voice and high speed data shown).

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

ISO 2-PAIR GIGABIT APPLICATION FOR CATEGORY 7/CLASS F CABLING The eagerly anticipated ISO/IEC 14165-114 standard, which defines a 1 Gigabit per second application using a 2-pair transmission scheme over category 7/class F cabling, has been approved for publication. This new standard specifies one pair to transmit and one pair to receive and is intended for operation over 100 meter, 4-connector category 7/class F cabling topologies. With the publication of this application standard, Siemon’s TERA solution becomes the world’s first and only cabling system capable of supporting two simultaneous Gigabit per second data applications over one 4-pair channel!

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

1.3

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

10G 6 ™ MAX ® MODULES

art of Siemon’s 10G ip™ Cabling Solution, 10G 6 MAX modules exceed all category 6 component requirements, and also provides channel performance to 500 MHz for support of the future 10GBASE-T application. This superior level of performance is achieved via an enhanced circuit board design, optimization of jack pin geometry, and stringent inspection and quality control procedures. The end result is the best performing UTP outlet available.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

" 500 MHz Supports 10GBASE-T Application

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

4 6

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching 1

S210 Connecting Block System

Easy Installation — Install from either front or rear of

Backward Compatible — With category 6/class E

Universal Wiring — T568A and T568B wiring

faceplate 2

and lower patch cords

Easy Termination — Terminates with standard 110 termination tools

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

compatible

Quick Identification — Icons provided for port identification

Protective Doors — (not shown) Minimize exposure to dust and other contaminants

Revolutionary PCB Tuning

Quick Installation

Circuit board is tuned and balanced using our patent-pending Phase-Delay™ technology to maximize performance to 500 MHz.

Pyramid wire entry system on S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time.

Superior Performance

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

For superior performance use 10G 6 modular cords to unlock the performance of 10G 6 MAX modules.

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

10G 6 MAX MODULES ™

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

10GMX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Angled module, T568A/B, rear strain relief cap and protective color-matching rubber door

10GMX-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . Flat module, T568A/B, and rear strain relief cap

10GMX-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . Keystone module, T568A/B, and rear strain relief cap

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

10G 6 Patch Panels page 2.4, TERA®-MAX® Patch Panels pages 2.2 – 2.3, 10G 6 BladePatch™ and MC® Patch Cords pages 3.5 – 3.6, 10G™ MAX Faceplates page 1.12

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

MAX 6 MODULES

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

MX6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled module, T568A/B, rear strain relief cap and protective color-matching rubber door

MX6-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Flat module, T568A/B, and rear strain relief cap

MX6-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Keystone module, T568A/B, and rear strain relief cap

S210 Connecting Block System

HD® 6 Patch Panels page 2.5, MAX Patch Panels pages 2.8 – 2.9, MC 6 Patch Cords page 3.7, MAX Faceplates pages 1.13 – 1.15

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

ORDERING INFORMATION FOR 10G 6 MAX AND MAX 6 MODULES Angled Modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon. Door color is clear for red, yellow, blue and orange angled modules. Flat Modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon. Add “-D” for optional color-matching door. Door color is white for red, yellow, blue and orange modules. Keystone version is designed for integration with various international mounting products and is not compatible with MAX mounting hardware.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white*, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory*, 82 = alpine white Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 modules (angled and flat modules include icons). *10G 6 MAX and MAX 6 modules available as FOCUS items.

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

1.5

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

MAX® 5e MODULES

Punch-down MAX 5e modules significantly exceed category 5e performance with component and channel performance to 160 MHz*. These modules offer all the functional advantages of our 10G and MAX 6 outlets (see pages 1.4 – 1.5) and feature our S310® punch-down block — making termination quick and easy.

160 MHz

Featuring universal T568A/B wiring with component and channel performance to 160 MHz.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

MX5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled module, T568A/B, rear strain relief cap and protective color-matching rubber door

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

MX5-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Keystone module, T568A/B, and rear strain relief cap

Angled Modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon. Door color is clear for red, yellow, blue and orange angled modules. 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Flat Modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon. Add “-D” for optional color-matching door. Door color is white for red, yellow, blue and orange modules. Keystone version is designed for integration with various international mounting products and is not compatible with MAX mounting hardware. Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white *Performance from 100 – 160 MHz based upon extrapolated TIA/EIA limits. Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 modules (angled and flat modules include icons).

1.6

MAX 3 MODULES MAX 3 modules provide a cost-effective solution for category 3 applications. These modules utilize our user-friendly S310 termination block, providing the flexibility to wire these jacks for a wide variety of voice and data configurations. MX3-F-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . Flat module with rear strain relief cap

MX3-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . Angled module with rear strain relief cap and protective color-matching rubber door

Glossary

Index

HD5® Patch Panels page 2.6, MAX Patch Panels pages 2.8 – 2.9, MC® 5 Patch Cords page 3.10, MAX Faceplates pages 1.13 – 1.15

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

MX5-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Flat module, T568A/B, and rear strain relief cap

Use 1st (XX) to specify jack option: U3 = 3-pair, 6-position jack USOC; U4 = 4-pair, 8-position jack, USOC Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory Modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS

TOOL-LESS MAX

Web Resources

MODULES

he tool-less MAX module provides category 5e system performance and user-friendly installation features. Our tool-less termination allows all eight conductors to be terminated simultaneously when the termination cap is pressed into place. The compact size provides high-density connectivity in the work area and telecommunications room. 1

Easy Termination — No termination tools

Quick Identification — Icon tabs

required

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

available in 13 colors for color-coding 3

High-density Solutions — Slim design allows outlet to be side-stackable

Proven Performance — Patented multiplanar pair balancing technology provides category 5e system performance

System Overview

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

2 4

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Easy Installation — Flexible mounting tab allows installation from front or rear of faceplate and secures module into the faceplate

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Press-fit Termination

Quick Pair Placement

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Verify Proper Wiring Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Mass terminate all eight conductors by hand or use a single-position S110® termination tool in the MAX termination cap.

Conductors can be sequentially placed into termination cap, minimizing cable pair untwist and simplifying termination.

The termination cap has a large window for viewing terminations.

TOOL-LESS MAX MODULES MX-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . Angled module, T568A/B

MX-F-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . Flat module, T568A/B

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white Add “-D” for optional door for angled and flat versions. Door color is white for red, yellow, blue, and orange flat modules; clear for angled. Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 modules. Flat and Keystone modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon.

t pa

ibl

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

MX-K-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Keystone module, T568A/B Keystone version is designed for integration with various international mounting products and is not compatible with MAX mounting hardware.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

MAX Patch Panels pages 2.8 – 2.9, MAX Faceplates pages 1.13 – 1.15

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

1.7

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

TOOL-LESS MAX® 3 MODULES MAX modules provide a full range of voice and specific data wiring configurations.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

MX-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Angled module

MX-F-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Flat module

Use 1st (XX) to specify jack: U3 = 3-pair, 6-position jack, USOC; U4 = 4-pair, 8-position jack, USOC Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory Modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MAX FIBER ADAPTER MODULES Siemon MAX fiber adapter modules are compatible with all MAX series faceplates, modular furniture adapters, surface mount boxes and patch panels. All fiber adapters are “universal” to support either multimode or singlemode fiber connections. MX-F-SA-(XX)* . . . . Flat module with 1 simplex ST adapter (1 fiber)

MX-SA-(XX) . . . . . . Angled module with 1 simplex ST adapter (1 fiber)

MX-MT-(XX) . . . . . . Angled module with 1 duplex MT-RJ adapter (2 fibers)

MX-F-S2-(XX) . . . . . Flat module with 1 duplex ST adapter (2 fibers)

MX-S2-(XX) . . . . . . Angled module with 1 duplex ST adapter (2 fibers)

MX-F-MT-(XX)* . . . . Flat module with 1 duplex MT-RJ adapter (2 fibers)

MX-F-SC-(XX) . . . . . Flat module with 1 duplex SC adapter (2 fibers)

MX-SC-(XX) . . . . . . Angled module with 1 duplex SC adapter (2 fibers)

MX-F1-LC(X)-(XX). . . Flat module with 1 duplex LC adapter (2 fibers)

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Use (X) to specify LC adapter color: blank = beige, U = blue Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory Modules include dust caps, one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon per port. *Compatible with SM® boxes.

MAX OUTLET BLANKS AND DOORS Blank inserts for unused ports and future growth and doors to protect outlets from outside contaminants.

Standards Update

MX-BL-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Blank module, bag of 10

MX-FD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Door assembly for flat 6- or 8-position MAX modules, bag of 20

Glossary

Index

1.8

MX-AD-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Door assembly for angled 6- or 8-position MAX modules, bag of 20

Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear (MX-AD-XX only), 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white*, 80 = light ivory *Angled doors not available in bright white. Recommend using clear or white if required.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

COAX MAX MODULES ®

For terminating coaxial cables at the work area or telecommunications room, Siemon’s coax MAX modules are available with both BNC and F-type adapters. The F-type is available in both flat and angled while the BNC is available in flat only. They each include a space for using color coded icons to identify type of service.

System Overview

MX-FA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Angled module with 1 F-type adapter, 75 ohms, 2 GHz

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

MX-F-FA-(XX)* . . . . . . . . Flat module with 1 F-type adapter, 75 ohms, 2 GHz

MX-F-BA-(XX)* . . . . . . . . Flat module with 1 BNC adapter, 75 ohms

Copper Patch Panels

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory Modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon. *Compatible with SM® boxes.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

EZ-Twist page 3.12

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

MAX AUDIO/VIDEO MODULES Siemon audio/video MAX modules provide connectivity for a wide range of applications. Available media types include RCA, SVHS and HD15. MX-F-RC-(XX)* . . . . . . . . . Flat module with 1 RCA connector with solder tail

MX-RC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Angled module with 1 RCA connector with solder tail

MX-F-VH-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . MAX series SVHS connector, S110® punch-down style (uses 2-port space in MAX mounting hardware)

MX-D4F-15-(XX) . . . . . . . . 4-port MAX mounting frame with HD15 female-female adapter installed MX-D4F-15E-(XX) . . . . . . . 4-port MAX mounting frame, HD15 cut-out, empty Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory RCA Modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon. *Compatible with SM boxes.

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

ACCESSORIES Part #

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Description

CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 25 colored icon tabs (phone on one side, computer on reverse) TAB-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 colored blank tabs for couplers CT-ICON-LBL* . . . . . . . . . 10 label sheets for clear tabs that will fit any standard 8.5 x 11 printer, 168 labels per sheet TW-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102mm (4 in.) cable tie, bag of 1000

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Laser-printed customized tabs now available.

Standards Update

Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear (TAB-XX only), 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green, 08 = violet, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 60 = brown, 80 = light ivory Add “B” for bulk pack of 100 icons or tabs. *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software. 00

Glossary

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Index

1.9

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

SCREENED 10G 6 ™ MAX ® MODULES

he screened MAX module is the cornerstone of our high performance screened cabling systems. This product not only meets all TIA/EIA and IEC 60603-7-5 (draft specifications) component requirements, but also exceeds ISO/IEC 11801 2nd edition and EN50173 2nd edition requirements for transfer impedance and shield effectiveness.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

" 500 MHz Supports 10GBASE-T Application

1 2

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

4 Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

7 MapIT Intelligent Patching 1

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Fully Screened — Design optimizes shield

effectiveness protection from EMI and alien crosstalk 2

Easy Termination — Tool-less termination makes termination quick and easy

Easy Identification — Colored icons provided for

port identification

Universal Compatibility — Compatible with both T568A/B schemes

Variety — Angled, flat and keystone outlets available

Rear Shield Protection — Robust rear shield

Integrated Grounding — No separate grounding tabs required

protects IDC terminations and maintains shield effectiveness

TERA-MAX Patch Panel

Faceplates

Screened 10G 6 MC® Cords

Screened MAX modules are compatible with 10G™ MAX faceplates.

Use with screened 10G 6 MC Cords (see pages 3.8 – 3.9) for a complete screened channel solution.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.10

Use flat MAX screened modules in TERA®-MAX patch panel (see pages 2.2 – 2.3) for telecommunications room applications.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

SCREENED 10G 6 MAX MODULES ™

Beyond pure performance, the screened MAX module is packed with time saving features. Our innovative tool-less design allows all 4 pairs to be mass terminated with a pair of channel locks. Use our patented cable preparation tool (CPT-RGTP) and the end result is an outlet that can be terminated quickly and easily while maintaining a full shielded connection for better Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) performance. Outlets terminate all shielded and foiled cable constructions 22 – 24 AWG 0.65mm (0.025 in.) size conductors.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Description

10GMX-FS . . . . . . . . . . . Flat screened 10G 6 MAX module, T568A/B 10GMX-S . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled screened 10G 6 MAX module, T568A/B 10GMX-KS . . . . . . . . . . . Keystone screened 10G 6 MAX module, T568A/B

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Technical Tip! Screened MAX modules are not side-stackable in standard MAX faceplates. 10G MAX faceplates are recommended (see page 1.12).

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Modules include one red and one blue icon. Note: Keystone version is designed for integration with various international mounting products and is not compatible with MAX mounting hardware. Doors available separately, see page 1.8.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool page 12.10, TERA®-MAX Patch Panels pages 2.2 – 2.3, Industrial Products

10G™ MAX Faceplates page 1.12

SCREENED MAX® 5e MODULES

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Screened MAX 5e modules shatter category 5e performance specifications with 160 MHz of bandwidth while meeting industry standards for shield effectiveness. Modules can terminate any screened or fully shielded cable. Termination is quick and easy — both cable preparation and module termination can be completed in less than 2 minutes.

S210 Connecting Block System

Part #

S110 Connecting Block System

Description

MX5-FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flat screened MAX 5e module, T568A/B MX5-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled screened MAX 5e module, T568A/B MX5-KS . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keystone screened MAX 5e module, T568A/B

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Technical Tip! Screened MAX modules are not side-stackable in standard MAX faceplates. 10G MAX faceplates are recommended (see page 1.12).

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool page 12.10, TERA-MAX Patch Panels pages 2.2 – 2.3, 10G MAX Faceplates page 1.12

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

1.11

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

MAX ® MODULAR FACEPLATES

he MAX modular faceplates combine high capacity with aesthetics providing a fresh look to match today’s technologies. The faceplates are designed to be used with angled or flat MAX modules. Its durable finish masks minor scuffs that may occur during daily usage. 1

Quick Identification — Slide-in color-coded icons allow users to instantly identify different types of devices or applications

Variety — Faceplates available in black, white, bright

white, gray, ivory, light ivory, and stainless steel 3

Multimedia — Complete multimedia support

Density Options — Single and double gang

Labels — Sheets of designation labels can be ordered

faceplates available

for use with printers

Installation Flexibility

Superior Density

Labeling

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Flexible mounting tab on MAX modules allows installation from front or rear of faceplate.

Fits up to 6 outlets in a single gang or 12 in a double gang faceplate. Modular Furniture Brackets page 1.24, MAX Modules pages 1.4 – 1.9

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

10G™ MAX FACEPLATES Siemon’s 10G MAX faceplates are designed to provide optimal outlet separation to reduce alien crosstalk (ANEXT) between 10G 6™ MAX modules. They are also ideal for use with Siemon’s screened MAX modules. 10GMX-FPS02-(XX) Single gang 10G faceplate for two 10G 6 or screened MAX modules

10GMX-FPS04-(XX) Single gang 10G faceplate for four 10G 6 or screened MAX modules

10GMX-FPD06-(XX) Double gang 10G faceplate for six 10G 6 or screened MAX modules

10GMX-FPD08-(XX) Double gang 10G faceplate for eight 10G 6 or screened MAX modules

Index

1.12

Faceplates include pressure-release designation label covers for quick, tool-less removal.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black,* 02 = white, 04 = gray,* 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory Faceplates include designation labels, clear label covers, and mounting screws. Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 faceplates.* *Black and gray color options and bulk project packs available for single gang faceplates only.

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

MAX MODULAR FACEPLATES ®

MX-FP-S-04-(XX) . . . . . . . Single gang faceplate for four MAX modules

MX-FP-S-01-(XX) . . . . . . . Single gang faceplate for one MAX module

MX-FP-D-06-(XX). . . . . . . Double gang faceplate for six MAX modules

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

MX-FP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . Single gang faceplate for two MAX modules

MX-FP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . Single gang faceplate for six MAX modules

MX-FP-S-03-(XX) . . . . . . . Single gang faceplate for three MAX modules

MX-FP-D-08-(XX). . . . . . . Double gang faceplate for eight MAX modules

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

MX-FP-D-12-(XX). . . . . . . Double gang faceplate for twelve MAX modules

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

TAMPER-PROOF MAX FACEPLATE

Industrial Products

Siemon’s tamper-proof MAX faceplates provide a secure, low profile solution for mounting our complete line of MAX modules. The design features a one-piece base which accepts up to six angled MAX modules and is secured by a solid cover and a choice of tamper-proof star or standard slotted head screw. The base mounts to any single gang outlet (including Siemon’s fiber outlet box see page 1.28). Part #

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Description

S210 Connecting Block System

MX-TFP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . Single gang, tamper-proof faceplate for six angled MAX modules Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory

S110 Connecting Block System

STAINLESS STEEL MAX FACEPLATES Single and double gang stainless steel MAX faceplates for use with flat and angled MAX modules. Brushed finish on plates mask minor scratches and scuffs that may occur during day-to-day usage.

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

MX-FP-S-(XX)-SS-L . . . . . . . Single gang stainless steel faceplate with labels and label holder MX-FP-S-(XX)-SS . . . . . . . . Single gang stainless steel faceplate Use (XX) to specify number of ports: 01 = 1-port, 02 = 2-port, 03 = 3-port, 04 = 4-port, 06 = 6-port Faceplates include mounting screws.

MX-FP-D-(XX)-SS-L . . . . . . . Double gang stainless steel faceplate with labels and label holder MX-FP-D-(XX)-SS . . . . . . . . Double gang stainless steel faceplate Use (XX) to specify number of ports: 06 = 6-port, 08 = 8-port, 12 = 12-port Faceplates include mounting screws.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Glossary

Index

1.13

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

MAX® DUPLEX AND DESIGNER® FACEPLATES The MAX Duplex and Designer faceplates are designed for use with Siemon’s MAX series mounting frames. They are ideal for today’s small office, home office, or residential environment. Faceplates include designation labels and color-matching label covers for circuit identification.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

DP-S-(XX). . . . . . . Single gang, plastic Duplex faceplate

DR-S-(XX). . . . . . . Single gang, plastic Designer faceplate

DRE-D-(XX). . . . . . Double gang Designer/Duplex faceplate

DR-D-(XX) . . . . . . Double gang Designer faceplate MAX Modules pages 1.4 – 1.9

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

MAX MODULAR MOUNTING FRAMES Siemon’s MAX mounting frames provide a solution for installing MAX modules in an environment where electrical Duplex or Designer style faceplates are desired. They are compatible with any Duplex or Designer style faceplate. The frames have recently been enhanced with mounting ears to keep frames flush. The ears can also be detached and used as spacers between the frames and mounting boxes. DUPLEX MOUNTING FRAMES

Industrial Products

MX-E2F-(XX) . . . . . Duplex mounting frame, accepts two flat MAX modules

MX-E2A-(XX) . . . Duplex mounting frame, accepts two angled MAX modules

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Glossary

MX-D1-(XX) . . . . Designer mounting frame, accepts one flat or angled MAX module

MX-D2-(XX) . . . . Designer mounting frame, accepts two flat or angled MAX modules

MX-D4-(XX) . . . . Designer mounting frame, accepts four flat or angled MAX modules

MX-D6F-(XX). . . . Designer mounting frame, accepts six flat MAX modules

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory HD15 Mounting Frame page 1.9

WALL PHONE FACEPLATES WPJP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plastic Wall Phone Faceplate with 4-pair USOC jack included

MX-WP-(XX) SS . . . . . . . . MAX Series Stainless Steel Wall Phone Faceplate with keystone MAX module included

Index

1.14

MX-E4A-(XX) . . . Duplex mounting frame, accepts four angled MAX modules

DESIGNER MOUNTING FRAMES

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

MX-E4F-(XX) . . . . Duplex mounting frame, accepts four flat MAX modules

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Use (XX) to specify wiring option: K6 = category 6, T568A/B; K5 = category 5e, T568A/B; U3 = 3-pair, 6-position USOC; U4 = 4-pair, 8-position USOC

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

MAX SERVICE FITTING PLATES ®

MAX Service Fitting Plates are used to mount flat MAX modules directly onto Walker 500 series service fittings. These MAX series plates are constructed of aluminum and are available in 2-, 4- and 6-port options. Mounting screws included. Part#

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

MX-SFP-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . MAX series service fitting plate Use (X) to specify number of ports: 2 = 2-ports, 4 = 4-ports, 6 = 6-ports* *Shielded MAX modules are not side stackable. Maximum density is 4 shielded modules in the 6-port plate. MAX blanks can be used as a spacer.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

MAX MODULAR FURNITURE ADAPTERS The MAX modular furniture adapters will accept four MAX angled or flat modules and snaps directly into communication outlet openings* in most major modular furniture systems, including Steelcase, Hon Industries, Haworth and Kimball. Adapters include designation label and clear label cover to allow for circuit identification. 67.46 – 69.85mm (2.656 – 2.750 in.)

34.16 – 35.69mm (1.345 – 1.405 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements

45.47mm (1.79 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Panel thickness: 1.24mm (0.05 in.)

MX-MFP-KNL-(XX) . . . . . . . Modular furniture adapter for Knoll Group openings (not available in white or ivory)

MAX Modular Furniture adapters mount into modular furniture openings, providing superior density with proper circuit designation.

75.74mm (2.982 in.)

72.01mm (2.835 in.)

44.45mm (1.750 in.)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

73.15mm (2.88 in.)

Panel thickness: 0.76 – 2.03mm (0.030 – 0.080 in.)

MX-MFP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Modular furniture adapter for standard openings including steelcase

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Panel Cutout Requirements Panel thickness: 2.41mm (0.095 in.)

MX-MFP-HME-(XX) . . . . . . Modular furniture adapter for Herman Miller Ethospace Beltline openings (not available in white or ivory)

47.80mm (1.882 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements

76.86mm (3.026 in.)

48.26mm (1.90 in.)

Panel thickness: 1.52mm (0.060 in.)

MX-MFP-HMA-(XX) . . . . . . Modular furniture adapter for Herman Miller Action Office Series 2 and Ethospace base openings

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Panel Cutout Requirements Panel thickness: 0.76 – 2.03mm (0.030 – 0.080 in.)

MX-MFP-AO3-(XX) . . . . . . Modular furniture adapter for Herman Miller Action Office Series 3 base opening

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory Note: For Herman Miller Action Office Series 3 152mm (6 in.) vertical panel, use our MX-FP-S-(XX)-(XX) to mount up to six MAX modules. *Furniture outlet openings, panel thickness, and raceway clearance may vary. Please consult furniture manufacturer for actual dimensions to determine compatibility.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

ACCESSORIES Part #

Industrial Products

Description

CT-FP-LBL-104* . . . . . . . . 10 sheets of labels for faceplates that will fit any standard 8.5 x 11 printer, 104 labels/sheet MX-FP-CVR-(XX) . . . . . . . . Bag of 100 label covers for MAX faceplates Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear, 01 = black, 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

W W W

S I E M O N

Glossary

Index

C O M

1.15

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

CT ® 6 COUPLERS

he unique Siemon engineering innovations used in the design of the CT 6 couplers enables full compliance with category 6 connecting hardware specifications for all pair combinations up to 250 MHz.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

2 3

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Universal Wiring — All outlets are compatible with

both T568A and T568B wiring options S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

or patch panels and can be easily removed using a small screwdriver

Superior Design — Patented “gravity feed” design on angled couplers controls bend radius of mated modular cord and physically protects the connection point from being disturbed

Spring Door Option — Angled CT 6 Couplers are available with optional spring doors to protect modular jacks from outside contaminants

Exceeds Category 6

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Easy Installation — Snaps quickly into CT faceplates

Backward Compatibility — Can be used with MC® 5 modular cords for category 5e compatibility Familiar Terminations — Utilizes standard 110 termination tools

Quick Termination

Superior Performance

Pyramid™ Wire Entry System on new S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time.

Use MC 6 modular cords to unlock the performance of Siemon CT® 6 modules.

-40 -50

Limit

Standards Update

(dB)

-60

Typical -70

Worst Case

-80

Margin at 250 MHz Worst Case 0.84 dB Typical 4.37 dB

-90 -100

250

100

Frequency (MHz)

Glossary

Patented Tri-Balance™ Technology ensures full compliance with category 6 specifications. Index

1.16

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

ANGLED CT 6 COUPLERS ®

Siemon’s patented gravity-feed jack controls the bend radius of the mated modular cords to ensure the integrity of the transmission channel, while physically protecting the connection from incidental contact at the work area. This angled shroud creates a slim profile, perfect for installations in shallow raceways and modular furniture.

CT-C6-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . Angled, double coupler, T568A/B

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

CT-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Angled, single coupler, T568A/B

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Technical Tip! Angled couplers are recommended for work area applications.

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white Add “-D” for spring door option. Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 couplers. (Bulk option includes couplers, icons, and termination caps. Cable ties are available separately, see page 1.21). Couplers include one color-matching icon (clear for black) and one termination cap per port, plus one red and one blue icon.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

CT Faceplates pages 1.22 – 1.25, Palm Guard page 12.8, MC® 6 Patch Cords page 3.7

Industrial Products

FLAT CT 6 COUPLERS Flat CT 6 couplers are designed for use in flush mount applications and are also recommended for use with CT patch panels.

CT-F-C6-C6-(XX) . . . . . Flat, double coupler, T568A/B

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

CT-F-C6-(XX). . . . . . . . Flat, single coupler, T568A/B

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Technical Tip! Flat couplers are recommended for patch panel applications.

Standards Update

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 couplers. (Bulk option includes couplers, icons, and termination caps. Cable ties are available separately, see page 1.21). Couplers include one color-matching icon (clear for black) and one termination cap per port, plus one red and one blue icon.

Glossary

CT Patch Panels pages 2.10 – 2.12, Palm Guard page 12.8, MC® 6 Patch Cords page 3.7

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

1.17

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

CT ® 5e COUPLERS

he engineering innovations used in the design of the CT 5e couplers ensure full-featured, end-to-end category 5e connectivity. The couplers feature universal T568A/B wiring and comply fully with all applicable ISO and TIA specifications for all pair combinations.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

160 MHz

Featuring universal T568A/B wiring with component and channel performance to 160 MHz.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products 1

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

Minimize Termination Time — Patented compliant pin technology allows use of Siemon’s 4-pair impact tool Circuitry Protection — Clear plastic cover protects circuitry from accidental damage Quick Identification — Snap-in color-coding icons are included (red, blue, and matching) allowing users to instantly identify different types of services

Superior Performance

Strain Relief — Cable-tie anchor points provide effective strain relief for cables entering from top or bottom of coupler

Spring Door Option — Angled CT 5e Couplers are available with optional spring doors to protect modular jacks from outside contaminants The most economical way to order CT couplers is with the Bulk project pack option.

Angled Coupler

Easy Installation

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Patented “reactive balance” technology provides exceptional category 5e transmission performance.

Glossary

Pyramid wire entry system on S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time.

Snaps quickly into CT faceplates or patch panels and can be easily removed using a small screwdriver to access terminated cable.

CT Patch Panels pages 2.10 – 2.12, CT Faceplates pages 1.22 – 1.25, S110® Multi-Pair Termination Tool pages 12.6 – 12.7 Index

1.18

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

CT 5e COUPLERS ®

ANGLED COUPLERS

FLAT COUPLERS

CT-C5-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Angled, double coupler, universal T568A/B

CT-F-C5-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . Flat, double coupler, universal T568A/B

CT-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Angled, single coupler, universal T568A/B

CT-F-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Flat, single coupler, universal T568A/B

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white Add “-D” for spring door option.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Technical Tip! Angled couplers are recommended for work area applications and flat couplers are recommended for patch panel applications.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 couplers. (Bulk option includes couplers and icons only — termination caps and cable ties are available separately, see page 1.21). Couplers include one color-matching icon (clear for black), 2 termination caps, and one cable tie per port, plus one red and one blue icon.

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

FLAT CT 3 COUPLERS Flat CT 3 couplers provide a full range of voice wiring configurations. They are available with single or double modular jacks. DOUBLE COUPLERS

SINGLE COUPLERS

CT-(XX)-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . Flat, double coupler

CT-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Flat, single coupler

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Use 1st (XX) to specify jack A (see below) Use 2nd (XX) to specify jack B (see below) Use 3rd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Use 1st (XX) to specify jack option (see below) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white

Standards Update

Jack Options: U3 = 3-pair, 6-position jack, USOC; U4 = 4-pair jack, USOC Glossary

Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 couplers. (Bulk option includes couplers and icons only — termination caps and cable ties are available separately, see page 1.21). Couplers include one color-matching icon (clear for black, 2 termination caps, and one cable tie per port, plus one red and one blue icon.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Index

1.19

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

FIBER ADAPTER CT® COUPLERS The CT fiber coupler line consists of MT-RJ, LC, SC, ST and SC/ST hybrid adapters available in 2 and 4 fiber versions. Angled versions are available with our patented gravity-feed design for controlling the bend radius of fiber cables at the work area. All fiber adapters are “universal” to support either multimode or singlemode fiber connections.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

CT-MT-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 duplex MT-RJ adapter (2 fibers)

CT-MT-MT-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 duplex MT-RJ adapters (4 fibers)

CT-A-MT-(XX) Angled coupler with 1 duplex MT-RJ adapter (2 fibers)

CT-A-MT-MT-(XX) Angled coupler with 2 duplex MT-RJ adapters (4 fibers)

CT-LC(X)-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 duplex LC adapter (2 fibers)

CT-LC(X)-LC(X)-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 duplex LC adapters (4 fibers)

CT-A-LC(X)-(XX) Angled coupler with 1 duplex LC adapter (2 fibers)

CT-A-LC(X)-LC(X)-(XX) Angled coupler with 2 duplex LC adapters (4 fibers)

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

CT-SC-SC-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 duplex SC adapter (2 fibers)

CT-SC-4-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 duplex SC adapters (4 fibers)

CT-A-SC-SC-(XX) Angled coupler with 1 duplex SC adapter (2 fibers)

CT-SA-SA-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 duplex ST adapter (2 fibers)

CT-SA-4-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 duplex ST adapters (4 fibers)

CT-A-SA-SA-(XX) Angled coupler with 1 duplex ST adapter (2 fibers)

CT-AC-AC-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 duplex ST-to-SC adapter (front side = SC) (2 fibers)

CT-AC-4-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 duplex ST-to-SC adapters (front side = SC) (4 fibers)

CT-A-AC-AC-(XX) Angled coupler with 1 duplex ST-to-SC adapter (front side = SC) (2 fibers)

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Use (X) to specify LC adapter color: blank = beige, U = blue Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory Couplers include one color-matching icon (clear for black); plus one red and one blue icon. CT-MMO page 1.28, CT Patch Panels pages 2.10 – 2.11, CT Fiber Management Tray page 4.9

Index

1.20

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

COAX CT COUPLERS ®

CT-BA-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 BNC adapter

CT-A-BA-(XX) Angled coupler with 1 BNC adapter

CT-FA-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 F-type adapter

CT-BA-BA-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 BNC adapters

CT-A-BA-BA-(XX) Angled coupler with 2 BNC adapters

CT-FA-FA-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 F-type adapters

CT-A-FA-(XX) Angled coupler with 1 F-type adapter

System Overview

Technical Tip! Angled coax couplers are recommended for work area applications and flat coax couplers are recommended for patch panel applications.

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory Couplers include one color-matching icon (clear for black); one red and one blue icon.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

VIDEO AND OTHER CT COUPLERS CT-RC-RC-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 RCA connectors with solder tails

CT-A-RC-RC-(XX) Angled coupler with 2 RCA connectors with solder tails

CT-RA-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 RCA adapter

CT-RA-RA-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 RCA adapters

CT-VH-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 SVHS connector with solder tail

CT-VA-(XX) Flat coupler with 1 SVHS adapter

CT-AUD-(XX) Flat coupler with 2 audio connectors

CT-BLNK-(XX) Flat blank coupler

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory RCA couplers include one color-matching icon (clear for black); one red and one blue icon.

S210 Connecting Block System

ACCESSORIES Part #

S110 Connecting Block System

Description

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Laser-printed customized tabs now available.

Standards Update

Glossary

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Index

1.21

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

CT ® FACEPLATES

t the work area, Siemon CT faceplates offer a sleek, clean appearance for mounting CT couplers. Designation labels cover the mounting screws (included) and provide ample circuit identification.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

2 Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

3 Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Identification — Write-on circuit designation labels

Durability — UV resistant, high impact plastic prevents

protected by clear plastic cover located over the mounting screws

Labeling — Sheets of designation labels can be

color fading and provides added durability

Variety — Faceplates and CT couplers are available in

ordered for use with desktop printers

white, ivory, light ivory, gray and black. Stainless steel versions are also available

Easy Installation

The most economical way to order CT faceplates is with the Bulk project pack option.

Flexibility

Labeling

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.22

Couplers can be easily snapped out of the front of faceplates, making moves, adds, and changes quick and easy.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Cutouts allow couplers to pass through plates enabling mounting of faceplates after cables are terminated.

Faceplates include quick pressure-release designation label covers for quick, tool-less removal.

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

CT FACEPLATES ®

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

CT2-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Single gang plastic faceplate for one coupler

CT4-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Single gang plastic faceplate for two couplers

CT8-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Double gang plastic faceplate for four couplers

CT2-HFPA-(XX)* . . . . . . . . Single gang plastic horizontal faceplate for one coupler with screw caps (#6-32 screws)

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory Faceplates include designation label(s), label cover(s) and screws. Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack, (includes 100 CT2 or CT4 faceplates or 50 CT8 faceplates, screws, designation labels, and label covers). *Not available in bulk project pack.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

STAINLESS STEEL CT FACEPLATES CT4-FP-SS-L . . . . . . . . . . Single gang stainless steel faceplate for two couplers with labels and label holders

CT4-FP-SS. . . . . . . . . . . . Single gang stainless steel faceplate for two couplers

CT8-FP-SS-L . . . . . . . . . . Double gang stainless steel faceplate for four couplers with labels and label holders

CT8-FP-SS. . . . . . . . . . . Double gang stainless steel faceplate for four couplers

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

CT12-FP-SS . . . . . . . . . . Triple gang stainless steel faceplate for six couplers

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

ACCESSORIES Part #

Description

Glossary

CT-FP-LBL-104* . . . . . . . . 10 sheets of labels for faceplates that will fit any standard 8.5 x 11 printer, 104 labels per sheet CT-FP-CVR. . . . . . . . . . . . Bag of 100 clear label covers for CT faceplates *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

1.23

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

MODULAR FURNITURE BRACKETS These modular furniture brackets provide a solution for mounting faceplate surface mounting boxes or SM® series 4- or 6-port surface mount boxes onto modular furniture systems. MFB-1. . . . . . . . . . . Bracket for Steelcase 9000, Haworth, Knoll Morrison, Allsteel, and Westinghouse furniture systems

MFB-2 . . . . . . . . . . Bracket for Herman Miller Ethospace, Steelcase Avenir, and DRG furniture systems

MFB-3 . . . . . . . . . . Brackets for Herman Miller Action Office Furniture Systems

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Note: Furniture panel openings may vary. Please consult furniture manufacturer for actual dimensions to determine compatibility. Faceplate Surface Mounting Boxes page 1.25, MX-SM Surface Mount Boxes pages 1.32 – 1.33

CT® SERVICE FITTING PLATES The CT service fitting plates mount directly onto Walker 500 Series service fittings. Mounting screws are included. CT-SFP-S . . . . . . . . . . Plate with one coupler opening

CT-SFP-D . . . . . . . . . . Plate with two coupler openings

CT MODULAR FURNITURE ADAPTERS The CT modular furniture adapter will accept any CT coupler and snaps directly into communication outlet openings* in most major modular furniture systems, including Steelcase, Hon Industries, Haworth and Kimball. 67.46 – 69.85mm (2.656 – 2.750 in.)

34.16 – 35.69mm (1.345 – 1.405 in.)

73.15mm (2.88 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements

45.47mm (1.79 in.)

Panel thickness: 0.76 – 2.03mm (0.030 – 0.080 in.)

Panel thickness: 1.24mm (0.05 in.)

CT-MFP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Adapter for standard openings including steelcase (accepts one CT coupler)

75.74mm (2.982 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements

47.80mm (1.882 in.)

Panel thickness: 2.41mm (0.095 in.)

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.24

CT-MFP-KNL-(XX) . . . . . . . Adapter for Knoll Group openings (accepts one CT coupler — not available in white or ivory)

72.01mm (2.835 in.)

44.45mm (1.750 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements

Panel Cutout Requirements Panel thickness: 1.52mm (0.060 in.)

CT-MFP-HME-(XX) . . . . . . . Adapter for Herman Miller Ethospace Beltline openings (accepts one CT coupler — not available in white or ivory)

CT-MFP-HMA-(XX). . . . . . . Adapter for Herman Miller Action Office Series 2 and Ethospace base openings (accepts two CT couplers)

76.86mm (3.026 in.)

48.26mm (1.90 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements Panel thickness: 0.76 – 2.03mm (0.030 – 0.080 in.)

CT-MFP-AO3-(XX) . . . . . . . Adapter for Herman Miller Action Office Series 3 base opening (accepts one CT coupler)

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory For Herman Miller Action Office Series 3 152mm (6 in.) vertical panel, use our standard CT4-FP to mount two CT couplers (see page 1.23). *Furniture outlet openings, panel thickness, and raceway clearance may vary. Please consult furniture manufacturer for actual dimensions to determine compatibility.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

SURFACE MOUNTING BOXES FOR MAX® AND CT® FACEPLATES These boxes offer a surface mounting option for MAX or CT single and double gang faceplates. These boxes are perfect for installations where the work area outlet cannot be recessed into a wall or floor box. The boxes are also compatible with our stand-off rings if extra depth is required behind the faceplate. Mounting hardware not included. CT4-BOX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Surface mount box for single gang MAX or CT faceplate height: 119.3mm (4.70 in), width: 74.8mm (2.95 in), depth: 40.6mm (1.60 in)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

CT8-BOX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Surface mount box for double gang MAX or CT faceplate height: 119.3mm (4.70 in), width: 120.8mm (4.76 in), depth: 40.6mm (1.60 in)

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive backing (package of 10) MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic backing (package of 10) Note: Two magnetic or adhesive backings required for double gang boxes.

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

MAX Faceplates pages 1.12 – 1.15, CT Faceplates pages 1.22 – 1.25

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

STAND-OFF RINGS FOR MAX AND CT FACEPLATES Stand-off rings are a mounting option for installations that need extra depth behind the faceplate. They are compatible with both MAX and CT faceplates. The 25.4mm (1.00 in.) ring is especially useful to ensure the proper bend radius for optical fiber or other multimedia applications (faceplate not included). Part # CT4-RING-050-(XX) CT4-RING-100-(XX) CT8-RING-050-(XX) CT8-RING-100-(XX)

Industrial Products

Description . . . .

. . . .

System Overview

12.7mm 25.4mm 12.7mm 25.4mm

MapIT Intelligent Patching

(0.50 in.) stand-off ring for single gang MAX or CT faceplate (1.0 in.) stand-off ring for single gang MAX or CT faceplate (0.50 in.) stand-off ring for double gang MAX or CT faceplate (1.0 in.) stand-off ring for double gang MAX or CT faceplate

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory

MAX Faceplates pages 1.12 – 1.15, CT Faceplates pages 1.22 – 1.25

S110 Connecting Block System

SHEETROCK RING FOR FACEPLATES Sheetrock rings are designed for installations where wall openings have been inadvertently cut too large and standard single or double gang faceplates do not provide sufficient wall coverage. They mount directly behind MAX or CT faceplates and offer an additional 6.4mm (0.25 in.) of coverage on each side of the faceplate. SR-1-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang ring

S210 Connecting Block System

SR-2-(XX) . . . . . . . . Double gang ring

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 20 = ivory CT Faceplates pages 1.22 – 1.25, MAX Faceplates pages 1.12 – 1.15

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

1.25

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

MAX速 BRITISH FACEPLATES MAX British faceplates are compatible with British standards (85mm x 85mm). The faceplate is designed to accept up to six angled or flat MAX modules. Faceplates include designation label(s), clear label cover(s), and mounting screws.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

MX-BFP-S-01-(XX) . . . . Single gang faceplate for one MAX module

MX-BFP-S-02-(XX) . . . . Single gang faceplate for two MAX modules

MX-BFP-S-03-(XX) . . . . Single gang faceplate for three MAX modules

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 25 = bright white, 82 = alpine white

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

MAX AUSTRALIAN/ITALIAN FACEPLATES

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.26

MX-BFP-S-04-(XX) . . . . Single gang faceplate for four MAX modules

MX-HFP-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang horizontal Australian/Italian faceplate for one MAX module

MX-HFP-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang horizontal Australian/Italian faceplate for three MAX modules

MX-HFP-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang horizontal Australian/Italian faceplate for two MAX modules

MX-HFP-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang horizontal Australian/Italian faceplate for four MAX modules

MX-BFP-S-06-(XX) . . . . Single gang faceplate for six MAX modules

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory Note: Faceplates include designation label(s), color-matching and clear label covers, and color-matching screw covers.

MAX INTERNATIONAL ADAPTERS These adapters allow two MAX modules to be mounted into standard openings. MX-45-01-(XX). . . . . . . . . 45mm x 45mm 1-port adapter Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 25 = bright white, 82 = alpine white

MX-45-02-(XX). . . . . . . . . 45mm x 45mm 2-port adapter Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 25 = bright white, 82 = alpine white

MX-A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 50mm x 50mm adapter. Includes designation label and clear label covers. Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 82 = alpine white

MX-RFP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . 45mm x 50mm adapter Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white

Contact our Technical Support Department for questions on mounting dimensions.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

BRITISH CT FACEPLATES 速

The CT series British faceplates are compatible with British standards (85mm x 85mm) and are designed to work with our complete line of CT couplers. CTE2-FP-(XX) . . . . . . Single gang British style faceplate for one CT coupler

CTE4-FP22-(XX) . . . . Single gang British style faceplate for two CT couplers

CTE4-FP-(XX) . . . . . . Double gang British style faceplate for two CT couplers

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 82 = alpine white Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

BRITISH SURFACE MOUNT BOXES The CTE2 and CTE4 boxes offer surface mount capabilities for the British MAX and CT series faceplates featured previously. CTE2-BOX-02 . . . . . . . . . Single gang surface mount box for British CT faceplates, white

CTE4-BOX-02 . . . . . . . . . Double gang surface mount box for British CT faceplates, white

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

CT INTERNATIONAL FACEPLATES CT-FP-DKIT-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single gang German faceplate kit for one CT coupler. Includes faceplate, mounting ring and stand-off frame

CT2-HFP-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Australian/Italian faceplate for one CT coupler

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 80 = light ivory

S110 Connecting Block System

CT INTERNATIONAL ADAPTERS

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

CTE-A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 50mm x 50mm adapter for one CT coupler Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 82 = alpine white

CTE-45-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . 45mm x 45mm adapter for one CT coupler Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 82 = alpine white

CT-RFP-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . White 45mm x 50mm adapter for one CT coupler

Glossary

Contact our Technical Support Department for questions on mounting dimensions.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

1.27

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

MULTI-USER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA)

his low-profile multi-user/multimedia surface mount box is unsurpassed in features and flexibility, and is ideal for use as a multi-user telecommunications outlet assembly (MUTOA) as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA568-B.1. It provides storage area for up to 12m (39.4 ft.) of buffered optical fiber cable using our optional fiber management tray and at least 2m (6.6 ft.) of 4-pair twisted pair cable in the base, while maintaining a minimum bend radius of 30mm (1.2 in.).

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

1 3 6

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S210 Connecting Block System

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Storage Capacity — Provides TIA compliance for

cable slack while maintaining minimum bend radius requirements

Entries — Breakout on four sides for cable/raceway

Fiber Management — Space for optional fiber Housing Snaps Together — A captive screw is

Cable Tie Anchor Points — For cable management Installation Options

Durability — UV resistant, high impact plastic prevents color fading and provides added durability

included for added security 5

US and European Compatible — Compatible with any standard single or double gang electrical box including European standards. Screws and adhesivebacked tape included; magnets optional

management tray 4

Versatility — MAX® MUTOA accommodates any combination of up to 18 ports of mixed media or up to 36 fiber ports

entry 3

S110 Connecting Block System

Industrial Products

Quick Identification — Write-on surface for additional identification

Fiber Management

Innovative Labeling

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.28

Available in both MAX and CT® versions for greater flexibility. The MAX MUTOA accepts up to 18 modules.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Optional fiber management trays enable isolation and proper routing of optical fiber cabling.

Hideaway labeling system flips down to reveal a designation area that utilizes standard size faceplate designation labels.

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

MAX MUTOA ®

Part #

Description

System Overview

MX-MMO-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Multi-user/telecommunications outlet box with cable ties, mounting screws and adhesive tape height: 200.2mm (7.88 in.), width: 200.2mm (7.88 in.), depth: 57.0mm (2.25 in.)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Optional fiber management tray sold separately (see below).

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

MAX Modules pages 1.3 – 1.9

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

CT® MUTOA Part #

Description

Industrial Products

CT-MMO-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Multi-user/telecommunications outlet box with cable ties, mounting screws and adhesive tape height: 200.2mm (7.88 in.), width: 200.2mm (7.88 in.), depth: 57.0mm (2.25 in.)

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Optional fiber management tray sold separately (see below).

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

CT Couplers pages 1.16 – 1.21

Standards Update

ACCESSORIES Part #

Description Glossary

CT-MMO-MAG . . . . . . . . Set of 3 magnets for mounting MAX or CT MUTOA FMT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clear fiber management tray for MAX or CT MUTOA

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

1.29

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

FIBER OUTLET BOX (FOB2)

iemon’s low-profile Fiber Outlet Box (FOB2) is the optimal solution for bringing fiber to the desk. The FOB2 offers a well-defined method for managing fiber cabling at the work area by providing a connection point for up to 12 fibers (or 6 coaxial) connectors utilizing slide-in bezels. A single gang faceplate is mounted to the FOB2 base and accommodates up to six MAX® modules or two CT® couplers.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

3 5

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

S110 Connecting Block System

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Low Profile — Slim, tapered design hugs the wall, minimizing disturbance

managers fully retain the fibers strands while facilitating loading

Easy Access — Cover snaps on and off of the base. Screw holes are provided (concealed beneath identification labels) to secure cover to base, if desired

Extended Cover Version — Conceals and protects

Fiber Managers — Angled/arched slots in fiber

Slide-in Adapter Bezels — Allow for easy installation and removal and are polarized to assure that adapter keyways are always facing up

the externally mated fiber connectors

Innovative Cable Access

Fiber Management

Mounting Options

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.30

The unique design allows snap-on cover to be removed to access fiber connections without disturbing the faceplate connections (and vice versa).

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

The base of the FOB2 provides storage and management for up to 1 meter of slack for as many as 6 fibers.

Mounting holes allow FOB2 to be mounted to both single and double gang U.S. wall outlets as well as single gang European outlets.

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

FIBER OUTLET BOX (FOB2)

System Overview

FOB2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Includes base, cover, designation labels, clear label covers, mounting hardware, cable ties, icons, and three blank bezels

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

FOB2-GRD-(XX) . . . . . . . . Includes base, extended cover, designation labels, clear label covers, mounting hardware, cable ties, icons, and three blank bezels

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 80 = light ivory CT® Faceplates pages 1.22 – 1.25, MAX® Faceplates pages 1.13 – 1.15

Industrial Products

FIBER BEZELS

MapIT Intelligent Patching

FOB-BZL-MT1-01 . . . . . 1 Duplex MT-RJ adapter, (2 fibers)

FOB-BZL-LC(X)1-01 . . . . 1 Duplex LC adapter, (2 fibers)

S210 Connecting Block System

FOB-BZL-SC-01 . . . . . . Duplex SC adapter, (2 fibers)

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

FOB-BZL-MT-01 . . . . . . 2 Duplex MT-RJ adapters, (4 fibers)

FOB-BZL-LC(X)-01 . . . . . 2 Duplex LC adapters, (4 fibers)

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

FOB-BZL-SA-01 . . . . . . Duplex ST adapters, (2 fibers)

Standards Update

Glossary

FOB-BZL-BL-01 . . . . . . . Blank bezel

Use (X) to specify LC adapter color: blank = beige, U = blue Note: All fiber adapters are “universal” to support both multimode and singlemode fiber connections.

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

1.31

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

MX-SM ® SURFACE MOUNT BOXES

urface mount boxes feature a sleek compact, easy-to-install design. UTP, Screened, fiber, video, and coax MAX® modules can be quickly installed into the base. Multiple cable management features provide a high performance and well organized installation.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

For color-coded icons/tabs and write-on labels 2

S210 Connecting Block System

Snap-on Cover with Designation Areas —

MAX Bezels Included — Allows flat MAX modules

Label Cover — Conceals screw for added security if desired

Cable Tie Anchor Points — Facilitates strain relief for cable

Optional Spring-loaded Shutter Doors — Shutter doors offer added protection from dust and other contaminants

Cable/Raceway Entry — Breakouts on three sides and bottom

Cable Management — Built-in cable management features ensure proper bend radius for copper or fiber

to be secured in place

Cable Entry Point

Quick Cover Release

Optional Magnets

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

One port box has predefined opening for routing cable into the rear of the box.

Left and right thumb release allow the cover to be easily removed. Flat MAX Modules pages 1.4 – 1.11, TERA 4-pair Outlet page 1.3

Index

1.32

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Magnets are designed to sit flush within the base of the box to optimize cable routing above it.

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

MX-SM SURFACE MOUNT BOXES ®

Field-assembled surface mount boxes with MAX bezels. Accepts flat MAX modules ordered separately.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

MX-SM1-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-port box with cover, base, one single port MAX bezel, cable ties, and screws

MX-SM2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-port box with cover, base, one (2-port) MAX bezel, cable ties, screws, and designation labels

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

MX-SM4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-port box with cover, base, two (2-port) MAX bezels, cable ties, screws, and designation labels

MX-SM6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-port box with cover, base, three (2-port) MAX bezels, cable ties, screws, and designation labels

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory. Add “-D” for optional spring shutter doors. Add “-M” for optional magnets. Add “-MD” for optional doors and magnets.

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

MAX bezels are compatible with all single port, flat MAX modules see pages 1.4 – 1.11. For LC, SC duplex fiber adapters and TERA options, see MX-SM multimedia bezels below.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

MX-SM MULTIMEDIA BEZELS AND COMPONENTS

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

MX-SMB-MM-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Multimedia 2-port bezel

MX-SMB-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Bezel with duplex multimode/singlemode SC adapter

Standards Update

MX-SM-BLNK-(XX). . . . . . . . . . A single blank insert for an unused port. May be used with MAX or multimedia bezels

Glossary

Note: Multimedia bezels accommodate TERA outlets (see page 1.3) and flat MAX simplex LC adapters (see page 1.8). They are also compatible with all other single port flat MAX modules, but require the use of icons to secure modules into bezel. Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

1.33

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

MODULAR Y-ADAPTERS Y-adapters are available as “splitters” which convert one 4-pair jack into two jacks. The Y-adapters utilize Siemon’s patented UP-2468 plug which allows adapters to be used in 6- or 8-position jacks. The adapter body can be rotated 180° to view either the colored icons or the Y-adapter pinouts, which are printed on the opposite side. YU4-U2-U2 . . . . . . . . Splits a 4-pair USOC jack for Token Ring or voice applications at either jack

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

YA4-U2-U2. . . . . . . . . Splits a 4-pair T568B jack for Token Ring or voice applications at either jack

YT4-E2-E2 . . . . . . . . . Splits a 4-pair T568A/B jack for 10BASE-T applications at either jack

YT4-U2-U2 . . . . . . . . . Splits a 4-pair T568A jack for Token Ring or voice applications at either jack

YA4-A3-U1. . . . . . . . . Splits a 4-pair T568B jack for 1-, 2- or 3-pair voice and 1-pair voice/modem

YT4-E2-U2 . . . . . . . . . Splits a 4-pair T568A/B jack for 10BASE-T and Token Ring or voice applications

Y-BRIDGE . . . . . . . . . . Bridges all jack pairs. Compatible with any jack wiring. Provides an additional 4-pair jack with the same wiring.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Note: These modular adapters meet category 3 transmission specifications.

MODULAR 4-WAY SPLITTER Siemon’s modular 4-way splitter provides provides access to each individual pair of a 4-pair modular outlet. The splitter converts a single 4-pair outlet to 4 individual 1-pair, 6-position outlets to enable four unique modular connections. The universal plug design enables compatibility with both 6- and 8-position outlets. YA4-4U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . Modular 4-way splitter, T568B YT4-4U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . Modular 4-way splitter, T568A

Index

1.34

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER AND FIBER WORK AREA PRODUCTS Web Resources

6-PORT SP5 SURFACE PACK MODULE This 6-port SP5 Surface Pack is designed to provide high performance modular connectivity and category 5e transmission performance for mobile, surface mount applications. The module fits through 57.15mm (2.25 in.) diameter openings for easy relocation and can be mounted using either mounting screws (not provided) or optional internal mounting magnets. Cable tie strain relief points and tapered entrance secures and protects cables.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Description

SP5-C5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-port, surface pack module, T568A/B. Includes icon label holder, label, and cable tie

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Add "-M" for optional mounting magnets.

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

HARMONICA This outlet converts 25-pair feeder cable into modular jack ports to serve work areas. The Harmonica has one 25-pair male connector and can accommodate up to 12 modular jacks, depending on the pair count of the jack. It allows easy moves and changes for stations using multiple voice and data ports. It comes equipped with Siemon’s patented universal connector holddown.

Part # H50M-12MJ4 . . . . H50M-12MJ4-ETH . H50M-8MJ6 . . . . . H50M-6MJ8 . . . . . H50M-6MJ8-ATT . . H50M-6MJ8-TIA . .

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Description . . . . . .

. . . . . .

MapIT Intelligent Patching

12, 2-pair, 8-position jacks, USOC 12, 2-pair, 8-position jacks, 10BASE-T 8, 3-pair, 6-position jacks, USOC 6, 4-pair jacks, USOC 6, 4-pair jacks, T568B 6, 4-pair jacks, T568A

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

MODULAR RS232 KIT These DB-to-modular adapters are used to connect equipment to wall outlets via modular cords. They convert the connector on the station equipment — either a DB25 or DB09 — to a single 4-pair non-keyed modular jack. The jack is pre-terminated to RS232-type poke-through pins, and the pin-out is field configurable.

Part #

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Description

DB09(X)-MJ8K. . . . . . . . . DB09 to 8-position, 8-conductor modular jack adapter DB25(X)-MJ8K. . . . . . . . . DB25 to 8-position, 8-conductor modular jack adapter

Glossary

Use (X) to specify DB gender: M = male, F = female

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

1.35

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

10G 6™ AND HD® PANELS

MAX® PANELS

CT® PANELS

(pages 2.2 – 2.3)

(pages 2.4 – 2.7)

(pages 2.8 – 2.9)

(pages 2.10 – 2.12)

Product Modular patch panel Applications for TERA, Flat Screened MAX or Flat UTP 10G 6 MAX Modules

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

TERA®-MAX PANELS

Connectors TERA Outlets, MAX Modules Media Types F/UTP, S/FTP, UTP

Multimedia (used in conjunction Multimedia (used in conjunction with with MAX 5e and MAX 6 CT couplers at work area) modules at work area)

Integral

MAX Modules

CT Couplers

UTP

UTP, Coax, Fiber, Video

S310®, S110®, 25-Pair

S310, Tool-less, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-Type, RCA, SVHS

S310, S110, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-Type, RCA, SVHS

12 (on 89D Bracket), 16, 24, 32, 48, 96

12 (on 89D Bracket), 16, 24, 48

16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 96

Rear Cable Management Bar, Icon/Label Holders (HD only), Designation Labels, Cable Ties, Mounting Hardware

Rear Cable Management Bar, Designation Labels, Cable Ties, Mounting Hardware

Mounting Hardware

Category Termination Tool-less Types

Capacity 16, 24 (Ports)

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Included Cable Ties, Accessories Mounting Hardware

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

2.0

High density, high performance modular patching for UTP

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS TERA®-MAX® Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 – 2.3

System Overview

HD5® Screened Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 10G 6™ Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

HD® 6 Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 12-Port HD 6 Panel on S89D Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 HD5 Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 12-Port HD5 Panel on S89D Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6

Copper Patch Panels

HD5 Quick-Patch™ Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 Optional HD Panel Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 MAX Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 – 2.9

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Angled MAX Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 12-Port MAX Panel on S89D Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

CT® Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 – 2.11 Oversized CT Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 CT-DK Designation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Modular Patch Blocks® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 Blank Filler Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

SIEMON-UK 1991 marks an important date in Siemon’s century long history. It is in 1991, 88 years after Carl F. Siemon opened our doors, that Siemon

Industrial Products

established its first international office, in Woking, southwest of London. Enjoying outstanding growth over the next decade, the

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Siemon UK office became the EMEA (Europe, Middle East and Africa) headquarters, central in the creation and management of all EMEA regional offices. In 2004 Siemon UK moved its based of operations from Woking to a new larger facility in Chertsey. Recognizing that increasing bandwidth needs are of global concern, the UK office continues to grow by providing and supporting EMEA structured cabling needs and providing forward-looking solutions. A continually trained sales staff, certified installer program and plain old British determination, buttresses this dedication to world-

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

class support! Siemon UK has certainly helped clear the way in the continuous

Standards Update

drive to be the best total cabling solution provider — anywhere! Glossary

Siemon Network Cabling Solutions, The Foundation for Your Business Success

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

2.1

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

TERA ® -MAX ® PATCH PANELS

ERA-MAX 19 inch patch panels harness unprecedented performance and reliability in a shielded, highdensity modular solution. Any combination of TERA, flat screened MAX and flat UTP 10G 6 MAX modules can be configured in TERA-MAX panels. As outlets are snapped into place, resilient ground tabs and ground lugs assure that each outlet and cable is properly grounded for maximum protection from outside interference. No secondary grounding operations are required, reducing the overall termination time. Builtin cable management and strain relief are integrated onto the rear of panel.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

2 Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

3 1

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Installer Friendly — Panels can be mounted directly

Installation Friendly — Individual modules snap

Port Identification — Bold port numbering enables

on standard 19 inch relay rack or cabinet S210 Connecting Block System

Durability — Lightweight, high strength brushed aluminum or black anodized protective finish

into place from front or rear of panel quick identification of outlets

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Modular Flexibility

Slim Design

Mitigates Alien Crosstalk

Use TERA, flat screened MAX modules or flat UTP 10G 6 MAX modules in TERA-MAX patch panel for telecommunications room applications.

Optimized spacing of outlets mitigates alien crosstalk between adjacent ports.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Use 1- or 2-pair TERA cable assemblies for sharing multiple applications over each 4-pair cable/outlet.

Index

2.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

TERA -MAX PATCH PANELS ®

Part #

Description

System Overview

RMS

TM-PNL-16-01 . . . . . . . . . 16-port TERA-MAX panel, black . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RMS TM-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . 16-port TERA-MAX panel, metallic . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RMS

TM-PNL-24-01 . . . . . . . . . 24-port TERA-MAX panel, black . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RMS TM-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . 24-port TERA-MAX panel, metallic . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RMS

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Technical Tip! Utilize TERA-MAX patch panels with flat UTP 10G 6 MAX modules for improved alien crosstalk performance.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Panels include mounting hardware. Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

TERA 4-pair Outlet page 1.3, Flat Screened MAX Modules pages 1.10 – 1.11, Flat UTP 10G 6 MAX Modules page 1.5

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

HD5 SCREENED PATCH PANELS

ibl

The HD5 screened patch panel provides a high density modular solution for termination of 4-pair screened cable. The HD5 screened panel provides transmission performance that meets category 5e system requirements and is fully compliant with shielding effectiveness as defined by the CENELEC and ISO/IEC standards. Siemon compliant pin technology allows the use of Siemon’s multi-pair impact tool to minimize termination time. Shield continuity can be achieved by using either ground clip or spade. Two ground lugs are provided (one on each side of panel) for attaching 4.115mm (6 AWG) ground wire to ground and connecting multiple panels together. Built-in cable management and strain relief are integrated on rear of panel. Optional rear cable management bracket is available to properly guide cables to and from the back side of panel.

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Part #

Description

Standards Update

HD5-S-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . Screened 24-port HD5 panel, T568A/T568B, 1 RMS HD5-RWM . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cable management bracket for HD5-S-24

Glossary

Panels include designation labels, cable ties and mounting hardware. Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) HD® Panel Accessories page 2.7

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.3

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

10G 6 ™ PATCH PANELS

art of Siemon’s 10G ip™ Cabling Solution, the 10G 6 modular patch panel far exceeds all category 6 component and channel requirements. This superior level of performance is achieved via a completely new circuit board design, optimization of jack pin geometry, and stringent inspection and quality control procedures. When used with a 10G 6 MC® patch cord or BladePatch, the result is a solution with typical NEXT margin of 10 dB across the category 6 frequency range from 1 – 250 MHz, and channel performance to 500 MHz — necessary for next generation applications including 10GBASE-T.

1 2

Supports 10GBASE-T Application

Superior Performance — For interconnect, cross-connect or consolidation point applications Backward Compatible — With category

6 and lower patch cords 3

" 500 MHz

Familiar Termination — Terminates with standard 110 termination tools

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Aesthetics — Black anodized finish, rolled edges and screw-free front surface provide an aesthetically pleasing appearance

4 5

Universal Wiring — T568A and T568B wiring compatible modular patch panel

Industrial Products

Reduced Alien Cross-talk

Easy Punch-down Terminations

Revolutionary PCB Tuning

Alien crosstalk is minimized by maximizing port-toport space.

Optimized design of rear cable manager accommodates cable management and S310 terminations without interference of cable management bar.

Circuit board is tuned and balanced using our patent-pending phase-delay technology to maximize margin beyond category 6.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

10G 6 PATCH PANELS Part #

Description

RMS

10GX-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-port panel, T568A/B . . . . . 1 10GX-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-port panel, T568A/B . . . . . 2 Panels include rear cable manager, cable ties, and mounting hardware. Add “B” for bulk project pack of 5 panels (rear cable managers not included but can be ordered separately, see page 2.7). Notes: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.), S310® termination blocks and are not compatible with S110® multi-pair termination tools. 10G 6 BladePatch™ and MC® Patch Cords pages 3.5 – 3.6, 10G 6 MAX® Modules pages 1.4 – 1.5, 10G MAX Faceplates page 1.12

Index

2.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

HD ® 6 PATCH PANELS

breakthrough in patch panel performance. Siemon’s HD 6 was the industry’s first patch panel to exceed category 6 connecting hardware specifications for all pair combinations up to 250 MHz. Get revolutionary performance and user-friendly termination, labeling, and cable management features with Siemon’s popular HD 6 patch panel.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Universal Wiring — HD 6 Patch Panels feature

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

universal wiring for both T568A and T568B 2

Installer Friendly — Black anodized panels can be mounted directly to an EIA standard 19 inch relay rack or cabinet

Aesthetics — Front surface is uninterrupted

by screw heads for a clean appearance 4

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Quick Identification — Icon label holders and designation labels included

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Pyramid™ Wire Entry System

Circuit Protection

Built-in Cable Manager MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Pyramid wire entry system on S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to reduce installation time.

Rear metal enclosure protects printed circuitry.

Includes rear cable manager to properly guide cables to point of termination.

HD 6 PATCH PANELS Part # HD6-16 . HD6-24 . HD6-32 . HD6-48 . HD6-96 .

Description . . . . .

. . . . .

16-port 24-port 32-port 48-port 96-port

panel, panel, panel, panel, panel,

RMS T568A/B T568A/B T568A/B T568A/B T568A/B

. . . . .

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Panels include rear cable manager, icon label holders, designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware. Add “B” for bulk project pack of 5 panels (rear cable managers not included but can be ordered separately, see page 2.7). Notes: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.), S310® termination blocks and are not compatible with S110® multi-pair termination tools.

1 1 2 2 4

S110 Connecting Block System

Standards Update

Glossary

MC 6 Patch Cords page 3.7, MAX 6 Modules page 1.5, MAX Faceplates page 1.13, HD® Panel Accessories page 2.7 ®

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.5

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

12-PORT HD® 6 MOUNTED ON S89D BRACKET The HD6-89 offers an economical solution for small applications and is ideal for retrofitting S66™ punch down blocks to a high performance modular design. Part #

Description

HD6-89D-12 . . . . . . . . . . 12-port HD 6 panel, T568A/B, mounted on S89D bracket height: 254.0mm (10.0 in), width: 85.9mm (3.38 in), depth: 60.2mm (2.37 in)

HD5® PATCH PANELS HD5 series patch panels offer the most robust patching solution in the industry. HD5 panels feature universal T568A/B wiring and exceed category 5e requirements with component and channel performance patented to 160 MHz. Compliant pin technology enables the use of multipair S110 punch-down tools to reduce termination time.

Part #

Description

RMS

HD5-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-port panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HD5-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-port panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HD5-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-port panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

" 160 MHz

Featuring universal T568A/B wiring with component and channel performance to 160 MHz.

HD5-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-port panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 HD5-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96-port panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Panels include rear cable manager, icon/label holders, designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware. Add “B” for bulk project pack of 5 panels (rear cable managers not included but can be ordered separately). Note: 16- and 32-port HD5 panels feature S310® termination blocks and are not compatible with S110® multi-pair termination tools. Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) HD® Panel Accessories see next page

12-PORT HD5® MOUNTED ON S89D BRACKET The HD5-89 offers an economical solution for small applications and is ideal for retrofitting S66™ punch down blocks to a modular design. Part #

Description

HD5-89D-12 . . . . . . . . . . 12-port HD5 panel, T568A/B, mounted on S89D bracket height: 254.0mm (10.0 in.), width: 85.9mm (3.38 in.), depth: 47.8mm (1.88 in.)

Glossary

Index

2.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER PATCH PANELS HD5 QUICK-PATCH PANEL ®

™

t pa

ibl

Web Resources

Siemon’s HD5 Quick-Patch panel provides a quick and easy category 5 channel patching solution for 10/100BASE-T hubs with 25-pair connectors. The HD5 Quick-Patch Panel incorporates many user-friendly features and benefits, including rear connectors that are staggered to enable easy routing of 25-pair cable to the connection point and a rear metal enclosure that protects printed circuitry. The black anodized panel can be mounted directly to a standard 19 inch rack or cabinet with the mounting hardware included. Icon/label holders and designation labels included.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description Copper Patch Panels

HD5-QP-48. . . . . . . . . . . 48-port 10/100BASE-T panel (Active pins 1, 2, 3 & 6 only), four 25-pair connectors (female), 2 RMS

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Panel includes icon/label holders, designation labels, and mounting hardware. Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Category 5e 25-Pair Cable Assemblies page 3.12

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

OPTIONAL HD PANEL ACCESSORIES ®

Part #

Description Industrial Products

10GX-RWM . . . . . . . . . . Rear cable management bracket for 10G 6 patch panels HD-RWM . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cable management bracket for HD patch panels (not compatible with HD5-S-24 or 10GX-(XX) patch panels) HD5-ICON6 . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive-backed strips in a package of 8 for colorcoding and port designation for 24-, 48-, or 96-port panels (icons not included) HD5-ICON6-LBL . . . . . . . 10 sheets of labels for HD5-ICON6 for laser printing (16 labels per sheet)* HD5-ICON8 . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive-backed strips in a package of 4 for colorcoding and port designation for 16-, or 32-port panels (icons not included) HD5-ICON8-LBL . . . . . . . 20 sheets of labels for HD5-ICON8 for laser printing (8 labels per sheet)*

10GX-RWM MapIT Intelligent Patching

HD-RWM S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

HD5-ICON6

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

HD5-ICON8 HD5-LBL-ID . . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive designation strips in a package of twenty for 24-, 48-, or 96-port panels HD5-LBL-480 . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive strips for sequentially numbering panel ports 1 through 480 for 24-, 48-, or 96-port panels HD5-LBL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . White removable designation strips in a package of fifty for all versions of HD panels HD5-LBL6-(X) . . . . . . . . . Removable designation strips in a package of eight for 24-, 48-, or 96-port panels

Use (X) to specify color: 2 = white, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

HD5-LBL-ID

HD5-LBL-480

Standards Update

Glossary

HD5-LBL-2

HD5-LBL6-(X)

Colored Icons page 1.9

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.7

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

MAX ® PATCH PANELS

AX patch panels provide a flexible, high density termination solution for the telecommunications room. Using the full line of MAX modules (available separately), the panel can be configured for a variety of multimedia applications. Blank modules can be used to reserve ports for future capacity. When used as a part of System 6 warranty the MAX patch panel supports TSB-155 providing applications assurance for 10GBASE-T up to 55 meters. 5

Copper Patch Panels

1 Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

2 3 Technical Tip! Use flat MAX modules for patch panel applications.

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Installer Friendly — Panels can be mounted

directly on standard 19 inch relay rack or cabinet 2

Durability — Lightweight, high strength brushed aluminum with black anodized protective finish

Versatility — Combines modular design with high density for ultimate flexibility

Quick Identification — Bold port numbering enables quick identification of outlets

Multimedia Capability — Mix and match a variety of RJ-45, fiber and coax MAX modules

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Modularity

Port Identification

Cable Management

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Individual modules snap into place from front or rear of panel for added installation flexibility. Glossary

Removable designation labels can be laser printed and enable proper circuit identification for each port.

Rear cable management bar included for routing horizontal cables to terminations.

MAX Modules pages 1.4 – 1.11, MC® Patch Cords pages 3.6 – 3.10, Fiber Management Tray page 4.9, MAX Faceplates page 1.13 Index

2.8

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

MAX PATCH PANELS ®

Part #

Description

RMS

MX-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . 16-port panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Part #

Description

RMS

MX-PNL-48 . . . . . . . . 48-port panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

MX-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . 24-port panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 MX-PNL-72 . . . . . . . . 72-port panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Panels include rear cable manager, designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware. MAX Panels not compatible with screened MAX modules. Use the TERA®-MAX panel (see pages 2.2 – 2.3). Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

12-PORT MAX PANEL MOUNTED ON S89D BRACKET The MAX S89D offers an economical solution for smaller applications while allowing for a range of different media using the full line of MAX modules. Part #

S110 Connecting Block System

Description

MX-89D-12. . . . . . . . . . . 12-port MAX panel mounted on an 89D bracket height: 254.0mm (10.0 in.), width: 85.9mm (3.38 in.), depth: 47.8mm (1.88 in.)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES MX-PNL-LBL4* . . . . . . . . . 10 sheets of laser printable labels for 16-port MAX panel

MX-PNL-LBL6* . . . . . . . . . 10 sheets of laser printable labels for 24- and 48-port MAX panels

Standards Update

Glossary

*Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.9

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

CT ® PATCH PANELS

panels complement our CT work area products and offer a feature-rich and flexible patching solution. Flat CT couplers are ordered separately and quickly snap into black anodized patch panels. This modular capability allows custom configuration of panels to suit a variety of applications. Low cost blank couplers are available to fill unused ports and can be replaced with active couplers when the need arises.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

2 1

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

3 Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

Installer Friendly — Couplers can be easily

removed from the panel making moves, adds, and changes quick and easy 2

Easy Coupler Installation — Cutouts allow terminated couplers to pass through panels from front to back or back to front

Multimedia Capability

EIA Standard Mounting — Black anodized aluminum panels can be mounted directly to an EIA standard 19 inch relay rack or cabinet

Note: use optional fiber management tray when mixing copper and fiber in CT panel (see page 4.9).

Rear Labeling System

Rear Cable Management

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

For optimum flexibility, the CT Panel accepts a wide variety of CT couplers, including UTP, fiber, and coax.

CT Panels are labeled on rear to assist in cable identification while terminating.

Glossary

CT Couplers pages 1.16 – 1.21, Fiber Management Tray page 4.9 Index

2.10

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Siemon offers a wide range of rear cable management products to encompass a wide range of rack sizes and cable routing methods — see page 6.10 for more information.

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

CT PATCH PANELS 速

Part #

Description*

RMS

Maximum Quantity of CT Couplers

System Overview

CT-PNL-16 . . . 16-port panel . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . 8

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

CT-PNL-24 . . . 24-port panel . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . 12

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

CT-PNL-32 . . . 32-port panel . . . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . 16

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

CT-PNL-48 . . . 48-port panel . . . . . 3. . . . . . . . . . 24 Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

CT-PNL-64 . . . 64-port panel . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . 32

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

CT-PNL-96 . . . 96-port panel . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . 48

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Technical Tip! Flat couplers are recommended for patch panel applications.

Glossary

*Number of ports when configured with two-port CT couplers. Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.11

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

System Overview

OVERSIZED CT速 PANELS Oversized CT panels are available for applications that require additional labeling space. They provide the same flexibility as our standard CT panels and feature a write-on designation surface above each coupler opening that may also be used as a space for adhering your own label. Siemon offers adhesive-backed label holders with replaceable write-on labels that mount above the entire row of CT couplers.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Part #

Description*

RMS

Maximum Quantity of CT Couplers

CT-PNL-16-ID . . . 16-port panel . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . 8

Part #

Description*

RMS

Maximum Quantity of CT Couplers

CT-PNL-48-ID . . . 48-port panel . . . 4. . . . . . . . . 24

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

CT-PNL-24-ID . . . 24-port panel . . . 3 . . . . . . . . 12

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

CT-PNL-96-ID . . . 96-port panel . . . 7 . . . . . . . . 48

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

CT-PNL-32-ID . . . 32-port panel . . . 3 . . . . . . . . 16 Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

*Number of ports when configured with two-port CT couplers. Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

CT-DK DESIGNATION KIT The CT-DK designation kit is a plastic, self-adhesive designation label holder with paper inserts designed for use with our ID series of oversized CT panels. Each kit comes with six label holders and six paper inserts.

Part #

Description

CT-DK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bag of 6 adhesive backed, clear plastic holders with paper designation strips

Glossary

Peel-off adhesive strip Index

2.12

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER PATCH PANELS Web Resources

MODULAR PATCH BLOCKS

速

Our economical Modular Patch Blocks provide a convenient 24-port modular cross-connect field for equipment with 25-pair female connector input. They are excellent for use with voice, broadcast, or alarm systems. The blocks fit a standard 66M block footprint for backboard or rack mounting applications.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

SPB-V1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . One, 25-pair connector wired to 24, 1-pair 6-position modular jacks, USOC. Black universal hold-down SPB-V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two, 25-pair connectors, each wired to 24, 2-pair 6-position modular jacks, USOC. One black, one blue universal hold-down SPB-V4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four, 25-pair connectors, each wired to 24, 4-pair modular jacks, USOC. Black, blue, red, and green universal hold-downs SPB-V4-ATT . . . . . . . . . . Four, 25-pair connectors, each wired to 24, 4-pair modular jacks, T568B. Black, blue, red, and green universal hold-downs

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

BLANK FILLER PANELS Blank filler panels are ideal for installations where open or expansion rack space is to be covered. Panels are blank on one side and feature the Siemon logo on the other side.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Part #

Description

PNL-BLNK-(X). . . . . . . . . . Blank filler panel for 19 inch rack

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Use (X) to specify rack mount space height of panel: 1 = 1 RMS, 2 = 2 RMS, 3 = 3 RMS, 4 = 4 RMS Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in)

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

2.13

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

TERA® Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

(pages 3.2 – 3.3)

Product Broadband Video, Applications Data, Voice Connector Type TERA

Media Types S/FTP

MC® MODULAR CORDS

SOLID IC CABLE ASSEMBLIES

CABLE ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS

(pages 3.6 – 3.9)

(pageS 3.7 & 3.10)

(page 3.11)

Work Area, Telecommunications Room

Consolidation Point, Telecommunications Room

Field Termination

Modular

Modular (single ended)

Modular

F/UTP, UTP

UTP

Stranded

Solid

Stranded

Black, White, Red, Gray, Yellow, Blue, Green

Gray (non-plenum), Blue (plenum)

White

Category Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Conductor Types Stranded

Cable Colors Ivory

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

3.0

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS TERA® 4-Pair Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2

System Overview

TERA Patch Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 – 3.3 TERA Video Balun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

BladePatch™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 – 3.5 BladePatch 10G 6 UTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 ™

BladePatch 6 UTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 BladePatch 5e Screened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Copper Patch Panels

10G 6™ MC® Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 MC 6 Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC 6 Modular Cords for VoIP Applications . . . . . . . . . . 3.7

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Solid IC6 Single-Ended Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 Screened 10G 6 MC Modular Patch Cords . . . . . 3.8 – 3.9 Screened MC 5 Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

MC 5 Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Solid IC5 Single-Ended Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Universal Modular Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Modular Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 Category 5e and 3 25-Pair Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . 3.12 EZ-Twist® Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 RG6 F-Type Coax Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Category 6 Cross-Connect Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13

SIEMON-FRANCE

Category 5e Cross-Connect Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13

In January 2002, Siemon France opened its doors in the City of

Cross-Connect Wire Dispenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13

Lights. Located beside the famed Bibliotheque Nationale in the core

S210® Patch Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.14 – 3.15 S210 Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 S210 to MC Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 S110® Patch Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.16 – 3.17 S110 Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110 to MC Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

of France’s cultural and industrial center, the office has grown significantly to fully support all Siemon efforts within the country.

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Their impressive list of significant account wins further solidifies S210 Connecting Block System

Siemon’s presence in Europe. With an excellent foundation of certified installers, Siemon France provides a full service outlet for Siemon’s total cabling solutions. Their technical and customer services, sales and marketing combine to form a team modeled in the 100 year spirit of Siemon, with an unbending commitment to quality, service,

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

innovation and value.

Standards Update

Glossary

Solutions de câblage informatique Siemon, la raison de la réussite de votre entreprise

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

3.1

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

TERA ® PATCH CORDS

art of the TERA 10G ip™ cabling solution, the TERA-to-TERA patch cords deliver twice the bandwidth of category 7/class F specifications when combined with the TERA outlet. While current specifications characterize connector performance up to 600 MHz, TERA delivers up to 1.2 GHz of bandwidth per pair. This extra bandwidth is critical for demanding applications like broadband video, with an upper frequency requirement of 862 MHz, or the convergence of video, voice and data onto a single 4-pair cable and outlet.

Terminates Category 7/Class F Fully Shielded (S/FTP) Cable — No additional crimping

Various Plug Options — Allow multiple applications to be serviced from a single 4-pair outlet

Common Plug Termination — Fast and

Proper Termination — Connector

Patented Shield Design — Quadrant design

MapIT Intelligent Patching

isolates pairs, virtually eliminating crosstalk 6

Industrial Products

easy installation with a single tool to prepare and terminate cable assures proper termination of cable shield

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

or processes required for grounding cable

Standard Compliant Interface — Recognized

within ISO/IEC 11801 Ed. 2.0

Cable Sharing

Easy Installation

TERA Patch Cords

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Multiple applications can be run over one 4-pair cable and outlet, saving significant material and installation cost.

TERA patch cords are available in 1-, 2- and 4-pair options to support voice, video and data applications.

TERA 4-PAIR PLUGS TERA 4-pair plugs can be used to terminate horizontal cable in consolidation point applications. Plugs terminate fully shielded category 7/class F cable. 4-pair TERA plugs are designed specifically for the most demanding high-speed data applications. Part #

Glossary

CPT-T Tool reduces preparation and termination time to approximately three minutes.

Description

T7P4-B(XX)-1 . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair TERA plug with colored boot. Compatible with 0.64 – 0.55mm (22 – 23 AWG) solid S/FTP cable Use (XX) to specify boot color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green

Index

3.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

TERA PATCH CORDS ®

Unleash the power and flexibility of your TERA cabling with a variety of TERA patch cords designed to meet your bandwidth requirements today and tomorrow. Both TERA-to-TERA and TERA-to-modular plug cord options are available. 1- and 2-pair plug modularity allows multiple applications to be served from a single 4-pair outlet.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

T4-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 7 compatible, 4-pair TERA-to-TERA LS0H cable assembly, ivory jacket, colored boot

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

T1-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 7 compatible, 1-pair TERA-to-TERA LS0H cable assembly, ivory jacket, colored boot

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

T4A-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 6 Augmented, 4-pair TERA-to-Screened MC 6 modular plug LS0H cable assembly, ivory jacket, colored boot, T568B

T2E2-(XX)M-B(XX)L. . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e, 2-pair TERA-to-Screened MC 5 modular plug LS0H cable assembly, ivory jacket, colored boot, 10/100BASE-T

T4T-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 6 Augmented, 4-pair TERA-to-Screened MC 6 modular plug LS0H cable assembly, ivory jacket, colored boot, T568A

T2UT-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e, 2-pair TERA-to-Screened MC 5 modular plug LS0H cable assembly, ivory jacket, colored boot, Token Ring

T1U1-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . 1-pair UTP TERA-to-6 position modular plug LS0H cable assembly, ivory jacket, colored boot, Voice

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Use 1st (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.28 ft), 02 = 2m (6.56 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.84 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify boot color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Note: Field termination of TERA-to-modular plug patch cords is not recommended and is not compliant with Siemon warranty. CMX cords also available. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

TERA VIDEO BALUN CORD The TERA CATV patch cord provides the optimum solution for the transmission of TV or CATV signals over structured cabling historically limited to voice and data transmission. This is made possible by the integrated balun which ensures the conversion of the unbalanced TV signals designed for coaxial cabling (75 Ω impedance) to balance signals (100 Ω impedance) as required for the transmission over twisted pair (balanced) cabling. The TERA CATV adapter is specified and useable to 862MHz. Part #

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Description

Glossary

T1VC-(XX)M-B01L. . . . . . . 1-pair TERA-to-PAL connector, LS0H cable assembly, ivory jacket Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.28 ft), 02 = 2m (6.56 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.84 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

3.3

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

BLADEPATCH ™

iemon’s new BladePatch patch cord offers a unique solution for highdensity patching environments. It features an innovative push-pull boot design to control the latch, enabling easy access and removal of the cord in tight-fitting areas. The BladePatch cord is ideal for patching high density blade servers, patch panels, or any equipment with RJ-45 outlets.

Copper Patch Panels

" 500 MHz Supports 10GBASE-T Application

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Push-Pull Boot Activates Latch

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching 1

S210 Connecting Block System

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

eliminates need to defeat thumb latch used in standard modular plug designs 2

Easy Access and Removal — RJ-45 patch cord with patent-pending push-pull latch design enables easy access and removal in high density patching environments

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Revolutionary Design — Push-pull latch design

Low Profile Boot Design — Optimizes sidestackability of patch cords and allows use in even the most dense equipment

High Density — Ideal for high density data center applications and today’s high-density blade servers

Backwards Compatible — For use with category 5e/class D and category 6/class E systems

Snagless — Push-pull design eliminates external thumb latch which can snag and break

Universal Compatibility

Revolutionary Latch

Fits within any standard RJ-45 opening.

Simply push the boot forward to latch into the outlet and pull back to release.

High Density

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

3.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

The push-pull design enables easy access and removal via the boot in tight-fitting areas.

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

BLADEPATCH 10G 6 UTP ™

™

Combine the BladePatch with Siemon’s new 10G 6 MAX® modules and 10G 6 patch panels for a complete 10G 6 channel solution. This superior 10G 6 cabling system delivers unparalleled network performance today and supports emerging Internet Protocol (IP) like Voice Over IP (VoIP), IP video and 10GBASE-T applications. These cords are also backwards compatible with lower category connecting hardware.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

10GBP-(XX)-(XX). . . . . . . . 10G 6 UTP BladePatch RJ-45 patch cord with push-pull latching design, color matching cord/boot, T568A/B

Copper Patch Panels

Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Add “B” for bulk project pack of 100 modular cords.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Screened 10G 6 BladePatch coming soon.

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

BLADEPATCH 6 UTP All Siemon BladePatch modular cords are assembled using premium stranded cable that meets all category 6 specifications. These cords are available in several colors with or without a colored boot. Part #

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Description

Industrial Products

BP6-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Category 6 UTP BladePatch, RJ-45 patch cord with push-pull latching design, color matching cord/boot, T568A/B

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

BLADEPATCH 5e SCREENED Siemon screened modular cords are assembled using premium stranded cable that meets all category 5e specifications.

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Part #

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Description

BP5S-(XX)M-(XX)L . . . . . . . Category 5e Screened BladePatch, RJ-45 patch cord with push-pull latching design, color matching cord/boot, T568A/B

Standards Update

Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Add “B” for bulk project pack of 100 modular cords.

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

3.5

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

10G 6 ™ MC ® MODULAR CORDS

iemon takes patch cord performance to the next level with our 10G 6 MC modular patch cords. Part of Siemon’s 10G ip™ Cabling Solutions, these next generation cords exceed all category 6 component requirements and provide channel performance to 500 MHz. A variety of plug and cable enhancements contribute to the cord’s ground-breaking performance — including a patented cross-pair isolator.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Easy Identification — Optional color-coded icons available for port identification

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Exceeds Category 6 — 10G 6 stranded cordage far exceeds category 6 performance specifications

Superior Quality — Internal stranded cordage

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Innovative Strain Relief — 360 degree crimp provides excellent plug-to-cable strain relief without causing pair deformation

Latch Guard — Slide on boots feature a latch guard

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

isolator provides extended flex life and maintains ideal pair geometry

to protect plug from snagging when pulling through pathways or cable managers 6

" 500 MHz Supports 10GBASE-T Application

3 2 4 5

Durability — High quality modular plugs provide longterm resistance to corrosion, humidity, extreme temperatures and airborne contaminants

Metallic Isolator

Excellent Bend Relief

Exceeds Category 6

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Patented metallic isolator shields pairs inside plug for optimum NEXT performance.

100% transmission testing ensures margin well beyond category 6 modular cord specifications and guarantees optimum field performance.

10G 6 MC MODULAR CORDS Part #

Description

10GMC-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . 10G 6 MC, double-ended, 4-pair UTP stranded modular cord, T568A/B, color matching jacket/boot Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Add “B” for bulk project pack of 100 modular cords.

Index

3.6

37mm (1.4 in.) boot ensures excellent bend relief, critical for category 6 and higher performance.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

MC 6 MODULAR CORDS ®

Siemon’s MC 6 modular cords are the key to unlocking the next generation performance of System 6® (MAX ® 6, CT® 6, and HD® 6) products. MC 6 modular cords utilize patented, metallic isolator shields for optimum NEXT performance and a slide-on boot to ensure proper bend relief. All Siemon factory assembled MC 6 cords are 100% factory transmission tested to 250 MHz. Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

MC6-8-T-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . MC 6, double-ended, 4-pair UTP stranded modular cord, T568A/B, color matching jacket/boot

Copper Patch Panels

Technical Tip! Factory terminated and tested modular cords are required to achieve consistent category 5e or 6 channel performance. Field termination is not recommended.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.),15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07=green Add “B” for bulk project pack of 100 modular cords. Custom lengths are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

MC 6 VoIP CORDS Siemon’s MC 6 VoIP modular cords are designed for compatibility with today’s VoIP phones. The cords feature a new low-profile strain relief boot designed to minimize bend radius and interference when connecting into traditional VoIP work area phones. All cords are 100% factory transmission tested to 250 MHz. Part #

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Description

Industrial Products

MC6-8T-(XX)-B01IP . . . . . . MC 6, double ended, 4 pair UTP stranded modular cord, T568A/B, white cord, black boot Use (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.),15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Custom lengths and jacket options are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Technical Tip! For category 5e VoIP applications use MC5 cords without boots (see page 3.10).

S210 Connecting Block System

SOLID IC6 SINGLE-ENDED MODULAR CORDS

S110 Connecting Block System

Siemon’s IC6 solid single-ended modular cords are designed for use in category 6 applications requiring a consolidation point (CP) or cross-connect (as an equipment cord). The IC6 cords are 100% factory transmission tested to 250 MHz and feature the same plug construction used in MC 6 modular cords. These cords are available in plenum and nonplenum versions and are single-ended for direct termination. Part #

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Description

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

IC6-8A-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . . IC6, single-ended, non-plenum, 4-pair UTP solid modular cord, T568B, gray jacket with colored boot IC6-8T-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . . IC6, single-ended, non-plenum, 4-pair UTP solid modular cord, T568A, gray jacket with colored boot IC6-8A-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . IC6, single-ended, plenum, 4-pair UTP solid modular cord, T568B, blue plenum jacket with colored boot IC6-8T-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . IC6, single-ended, plenum, 4-pair UTP solid modular cord, T568A, blue plenum jacket with colored boot

Standards Update

Glossary

Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.), 30 = 9.1m (30 ft.), 40 = 12.2m (40 ft.), 50 = 15.2m (50 ft.), 60 = 18.3m (60 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color of boot: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Custom lengths and jacket options are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

3.7

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

SCREENED 10G 6 ™ MC ® MODULAR PATCH CORDS

iemon uses the highest quality components combined with stringent manufacturing processes to produce the best performing, most durable modular patch cords available. Part of Siemon’s 10G ip™ Cabling Solution, screened 10G 6 MC patch cords exceed all category 6 component requirements, and also provide channel performance to 500 MHz. The end result is a patch cord that is capable of supporting next generation applications including 10GBASE-T and beyond.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

" 500 MHz Supports 10GBASE-T Application

2 1

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

plug from snagging when pulling through pathways or cable managers

100% Factory-tested

Superior Quality — Quality plug components ensure long term resistance to corrosion from humidity, extreme temperatures, and airborne contaminants

Compliance

Excellent Bend Relief

• Plug geometry meets TIA-968-A and IEC 60603-7 specifications for modular plugs • Exceeds ISO/IEC 11801:2002 requirements for transfer impedance, coupling attenuation and shield effectiveness • Stranded Cable: IEC 61156-6 Compliant • LS0H Cordage: IEC 60332: Part 1, IEC 60754, and IEC 61034 compliant

Standards Update

Glossary

3.8

Technical Tip! Factory terminated and tested modular cords are required to achieve consistent category 5e or higher compatibility. Field termination is not recommended and is not compliant with Siemon warranty.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Index

High Performance — 10G 6 MC cords feature category 7/class F S/FTP stranded cable for optimal transmission performance while eliminating alien crosstalk

Latch Guard — Boots feature a latch guard to protect

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

wiring schemes 2

S210 Connecting Block System

Universal Wiring — Compatible with T568A/B

Cords are 100% transmission tested to ensure compliance with applicable standards requirements.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Boot ensures proper bend relief, critical for 10G 6 performance.

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

SCREENED 10G 6 MC MODULAR PATCH CORDS ™

Choose Siemon Screened MC modular cords for a perfectly matched, end-to-end 10G 6 channel solution capable of supporting next generation networking applications including 10GBASE-T.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Part #

Description

10GMCS-(XX)M-(XX)L . . . . Screened category 6, double-ended, 4-pair, stranded LS0H modular cord, T568A/B, color matching jacket/boot

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Use 1st (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 cords. Note: Screened 10G 6 MC Patch Cords can be used for both 10G 6 or System 6® Screened installations.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

SCREENED MC 5 MODULAR PATCH CORDS

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Siemon’s Screened MC5 modular cords are manufactured using stranded screened cable that meets all category 5e specifications. Modular plugs have an overall shield and meet TIA-968-A and IEC 60603-7 specifications. T568A/B wired assemblies include colored strain-relief boots and are available in a wide range of lengths. Shielded modular plugs are also available separately (see page 3.11).

Part #

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

Description

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

MC5S-(XX)M-(XX)L . . . . . . Screened category 5e, double ended, 4-pair, stranded LS0H modular cord, T568A/B, color matching jacket/boot

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Use 1st (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 cords.

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

3.9

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

MC® 5 MODULAR CORDS All Siemon MC 5 modular cords are assembled using premium stranded cable that meets all category 5e specifications. MC 5 modular cords are available in several colors with or without a colored boot. WITH BOOT Part #

Description

MC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)C . . . . . MC 5 Double-ended, 4-pair UTP modular stranded cord, T568A/B, color matching jacket/boot

WITHOUT BOOT Part #

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Description

MC5-8-T-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . MC 5 Double-ended, 4-pair UTP modular stranded cord, T568A/B, no boot Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.91m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.52m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.13m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.05m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.57m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.10m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Add “B” for bulk project pack of 100 modular cords. Custom lengths are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information. MC-BOOT-(XX)-100 . . . . . Color Boots (pack of 100) Use (XX) to specify boot color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Technical Tip! Note: Category 6 and 10G 6 products are backward compatible with our MC 5 (category 5e compatible) modular cords. For example when a MC 5 modular cord is used in a System 6® channel with MAX 6 modules, Siemon guarantees category 5e system performance.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

3.10

SOLID IC5 SINGLE-ENDED MODULAR CORDS Siemon’s solid, single-ended IC5 cable assemblies are designed for patching between the consolidation point and the work area (CMP) or as equipment cords in cross-connect applications (CMR). These assemblies are constructed using cable that exceeds all category 5e specifications.

Part #

Description

IC5-8T-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . IC5, single-ended, 4-pair UTP solid cable assembly, T568A, gray jacket, CMR, no boot IC5-8A-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . IC5, single-ended, 4-pair UTP solid cable assembly, T568B, gray jacket, CMR, no boot IC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . IC5, single-ended, 4-pair UTP solid cable assembly, T568A, blue jacket, CMP, with colored boot IC5-8A-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . IC5, single-ended, 4-pair UTP solid cable assembly, T568B, blue jacket, CMP, with colored boot

Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.), 30 = 9.1m (30 ft.), 40 = 12.2m (40 ft.), 50 = 15.2 (50 ft.), 60 = 18.3m (60 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify boot color: 02 = white, 06 = blue Custom lengths and jacket options are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

UNIVERSAL MODULAR PLUG Our patented “universal” modular plug eliminates the need to stock more than one size modular plug. The UP-2468 permits field-termination of modular cords in 2-, 3-, or 4-pair increments and terminates twisted pair cable with 26 – 22 AWG (0.40mm – 0.64mm) solid or 7-strand conductors with insulated conductor diameter of 0.86 – 0.99mm (0.034 – 0.039 in.). Plug contacts have 50 microinches minimum of gold plating over nickel and meet TIA-968-A and IEC 60603-7 specifications.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description Copper Patch Panels

UP-2468 . . . . . . . . . . . . “Universal” modular plug fits 6 or 8-position RJ outlets AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool page 12.10, PT-908 Crimp Tool page 12.11

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

MODULAR PLUGS We offer modular plugs in standard configurations to terminate modular cords for patching or work area applications. Modular plugs can be terminated to the exact cable length needed in order to maintain a neater, more organized installation. The plugs terminate twisted-pair cable with 26 – 22 AWG (0.40mm – 0.64mm) solid or 7-strand conductors with an insulated conductor diameter of 0.86 – 0.99mm (0.034 – 0.039 in.). All plug contacts have 50 microinches minimum of gold plating over nickel and meet TIA-968-A and IEC 60603-7 specifications. P-8-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-position modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Tyco crimp tools)

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

P-6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-position modular plug with 6 contacts*

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

P-8-8SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-position modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Stewart crimp tools)

P-6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-position modular plug with 4 contacts*

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

PS-8-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-position shielded modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Tyco crimp tools)

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

*Siemon 6-position plugs provide empty slots in the outer positions to prevent deformation of jack pins 1 & 8 when inserted into an 8-position modular jack.

AllPrep Cable Preparation Tool page 12.10, PT-908 Crimp Tool page 12.11

Technical Tip! Factory terminated and tested modular cords are required to achieve consistent channel performance. Field termination is not recommended.

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

3.11

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

QP25M-AA-(XX) . . . . . . . 25-pair, double ended 110-to-110, cable assembly with male connectors

CATEGORY 3 CABLE ASSEMBLIES

Use (XX) to specify length: 05 = 1.52m (5 ft.), 10 = 3.05m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.57m (15 ft.), 25 = 7.62m (25 ft.)

EZ-TWIST® CONNECTOR Dramatically reduce coax cable termination time with Siemon’s new EZ-Twist connector. No tools or crimping are required. To terminate, simply twist the connector onto the cable for a secure, high performance connection. EZ-Twist also eliminates screw-on connections to outlets. Simply push the connector onto an outlet to lock it in place, pull to remove. This feature is ideal in high-density installations where space is limited and conventional connectors are difficult to secure to outlets. Description

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Use 1st (X) to specify cable type: 5 = RG59, 6 = RG6 Use 2nd (X) to specify shield type: T = Tri-shield, Q = Quad-shield

RG6 F-TYPE COAX CONNECTOR The RG6 connector is a high quality coaxial connector designed to terminate RG6 coaxial cable that has a standard diameter over jacket (DOJ) of 6.9mm (0.27 in). The connector meets SCTE and Bellcore specifications and is constructed of high quality brass with corrosion-resistant plating. The long ribbed ferrule ensures maximum connector/cable retention. Part #

Description

RG6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG6 F-type connector Coaxial Crimp Tool page 12.11, AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool (CPT-RGTP) page 12.10

Index

3.12

Category 5e

A25B-DE-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, double-ended, cable assembly with female connectors A25B-SE-(XX). . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, single-ended, cable assembly with one female connector B25A-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, double-ended, cable assembly with one male and one female connector B25B-DE-(XX). . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, double-ended, cable assembly with male connectors B25B-SE-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, single-ended, cable assembly with one male connector

HC-EZ-(X)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . EZ-Twist coax connector, bag of 50

Glossary

CATEGORY 5e CABLE ASSEMBLIES

Part #

Standards Update

Our 25-pair cable assemblies are factory-tested for opens, shorts, and continuity. They feature TIA-968-A compliant gold plated contacts for extended reliability over time. Category 3 connector ends are available in single-ended male or female, double-ended male or female, or one male/one female configurations. All 25-pair cable assemblies are made with TIA/EIA-568-B.2 category 5e or 3 compliant cable.

S110 Connecting Block System

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

ibl

CATEGORY 5e AND 3 25-PAIR CABLE ASSEMBLIES

Web Resources

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Category 3

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

CATEGORY 6 CROSS-CONNECT WIRE Siemon’s category 6 cross-connect is ideal for cross-connect applications up to 5 meters. It can be used for category 6 or category 5e installations using S66,™ S110® and S210® wiring blocks.

System Overview

Part #

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

CJ6-W4-1000 . . . . . . . . . Category 6, 4-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm), cross-connect wire, pair colors blue/orange/green/brown, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool

Copper Patch Panels

Cross-Connect Wire Dispenser see below, S210 Connecting Blocks page 9.3

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

CATEGORY 5e CROSS-CONNECT WIRE Siemon’s cross-connect wire utilizes a unique “webbing” manufacturing process which binds conductors of a twisted-pair together to maintain consistent conductor spacing and pair twists that will not loosen during cross-connect installation. This high performance product exceeds category 5e specifications and is ideal for use with our S66 and S110 wiring blocks.

Part #

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Description

CJ5-W2-1000 . . . . . . . . . Category 5e, 2-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire, pair colors blue/orange, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool CJ5-W2-1000-07 . . . . . . Category 5e, 2-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire, pair colors orange/green, 305m. (1,000 ft.) spool CJ5-W1-1000-03 . . . . . . Category 5e, 1-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire with red/white conductors, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool CJ5-W1-1000-06 . . . . . . Category 5e, 1-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire with blue/white conductors, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool Cross-Connect Wire Dispenser see below, S110 Connecting Blocks page 10.3, S66 Connecting Blocks pages 11.2 – 11.3

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Technical Tip! Use the Siemon cable preparation tool CPT-WEB (see page 12.10) to quickly separate CJ5 webbed conductors prior to termination.

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

CROSS-CONNECT WIRE DISPENSER

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Siemon’s cross-connect wire dispenser mounts to standard 19 in. (482.6mm) racks to facilitate quick and easy dispensing of crossconnect wire. The dispenser has 431.8mm (17.0 in.) of horizontal capacity for loading up to five (5) spools of 1-pair cross-connect wire and can also accommodate other configurations. The dispenser bar is supported by open-end brackets on each side for easy access when reloading spools.

Standards Update

Glossary

Part #

Description

CWD-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 in. (482.6mm) cross-connect wire dispenser

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

3.13

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

S210 ® PATCH PLUGS

iemon technology delivers the world’s most advanced connection system. The S210 patch plug utilizes internal pair isolation, pair-to-pair compensation and layered contacts to improve crosstalk performance so that the mated plug and connecting block far exceed category 6 connecting hardware transmission requirements. The clear housing keeps the conductor colors/positions visible to aid matching termination positions on the other end. 1

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

5 1

Proper Orientation — Directional arrow provided to

Tapered Lacing — Enable easy field termination

Ergonomic Handle — Aids insertion and removal of

Clear Housing — Durable, flame-retardant, clear thermoplastic housing keeps conductors visible during and after termination

Polarization — Each plug housing includes polarization features to ensure proper orientation of the plug when connecting to the S210 connecting block

patch plug

S210 Connecting Block System

Technical Tip! S210 to MC® cable assemblies can be configured in the field, Siemon 10G 6 MC or MC 6 modular cords can be purchased (see pages 3.6 – 3.7) and cut in half. The cut end of the cord can then be field terminated to the S210P patch plug while the factory terminated and tested modular plug end remains undisturbed.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

assist in proper insertion orientation

Field Installable

Performance

Easy Termination

NEXT Performance for a Siemon S210 Patch Plug mated to a S210 Connecting Block*

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

-40 -50 -60

Limit

(dB)

-70

Standards Update

Typical

-80

Worst Case

-90

Margin at 250 MHz Worst Case 2.2 dB Typical 6.7 dB

-100 -110 -120 1

Siemon is the only company to offer a field installable category 6 patching solution.

100

250

The S210 4-pair plug provides unparalleled performance, with 6.7 dB NEXT (typical) and 2.2 dB NEXT (worst case) at 250 MHz.

Index

3.14

Frequency (MHz)

Glossary

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Simply snap the base and cover together to mass terminate all conductors.

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

S210 PATCH PLUGS ®

S210 patch plugs can be field-terminated to 23 – 26 AWG (0.40mm – 0.51mm) solid or 7-strand twisted-pair cable. S210P4 . . . . . . 4-pair, fieldterminated, S210 patch plug

S210P2 . . . . . . 2-pair, fieldterminated, S210 patch plug

System Overview

S210P1 . . . . . . 1-pair, fieldterminated, S210 patch plug

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

S210 CABLE ASSEMBLIES The S210 cable assemblies utilize Siemon’s S210P4 patch plugs for easy and reliable connections between S210 termination fields. These assemblies use high performance stranded cable which exceeds category 6 specifications and are 100% factory transmission tested to ensure optimum category 6 channel performance. Colored icons are available for color-coding S210 plugs. Part #

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Description Use (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Custom lengths available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

S210P4-P4-(XX) . . . . . . . . 4-pair, double-ended, S210 stranded cable assembly, white jacket S210P2-P2-(XX) . . . . . . . . 2-pair, double-ended, S210 stranded cable assembly, white jacket S210P1-P1-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1-pair, double-ended, S210 stranded cable assembly, white jacket

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

S210 TO MC® CABLE ASSEMBLIES The S210 to MC cable assemblies combine Siemon’s latest and highest performing plugs for patching network equipment to S210 connecting blocks or providing test access to S210 termination fields. The combination of plugs, high performance cable and 100% factory transmission testing ensures performance is compatible with category 6 channel specifications. Part #

S210 Connecting Block System

Description

S210P4A4-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . 4-pair, S210P4 to MC 6 stranded cable assembly, T568B, color matching jacket/boot S210P4T4-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . 4-pair, S210P4 to MC 6 stranded cable assembly, T568A, color matching jacket/boot S210P2E2-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . 2-pair, S210P2 to MC 6 stranded cable assembly, 10/100BASE-T, white jacket with colored boot

ACCESSORIES Part #

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Custom lengths available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

Description

S I E M O N

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

ICON-OVAL-(XX) . . . . . . . 25 Colored oval icons for 1-pair S210 patch plugs CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 25 Colored icon tabs for 2- and 4-pair S210 patch plugs (phone on one side, computer on reverse) TAB-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Colored blank tabs for 2- and 4-pair S210 patch plugs Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear (TAB-(XX) only), 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green, 08 = violet, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white*, 60 = brown, 80 = light ivory Add “B” for bulk pack of 100* *Not available for ICON-OVAL-(XX) Laser-printed customized tabs now available. Contact our Customer Service Department for ordering information.

W W W

S110 Connecting Block System

Glossary

Index

C O M

3.15

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S110 ® PATCH PLUG

he first of its kind that is category 5e compliant and can be field-terminated to either solid or stranded cable. The S110 patch plug utilizes internal pair isolation to provide improved crosstalk performance so that the mated plug and connecting block far exceed category 5e transmission performance.

Copper Patch Panels

160 MHz

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Mated 4-pair S110 patch plug and connecting block delivers component and channel performance to 160 MHz

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products 1

Ergonomic Handle — Aids insertion and removal of patch plug from 110 connect block

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Directional Arrow — Provided to assist in proper

Ready Verification — Clear plastic housing allows

insertion orientation the conductor colors and positions to be visible for matching termination positions on the opposite end 4

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Polarization — Each plug housing includes built-in polarization features to ensure proper tip-ring orientation during connection

Field Installable

Technical Tip! S110-to-modular plug cable assemblies can be configured in the field, Siemon MC® 5 modular cords can be purchased (see page 3.10) and cut in half. The end of the cord can then be field terminated to the S110P patch plug while the factory terminated and tested modular end remains undisturbed.

Performance

Easy Termination

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Terminates 24 – 26 AWG (0.40mm – 0.51mm) solid or 7-strand twisted-pair cable.

Index

3.16

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Staggered contacts in bi-directional planes provide excellent pair-to-pair isolation, delivering component and channel performance to 160 MHz.

Simply snap the base and cover together to mass terminate all conductors.

COPPER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, PLUGS AND CABLE Web Resources

S110 PATCH PLUGS ®

Siemon S110 patch plugs are both category 5e compliant and can be field-terminated to either solid or stranded cable. 4-pair S110 patch plugs employ a patented design to improve electrical isolation between pairs, enhancing crosstalk performance so that the mated plug and connecting block significantly exceed TIA/EIA-568-B category 5e transmission requirements. S110P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair, field-terminated, S110 patch plug

S110P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-pair, field-terminated, S110 patch plug

S110P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-pair, field-terminated, S110 patch plug

S110P1* . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-pair, field-terminated, S110 patch plug

Add “-B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 patch plugs. *S110P1 includes protective insert for use with single pair cross-connect wire (see page 3.13). Colored icons are not included. See accessories below.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

S110 CABLE ASSEMBLIES

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

The S110 cable assemblies utilize Siemon’s S110P4 patch plugs for easy and reliable connections between S110 termination fields. These assemblies use high performance stranded cable which exceeds category 5e specifications and are 100% factory transmission tested to ensure optimum category 6 channel performance. Colored icons are available for color-coding S110 plugs. Part #

System Overview

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Description

S110P4-P4-(XX) . . . . . . . . 4-pair, double-ended S110 patch cord S110P2-P2-(XX) . . . . . . . . 2-pair, double-ended S110 patch cord S110P1-P1-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1-pair, double-ended S110 patch cord Use 1st (XX) to specify length: 03 = 0.91m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.13m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.05m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.57m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.10m (20 ft.)

Custom lengths and wiring configurations are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

S110 TO MC® CABLE ASSEMBLIES The S110 to MC cable assemblies combine Siemon’s latest and highest performing plugs for patching network equipment to S110 connecting blocks or providing test access to S110 termination fields. The combination of plugs, high performance cable and 100% factory transmission testing ensures performance is compatible with category 5e channel specifications. Part #

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Description

S110P4-A4-(XX). . . . . . . . 4-pair, S110-to-modular plug, T568B S110P4-T4-(XX) . . . . . . . . 4-pair, S110-to-modular plug, T568A S110P2-UT-(XX) . . . . . . . . 2-pair, S110-to-modular 8-position plug, Token Ring, T568A S110P2-E2-(XX) . . . . . . . . 2-pair, S110-to-modular 8-position plug, 10/100BASE-T, T568B S110P1-U1-(XX). . . . . . . . 1-pair, S110-to-modular 6-position plug, USOC S110P1-U4-(XX). . . . . . . . 1-pair, S110-to-modular 8-position plug, USOC Use 1st (XX) to specify length: 03 = 0.91m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.13m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.05m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.57m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.10m (20 ft.)

Custom lengths and wiring configurations are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

ACCESSORIES Part #

S110 Connecting Block System

Description

ICON-OVAL-(XX) . . . . . . . 25 Colored oval icons for 2 and 3-pair S110 patch plugs CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 25 Colored icon tabs for 4-pair S110 patch plugs (phone on one side, computer on reverse) TAB-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Colored rectangular tabs for 4-pair S110 patch plugs Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear (TAB-(XX) only), 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green, 08 = violet, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 60 = brown, 80 = light ivory Other icon colors available. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information Add “B” for bulk pack of 100* 01 03 05 07 09 00 02 04 06 08 20 *Not available for ICON-OVAL-(XX)

W W W

Standards Update

Glossary

S I E M O N

C O M

Index

3.17

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

RACK MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (RIC3)

WALL MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (SWIC3)

FIBER CONNECT PANEL (FCP3)

FIBER MANAGEMENT TRAY (FMT)

(pages 4.2 – 4.3)

(pages 4.4 – 4.5)

(pages 4.8 – 4.9)

(page 4.9)

Product High density, low-to-high Applications fiber count, feature-rich rack mounting solution

High density, low-to-medium fiber count, wall mount

High density, low profile, economical enclosure ideal for low-to-medium fiber count, rack mount applications.

Standard density low cost enclosure for use with CT® or MAX® patch panels to accommodate fiber or mixed media applications.

Mounting 2-4 RMS Space

Wall

1 RMS

Adapters Quick-Pack™ Adapter Plates

Quick-Pack Adapter Plates

CT Couplers or MAX Modules

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) MapIT Intelligent Patching

MAXIMUM FIBER CAPACITY

S210 Connecting Block System

# FIBERS PER QUICK-PACK

ADAPTER OPTIONS

FCP3

SWIC3-M

SWIC3

RIC24

RIC36

RIC48

RIC72

ST, SC, ST/SC, FC

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

ST, SC, ST/SC, FC

ST, SC, MT-RJ, LC

144

MT-RJ, LC

128

192

MT-RJ, LC

144

192

288

MAXIMUM SPLICING CAPACITY

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

SPLICE TYPE

FCP3

SWIC3-M

SWIC3

RIC24

RIC36

RIC48

RIC72

Fusion

N/A1

144

Mechanical

N/A1

SWIC3-M does not accept splice trays

Glossary

Index

4.0

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS Rack Mount Interconnect Center (RIC3) . . . . . . . . . 4.2 – 4.3

System Overview

Fiber Storage Center (FSC3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 Wall Mount Interconnect Center (SWIC3) . . . . . . . 4.4 – 4.5

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Mini Wall Mount Interconnect Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Flat Quick-Pack Adapter Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 ™

Pre-Loaded RIC3 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Fiber Connect Panel (FCP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.8 – 4.9

Copper Patch Panels

Compression Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 Fiber Management Tray (FMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 Splice Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Heat Shrink Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 ULTRAsplice® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 ULTRAsleeve® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

MASSsleeve® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 Plug and Play Fiber Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.12 – 4.13 Plug and Play Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Plug and Play Reel and Extender System . . . . . . . . . . . 4.13

S I E M O N - I T A LY

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Since September of 2002, Milan has been known for more than just fashion. As the home of Siemon’s Italian office, it is now the center of

Industrial Products

Italy’s structured cabling market! Located at an important transportation hub, Siemon Italy covers the entire country with the

MapIT Intelligent Patching

help of a satellite office in Rome. Siemon Italy’s efforts have provided the region with a well-

S210 Connecting Block System

trained and geographically well-positioned certified installer network, ensuring that our Italian customers experience the full benefit of the world’s premier structured cabling solution. Their technical support and customer service are unmatched in the region — a group clearly embracing the Siemon tradition!

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Soluzioni di Cablaggio Siemon, le Basi del Vostro Successo

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

4.1

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

RACK MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (RIC3)

he RIC3 provides the best overall value for exceptional fiber management. The RIC3 enclosure offers superior fiber density (up to 288 fibers in just 4 RMS) without sacrificing fiber protection and accessibility. Features include a fully removable tray, improved labeling, standard front and rear door locks, and single-finger door latches. With superior cable management, port identification, fiber accessibility and security, the RIC3 is the best way to protect mission critical fiber connections.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

4 2

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

3 1

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Quick-Release Hinges — Spring loaded quickrelease hinges enable easy removal of front and rear doors for complete access to fiber connections Enhanced Labeling — Label virtually any port configuration with our hinged labels. The labels hang on the front door for improved visibility. When the door is opened, labels flip down allowing ready viewing of the label and corresponding ports

stop in both front and rear working positions providing complete access for moving, adding, changing, or cleaning of fiber connections 5

Maximum Capacity — The RIC3 enables a maximum amount of fibers to be patched or patched and spliced in a 2, 3, and 4 RMS enclosure without compromising the accessibility. This allows more efficient utilization of rack space

Superior Design — Top and bottom access holes

Rotating Grommets — Patented rotating grommets facilitate loading and retention of jumpers and fiber while minimizing microbending stress when using the sliding tray

Complete Access — Management tray has a positive

located at the rear of the enclosure allow fibers to be routed between tandem enclosures without having to run fibers outside of the enclosure

Improved Door Latching and Locking

Removable Tray

Quick-Pack™ Adapter Plates

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

4.2

The RIC3 cable management tray is now completely removable from the front or rear of the enclosure, allowing the entire tray to be moved to a work table for more convenient loading of adapter plates, pigtails and splice trays.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

The RIC3 features a single-finger latch on both front and rear doors. Included door locks prevent unauthorized access for enhanced security.

Never fumble with clumsy latches in a densely packed fiber enclosure again! Siemon Quick-Pack adapter plates can be inserted or removed with a single-finger for quick and easy access to fiber connections.

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

RACK MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (RIC3) Siemon RIC3 enclosures are designed for enhanced fiber management and ease of use. They are compatible with an array of Siemon fiber Quick-Packâ&#x201E;˘ adapter plates for your choice of fiber adapters and port density (see page 4.6).

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Part #

Description

RIC3-24-01. . . . . . . . . . . 24- to 96-port Rack Mount Interconnect Center, 2 RMS, black height: 86.6mm (3.41 in.), width: 432mm (17.00 in.), depth: 380mm (14.95 in.)

Part #

Description

RIC3-36-01. . . . . . . . . . . 36- to 144-port Rack Mount Interconnect Center, 2 RMS, black height: 86.6mm (3.41 in.), width: 432mm (17.00 in.), depth: 380mm (14.95 in.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

RIC3-48-01. . . . . . . . . . . 48- to 192-port Rack Mount Interconnect Center, 3 RMS, black height: 133mm (5.25 in.), width: 432mm (17.00 in.), depth: 380mm (14.95 in.)

RIC3-72-01. . . . . . . . . . . 72- to 288-port Rack Mount Interconnect Center, 4 RMS, black height: 178mm (7.00 in.), width: 432mm (17.00 in.), depth: 380mm (14.95 in.)

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) Note: All RIC products include laser-printable labels*, cable ties, rack-mounting hardware, and pre-installed fiber management clips. *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software. Quick-Pack Adapter Plates page 4.6, Splice Trays page 4.10, Fiber Jumpers and Pigtails pages 5.2 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 5.5

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

FIBER STORAGE CENTER (FSC3) The Siemon 3 RMS rack mount Fiber Storage Center (FSC3) is typically utilized in tandem with a Rack Mount Interconnect Center (RIC3). Fiber jumpers exiting the front of the RIC3 are routed into the FSC3 for slack storage. The design features bend radius compliant managers which facilitate loading of jumpers and a single-finger latch on the door for easier access. Part #

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Standards Update

Description

FSC3-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiber Storage Center, 3 RMS, black height: 133mm (5.25 in.), width: 432mm (17.00 in.), depth: 380mm (14.95 in.)

Glossary

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

4.3

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

WALL MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (SWIC3)

he Wall Mount Interconnect Center (SWIC3) is a cost-effective fiber enclosure designed to manage and protect up to 96 fiber connections. The low-profile, compact design makes it ideal for telecommunications closets or other installation areas where wall space is a premium. The adapter mounting method is standardized on the same snap-in Quick-Pack™ adapter plates used in our family of Rack Mount Interconnect Centers (RIC3). 1

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

6 MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Convenient Labeling — Convenient labeling system includes removable clear label holders for storing and protecting fiber documentation

Available with Quick-Pack Adapter Plates —

Door Options — Doors on enclosure and jumper guard can be ordered with independent key lock or latching options

Fiber Jumper Guard — Integrated hinged fiber

Accessories — Dust-proofing grommets included

Quick-Pack adapter plates are available with SC, ST, FC, MT-RJ, or LC adapters (see page 4.6) guard provides jumper protection and management

Optional Splice Tray Bracket — Optional bracket available for mounting multiple splice trays (not shown)

Easy Access

Dual-Level Fiber Managers

Snap-in Adapter Plates

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Doors on enclosures and jumper guard swing open a full 180° to provide complete front and side access.

Index

4.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Incorporates two independent levels of storage to enable the fiber to be routed at levels that correspond to the adapters.

Utilizes same Quick-Pack adapter plates as RIC3 enclosures with integrated latches for snap-in installation and single-finger removal.

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

WALL MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (SWIC3) Part #

System Overview

Description

SWIC3-(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . 24- to 96-port Wall Mount Interconnect Center, black. Includes dual-level fiber managers, port designation labels and removable pocket, dust-proofing grommets, strain relief hardware, cable ties, and mounting hardware. height: 311mm (12.25 in.), width: 311mm (12.25 in.), depth: 82.6mm (3.25 in)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Use (X) to specify type of lock on the enclosure: A = key lock C = thumb-turn latch

Part #

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Description

SWIC3G-(X)(X)-01 . . . . . . 24- to 96-port Wall Mount Interconnect Center with integrated jumper guard, black. Includes dual-level fiber managers, port designation labels and removable pocket, dust-proofing grommets, strain relief hardware, cable ties, and mounting hardware. height: 311mm (12.25 in.), width: 406mm (16 in.), depth: 82.6mm (3.25 in)

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Use 1st (X) to specify type of lock on the enclosure (left) door: A = key lock, C = thumb-turn latch Use 2nd (X) to specify type of lock on the guard (right) door: A = key lock, C = thumb-turn latch

Part #

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Description

TRAY-B-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . Bracket for mounting up to 4 mini splice trays to SWIC3 base MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Quick-Pack™ Fiber Adapter Plates page 4.6, Splice Trays page 4.10, Fiber Jumpers and Pigtails pages 5.2 – 5.5

S110 Connecting Block System

MINI WALL MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

The SWIC3 enables the economical interconnection of fiber in locations where wall space is limited while still providing many of the popular, installer-friendly features of the SWIC3. By accepting two flat Quick-Pack™ adapter plates, the SWIC3 can accommodate from 12-48 fibers. Also included are dust-proofing grommets to provide protection from contaminants and bend radius guides to ensure proper storage of fiber slack. Part #

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Description

SWIC3-M-01 . . . . . . . . . 12- to 48-port Mini Wall Mount Interconnect Center, black height: 218.4mm (8.6 in.), width: 185.4mm (7.3 in.), depth: 82.6mm (3.25 in.)

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

4.5

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

FLAT QUICK-PACK™ ADAPTER PLATES Siemon Quick-Pack adapter plates feature a patent pending integrated latch, which provides single-finger access to fiber even in fully populated enclosures. Choose from our wide variety of singlemode and multimode plate options.

RIC-F-SC6-01 . . . . . . . . . 3 duplex SC adapters (6 fibers)

RIC-F-SC8-01 . . . . . . . . . 4 duplex SC adapters (8 fibers)

RIC-F-SC12-01. . . . . . . . . 6 duplex SC adapters (12 fibers)

RIC-F-SA6-01. . . . . . . . . . 3 duplex ST adapters (6 fibers)

RIC-F-SA8-01. . . . . . . . . . 4 duplex ST adapters (8 fibers)

RIC-F-SA12-01. . . . . . . . . 6 duplex ST adapters (12 fibers) Only recommended for push-pull design connectors due to access constraints

RIC-F-LC12-01 . . . . . . . . . 6 duplex LC adapters (12 fibers), beige adapters

RIC-F-LC16-01 . . . . . . . . . 4 quad LC adapters (16 fibers), beige adapters

RIC-F-LC24-01 . . . . . . . . . 6 quad LC adapters (24 fibers), beige adapters

RIC-F-LCU12-01 . . . . . . . . 6 duplex LC adapters (12 fibers), blue adapters (not shown)

RIC-F-LCU16-01 . . . . . . . . 8 duplex LC adapters (16 fibers), blue adapters (not shown)

RIC-F-LCU24-01 . . . . . . . . 12 duplex LC adapters (24 fibers), blue adapters (not shown)

RIC-F-MT12-01 . . . . . . . . 6 duplex MT-RJ adapters (12 fibers)

RIC-F-MT16-01 . . . . . . . . 8 duplex MT-RJ adapters (16 fibers)

RIC-F-MT24-01 . . . . . . . . 12 duplex MT-RJ adapters (24 fibers)

RIC-F-AC6-01 . . . . . . . . . 3 duplex ST-SC adapters (6 fibers, front side = SC)

RIC-F-FC6-01. . . . . . . . . . 6 FC adapters (6 fibers)

RIC-F-BLNK-01 . . . . . . . . . Blank adapter plate

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

RIC-F-FC8-01. . . . . . . . . . 8 FC adapters (8 fibers) (not shown)

RIC-F-AC8-01 . . . . . . . . . 4 duplex ST-SC adapters (8 fibers, front side = SC) (not shown)

Glossary

Each adapter plate with icon pockets includes red, blue, black, and clear icons with paper labels. All SC and ST adapters are “universal” to support multimode and singlemode. Index

4.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

PRE-LOADED RIC3 ENCLOSURES Need to reduce backbone installation time yet maintain superior quality? Siemon offers the perfect solution with our pre-terminated RIC3 fiber enclosures. Choose from RIC3 enclosures with a variety of connector interfaces pre-loaded with adapters and pigtails for patch and splice applications. All solutions feature Siemon high quality factory fiber terminations, which guarantee significant margin over TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC specifications. Siemon offers a choice of two grades of fiber for these pre-loaded enclosures — LightSystem® (for Gigabit Ethernet) or XGLO™ (10 Gigabit Ethernet). To order pre-loaded RIC3 enclosures, use the part numbering matrix below, or call Customer Service for assistance.

R 2 4

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

J B 0 2 4 J

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

0 1

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Enclosure:

Color:

24 36 48 72

B = Black

= = = =

RIC3-24 RIC3-36 RIC3-48 RIC3-72

Connector/ Adapter Type:

# of Fibers Terminated:

Pigtail Length in Meters:

for example: 024 = 24 fibers 036 = 36 fibers 048 = 48 fibers 144 = 144 fibers See fiber enclosure capacity chart on page 4.0

for example: 01 = 1 meter

Singlemode A = SCUPC B = SCAPC C = STUPC D = LCUPC Multimode J = SC K = ST L = LC

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Cable Type:

S110 Connecting Block System

Singlemode A = pigtail, buffered, XGLO D = pigtail, buffered, LightSystem

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Multimode F = 50/125µm pigtail, buffered, XGLO H = 50/125µm pigtail, buffered, LightSystem J = 62.5/125µm pigtail, buffered, LightSystem

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Splice Trays page 4.10, Heat Shrink Sleeves page 4.10, ULTRAsplice® page 4.11, ULTRAsleeve® page 4.11, Fiber Jumpers pages 5.2 – 5.5

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

4.7

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

FIBER CONNECT PANEL (FCP3)

iemon Fiber Connect Panels (FCP3-DWR and FCP3-RACK) economically connect, protect, and manage up to 72 fibers within one Rack Mount Space. It accepts Siemon’s Quick-Pack™ adapter plates with patented single-finger access. The FCP3-DWR makes access to the connections easy via a tray that slides out the front or the rear.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

1 4

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

2 3

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Lanced Tabs — Provide convenient cable anchor

points for incoming jacketed fiber cable 2

mounted to manage and protect either mechanical or fusion splices

Front Fiber Clips — Manage up to 36 duplex fiber 5

jumpers (72 fibers total) 3

Label Holder — Protects fiber jumpers and is readily

Up to 3 Optional Splice Trays — Can be

Rear Fiber Clips — Manage cable slack while maintaining minimum bend radius requirements

removable via release of factory-installed snap-latches

High Density

Sliding Tray

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

FCP3 enclosures accommodate up to 72 fibers in only 1 RMS on a 19 inch rack. Glossary

Index

4.8

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

The FCP3-DWR (drawer version) features a tray that slides out from the front or rear, providing easy access to fiber connections even on fully loaded racks and allowing for removal of the entire tray to be placed on a worktable for more convenient termination.

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

FIBER CONNECT PANEL (FCP3)

System Overview

Part #

Description

FCP3-DWR . . . . . . . . . . . 6- to 72-port Fiber Connect Panel with sliding tray. Includes mounting brackets, housing/tray, fiber managers, grommets, label holders, and labels, black height: 43.2mm (1.7 in.), width: 482.6mm (19.0 in.), depth: 355.6mm (14.0 in.)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

FCP3-RACK . . . . . . . . . . 6- to 72-port Fiber Connect Panel with fixed tray. Includes mounting brackets, housing/cover, fiber managers and grommet, black height: 43.2mm (1.7 in.), width: 482.6mm (19.0 in.), depth: 241.3mm (9.5 in.)

FCP3-RACK

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Jumpers and Pigtails pages 5.2 – 5.5, Quick-Pack Adapter Plates page 4.6, Compression Fittings see below, Splice Trays page 4.10

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

COMPRESSION FITTINGS

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Compression fittings are utilized as an enhanced method for securing cables to FCP3 fiber enclosures. Acme threads on the body prevent skipping, allowing for faster installations of lock-nuts.

Part #

Industrial Products

Description

CF-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compression fitting

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Use (XX) to specify fiber diameter: 40 = 5.8 – 3.9mm (0.23 – 0.55 in.), 51 = 11.4 – 18.0mm (0.45 – 0.71 in.), 60 = 15.0 – 25.4mm (0.59 – 1.00 in.)

S110 Connecting Block System

FIBER MANAGEMENT TRAY (FMT)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

The Siemon Fiber Management Tray (FMT) is an economical solution for managing fiber cable slack and splice trays. The management tray has been designed to easily retrofit any standard 1 RMS CT® or MAX® Series Patch Panel and can organize up to 32 fibers. The tray is only 254mm (10 in.) deep, allowing it to readily fit into cabinet enclosures. Each enclosure can accept up to two fiber splice trays. Part #

Description

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

RMS

CT-FMT-16 . . . . . . . Fiber tray for 1 RMS CT or MAX Panel . . . . . . . . . 1 Glossary

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) CT Patch Panels pages 2.10 – 2.12, CT Couplers pages 1.16 – 1.21, MAX Patch Panels pages 2.8 – 2.9, MAX Modules pages 1.4 – 1.9, Fiber Splice Trays page 4.10

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

4.9

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

SPLICE TRAYS These aluminum trays can be ordered with either fusion, mechanical or fusion with sleeve splice holders and come with a clear, snap-on polycarbonate cover. The standard tray holds up to 24 splices. For tight areas, a mini-tray is available which accommodates up to 12 splices. Trays can be stacked for high-density applications. The splice trays are compatible with RIC, SWIC, FCP and CT-FMT fiber enclosures.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Part #

Description

TRAY-1. . . . . . . . . . Standard splice tray for up to 24 bare fusion splices TRAY-2. . . . . . . . . . Standard splice tray for up to 12 ULTRAsplice速 mechanical splices TRAY-3. . . . . . . . . . Standard splice tray for up to 24 fusion splices with sleeve protection TRAY-M-1 . . . . . . . . Mini splice tray for up to 12 bare fusion splices TRAY-M-2 . . . . . . . . Mini splice tray for up to 6 ULTRAsplice mechanical splices TRAY-M-3 . . . . . . . . Mini splice tray for up to 12 fusion splices with sleeve protection TRAY-R-4 . . . . . . . . Mass or ribbon splice tray for up to 144 fibers Compatible with Siemon MASSsleeve速 splice protectors

TRAY-3

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

4.10

TRAY-M-2

Standard Tray Dimensions

Mini Tray Dimensions

height: 103mm (4.07 in.), height: 103mm (4.07 in.), width: 298mm (11.75 in.), width: 179mm (7.06 in.), depth: 8.13mm (0.32 in.) depth: 8.13mm (0.32 in.)

Mass/Ribbon Tray Dimensions height: 103mm (4.07 in.), width: 179mm (7.06 in.), depth: 8.13mm (0.32 in.) TRAY-R-4

Fusion with sleeve splice holders can accommodate sleeve diameters from 1.5mm (0.059 in.) to 3mm (0.117 in.). Standard Fusion splice holders are designed for 900 micron buffered fibers or 250 micron coated fibers.

HEAT SHRINK SLEEVES Heat shrink sleeves provide a safe and efficient method for protecting fusion splices on either 250 or 900 micron coated fibers. Heat shrink sleeves are threaded on to fibers prior to fusion splicing and then positioned directly over splice and heated via an oven or heat gun*.

Part #

Description

HT-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40mm (1.57 in.) heat shrink sleeve HT-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60mm (2.36 in.) heat shrink sleeve Technical Tip! For cleave lengths greater than 12mm (0.47 in.), HT-60 sleeves are recommended. *Heating times may vary depending on heat source.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

ULTRASPLICE

The patented ULTRAsplice is a high performance, cost effective, mechanical fiber optic splice that is reusable and easy to install for emergency or permanent installations. The splice features a patented glass capillary alignment tube, pre-loaded with index matching gel, to allow inspection of fiber location during installation. Additionally, the collet locking nuts allow users to tune and secure the fiber for optimum alignment and retention.

Part #

Description

US-126 . . . . . . . . . . . Singlemode, yellow US-128 . . . . . . . . . . . Multimode, 125 micron, orange By utilizing a VFL during installation, fiber misalignment can easily be detected and corrected. ULTRAsplice connectors accommodate fiber buffer sizes from 250-900 microns.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

The glass capillary allows inspection of fiber misalignments. Using the Visual Fault Locator (P/N: FT-VFL), a light will amplify the fiber misalignment point and allow the user to fine tune the splice.

When fibers are properly aligned, no light will be visible. This feature allows the installer to obtain a low loss splice quickly and efficiently.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

ULTRASLEEVE®

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Dramatically reduce fiber splicing installation time and cost with Siemon’s innovative ULTRAsleeve splice cover. Simply load the fused fiber and close the sleeve — no heat shrink, curing, crimping or gluing required. ULTRAsleeve features an acrylic foam tape, which seals the sleeve and protects the splice from damage. The ULTRAsleeve fusion splice protector can accept a range of fiber buffer sizes from 250-900 microns for a single fiber or up to a 4 strand mass or ribbon fiber (singlemode or multimode). Part #

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Description

FS-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40mm (1.57 in.) fusion splice protection sleeve FS-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60mm (2.36 in.) fusion splice protection sleeve

S210 Connecting Block System

Technical Tip! For cleave lengths greater than 12mm (0.47 in.), FS-60 sleeves are recommended.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

MASSSLEEVE®

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

The MASSsleeve provides the same time-saving advantages as the ULTRAsleeve, but for mass or ribbon fiber. This protective fusion splice sleeve can accept 2-12 strand mass or ribbon fiber (singlemode or multimode). Part #

Standards Update

Description

MFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40mm (1.57 in.), fusion splice protection cover for fused ribbon fiber MFSCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . MASSsleeve closing tool length: 115mm (4.5 in.), width: 51mm (2.0 in.), height: 25mm (1.0 in.)

The MASSsleeve fusion splice protector can accept 2-12 fused ribbon fiber.

MASSsleeve closing tool is required to insure proper installation. The tool’s soft form holder and alignment pins assure accurate alignment.

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

4.11

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

PLUG AND PLAY FIBER PRODUCTS

iemon offers a solution for streamlining fiber installation and termination — the fiber Plug and Play system. This system reduces the labor and logistics of standard fiber installations by providing a preterminated, pre-tested fiber optic connection system.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Other plug and play options available. Contact Siemon Customer Service for availability.

Quick Connections — Are completed by plugging 6or 12-fiber MPO connectors in Plug and Play modules which can be snapped into wall or rack mount enclosures

Factory Termination — Significantly reduces labor

costs during installation and ensures high performance and reliability of the installed system

Pre-Terminated Fiber

Multiple Interfaces — In both standard and laser optimized 50/125µm and 62.5/125µm fiber with LC, SC and ST connections Turn-Key Solution — No connectors, termination kits or consumables required

Plug and Play Modules

Wall or Rack Mount Solutions

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

4.12

All fiber connections are factory-terminated and tested, enabling faster installation to meet tight deadlines.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Modules feature integrated latches for snap-in installation and singlefinger removal.

Siemon’s Plug and Play modules can be used with any Siemon fiber enclosure (RIC3, SWIC3, FCP3).

FIBER ENCLOSURES AND SPLICING ACCESSORIES Web Resources

PLUG AND PLAY MODULES The Plug and Play modules snap into any Siemon enclosure (RIC3, SWIC3, FCP3) to provide individual port access when transitioning from MPO connectors at the rear. The modules are factory-terminated and tested for 100% guaranteed performance with SC and ST interfaces. Installer-friendly snap-in design ensures fast and reliable installation. Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

PP6-SA(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . 6-port, multimode ST Plug and Play module, black PP6-SC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . 6-port, multimode SC Plug and Play module, black PP12-SC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . 12-port, multimode SC Plug and Play module, black PP12-LC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . 12-port, multimode LC Plug and Play module, black PP24-LC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . 24-port, multimode LC Plug and Play module, black Use (X) to specify fiber type: 5 = 50/125µm multimode, 6 = 62.5/125µm multimode, 5L = Laser Optimized, 50/125 (300 meters) Note: Laser optimized fiber is only available in LC versions.

Copper Patch Panels

6-Port SC Module

RIC3 Enclosures pages 4.2 – 4.3, SWIC3 Enclosures pages 4.4 – 4.5, FCP3 Enclosures pages 4.8 – 4.9, Fiber Jumpers pages 5.2 – 5.5

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

PLUG AND PLAY REEL AND EXTENDER SYSTEM The cable for the Plug and Play system is provided on cable reels with 6- or 12-fiber MPO connectors on each end. The cable is available in 50/125µm or 62.5/125µm riser and plenum grade fiber cable and can be ordered in any length. A cable pulling eye on one end protects the fiber during installation and facilitates fast installation. Cable extenders are also available to add onto existing Plug and Play reels and include an adapter to join the extender to the cable reel.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Part # FR6-(X)MM(X)-(XXX) . FR12-(X)MM(X)-(XXX) FE6-(X)MM(X)-(XXX) . FE12-(X)MM(X)-(XXX)

S110 Connecting Block System

Description . . . .

. . . .

MPO-to-MPO MPO-to-MPO MPO-to-MPO MPO-to-MPO

Plug Plug Plug Plug

and and and and

Play Play Play Play

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

reel, 6-fiber, with pulling eye reel, 12-fiber, with pulling eye fiber extender, 6-fiber, with adapter and pulling eye fiber extender, 12-fiber, with adapter and pulling eye

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Use (X) to specify fiber jacket type: 5 = 50/125µm multimode, 6 = 62.5/125µm multimode, 5L = Laser Optimized, 50/125 (300 meters) Use (XX) to specify fiber material: R = riser, P = plenum Use (XXX) to specify length in meters (last X to be “0” or “5” only)

PARAMETER

62.5/125µm (850nm/1300nm)

Standards Update

50/125µm (850nm/1300nm)

Max. Attenuation (dB/Km)

3.5/1.0

Min. Bandwidth (MHz-Km)

200/500

500/500

Min. Gigabit Transmission Distance (m)

275/550

550/550

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

4.13

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

XGLO™ JUMPERS AND PIGTAILS

LIGHTSYSTEM® JUMPERS AND PIGTAILS

VALULIGHT™ JUMPERS AND PIGTAILS

(pages 5.2 – 5.3)

(page 5.4)

(page 5.5)

Product 10G Applications Applications Maximum MULTIMODE Insertion Loss 0.50 (0.10 Typical) SINGLEMODE 0.40 (0.10 Typical) Minimum MULTIMODE Return Loss 30 (35 Typical) SINGLEMODE 55 (60 Typical)

1G Applications

MULTIMODE 0.65 (0.15 Typical) SINGLEMODE 0.40 (0.25 Typical)

MULTIMODE 0.75 (0.15 Typical) SINGLEMODE 0.75 (0.25 Typical)

MULTIMODE 25 (30 Typical) SINGLEMODE 55 (57 Typical)

MULTIMODE 20 (25 Typical) SINGLEMODE 50 (55 Typical)

Industrial Products

*For bandwidth specifications, please refer to applicable performance charts on relevant pages.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

5.0

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS LightSystem® XGLO™ Jumpers and Pigtails . . . . . . . 5.2 – 5.3

System Overview

LightSystem Jumpers and Pigtails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 ValuLight™ Jumpers and Pigtails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

LC Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 MT-RJ Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 SC and ST Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 LightSpeed ® ST, SC Fiber Termination Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8

Copper Patch Panels

LC Fiber Termination Upgrade Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 MT-RJ Fiber Termination Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 LightSpeed Fiber Consumables Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Replacement Tools for Fiber Termination Kit . . . . . . . . . . 5.9

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

SIEMON-GERMANY To keep pace with its impressive European expansion, Siemon opened

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

its German offices in Frankfurt. Long known for exacting standards and accuracy, Frankfurt’s industrial focus made it perfect for a

MapIT Intelligent Patching

company like Siemon, itself known for unbending quality standards. S210 Connecting Block System

Responsible for Germany, Austria, Switzerland and the Czech Republic, they support these culturally varying customers with Siemon’s universal standard of quality, service, innovation and value. As Germany’s customer base has grown, so has the organization. Focused on comprehensive training, Siemon Germany’s sales channel and certified installers are experts in the field of structured cabling, meeting and exceeding the region’s demands for forward-compatible cabling.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Siemon Verkabelungslösungen, Die Grundlage für Ihren Geschäftserfolg

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

5.1

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

XGLO ™ JUMPERS AND PIGTAILS

art of Siemon’s 10G ip™ Cabling Solution, XGLO fiber optic cable assemblies are ideal for next generation backbone or fiber-to-the-desk applications. XGLO cable assemblies feature premium fiber that meets IEEE 802.3 10 Gigabit Ethernet Standard as well as IEC-60793-2-10 and TIA-492AAAC specifications for laser bandwidth Differential Mode Delay (DMD) specifications. In addition, these assemblies offer a superior connector polish that exceeds all ANSI/TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC insertion loss and return loss requirements.

" Supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

2 3

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S210 Connecting Block System

5 S110 Connecting Block System

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Standards Update

Robust Performance — Laser bandwidth optimized cable reduces impurities in the core of fiber, ensuring robust 10 Gigabit Ethernet transmission

Durable — Exceeds TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC requirements for aging, exposure to humidity, temperature extremes, impact, vibration, coupling strength, and cable resistance to stress and strain

Multimode and Singlemode — 50/125µm

Standard Lengths — Jumpers available in 1, 2, 3, Easy Identification — Connectors color coded per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3

multimode and singlemode assemblies available

Dust Caps — Dust caps included to protect polished 8

ferrule from dirt and damage Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Polarity Connection — SC duplexing clip allows for polarity correction

and 5 meter standard lengths

Glossary

5.2

Pigtails — Available in 1 meter lengths

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

XGLO JUMPERS AND PIGTAILS ™

These precision cable assemblies are warranted for 20 years and ensure optimum applications support for 10 Gigabit Ethernet serial transmission when installed in a qualified XGLO system. SC, LC and SC-LC hybrids available.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

XGLO 50/125µm MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS FJ2-SCSC5L-(XX)AQ . . . . . SC to SC aqua duplex jumper FJ2-LCLC5L-(XX)AQ. . . . . . LC to LC aqua duplex jumper FJ2-LCSC5L-(XX)AQ . . . . . LC to SC aqua duplex jumper Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

XGLO 50/125µm MULTIMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

FP1B-SC5L-01AQ . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, aqua, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) FP1B-LC5L-01AQ . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, aqua, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

XGLO SINGLEMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS FJ2-SCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . . SC to SC yellow duplex jumper FJ2-LCULCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . LC to LC yellow duplex jumper FJ2-LCUSCUL-(XX). . . . . . . LC to SC yellow duplex jumper Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

XGLO SINGLEMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS S210 Connecting Block System

FP1B-SCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) FP1B-LCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 50/125µm Multimode Min. Cable Bandwidth (MHz km) Max. Insertion Loss (dB) Min. Return Loss (dB)

Standards Update

Singlemode

850nm

1300nm

850nm*

n/a

1500

500

2000

n/a

0.50 (0.10 Typical)

0.40 (0.10 Typical)

30 (35 Typical)

55 (60 Typical)

Glossary

*Laser Bandwidth

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.3

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

LIGHTSYSTEM® JUMPERS AND PIGTAILS Siemon offers a comprehensive line of fiber jumpers for connecting fiber links. Choose from multimode or singlemode jumpers and pigtails. Assemblies are available in standard lengths of 1, 2, 3, and 5 meters. Custom lengths are also available. Each and every terminated connector is optically tested so that you can be assured that 100% of Siemon-built cable assemblies meet stringent performance specifications (shown below). All jumpers are manufactured using the finest quality connectors and OFNR riser grade fiber.

MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS FJ2-SCSC(X)MM-(XX) . FJ2-SASA(X)MM-(XX) . FJ2-SASC(X)MM-(XX) . FJ2-LCLC(X)MM-(XX) . . FJ2-LCSC(X)MM-(XX). . FJ2-LCSA(X)MM-(XX) . . FJ2R-MTMT(X)MM-(XX) FJ2R-MTSC(X)MM-(XX) FJ2R-MTSA(X)MM-(XX)

. . . . . . . . .

SC to SC orange duplex jumper ST to ST orange duplex jumper ST to SC orange duplex jumper LC to LC orange duplex jumper LC to SC orange duplex jumper LC to ST orange duplex jumper MT-RJ to MT-RJ orange duplex jumper MT-RJ to SC orange duplex jumper MT-RJ to ST orange duplex jumper

MULTIMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS FP1B-SC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, orange, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) FP1B-SA(X)MM-01 . . . . . . ST simplex pigtail, orange, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) FP1B-LC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, orange, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) Use (X) to specify multimode fiber type/jacket color: “–” = 62.5/125µm fiber, orange jacket, 5 = 50/125µm fiber, orange jacket

SINGLEMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS

SINGLEMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS

FJ2-SCUSCU-(XX) . FJ2-SAUSAU-(XX) . FJ2-SAUSCU-(XX) . FJ2-LCULCU-(XX) . FJ2-LCUSCU-(XX) . FJ2-LCUSAU-(XX) .

FP1B-SCU-01 . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) FP1B-SAU-01 . . . . . . . . . ST simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) FP1B-LCU-01 . . . . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

. . . . . .

SC to SC yellow duplex jumper ST to ST yellow duplex jumper ST to SC yellow duplex jumper LC to LC yellow duplex jumper LC to SC yellow duplex jumper LC to ST yellow duplex jumper

Use (XX) to specify cable length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.) Custom lengths are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

Standards Update

Glossary

50/125µm Multimode Min. Cable Bandwidth (MHz km)

1300nm

850nm

1300nm

500

200

500

Min. Return Loss (dB) Index

W W W

S I E M O N

62.5/125µm Multimode

850nm Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

5.4

" Supports Gigabit Ethernet

C O M

Singlemode n/a n/a

0.65 (0.15 Typical)

0.40 (0.25 Typical)

25 (30 Typical)

55 (57 Typical)

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

VALULIGHT JUMPERS AND PIGTAILS ™

Siemon is pleased to announce its new ValuLight line of fiber cable assemblies. These jumpers and pigtails provide exceptional value at a very competitive cost. ValuLight fiber cable assemblies meet TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and ISO/IEC 11801 specifications for insertion loss and return loss. They are ideal for commercial cabling data applications up to and including 1 gigabit. Cords are available in popular connector types in both multimode and singlemode fiber versions.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS J2-SCSC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . SC to SC duplex jumper J2-SASA(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . ST to ST duplex jumper J2-SASC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . ST to SC duplex jumper J2-MTMT(X)-(XX). . . . . . . . MT-RJ to MT-RJ duplex jumper J2-LCLC(X)-(XX). . . . . . . . . LC to LC duplex jumper J2-MTSC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . MT-RJ to SC duplex jumper J2-MTSA(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . MT-RJ to SA duplex jumper J2-LCMT(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . LC to MT-RJ duplex jumper J2-LCSC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . LC to SC duplex jumper J2-LCSA(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . LC to SA duplex jumper Use (X) to specify fiber type: 5 = 50/125µm, 6 = 62.5/125µm Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

MULTIMODE PIGTAILS Industrial Products

P1B-SC(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, orange, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) P1B-SA(X)-01. . . . . . . . . . ST simplex pigtail, orange, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) P2B-MT(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . MT-RJ duplex pigtail, orange, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) P1B-LC(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, orange, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) Use (X) to specify fiber type: 5 = 50/125µm, 6 = 62.5/125µm

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

SINGLEMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS

SINGLEMODE PIGTAILS

J2-SCSCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . SC to SC yellow duplex jumper J2-SASAP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . ST to ST yellow duplex jumper J2-SASCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . ST to SC yellow duplex jumper J2-LCLCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . LC to LC yellow duplex jumper J2-LCSCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . LC to SC yellow duplex jumper J2-LCSAP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . LC to SA yellow duplex jumper Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

P1B-SCP-01 . . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) P1B-SAP-01 . . . . . . . . . . ST simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) P1B-LCP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

Min. Cable Bandwidth (MHz km) Max. Insertion Loss (dB) Min. Return Loss (dB)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 50/125µm Multimode

S110 Connecting Block System

62.5/125µm Multimode

850nm

1300nm

850nm

1300nm

500

200

500

Standards Update

Singlemode n/a n/a

0.75 (0.15 Typical)

0.75 (0.25 Typical)

20 (25 Typical)

50 (55 Typical)

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.5

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

LC FIELD-INSTALLABLE CONNECTORS Siemon LC products offer all the benefits of SC and ST connections in a Small Form Factor (SFF), high-density design. LC adapter products are compatible with our popular MAX,® CT,® FOB, and SM® work area and telecommunications room products, providing a wide variety of installation options. LC connectors take just 2 minutes to terminate, using the Siemon LightSpeed ® Termination Kit. MULTIMODE

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

FC1-LC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . LC Simplex connector, multimode, buffered fiber, beige boot FC2-LC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . LC Duplex connector, multimode, jacketed fiber, beige boots

SINGLEMODE FC1-LC-SM-B02 . . . . . . . . LC Simplex connector, singlemode, buffered fiber, white boot FC1-LC-SM-J02 . . . . . . . . LC Simplex connector, singlemode, jacketed fiber, white boot

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Note: Siemon LC jacketed fiber connectors require the use of 1.6mm jacketed fiber cables. Add “-B” to the end of part number for bulk pack (simplex: 100/box, duplex: 50/box). LightSpeed Termination Kit page 5.8, LC Upgrade Kit page 5.8

Part #

Description

FC2-MT6MM . . . . . . . . . MT-RJ duplex connector with pins (male), multimode 62.5/125µm, beige FC2-MT5MM . . . . . . . . . MT-RJ duplex connector with pins (male), multimode 50/125µm, black

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Note: Siemon MT-RJ connectors include black boots and are compatible with 3.0mm round duplex jacketed or buffered fiber cables. MT-RJ Termination Kit page 5.8

Index

5.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

SC AND ST CONNECTORS SC DUPLEX CONNECTORS SC connectors have a duplexing clip, which allows each connector to be removed individually. In the event fiber polarity is reversed during termination, there’s no need to discard the connector. Simply remove connectors from the clip and switch to correct the mistake, saving valuable installation time and money. The duplexing clip also speeds troubleshooting. In the event there’s a fault with a single connection, an individual connector can be removed from the clip and re-terminated without disturbing the adjacent connector.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

MULTIMODE Copper Patch Panels

FC2-SC-MM-J . . . . . . . . . Duplex, jacketed fiber, one black boot and one beige boot FC2-SC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . Duplex, buffered fiber, two beige boots FC2-SC-MM . . . . . . . . . . Duplex, jacketed/buffered fiber, one black and one beige jacketed boot, two beige buffered boots

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

SINGLEMODE FC2-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . Duplex, jacketed fiber FC2-SC-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . Duplex, buffered fiber Use (XX) to specify boot color: 02 = white, 06 = blue Add “-B” to the end of part number for bulk pack (50/box).

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

SC SIMPLEX CONNECTORS SC simplex connectors employ an outer housing that is color-coded in accordance with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and ISO/IEC 11801 Ed2.0 requirements (beige for multimode and blue for singlemode). MULTIMODE FC1-SC-MM-J80 FC1-SC-MM-J01 FC1-SC-MM-B80 FC1-SC-MM-01 .

SINGLEMODE . . . .

. . . .

Simplex, jacketed fiber, beige boot Simplex, jacketed fiber, black boot Simplex, buffered fiber, beige boot Simplex, jacketed/buffered fiber, one black jacketed boot and one beige buffered boot FC1-SC-MM-80 . . . . . . . . Simplex, jacketed/buffered fiber, one beige jacketed boot and one beige buffered boot

FC1-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . Simplex, jacketed fiber FC1-SC-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . Simplex, buffered fiber FC1-SC-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . Simplex, jacketed/buffered fibers, one jacketed boot, one buffered boot

Use (XX) to specify boot color: 02 = white, 06 = blue Add “-B” to the end of part number for bulk pack (100/box).

The ST connector employs a rugged metal bayonet coupling ring with radial ramps which facilitate engagement to the studs of the mating adapter. Two ST connectors are available for jacketed fiber, one with a beige boot and one with a black boot. The two colors enable easy identification of the fibers when terminating individual connectors to form a duplex jumper. MULTIMODE . . . .

. . . .

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

ST SIMPLEX CONNECTORS

FC1-SA-MM-J80 FC1-SA-MM-J01 FC1-SA-MM-B80 FC1-SA-MM-01 .

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

. . . .

Jacketed fiber, beige boot Jacketed fiber, black boot Buffered fiber, beige boot Jacketed/Buffered fiber, black jacketed boot and beige buffered boot FC1-SA-MM-80 . . . . . . . . Jacketed/Buffered fiber, beige jacketed boot and beige buffered boot

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

SINGLEMODE FC1-SA-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . Jacketed fiber FC1-SA-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . Buffered fiber FC1-SA-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . Jacketed/Buffered fiber, one jacketed boot, one buffered boot

Glossary

Use (XX) to specify boot color: 02 = white, 06 = blue Add “-B” to the end of part number for bulk pack (100/box).

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.7

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

LIGHTSPEED® ST, SC FIBER TERMINATION KIT Achieve faster fiber terminations and higher performance with Siemon’s LightSpeed Termination Kit. The Siemon fiber termination kit contains all the tools required for termination of multimode or singlemode ST or SC connectors — packaged in a rugged canvas carrying case. Use the optional LC Upgrade Kit (see below) for LC connector terminations. All consumables, tools and other termination products supplied with the kit can be ordered separately.

Part #

Description

FTERM-L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . LightSpeed Fiber Termination Kit for ST and SC multimode connectors*

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

*All consumables including primer, adhesive and polishing films are contained in the consumables kit and must be ordered separately.

LC FIBER TERMINATION UPGRADE KIT The Siemon LC upgrade kit is used in conjunction with the LightSpeed Termination Kit (FTERM-L2) and has all the accessories to terminate LC connectors using Siemon’s exclusive LightSpeed adhesive. The kit includes an LC microscope head (that attaches to the microscope included with the FTERM-L2), an LC polishing puck and a micro-torch* (to shrink the color-coded LC crimp sleeve tubings).

Industrial Products

Part # MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Description

FTERM-LC . . . . . . . . . . . . LC Fiber Termination Upgrade Kit (used in conjunction with FTERM-L2)

Note: Contents of FTERM-LC are also available individually. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information. *Butane fuel not included.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

MT-RJ FIBER TERMINATION KIT The Siemon MT-RJ termination kit makes field termination of MT-RJ connectors quick and easy. MT-RJ duplex connectors can be terminated in less than 2 minutes, which equates to less than 1 minute per fiber. The kit employs proven no-epoxy/no-polish termination technology. All tools required to terminate MT-RJ connectors are included in a durable canvas carrying case.

Part #

Description

FTERM-MT . . . . . . . . . . . MT-RJ Fiber Termination Kit FT-VFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual source visual fault locator

Glossary

Index

5.8

Note: Contents of FTERM-MT are also available individually. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES, CONNECTORS AND KITS Web Resources

LIGHTSPEED FIBER CONSUMABLES KIT ®

The termination kit includes Siemon’s LightSpeed adhesive system, which features a 30-second cure time. The adhesive is tinted green to provide an easy visual indication during the termination process and has an extended 1-year shelf life.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

FT-CKIT-L2* . . . . . . . . . . . Consumables kit for use with fiber termination kit (FTERM-L2). Includes enough consumables to perform a minimum of 200 multimode or singlemode terminations FT-PRBOT-L . . . . . . . . . . . Primer bottle (3.5mL) FT-ADH-L*. . . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive Syringe (5cc) FT-ALPAD . . . . . . . . . . . . Alcohol pads FT-WIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . Dry lint-free wipes FT-SYRMTIP . . . . . . . . . . . Syringe tip needles w/covers FT-PF12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12µm air polish film, gray FT-PF3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3µm air polish film, pink FT-PF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1µm air polish film, purple FT-FF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Finishing film, white FT-PF6** . . . . . . . . . . . . 6µm recovery film, bronze

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

*This product contains material with a time and temperature sensitive shelf life. Store between 40 – 100 degrees F (4.4 – 38.5°C) and verify expiration date marked on product prior to use (1 year from date of purchase from Siemon.) **This recovery film is optional and not included with the consumables kit.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

REPLACEMENT TOOLS FOR FIBER TERMINATION KIT Siemon’s offers a full line of replacement tools in the event that a tool is lost or has used up its life expectancy. The tools available are a complete contents list of the exact tools provided in our fiber termination kit.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

Part # FT-MS400. . . FT-SCRIBE . . . CI-SCISSORS FT-CRIMP . . . FT-PAD . . . . . FT-PUCK . . . . FT-TMPL . . . . FT-JSTRP . . . . FT-BSTRP. . . .

Description . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

400X power microscope Double bladed fiber cleaver Electrician scissors Crimp tool w/3-position die for ST/SC/LC 152.4mm (6 in.) x 152.4mm (6 in.) polishing pad SC/ST compatible polishing puck Template for SC/ST and LC connectors Jacket stripper Buffer stripper

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.9

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

RS3 RACK SYSTEM

RS RACK SYSTEM

EXTENDED DEPTH RS RACK SYSTEM

(pages 6.2 – 6.3)

(pages 6.4 – 6.5)

(page 6.5)

Vertical Side 117mm x 152mm Rail Capacity (4.6 in. x 6.0 in.) Cable Manager Multi-piece snap-on Covers Accessories Rack Top Cable Tray, Power Strip, RS3 Series Horizontal Cable Managers, Rear Cable Managers

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

76mm x 152mm (3.0 in. x 6.0 in.)

76mm x 370mm (3.0 in. x 14.5 in.)

None

Rack Top Cable Tray, Power Strip, RS Series Horizontal Cable Managers, Vertical Patching Channels, Vertical Cable Managers, Rear Cable Managers

Power Strip, RS Series Horizontal Cable Managers, Vertical Patching Channels, Vertical Cable Managers, Rear Cable Managers

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

CABLE MANAGER CAPACITY TABLE The following capacity table is provided for planning purposes. The values shown reflect a combination of actual and calculated capacity and represent a 100% fill. These values were derived using properly dressed cables and can be adversely affected by poor cable routing practices.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

PART NUMBER HORIZONTAL MANAGERS PH-3 RS3-RWM-2 RS3-RWM-2DS (Front/Rear) RWM-1 RWM-1DS (Front/Rear) RS-RWM-2 RS-RWM-2DS S110-RWM-(XX) S110-RWM2-(XX) S143 S144 S145 S146 S147 WM-143-5 WM-144-5 WM-145-5

0.15

CABLE DIAMETER (SQ. IN.) 0.17 0.19 0.21

0.23

0.25

6.10 6.3 6.3 6.9 6.9 6.5 6.5 6.9 6.9 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.13 6.8 6.8 6.8

283 332 332 122 122 332 332 126 306 99 203 422 737 1159 99 203 422

220 258 258 95 95 258 258 98 238 77 158 328 574 902 77 158 328

176 207 207 76 76 207 207 78 190 62 126 263 459 722 62 126 263

144 169 169 62 62 169 169 64 156 50 103 215 376 591 50 103 215

120 141 141 51 51 141 141 53 130 42 86 179 313 493 42 86 179

101 119 119 43 43 119 119 45 110 35 73 152 265 417 35 73 152

6.4 – 6.5 6.4 – 6.5 6.2 – 6.3 6.2 – 6.3 6.8 6.7 6.7 6.5 6.5 6.6 – 6.7 6.6 – 6.7

496 283 834 527 283 1292 832 1488 283 975 1292

386 220 649 410 220 1006 647 1158 220 759 1006

309 176 519 329 176 805 518 927 176 607 805

253 144 425 269 144 659 424 759 144 497 659

210 120 354 224 120 549 353 633 120 414 549

178 101 300 190 101 465 299 535 101 351 465

RACKS & VERTICAL CABLE MANAGERS RS (Channel) RS (Front) RS3 (Channel) RS3 (Front) RS-CH RS-CNL RS-CNL3 RS-E (Channel) RS-E (Front) VPC-6 (Front) VPC-6 (Rear)

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

6.0

CATALOG PAGE NUMBERS

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS RS3 Cable Management Rack System . . . . . . . . . 6.2 – 6.3

System Overview

RS3 Series Horizontal Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 RS Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 – 6.5

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Extended Depth RS Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 RS Series Horizontal Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6.5 VPC Vertical Patching Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.6 – 6.7 Vertical Cable Management Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7

Copper Patch Panels

Rack Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 WM Series Horizontal Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 RWM Series Horizontal Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

S110®/S210® Horizontal Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 Panel Access Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 Rack Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

19 to 23 Inch Panel Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 Double-Sided Heavy Duty 19 Inch Equipment Shelf . . . . 6.11 Single-Sided 19 Inch Equipment Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

MAX® Zone Unit Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 Stand-off Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 Rear Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Rack-IT™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 Reusable Hook and Loop Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . 6.13 Cable Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13

SIEMON-SHANGHAI Located in downtown Shanghai, an emerging economic center of the

Industrial Products

Asia Pacific region, Siemon AP, was established in 2000. With their dedicated and steadily growing staff, Siemon AP provides a strong support channel in this globally significant territory, offering a hub for sales development, marketing, technical support and customer service. As the Siemon Asia Pacific headquarters, the Shanghai office manages activity in Great China, Singapore, Australia, and New Zealand. The AP network includes three additional China offices in Beijing, Chengdu and Guangzhou, as well as three Australia locations in Sydney, Brisbane and Melbourne. Siemon AP’s training and education programs extend the

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

industry-best Siemon support channel through its continual training of Sales reps and certified installers in India, the Philippines and S

Standards Update

outh Korea. Glossary

Siemon Network Cabling Solutions, The Foundation for Your Business Success

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

6.1

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

RS3 CABLE MANAGEMENT RACK SYSTEM

iemon’s new RS3 series cable management rack system provides high capacity cable management for routing of both horizontal/backbone cabling and patch cords. Vertical channels with hinged cable manager covers conceal and route patch cables for a clean, professional installation.

Cable Tray Compatibility — Header bars incorporate unique slotted holes for securing cable trays routed perpendicular or parallel with RS3 racks

Side Stackable — RS3 design allows racks to be side-stacked without interference between adjacent racks

Deeper Channels — 116.8mm x 152.4mm (4.6 in. x 6 in.) vertical side rails provide higher cable capacity over standard rack designs

Industrial Products

Cable Access Holes — Access holes on side rails allow cables to be routed between adjacent racks

Modular Power — Mounting holes on rear of RS3

Flexible Management — Side rails compatible with Siemon’s quarter-turn hook and loop cable managers for proper management of cable bundles

accommodate Siemon’s vertical power strip (p/n RS-P04) to provide power to active equipment mounted in rack

MapIT Intelligent Patching 8

S110 Connecting Block System

4 1

High Capacity — 76mm x 152mm (3 in. x 6 in.) front vertical managers provide capacity for approximately 190 category 6 patch cords

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

S210 Connecting Block System

Anchoring — Mounting holes provided for anchoring

racks to floor

Hinged Front Covers

Rounded Managers

Matching Horizontal Managers

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Front covers fully conceal all vertical patch cord routing through an easy to use, modular design. Each section can be individually hinged in either direction to facilitate quick and easy changes. Covers include positive securing snap latches for troublefree fastening.

The individual managers on the vertical channels are rounded to allow patch cords to seamlessly enter and exit the managers without risk of cable deformation.

Siemon’s new RS3 series horizontal cable managers provide a fully integrated appearance and same hinging design for comprehensive management of patch cords.

RS3 Series Horizontal Cable Managers page 6.3, Rack Accessories page 6.8 Index

6.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

RS3 CABLE MANAGEMENT RACK SYSTEM Part #

Description

System Overview

RS3-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1m x 0.48m (7 ft. x 19 in.) aluminum enhanced cable management rack system, 45 RMS. Includes rack assembly hardware, vertical cable management channels with hinged covers, and ground lug

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

height: 2.1m (7 ft.), width: 685.0mm (27 in.), depth: 457.2mm (18 in.)

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Add “-S” for steel. Note: Aluminum racks are intended for use with connecting hardware and cable managers only. For mounting of active equipment, steel racks are recommended.

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

Industrial Products

RS3 SERIES HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGERS These new horizontal cable managers are designed for use with Siemon’s RS3 series racks and use the same covered design as the vertical managers. The hinged front cover snaps easily over cable managers and provides a concealed routing patch into the vertical cable management of the RS3 providing a clean patching environment.

Part #

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Description

RS3-RWM-2 . . . . . . . . . . Single-sided 19 in. cable manager, 2 RMS height: 88.9mm (3.5 in.), width: 0.48m (19 in.), depth: 101.6mm (4 in.)

S110 Connecting Block System

RS3-RWM-2

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

RS3-RWM-2DS . . . . . . . . Double-sided 19 in. cable manager, 2 RMS height: 88.9mm (3.5 in.), width: 0.48m (19 in.), depth: 203.2mm (8 in.)

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

RS3-RWM-2DS Glossary

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0 Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

6.3

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

RS RACK SYSTEM

iemon’s RS series cable management rack system combines a 2.1 meter (7 ft.) x 19 inch black rack with cable management accessories to provide a complete cable management solution. Ideal for all size installations, the rack features fully usable 45 RMS capacity.

Cable Tray Compatibility — Header bars incorporate unique slotted holes for securing cable trays routed perpendicular to or parallel with RS racks

Modular Management — Mounting holes for twist-

lock cable managers are located in many positions on the front, side, back, and within channel for maximum flexibility 3

Anchoring — Mounting holes provided for anchoring

Modular Power — An optional 1.2m (4 ft.) power

rack to floor

strip is available and mounts directly to rear of rack for providing power to active electronics mounted in rack 5

Twist-Lock Cable Managers — High capacity twist-lock cable managers lock into place quickly without use of screws or mounting tools and can be easily located in a wide range of mounting holes to provide customized cable management

MapIT Intelligent Patching

3 S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

High Capacity Side Rails

Complete Management System

Optional Vertical Cable Channels

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

76mm (3 in.) x 152mm (6 in.) vertical side rail channels on rack provide large area for routing high volumes of horizontal or backbone cables.

Glossary

Fully comprehensive cable management can be created using Siemon’s new Vertical Patching Channel (page 6.6) and RS Series Horizontal Cable Managers (page 6.5).

RS Series Horizontal Cable Managers page 6.5, Vertical Patching Channel pages 6.6 – 6.7, Vertical Cable Managers page 6.7, Rack Accessories page 6.8

Index

6.4

Optional vertical cable management channels allow a high volume of patch cords to be routed between two racks or within a single rack (see page 6.7).

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

RS RACK SYSTEM Part #

Description

System Overview

RS-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1m x 0.48m (7 ft. x 19 in.) aluminum cable management rack system. Includes: rack assembly hardware, 10 high-capacity cable managers, 10 hook and loop cable managers, grommets, and ground lug height: 2.1m (7 ft.), width: 609.6mm (24 in.), depth: 457.2mm (18 in.)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Add “-S” for steel Note: Aluminum racks are intended for use with connecting hardware and cable managers only. For mounting of active equipment, steel racks are recommended.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

EXTENDED DEPTH RS RACK SYSTEM

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Siemon has developed a rack for managing extra large volumes of horizontal cables. The new extended depth rack features vertical channels which are 0.37m (14.5 in.) deep. These channels include multiple mounting holes allowing the user to configure Siemon’s twist-lock hook and loop cable managers for properly managing large individual bundles of cables. The footers have also been designed to retain the 0.61m (24 in.) footprint. Part #

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Description

RS-07E. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1m x 0.48m (7 ft. x 19 in.) aluminum extra-deep (0.37m [14.5 in]) cable management rack system. Includes rack assembly hardware, 19 high-capacity cable managers, 10 hook and loop managers, grommets and ground lug. height: 2.1m (7 ft.), width: 609.6mm (24 in.), depth: 609.6mm (24 in.)

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

S110 Connecting Block System

RS SERIES HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGERS

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Siemon’s new RS series cable managers are designed for use with Siemon’s new vertical patching channel (see pages 6.6 – 6.7). The hinged cover extends across the vertical channels to fully conceal patch cords into the VPC. Part #

RS-RWM-2

Description

RS-RWM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . Single-sided 19 in. cable manager, 2 RMS height: 88.9mm (3.5 in.), width: 0.48m (19 in.), depth: 101.6mm (4 in.) RS-RWM-2DS . . . . . . . . . Double-sided 19 in. cable manager, 2 RMS height: 88.9mm (3.5 in.), 0.48m (19 in.), depth: 203.2mm (8 in.)

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

RS-RWM-2DS

Glossary

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0 Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

6.5

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

VPC VERTICAL PATCHING CHANNEL

iemon’s new Vertical Patching Channel (VPC) sets a new standard for cable management systems by improving appearance, accessibility and cable routing on both the front and rear of the rack. Designed as a stand-alone manager to be mounted between adjacent racks the VPC features a full length, hinged door on the front to conceal patch cord routing. The rear manager is open for ready routing of large bundles of horizontal/backbone cabling. With its easy access design, high capacity and professional appearance, the VPC is ideal for both installers and end users alike. 1

Cable Access Holes — Allow cables to route easily between the front and rear of the channel

Rounded Managers — All of the cable routing points on the vertical channels are rounded to allow patch cords to seamlessly enter and exit the managers without risk of cable deformation

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

Open Compatibility — Mounting holes on side of VPC provides compatibility with common 76mm and 152mm (3 in. and 6 in.) industry racking systems including Siemon’s RS-07 and XLBET frames as well as Siemon’s extended depth RS rack system

Add-on Management — Optional quarter-turn

of a single knob, the full-length cover hinges in either direction to provide access to the entire vertical channel

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Full Length Hinged Covers — With an easy turn

cable managers can be mounted within vertical channels for additional management such as segregation of application specific cords

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Hinged Managers

Side Stackable

High Capacity

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Rear channel retainers can be hinged in either direction and are removable enabling relocation to any position along the rear vertical channel.

Index

6.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

The VPC is fully side stackable for use in ultra high density environments. The doors can be individually opened 60° or adjacent doors can be manually opened for full access.

The 6 in. x 6 in. front vertical managers feature 36 sq. in. of space providing capacity for approximately (350) category 6 patch cords to meet the rigorous demands of today’s high density environments. The rear channel features the same capacity with an open design to facilitate easy routing to termination fields.

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

VPC VERTICAL PATCHING CHANNEL Part #

Description

System Overview

VPC-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1m x 152mm (7 ft. x 6 in.) vertical patching channel. Includes front cover, 6 rear channel retainers and mounting hardware

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

height: 2.1m (7.0 ft.), width: 152.4mm (6.0 in.), depth: 300.8m (12.0 in.)

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

RS Rack System pages 6.4 – 6.5, Extended Depth RS Rack System page 6.5, RS Series Horizontal Cable Managers page 6.5, XLBET Frames pages 10.8 – 10.9

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) RS-07 shown with two VPC-6’s

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

VERTICAL CABLE MANAGEMENT CHANNELS Siemon’s single-sided vertical cable management channels provide an economic solution for managing large cable bundles between adjacent racks. They feature an open design with six easily configured dual-hinge managers (additional managers available separately) that enable customized management of patch cords. Cable access holes allow cords to be routed between the front and rear of the channel. Mounting holes within the channel accommodate Siemon’s quarter-turn cable managers (p/n RS-CH) and quarter-turn hook and loop cable managers (p/n RS-VCM) for further customization of cable routing. The channels are available in both 76mm (3 in.) and 152mm (6 in.) depths for use with standard 76mm (3 in.) racks or 152mm (6 in.) deep cable management racks such as Siemon’s RS-07. Alternately, the 76mm (3 in.) deep channels can be stacked back to back with the deeper cable management racks to optimize management of cables on both sides of the channel.

RS-CNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1m x 152mm (7 ft. x 6 in.) vertical cable management channel for mounting between 152mm (6 in.) deep racks (includes mounting hardware)

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

RS-CNL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1m x 76mm (7 ft. x 3 in.) vertical cable management channel for mounting between 76mm (3 in.) deep racks (includes mounting hardware)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

RS Rack System pages 6.4 – 6.5, Extended Depth RS Rack System page 6.5, XLBET Frames pages 10.8 – 10.9 See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

Glossary

Two RS-07’s shown with three RS-CNL’s Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

6.7

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

RACK ACCESSORIES Siemon offers a full range of accessories to allow further customization of Siemon racking systems.

RS-CH. . . . . . . . . . . Box of 10 quarter-turn cable managers

RS-VCM. . . . . . . . . . . Box of 10 quarter-turn hook and loop cable managers [includes roll of 10 457.2mm (18 in.) hook and loop black cable managers and 10 quarter-turn mounting clips]

MapIT Intelligent Patching

RS-P04 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2m (4 ft.) power strip for rear of rack, ten 15A outlets resettable fuse (includes mounting hardware)

RS-CNL-MGR. . . . . . . . . . Box of 10 channel retainers for use with VPC, RS-CNL and RS-CNL3

SCREW-1224. . . . . . . #12-24 Slotted head screws with washers, black, bag of 200

RS-TRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack top cable tray [includes roll of 9 black 457.2mm (18 in.) hook and loop cable managers and 9 quarter-turn mounting clips] Note: Not compatible with Siemonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s extended depth RS series racks. RS-TRAY mounted on top of RS-07

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

WM SERIES HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGERS The WM series cable managers provide increased strength and do not interfere with panels mounted above or below. They are a popular and economical solution for providing a clean and simple means of organizing small-to-large bundles of cables and patch cords.

WM-143-5

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Part # Standards Update

Description

RMS

WM-143-5 . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal cable manager with five S143 hangers . . . 1 WM-144-5 . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal cable manager with five S144 hangers . . . 2 WM-145-5 . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal cable manager with five S145 hangers . . . 2

WM-144-5

Glossary

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

WM-145-5

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0 Index

6.8

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

RWM SERIES HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGERS The multi-access horizontal cable managers are designed to provide both front and rear cable management in a compact, 1 RMS space The managers feature high capacity slots for entering and exiting cables, removable covers to conceal patch cords, and an innovative cable retention design to prevent patch cords from falling out when the covers are removed. The rear of the RWM-1 features attachments for using Siemon’s hook and loop cable managers (see page 6.13).

Part #

System Overview

RWM-1

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Description

RWM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single-sided horizontal cable manager with cover RWM-1DS . . . . . . . . . . . Double-sided horizontal cable manager with covers RWM-1DS

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

S110®/S210® HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGERS

Industrial Products

The S110/S210 cable managers provide an economical, superior cable management solution in a compact space. Their 1 RMS and 2 RMS size and large capacity provide excellent cable management for 19 inch rack mount installations.

Part #

Description

S110-RWM-01 . . . . . . . . S110/S210 horizontal cable manager with covers, black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S110-RWM-02 . . . . . . . . S110/S210 horizontal cable manager with covers, white . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S110-RWM2-01 . . . . . . . S110/S210 horizontal cable manager with covers, black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S110-RWM2-02 . . . . . . . S110/S210 horizontal cable manager with covers, white . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

RMS ......1

Covers are included with the cable managers to provide a clean patching appearance.

......1

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

......2 ......2

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0 Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

6.9

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

PANEL ACCESS HINGE Siemon’s panel access hinge allows 2 RMS wall or rack-mounted 19 inch patch panels to rotate forward, providing access to the termination field on the back of panels. Once mounted, the panel can be hinged in either the 90° or 120° position to facilitate the use of a single-position or multi-pair impact tool. The integrated 1 RMS cable manager has removable cable managers to prevent interference when hinging stacked units. This innovative design is compatible with 19 inch free standing racks, wall-mount racks and stand-off brackets. Part #

Description

PH-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 RMS panel access hinge includes integral 1 RMS panel with 5 removable cable managers and accepts one 2 RMS or two 1 RMS patch panels

PH-3 closed

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

PH-3 hinged open

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

RACK HINGE Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Siemon rack hinges are designed to allow rack mounted patch panels to swing out (horizontally) from the rack. The hinges are available in 2 and 3 RMS sizes which can be combined to mount 4 and 6 RMS panels. The 2 RMS hinge is capable of mounting one 2 RMS or two 1 RMS panels. Part #

Description

RMS

S210 Connecting Block System

RHNG-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack hinge . . . . . . . 2 RHNG-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack hinge . . . . . . . 3

S110 Connecting Block System

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

19 TO 23 INCH PANEL ADAPTERS These adapters allow 19 inch panels to be mounted to 23 inch racks. The adapters are designed so the panels fit flush with other 23 inch products when mounted (screws included). They can be end-stacked to support larger panel sizes. Part #

Description

1923-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 to 23 inch panel adapter (set of 2) Glossary

Index

6.10

Use (X) to specify adapter size: 2 = 2 RMS, 3 = 3 RMS, 4 = 4 RMS, 5 = 5 RMS, 6 = 6 RMS Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

DOUBLE-SIDED HEAVY DUTY 19 INCH EQUIPMENT SHELF Siemon’s double-sided 19 inch equipment shelf is designed to support heavy equipment loads up to 68.1 kg (150 lbs.). The shelf is designed for use with any 152mm (6 in.) deep rack and is secured to the front and rear of the rack channels. Shelf accommodates equipment up to 432mm (17 in.) wide. Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

SH-D19-01 . . . . . . . . . 19 inch double-sided equipment shelf for 152mm (6 in.) deep racks, solid, 3 RMS height: 133mm (5.25 in.), width: 483mm (19 in.), depth: 457mm (18 in.)

Copper Patch Panels

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

SINGLE-SIDED 19 INCH EQUIPMENT SHELVES

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

These 19 inch single-sided solid or vented equipment shelves are ideal for mounting telecommunications devices in 19 inch racks or cabinets. The sturdy 2.5mm (0.1 in.) thick aluminum construction supports up to 22.7kg (50 lbs.). The vented design features air flow perforations to provide additional ventilation for telecommunications equipment. Shelves accommodate equipment up to 438mm (17.25 in.) wide. Part #

SH-S19-01

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Description

SH-S19-01 . . . . . . . . . 19 inch single-sided equipment shelf, solid, 3 RMS height: 133mm (5.25 in.), width: 483mm (19 in.), depth: 381mm (15 in.) SH-S19V-01 . . . . . . . . 19 inch single-sided equipment shelf, vented, 3 RMS height: 133mm (5.25 in.), width: 483mm (19 in.), depth: 381mm (15 in.)

SH-S19V-01

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

MAX® ZONE UNIT ENCLOSURE The MAX zone unit enclosure is an economical, high-density solution designed for use with low-profile sub-floor applications including Flexspace Cablefloor® and Haworth Nexus™. Enclosures are available to accommodate up to 48 ports of media using flat MAX series modules and feature a 44.5 x 101.6mm (1.8 x 4.08 in.) opening for cable entry. Cable tie anchor points (hook and loop cable managers included) and fiber managers are conveniently located within the enclosure for proper routing and securing of cabling.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

The enclosures are constructed of durable 16 gauge steel and feature a simple two piece design with a base and cover secured by four #6-32 screws. There are four mounting holes in the base for securing the enclosure to a mounting surface. The 48-port version includes internal support posts to provide additional structural support. Part #

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Description

ZU-MX-48 . . . . . . . . . . 48-port MAX zone unit enclosure height: 44.5mm (1.8 in.), width: 254.0mm (10 in.), depth: 377.8mm (14.9 in.) ZU-MX-24-0515*. . . . . 24-port MAX zone unit enclosure height: 44.5mm (1.8 in.), width: 114.3mm (4.5 in.), depth: 377.8mm (14.9 in.)

Standards Update

Glossary

*0515 denotes approximate width and depth in inches. MAX Modules pages 1.4 – 1.11

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

6.11

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

STAND-OFF BRACKETS Siemon hinged stand-off brackets can be mounted to a wall with the hinge on either side for convenient access to the back of the panel. The sides of the brackets will accept our S144 or S145 cable hangers (see next page) for external cable management. The brackets accept any combination of Siemon patch panels and rack-mount cable management. Mounting hardware included.

Part #

RMS

Part #

SBH-2 . . . . . . . . . . 2

RMS

SBH-3 . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part #

RMS

SBH-4 . . . . . . . . . . 4

Part #

RMS

SBH-6* . . . . . . . . . 6

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

height: see RMS information, width: 483mm (19 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.) *Add -2 for (3) independent 2 RMS hinges (instead of a single 6 RMS hinge). Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

REAR CABLE MANAGERS Siemon offers rear cable management products to encompass a wide range of rack sizes and cable routing methods. They provide strain relief anchor points and organization of horizontal cables being routed to the back of a patch panel.

WM-3A AND WM-6A

ANGLED REAR CABLE MANAGERS

MapIT Intelligent Patching

WM-3A. . . . . . . . . Angled rear cable manager for 76mm (3 in.) channel racks Includes eight 190mm (7.5 in.) cable ties and mounting hardware.

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

The WM-3A and WM-6A feature an innovative, angled â&#x20AC;&#x153;V-shapedâ&#x20AC;? design which provides direct and smooth routing of cables to the patch panel from either above or below. There are cable eyelets for securing cable ties (included) and cutouts for inserting our hook and loop cable managers (available separately). The designs keep the wire manager at an adequate distance from the panel to provide proper space to route cables.

WM-BK

WM-6A. . . . . . . . . Angled rear cable manager for 152mm (6 in.) channel racks Includes eight 190mm (7.5 in.) cable ties and mounting hardware.

FLAT REAR CABLE MANAGERS

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

6.12

The WM-BK can be mounted to the back side of a double-sided 19 inch rack, or can be mounted between a patch panel and the front face of the rack, using the same screws that hold the patch panel to the rack and the hex nuts provided.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

WM-BK . . . . . . . . . Rear cable manager with mounting screws and hex nuts

RACKS, ENCLOSURES AND CABLE MANAGEMENT Web Resources

RACK-IT

™

Siemon’s Rack-IT vertical mounting brackets can be wall mounted to accommodate a wide range of rack mount equipment. The brackets can also mount any combination of Siemon patch panels and rackmount cable management. Slotted openings allow mounting of network equipment at various depths. Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

HC-RI-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical mounting bracket, 5 RMS Copper Patch Panels

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

REUSABLE HOOK AND LOOP CABLE MANAGERS These cable managers are simple, yet extremely effective when used to bundle cables. To accommodate different sized bundles, they are available in 152mm (6 in.), 305mm (12 in.), or 457mm (18 in.) lengths. They can be easily loosened and removed to service cable and then tightened and reinstalled when the cables are rebundled. The handy dispenser rolls/spools are neat, convenient and quick. Adjustable tension prevents “over-cinched” conditions. A mounting hole in each hook and loop manager enables the manager to be mounted to a wall or rack. Part#

Description

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Wrap-around cable managers offer a simplified approach to cable management... secure it to a single cable and then wrap it around the entire bundle.

VCM-25-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . Roll of 25 cable managers VCM-250-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . Spool of 250 cable managers

Hook and Loop cable managers have a large head for added strength and a mounting hole is included for securing to a wall or rack.

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

The cable hanger design features structural integrity and sleek appearance. These cable hangers are ideal for routing small to very large quantities of cables. The durable plastic design ensures reliability for any application.

Height . . . . .

. . . . .

44mm 87mm 87mm 151mm 254mm

Width (1.73 in.) . . (3.43 in.) . . (3.43 in.) . . (5.95 in.) . . (10.00 in.) .

S210 Connecting Block System

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

S143 S146

S143* S144* S145* S146 . S147 .

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S110 Connecting Block System

CABLE HANGERS

Part #

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Technical Tip! Hook and loop cable managers are recommended as an alternate to plastic cable ties for the reduction of alien crosstalk in 10G 6 UTP installations. Use 1st (XX) to specify length: 06 = 152mm (6 in.), holds 51mm (2 in.) diameter cable bundle 12 = 305mm (12 in.), holds 102mm (4 in.) diameter cable bundle 18 = 457mm (18 in.), holds 153mm (6 in.) diameter cable bundle Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

. . . . .

38mm 57mm 57mm 63mm 63mm

Depth (1.50 (2.25 (2.25 (2.50 (2.50

in.) . in.) . in.) . in.) . in.) .

. . . . .

89mm 74mm 125mm 130mm 130mm

(3.35 (2.90 (4.93 (5.15 (5.15

in.) in.) in.) in.) in.)

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

S144 Standards Update

S145

*Add “-A” for optional adhesive backing.

S147

Glossary

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0 Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

6.13

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

INDUSTRIAL MAX PLUGS

INDUSTRIAL PATCH CORDS

INDUSTRIAL LC FIBER

(pages 7.2 – 7.3)

(page 7.3)

(page 7.4)

(pages 7.6 – 7.7)

Media Types UTP, Screened

Connector RJ-45 Type

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

INDUSTRIAL MAX ® OUTLETS

UTP, Screened

Fiber

RJ-45

Performance Grade

Multimode, Singlemode

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

The International Protection (IP) code defines an interfaces resistance to both liquid and solid particles. Siemon’s Industrial MAX connector features an IP66/IP67 rated seal ensuring continued operation in today’s most demanding environments.

IP CODE

INDEX FIGURE

MapIT Intelligent Patching

DEGREE OF PROTECTION

No Protection

No protection against accidental contact, no protection against foreign bodies

Protection against large foreign bodies

Protection against contact with a large area by hand and against large solid bodies Ø> 50mm

Protection against medium sized foreign bodies

Protection against contact with fingers, protection against small foreign solid bodies with Ø> 12mm

Protection against small solid foreign bodies

Protection against tools, wires, or similar objects with 2.5 mm protection against small foreign bodies with Ø>2.5 mm

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Protection against grainshaped foreign bodies

Protection against foreign bodies with Ø>1mm

Standards Update

Protection against deposits of dust

Full protection against contact. Protection against interior equipment damage due to dust deposits

Protection against ingress of dust

Total protection against contact and protection against penetration of dust.

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Glossary

Index

7.0

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

DEGREE OF PROTECTION

INDEX FIGURE

Industrial Products

No Protection against water

No Protection

Protection against vertical water drips

Drip-Proof

Protection against water drips (up to a 15° angle)

Drip-Proof

Protection against water drips (up to a 60° angle)

Spray-Proof

Protection against splashed water from all directions

Spray-Proof

Protection against splashed water (out of a nozzle) from all directions

Hose-Proof

Protection against temporary flooding

Protected against flooding

Protected against temporary immersion

Protected against immersion

Protected against water pressure

Water-tight

0 1 2 3 4 5

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS Industrial MAX® 6 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2 – 7.3

System Overview

Industrial MAX 6 Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Industrial MAX 5e Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Industrial MAX 5e Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Industrial MAX 6 Modular Patch Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Industrial MAX Patch Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 Industrial MAX Dust Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4

Copper Patch Panels

Industrial Surface Mount Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Industrial MAX Stainless Steel Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 Industrial LC Fiber Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 – 7.7

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Industrial LC Fiber Plug and Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Field-Installable LC Fiber Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 Industrial LC Fiber Upgrade Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

SIEMON-CHINA Established in 1995, Siemon China in Beijing was Siemon’s first China

Industrial Products

office. Steady growth in China, built on Beijing’s trailblazing efforts, lead to offices in Chengdu, Guangzhou and the AP hub in Shanghai. Siemon China offers dedicated technical support, customer service, sales and marketing throughout the world’s most populous nation, both through internal staff and an extensive certified installer group. They also provide excellent media coverage throughout China. These efforts have gone far to promote Siemon’s well-deserved image as the territories premier supplier of total cabling solutions. Siemon China stands in this seminal market as a shining example of the Siemon permanent commitment to quality, service,

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

innovation and value. Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

7.1

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

INDUSTRIAL MAX ® 6 CONNECTIVITY

iemon is well-known for its industry leading category 6 products. Now those same high performance products are available with our patent-pending Industrial MAX housings. Industrial MAX 6 outlets and modular patch cords provide an IP66/IP67-rated seal, protecting plug and jack contacts from dust, moisture, vibration, and common cleaning chemicals. The Industrial MAX 6 solution is ideal for protecting valuable connections in laboratory environments, hospitals, food processing plants and other harsh environments.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

4 3

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Pyramid Wire Entry System on S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time.

MapIT Intelligent Patching 1

S210 Connecting Block System 2

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Standardized Interface — The Industrial MAX Connector has been recognized by the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA), TIA/EIA TR 42.9 and IEC PAS 61076-3-111 Easy Termination — The UTP Industrial MAX outlet

Universal Wiring — Each outlet is compatible with both T568A and T568B wiring options

Ensures Proper Seal — Bayonet-style mating ensures proper plug depth into the outlet and an IP66/IP67 rated seal

utilizes a standard 110 tool for quick and easy punchdown termination

Meets Harsh Demands of the Environment

Vibration Causes Pitting In Typical Outlets

Humidity Affects Typical Outlets

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Specially designed Industrial MAX 6 connectors can withstand humidity, dust and vibration.

Index

7.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Seen under a microscope after exposure to extreme vibration, contact between a typical modular plug and outlet can pit the contact pins, causing intermittent transmission problems.

Humidity corrodes contact pins inside typical outlets. Repeated exposure can eventually destroy the contact pins, rendering the outlet unusable. The Industrial MAX outlet’s special housing prevents this corrosion.

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS Web Resources

INDUSTRIAL MAX 6 OUTLETS ®

The Industrial MAX outlet features an unshielded (UTP) category 6 MAX module housed in a protective shell. The outlet’s outer housing is made of durable, chemical-resistant, industrial-grade thermoplastic and features Siemon’s patent-pending bayonet-style mating design. Category 6 performance is guaranteed in harsh environments.

System Overview

The industrial connector’s bayonet-style mating prevents over-tightening which could damage contact pins inside the outlet or under-tightening which prevents a proper seal.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Part #

Copper Patch Panels

Description

X6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 6 UTP, industrial outlet, T568A/B X6S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 6 Screened, industrial outlet, T568A/B

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

INDUSTRIAL MAX 5e OUTLETS The Industrial MAX outlet features a category 5e MAX module housed in a protective shell. The outlet’s outer housing is made of durable, chemical-resistant, industrial-grade thermoplastic and features Siemon’s patent-pending bayonet-style mating design. Guaranteed category 5e performance to 160 MHz* even in the most punishing environments.

Part #

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Description

X5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e UTP, industrial outlet, T568A/B X5S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e Screened, industrial outlet, T568A/B X5SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e Screened, industrial outlet, metal housing, T568A/B (screened only)

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

*Performance from 100 – 160 MHz based upon extrapolated TIA/EIA limits.

S110 Connecting Block System

INDUSTRIAL MAX 5e PLUGS The Industrial MAX Plug features a category 5e modular plug contained in Siemon’s industrial-grade housing with patent-pending bayonet-style mating design. The plug can be terminated in the field, allowing custom lengths to be assembled quickly on site in the event a cable is cut or damaged. It terminates twisted-pair cable with 22 – 26 AWG (0.64 – 0.40mm) solid or 7-strand conductors with an insulated conductor diameter of 0.86 – 0.99mm (0.034 – 0.039 in.).

Part #

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Description

XP85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e UTP, industrial plug, 8-position, 8-contacts XP85S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e Screened, industrial plug, 8-position, 8-contacts XP85SM. . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e Screened, metal industrial plug, 8-position, 8-contacts

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

7.3

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

INDUSTRIAL MAX® 6 MODULAR PATCH CORDS Industrial modular patch cords combine the high performance and quality that Siemon cords are known for with a protective industrial-grade plug housing. These assemblies feature standard MC® 6 cordage with a MC 6 plug on one end and an industrial plug on the other. Part #

Description

XC6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 6 UTP, industrial plug-to-industrial plug XC6-(XX)-B05 . . . . . . . . . Category 6 UTP, industrial plug-to-modular RJ-45 plug, yellow boot Use (XX) to specify length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

INDUSTRIAL MAX 5e PATCH CORDS Designed to withstand the rigors of a factory floor environment, our industrial category 5e stranded cordage is petroleum and UV resistant, is not effected by common chemicals and water, operates in a wider temperature range, and provides a longer flex life than normal cords. A variety of cord options are available to meet a variety of customer needs — UTP, screened category 5e industrial plug to standard RJ-45, and more. Choose the industrial modular cord that best suits your needs for a complete end-to-end Siemon channel solution. Part #

Description

XC5-(XX) . . . . . XC5-(XX)-B05 . . XC5S-(XX). . . . . XC5SM-(XX) . . . XC5S-(XX)-B05 . XC5SM-(XX)-B05

. . . . . .

Category Category Category Category Category Category

5e 5e 5e 5e 5e 5e

UTP, industrial plug-to-industrial plug UTP, industrial plug-to-modular RJ-45 plug, yellow boot Screened, industrial plug-to-industrial plug Screened, metal industrial plug-to-metal industrial plug Screened, industrial plug-to-modular RJ-45 plug, yellow boot Screened, metal industrial plug-to-modular RJ-45 plug, yellow boot

Use (XX) to specify length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.)

INDUSTRIAL MAX DUST CAPS The Industrial MAX dust caps are the ideal way to protect your investment in your industrial cabling system. Outlet dust caps can be used to protect unused outlets or to seal an outlet during wash down periods when the outlet and plug may be disconnected. Plug dust caps protect Industrial MAX patch cords from exposure to elements or accidental damage when not mated to an outlet. Dust caps are constructed of industrial-grade thermoplastic or robust zinc die cast metal for superior protection and durability. Additionally, outlet and plug dust caps feature a retention chain, which prevents them from being misplaced when not in use. XP-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial plug dust cap with retention chain

X-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial outlet dust cap with retention chain

XPM-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal industrial plug dust cap with retention chain

XM-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal industrial outlet dust cap with retention chain

Index

7.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS Web Resources

INDUSTRIAL SURFACE MOUNT BOX The Siemon Industrial Surface Mount Box (IBOX) mounts either Siemon copper or fiber industrial outlets. Boxes provide an IP66/IP67 (NEMA 4X) seal and can be mounted on virtually any flat surface. Available in 1, 2, 3, and 4-port versions. Compression fittings provided for cable entry.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

X-IBOX-01 . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial surface mount box, 1-port, supplied with 1 cable entry compression fitting

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

X-IBOX-02 . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial surface mount box, 2-port, supplied with 2 cable entry compression fittings

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

X-IBOX-03 . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial surface mount box, 3-port, supplied with 3 cable entry compression fittings

X-IBOX-04 . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial surface mount box, 4-port, supplied with 4 cable entry compression fittings

Technical Tip! Contact Technical Support for punch tool to create industrial knockouts for custom mounting.

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

INDUSTRIAL MAXÂŽ STAINLESS STEEL FACEPLATES Mount Siemonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Industrial MAX outlets into these stainless steel faceplates for a protective seal from moisture and debris. The faceplates are available in 1-, 2- and 4-port options with a rear sealing gasket and carry an IP44 rating.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

XFP-S-01-SS . . . . . . . . . . Single gang faceplate, 1-port, stainless steel

XFP-S-02-SS . . . . . . . . . . Single gang faceplate, 2-port, stainless steel

XFP-D-04-SS . . . . . . . . . . Double gang faceplate, 4-port, stainless steel

Glossary

Faceplates include mounting screws with sealed screw head.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

7.5

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS Web Resources

System Overview

INDUSTRIAL LC FIBER CONNECTIVITY

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

ntroducing another first from Siemon — the Industrial LC Fiber system. The Siemon Industrial LC Fiber solution provides a robust fiber connection with an IP66/FP67-rated seal and is ideal for protecting valuable connections in laboratory environments, hospitals, food processing plants and other harsh environments.

Copper Patch Panels

The Siemon Industrial Fiber solution is ideal for installations requiring extended distances (up to 300 meters), in close proximity to heavy sources of EMI, or where fiber active equipment is used.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

4 1

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Rear of adapter accepts standard LC multimode connectors.

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Robust Design — Protects fiber connections in virtually any harsh environment

High Performance — Meets ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.3, ISO/IEC 11801 Ed 2.0, and Siemon LightSystem® specifications for multimode components

Proper Seal — Bayonet-style mating ensures proper

Specialized Bend Relief — Compression fitting provides a superior rear seal and ensures fiber meet minimum bend radius requirements

Field-Termination — Plug includes two industrial qualified multimode LC connectors that accepts 2 strand, round, breakout style fiber optic cable

fiber alignment and an IP66/IP67 rated seal

Precision Performance

Robust and Reliable

Meets Harsh Demands of the Environment

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

7.6

R&D labs develop, design and implement rigorous testing programs using sophisticated instrumentation. The Industrial LC provides reliability with leading edge technology for applications where highly accurate performance is critical.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Industrial Fiber connections help to streamline operations, improve product availability, and reduce costs in manufacturing environments.

The Industrial LC connector is ideal in areas where chemicals, corrosive gases and liquids are commonplace.

INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS Web Resources

INDUSTRIAL LC FIBER PLUG AND OUTLET Part #

Description

System Overview

XPLC2-MM . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial LC fiber plug, multimode, duplex. Includes two multimode LC connectors XLC-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial LC fiber adapter, multimode, duplex XPM-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial LC plug dust cap with chain X-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial outlet dust cap with chain

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Note: Industrial LC fiber plug accepts 2 strand, round, breakout style fiber optic cable with O.D. ranges from 5mm – 8mm with two 2.4mm – 3.0mm jacketed subunits.

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

FIELD-INSTALLABLE LC FIBER CONNECTOR Siemon multimode LC buffered connectors have been qualified for use in Siemon’s industrial fiber system. Use these connectors to terminate 62.5/125 or 50/125 multimode fiber and plug into the rear of the Industrial LC outlet. Part #

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Description Industrial Products

FC1-LC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . LC simplex connector, multimode, buffered fiber beige boot FC2-LC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . LC duplex connector, multimode, jacketed fiber beige boot

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

INDUSTRIAL LC FIBER UPGRADE KIT

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Use the Industrial LC Upgrade Kit for Industrial LC connector terminations. The kit contains a dual LC polishing puck, which decreases polish time by 50%. Also included is a dual microscope adapter, which allows inspection of the fibers after the connector has been terminated.

Part #

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Description

FTERM-XLC . . . . . . . . . . . Industrial LC fiber termination kit used in conjunction with FTERM-L2 includes dual polishing puck and microscope adapter FT-LC2PUCK . . . . . . . . . . Dual LC polishing puck FT-MSLC2HEAD. . . . . . . . Dual LC microscope adaptor

Standards Update

Glossary

LightSpeed ® Termination Kit page 5.8

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

7.7

MapIT INTELLIGENT PATCHING Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

MapIT MC® 6 PATCH CORDS

MapIT RIC FIBER ENCLOSURES

MapIT FIBER JUMPERS

(pages 8.4 – 8.5)

(page 8.5)

(page 8.7)

Connectors RJ-45

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

MapIT™ HD® 6 PATCH PANELS

Media Types UTP

RJ-45

SC or LC Adapters

SC, LC, MT-RJ

UTP

MMF, SMF

Universal

LightSystem, XGLO

N/A

SC = 96 LC = 192

N/A

Labels, Cable Ties, Rack-Mounting Hardware, Pre-installed Fiber Management Clips

N/A

Category Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Capacity 24, 48 (Ports)

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Included Rear Cable Managers, Accessories Designation Labels, Cable Ties, Mounting Hardware

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

8.0

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

MapIT INTELLIGENT PATCHING Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS MapIT™ System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 – 8.3

System Overview

MapIT System Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 MapIT Sensor Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

MapIT Analyzers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 MapIT HD 6 Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 ®

MapIT MC® 6 Patch Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 MapIT RIC Fiber Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7

Copper Patch Panels

MapIT XGLO™ Fiber Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 MapIT LightSystem® Fiber Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8.7

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

SIEMON-AUSTRALIA In April 1993, Siemon opened its first Australian office in the beautiful city of Sydney. While the city may be best known for it’s soaring opera house, it is a thriving technological and business center, with ever increasing IT needs and bandwidth hunger. It is upon these market needs that Siemon Australia has grown, expanding from Sydney to offices in Brisbane and Melbourne, and supporting New Zealand and Fiji. Modeled after Siemon’s worldwide commitment to provide and faithfully support the industry’s premier structured cabling system, Siemon Australia offers a committed and enthusiastic technical and customer service group, as well as a substantial troop of Certified Installers, consultants and salespeople. With the solid leadership of Siemon Australia, Siemon is on top down under!

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Siemon Network Cabling Solutions, The Foundation for Your Business Success

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

8.1

MapIT INTELLIGENT PATCHING Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

MapIT ™ SYSTEM

apIT is an intelligent cabling infrastructure that manages and protects your IT investment. It continuously monitors connections between the cabling system and active equipment in real time. This powerful combination of Siemon MapIT connecting hardware and iTRACS® software provides a whole new dimension of network management capability. Siemon provides all the necessary components required to configure your MapIT system. A simplified diagram is shown below with the various required system components. A wide variety of configurations are possible. Consult with an authorized MapIT installer on your particular installation needs.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

• • • • • •

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Monitor cabling connections in real time Discover and document cabling connections and active equipment Streamline troubleshooting and resolution of cabling/network issues Enhance security by monitoring/preventing network access of unauthorized devices Maximize network utilization via identification of unused ports Self-identification of network assets improves tracking and reporting

iTRACS Software

CAD View

Accessibility

Standards Update

Glossary

iTRACS is the software partner of the Siemon MapIT System. Index

8.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

iTRACS software provides an easy to use graphical view of the network.

Software is accessible via the Web, LAN or PDA.

MapIT INTELLIGENT PATCHING Web Resources

MapIT SYSTEM CABLES â&#x201E;˘

MapIT system cables connect analyzers to other system elements such as patch panels, enclosures and sensor strips. Single ended cables can be cut to length eliminating excess slack. All single-ended assemblies are constructed using 26 AWG solid, non-plenum cable. Part #

System Overview

Description

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

M-A-IDC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Single-ended analyzer cable; connects analyzer to patch panel or fiber enclosure M-A-PCB-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Analyzer to PCB sensor strip cable M-MA-IDC-(XX) . . . . . . . . Single-ended mini-analyzer cable; connects mini-analyzer to to patch panel or fiber enclosure M-MA-PCB-(XX) . . . . . . . . Mini-analyzer to PCB sensor strip cable M-LINK-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . Link cable, connects master analyzer to link analyzer

Copper Patch Panels

M-A-IDC

Use (XX) to specify length: 03 = 0.91m (3 ft.), 07 = 2.13m (7 ft.),10 = 3.05m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.57m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.10m (20 ft.), 25 = 7.6m (25 ft.), 50 = 15.2m (50 ft.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

MapIT SENSOR STRIPS*

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

MapIT sensor strips are mounted to active equipment blades to track LAN connections. PCBSS-24

Part #

Description

PCBSS-24-(XX). . . . . . . . . Rigid PCB Sensor Strip for mounting above LAN equipment ports, 24-port version Use (XX) to designate equipment type: 01 = Cisco 4000 and 6000, 48-port blades, 02 = Cisco 3500, 48-port blades, 03 = Cisco 3500, 24-port blades PCBSS-16-(XX). . . . . . . . . Rigid PCB Sensor Strip for mounting above LAN equipment ports, 16-port version Use (XX) to designate equipment type: 01 = Cisco 16-port GBIC blade

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

*Other options may be available. Contact our Technical Support Department for more information.

MapIT Intelligent Patching

MapIT ANALYZERS

S210 Connecting Block System

MapIT analyzers provide the link between the network cabling system and the iTRACSÂŽ software. They are available in multiple sizes and options to provide a costeffective solution for any size installation. Part #

S110 Connecting Block System

Description

M-A-1U . . . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT 1U Master Analyzer, manages 240 ports/120 channels, 1 RMS M-A-6U . . . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT 6U Master Analyzer, manages 480 ports/240 channels with expansion capabilities, 6 RMS M-SA-1U . . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT 1U Standalone Analyzer, manages 240 ports/120 channels, no expansion capabilities, 1 RMS M-SA-6U . . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT 6U Standalone Analyzer, manages 480 ports/240 channels, with expansion capabilities, 6 RMS M-LA-1U. . . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT 1U Link Analyzer, manages 240 ports/120 channels, must be used with Master Analyzer, 1 RMS M-LA-6U. . . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT 6U Link Analyzer, manages 480 ports/240 channels, must be used with Master Analyzer, 6 RMS M-EC-6U . . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT expansion card for 6U Master and Link analyzers, 240 port/120 channel capacity M-MINI-1U . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT 1U Mini Analyzer, manages 128 ports/64 channel capacity, no expansion capabilities, 1 RMS

M-A-1U

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

M-A-6U

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

8.3

MapIT INTELLIGENT PATCHING Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

SYSTEM 6 ® MapIT ™ POWERED BY iTRACS ®

ince launching System 6, the world’s first category 6 solution in 1998, Siemon has continued to improve performance and functionality of the system. Siemon MapIT is the latest evolution of our most popular cabling system. MapIT is an intelligent infrastructure cabling system which manages and protects your IT investment. The system features iTRACS sensor technology embedded in HD® 6 patch panels and MC® 6 modular cords. When combined with iTRACS software, this powerful combination of products provides a whole new dimension of network management capability.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

6 8 7

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

2 4 1

“Intellitab” Sensor Pads — Robust brass sensor

pads feature 50 microinches of gold over nickel for longterm reliability and resistance to corrosion 2

cables to point of termination

Panel Identification — Designation labels provided

Versatility — Can be configured for either interconnect or cross-connect applications

reliable connection within sensor pads and are accessible at the rear of the boot for test and mapping purposes

Rear Cable Manager — Included to properly guide

Exceeds Category 6 — Exceeds TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC component requirements for category 6

Simple I/O Connections

Sensor Pin — Spring loaded sensor pins ensure

Innovative Strain Relief — Over-molded boots provide excellent plug to cable strain relief and retention of sensor pins

Superior Cord Performance — T568A/B patch cords exceed category 6 TIA/EIA patch cord component requirements

High Performance Patch Cords

High Density

Standards Update

Glossary

Versatile 110 style punch-down for analyzer I/O connections. Index

8.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Patented metallic isolator shields pairs inside plug for optimum NEXT performance.

Offset Pogo pin position optimized for stacked switch applications.

MapIT INTELLIGENT PATCHING Web Resources

MapIT HD 6 PATCH PANELS ™

MapIT HD 6 patch panels provide superior performance and quality with embedded iTRACS® sensor technology. Siemon MapIT panels feature robust “intellitab” sensor pads, constructed of brass with 50 microinches of gold over nickel plating on the contact surface. The entire panel, including sensor components, is guaranteed for 20 years when installed as part of a warranted System 6® installation. The rear of the panel features 110 style punch-down connections for termination of I/O and horizontal cables. This allows single-ended analyzer I/O connection cables to be cut to length in the field, reducing part numbers and enabling a cleaner, neater installation.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Description

M-HD6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT HD 6 24-port panel, T568A/B, 1 RMS Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

M-HD6-48 . . . . . . . . . . . MapIT HD 6 48-port panel, T568A/B, 2 RMS

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Panels include rear cable manager, designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware. Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

MapIT Intelligent Patching

MapIT MC® 6 PATCH CORDS

S210 Connecting Block System

MapIT MC 6 modular patch cords retain all the critical elements of the MC 6 line: 100% transmission testing, superior NEXT performance and patented plug design. These advanced cords also feature patented iTRACS technology: a 9th wire and 50 microinch gold-plated sensor pins contained in a robust over-molded boot. This embedded sensor technology enables tracking of connections between patch panel and LAN equipment.

S110 Connecting Block System

Part #

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Description

M-MC6-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . MapIT MC 6 double-ended, 4-pair stranded modular cord, T568A/B, color matching jacket/boot

Standards Update

Glossary

Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.91m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.52m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.13m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.05m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.57m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.10m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify jacket/boot color: 04 = gray, 06 = blue

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

8.5

MapIT INTELLIGENT PATCHING Web Resources

System Overview

MapIT ™ FIBER SYSTEMS POWERED BY iTRACS ®

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

n enterprise’s fiber backbone is the lifeblood of its business. A single bad connection can bring operations to a grinding halt. Siemon has partnered with iTRACS Corporation to create a fiber system with proactive management of critical fiber connections: Siemon MapIT, an intelligent cabling infrastructure which manages and protects your IT investment.

Copper Patch Panels

This powerful combination of high performance Siemon fiber hardware and iTRACS software provides a whole new level of network management capability. 8

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

5 6

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Pre-loaded Panels — Panels are pre-loaded with a choice of SC or LC adapters

High Capacity — 96 SC ports or 192 LC ports

Reliable Interface — S110 Blocks provided for connections to analyzer I/O cables

Professional Appearance — Black anodized finish and rolled steel edges provide a durable, aesthetic appearance

Quick-Release Hinges — Spring loaded quickrelease hinges enable easy removal of front and rear doors for complete access to fiber connections Removable Tray

Enhanced Labeling — Label virtually any port configuration with our hinged labels, which hang on the front door for optimum visibility. When the door is opened, labels flip down letting the label and corresponding ports be viewed together Rotating Grommets — Protect fiber entering or exiting the enclosure

Superior Performance — Jumpers exceed TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC requirements

Single Finger Latch

Robust Sensor Technology

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

The cable management tray is completely removable from the front or rear of the enclosure, allowing the entire tray to be moved to a work table for more convenient loading of pigtails and splice trays.

Index

8.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Enclosures feature a single-finger latch on both front and rear doors. Included door locks prevent unauthorized access for enhanced security.

MapIT enclosures and jumpers feature gold-plated sensor pads/pins for long term resistance to galvanic corrosion and contact wear.

MapIT INTELLIGENT PATCHING Web Resources

MapIT RIC FIBER ENCLOSURES ™

Siemon MapIT fiber enclosures retain many of the most popular features of our RIC product line: superior labeling, sliding/removable tray, rotating grommets and removable plexiglas doors with locks.

System Overview

Siemon MapIT panels also feature patented iTRACS® sensor technology, which can track connections between ports in real time when used as part of a complete Siemon MapIT system. Sensor pads feature a robust goldplated surface and are covered for 20 years when installed as part of a warranted installation.

Part #

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Description Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

M-RIC-SC96-01 . . . . . . . . MapIT 96-port RIC SC fiber enclosure, 4 RMS, black M-RIC-LC192-01 . . . . . . . MapIT 192-port RIC LC fiber enclosure, 4 RMS, black

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

MapIT XGLO™ FIBER JUMPERS XGLO jumpers are built to be the best. These assemblies are constructed with premium fiber that meets IEEE, IEC and TIA specifications for 10 Gigabit Ethernet serial transmission. These advanced cords are now available with patented iTRACS sensor technology — gold-plated sensor pins retained in robust molded connector clips. These jumpers enable tracking of port connections between MapIT fiber enclosures and LAN equipment.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT XGLO MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS M-J2-SCSC5L-(XX) . . . . . . MapIT SC-SC duplex jumper, XGLO 50/125 multimode fiber M-J2-LCLC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . MapIT LC-LC duplex jumper, XGLO 50/125 multimode fiber M-J2-LCSC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . MapIT LC-SC duplex jumper, XGLO 50/125 multimode fiber Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

MapIT Intelligent Patching

MapIT XGLO SINGLEMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS

S210 Connecting Block System

M-J2-SCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . MapIT SC-SC duplex jumper, XGLO singlemode fiber M-J2-LCULCUL-(XX) . . . . . . MapIT LC-LC duplex jumper, XGLO singlemode fiber M-J2-LCUSCUL-(XX). . . . . . MapIT LC-SC duplex jumper, XGLO singlemode fiber

S110 Connecting Block System

Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

MapIT LIGHTSYSTEM® FIBER JUMPERS MapIT LightSystem jumpers enable connections to active equipment featuring MT-RJ interfaces for Gigabit applications. The jumpers meet TIA/EIA and ISO/IRC requirements for both insertion loss and return loss.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

MapIT LIGHTSYSTEM MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS

Standards Update

M-J2-MTSC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . MapIT MTRJ-SC duplex jumper, multimode fiber M-J2-MTLC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . MapIT MTRJ-LC duplex jumper, multimode fiber

Glossary

Use (X) to specify fiber type: blank = 62.5/125µm fiber, orange jacket; 5 = 50/125µm fiber, orange jacket Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

8.7

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

S210® CONNECTION SYSTEM

S210 TOWER SYSTEM

(pages 9.2 – 9.3)

(pages 9.4 – 9.5)

VERTICALLY MOUNTED S210 BLOCKS (page 9.7)

(pages 9.6 – 9.7) Product High performance Applications connectivity for telecommunications rooms or consolidation points.

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Mounting Wall Options Capacity 64-192 Pair

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

9.0

S210 FIELD TERMINATED 19 INCH PANELS

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Medium to high density applications requiring superior cable management.

Rack mounting of blocks eliminates need for separate wall fields and enables patching to active equipment.

Mounts on S89D brackets, ideal for category 6 system upgrades from S66 fields.

Wall

19 Inch Rack

89D Bracket (Wall)

192-320 Pair

64-192 Pair

32-48 Pair

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS S210® Connection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 – 9.3

System Overview

S210 Field Termination Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 S210 Connecting Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S210 Designation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 S110 /S210 Designation Label Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 ®

S210 Tower® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.4 – 9.5 S210 Tower Field Termination Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5

Copper Patch Panels

Large-Scale Vertical Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 Small-Scale Vertical Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 S210 Tower Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

S210 Field Terminated 19 Inch Panels . . . . . . . . . 9.6 – 9.7 S210 Field Terminated 19 Inch Panels with Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Vertically Mounted S210 Field Termination Kits . . . . . . . 9.7 Wall Mount S110/S210 Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . 9.8 S100A2 Wire Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

S110/S210 Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9

SIEMON-SINGAPORE Located just minutes from Singapore’s booming central business district and Changi International Airport, Siemon’s Southeast Asia

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

office is strategically situated both in physical location and economic presence. As the managing location for Singapore, India, Indonesia, Malaysia, Mauritius, Taiwan, Thailand, and The Philippines, Siemon SEA has grown significantly since its inception in 1995. By continuously promoting end-to-end solutions and carrying Siemon’s tradition of unparalleled support to the Asian market, they have established the brand as a premier total cabling solution. With a solid certified installer program, the well-trained Siemon SEA channel is growing right along with the region’s explosive economy, earning significant inroads to Asia’s global 500 companies. Siemon Network Cabling Solutions, The Foundation for Your Business Success Indonesia (Bahasa Indonesia): Solusi Jaringan Kabel Siemon Adalah Dasar Bagi Kesuksesan Bisnis Anda Philippines: Siemon Network Cabling Solutions, Ang Pundasyon ng inyong Tagumpay sa Negosyo Thailand/Thai:

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Taiwan: Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

9.1

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

S210 ® CONNECTION SYSTEM

he Siemon S210 offers the best connecting block performance in the telecommunications industry. Known as the stealth™ block, its NEXT performance is so good that it is virtually invisible when used as a consolidation point in a standard or augmented category 6 channel.

1 4

The Siemon S210 block is the ideal migration path for Voice over IP (VoIP) applications. It can be used to support existing cross-connects for standard phone systems today and enables upgrades to a category 6 rated solution for a seamless network transition. The S210’s inherent high performance helps to maximize throughput, thereby improving the overall Quality of Service (QoS) required for VoIP.

3 2

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching 1

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Colored Labels — Designation strip with

Compatibility — Utilizes same wiring base footprint as standard S110® products to be fully compatible with existing S110 mounting and cable management solutions

Easy Termination — Utilizes same termination

interchangeable colored labels can be mounted between each row of connecting blocks 2

Stand-off Legs — Patented stand-off legs may be detached from the block before, during, or after installation on 64-pair version

practices as existing S110 product and is compatible with all single-position S110 termination tools

Superior Design — Cable entering through access openings in base is concealed by designation labels

Internal Crosstalk Barriers

Pyramid™ Wire Entry System

Cable Access Openings

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

9.2

Provide superior NEXT performance (13 dB NEXT margin over category 6 specifications) via 360° pair isolation.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time.

Allow cables to be routed through the rear of the block directly to the point of termination.

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

S210 FIELD TERMINATION KITS ®

Complete S210 installation kits include S210 wiring blocks with detachable legs*, S210 connecting blocks, and label holders with white designation labels. Part#

System Overview

Description

S210AB2-64FT . . . . . . . . 64-pair, S210 field termination kit height: 91.4mm (3.60 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S210AB2-128FT . . . . . . . 128-pair, S210 field termination kit height: 182.9mm (7.20 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Copper Patch Panels

S210AB2-192FT . . . . . . . 192-pair, S210 field termination kit height: 275mm (10.81 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.7mm (3.26 in.)

S110®/S210 Multi-Pair Impact Tool page 12.7, S210 Patch Plugs pages 3.14 – 3.15, S210 Cable Assemblies page 3.15, Category 6 Cross-Connect Wire page 3.13

*Legs detachable on 64-pair version only.

4-pair S210 impact tool seats S210 connecting blocks and terminates and trims wires on both the cable and crossconnect side of the connecting blocks.

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK Siemon S210 blocks terminate 22 – 26 AWG (0.64mm – 0.40mm) solid or 7-strand wires. They also incorporate markings to designate tip and ring conductors, color-coded pairs on each block and Siemon’s patent-pending Pyramid™ wire entry system to expedite lacing of pairs. Part #

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Industrial Products

Description

S210C-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair, S210 connecting block MapIT Intelligent Patching

S210 DESIGNATION LABELS

S210 Connecting Block System

Siemon S210 wiring blocks allow for designation labels to be mounted between each row of connecting blocks. S210 designation labels feature S210 listings on the side to clearly identify the termination type, 4-pair markings and can also be used for colorcoding. Part #

S110 Connecting Block System

Description

S110-HLDR . . . . . . . . . . . Transparent plastic label holders, bag of 6 S210-LBL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair S210 marked white labels, bag of 6

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

S110/S210 DESIGNATION LABEL SHEETS Siemon’s S110/S210 designation label sheets provide the ability to custom print labels used on S110 or S210 blocks.*The sheets can be used to print 2-, 3-, 4-, or 5-pair labels and eliminate the need to order separate sheets for different configurations. There are 20 labels per side and both sides are marked so they can be reversed and re-printed in case of an error. Part #

Standards Update

Description

Glossary

S110-SHT-(X). . . . . . . . . . S110/S210 Designation label sheets, package of 6 Use (X) to specify color: 2 = white, 3 = red, 4 = gray, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue, 7 = green, 8 = violet, 9 = orange, 60 = brown *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

9.3

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

S210 ® TOWER ® SYSTEM

he S210 Tower System provides a modular, high-density, cross-connect, and cable management system. The Towers are available in 192-, 256-, and 320-pair sizes. Towers and vertical cable managers are completely modular and can be vertically stacked to accommodate a higher capacity in a single column. The modular design of the large-scale vertical cable managers allow a technician to easily install a high-density cross-connect system without spending valuable time laying out a termination field. 1

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

4 Complete Kit — Each Tower comes complete with the

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S210 Connecting Block System

Integrated Management — Includes S110B1RMS cable managers with covers for horizontal cable distribution

Optional Vertical Managers — Can be mounted

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Optional Cable Duct — Available for providing a single, large pathway at base of Tower for routing cables horizontally

Easy Identification — Designation label holders with white designation strips are provided for circuit identification

appropriate quantity of S210 connecting blocks and mounting hardware

between towers and provide greater access to cables

S210 Block

Vertical Cable Management

Robust Design

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Features Siemon’s high performance S210 block for performance far exceeding category 6 specifications. Glossary

Tower assembly provides pathways for routing and protecting cables from entry all the way to the point of termination.

Screws are used to secure wiring bases and cable managers tower frame.

S110/S210 Designation Label Sheets page 9.3, S210 Cable Assemblies page 3.15 Index

9.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

S210 TOWER FIELD TERMINATION KITS 速

Part #

速

Description

System Overview

S210MB2-192FT . . . . . . . 192-pair, S210 Tower field termination kit height: 406mm (16 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S210MB2-256FT . . . . . . . 256-pair, S210 Tower field termination kit height: 541mm (21.31 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.) S210MB2-320FT . . . . . . . 320-pair, S210 Tower field termination kit height: 676mm (26.62 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

Copper Patch Panels

Each kit includes adequate connecting blocks to fully populate tower.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

LARGE-SCALE VERTICAL CABLE MANAGERS

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

The S188 large scale vertical cable manager for the S110速/S210 Towers accommodates our quarter-turn RS-CH cable managers. With the RS-CH managers installed, additional vertical channels can be integrated into the main channel to segregate patch cables and cross-connect wire. Part #

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Description

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

S188-300 . . . . . . . . . . . Large-scale vertical cable manager for use with 192-pair S210 Tower height: 406mm (16 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.) S188-400 . . . . . . . . . . . Large-scale vertical cable manager for use with 256-pair S210 Tower height: 541mm (21.31 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

Industrial Products

S188-500 . . . . . . . . . . . Large-scale vertical cable manager for use with 320-pair S210 Tower height: 676mm (26.62 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.) RS-CH Quarter Turn Cable Managers page 6.8

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

SMALL-SCALE VERTICAL CABLE MANAGERS Part #

Description

S110M-WM-300. . . . . . . Small-scale vertical cable manager, for use with 192-pair S210 Tower height: 406mm (16 in.), width: 76.2mm (3.0 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

S110 Connecting Block System

S110M-WM-400. . . . . . . Small-scale vertical cable manager, for use with 256-pair S210 Tower height: 541mm (21.31 in.), width: 76.2mm (3.0 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

S110M-WM-500. . . . . . . Small-scale vertical cable manager, for use with 320-pair S210 Tower height: 676mm (26.62 in.), width: 76.2mm (3.0 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

S210 TOWER OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Part #

Description

Standards Update

S188-WD . . . . . . . . . . . Metal duct for additional horizontal cable management at base of S210 Tower height: 114.3mm (4.50 in.), width: 215.9mm (8.50 in.), depth: 203.2mm (8 in.) S188-GND . . . . . . . . . . Ground kit consists of one, 3-position grounding busbar height: 9.0mm (.35 in.), width: 50.8mm (2.0 in.), depth: 12.3mm (.49 in.)

S188-WD Glossary

S188-GND

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

9.5

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S210 ® FIELD TERMINATED 19 INCH PANELS

210 panels allow Siemon’s S210 wiring blocks to be mounted directly to a 19 inch EIA rack. These panels represent the ultimate “universal” category 6 rack mount connecting hardware solution as they readily support both voice and data connectivity. Each location can be cross-connected for voice applications or patched to adjacently mounted active equipment to support data applications including VoIP.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

3 4

Industrial Products 1

MapIT Intelligent Patching 2

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

19" Compatible — Black anodized panels can be mounted directly to a 19 inch EIA standard rack or cabinet

Optional Integrated Managers — Field-

terminated panels are available with or without S110®/S210 cable managers and covers

Covers Included

High Performance — Features Siemon‘s S210 connecting blocks for ultimate performance far exceeding category 6 specifications

Complete Kit — Each panel comes complete with the appropriate quantity of S210 connecting blocks, mounting hardware, and label holders with white designation labels

Pyramid™ Wire Entry System

Superior Cable Routing

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Panels with cable managers include covers to hide cables and provide a clean appearance.

Patented cable access openings in base allow cables to be routed from behind the panel directly to the point of termination.

Separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time.

Glossary

S210 Designation Labels page 9.3, S110/S210 Horizontal Cable Managers page 6.9 Index

9.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

S210 FIELD TERMINATED 19 INCH PANELS ÂŽ

Part #

Description

RMS

System Overview

S210DB2-64RFT . . . . . . . . . . 64-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit. . . . . . . 1 S210DB2-128RFT . . . . . . . . . 128-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit . . . . . . 2 S210DB2-192RFT . . . . . . . . . 192-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit . . . . . . 3

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) Each kit includes adequate connecting blocks to fully populate panel.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

S210 FIELD TERMINATED 19 INCH PANELS WITH CABLE MANAGERS Part #

Description

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

RMS

S210DB2-64RWM. . . . . . . . . 64-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit . . . . . . . 2 with cable managers and covers S210DB2-128RWM. . . . . . . . 128-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit . . . . . . 3 with cable managers and covers

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) Each kit includes adequate connecting blocks to fully populate panel.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

VERTICALLY MOUNTED S210 FIELD TERMINATION KITS These 32-pair or 48-pair S210 blocks can be mounted on the same S89B or S89D brackets that hold our S66â&#x201E;˘ blocks. The high density 48-pair kit provides category 6 performance in the same footprint as a standard M1-50 66 block. Field-termination kits include the S210 connecting blocks, designation labels and label holders. Part #

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Description

S210DB1-48FT-89 . . . . . . . . . 48-pair S210 field termination kit on an 89-type retainer* S210DB1-32FT-89 . . . . . . . . . 32-pair S210 field termination kit on an 89-type retainer*

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

S210DB1-48FT-89

S210DB1-32FT-89

*S89 brackets are not included and must be ordered separately (see page 11.9).

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

9.7

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

WALL MOUNT S110速/S210速 CABLE MANAGERS The Siemon S110/S210 cable managers are the foundation of a series of cable management products that are designed to support S110 or S210 cross-connects and patch panel applications. They can be ordered individually for field assembly in wall-mount applications. The cable managers are manufactured with high-strength, flame-retardant thermoplastic, and have been designed for easy cable insertion or withdrawal. The 2 RMS cable manager provides additional capacity for high-density patching applications. Siemon S110/S210 covers can be snapped on to provide color-coding and keep cables hidden.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

CABLE MANAGERS WITHOUT LEGS S110B1RMS . . . . . . . . . . 1 RMS white cable manager without legs

S110B2RMS . . . . . . . . . . 2 RMS white cable manager without legs

S110B1RMS-01 . . . . . . . 1 RMS black cable manager without legs

S110B2RMS-01 . . . . . . . 2 RMS black cable manager without legs

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

CABLE MANAGERS WITH LEGS S110A1RMS . . . . . . . . . 1 RMS white cable manager with legs

S110A2RMS . . . . . . . . . 2 RMS white cable manager with legs

S110A1RMS-01 . . . . . . . 1 RMS black cable manager with legs

S110A2RMS-01 . . . . . . . 2 RMS black cable manager with legs

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Glossary

S210 Field-Termination Kits page 9.3, S110 Field-Termination Kits page 10.3, S110/S210 Covers page 9.9

Index

9.8

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

S100A2 WIRE MANAGER The S100A2 wire manager snaps onto the legs of the S110® or S210® blocks/legs to provide a channel for routing cross-connect wire or patch cords. One S100A2 is designed to be used with each 100-/64-pair leg (2 for 200-/128-pair, 3 for 300-/192-pair) to allow space to access the wires. The S100A2 can also be mounted side-by-side. The outside edges are flared and tapered for smoother wire entry and exit and preventing damage to the conductor insulation.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Part #

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Description

S100A2. . . . . . . . . . . . . Snap-on S110/S210 wire manager, white S100A2-01 . . . . . . . . . . Snap-on S110/S210 wire manager, black

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

S110/S210 COVERS

MapIT Intelligent Patching

The Siemon Company S110/S210 covers are available in 50- and 100-pair sizes (32- and 64-pair for S210). The cover easily snaps on and off wiring blocks and S110/S210 cable managers, and enhances the appearance of the S110/S210 installation. Removable icon tabs provide color-coding on the front for compliance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A administration standard.

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

Part #

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Description

S110-CVR-50-(XX) . . . . . . 50-pair S110 cover/32-pair S210 cover S110-CVR-100-(XX) . . . . . 100-pair S110 cover/64-pair S210 cover

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear, 01 = black, 20 = ivory

Standards Update

Glossary

Clear covers protect connections yet allow full viewing of circuits and individual station ID’s. Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

9.9

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S110® FIELD TERMINATION KITS

Copper Patch Panels

PRE-WIRED S110® BLOCKS

S110® MODULAR JACK BLOCKS

(pages 10.10 – 10.11)

(pages 10.12 – 10.13)

(page 10.3) Modular “RJ” style connections make these blocks ideal for applications requiring frequent changes.

Wall, 19 Inch Panel

Wall, 89D, Tower, 19 Inch Panel

25-300 Pair

6-36 Ports

Category

com

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Mounting Wall, 89D, Tower, Options 19 Inch Panel, XLBET

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Capacity 25-10,800 Pair

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

10.0

Pre-wired blocks are ideal for connecting to equipment with 25-pair connectors.

ibl

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Product Connectivity for horizontal, Applications backbone and consolidation points.

pat

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS S110® Wiring Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 – 10.3

System Overview

S110 Field Termination Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110 Connecting Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S110 Tower® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.4 – 10.5 S110 Tower Field Termination Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110 Tower Modular Jack Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110 Tower Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5

Copper Patch Panels

S110 Field Terminated 19 Inch Panels . . . . . . . 10.6 – 10.7 Field Terminated S110 19 Inch Panels with Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Vertically Mounted S110 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.7 XLBET Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.8 – 10.9 XLBET Frame with S110 Wiring Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 Pre-Wired S110 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.10 – 10.11 Pre-Wired S110 Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.11

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

S110 Modular Jack Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.12 – 10.13 S110 Modular Jack Wall Mount Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 Rack Mount Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Vertical Mount Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 Wall Mount S110/S210 Cable Managers . . . . . . . . 10.14 ®

S100A2 Wire Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14 S110/S210 Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.14

SIEMON-BRAZIL

Special Service Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15

Since its inception in 2000, Siemon Brazil has supported the main

S110/S210 Designation Label Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15

business areas of Rio de Janeiro, Minas Gerais, Brasilia and Salvador

S110 Designation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15

and the rest of the nation from its main office in Sao Paulo. Offering

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

more than just excellent coffee and beautiful beaches, Brazil’s 178 million people run 4.5 million companies — many in need of a secure

S210 Connecting Block System

structured cabling solution for their growing IT needs. Siemon Brazil makes daily strides in leading these companies to the unmatched quality and support offered by Siemon. With an expanding certified installer and consultant base, they service the growing trend towards Category 6 and fiber solutions among large Brazilian facilities. In addition to the country of Brazil, this office manages Siemon operations in countries throughout South, Central and Latin America and the Caribbean. Like all Siemon locations, the scope and quality of their efforts are a credit to our worldwide presence.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Soluções de Cabeamento da Siemon, A Fundação para o Sucesso de seu Negócio Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

10.1

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S110 ® WIRING BLOCKS

iemon S110 field termination kits combine category 5e performance with unparalleled installation features. Each kit includes connecting blocks to complete each 25-pair termination strip on the S110 wiring block (e.g. S110AB2-100FT includes five 4-pair and one 5-pair connecting block per 25-pair termination strip, or a total of twenty 4-pair and four 5-pair connecting blocks).

Copper Patch Panels

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

160 MHz

S110 Blocks mated to S110P4 Patch Plugs deliver component and channel performance to 160 MHz.*

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

2 1

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

*Performance from 100 – 160 MHz based upon extrapolated TIA/EIA limits. 1

Durable Design — Rugged high impact, flameretardant polycarbonate easily withstands force of impact tools

Block Markings — Termination strips on the base are marked in 5-pair increments. Connecting blocks are color-coded

Multi-Application Support — Ideal for use in cross-connect and consolidation point applications

Rear Cable Access Openings

Detachable Blocks

Labeling

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Patented openings between rows allow horizontal cables to be routed from behind the panel and enter the block from the rear, helping maintain cable geometry and outer jacket up to the point of termination, ensuring optimum category 5e performance.

S110 Patch Plugs pages 3.16 – 3.17, S110 Cable Assemblies page 3.17, S110/S210 Covers page 10.14, S110 Designation Labels page 10.15

Glossary

Index

10.2

Another patented Siemon innovation allows 50- and 100-pair wiring blocks to be detached from their mounting legs providing easy access to cables before, during or after installation.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Designation strips with interchangeable colored labels can be mounted in the center and/or outside positions of the wiring block.

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

S110 FIELD TERMINATION KITS 速

Complete S110 installation kits include S110 wiring blocks with detachable legs*, S110 connecting blocks, and clear label holders with white designation labels. Part#

System Overview

Description

S110A(X)1-50FT . . . . . . . 50-pair S110 field termination kit height: 45.7mm (1.80 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S110A(X)2-100FT . . . . . . 100-pair S110 field termination kit height: 91.4mm (3.60 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Copper Patch Panels

S110A(X)2-300FT* . . . . . 300-pair S110 field termination kit height: 274mm (10.80 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Use (X) to specify the connecting blocks: A = 5-pair, B = 4-pair *Legs detachable on 50- and 100-pair version only.

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

S110 CONNECTING BLOCKS Siemon category 5e S110C blocks terminate 22-26 AWG (0.64mm-0.40mm) solid or 7-strand wires. They also offer markings to designate tip and ring conductors and color-coded pairs on each block and a patented single-piece, robust construction.

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

S110C-2A . . . . . . . . . . . 2-pair connecting block, blue/orange

S110C-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-pair connecting block, blue/orange/green

S110C-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair connecting block, blue/orange/green/brown

S110C-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-pair connecting block, blue/orange/green/ brown/slate

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

S110 WIRING BLOCKS WIRING BLOCKS WITH LEGS

WIRING BLOCKS WITHOUT LEGS

S110AW1-50 . . . . . . . . . 50-pair, 110 wiring block with legs height: 45.7mm (1.80 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

S110DW1-25. . . . . . . . . 25-pair, 110 wiring block without legs height: 16.0mm (0.63 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 35.8mm (1.41 in.)

S110AW2-100 . . . . . . . . 100-pair, 110 wiring block with legs height: 91.4mm (3.60 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

S110DW1-50. . . . . . . . . 50-pair, 110 wiring block without legs height: 42.4mm (1.67 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 35.8mm (1.41 in.)

S110AW2-200 . . . . . . . . 200-pair, 110 wiring block with legs height: 182.9mm (7.20 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

S110DW2-100 . . . . . . . . 100-pair, 110 wiring block without legs height: 88.1mm (3.47 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 35.8mm (1.41 in.)

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

S110AW2-300 . . . . . . . . 300-pair, 110 wiring block with legs height: 274.3mm (10.80 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

10.3

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S110 ® TOWER ® SYSTEM

he S110 Tower System provides a modular high-density cross-connect cable management system. It is designed to be wall mounted and is available with S110 field-terminated blocks or modular jack panels. S110 Tower Systems are shipped unassembled to simplify field assembly and termination. 3

Copper Patch Panels

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

5 1

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

Circuit Identification — Designation label holders

Optional Horizontal Ducts — Properly route large

cable managers to tower frame 2

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Robust Design — Screws secure wiring bases and

with white designation strips are included

Horizontal Cable Distribution — Includes S110B1RMS cable managers with covers

quantities of cable between vertical towers

Vertical Cable Managers — Optional small and large scale vertical cable managers available (large-scale version shown) to facilitate routing of patch cords and cross-connect wire Modular, Flexible Design

Enclosed Cable Routing

Horizontal Cable Managers and Covers Included

Tower assembly provides pathways for routing and protecting cables from entry all the way to the point of termination.

All S110 Tower Systems include cable managers and covers to route and protect horizontal cables providing a clean appearance.

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

The S110 Tower Systems are modular and can be stacked to create 300- to 1000-pair (or larger) configurations. Additional blocks can be added as needed for growth.

Glossary

S110/S210 Designation Labels page 10.15, S110 Patch Plugs pages 3.16 – 3.17, S110 Cable Assemblies page 3.17

Index

10.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

S110 TOWER FIELD TERMINATION KITS ®

Part #

Description

System Overview

S110M(X)2-300FT . . . . . 300-pair S110 Tower field termination kit height: 406.4mm (16 in.), width: 215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 152.6mm (6 in.)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S110M(X)2-400FT . . . . . 400-pair S110 Tower field termination kit height: 541.3mm (21.3 in.), width: 215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 152.6mm (6 in.) S110M(X)2-500FT . . . . . 500-pair S110 Tower field termination kit height: 676.1mm (26.6 in.), width: 215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 152.6mm (6 in.)

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Use (X) to specify the connecting blocks: A = 5-pair, B = 4-pair

ibl

S110 TOWER MODULAR JACK PANELS Part #

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Description

S110MB5-(XXX)JP . . . . . . S110 Tower modular jack panel kit, T568A/B

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Use (XXX) to specify port counts: 300 = 36 ports, height: 406.4mm (16.0 in.), width: 400 = 48 ports, height: 541.3mm (21.3 in.), width: 500 = 60 ports, height: 676.1mm (26.6 in.), width: See pages 10.12 – 10.13 for further information on

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 152.6mm (6.0 in.) 215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 152.6mm (6.0 in.) 215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 152.6mm (6.0 in.) S110 Modular Jack Blocks.

Industrial Products

S110 TOWER OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES S188-300 . . . . . . . . . . . Large-scale vertical cable manager for use with 300-pair Tower height: 406.4mm (16.0 in.), width: 215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 190.5mm (7.5 in.)

S110M-WM-300. . . . . . . Small-scale vertical cable manager for use with 300-pair Tower height: 406.0mm (16.0 in.), width: 76.2mm (3.0 in.), depth: 153.0mm (6.1 in.)

S188-400 . . . . . . . . . . . Large-scale vertical cable manager for use with 400-pair Tower height: 541.3mm (21.3 in.), width: 215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 190.5mm (7.5 in.)

S110M-WM-400. . . . . . . Small-scale vertical cable manager for use with 400-pair Tower height: 541.2mm (21.3 in.), width: 76.2mm (3.0 in.), depth: 153.0mm (6.1 in.)

S188-500 . . . . . . . . . . . Large-scale vertical cable manager for use with 500-pair Tower height: 676.1mm (26.6 in.), width: 215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 190.5mm (7.5 in.)

S110M-WM-500. . . . . . . Small-scale vertical cable manager for use with 500-pair Tower height: 675.9mm (26.6 in.), width: 76.2mm (3.0 in.), depth: 153.0mm (6.1 in.)

S188-WD. . . . . . . . . . . . Metal duct for additional horizontal cable management at base of Tower units height: 114.3mm (4.5 in.), width: 215.9mm (8.5 in.), depth: 203.2mm (8.0 in.)

S188-GND . . . . . . . . . . Ground kit consists of one, 3-position grounding busbar height: 9.0mm (0.4 in.), width: 50.8mm (2.0 in.), depth: 12.3mm (.5 in.)

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

S188 S110 Connecting Block System

S188-WD

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

S110M-WM Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

10.5

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S110 ® FIELD TERMINATED 19 INCH PANELS

110 panels allow wiring blocks to be mounted directly to a 19 inch EIA rack. Each panel includes connecting blocks to complete each 25-pair termination strip on the S110 block (e.g. S110DB1-100RFT would include five 4-pair and one 5-pair connecting block per 25-pair termination strip, or a total of twenty 4-pair and four 5-pair connecting blocks).

Copper Patch Panels

1 Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

2 3

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

connecting block 2

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

Color Coding — Color-coded pairs on each S110 Optional Wire Managers — Field terminated

Covers Included — 19 inch panels with cable managers include covers to provide a clean appearance for the patching environment

panels can be ordered with or without S110 wire managers and covers

Mounts to 19" Racks

Rear Cable Access Openings

Horizontal Cable Managers and Covers

Panels are available with S110 cable managers and covers for superior horizontal cable management and a clean appearance.

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Black anodized panels can be mounted directly to 19" EIA racks or cabinets, ideal for installations where wall mounting space is not available.

Glossary

S110/S210 Horizontal Cable Managers page 6.9 Index

10.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

S110 FIELD TERMINATED 19 INCH PANELS 速

Part #

Description

RMS

System Overview

S110D(X)1-100RFT. . . . . . 100-pair, 19 inch panel, S110 field termination kit . . . . 1 S110D(X)1-200RFT. . . . . . 200-pair, 19 inch panel, S110 field termination kit . . . . 2 S110D(X)1-300RFT. . . . . . 300-pair, 19 inch panel, S110 field termination kit . . . . 3

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Use (X) to specify the connecting blocks: A = 5-pair, B = 4-pair Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

S110/S210 Horizontal Cable Managers page 6.9

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

FIELD TERMINATED S110 19 INCH PANELS WITH CABLE MANAGERS Part #

Description

RMS

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

S110D(X)2-100RWM . . . . 100-pair, 19 inch panel, S110 field termination kit . . . . 2 with cable managers and covers S110D(X)2-200RWM . . . . 200-pair, 19 inch panel, S110 field termination kit . . . . 3 with cable managers and covers

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

Industrial Products

Use (X) to specify the connecting blocks: A = 5-pair, B = 4-pair Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

MapIT Intelligent Patching

VERTICALLY MOUNTED S110 BLOCKS

S210 Connecting Block System

This 50-pair S110 block can be mounted on the same S89B or S89D brackets that hold our S66 blocks. The wiring base is available separately or as part of a field-terminated kit that includes the 4- or 5-pair connecting blocks and designation strips. Part #

S110 Connecting Block System

Description

S110DW1-50-89 . . . . . . 50-pair S110 wiring base on an 89-type retainer.* S110 connecting blocks are not included height: 254.0mm (10.0 in.), width: 85.9mm (3.4 in.), depth: 86.6mm (3.4 in.) (dimensions include S89 bracket)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

S110D(X)1-50FT-89 . . . . . 50-pair S110 field termination kit on an 89-type retainer.* Includes S110 connecting blocks and designation strips height: 254.0mm (10.0 in.), width: 85.9mm (3.4 in.), depth: 86.6mm (3.4 in.) (dimensions include S89 bracket)

Standards Update

Glossary

Shown with optional S89D bracket

Use (X) to specify connecting blocks: A = 5-pair, B = 4-pair *S89 brackets are not included and must be ordered separately (see page 11.9).

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

10.7

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

XLBET FRAME

he Siemon XLBET (Extra Large Building Entrance Terminal) frames are designed for use in large installations where space is a premium. Compatible with Siemon’s vertical patching (VPC-6) and cable management (RS-CNL) channels.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

4 1

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

ANSI Compatible — Standard rack mounting per ANSI/EIA-310-C

Single and Double Sided Options — S110® bases can be mounted on one or both sides for additional capacity

Concrete Mounting Kits — Optional kits are available for securing frames to concrete floors

Integrated Cable Routing — Innovative horizontal and vertical cable managers provide cable paths for routing of large quantities of cross-connect wires

Multiple Sizes — Frames are available in 23 in. (.58m) or 35 in. (.89m) widths

High Capacity — Configurable up to 10,800-pairs

5 2

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

Wide Vertical Channels

Pre-wired and Custom Versions

Pre-installed Bases

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Vertical side channels are 6 in. (152mm) deep to accommodate large cable bundles.

Glossary

Frames can be ordered with standard S110 bases factory mounted to save installation time.

Cut installation time with Siemon pre-wired XLBET frames. A wide variety of custom configurations are available. Contact our Technical Support Department for more information.

Vertical Patching Channels (VPC-6) pages 6.6 – 6.7 Vertical Cable Management Channels (RS-CNL) page 6.7 Index

10.8

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

XLBET FRAME Part #

Description

System Overview

XL-(XX)00 . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ft. x 35 in. XLBET frame. Includes rack, wire management and mounting hardware. S110速 wiring blocks not included height: 2133.6mm (84.00 in.), width: 617.5mm (24.31 in.), depth: 406.4mm (16.00 in.)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Use (XX) to specify pair count: 36 = 3600-pair, 72 = 7200-pair Copper Patch Panels

Part #

Description

XL35-(XXX)00 . . . . . . . . . 7 ft. x 23 in. XLBET frame. Includes rack, wire management and mounting hardware. S110 wiring blocks not included height: 2133.6mm (84.00 in.), width: 922.3mm (36.31 in.), depth: 406.4mm (16.00 in.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Use (XXX) to specify pair count: 54 = 5400-pair, 108 = 10,800-pair Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

XLBET FRAME WITH S110 WIRING BLOCKS Part #

Description

XL-(XX)00-W . . . . . . . . . . 7 ft. x 23 in. XLBET frame. Includes rack, wire management, S110 wiring blocks, clear designation holders, labels, and mounting hardware (S110 connecting blocks not included)

Industrial Products

Use (XX) to specify pair count: 36 = 3600-pair, 72 = 7200-pair

Part #

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Description

XL35-(XXX)00-W . . . . . . . 7 ft. x 35 in. XLBET frame. Includes rack, wire management, S110 wiring blocks, clear designation holders, labels, and mounting hardware (S110 connecting blocks not included) Use (XXX) to specify pair count: 54 = 5400-pair, 108 = 10,800-pair

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Part #

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Description

XL-CK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concrete mounting kit. Includes hardware to secure one 23 or 35 inch XLBET frame to a concrete floor XL-(X)-3600 . . . . . . . . . . . S110 connecting block kit. Includes the appropriate number of 4- or 5-pair connecting blocks to fully populate a 3600-pair frame. Two kits can be ordered for 7200-pair frames XL-(X)-5400 . . . . . . . . . . . S110 connecting block kit. Includes the appropriate number of 4- or 5-pair connecting blocks to fully populate a 5400-pair frame. Two kits can be ordered for 10,800-pair frames XL-K23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 in. (.58m) rack conversion kit. Converts one side of a standard 23 inch rack to an XLBET frame. Two kits are required to utilize both sides of a 23 inch rack. Includes wire managers, mounting bars and mounting hardware. Rack, S110 wiring blocks, clear designation holders and labels not included XL-K35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 in. (.89m) rack conversion kit. Converts one side of a standard 35 inch rack to an XLBET frame. Two kits are required to utilize both sides of a 35 inch rack. Includes wire managers, mounting bars and mounting hardware. Rack, S110 wiring blocks, clear designation holders and labels not included

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Use (X) to specify connecting blocks: A = 5-pair, B = 4-pair

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

10.9

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview

PRE-WIRED S110速 BLOCKS For quick, simple connection to phone equipment, the pre-wired S110 blocks provide connectorized 25-pair tails wired to 100- or 300-pair bases. The standard 6 in. (152mm) tails can be ordered extending from the top or bottom of the block with male or female connectors. Contact Customer Service for custom tail lengths.

S110A(X)-100(XXX)-(X) . . . 100-pair S110 pre-wired block

S110A(X)-300(XXX)-(X) . . . 300-pair S110 pre-wired block

Use 1st (X) to specify connecting block subassembly: A = 5-pair, B = 4-pair Use (XXX) to specify connector type: CT = connectorized top (female), CTM = connectorized top (male), CB = connectorized bottom (female), CBM = connectorized bottom (male) Use 2nd (X) to specify cable length: Blank = standard 152mm (6 in.) tail, (X) = custom length, in feet

Industrial Products

Main Cross-Connect (MC)

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

The pre-wired S110 block is ideal for use with phone systems due to its ability to easily accommodate connectorized 25-pair cables for fast and simple setup. In addition, the use of 25-pair cable for backbone cabling allows the pre-wired S110 block to provide an easy interface with your phone system all the way to the telecommunications room where connections can be made to the work area.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Telecommunications Room (TR) Index

10.10

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

PRE-WIRED S110 BLOCKS ÂŽ

Siemonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s S700 series blocks provide a simple interface method between 25-pair assemblies and punchdown fields using easily accessible connections. The blocks feature both fields on the face of the block eliminating the need to trace cables or access the rear of the block when making connections. Each block comes with label holders and white designation labels as well as hook and loop hold-downs to secure the 25-pair connectors.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Part #

Description

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

S700A110-B1-50 . . . . . . 50-pair pre-wired S110 block with legs height: 91.4mm (3.60 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

PRE-WIRED S110 PANELS S110 pre-wired panels mount directly to a 19 inch EIA rack. The panels are available in either 100-, 200-, or 300-pair configurations pre-wired to female 25-pair connectors with black universal connector hold-downs. For optimum transmission performance, pre-wired blocks may be ordered with the pair twisting maintained between the wiring block and the connector. Each panel comes complete with mounting hardware, label holders, and white designation labels.

Part #

Description

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

RMS

S110D(X)(Y)-100RCT . . . . 100-pair pre-wired S110 panel, . . . . . . . 1 with 25-pair connectors S110D(X)(Y)-200RCT . . . . 200-pair pre-wired S110 panel, . . . . . . . 2 with 25-pair connectors S110D(X)(Y)-300RCT . . . . 300-pair pre-wired S110 panel, . . . . . . . 3 with 25-pair connectors

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Use (X) to specify the connecting blocks: A = 5-pair, B = 4-pair Use (Y) to specify twisted-pair option: 1 = without twisted-pairs, T = twisted-pairs Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Glossary

S110/S210 Horizontal Cable Managers page 6.9

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

10.11

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S110 ® MODULAR JACK BLOCKS

he S110 modular jack block provides a pre-wired distribution solution for network applications. The modular jack block can be wall mounted and is typically used to connect horizontal cabling to network equipment. Connections are made by terminating 4-pair horizontal cables to S110 connecting blocks and patching to active equipment.

Copper Patch Panels

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

detached from stand-off legs before, during or after installation 2 3

S110 Connecting Block System

Detachable Legs — 6- and 12- port panels may be

Faster Termination — Multi-pair punch-down tool can be used to reduce termination time (see page 12.6) IEC Compliant Jacks — Modular jacks are

Clean Appearance — Cables entering through access openings in bases are hidden by designation labels to provide a clean appearance

Universal Wiring — S110 4-pair connecting blocks feature “universal” wiring for compatibility with both T568A and T568B wiring configurations

IEC 60603-7 compliant and have 50 microinches minimum hard gold plating over nickel

Economical

Easy Port Access

Tower Option

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Cost effective modular patching solution for small to medium size LANs.

Modular outlets and S110 terminations are located on front of panels for easy access.

Glossary

MC® 5 Patch Cords page 3.10 Index

10.12

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Also available mounted to S110 Tower which includes cable managers and covers to route and protect horizontal cables for a clean appearance (see page 10.5).

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM S110 MODULAR JACK WALL MOUNT BLOCKS 速

l tib

Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Part #

Description

Part #

S110AB5-50JP . . . . . . . . 6-port, T568A/B, with detachable legs height: 45.7mm (1.80 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Copper Patch Panels

Description

S110AB5-100JP . . . . . . . 12-port, T568A/B, with detachable legs height: 91.4mm (3.60 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Part #

S110AB5-300JP . . . . . . . 36-port, T568A/B, with permanent legs height: 274.3mm (10.8 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

Part #

S110 Connecting Block System

ibl

VERTICAL MOUNT PANELS

S210 Connecting Block System

ibl at mp co

RACK MOUNT PANELS

S110AB5-200JP . . . . . . . 24-port, T568A/B, with permanent legs height: 183mm (7.20 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.8mm (3.26 in.)

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Description

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Part #

Description

S110DB5-50JP89 . . . . . . 6-port, T568A/B for mounting on S89 bracket*

Part #

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Description

S110DB5-24RJP . . . . . . . 24-port jack panel, on a 19 inch panel, T568A/B, 2 RMS

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

height: 254.0mm (10.00 in.), width: 85.9mm (3.38 in.), depth: 86.6mm (3.41 in.) (dimensions include S89 bracket)

S110/S210 Horizontal Cable Managers page 6.9

*S89 brackets are not included and must be ordered separately (see page 11.9).

W W W

S I E M O N

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

C O M

10.13

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

WALL MOUNT S110速/S210速 CABLE MANAGERS The Siemon S110/S210 cable managers are the foundation of a series of cable management products designed to support S110 or S210 cross-connects and patch panel applications. They may be ordered individually for field assembly in wall-mount applications. The cable managers are manufactured with high-strength, flame-retardant thermoplastic, and are designed for easy cable insertion or withdrawal. The 2 RMS cable manager provides additional capacity for high-density patching applications. Siemon S110/S210 covers may be snapped on to provide color-coding and keep cables hidden. CABLE MANAGERS WITHOUT LEGS

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

S110B1RMS-(XX) . . . . . . 1 RMS cable manager without legs

S110B2RMS-(XX) . . . . . . 2 RMS cable manager without legs

CABLE MANAGERS WITH LEGS S110A1RMS-(XX) . . . . . . 1 RMS cable manager with legs

S110A2RMS-(XX) . . . . . . 2 RMS cable manager with legs

Use (XX) to specify color: blank = white, 01 = black Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

S210 Field-Termination Kits page 9.3, S110 Field-Termination Kits page 10.3, S110/S210 Covers see below

S100A2 WIRE MANAGER The S100A2 wire manager snaps onto the legs of the S110 or S210 blocks/legs to provide a channel for routing cross-connect wire or patch cords. One S100A2 is designed to be used with each 100-/64-pair leg (2 for 200-/128-pair, 3 for 300-/192-pair) to allow space to access the wires. The S100A2 can also be mounted side-by-side. The outside edges are flared and tapered for smoother wire entry and exit and preventing damage to the conductor insulation. Part#

Description

S100A2. . . . . . . . . . . . . Snap-on S110/S210 wire manager, white S100A2-01 . . . . . . . . . . Snap-on S110/S210 wire manager, black

S110速/S210 COVERS The Siemon Company S110/S210 covers are available in 50- and 100-pair sizes (32- and 64-pair for S210). The cover easily snaps on and off wiring blocks and S110/S210 cable managers, and enhances the appearance of the S110/S210 installation. Removable icon tabs provide color-coding on the front for compliance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A administration standard. Part#

Description

S110-CVR-50-(XX) . . . . . . 50-pair S110 cover/32-pair S210 cover S110-CVR-100-(XX) . . . . . 100-pair S110 cover/64-pair S210 cover Index

10.14

See Cable Management Capacity Table on page 6.0

Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear, 01 = black, 20 = ivory

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S110 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

SPECIAL SERVICE MARKERS These red plastic markers can be inserted onto S110速 blocks to identify connections be noted as special circuits.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

S110-TC-1P-03 . . . . . . . . 1-pair S110 service markers, red

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

S110/S210 DESIGNATION LABEL SHEETS

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Siemon S110/S210 designation label sheets provide the ability to custom print labels used on S110/S210 blocks. The sheets may be used to print 2-, 3-, 4-, or 5-pair labels and eliminate the need to order separate sheets for different pair configurations. There are 20 labels per side and both sides are marked so they may be reversed and re-printed in case of error. They are available in nine colors and are compatible with all Siemon S110/S210 products. Part #

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Description

S110-SHT-(X). . . . . . . . . . S110/S210 Designation label sheets, package of 6

Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Use (X) to specify color: 2 = white, 3 = red, 4 = gray, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue, 7 = green, 8 = violet, 9 = orange, 60 = brown

S210 Connecting Block System

S110 DESIGNATION LABELS

S110 Connecting Block System

Siemon S110 wiring blocks allow designation labels to be mounted between each row of connecting blocks. Each label has 2-, 3-, 4-, and 5-pair markings and may be used for color-coding services in accordance with TIA/EIA-606-A. Part #

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Description

S110-HLDR . . . . . . . . . . . Transparent plastic label holders, bag of 6 S110-LBL-(X) . . . . . . . . . . 2-, 3-, 4-, and 5-pair marked colored labels, bag of 6

Standards Update

Glossary

Use (X) to specify color: 2 = white, 3 = red, 4 = gray, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue, 7 = green, 8 = violet, 9 = orange, 60 = brown

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

10.15

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

M SERIES S66™

B SERIES S66

(pages 11.2 – 11.7)

(page 11.8)

Product Voice and Data, Voice Over IP Applications

Voice Only

Category Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

(Field-Terminated)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

(Connectorized)

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Category

with Twisted-Pair Wiring

Category N/A

(With Modular Jacks)

Mounting Wall, Frame, Rack Options

Industrial Products

Accessories Bridging Clips, Covers, Designation Strips, Stand-off Brackets, Cross-connect Frames, Labels, Metal Housings, Over Voltage Protection

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

Wall

2-125 Pair

Capacity 12-100 Pair

MapIT Intelligent Patching

11.0

N/A

C O M

Bridging Clips, Covers, Designation Strips, Stand-off Brackets, Metal Housings

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS S66M1-50 Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2

System Overview

Field-Terminated M Series S66™ Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Pre-Wired M Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Pre-Wired M2 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 Pre-Wired M4 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 Pre-Wired 157 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 Modular Jack Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5

Copper Patch Panels

Pre-Wired Modular Jack Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 S66M425-2T2-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 S66M1-50-3T25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

S66E3-25-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 Network Interface Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 S66M425-128LR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Field-Terminated B Series S66 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 Stand-Off Brackets for S66 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 Cross-Connect Frames for S66 Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

CC Frame Stand-off Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10 Cross-Connect (CC) Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC Frame Cable Manager Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Metal Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 Snap-on Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 Lasting Hinge Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13 Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13 Designation Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13 Bridging Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Special Service Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Capacity Expanding Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 Organizer Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 Wire Distribution Spools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 Tap 2, 4, 6, 8 Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 SMAK® Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 Pico Protector® Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.16 – 11.17 Ground Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 Current Protection Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 Protection Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.19

SIEMON-MEXICO Established in 2002 in one of the world’s largest cities, Siemon Mexico supports the country from its central offices in Mexico City. Thanks to the industrial explosion throughout Mexico, the country’s need for solid structured cabling has grown exponentially. Siemon Mexico has capitalized on that need, continually increasing market share through superior support and sales programs. With significant wins with G500 companies and a growing network of Certified Installers, Siemon Mexico is poised to continue their impressive growth. Their enthusiasm and professionalism are a credit to Siemon worldwide.

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Soluciones de Cableado de Red, La base para el exito de su negocio

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

11.1

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S66M1-50 BLOCK

he S66M1-50 is a proven, economical connecting block solution for category 5e network cabling. These features make this block an ideal choice for supporting today’s high bandwidth technologies such as Voice over IP (VoIP) and Gigabit ethernet. It is fully compatible with all industry standard accessories and includes a wide range of available mounting accessories that allows the S66M1-50 to be installed in almost any environment. 1

Copper Patch Panels

2 Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

with all category 5e applications including VoIP and Gigabit ethernet

S210 Connecting Block System

Wide AWG Range — Terminates 22 – 26 AWG (0.81 – 0.41mm) solid insulated cable or 18 – 19 AWG (1.02 – 0.91mm) solid stripped cable

Integral Jumper Management — Fanning strips provide management for horizontal cabling and crossconnect jumper wires and provides a labeling surface for circuit identification

S89 Compatible — Mounts to S89 series stand-off brackets to provide space for routing cables behind each block

Compatible with All 66 Accessories

Patented Clip Design

10.2mm (0.40 in.) 5.1mm (0.20 in.)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

25.7mm (1.01 in.)

Standard Pair Spacing

19.7mm (.775 in.)

10.2mm (0.40 in.) 4.8mm (0.19 in.)

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Category 3

Category 5e

Category 5e Pair Spacing

The category 5e S66 block uses the same center spacing between pairs as voice grade blocks and is fully compatible with all industry standard 66 accessories (such as tools, test adapters, mounting brackets, bridging clips, etc.).

Glossary

Each pair of S66 clips is slightly closer together, creating additional space between conductors of adjacent pairs for reduced Near-End Crosstalk.

Category 5e rated S66 quick clip reduces reactive coupling between positions, improving Near-End Crosstalk (NEXT) performance.

Stand-off Mounting Brackets page 11.9, Lasting Hinge Covers page 11.13, Pico Protector® pages 11.16 – 11.17

Index

11.2

Improved NEXT

S110 Connecting Block System

Standards Update

Durable Design — High impact flame retardant thermoplastic

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

VoIP and 1000BASE-T Ready — Ideal for use

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

FIELD-TERMINATED M SERIES S66 BLOCKS â&#x201E;˘

System Overview

4 X 50 BLOCKS S66M1-25. . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 25, Quick Clip: 569

S66M1-50. . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 50, Quick Clip: 500

S66M1-100. . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 100, Quick Clip: 279MS*

height: 254mm (10 in.), width: 86.4mm (3.4 in.), depth: 30.5mm (1.2 in.)

height: 254mm (10 in.), width: 86.4mm (3.4 in.), depth: 24.6mm (1.0 in.)

height: 254mm (10 in.), width: 86.4mm (3.4 in.), depth: 30.5mm (1.2 in.)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

4 X 25 BLOCKS S66M4-12. . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 12, Quick Clip: 569

S66M4-24. . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 24, Quick Clip: 571

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

S66M4-50. . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 50, Quick Clip: 279MS*

Industrial Products

height: 127mm (5 in.), width: 53.3mm (2.1 in.), depth: 30.5mm (1.2 in.)

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

6 X 25 BLOCKS S66M6-24. . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 24, Quick Clip: 843

S66M6-36. . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 36, Quick Clip: 842

S66M6-75. . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 75, Quick Clip: 279MS*

height: 127mm (5 in.), width: 71.1mm (2.8 in.), depth: 30.5mm (1.2 in.)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

*All connecting blocks that use the 279MS quick clip have a tail pin that protrudes 3.3mm (0.13 in.) below the retainer base. Note: Center-to-center vertical spacing between rows of clips is 6.4mm (0.25 in.).

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

11.3

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview

PRE-WIRED M SERIES General Reference Information for all Siemon Pre-wired Blocks • Female 25-pair connectors are oriented for top cable entry and male 25-pair connectors are oriented for bottom cable entry.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

• All 25-pair connectors are equipped with Siemon’s patented universal connector holddown. The connector holddown is black. • Custom configurations available. Please contact our Customer Service Department for information and minimum order quantities.

PRE-WIRED M2 SERIES S66M2-3W. . . . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 25 One female 25-pair connector

S66M2-5W. . . . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 50 Two female 25-pair connectors

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Add “B” for back mounted connector (not shown), add “M” for male connector. Please call for connector/block compatibility. Note: all connector options not available for all blocks.

PRE-WIRED M4 SERIES S66M4-2W . . . . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 50 (bridged) Two female 25-pair connectors

S66M4-4W . . . . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 100 (unbridged) Four female 25-pair connectors

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Add “B” for back mounted connector (not shown), add “M” for male connector. Please call for connector/block compatibility. Note: all connector options not available for all blocks.

PRE-WIRED 157 SERIES 157A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 25 One male 25-pair connector

157B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 50 (unbridged) Two male 25-pair connectors 157C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 50 (unbridged) Two female 25-pair connectors

Glossary

Index

11.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

MODULAR JACK BLOCKS S66M2-5T-68L . . . . . . . . Six 8-position, 4-pair modular jacks, T568B

System Overview

S66M2-5T-84L . . . . . . . . Eight 6-position, 2-pair modular jacks, USOC

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S66M2-5T-86L . . . . . . . . Eight 6-position, 3-pair modular jacks, USOC

Copper Patch Panels

S66M2-5T-124LR . . . . . . . Twelve 6-position, 2-pair modular jacks, USOC

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

S66M2-5T-128LR . . . . . . . Twelve 8-position, 4-pair modular jacks, T568B

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

End view of blocks with modular jacks

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

PRE-WIRED MODULAR JACK BLOCKS S66M2-5T-68L-125R . . . . Six 4-pair modular jacks, one 25-pair female connector, T568B

S210 Connecting Block System

S66M2-5T-84L-125R . . . . Eight 6-position, 2-pair modular jacks, one 25-pair female connector, USOC

S110 Connecting Block System

S66M2-5T-86L-125R . . . . Eight 6-position, 3-pair modular jacks, one 25-pair female connector, USOC

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

S66M25T-124LR-125R . . . Twelve 6-position, 2-pair modular jacks, one 25-pair female connector, USOC

End view of blocks with modular jacks and a 25-pair connector

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

11.5

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S66M425-2T2-8 This block is pre-wired to eight 6-position, 2-pair modular cords, each 0.61m (2 ft) long, and it is also equipped with an S89E bracket, clear plastic cover, and designation labels. It is ideal for use with 2-pair key systems that have modular jacks. Two-pair station cables are punched down on the face of the block and the modular cords are plugged into the ports of the key service unit.

Twisted-Pair Horizontal Cabling

Copper Patch Panels System Equipment

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

M425-2T2-8 Work Area Outlet

S66M1-50-3T25 Designed for use with key systems that have a 25-pair male connector, this block is also ideal for 10BASE-T hubs that have a 25-pair male connector. It provides a 0.91m (3 ft) long, high-performance 25-pair cable (female) that is category 3 compliant, punched down to Row D. Also comes with a protective cover and labels for 2- and 3-pair systems. Add â&#x20AC;&#x153;Mâ&#x20AC;? for male connector.

Industrial Products 25-Pair Cable Assembly

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Twisted-Pair Horizontal Cabling

System Equipment

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

M1-50-3T25 Work Area Outlet

S66E3-25-49 Originally designed to connect 1A2-type 6- or 10-button phones to horizontal wiring, this block is also suitable for use with systems that have a 25-pair connector output (e.g., key systems). This 25-pair block comes with a gray cosmetic plastic cover for wall-mounting in public areas.

25-Pair Cabling

Standards Update

Twisted-Pair Horizontal Cabling

System Equipment

Glossary S66E3-25-49 Work Area Outlet

Index

11.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

NETWORK INTERFACE BLOCKS Siemon’s S66 network interface blocks are ideally suited as an RJ21X interface between service providers (SPs) and the customer premise.

System Overview

S66M1-50R

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

The M1-50 block with one female 25-pair connector is oriented for bottom cable entry and pre-wired to Row D. Uses S89D bracket (included) and blue/white wiring between 25-pair connector and S66 quick clip. Orange hinged cover included.

Copper Patch Panels

Add “M” for male connector.

S66M1-50R

700A-66-B1-25 Same as S66M1-50R except it uses S89B bracket and color-coded 25-pair cable between 25-pair connector and S66™ quick clips.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

;; ;;

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

From Local Exchange Carrier (LEC)

700A-66-B1-25

Network Interface Block (RJ21X)

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

To Customer Premise Cabling

S210 Connecting Block System

S66M425-128LR

S110 Connecting Block System

Designed for use with 4-pair key systems with modular jack connectors on the equipment. This block has twelve, 4-pair modular jacks wired to T568B specifications. It is also useful for 10BASE-T systems that use modular jack outputs. Jacks and the S66 block are mounted on a printed circuit board and are clearly labeled. The block is mounted on an S89E bracket and can be removed for cable management.

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Twisted-Pair Horizontal Cabling System Equipment

Glossary M425-12BLR Work Area Outlet

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

11.7

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

FIELD-TERMINATED B SERIES S66â&#x201E;˘ BLOCKS 6 X 4 BLOCKS S66B4-2 . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 2, Quick Clip: 848

height: 48.3mm (1.9 in.), width: 71.1mm (2.8 in.), depth: 30.5mm (1.2 in.)

S66B3-6 . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 6, Quick Clip: 843 Includes CV-6 cover (see page 11.13)

height: 61.0mm (2.4 in.), width: 71.1mm (2.8 in.), depth: 30.5mm (1.2 in.)

S66B1-12 . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 12, Quick Clip: 843

height: 99.1mm (3.9 in.), width: 71.1mm (2.8 in.), depth: 30.5mm (1.2 in.)

S66B3-50 . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 50, Quick Clip: 843

S66B3-75 . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 75, Quick Clip: 842

6 X 6 BLOCKS S66B4-3 . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 3, Quick Clip: 848

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

S66B3-4 . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 4, Quick Clip: 843

6 X 12 BLOCKS S66B1-6 . . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 6, Quick Clip: 848

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

6 X 50 BLOCKS height: 340.0mm (13.4 in.), width: 71.1mm (2.8 in.), depth: 30.5mm (1.2 in.)

S66B4-25 . . . . . . Pair Capacity: 25, Quick Clip: 848

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

11.8

Note: Center-to-center vertical spacing between rows of clips is 6.4mm (0.25 in.).

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

STAND-OFF BRACKETS FOR S66 BLOCKS ™

All of our brackets are designed to create clean, efficient, and space-saving installations when used with S66 connecting blocks. They are open-ended to enable installers to lay in cable before snapping a block into place. 25-pair connectors and/or modular components can be mounted on the sides or back of the brackets. The brackets are molded from flame retardant thermoplastic.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Which bracket do you need? It depends on the block you’re ordering …

Block Type M4 X 50* M4 X 25 M6 X 25 B6 X 50 All other B-type

Copper Patch Panels

Bracket S89B or S89D S89E S89F SB6 SB8-10

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

*The M1-100 can only be used with the S89D bracket. The stand-off brackets (S89D shown) allow cables to be routed behind blocks and provide a means to route cables to the front of the block for termination. S89D . . . . . . . . . . . . Use with all M4 X 50 blocks. Can mount two 25-pair connectors on each side and four on the back

S89B . . . . . . . . . . . . Use with M1-25 or M1-50 blocks. Can mount one 25-pair connector on each side

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S89E. . . . . . . . . . . . . Use with all M4 X 25 blocks. Can mount one 25-pair connector on each side and two on the back

SB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use with all B6 X 50 series blocks. Can mount three 25-pair connectors on each side and six on the back

S210 Connecting Block System

S89F. . . . . . . . . . . . . Use with all M6 X 25 blocks. Can mount one 25-pair connector on each side and three on the back

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

SB8-10 . . . . . . . . . . . Use for mounting all sizes of S66B blocks

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Technical Tip! When mounting blocks end-to-end using SB8-10 brackets, use three brackets for two blocks, four brackets for three blocks and so on.

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

11.9

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

CROSS-CONNECT FRAMES FOR S66 ™ BLOCKS

iemon preassembled cross-connect (CC) frames offer multiple configurations to provide consistent spacing of S66M series blocks. The frames are versatile in design to accommodate both field terminated and prewired blocks with varying cable management options.

CC-2015-TB-DC. . . . . . . . height: 311.2mm (12.25 in.), width: 514.4mm (20.25 in.), depth: 94.0mm (3.70 in.)

CC-2025-TB-DC. . . . . . . . height: 577.9mm (22.75 in.), width: 514.4mm (20.25 in.), depth: 94.0mm (3.70 in.)

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

S66M Compatible — Mounts all standard S66M series connecting blocks and wire management accessories

Flexible Mounting — Frames mount on 19 inch relay racks or walls (mounting hardware is provided for both) Higher Density

Technical Tip! Use high-density prewired S66 blocks with rear-mounted connectors and CC Frame stand-off brackets to get the highest density and best cable management.

Easier Access

Optional Stand-off Brackets

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Frames designed for five blocks across accept field terminated or prewired blocks with connectors mounted on the back.

Stand-off brackets are available to provide 152.4mm (6 in.) of additional space behind the frame for enhanced cable access and management.

CC FRAME STAND-OFF BRACKETS Constructed of the same lightweight, high-strength black anodized aluminum as the CC Frames, these stand-off brackets mount on the back of the CC Frame to allow 152.4mm (6 in.) clearance for cable feeds. Part #

Description

SOB-CC . . . . . . . . . Stand-off bracket kit (two brackets) for CC Frames. Two kits are required to mount half-size frame, three kits to mount full-size frame and one kit for the wire hanger assembly. Includes mounting hardware.

Index

11.10

Frames designed for four blocks across accept prewired blocks or our Modular Patch Blocks with two side-mounted connectors (e.g. S66M2-5W or 157C, see page 11.4). Additional spacing is provided between blocks to enable better access.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Technical Tip! Use stand-off brackets to get higher density and improved cable management.

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM CROSS-CONNECT (CC) FRAMES Frames Only

Frames with Brackets and Top and Bottom Spools

Frames with Brackets and Top Spools

Frames with Brackets

Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

CC-2024-NS-NB

CC-2024-NS-DC

CC-2024-TS-DC

CC-2024-TB-DC

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

CC-2014-NS-NB

CC-2014-NS-DC

CC-2014-TS-DC

CC-2014-TB-DC Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Bracket type: DC = S89D; NB = No Bracket Spool location: NS = No Spool; TS = Top Spool; TB = Top & Bottom Frame size: 2014 = Half size frame (4 Bracket capacity); 2024 = Full size frame (8 Bracket capacity)

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

CC-2025-NS-NB

CC-2025-NS-DC

CC-2025-TS-DC

CC-2025-TB-DC S210 Connecting Block System

CC-2015-NS-NB

CC-2015-NS-DC

CC-2015-TS-DC

S110 Connecting Block System

CC-2015-TB-DC

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Bracket type: DC = S89D; NB = No Bracket Spool location: NS = No Spool; TS = Top Spool; TB = Top & Bottom Frame size: 2015 = Half size frame (5 Bracket capacity); 2025 = Full size frame (10 Bracket capacity)

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

CC FRAME CABLE MANAGER ASSEMBLIES For mid-to-large cross-connect installations these cable manager assemblies provide efficient and effective wire management on the CC Frames. They may be mounted either flush to a wall or on a relay rack. To order individual cable managers see page 6.13. Part #

Description

Standards Update

RMS

CC-2005-144. . . . . Cable manager with five S144 managers. . . . 2 CC-2005-145. . . . . Cable manager with five S145 managers. . . . 2 CC-2005-146. . . . . Cable manager with five S146 managers. . . . 2

Glossary

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

11.11

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

METAL HOUSINGS Metal housings protect blocks and connections from damage when installed in “high risk” areas such as on a wall in a warehouse or factory. Our housings are manufactured from durable 18 gauge steel with a gray or beige finish. We provide two options — you can purchase housings with the blocks already assembled or just the housings to install your own blocks. These metal housing are not weatherproof and are recommended for indoor use only.

Part #

Description

MH-25-49 . . . . . . . . . . . Housing for one 6 X 50 B block or one 4 X 50 M block, gray height: 442mm (17.40 in.), width: 137mm (5.40 in.), depth: 45.7mm (1.80 in.) MH-50-49 . . . . . . . . . . . Housing for two 6 X 50 B blocks or two 2 X 50 M blocks, gray height: 442mm (17.40 in.), width: 229mm (9.03 in.), depth: 45.7mm (1.80 in.)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

HOUSING WITH BLOCKS

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

S66M1-25MH-49 . S66M1-50MH-49 . S66M1-100MH-49 S66B4-25MH-49 . . S66B4-50MH-49 . . S66B3-50MH-49 . . S66B3-100MH-49 .

Industrial Products

(Blocks shown on pages 11.3 and 11.8)

Part #

Description . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

One S66M1-25 block in a MH-25 gray metal housing One S66M1-50 block in a MH-25 gray metal housing Two S66M1-50 blocks in a MH-50 gray metal housing One S66B4-25 block in a MH-25 gray metal housing Two S66B4-25 blocks in a MH-50 gray metal housing One S66B3-50 block in a MH-25 gray metal housing Two S66B3-50 blocks in a MH-50 gray metal housing

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

SNAP-ON COVERS These economical snap-on covers protect S66™ quick clips while providing a clear view of the wiring terminations. Made of flame-retardant plastic. Part #

For Use With

Part #

For Use With

MC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M4 X 50

BC612. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B6 X 12

MC425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M4 X 25

BC6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B6 X 50

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

11.12

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

LASTING HINGE COVERS Use these lasting hinge covers and youâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;ll save up to 90% of the cost of a colored backboard system â&#x20AC;&#x201D; and with colored covers, the planner or installer can color-code individual blocks instead of working in groups of four or eight.

System Overview

Made from flame-retardant thermoplastic, the covers protect the quick clips and provide a convenient surface for marking circuit designations.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Each cover is hinged and can be easily removed and replaced. There are two depths for the covers; the standard-profile allows for standard plug-on accessories, and the high-profile cover allows for larger accessories such as the Colored Bridging Clips (see page 11.14).

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Part #

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Description

MC425LH-(X) . . . . . . . . . Cover for M425-type block Use (X) to specify color: 6 = blue, 9 = orange

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

MC4LH-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . Cover for M450-type block Use (X) to specify color: 2 = white, 3 = red, 4 = gray, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue, 7 = green, 8 = violet, 9 = orange

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

MC4LH-HP-9 . . . . . . . . . . High-profile orange cover for M450-type block

Industrial Products

LABELS

MapIT Intelligent Patching

These adhesive backed, lined labels allow technicians to write and maintain circuit information on the MC4 plastic snap-on cover.

S210 Connecting Block System

Part #

S110 Connecting Block System

Description

MC4-LBL-25 . . . . . . . . . . Label for MC4 cover, numbered 1-25

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

DESIGNATION STRIPS Designation strips mount quickly and easily on the fanning strips of both M and B series S66 blocks. The strips provide a convenient labeling surface for circuit identification.

Standards Update

For M Blocks D10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White lined designation strip

For B Blocks

Glossary

D13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White lined designation strip

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

11.13

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

BRIDGING CLIPS These industry standard bridging clips are used to connect adjacent quick clips on S66â&#x201E;˘ blocks. The clips are easy to remove (see page 12.9 for information on our handy PROBEPIC) for isolating and testing incoming pairs from outgoing pairs and are reusable. Available in either tin-plated grade A copper alloy (voice and data) or stainless steel (voice only). Tin-plated Copper Alloy Clips

Stainless Steel Clips*

SA1-(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-position clip

SA1-SS-(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . 2-position clip, stainless steel

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Use (XXXX) to specify quantity: 100 = 100/bag, 1000 = 1000/bag *Not recommended for use with data applications.

COLORED BRIDGING CLIPS Designed to fit the 66M type connecting block, each of these plug-on adapters contain two standard SA-1 bridging clips, so they actually bridge a complete pair when installed, not just a single wire. The plastic housings are color-coded and serve to protect the quick clip. Technicians can test lines with the clips in place by using our TPE in-line test probe. SMBC-2-(X). . . . . . . . . Bridging clip

TPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test probe/extractor

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Use (X) to specify color: 2 = white, 3 = red, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue, 7 = green, 8 = violet

SPECIAL SERVICE MARKERS These red plastic markers slide over S66 quick clips and terminated wires and are ideal for marking special circuits on blocks. Part #

Description

S-857-916 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-position red marker

CAPACITY EXPANDING ADAPTERS These adapters create additional capacity on S66 blocks by plugging directly onto the S66 quick clips â&#x20AC;&#x201D; with or without wires punched down. The adapters come with either one or two additional quick clips. Use a high-profile lasting hinge cover to fit over the adapters (see page 11.13). The adapters are top and bottom stackable, but not side-by-side stackable. Not designed for use on category 5e S66M1-50 blocks. SA2. . . . . . . . . . Adapter with 1 double quick clip

SA2-1 . . . . . . . . Adapter with 2 single quick clips

Index

11.14

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SA3. . . . . . . . . . Adapter with 1 single quick clip

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

ORGANIZER RINGS These plastic rings snap directly onto the side of an S89-type mounting bracket to organize, position, and retain cable and cross-connect wire. They also work well as a patch cord manager when used with our Modular Patch Blocks (see page 2.13). Part #

System Overview

Description

S606P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Organizer ring

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

WIRE DISTRIBUTION SPOOLS

Copper Patch Panels

All of these high-impact plastic spools are used to neatly guide and retain cable or jumper wires. Cabling is held in place by the spool’s rim to allow easy access for changes or modifications. The S20A and S20B are white and can be used with either a main cross-connect frame or backboard. The S20C is black to match our CC frames (see page 11.11) and modular patch panels, and screws directly into the mounting holes of a standard 19 or 23 inch relay rack.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

S20A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White spool without screw height: 42.7mm (1.68 in.), width: 42.7mm (1.68 in.), depth: 74.9mm (2.95 in.)

S20B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . White spool with captive (#10) wood screw height: 42.7mm (1.68 in.), width: 42.7mm (1.68 in.), depth: 74.9mm (2.95 in.)

S20C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black spool with captive (#12-24) machine screw height: 42.7mm (1.68 in.), width: 42.7mm (1.68 in.), depth: 74.9mm (2.95 in.)

Technical Tip! We recommend a (#10) wood screw for wall mount applications and a (#12-24) machine screw for rack mount applications.

Industrial Products

TAP® ADAPTERS

MapIT Intelligent Patching

The TAP is a flexible modular connecting adapter designed to access 66M connecting blocks. When installed, the TAP permits customer administration of moves and changes using modular cords, and provides test access. The TAP is designed in 1-, 2-, 3-, and 4-pair configurations and can be end-stacked (except TAP-2) or mounted side by side on a 66M block. Part # TAP-2. TAP-4. TAP-6. TAP-8.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

S210 Connecting Block System

Description . . . .

. . . .

1-pair, 2-pair, 3-pair, 4-pair,

6-position 6-position 6-position 8-position

adapter, adapter, adapter, adapter,

S110 Connecting Block System

USOC USOC USOC T568B

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

TESTAR S66 Test Adapters page 12.5

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

SMAK® KIT Our SMAK Kits allow you to add modular components to a S66™ block in the field. Designed to mount on the sides of S66 stand-off brackets (see page 11.9), each kit contains a onepiece plastic yoke, two self-tapping screws, and three or four modular components. Part # SMAK-2 . SMAK-4 . SMAK-6 . SMAK-8 .

Standards Update

Description . . . .

. . . .

Four, 1-pair 6-position modular jacks and 1 yoke Four, 2-pair 6-position modular jacks and 1 yoke Four, 3-pair 6-position modular jacks and 1 yoke Three, 4-pair modular jacks and 1 yoke

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

11.15

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

PICO PROTECTOR ® MODULE

esigned for use as secondary protection (to supplement primary protection). Each Pico® module provides both overvoltage and “sneak current” protection on 66M blocks in one pair increments. The Pico uses very high-speed, solid-state technology for voltage protection and fuses for current protection. The Pico Protector provides an effective and economical way to protect expensive and sensitive electronic equipment. The system consists of two components: a protector module and a ground kit. Ground kits are available and consist of a snap-on ground plate or “bus bar” and jumpers to safely divert surge energy to ground. 2

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

3 1

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Easy Access — Molded handle for easy installation

and removal 2

No Additional Space Requirements — Plugs directly onto 66 clips over existing cabling

Priority Circuit Identification — Special red designation caps are available to label priority circuits

Multi-Pair Protection — Provide up to 50-pair protection on a standard M1-100 block

Side Stackable — Protects 1-pair each and can be end- or side-stacked

Surge Protection

Replaceable Fuses

In-Line Testing

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Pico Protector provides low cost wiring surge protection for system or station equipment. A necessity for areas with high electric storm activity.

Index

11.16

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Fuses can be easily replaced if necessary, eliminating costs of replacement modules.

TP-4P test probe allows you to attach test equipment to the 66 block without removing the Pico Protector. This handy adapter can also be used to easily remove protector modules from quick clips.

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

Guidelines for choosing the correct voltage level for Pico Protectors

速

Measure the operating DC signal voltage of your equipment. For example: 48Vdc

Measure the peak AC voltage of your equipment, (RMS voltage x 1.41). For example: 90Vac x 1.41 = 127Vpeak

Add together the voltage values determined by steps 1 and 2 above: 48Vdc + 127V = 175Vpeak

Select the Pico速 module rated for the stand-off voltage nearest to, but not below, the value determined by step 3. For this example: the PM-230 module is the best selection since its stand-off voltage is 180V

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

PICO PROTECTOR MODULE Part #

DC Breakover Voltage (賊15%)

PM-007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.0 PM-027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0 PM-068 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.0 PM-140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140.0 PM-180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180.0 PM-230* . . . . . . . . . . . . 230.0

volts volts volts volts volts volts

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Stand-off Voltage (Vso)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . 50.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 102.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 131.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 180.0

volts volts volts volts volts volts

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

*For protecting equipment that is connected to Central Office (voice, fax, modem, etc.) lines, the PM-230 module is always recommended.

Technical Tip! You can retrofit Pico Protectors on an installed M1-50 block. The ground bar mounts inside the fanning strip (as shown here) allowing the Pico module to be plugged into the center rows of an M1-50 block.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

DEFINITIONS DC breakover voltage: The voltage range at which a given module will activate to divert surge energy to ground. Stand-off voltage: The maximum voltage level of the Pico速 module under no-surge conditions that will keep it from interfering with normal operation of the circuit. Note: Frequency bandwidth limitations may apply. Contact our Technical Support Department.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

GROUND KITS Part #

Description

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

PG-06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-pair kit includes snap-on ground plate and six 203mm (8 in.), female-ended, quick-connect jumpers PG-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair retrofit kit for a pre-installed M1-50 block includes bus bar assembly, snap-on ground plate, and two 102mm (4 in.), female-ended, quick-connect jumpers PG-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-pair retrofit kit for a pre-installed M1-100 block includes two bus bar assemblies, snap-on ground plate, two 102mm (4 in.) and two 203mm (8 in.) female-ended, quick-connect jumpers PK-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair kit includes M1-50 block, S89D bracket, snap-on ground plate, two 102mm (4 in.) female-ended, quick-connect jumpers, and one bus bar assembly PK-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-pair kit includes M1-100 block, S89D bracket, snap-on ground plate, two 102mm (4 in.) female-ended, quick-connect jumpers, two 203mm (8 in.) quick-connect jumpers, and two bus bar assemblies

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

11.17

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

CURRENT PROTECTION MODULE Our CPM-2PLUS® prevents cable and equipment damage due to “sneak currents” (continuous foreign current levels exceeding 0.350 amperes). Sneak currents are not high enough to trigger overvoltage protectors but can pose fire hazards and cause damage to sensitive electronic equipment. They may be caused by direct or indirect contact with power lines, a low impedance connection to earth ground, or by a short circuit somewhere on the line. Each Current Protection Module contains two fuses in a clear plastic carrier. They are installed across two adjacent pairs of 66 quick clips, establishing solid contact with the clips. When the module is activated, the fuse opens, cutting off the flow of excessive current, preventing fire risk and shock hazards on data and voice transmission lines. The modules are side- and end-stackable, allowing up to 50-pair protection on a standard M1-100 block or 25-pair protection in a standard M1-50 block. Use Siemon part number TP-4P (see below) to test block wiring without removing the protection module. Also use the TP-4P to easily extract CPM-2PLUS modules from the block. Red plastic caps are available to designate priority circuits. Part #

Description

CPM-2PLUS. . . . . . . . . . . Current protection module with two replaceable fuses

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

S66 Blocks pages 11.2 – 11.8

ACCESSORIES These accessories compliment Siemon’s Protection products. They are compatible for use with both Pico and CPM-2PLUS modules.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

SF-035. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 mA replacement fuse

TP-4P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapter for test access and removal of modules and fuses

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

CP-675-C . . . . . . . . . . . . Red designation caps for ready identification of special services

Glossary

Index

11.18

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S66 CONNECTING BLOCK SYSTEM Web Resources

PROTECTION SOLUTIONS Siemon’s solid-state and sneak current secondary protection products can save your voice and data equipment from damage caused by direct or indirect contact with lightning, power lines, or electrostatic discharge. Primary protection devices are designed to protect people and buildings and are usually installed on the regulated side of a network by the local exchange carrier. Primary protection activates when lightning strikes, power lines cross, or when other situations that create high voltage occur, triggering the device to divert the surge energy to ground. However, primary protection devices do not respond fast enough and their clamping levels are not exact enough to protect today’s sensitive electronic equipment. Secondary protection installed behind primary protection will stop any damaging surges or currents that get past your primary protection.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

1. To protect the system equipment from surges introduced between the building entrance and the system equipment, install the Pico Protector® or CPM-2PLUS® between those two points and as close as possible to the equipment being protected.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

2. To protect the system equipment from surges introduced between the system equipment and the work area, install the Pico Protector or CPM-2PLUS between those two points and as close as possible to the equipment being protected.

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

3. To protect the work area equipment that is connected to the Local Exchange Carrier (eg. Centrex Lines), Campus Backbone Cabling or System Equipment. If the work area equipment operates over more than one-pair, install the Pico Protector or CPM-2PLUS as close as possible to the equipment being protected.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

11.19

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

STM-8 AND STM-8-S

MT-5000

(pages 12.2 â&#x20AC;&#x201D; 12.3)

(page 12.4)

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Media Types UTP, Screened

UTP

Cable Size 1-4 Pair Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

1-4, 25 Pair

Distance 900m (2950 ft.)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Additional Identifiable Passive Remotes, Accessories Active Remotes

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

12.0

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

762m (2500 ft.)

Universal Plug-Ended Modular Cords

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS STM-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 – 12.3

System Overview

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 MT-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

25-Pair Test Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 MODAPT

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4

TESTAR® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 S110 ® Test Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5

Copper Patch Panels

S110/S210 ® Multi-Pair Termination Tools . . . . . 12.6 – 12.7 S814 Impact Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 Palm Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

CI-KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 CI-KIT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 PROBE-PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Cutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 Electrician’s Scissors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

TERA™ Cable Preparation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CPT-WEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 PT-908 Crimp Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 Coaxial Crimp Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11

S I E M O N - J A PA N With 30% of the G500 headquarters located on the island, Japan presents a unique opportunity for Siemon. With its sights set firmly

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

on penetrating this substantial market, Siemon opened its Japan offices in April 2003.

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Located in central Tokyo, Siemon Japan provides not only sales and customer service, but also expert technical service through its own staff and network of certified installer, consultant and distributor partners. Based upon a solid team, strong partnerships and Siemon’s premier structured cabling solutions, Siemon Japan continues its steady climb. In a culture which places the highest of priorities on quality, Siemon’s longstanding commitment to quality, service, innovation and value will continue to resonate.

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

12.1

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

STM-8

he STM-8 is an economical and versatile hand-held tester designed for the testing of UTP and screened cable for opens, shorts, reversals, miswires, split pairs and cable length. Its rugged, state-of-the-art construction, easy-to-read LCD display and multiple remotes allow one person to quickly test and identify up to four different cable runs from one location.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

3 4

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

5 1

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

indication is provided, as well as automatic shut-off 2

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Extended Battery Life — A low battery status Long Length Testing — Test cable runs up to 900m (2950 ft.)

Easy Reference — Indications for 6- and 8-position jacks

Multi-Location Testing — Additional remotes can be purchased separately

Universal Compatibility — The UTP modular cords are equipped with patented “universal” plugs, (see page 3.11) that fit into any standard 6- or 8-position modular jack

Line Voltage Indicator — The presence of line voltage is indicated on the display to help prevent accidental damage to the unit

Tests All Wiring Configurations

Determines Unknown Wiring

Determines Cable Length

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Tests T568A, T568B, USOC, 10BASE-T, Token Ring, and TP-PMD wiring configurations.

Glossary

In FIND mode, the STM-8 will detect and identify which wiring scheme is present in the cable being tested.

In the LENGTH mode, the STM-8 will determine the distance measurements on any given cable up to 900m (2950 ft.). This feature may be used with all four identifiable remotes.

MODAPTt® page 12.4, S110® Test Adapter page 12.5, TESTAR® page 12.5 Index

12.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

STM-8 AND STM-8-S Part #

Description

System Overview

STM-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTP (unshielded, twisted-pair) cable tester. Includes carrying case, remote “A”, two universal plug-ended modular cords, wiring guide, 9V alkaline battery, instructions, and warranty card MC-8-005 . . . . . . . . . . . Universal plug-ended modular replacement cord

Horizontal Cross-Connect

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Work Area Outlet

The S110® Test Adapter can be used to test horizontal cabling that is terminated on 110-type connecting blocks 4-pair UTP

Copper Patch Panels

4-pair UTP Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

TAP-110 Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

STM-8-R(X) Passive Remote

STM-8

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

S110 Block

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

STM-8-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screened twisted-pair cable tester. Includes carrying case, active remote, two screened modular cords, wiring guide, 9V alkaline battery, instructions, and warranty card MC5-S-8-005 . . . . . . . . . Screened modular replacement cord

Horizontal Cross-Connect Screened Modular patch cord wired straight through

Industrial Products

Work Area Outlet

4-pair Screened cable

MapIT Intelligent Patching

4-pair Screened cable

S210 Connecting Block System

STM-8-RA-S active remote

STM-8-S

S110 Connecting Block System

Patch Panel with Screened couplers

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

ACCESSORIES

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Siemon’s active remote utilizes a shielded jack for testing both UTP and shield continuity of screened cabling. LEDs on remote indicate test results after each test cycle; solid green LED flash for pass and solid red LED flash for fail. Identifiable passive remotes are also available for testing multiple locations.

Standards Update

STM8-RA-S . . . . . . . . . . . Active remote for UTP/Screened with two screened modular cords, instructions, 3V lithium battery, and warranty card

STM8-R(X). . . . . . . . . . . . Additional identifiable UTP passive remotes Use (X) to specify remote identity: A = remote A, 3 = kit of remotes B, C, and D

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

12.3

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

MT-5000 The MT-5000 is a versatile, hand-held cable tester — it is fast, reliable, and durable. It tests opens, shorts, and miswires from 1- to 25-pairs and can accommodate a combination of 25-pair and modular jack terminations. For instance, using the 25-pair test adapter (see below), the remote unit can be attached to a 66 block that is connected to multiple horizontal cable runs in the equipment closet. Then, using the modular jack in the master unit, one person can test up to six 4-pair station cables in the work area. Cable runs of up to 762m (2,500 ft.) can be tested with accuracy. The MT-5000 tests individual conductors, not pairs. This allows testing of all wiring configurations including USOC, T568A, and T568B. The MT-5000 consists of a master and a remote unit. The master controls all of the test functions, so one person can perform testing. Test results are reported on a large, easy-to-read LCD display. Each unit has both male and female 25-pair connectors, one 6-position (1-, 2- or 3-pair) modular jack, and one 8-position (4-pair) keyed modular jack. The unit also features a low-battery status indicator, a power input jack, and a power saving auto-off switch. It comes in a padded, nylon carrying case with batteries included. Part #

Description

MT-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable tester (master and remote) with case and two universal plug-ended modular cords

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

25-PAIR TEST ADAPTERS Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Siemon 25-pair test adapters are designed for accessing all 25 pairs on a 66M connecting block. A positive connection ensures accurate testing with easy installation and removal. They can also be used to field-connectorize 66M blocks. Available with either male or female 25-pair connectors. Part #

S210 Connecting Block System

Description

TAP-50F . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair S66™ test adapter with female connector TAP-50M . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair S66 test adapter with male connector

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

TAP-50

MODAPT® This modular adapter allows in-line testing for any plug/jack combination. It includes two 4-pair jacks plus a 152mm (6 in.) modular cord terminated with our patented 4-pair “universal” plug for accessing any standard 6- or 8-position jack (see page 3.11). Individual conductors are broken out by pin number and correspond to eight separate test pads. Test equipment can be securely attached to the test pads using alligator clips. For quick reference in the field, USOC, T568A, and T568B wiring charts are printed right onto the MODAPT body. When used with Siemon’s TESTAR® adapter and S110® test adapter (see next page), the MODAPT can be used to test connections on S66M and S110 blocks.

Glossary

Part # Index

12.4

Description

MODAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . Test adapter with one 152mm (6 in.) 4-pair universal plug-ended modular cord

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS e ibl mp

Web Resources

TESTAR

The TESTAR creates easy test access to 66 quick clips. It plugs directly onto the S66™ block, establishing a positive connection and providing a 4-pair modular jack for plugging in test equipment. The body is molded in blue plastic and has molded-in finger grips for easy handling. Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

TESTAR-8T-C5 . . . . . . . . . Category 5e compatible, 4-pair, 8-position, TESTAR, T568A TESTAR-8A-C5. . . . . . . . . Category 5e compatible, 4-pair, 8-position, TESTAR, T568B

Copper Patch Panels

OTHER TESTARS The positive connection made by the TESTAR eliminates possible problems associated with handling alligator clips or test probes such as accidental shorting across terminals or intermittent test connections. Test equipment is inserted into the TESTAR through a 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-pair modular jack. To utilize equipment requiring alligator clips, our MODAPT® adapter (see previous page) can be plugged into the TESTAR. Part # TESTAR-2 . . TESTAR-4 . . TESTAR-6 . . TESTAR-8R1 TESTAR-8 . . TESTAR-8T .

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Description . . . . . .

. . . . . .

1-pair, 2-pair, 3-pair, 4-pair, 4-pair, 4-pair,

6-position, 6-position, 6-position, 8-position, 8-position, 8-position,

TESTAR, TESTAR, TESTAR, TESTAR, TESTAR, TESTAR,

USOC USOC USOC USOC T568B T568A

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

1-pair

2-pair

3-pair

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

4-pair

Industrial Products

ibl

S110 ® TEST ADAPTERS

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Siemon’s 1-, 2-, 3-, and 4-pair S110 test adapters provide a convenient way to test 110-type connecting blocks. These adapters plug directly onto any 110-type connecting block and provide a modular jack for connection to test equipment or patch cords. It is the only 110 style test adapter that can be attached to both terminated and unterminated 110-type connecting blocks. The 2-, 3-, and 4-pair adapters are end-stackable, and are polarized to prevent incorrect insertion.

S210 Connecting Block System

The 4-pair test adapters have an area for a colored icon (a blue and red icon are included) for additional identification. The 4-pair adapter is available in T568A and T568B wiring configurations and is category 5e compatible for highperformance link testing. Part # TAP-110-U1 TAP-110-UT. TAP-110-U3 TAP-110-U4 TAP-110-T4 .

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Description . . . . .

. . . . .

1-pair, 6-position, test adapter, USOC 2-pair, 8-position, test adapter, Token Ring/USOC 3-pair, 6-position, test adapter, USOC 4-pair, 8-position, test adapter, USOC Category 5e compatible, 4-pair, 8-position, test adapter, T568A TAP-110-A4 . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e compatible, 4-pair, 8-position, test adapter, T568B

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Technical Tip! The adapters utilize a unique, spring-loaded contact design to ensure a reliable connection without disturbing existing cross-connect terminations. This also extends the life-cycle of the test adapter.

Glossary

1-pair

2-pair

3-pair

4-pair Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

12.5

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

S110 ® /S210 ® MULTI-PAIR TERMINATION TOOL

he Siemon S110/S210 multi-pair termination tool is a versatile impact tool designed to terminate and cut UTP cable, and seat connecting blocks. The impact mechanism and termination blades have been designed to reliably terminate and cut UTP cable the first time, every time. The tool features an easy to hold, ergonomically designed handle that helps reduce fatigue when trimming wire or seating connecting blocks to the wiring base.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

1 2 3

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Ready Orientation — Clearly displayed “CUT” designation for proper orientation during termination

Interchangeable Heads — Tool accommodates both S110 and S210 heads

S210 Connecting Block System

mechanism 4

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Long Term Reliability — Reliable impact Ergonomic Design — Ergonomically designed rubber handle with ribbed edge provides no-slip grip

Technical Tip! Termination blades for Siemon punch down tools are reversible — one end terminates and cuts off the excess wire, the other end terminates without cutting.

Multi-Function Tool

Use in Work Area and Telecommunication Room

Compatible with All S110 Products

Seats conductors and trims wires on both the cable side and the cross-connect side of connecting blocks. It also seats S110 or S210 clips onto base.

The 4-pair S110 multi-pair tool can also be used with dual, flat 5e CT® couplers and HD5® patch panels.

Slimmer termination tool head works with S110 modular jack panels.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

12.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

S110®/S210® MULTI-PAIR TERMINATION TOOLS

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

S788J4-210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair S210 termination tool

S788J4B-210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair S210 replacement cutting blade and insertion assembly

S788J4H-210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair S210 replacement head for impact tool, including housing, cutting blade and insertion assembly

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

S788J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair S110 termination tool

S788J4B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair S110 replacement cutting blade and insertion assembly

S788J4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair S110 replacement head for impact tool, including housing, cutting blade and insertion assembly

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

S788J5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-pair S110 termination tool

S788J5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-pair S110 replacement cutting blade and insertion assembly

S788J5H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-pair S110 replacement head for impact tool, including housing, cutting blade and insertion assembly

S110 Connecting Block System

S814 IMPACT TOOL

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

The S814 impact tool terminates wires on 66 and 110 clips. The tool is spring-loaded and fully adjustable; a helpful feature when working with wires of varying thicknesses. The bayonet-style mount allows the blades to be changed quickly and easily, and a compartment in the handle stores an extra blade. Part # S814 . . . . . . . S814-66 . . . . . S814-110 . . . . S81401-66 . . . S81401-110-88

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Description . . . . .

. . . . .

S210 Connecting Block System

Tool body only Tool body with 66 termination blade Tool body with 110 termination blade 66 termination blade 110 termination blade

Standards Update

Glossary

Technical Tip! Termination blades for Siemon punch down tools are reversible — one end terminates and cuts off the excess wire, the other end terminates without cutting.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

12.7

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

PALM GUARD The Siemon palm guard has been ergonomically designed to provide a safe and convenient means of terminating our UTP and screened flat or angled CT® couplers and MAX® modules. The palm guard absorbs the impact of termination while securing the connector to prevent movement. Includes an adjustable elastic strap and a removable insert, which can be used to hold MAX modules while terminating on flat surfaces.

Part #

Description

PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Palm guard with MAX insert PG-MX6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Palm guard insert for all punch-down MAX modules

PG with PG-MX6

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

PG-MX6

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

CI-KIT The CI-KIT provides all the tools that a telecommunications technician needs for day-to-day activities. Included in the kit is an S814 impact tool with 66 and 110 termination blades, a probe pic, electrician’s scissors, mini flathead screwdriver, and a CPT-WEB cable preparation tool. These tools are stored in a handy, lightweight clip-on pouch which allows the installer to cut, strip, and terminate cabling without having to carry separate tools or larger tool kits.

Part #

Description

CI-KIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clip-on tool kit with S814 impact tool (with 66 and 110 termination blades), probe pic, electrician’s scissors, mini flathead screwdriver, and CPT-WEB tool CI-POUCH . . . . . . . . . . . Clip-on CI-KIT tool pouch only

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

CI-KIT2 Siemon’s CI-KIT2 includes all the components of the standard CI-KIT, with the addition of our popular AllPrep™ cable preparation tool (see page 12.10) in place of the CPT-WEB tool. Also, a “D-Ring” has been added to carry additional tools. These tools are stored in a handy, lightweight, clip-on pouch which allows the installer to cut, strip and terminate cabling without having to carry separate tools or larger tool kits.

Part #

Description

CI-KIT2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clip-on tool kit with S814 impact tool, (with 66 and 110 termination blades), probe pic, electrician’s scissors, mini flathead screwdriver, and AllPrep cable preparation tool CI-POUCH2 . . . . . . . . . . Clip-on CI-KIT2 tool pouch only “D-Ring”

Index

12.8

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

PROBE-PIC The PROBE-PIC is an excellent multi-purpose tool for positioning, tracing, separating, and removing cut pieces of insulation and wire. It can also be used to remove bridging clips and wire from S66™ quick clips.

Part #

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Description

PROBE-PIC . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-use wire tool Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

CUTTER These cutters provide an excellent flush cut when precision is needed. They are ideal for trimming of conductors with our Tool-less MAX® Modules and TERA® outlets/plugs as well as S110® and S210® patch plugs. The cutters are forged from high quality alloy steel for maximum strength and durability. The cutting edges are machine ground and electronically hardened for extended life and the steel joint maintains a perfect cutting edge and tip alignment for excellent consistency. Handle coil springs and cushioned grips allow faster action and greater comfort with reduced user fatigue.

Part #

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Description

CI-CUTTER . . . . . . . . . . . Tapered revived diagonal cutter S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

ELECTRICIAN’S SCISSORS

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Cable preparation is made easy with this cutting tool. Our durable scissors are great all purpose scissors for cutting cable, removing cable jackets, trimming kevlar, or any other daily requirement of today’s installers. They are constructed from tempered steel and feature a nickel plated finish to prevent corrosion. The upper blade has notches for stripping 19 and 23 AWG wire and there is a scraper and file on the outside of both blades.

Part #

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Description

CI-SCISSORS . . . . . . . . . All purpose electrician’s scissors Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

12.9

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

ALLPREP™ CABLE PREPARATION TOOL The AllPrep cable preparation tool provides a robust and reliable method of preparing both coaxial and twisted-pair cable for termination. The tool features two color-coded dies that are interchangeable for each media type. The coaxial die strips RG59 and RG6 coaxial cable and the twistedpair die strips a wide variety of UTP, screened and fiber cables. Part #

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Description

CPT-RGTP . . . . . . . . . . . . AllPrep cable preparation tool for coax/twisted pair cables CPT-DIE-RG . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement coax die (black) CPT-DIE-TP . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement twisted-pair die (yellow) CPT-DIE-EZ . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement EZ Twist die (blue)

TERA® CABLE PREPARATION TOOL The TERA cable preparation tool uses a patent pending process to significantly reduce the time required to prepare fully shielded (S/FTP) cable. The tool includes an insert die with a blade, which is specifically designed to accurately strip the jacket and foil from 4-pair fully shielded cable without damaging the conductors. A template is also included to prealign cable pairs and ensure proper pair positioning during termination. Part #

Industrial Products

Description

CPT-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TERA preparation tool. Includes CPT-DIE-T4 and TERA cable preparation template CPT-DIE-T4 . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement TERA cable die (red)

MapIT Intelligent Patching

TERA Outlets pages 1.2 – 1.3, TERA Plugs pages 3.2 – 3.3

S210 Connecting Block System

CPT

S110 Connecting Block System

The CPT provides a simple and effective method to remove the outer cable jacket from 2-, 3-, or 4-pair cables without damaging the inner conductor insulation. The CPT is recommended for use with any round cable with an exterior diameter from 2.54 – 6.35mm (0.100 – 0.250 in.) and an outer jacket thickness from 0.380 – 0.635mm (0.015 – 0.025 in.).

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Part #

Description

CPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable preparation tool

CPT-WEB The CPT-WEB is designed to easily strip the outer cable jacket, flatten and separate the webbed conductors of Siemon’s category 5 cross-connect jumper wire and other UTP cable with webbed conductor pairs.

Glossary

Part #

Description

CPT-WEB . . . . . . . . . . . . Webbed cable preparation tool Index

12.10

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

TOOLS, TESTERS AND TEST ADAPTERS Web Resources

PT-908 CRIMP TOOL This 3-in-1 ratchet-style crimp tool cuts, strips, and crimps modular plugs on either round or flat cables. The parallel action design maintains accurate alignment of the die with the plug for a precision crimp every time. The PT-908 comes with a padded carrying case which includes a storage compartment for carrying spare dies, replacement stripper blades, and modular plugs, and will attach to a technician’s belt.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

PT-908 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crimp tool with built-in round cable cutter/stripper, 8-position die set and padded nylon carrying case

PT-908-D . . . . . . . . . . . . Crimp tool with built-in round cable cutter/stripper, 8-position die set packaged in a clear plastic display case

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

PT-DIE-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement 8-position die set

PT-DIE-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-position die set

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Technical Tip! Siemon does not recommend field termination of modular cords. We recommend the use of factory-terminated and tested modular cords for any category 5e or higher application.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

COAXIAL CRIMP TOOL The RG-T coax crimp tool’s dual crimp design allows for the proper termination of both RG59, 8.2mm (0.32 in.) and RG6, 9.1mm (0.36 in.) F-type connectors onto coaxial cable without having to change the crimping jaws. The ratchet design ensures proper crimping of the connector without damage to the cable. The tool is constructed using high carbon steel and features an ergonomically designed handle for a comfortable grip.

Part #

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Description

RG-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coax crimp tool RG-T-DIE . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement RG59/RG6 die

Glossary

Coaxial Connector page 3.12, AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool page 12.10

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

12.11

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

SIEMON GUIDELINES TO INDUSTRY STANDARDS Since the first release of the Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568 in 1991), the volume of standards information available to the end-user community has increased substantially. As a result, Siemon has focused efforts on educating our customers on the importance of generic, standards-based components and system requirements. The following information has been condensed from a compilation of relevant national and international telecommunications standards and provides a reference to the most commonly used information. Our active involvement in standards development provides us with advance information on emerging standards requirements for both the premises cabling and the applications that the cabling is intended to support. We have also included a preview of pending standards projects.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

SECTION CONTENTS OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 Horizontal Cabling System Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4 Backbone Cabling System Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 Open Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 Horizontal Distances of Copper Links (Open Office) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8 Horizontal Distances of Optical Fiber Links (Long Work Area Cables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9

Industrial Products

TR42.1.1 NETWORK DISTRIBUTION NODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.9 TWISTED PAIR (BALANCED) CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.10 UTP and Screened Telecommunications Outlet/Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.11

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Fully Shielded Telecommunications Outlet/Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.11 UTP Link Performance Marking and Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.11

S210 Connecting Block System

Screened Cabling (F/UTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.12 Fully Shielded Cabling (S/FTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.12 FIELD TESTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.13

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

OPTICAL FIBER CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.14 CENTRALIZED OPTICAL FIBER CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.15 HYBRID AND BUNDLED CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16 PRODUCTION MODULAR CORD NEXT LOSS TEST METHOD AND REQUIREMENTS FOR UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16 ALIEN CROSSTALK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.16

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

13.0

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

SECTION CONTENTS NEXT GENERATION CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17 Category 6/Class E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17

System Overview

Category 7/Class F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17 ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ND EDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.17 STANDARD UPDATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.18

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

ISO/IEC 15108 Information Technology — Generic Cabling for Homes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.18 ISO/IEC TR 24704 Information Technology Customer Premises Cabling for Wireless Access Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.18 IEC 61076-3-104 Detail Specification for 8-way Shielded Free and Fixed Connectors for Data Transmissions with Frequencies up to 600 MHz Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.18 TIA/EIA-862 Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard for Commercial Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.18 IEEE 802.3af Power Over Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19 Proposed IEEE 802.3AN 10GBASE-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19 ISO/IEC 14165-114: Information Technology — Fibre Channel — Part 114: 100 MB/S Copper Physical Interface (FC-100-DF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.19 COMPARISON OF ’568-B.3 VERSUS ’11801:2002 2ND EDITION FIBER CABLING PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.20 CABLING SPECIFICATIONS CROSS-REFERENCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.21 – 13.22 CABLES, MEDIA AND CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.23

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Horizontal Twisted-Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.23 Twisted-Pair Patch Cords and Cross-Connect Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.23 Multi-Pair Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.23

Industrial Products

Modular Wiring Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24 Modular Plug Pair Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24 Straight Through or Reversed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24 How to Read a Modular Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.24 Common Outlet Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.25 Recommended Cabling Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.26 Twisted-Pair Connector Terminations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.26 Application-Specific Pair Assignments for the 100 Ω Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.26 Recommended Color-Coding Scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.26 Twisted-Pair Cabling Installation Practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.26 TIA-569-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.27 Building and Backbone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.28 Work Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.29 Telecommunications Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.30 Equipment Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.31 Entrance Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.31

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.31 Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.1

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

AN OVERVIEW OF CABLING STANDARDS ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B AND ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ND ED. 2002-09, IEC 61156-5, -6 The latest edition of the Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard is ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. The Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) TR-42 Technical Committee has broken the standard into a series of documents known as B.1, B.2 and B.3. The ’568-B.1 document contains the information needed for designing, installing, and field testing a generic structured cabling system. The ’568-B.2 and ’568-B.3 documents contain manufacturing and component reliability test specifications for cable, patch cords and connecting hardware. The ’568-B.3 document was published in April 2000 and is applicable to optical fiber components. The ’568-B.2 document specifies the electrical and mechanical requirements of unshielded (UTP) and screened (F/UTP) balanced twisted-pair components. The standard addresses requirements for category 3 and 5e cabling and component requirements. Both ’568-B.1 and ’568-B.2 were published in June 2001. Also, the International Organization for Standardization (ISO) JTC1 SC 25/WG 3 Working Group on telecommunications cabling has published the second edition of the ISO/IEC 11801 standard. The standard addresses class E and F cabling and category 6 and 7 connecting hardware and cables. Items of interest unique to the ’11801 standard are the work area interface for category 7 and coupling attenuation for copper systems. In optical fiber, the document has standardized on three classes of optical fiber cabling to service existing and future networking applications for channel lengths of 300m, 500m and 2000m. For component requirements, ’11801:2002 references the IEC cable specifications for horizontal (IEC 61156-5) and work area (IEC 61156-6). With a few exceptions detail in the cable clause of ’11801:2002, all requirements for cable can be found in these two specifications. ’11801:2002 references the IEC 60603-7-X series (x = 1, 2, . . . 7) for the RJ-45 style outlets and IEC 61076-3-104 for the new RJ-45 outlets (TERA® type connectors). ISO/IEC 15018 edition 1, cabling for the home references the same IEC cables and connectors as ’11801:2002 for information and communication technology (ICT) applications. For broadcast communications technology, it references the IEC 1200 MHz cable specifications, IEC 61196-7 and for the primary outlet IEC 61076-3-104. Following are highlights of the ’568-B series standard which has incorporated Telecommunications System Bulletins (TSB’s) TSB 67, TSB 72, TSB 75, TSB 95, Addendum’s TIA/EIA-568-A-1, ’A-2, ’A-3, ’A-4, and ’A-5 and TIA/EIA/IS-729. For clarity and consistency, ’568-B based terminology is used in the following overview with notes on differences in terminology and technical requirements with respect to ’11801:2002.

ADDENDA TO THE ’568B STANDARD TIA/EIA-568-B.1-1 (Addendum 1) — Minimum 4-pair UTP and 4-pair ScTP patch cable bend radius TIA/EIA-568-B.1-2 (Addendum 2) — Grounding and bonding specifications for screened balanced twisted-pair horizontal cabling TIA/EIA-568-B.1-3 (Addendum 3) — Supportable distances and channel attenuation for optical fiber applications by fiber type TIA/EIA-568-B.1-4 (Addendum 4) — Recognition of category 6 and 850 nm laser-optimized 50/125µm multimode optical fiber cabling TIA/EIA-568-B.1-5 (Addendum 5) — Telecommunications cabling for telecommunications enclosures TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (Addendum 1) — Transmission performance specifications for 4-pair 100 Ω category 6 cabling TIA/EIA-568-B.2-2 (Addendum 2) — The purpose of this addendum is to release sub-clauses 4.3.4.8, 4.4.4.4.1, 4.4.4.9 and 5.4.3 of TIA/EIA-568-B.2

Index

13.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

TIA/EIA-568-B.2-3 (Addendum 3) — Additional considerations for insertion loss and return loss pass/fail determination TIA/EIA-568-B.2-4 (Addendum 4) — Solderless connection reliability requirements for copper connecting hardware (Addendum 4) TIA/EIA-568-B.2-5 (Addendum 5) — Corrections to TIA/EIA-568-B.2 TIA/EIA-568-B.2-6 (Addendum 6) — Category 6 related component test procedures TIA/EIA-568-B.2 The purpose of this addendum is to revise sub-clauses 4.3-4.8, 4.4-4.4.1, 4.4.4.9 and 5.4.3 of TIA/EIA-568-B.2 TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1 (Addendum 1) — Additional transmission testing performance specifications for 50/125µm optics fiber cables.

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B ANNEX CONTENT INFORMATION B.1 A. Centralized optical fiber cabling (Normative). B. Shared sheath guidelines for multi-pair UTP cables (Informative). C. Other cable specifications (Informative)

D. Category 5 cabling transmissions (Informative). E. Optical fiber applications support information (Informative). F. Bibliography (Informative).

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

B.2 A. Reliability testing of connecting hardware used for 100 Ω balanced twisted-pair cabling (Normative). B. Test equipment overview (Normative). C. Testing of cable (Normative). D. Testing of connecting hardware (Normative). E. Testing of cabling (Normative). F. Testing of patch cords (Normative). G. Multi-port measurement considerations (Normative). H. Measurement accuracy (Informative). I. Test instruments (Normative).

J. Comparison measure procedures (Normative). K. 100 Ω screened twisted-pair (F/UTP) cabling (Normative). L. Derivation of propagation delay from insertion loss equation (Informative). M. 150 Ω shielded twisted-pair cabling (Normative). N. Category 5 cabling (Informative). O. Development of channel and component return loss limits (Informative). P. Bibliography (Informative).

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

FIGURE 1

S210 Connecting Block System

Siemon F/UTP (Categories 5e and 6): F/UTP cable constructions feature unshielded twisted-pairs surrounded by an overall conductive mylar-backed aluminum foil shield and enclosed within an overall thermoplastic jacket as shown in figure 2. F/UTP cables are compatible with Siemon screened MAX® and screened HD5® product lines. TIA and legacy Siemon materials referred to this cable type as “ScTP” or “FTP”.

S110 Connecting Block System

FIGURE 2

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Siemon S/FTP (Categories 6 and 7): S/FTP cable constructions feature individually foil-shielded twistedpairs surrounded by an overall braid and enclosed within an overall thermoplastic jacket as shown in figure 3. S/FTP cables are compatible with Siemon TERA® and screened MAX® product lines. Legacy Siemon materials referred to this cable type as “PiMF”, “STP”, or “SSTP”.

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

B. Bibliography and references (Informative).

SIEMON’S PREFERRED CABLE TERMINOLOGY Siemon UTP (Categories 3, 5e, and 6): UTP cable constructions feature unshielded twisted-pairs enclosed within an overall thermoplastic jacket as shown in figure 1. UTP cables are compatible with Siemon MAX®, CT®, HD®, S210®, S110®, and S66™ product lines.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

B.3 A. Optical fiber connector performance specifications (Normative).

Copper Patch Panels

FIGURE 3 Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.3

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

System Overview

HORIZONTAL CABLING SYSTEM STRUCTURE The horizontal cabling system extends from the telecommunications outlet in the work area to the horizontal cross-connect in the telecommunications room. It includes the telecommunications outlet, an optional consolidation point or transition point connector, horizontal cable, and the mechanical terminations and patch cords (or jumpers) that comprise the horizontal cross-connect.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Notes: *An allowance of 10m (33 ft.) has been provided for the combined length of patchcords/cross-connect jumpers and equipment cables/cords in the HC, including the WA equipment cords.

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

*In ISO/IEC 11801:2002, the equivalent cabling element to the horizontal cross-connect (HC) is called the floor distributor (FD).

A Customer Premises Equipment B HC Equipment Cord C Patchcords/cross-connect jumpers used in the HC, including equipment cables/cords, should not exceed 5m (16 ft.) Note: ISO/IEC 11801:2002 specifies a max. patchcord/ cross-connect length of 5m (16.4 ft.), which does not include equipment cables/cords.

SOME POINTS SPECIFIED FOR THE HORIZONTAL CABLING SUBSYSTEM INCLUDE: • Recognized Horizontal Cables:

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

4-pair 100 Ω unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) or screened twisted-pair (F/UTP). 4-pair 100 Ω fully shielded twisted-pair (S/FTP) (ISO/IEC 11801:2002 only). 2-fiber (duplex) 62.5/125µm or 50/125µm multimode optical fiber. • Multi-unit cables are allowed, provided that they satisfy the hybrid/bundled cable requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.2, ISO/IEC 11801:2002.

• Additional outlets may be provided. These outlets are in addition to, and may not replace, the minimum requirements of the standard. • Bridged taps and splices are not allowed for copper-based horizontal cabling. (Splices are allowed for fiber.) • Application specific components shall not be installed as part of the horizontal cabling. When needed, they must be placed external to the telecommunications outlet or horizontal crossconnect (eg. splitters, baluns). • The proximity of horizontal cabling to sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) shall be taken into account.

• Grounding shall conform to applicable building codes and the requirements of ANSI-J-STD-607-A. • A minimum of two telecommunications outlets are required for each individual work area.

Second outlet: 100 Ω twisted-pair or two-fiber multimode optical fiber either 62.5/125µm or 50/125µm. • One transition point (TP) or Consolidation Point (CP) is allowed. The term “transition point” was removed from the second edition of ISO/IEC 11801:2002. Under carpet cabling is no longer recognized by that standard.

W W W

S I E M O N

Topology The horizontal cabling shall be configured in a star topology; each work area outlet is connected to a horizontal cross-connect (HC) in a telecommunications room (TR).

First outlet: 100 Ω twisted-pair (category 6 is recommended).

Index

13.4

D Horizontal cable 90m (295 ft.) max. total E TP or CP (optional) F Telecommunications outlet/connector (TO) G WA Equipment cord Note: An allowance is made for WA equipment cords of 5m (16 ft.).

C O M

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

BACKBONE CABLING SYSTEM STRUCTURE The backbone cabling system provides interconnections between telecommunications rooms, equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities. It includes backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross-connections. The backbone also extends between buildings in a campus environment.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

TIA BACKBONE CABLE DISTANCES (MC TO HC) Singlemode Fiber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3000m (9840 ft.) 50/125µm or 62.5/125µm Multimode Fiber . . . . . . . . . 2000m (6560 ft.)

Standards Update

Twisted-Pair Copper Applications < 5 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . 800m (2625 ft.) Twisted-Pair Copper Applications < 7 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . 100m (328 ft.)

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.5

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

SOME POINTS SPECIFIED FOR THE BACKBONE CABLING SUBSYSTEM INCLUDE: • Equipment connections to backbone cabling should be made with cable lengths of 30m (98 ft.) or less. • The backbone cabling shall be configured in a star topology. Each horizontal cross-connect is connected directly to a main cross-connect or to an intermediate cross-connect, then to a main cross-connect.

• Recognized media may be used individually or in combination, as required by the installation. Quantity of pairs and fibers needed in individual backbone runs depends on the area served. Recognized backbone cables are:

• The backbone is limited to no more than two hierarchical levels of cross-connects (main and intermediate). No more than one cross-connect may exist between a main and a horizontal cross-connect and no more than three cross-connects may exist between any two horizontal crossconnects.

100 Ω UTP Twisted-Pair

100 Ω F/UTP Twisted-Pair

• A total maximum backbone distance of 90m (295 ft.) is specified for high bandwidth capability over copper. This distance is for uninterrupted backbone runs. (No intermediate cross-connect).

100 Ω S/FTP Twisted-Pair

• The distance between the terminations in the entrance facility and the main cross-connect shall be documented and should be made available to the service provider.

50/125µm or 62.5/125µm Multimode Optical Fiber

• Multi-pair cable is allowed, provided that it satisfies the power sum crosstalk requirements. • The proximity of backbone cabling to sources of electromagnetic interference (EMI) shall be taken into account. • Cross-connects for different cable types shall be located in the same facilities. • Bridged taps and splitters are not allowed. Notes: In ISO/IEC 11801:2002, the equivalent cabling elements to the main cross-connect (MC) and intermediate cross-connect (IC) are called the campus distributor (CD) and building distributor (BD) respectively.

Singlemode Optical Fiber

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

WORK AREA S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

The telecommunications outlet serves as the work area interface to the cabling system. Work area equipment and cables used to connect to the telecommunications outlet are now included within the scope of ’568-B.1 and ’11801:2002. SOME SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO WORK AREA CABLING INCLUDE: • Equipment cords are assumed to have the same performance category as the horizontal cable to which they connect. • When used, adapters are assumed to be compatible with the transmission capabilities of the equipment to which they connect. • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 allows for any cord to be longer if the horizontal is shorter. See open office cabling.

Glossary

Index

13.6

Note: For establishing maximum horizontal link distances, a combined maximum length of 10m (33 ft.) is allowed for patch cables (or jumpers) and for equipment cables in the work area and the telecommunications room.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

OPEN OFFICE CABLING Additional specifications for horizontal cabling in areas with moveable furniture and partitions have been included in TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Horizontal cabling methodologies are specified for “open office” environments by means of multi-user telecommunications outlet assemblies and consolidation points. These methodologies are intended to provide increased flexibility and economy for installations with open office work spaces that require frequent reconfiguration.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF OPEN OFFICE IMPLEMENTATION USING THE MuTOA — MULTI-USER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY

Copper Patch Panels

MuTOA: A telecommunications outlet scheme intended to serve multiple work areas in an open office environment.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF OPEN OFFICE IMPLEMENTATION USING A CONSOLIDATION POINT CONNECTOR Consolidation Point: An interconnection scheme that connects horizontal cables from building pathways to cables that extend to TOs through open office pathways.

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Note: To reduce the effects of multiple connections in close proximity, the CP should be located at least 15m (50 ft.) from the HC (FD).

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.7

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

HORIZONTAL DISTANCES OF COPPER LINKS (OPEN OFFICE) The table entries assume that there is a total of 5m (16 ft.) of patch and equipment cables in the telecommunications room. Table 1 shows the application of these formulae assuming the use of 24 AWG cable. The length of work area cables shall not exceed 22m (72 ft.) per TIA/EIA 568-B, 20m (66 ft.) per ISO/IEC 11801:2002. The MuTOA shall be marked with the maximum allowable work area cable length.

Copper Patch Panels

LENGTH OF HORIZONTAL CABLE

MAXIMUM LENGTH OF WORK AREA CABLE 24 AWG (20%)

MAXIMUM LENGTH OF WORK AREA CABLE 26 AWG (50%)

H m (ft.)

W m (ft.)

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

90 (295)

5 (16)

4 (13)

85 (279)

9 (30)

7 (23)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

80 (262)

13 (44)

11 (35)

75 (246)

17 (57)

14 (46)

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

70 (230)

22 (72)

17 (56)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

TABLE 1 — MAXIMUM LENGTH OF WORK AREA CABLE

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

*Note: The preceding equation and table are based on patch cables having 20% more attenuation than horizontal cables. If higher gauge (e.g. 26 AWG) cables are used that have 50% higher attenuation than solid, as allowed by ISO/IEC 11801:2002, these lengths must be reduced accordingly.

HORIZONTAL DISTANCES OF OPTICAL FIBER LINKS (LONG WORK AREA CABLES)

S110 Connecting Block System

For optical fiber cables, any length combination of horizontal cables and work area cables is acceptable, as long as the total combined length of the horizontal channel does not exceed 100m (328 ft.). When deploying a centralized fiber cabling topology, the general guidelines of 568-B.1 shall be followed.

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

ADVANTAGES AND FEATURES

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

• It is preferable to use MuTOAs only when the entire length of the work area cord is accessible to facilitate tracing and to prevent erroneous disconnection. Up to 22m (72 ft.) of work area cable is allowed. • MuTOAs are subject to the same interface requirements specified for each media type. • Consolidation point requirements are performance based. There is no physical interface requirement for the CP except those required to meet functional requirements.

Glossary

Index

13.8

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

.• Implementations using either MuTOAs or CPs are subject to the same end-to-end performance requirements. • Consolidation points have advantage in that they deliver dedicated TOs to individual work areas and do not require provisions for extended cord lengths.

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM Telecommunications Rooms (TR) are generally considered to be floor serving facilities for horizontal cable distribution. They may also be used for intermediate and main cross-connects.

System Overview

SOME SPECIFICATIONS RELATED TO THE TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM: • (TR’s) shall be designed and equipped in accordance with TIA-569-B. • Cable stress from tight bends, cable ties, staples, and tension should be avoided by well-designed cable management. • Only standards-compliant connecting hardware shall be used.

• Application-specific electrical components shall not be installed as part of the horizontal cabling. • Horizontal cable terminations shall not be used to administer cabling system changes. Instead, jumpers patch cords, or equipment cords are required for re-configuring cabling connections.

The two types of schemes used to connect cabling subsystems to each other and to equipment are known as interconnections and cross-connections.

Copper Patch Panels

Note: A “cross-connect” (a.k.a. distributor) is a facility, whereas a “cross-connection” is a connection scheme. Cross-connections are typically used to provide a means of configuring individual port connections between the cabling and equipment with multiport outputs (i.e., 25-pair connectors). Interconnections may be used with equipment that has individual output ports. A cross-connect facility (a.k.a. distributor) may house interconnections, cross-connections, or both.

TR42.1.1 NETWORK DISTRIBUTION NODES TR-42.1.1 was tasked to create a new standard for Application Spaces such as Internet Data Centers, Service Distribution Nodes, and Storage Area Networks. The scope of the group was to develop cabling topology, recognized media types, cabling requirements, and requirements for pathways & spaces for the above application spaces and inter/intra-node connections. TIA-TR-42.1.1 is expected to release the standard in June 2005. Draft 5 SP-3-0092 was released June 17, 2004, including considerations for telecommunication infrastructure, spaces, pathways, redundancy and new terminology. The standard will address infrastructure standards for data centers and computer rooms of all types and sizes, including small server rooms within an office building to large multi-floor data centers. The standard will be constructed so that the topology described will be adaptable to any size data center. The standard will recognize two categories of data centers. The private domain (“enterprise”) consists of private corporations, government agencies, or the establishment of other intranets or extranets, while public domain (“internet”) consists of traditional telephone service providers, unregulated competitive service providers and related commercial operators. FIGURE: GENERIC DATA CENTER TOPOLOGY Carriers Offices, Operations Center, Support Rooms

Horiz Dist Area (LAN/SAN/KVM Switches) Horizontal Cabling Zone Dist Area Horizontal Cabling Equip Dist Area (Rack/Cabinet)

Cabling

Main Dist Area (Routers, Backbone LAN/SAN Switches, PBX, M13 Muxes)

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

Standards Update Horiz Dist Area (LAN/SAN/KVM Switches)

Horizontal Cabling Equip Dist Area (Rack/Cabinet)

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Backbone Cabling Horiz Dist Area (LAN/SAN/KVM Switches)

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Computer Room Backbone

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

S110 Connecting Block System

Carriers

Backbone Cabling

Horizontal Cabling Telecom Room (Office & Operations Center LAN Switches)

Entrance Room (Carrier Equip & Demarcation)

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

Glossary

Horizontal Cabling Equip Dist Area (Rack/Cabinet)

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.9

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

TWISTED-PAIR (BALANCED) CABLING The categories of transmission performance specified by Siemon for cables, connecting hardware links and channels are:

DESIGNATION

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

TRANSMISSION CHARACTERISTICS

Meets applicable category 3 and class C requirements of ISO/IEC 11801:2002, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 & B.2. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 16 MHz.

Transmission characteristics are specified up to 100 MHz.

Performs to category 5e of ’568-B.1 & B.2 and additional class D requirements of ISO/IEC 11801:2002. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 100 MHz.

Transmission characteristics are specified up to 250 MHz.

Performs to category 6 of ’568-B.2-1 TIA-TSB-155 draft, and class E requirements of ISO/IEC 11801:2002. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 250 MHz. This classification is a superset of .

Transmission characteristics are specified up to 500 MHz.

Performs to category 6 of ’568-B.2-1 and ’568-B.2-10 and class E of ISO/IEC 11801:2002 and amendment NBS 1 to ISO/IEC 11801. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 500 MHz. This classification is specified with the additional requirements of TSB-155 to support the operation of 10GBASE-T over 4-connector channel to typologies over distances from at least 55m up to 100m. Note: Augmented category 6 draft requirements are still in development and are intended to be published before 2006.

Transmission characteristics are specified up to 1.0 GHz.

Performs to category 7 and class F requirements of ISO/IEC 11801:2002. Requirements are specified to an upper frequency limit of 600 MHz. This classification is an electrical superset of . Supports all parameters to 1.0 GHz for compliance to ISO/IEC 15018 and ISO/IEC 11801 Ed. 2, Amd. 1st draft.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching

DESCRIPTION

Transmission characteristics are specified up to 16 MHz.

Terminology and classifications specified in ISO/IEC 11801:2002 for cabling links differ slightly from TIA categories (see page 13.22). Components and installation practices are subject to all applicable building and safety codes that may be in effect.

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

INDUSTRIAL ETHERNET CONNECTIVITY AND APPLICATIONS There are several standards bodies around the world currently working towards Industrial premise cabling standards. Some of the more prominent committees are the TIA (Telecommunications Industry Association), IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission), and the ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association). These committees are establishing the standards for both connectivity requirements that are needed within harsh industrial environments, as well as the applications that will need to be supported. The TIA and the ODVA are recommending an Ethernet platform for easier integration of information into the office environment. The IEC has released a Publicly Available Specification (IEC/PAS 61076-3-111 Ed.1) covering connectors to 250 MHz in the Industrial environment. The Siemon Industrial MAX® plug and outlet are specified as connector variant 1 in the standard and the IEC 61076-3-106 draft industrial connector specification.

Index

13.10

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STANDARDS UPDATE UTP AND SCREENED TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR

Web Resources

2 3

System Overview

• 8-position modular jack per IEC 60603-7 (’568-B.1 states that all 4 pairs must be connected). • Pin/pair assignment: T568A (US federal government publication NCS, FTR 1090-1997 recognizes designation T568A only).

Example UTP Outlet

T568A

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

3 2

• Optional assignment to accommodate certain systems: T568B.

Copper Patch Panels

• Durability rating 750 mating cycles minimum. • Backward compatibility and interoperability is required.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

T568B

Example Screened Outlet

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

FULLY SHIELDED TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTOR

Industrial Products

• Entirely new interface design to support class F cabling per IEC 61076-3-104. MapIT Intelligent Patching

• Transmission measurement methods for category 7 and class F specified by ISO/IEC 11801:2002 and 1.0 GHz per ISO/IEC 15018 and ISO/IEC 11801 Ed.2, Amd. 1st draft.

S210 Connecting Block System

• Durability rating 750 mating cycles minimum.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

UTP LINK PERFORMANCE MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION • Link category marking should be clearly visible on both ends (component markings are not sufficient). • Labeling, markings, and color-coding shall be provided in accordance with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A.

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.11

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

SCREENED CABLING (F/UTP) As a result of the release of TIA/EIA/IS-729 and the maturity of the ’568-B and ’11801:2002 standards, telecommunications groups recognize the presence of an overall shield over four twisted-pairs; a media termed Screened Twisted-Pair. This cabling type is recognized as F/UTP, which stands for a foil applied over unshielded twisted-pairs. F/UTP CABLE:

SCREENED CONNECTORS:

• Color-coding: Pair 1 = White/Blue – Blue Pair 2 = White/Orange – Orange Pair 3 = White/Green – Green Pair 4 = White/Brown – Brown • 0.51mm (24 AWG) 100 Ω 4-pair enclosed by a foil shield. • A copper conductor drain wire of .040mm (26 AWG) or larger shall be provided. • Should be marked “100 Ω ScTP” or “100 Ω F/UTP”, in addition to any safety markings required by local or national codes. • Same mechanical and transmission requirements apply to backbone and horizontal cables. • Additional performance requirements, including surface transfer impedance, is specified in TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and ISO/IEC 11801:2002.

• Interface and pair assignments same as IEC 60603-7 (’568-B.1 states that all 4 pairs must be connected). • Additional transfer impedance and shield mating interface requirements specified in IEC 60603-7-3 and IEC 60603-7-5.

• Specifications call for 26 AWG (7 strands @ 0.15mm) or 24 AWG (7 strands @ 0.20mm) stranded conductors. • Allows for an overall shield. • Allows for 50% more attenuation than horizontal cable.

F/UTP INSTALLATION PRACTICES: • Shield shall be bonded at both ends at the “Telecommunication Grounding Busbar”. • The difference between the two grounds shall be no more than 1.0 V RMS.

FULLY SHIELDED CABLING (S/FTP) Fully shielded cabling requirements have been developed by ISO and IEC. Cable and connector specifications extend to 600 MHz and support class F cabling requirements. (An ISO/IEC project has been started to create amendment 1 of Ed. 2 of ISO/IEC 11801, which extends class F to 1.0 GHz). This cabling type is recognized as S/FTP, which stands for a foil and braided overall shield applied over individually foil shielded twisted-pairs. FULLY SHIELDED CABLE:

FULLY SHIELDED CONNECTORS:

• Color-coding: Pair 1 = White/Blue – Blue Pair 2 = White/Orange – Orange Pair 3 = White/Green – Green Pair 4 = White/Brown – Brown • Four 0.51mm (24 AWG) or larger 100 Ω twisted-pairs each enclosed by an individual foil shield with an overall shield provided over the four-pairs. • Mechanical and transmission requirements developed by ISO and IEC.

• Cabling interface and pair assignments specified by ISO/IEC 11801:2002. • Mechanical and transmission requirements specified in IEC 60603-7-7 and IEC/PAS 61076-3-104.

FULLY SHIELDED PATCH CABLES: • Mechanical and transmission requirements are specified in IEC 61156-5 and IEC 61156-6.

FULLY SHIELDED INSTALLATION PRACTICES: • Installation Practices developed by ISO/IEC.

CROSS-CONNECT

INTERCONNECT

A connection scheme using patch cords or jumpers that attach to connecting hardware on each end.

A connection scheme that provides for direct connections to building cabling from equipment without a patch cord.

Glossary

Index

13.12

F/UTP PATCH CORDS:

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

TRANSMISSION PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIELD TESTING OF BALANCED CABLING SYSTEMS This document provides users with the opportunity to use comprehensive test methods to validate the transmission performance characteristics of installed category 7, 6, 5e and lower grade twisted-pair cabling systems. The categories of balanced cabling systems in this bulletin correspond with the balanced cabling categories of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1, and ISO/IEC 11801:2002.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

HORIZONTAL CHANNEL (COPPER) Performance Specified in: TIA/EIA-568-B.1 (category 5e), TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (category 6), and proposed TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 (augmented category 6) ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition (classes D, E and F) and proposed amendment 1 to ISO/IEC 11801:2002

Copper Patch Panels

TRANSMISSION PERFORMANCE COMPARISON @ 100 MHZ

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Cabling Type

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Channel Insertion Loss (dB)

Channel NEXT (dB)

Channel ELFEXT (dB)

Channel Return Loss (dB)

Channel *ACR (dB)

Category 5e/Class D (@ 100 MHz)

24.0

30.1

17.4

10.0

6.1

Category 6/Class E (@ 100 MHz)

21.7

39.9

23.3

12.0

18.2

Class 7/Class F (@ 100 MHz)

20.8

62.9

44.4

12.0

42.1

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

*Not specified by TIA

Industrial Products

LINK TEST CONFIGURATION Performance Specified in: TIA/EIA-568-B.1 (category 5e), TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 (category 6), and proposed TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 (augmented category 6) ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition (classes D, E and F) and proposed amendment to ISO/IEC 11801’2002

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Field tester cords are electrically cancelled from test

S210 Connecting Block System

TRANSMISSION PERFORMANCE COMPARISON @ 100 MHZ Cabling Type

Permanent Link Insertion Loss (dB)

Permanent Link NEXT (dB)

Permanent Link ELFEXT (dB)

Permanent Link Return Loss (dB)

Permanent Link *ACR (dB)

Category 5e/Class D (@ 100 MHz)

20.4

32.3

18.6

12.0

11.9

Category 6/Class E (@ 100 MHz)

18.5

41.8

24.2

14.0

23.3

Class 7/Class F (@ 100 MHz)

17.7

65.0

46.0

14.0

47.3

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

*Not specified by TIA Class D attenuation values are calculated based on 90 meters horizontal cable plus two connectors (no flexible cord contribution) that meet ISO/IEC 11801:2002. Class D NEXT values are based on voltage summation of the near-end connector and horizontal cable.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

SOME POINTS SPECIFIED FOR TRANSMISSION FIELD TESTING FOR TWISTED-PAIR CABLING SYSTEMS:

Standards Update

• Twisted-Pair cabling systems are comprised of cables and connecting hardware specified in TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and ISO/IEC 11801:2002.

• Two levels of pass or fail are indicated, depending on measured margin compared to minimum specifications. Testing of NEXT loss is required in both directions.

• Required test parameters include wire-map, length, insertion loss, and pair-to-pair NEXT loss, powersum NEXT loss, ELFEXT, powersum. ELFEXT, return loss, propagation delay, and delay skew.

• Requirements are intended for performance validation and are provided in addition to ’568-B.1 & B.2 requirements on components and installation practices. Level III field test accuracy required for category 6/class E.

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.13

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

OPTICAL FIBER CABLING The ’568-B.3 specification on optical fiber cabling consists of one recognized cable type for horizontal subsystems and two cable types for backbone subsystems: Horizontal – 50/125µm or 62.5/125µm multimode (two fibers per outlet). Backbone – 50/125µm or 62.5/125µm multimode or singlemode. All optical fiber components and installation practices shall meet applicable building and safety codes.

OPTICAL FIBER PATCH CORDS:

OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTIONS:

• Shall be a two-fiber (duplex) cable of the same type as the cables to which they connect. • Shall be configured so that “A” connects to “B” and “B” connects to “A”.

• Connector designs shall meet the requirements of the corresponding TIA FOCIS documents. • Telecommunications outlet/connector boxes shall be securely mounted at planned locations. • The telecommunications outlet/connector box shall have: – Cable management means to assure a minimum bend radius of 25mm (1 in.) and should have slack storage capability. – Provisions for terminating and housing a minimum of two optical fibers. • Identification of fiber types: – Multimode connector or a visible portion of it and adapters shall be identified with the color beige. – Singlemode connector or a visible portion of it and adapters shall be identified with the color blue. • The two positions in a duplex connector are referred to as “position A” and “position B”.

INSTALLATION OF OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTING HARDWARE: • Connectors shall be protected from physical damage and moisture. • Optical fiber cable connecting hardware should incorporate high-density termination to conserve space and provide for ease of optical fiber cable and patch cord management upon installation. • Optical fiber cable connecting hardware should be designed to provide flexibility for mounting on walls, in racks, or on other types of distribution frames and standard mounting hardware.

OPTICAL FIBER CABLING INSTALLATION: MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

• Siemon recommends that a minimum of 1m (3.28 ft.) of two-fiber cable (or two buffered fibers) be accessible for termination purposes. • Testing is recommended to assure correct polarity and acceptable link performance. Clause 11 of ’568-B.1 provides recommended optical fiber link performance testing criteria.

SMALL FORM FACTOR (SFF) CONNECTORS: • Qualified SFF duplex and multi-fiber connector designs may be used in the main cross-connect, intermediate cross-connect, horizontal cross-connect, consolidation points and work area. • A TIA Fiber Optic Connect Intermateability Standard (FOCIS) shall describe each SFF design. • The SFF design shall satisfy the requirements specified in Annex A of the ’568-B.3 standard. • Some advantages of SFF connectors include compact size, modular compatibility with the eight position modular copper interface, and adaptability to high-density network electronics.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

13.14

See page 13.20 for information on optical fiber cabling classes OF-300, OF-500 and OF-2000, as specified in ISO/IEC 11801:2002.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

568-B.1 AND ISO/IEC 11801:2002 CENTRALIZED OPTICAL FIBER CABLING: Centralized optical fiber cabling provides the user with the flexibility of designing an optical fiber cabling system for centralized electronics in single tenant buildings. It contains information and guidelines for design and installation requirements.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

TYPICAL SCHEMATIC FOR CENTRALIZED OPTICAL FIBER CABLING USING AN INTERCONNECTION

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

SOME POINTS SPECIFIED FOR A CENTRALIZED OPTICAL FIBER CABLING SYSTEM INCLUDE: • Intended for single-tenant users who desire centralized vs. distributed electronics. • Implementation allows cables to be spliced or interconnected at the telecommunications room such that cables can be routed to a centralized distributor for total channel lengths of 300m (984 ft.) or less, including patch cords or jumpers.

• Allows for migration from an interconnection or splice to a crossconnection scheme that can also support distributed electronics. • Pull-through implementations are allowed when total length between the telecommunications outlet/connector and centralized cross-connect is 90m (295 ft.) or less.

• Connecting hardware required to: – join fibers by re-mateable connectors or splices, – provide for simplex or duplex connection of optical fibers, – provide means of circuit identification, – allow for addition and removal of optical fibers.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Note: Some multimode fiber implementations may be limited to an operating range of 220m to support 1000BASE-SX. The use of laser optimized 50 micon multimode fiber is required to support 300m of 10GBASE-SX.

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

13.15

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

HYBRID AND BUNDLED CABLES As a result of the demand for open office architecture and the need to support multiple telecommunications applications in a shared sheath, performance specifications for hybrid cables have been revised. A new term called “bundled cables” has been introduced to describe 4-pair cable assemblies that are not covered by an overall sheath (as specified for hybrid cables), but by any generic binding method such as “speedwrap” or “cable-ties.” The new hybrid and bundled cable requirements state that power sum NEXT loss between all non-fiber cable types within the cable shall be 3 dB better than the specified pair-to-pair NEXT loss for each cable type. See figure 1.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

FIGURE 1: Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Pair-to-Pair measurements required to calculate power sum NEXT loss for pair 1 of a 24-pair hybrid cable.

PRODUCTION MODULAR CORD NEXT LOSS TEST METHOD AND REQUIREMENTS FOR UNSHIELDED TWISTED PAIR CABLING TIA/EIA-568-B.2 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 defines a generic and non-destructive methodology for NEXT loss testing of modular plug cords respectively. The methodology described in the Standard contains the detailed NEXT loss calculations (which are based upon patch cable NEXT loss, test head NEXT loss, and cable and connector attenuation contributions) for the determination of the NEXT loss limits for any category 5e (TIA/EIA-588-B.2) or category 6 (TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1) patch cord and suitably designed test head.

CROSSTALK NOISE NEXT — Near-end Crosstalk — Signal coupling between pairs in the same cable when the disturbing signal is sent from the same end as the receiver. FEXT — Far-end Crosstalk — Signal coupling between pairs in the same cable when the disturbing signal is sent from the opposite end as the receiver. Alien Crosstalk — A measure of the unwanted signal coupling between pairs in adjacent cabling. Power Sum Alien Crosstalk — A combination of the unwanted signal cabling between all pairs in adjacent cabling.

Standards Update

Glossary

Near-end Crosstalk

Alien Crosstalk

Index

13.16

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Far-end Crosstalk

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

NEXT GENERATION CABLING

System Overview

CATEGORY 6/CLASS E (’568-B.2-1 AND ’11801:2002) Category 6/class E standards describe a new performance range for unshielded and screened twisted-pair cabling. Category 6/class E specifies the best performance that UTP and F/UTP (screened) cabling solutions can be designed to deliver based on current technology. Category 6/class E is specified in the frequency range of at least 1-250 MHz. For category 6/class E, the 8-position modular jack interface will be mandatory at the work area. Category 6/class E is backward compatible meaning that applications running on lower categories/classes will also be supported. If different category/class components are to be mixed with category 6/class E components, the combination shall meet the transmission requirements of the lowest performing category/class component. TIA, ISO, CENELEC, and others have collaborated closely on the development of category 6 and class E standards and their requirements are well harmonized. Augmented category 6/Class E, Edition 2.1 (proposed TIA/EIA 568-B.2-10) and amendments 1 to ISO/IEC 11801 2002. This standard will document the additional requirements necessary to support the operation of 10GBASE-T over 100-meter, 4-connector augmented category 6 and class E, edition 2.1 cabling.

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Note: Augmented category 6 draft requirements are still in development and are intended to be published in 2006.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

CATEGORY 7/CLASS F (’11801:2002) Category 7/class F describes a new performance range for fully shielded (i.e., overall shield and individually shielded pairs) twisted-pair cabling. Category 7/class F is specified in the frequency range of 1-600 MHz. Even though these requirements are supported by a new interface design, category 7/class F will be backward compatible meaning that applications running on lower categories/classes will also be supported. IEC 60603-7-7 and IEC/PAS 61076-3-104 specify two compliant interface designs. TIA is not actively developing a standard for category 7/class F.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ND EDITION The performance specifications in ISO/IEC11801:2002 2nd Edition provide new requirements for return loss and ELFEXT loss to complement the existing ISO class D requirements. The new specified return loss and ELFEXT loss requirements are in harmony with the values in ’568-B.1 & B.2. The 2nd Edition of ’11801 also includes propagation delay and delay skew requirements for channels and permanent links that are in harmony with the requirements of TIA/EIA-568-B.1. The requirements of the 2nd Edition to ISO/IEC 11801 are normative and this document has become the governing international standard for cabling installations. The first amendment to ISO/IEC 11801:2002 is being drafted and includes increasing class F/category 7 frequency range to 1.0 GHz. The first amendment to IEC 61076-3-104 is also being drafted and will be increased to 1.0 GHz to support the ISO/IEC 11801 amendment.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.17

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

STANDARDS UPDATE ISO/IEC 15108 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY — GENERIC CABLING FOR HOMES

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

This Standard recognizes the Siemon TERA® connector as an approved balanced cabling interface for all referenced home cabling communication applications. The specific home applications referenced in the Standard are: Information and communications technology (ICT), Broadcast communications technologies (BCT), and Commands, controls and communication in buildings (CCCB). The technical requirements of the Standard address cabling structure and topology, minimum configuration, link and channel performance, interfaces, and coexistence with other services. A summary of key media and interface criteria is shown in the table below: ICT CABLING

BCT CABLING

CCCB CABLING

Type of media:

Balanced cables, optical fibers

Balanced cables, coaxial cables

Balanced cables

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Typical frequency range

Up to 100 MHz

Up to 3 GHz

Up to 100 kHz

Channel classes according to ISO/IEC 11801:2002:

Class D

N/A

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Interface at device:

Balanced or optical fiber connectors per ISO/IEC 11801 Ed. 2.0

Balanced connector per IEC 61076-3-104 (Siemon TERA) or coaxial connectors: IEC 61169-2 or IEC 61169-24 (“F type”) or

Fixed connection, CCCB connector(s) including balanced or optical fiber connectors per ISO/IEC 11801 Ed. 2.0

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

While the IEC 61076-3-104 Siemon TERA interface is recognized for use in all three home cabling applications, it is important to note that the TERA interface is the primary balanced twisted-pair cabling interface recognized to support BCT cabling applications. This connector is the most recognized commercially available interface for ISO/IEC category 7/class F applications. ISO/IEC TR 24704 INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY CUSTOMER PREMISES CABLING FOR WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS This Technical Report addresses planning considerations for future connection to wireless access points that supplement the existing copper and fiber optic premises cabling system infrastructure specifications of ISO/IEC11801 Ed. 2.0. Specified infrastructure guidelines are intended to support an array of coverage areas that form a wireless network grid within a building. The Report specifies ISO/IEC 11801 compliant horizontal cabling design considerations and guidelines for wireless access planning in the following areas: • • • • •

minimum configuration, structure and topology, performance requirements for permanent links and channels, coverage and location of telecommunications outlets, interfaces to wireless access points, and power delivery over balanced cabling.

It is important to note that information and guidance related to the placement and security of wireless access points are not addressed in the content of this Report, although recommendations related to the placement of telecommunications outlets (TOs) are provided to support flexible deployment of wireless services.

Index

13.18

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

IEC 61076-3-104 DETAIL SPECIFICATION FOR 8-WAY, SHIELDED FREE AND FIXED CONNECTORS FOR DATA TRANSMISSIONS WITH FREQUENCIES UP TO 600 MHZ MINIMUM The IEC 61076-3-104 standard describes requirements for a non-RJ 45 category 7 telecommunications connecting hardware interface that is based on the TERA plug/outlet interface developed by Siemon. This represents the first time in history that a non-RJ style connector interface has been internationally standardized for four-pair connections in a structured cabling system. During the interface selection process conducted by ISO/IEC, an independent panel was asked to judge six different non-RJstyle connector proposals. Based on forty-eight separate criteria, including size, complexity, manufacturability, userfriendliness and transmission performance, the TERA interface was ranked the best overall choice for delivering the demanding bandwidth specified in the Standard. This new interface Standard was endorsed by eighteen countries and represents a significant achievement for structured cabling. The international support for approval of the TERA interface and its associated Standard confirms its status as a nonproprietary solution. TIA/EIA-862 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS CABLING STANDARD FOR COMMERCIAL BUILDINGS Building automation encompasses control systems such as security and monitoring (i.e. CCTV), safety systems such as fire alarm, environmental conditioning systems such as heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC), and energy management systems such as internal and external lighting. The TIA/EIA-862 Standard specifies generic cabling

STANDARDS UPDATE topology, architecture, design, installation practices, test procedures, and coverage areas to support building automation systems (BAS) used in commercial buildings. Since, historically, providers of these building automation services specified their own proprietary equipment, cables, interface connections, and topology, this new Standard offers the distinct advantage of being able to support multi-product and multi-vendor environments using one generic structured cabling system. It is important to note that other “low voltage systems” (e.g., audio/video paging, service/equipment alarms, nonvoice/data communications, wireless access points) are also supported by the telecommunications cabling infrastructure requirements of this Standard. IEEE 802.3AF POWER OVER ETHERNET This Standard was approved for publication in June of 2003 and describes means to economically provide power over a twisted-pair link segment to a single Ethernet device by specifying the voltage and minimum and maximum current and wattage necessary to provide power concurrently with 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, and 1000BASE-T signaling. Although the Standard specifies compatibility with category 3 and category-5e structured cabling, supplying power over Ethernet is recognized to also be compatible with category 6 and category 7 cabling. The specified methodology is compatible and interoperable with compliant RJ- 45 MDI (media-dependent interface) Ethernet devices including switchto-switch connections (both supplying power), cross-over cables, and common mode termination implementations. The following applications directly benefit from power application over MDIs: • • • • • • • • • •

IP Telephony Web Cameras Wireless Access Points Industrial Automation Home Automation Security Access Control and Monitoring Systems Point of Sale Terminals Lighting Control Gaming and Entertainment Equipment Building Management

There are two locations where power can be introduced: endpoint or mid-span. Endpoint power (a.k.a. phantom power) is introduced via the active equipment as shown in figure 1 below.

Mid-span power is introduced in the Telecommunications Room (TR) between the patch panel and switch as shown in figure 2 below.

Power may be applied over the pairs in one of three possible schemes as shown in table below. Conductor 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Alternative A (MDI-X) – VPort – VPort + VPort

Alternative A (MDI) + VPort + VPort – VPort

Alternative B (All)

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

+ VPort + VPort + VPort

Web Resources

– VPort

Copper Patch Panels

– VPort – VPort

IEEE 802.3af Powering Options

Endpoint power can be applied using alternatives A, B or both. It is important to note that, while active equipment may be capable of both alternatives A and B, they are not to operate both alternative A and alternative B on the same link segment simultaneously. Mid-span power application is limited to alternative B and 10/100 applications only. Refer to the Siemon Q&A entitled, “Powered Ethernet” for additional information. Recent developmental work within the IEEE committee supports expansion of the original scope of this Standard to evaluate proposals that will result in increased power carrying capability over the cabling infrastructure. PROPOSED IEEE 802.3AN 10GBASE-T This pending applications standard is anticipated to publish in July of 2006. Based upon the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet frame format, this new high-speed data application will support a full-duplex transmission rate of 10 Gb/s over 4-pair structured cabling (2.5 Gb/s throughput per pair). Installed, legacy category 6 cabling is anticipated to support the 10GBASE-T application over 4-connector structured topologies up to at least 55 meters in length. The pending augmented category 6 (proposed TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10) cabling requirements will be specified to support the 10GBASE-T application over 4connector, 100 meter structured topologies. ISO/IEC 14165-114: INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY — FIBRE CHANNEL — PART 114: 100 MBIT/S COPPER PHYSICAL INTERFACE (FC-100-DF). This application Standard defines a 1 Gigabit per second signaling protocol using a 2-pair transmission scheme. The Standard specifies one pair to transmit and one pair to receive and is intended only for operation over 100 meter, 4connector category 7/class F cabling topologies. With the publication of this application standard, Siemon’s TERA® solution becomes the world’s first and only cabling system capable of supporting two simultaneous Gigabit per second data applications over one 4-pair channel.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.19

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

COMPARISON OF ’568-B SERIES VERSUS ’11801:2002 2ND EDITION FIBER CABLING PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS

System Overview

OPTICAL FIBER CABLING AND COMPONENT SPECIFICATIONS: Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

’568-B Series Horizontal Link

’11801:2002 2nd Edition Insertion Loss

Horizontal Link With CP 1300nm

≤ 2.0 dB at 850nm or 1300nm

Insertion Loss

Centralized Link Insertion Loss ≤ 3.3 dB @ 850nm or 1300nm based on three connector pairs Centralized Plus Open Office CP Link Insertion Loss ≤ 4.1 dB @ 850 or 1300nm based on three connector pairs Backbone Link Insertion Loss = Cable Atten + Connector Insertion Loss + Splice Insertion Loss Connector

Insertion Loss

≤ 0.75 dB

Splice

Insertion Loss

Cable

Atten

≤ 3.5 dB/km at 850nm for 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm

Cable

Atten

≤ 1.5 dB/km at 1300nm for 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm

Cable

Atten

≤ 0.5 dB/km for singlemode outside plant cable

Cable

Atten

≤ 1.0 dB/km for singlemode inside plant cable

Industrial Products

CHANNEL ATTENUATION

≤ 2.75dB @ 850nm or

≤ 0.3 dB

dB Multimode

Channel

Singlemode

850nm

1300nm

1310nm

1550nm

OF-300

2.55

1.95

1.80

OF-500

3.25

2.25

2.00

OF-2000

8.50

4.50

3.50

Connector

Atten

≤ 0.75 dB

Splice

Atten

≤ 0.3 dB

Cable

Atten

≤ 3.5 dB/km at 850nm for 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm

Cable

Atten

≤ 1.5 dB/km at 1300nm for 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm

Cable

Atten

≤ 1.0 dB/km for singlemode (no differentiation between inside and outside plant cables)

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

MULTIMODE OPTICAL FIBER MODAL BANDWIDTH (OVERFILLED LAUNCH): ’568-B Series

’11801:2002 2nd Edition

S110 Connecting Block System

Bandwidth ≥ 160 MHz-km at 850nm for 62.5/125µm

Bandwidth ≥ 200 MHz-km at 850nm for 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm (OM1)

Bandwidth ≥ 500 MHz-km at 850nm for 50/125µm

Bandwidth ≥ 500 MHz-km @ 850nm for 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm (OM2)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Bandwidth ≥ 500 MHz-km at 1300nm for 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm Note: Additional performance specifications for 50/125µm cables are provided in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1. These requirements are harmonized with fiber type ‘OM3’ as specified in ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition.

Standards Update

Bandwidth ≥ 500 MHz-km at 1300nm for 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm (OM1, OM2 and OM3) Note: Fiber type OM3 specified in ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition, requires laser launch bandwidth of 2000 MHz-km at 850nm. This requirement is assured by testing differential modal delay (DMD).

Glossary

Index

13.20

Bandwidth ≥ 1500 MHz-km @ 850nm for 62.5/125µm and 50/125µm (OM3)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

CABLING SPECIFICATIONS CROSS-REFERENCE CHART (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B SERIES AND ISO/IEC 11801) 2ND EDITION

System Overview

ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B SERIES

ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ND EDITION

COMMERCIAL BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD

GENERIC CABLING FOR CUSTOMER PREMISES

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

TERMINOLOGY

Cross-connect (a facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their connection by patch cord or jumper). MC (Main Cross-connect) IC (Intermediate Cross-connect) HC (Horizontal Cross-connect) TO (Telecommunications Outlet/connector) CP (Consolidation Point) An interconnection scheme that connects horizontal cables that extend from building pathways to horizontal cables that extend into work area pathways

Intrabuilding Backbone Interbuilding Backbone

Distributor (a facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their connection by patch cord or jumper). CD (Campus Distributor) BD (Building Distributor) FD (Floor Distributor) TO (Telecommunications Outlet) Consolidation Point, a location in the horizontal cabling where a cable may end, which is not subject to moves and changes, and another cable starts leading to the TO which adapts to changes – or – a location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways Campus Backbone Building Backbone

HORIZONTAL MEDIA CHOICES

4-pair 100 Ω unshielded twisted-pair (UTP or F/UTP) Two fiber, 50/125µm or 62.5/125µm optical fiber

4-pair 100 Ω balanced cable (UTP or F/UTP) Optical fiber (50µm, 62.5µm or singlemode permitted)

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

BACKBONE MEDIA CHOICES

100 Ω balanced twisted-pair (UTP or F/UTP) 50/125µm or 62.5/125µm optical fiber Singlemode optical fiber

100 Ω balanced twisted-pair (UTP or F/UTP) 62.5/125µm or 50/125µm optical fiber Singlemode optical fiber

S110 Connecting Block System

BEND RADIUS

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Horizontal ≥ 4 times cable O.D. no load for UTP, 8 times cable O.D. for ScTP no load* Backbone ≥ 10 times cable O.D.

Horizontal ≥ 4 times cable O.D. Backbone ≥ 6 times cable O.D. ≥ 8 times cable O.D. while pulling cables

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

*See ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-1 for specifications on patch cable band radius.

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.21

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

CABLING SPECIFICATIONS CROSS-REFERENCE CHART (ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B SERIES AND ISO/IEC 11801) 2ND EDITION (CONTINUED)

ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B SERIES

ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ND EDITION

COMMERCIAL BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING STANDARD

GENERIC CABLING FOR CUSTOMER PREMISES

ENGINEERING APPROACH

Not applicable. Field testing for verification only.

Link performance determines compliance.

DESIGN APPROACH

Design constraints, component specifications, and installation methods determine compliance.

Design constraints, component specifications, and installation methods determine an alternate means of compliance.

CONNECTOR TERMINATION

All pairs shall be terminated at the outlet.

Partial termination at the 100 Ω or 120 Ω outlet is permitted. In accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Pair untwist shall not exceed 13mm (0.5 in.) for category 5e or higher cables. Pair-untwist for category 3 shall be within 75mm (3 in.) from the point of termination.

CATEGORIES OF CABLING PERFORMANCE

Category 3 is specified to 16 MHz Category 5e is specified to 100 MHz

Class C is specified to 16 MHz Class D is specified to 100 MHz An Optical Class is also specified. Class E is specified to 250 MHz Class E, edition 2.1 will be specified to 500 MHz Class F is specified to 600 MHz

Category 6 is specified to 250 MHz Augmented category 6 will be specified to 500 MHz

Note: For TIA standards, the term “category” is used to specify both components and cabling performance. For ISO/IEC, CENELEC and other cabling standards outside of the U.S. and Canada, the term “category” is used to describe component performance (i.e., cable and connecting hardware). The term “class” is used to describe cabling (i.e., link and channel) performance.

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

Stranded Cable Attenuation = 20% worse than solid requirements for UTP, 50% worse for F/UTP. Hybrid requirements call for power sum NEXT loss margin + 3dB over pair-to-pair NEXT loss limit.

Stranded Cable Attenuation = 50% worse than solid requirements for both UTP and F/UTP. Hybrid requirements call for 6 dB better PSNEXT loss between cable units than the PSNEXT loss specified for the cable.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

13.22

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

HORIZONTAL TWISTED-PAIR CABLE • Solid 4-pair 0.51mm (24 AWG) specified [0.64mm (22 AWG) solid also allowed]. An overall shield is optional. • Performance marking should be provided to show the applicable performance category. These markings do not replace safety markings.

• Color-coding: white/blue – blue white/orange – orange white/green – green white/brown – brown

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

TWISTED-PAIR PATCH CORDS AND CROSS-CONNECT JUMPERS • Patch cords should use stranded cable for adequate flex-life. • Stranded cables must meet the minimum performance requirements for horizontal cable except that 20 percent more attenuation for UTP is allowed by ’568B.2 and 50 percent more attenuation is allowed by ’11801:2002 for UTP and F/UTP. • Color-code for cross-connect jumpers: One conductor white, the other a visibly distinct color such as red or blue.

• Performance markings should be provided to show the applicable transmission category in addition to safety markings. • Insulated O.D. of stranded wires should be 0.8mm (0.032 in.) to 1mm (0.039 in.) to fit into a modular plug. • Production performance specifications for plug cord assemblies are addressed in ’568-B.2. • Color Codes for Stranded, 100 Ω Patch Cord:

OPTION 1 white/blue – blue white/orange – orange white/green – green white/brown – brown

OPTION 2 pair pair pair pair

1 2 3 4

green – red black – yellow blue – orange brown – slate

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Note: Because of their identical pair groupings, patch cords terminated with either T568A or T568B pair assignments may be used interchangeably, provided that both ends are terminated with the same pin/pair scheme.

Industrial Products

MULTI-PAIR CABLE

COLOR-CODING (SPECIFIED BY REFERENCE TO ICEA)

• Performance markings should be provided to show the applicable performance category. These markings do not replace safety markings.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

• Services with incompatible signal levels should be partitioned into separate binder groups. Guidelines for shared sheaths are provided in Annex B of ’568-B.1.

S110 Connecting Block System

• Transmission requirements are equivalent to horizontal cables except that hybrid requirements apply when multiple cable units are contained within the same sheath. • Note: Tip conductors have colored insulation that corresponds to that of the binder group. Ring conductors have colored insulation that corresponds to that of the pair.

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

• Backbone twisted-pair cables consist of solid 0.51mm (24 AWG) cables that contain more than four pairs (typically multiples of 25-pairs are used). An overall shield is optional.

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

• Color-coding (specified by reference to ICEA: see chart to right). Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.23

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

MODULAR WIRING REFERENCE MODULAR JACK STYLES: There are four basic modular jack styles. The 8-position modular outlets are commonly and incorrectly referred to as “RJ45”. The 6-position modular jack is commonly referred to as an RJ11. Using these terms can sometimes lead to confusion since the RJ designations actually refer to very specific wiring configurations called Universal Service Order Code (USOC). The designation ‘RJ’ means Registered Jack. Each of these basic jack styles can be wired for different RJ configurations. For example, the 6-position jack can be wired as an RJ11C (1-pair), RJ14C (2-pair), or RJ25C (3-pair) configuration. An 8-position jack can be wired for configurations such as RJ61C (4-pair) and RJ48C. The keyed 8-position jack can be wired for RJ45S, RJ46S, and RJ47S.

Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

8-position class F

8-position

8-position keyed

6-position

Note: The Siemon Company has developed a guide to modular hardware pin/pair assignments. Visit our website for a free copy.

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

MODULAR PLUG PAIR CONFIGURATIONS It is important that the pairing of wires in the modular plug match the pairs in the modular jack as well as the horizontal and backbone wiring. If they do not, the data being transmitted may be paired with incompatible signals. Modular cords wired to the T568A color scheme on both ends are compatible with T568B systems and vice versa.

Industrial Products

white/blue – blue white/orange – orange white/green – green white/brown – brown

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

UTP Horizontal Cable (solid 24 AWG)

S110 Connecting Block System

STRAIGHT-THROUGH OR REVERSED?

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

8-position USOC

6-position USOC

Modular cords are used for two basic applications. One application uses them for patching between modular patch panels. When used in this manner modular cords should always be wired “straight-through” (pin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, etc.). The second major application uses modular cords to connect the workstation equipment (PC, phone, FAX, etc.) to the modular outlet. These modular cords may either be wired “straight-through” or “reversed” (pin 1 to pin 6, pin 2 to pin 5, pin 3 to pin 4, etc.) depending on the system manufacturer’s specifications. This “reversed” wiring is typically used for voice systems. The following is a guide to determine what type of modular cord you have.

HOW TO READ A MODULAR CORD Align the plugs side-by-side with the contacts facing you and compare the wire colors from left to right. If the colors appear in the same order on both plugs, the cord is wired “straightthrough”. If the colors appear reversed on the second plug (from right to left), the cord is wired “reversed”.

Index

13.24

8-position T568A/T568B

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

COMMON OUTLET CONFIGURATIONS Two wiring schemes have been adopted by the â&#x20AC;&#x2122;568-B.1 and â&#x20AC;&#x2122;11801:2002 standards. They are nearly identical except that pairs two and three are reversed. T568A is the preferred scheme because it is compatible with 1 or 2-pair USOC systems. Either configuration can be used for Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) and high speed data applications. Transmission categories 3, 5e, and 6 are only applicable to this type of pair grouping.

Pair ID

PIN #

Pair ID

PIN #

T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4

5 4 3 6 1 2 7 8

T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4

5 4 1 2 3 6 7 8

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

USOC wiring is available for 1-, 2-, 3-, or 4-pair systems. Pair 1 occupies the center conductors, pair 2 occupies the next two contacts out, etc. One advantage to this scheme is that a 6-position plug configured with 1, 2, or 3 pairs can be inserted into an 8-position jack and still maintain pair continuity. A note of warning though, pins 1 and 8 on the jack may become damaged from this practice. A disadvantage is the poor transmission performance associated with this type of pair sequence. None of these pair schemes is cabling standard compliant.

Pair ID

PIN #

Pair ID

PIN #

T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3 T4 R4

5 4 3 6 2 7 1 8

T1 R1 T2 R2 T3 R3

4 3 2 5 1 6

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX wiring specifies an 8-position jack but uses only two pairs. These are pairs two and three of T568A and T568B schemes.

Pair ID

PIN #

T1 R1 T2 R2

1 2 3 6

Token Ring wiring uses either an 8-position or 6-position jack. The 8-position format is compatible with T568A, T568B, and USOC wiring schemes. The 6-position is compatible with 1- or 2-pair USOC wiring.

Pair ID

PIN #

T1 R1 T2 R2

5 4 3 6

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

1000BASE-T and 10GBASE-T wiring specifies an 8-position jack. Can be either the T568A or T568B configuration. (See above)

ANSI X3T9.5 TP-PMD uses the two outer pairs of an 8-position jack. These positions are designated as pair 3 and pair 4 of the T568A wiring scheme. This wiring scheme is also used for ATM.

Pair ID

PIN #

T1 R1 T2 R2

1 2 7 8

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.25

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

RECOMMENDED CABLING PRACTICES DO’S:

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

✔ Terminate each horizontal cable on a dedicated telecommunications outlet. ✔ Locate the main cross-connect near the center of the building to limit cable distances. ✔ Maintain the twist of horizontal and backbone cable pairs up to the point of termination. ✔ Tie and dress horizontal cables neatly and with a minimum bend radius of 4 times the cable diameter. ✔ Use hook and loop tie wraps.

DON’TS: ✘ Do not use connecting hardware that is of a lower category than the cable being used. ✘ Do not create multiple appearances of the same cable at several distribution points (called bridged taps). ✘ Do not over-tighten cable ties, use staples, or make sharp bends with cables. ✘ Do not place cable near equipment that may generate high levels of electromagnetic interference.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

TWISTED-PAIR CONNECTOR TERMINATIONS • Pair twists shall be maintained as close as possible to the point of termination. • Untwisting shall not exceed 75mm (3.0 in) for category 3 links and 13mm (0.5 in) for category 5e and higher links.

APPLICATION-SPECIFIC PAIR ASSIGNMENTS FOR THE 100 OHM CABLING APPLICATION PINS 1-2 PINS 3-6 PINS 4-5 PINS 7-8 ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power . . . . . . . . . . . TX . . . . . . . . . . . . RX . . . . . . . . . . . Power Analog Voice. . . . . . . . . . . . —. . . . . . . . . . . . . — . . . . . . . . . . . TX/RX . . . . . . . . . . . — 802-3 (10BASE-T) . . . . . . . . TX . . . . . . . . . . . . RX . . . . . . . . . . . . —. . . . . . . . . . . . . — 802-5 (Token Ring) . . . . . . . . —. . . . . . . . . . . . . TX . . . . . . . . . . . . RX . . . . . . . . . . . . — FDDI (TP-PMD) . . . . . . . . . . . TX . . . . . . . . . . Optional1 . . . . . . . . Optional1 . . . . . . . . . . RX ATM User Device . . . . . . . . . TX . . . . . . . . . . Optional1 . . . . . . . . Optional1 . . . . . . . . . . RX ATM Network Equip. . . . . . . RX . . . . . . . . . . Optional1 . . . . . . . . Optional1 . . . . . . . . . . TX 10GBASE-T (802.3an) . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi 1000BASE-T (802.3ab) . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi 1000BASE-TX (TIA/EIA 854) . TX . . . . . . . . . . . . RX . . . . . . . . . . . . TX . . . . . . . . . . . . RX 100BASE-VG (802.12) . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi 100BASE-T4 (802.3u). . . . . . TX . . . . . . . . . . . . RX. . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bi 100BASE-TX (802.3u). . . . . . TX . . . . . . . . . . . . RX . . . . . . . . . . . . —. . . . . . . . . . . . . — 1000BASE-TX2/4 . . . . . . . . TX . . . . . . . . . . . . RX . . . . . . . . . . . . —. . . . . . . . . . . . . —

*Bi = bi-directional TX = Transmit RX = Receive 1 Optional terminations may be required by some manufacturers’ active implementations.

RECOMMENDED COLOR-CODING SCHEME SIEMON COLOR # 02. . . . . . . . white 03 . . . . . . . . . red 04 . . . . . . . . gray 05 . . . . . . . yellow 06 . . . . . . . . blue

COLOR CODE

SIEMON COLOR #

■ . . . 1st Level Backbone (MC/IC or MC/TC Terminations)

■. ■. ■. ■.

. . . .

Key Telephone Systems Second Level Backbone (IC/TC Terminations) Miscellaneous (Auxiliary, Security, Alarms, etc.) Horizontal Cable Terminations (a.k.a. Station Cable)

07 . . . . . . . green 08 . . . . . . . purple 09 . . . . . . orange 60 . . . . . . . brown

■. ■. ■. ■.

COLOR CODE . . . .

. . . .

Network Connections (customer side of demarc) Common Equipment (PBX, Host, LANs, Muxes) Demarcation Point (Central Office Terminations) Interbuilding Backbone (Campus Cable Terminations)

TWISTED-PAIR CABLING INSTALLATION PRACTICES • To avoid stretching, pulling tension should not exceed 110N (25 lbƒ) for 4-pair cables. • Installed bend radii shall not exceed: – 4 times the cable diameter for horizontal UTP cables under no load conditions. – 8 times the cable diameter for horizontal ScTP cables. – 10 times the cable diameter for multi-pair backbone twisted-pair cables under no load conditions.

Index

13.26

• Connecting hardware shall be installed to provide well-organized installation with cable management and in accordance with manufacturer’s guidelines. • Strip back only as much jacket as is required to terminate individual pairs.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

• Horizontal cables should be used with connecting hardware and patch cords (or jumpers) of the same performance category or higher. • Avoid cable stress, as caused by: – cable twist during pulling or installation – tension in suspended cable runs – tightly cinched cable ties or staples – tight bend radii • Important Note: Installed twisted-pair cabling shall be classified by the least performing component in the link.

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

TIA-569-B* COMMERCIAL BUILDING STANDARD FOR TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAYS AND SPACES The TIA TR42.3 Working Group on Telecommunications Pathways & Spaces published the TIA-569-B (’569-B) Standard in 2004.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

FOLLOWING ARE HIGHLIGHTS OF THE ’569-B STANDARD: Copper Patch Panels

PURPOSE: Wireless Service Entrance Pathway

• Standardize design and construction practices for telecommunications pathways and spaces. • Provides a telecommunications support system that is adaptable to change during the life of the facility.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Antenna Entrance

Telecommunications Room Common Building Pathways

SCOPE: • Pathways and spaces in which telecommunications media are placed and terminated, including wireless. • Telecommunications pathways and spaces within and between buildings. • Commercial building design for both single and multi-tenant buildings.

ay thw Pa Tie

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Telecommunications Room

ELEMENTS: • • • • • • • •

Horizontal Backbone Work Area Telecommunications Room Equipment Room Main Terminal Space Entrance Facility Telecommunications Enclosures

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Equipment Room

MapIT Intelligent Patching

Common Building Pathways ce ran Ent y e a c w rvi Se Path

Common Building Pathways

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

Entrance Room/Main Terminal Space

ANNEX INFORMATION: The following normative and informative annexes are provided in TIA-569-B: A. Firestopping (Normative) B. Additional section information (Informative) C. Noise reduction guidelines (Informative) D. Bibliography and references (Informative)

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Telecommunications Outlet Box

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Work Area Outlet Location

Service Entrance Pathways

Standards Update

*ANSI approval pending.

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

13.27

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

BUILDING AND BACKBONE INCLUDES: PATHWAY TYPES:

SPACE TYPES:

• CEILING — Open environment above accessible ceiling tiles and frame work.

• ENTRANCE FACILITIES — Telecommunications service entrance to the building including entrance through the wall.

• ACCESS FLOOR — Raised modular floor tile supported by pedestals, with or without lateral bracing or stringers.

• ACCESS PROVIDER/SERVICE PROVIDE — Spaces location of transmission, reception and support equipment. • MULTI-TENANT BUILDING SPACES — Includes common Equipment Room and column Telecommunications Room.

• TRAY & RUNWAY — Prefabricated rigid structures for pulling or placing cable. • CONDUIT — Metallic and nonmetallic tubing of rigid or flexible construction permitted by applicable electrical code. • FURNITURE — Modular systems of furniture containing pathways/raceways for concealing cable and terminating outlets. • IN-FLOOR — Network of raceways embedded in concrete consisting of distribution and header ducts, trenches, and cellular systems. • PERIMETER — Surface, recessed, molding, and multi-channel raceway systems for wall mounting around rooms or along hallways.

• • • • • • • •

Outlet box/bracket/poke-thru Multi-user telecommunications outlet assembly Consolidation Point Splice box/zone box Telecommunications Enclosure Telecommunications Room Equipment Room Entrance Room

• VERTICAL PATHWAYS — Sleeve or conduit and slot penetrations for access to other floors.

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS:

• UTILITY COLUMNS — Vertical channel for cable access to work area locations.

• Designed to handle recognized media as specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B series

• PARTITION CABLING — Where demountable partitions are used to conceal cables.

• Not allowed in elevator shafts

• IN-WALL CABLING — Where cables pass through stud openings.

• Installed in dry locations

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

13.28

• BUILDING SPACES —

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

• Grounded per code and ANSI-J-STD-607-A (’607-A)

• Accommodate seismic zone requirements

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

WORK AREA Primary location where the building occupants interact with dedicated telecommunications equipment. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS:

System Overview

• • • •

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

At least one telecommunication outlet box location shall be planned for each work area. This location should be coordinated with the furniture plan. A power outlet should be nearby. Height coordinated power outlet. Control center, attendant, and reception areas shall have direct and independent pathways to the serving telecommunications room. Furniture System Design: – Cable access via walls, columns, ceilings, or floors. Fittings that transition between building and furniture pathways require special planning. – Furniture pathway fill capacity is effectively reduced by furniture corners, and connectors mounted within the furniture pathway systems. – Furniture pathways bend radius shall not force the installed cable to a bend radius of less than 25mm (1 in.). – Furniture spaces designed to house slack storage, consolidation points, or multi-user telecommunications outlet assemblies shall provide space for strain relieving, terminating, and storing slack for the horizontal cables. – Slack storage and furniture pathway fill, shall not affect the bend radius and termination of the cable to the connector. – Furniture pathway openings shall comply with either of two sizes: • Standard NEMA opening (NEMA OS 1, WD-6) • Alternate opening:

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System

DIMENSION TOLERANCE L (length) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.8mm (2.71 in.) . . . . 1.02mm (0.040 in.) H (height) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1mm (1.38 in.) . . . . 0.90mm (0.035 in.) T (depth) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.40mm (0.055 in.). . . . 0.64mm (0.025 in.) R (corner radius) . . . . . . . . . . . 4.06mm (0.160 in.) max. . . . . . . . — C (distance to 1st obstruction) . . . 30.5mm (1.2 in.) min.. . . . . . . . . —

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Power/telecommunication separation requirements are governed by applicable electrical code for safety. Minimum separation requirements of Article 800-52 of ANSI/NFPA 70 (National Electric Code) shall be applied.

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

13.29

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

System Overview

TELECOMMUNICATIONS ROOM Recognized location of the common access point for backbone and horizontal pathways. 3m (10 ft.)

Sleeves or condits with bushings and firestop

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

HVAC supply or return 2.6mm (8.5 ft.) AFF minimum

Copper Patch Panels

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Cable Management

2.6m (8.5 ft.) AFF Dedicated 20 amp twist-lock 2.6m (8.5 ft.) AFF

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

20mm (trade size 3/4) plywood backboard

Light Fixture

Backboard for other low-voltage system

Racks or cabinets 2.4m (8 ft.) Closet interconnecting conduit, 78mm (trade size 3) minimum with bushing and firestop

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

2.6m (8.5 ft.) AFF

Sleeves or conduits with bushing and firestop

Light Fixture

20mm (trade size 3/4) plywood backboard

Sleeves or condits with bushings and firestop

MapIT Intelligent Patching

HVAC supply or return 2.6mm (8.5 ft.) AFF minimum

S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

DESIGN: • Dedicated to telecommunications function. • Equipment not related to telecommunications shall not be installed, pass through or enter the telecommunications room. • Multiple closets on the same floor shall be interconnected by a minimum of one 78mm (trade size 3) conduit, or equivalent pathway. • Minimum floor loading 2.4 kPA (50 lbf/ft2).

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS: • Minimum one closet per floor to house telecommunications equipment/cable terminations and associated cross-connect cable and wire. • Located near the center of the area being served. • Horizontal pathways shall terminate in the telecommunications room on the same floor as the area served. • Accommodate seismic zone requirements.

Index

13.30

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

• One wall should have 20mm (0.75 in.) A-C plywood 2.4m (8 ft.) high. • Lighting shall be a minimum of 500 lx (50 foot candles) at 1m (3 ft.) above finished floor (AFF). • False ceilings shall not be provided. • Minimum door size 910mm (36 in.) wide and 2000mm (80 in.) high without sill, hinged to open outwards, or slide side-to-side or removable, and fitted with a lock. • Minimum of two dedicated 120V nominal non-switched duplex electrical outlet receptacles or equivalent, each on separate branch circuits. • Additional convenience duplex outlets placed at 1.8m (6 ft.) intervals around perimeter, 150mm (6 in.) above floor. • Access to the telecommunications grounding system as specified by ANSI-J-STD-607-A. • HVAC requirements to maintain temperature the same as adjacent office area. A positive pressure shall be maintained with a minimum of one air change per hour or per code.

STANDARDS UPDATE Web Resources

EQUIPMENT ROOM A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves specific occupants of the building. Any or all of the functions of a telecommunications room or entrance facility may alternately be provided by an equipment room. LOCATION:

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS:

• • • • • •

• • • •

Site locations should allow for expansion. Accessible to the delivery of large equipment. Not located below water level. Away from sources of EMI. Safeguards against excessive vibration. Sizing shall include projected future as well as present requirement. • Equipment not related to the support of the equipment room shall not be installed in, pass through, or enter the equipment room.

•

• • • • •

Minimum clear height of 2.4m (8 ft.) without obstruction. Protected from contaminants and pollutants. Access to backbone pathways. HVAC provided on a 24 hours-per-day, 365 days-per-year basis. Temperature and humidity controlled range 18° C (64° F) to 24°C (75° F) with 30% to 55% relative humidity measured 1.5m (5 ft.) above floor level. Separate power supply circuit shall be provided and terminated in its own electrical panel. Minimum lighting 500 lx (50 foot candles). Switch location shall be near entrance door to room. One wall should have 20mm (0.75 in.) A-C plywood 2.4m (8 ft.) high. Minimum door same as telecommunications room. Double doors without center post or sill is recommended. Access to ground per ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

ENTRANCE FACILITY Consists of the telecommunications service entrance to the building and backbone pathways between buildings. LOCATION:

DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS:

• Providers of all telecommunications services shall be contacted to establish requirements. • Location of other utilities shall be considered in locating the entrance facility. • Alternate entrance facility should be provided where security, continuity or other special needs exist. • Equipment not related to the support of the entrance facility should not be installed in, pass through, or enter the telecommunications entrance facility. • Dry location not subject to flooding and close as practicable to building entrance point and electrical service room. • Wireless transmission/reception shall be located close to wireless field.

• Accommodate the applicable seismic zone requirements. • A service entrance pathway shall be provided via one of the following entrance types: Underground, Buried, Aerial, Tunnel. • Minimum one wall should be covered with rigidly fixed 21mm (0.75 in.) A-C plywood. • Minimum lighting same as telecommunication room. • False ceilings shall not be provided. • Minimum door same as telecommunications room. • Electrical power same as telecommunications room. No convenience receptacles mentioned. • Grounding same as telecommunications room.

Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

MISCELLANEOUS • Fire stopping per applicable code • Horizontal pathway separation from Electromagnetic interference (EMI) sources: – Separation between telecommunications and power cables (Article 800.52 of ANSI/NFPA 70) – Building protected from lightning (ANSI/NFPA 780 (Ref D.4) – Surge protection (Article 280 of ANSI/NFPA 70 and 9.11 of ANSI/IEEE 1100 [Ref D.1]) – Grounding (ANSI/TIA/EIA-607) – Corrected faulty wiring (Section 7.5 of ANSI/IEEE 1100)

System Overview

• Reducing noise coupling: – Increase separation from noise sources – Electrical branch circuit line, neutral, and grounding conductors should be maintained close together – Use of surge protectors in branch circuits – Use fully enclosed grounded metallic raceway or locate cabling near grounded metallic surface

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Note: Common equipment rooms & telecommunications rooms are made available in multi tenant environments and controlled by building owner or agent.

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

13.31

GLOSSARY Web Resources

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

Air Blown Fiber (ABF) Small, flexible plastic microduct tubing installed prior to the installation of individual or multiple optical fibers that are “blown in” through the microduct using compressed air.

Bundled Cable An assembly of two or more cables continuously bound together to form a single unit prior to installation (sometimes referred to as loomed, speed-wrap or whip cable constructions).

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Technology selected by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU, formerly CCITT) for broadband ISDN. This communications protocol is also specified by the ATM Forum (Foster City, CA) for 155 Mb/s transmission over twisted-pair cable and various bit rate optical fiber cabling applications.

Bus Topology A linear configuration where all network devices are placed on a single length of cable. It requires one backbone cable to which all network devices are connected.

Attenuation A reduction in power or amplitude of the transmitted signal. In cables, it is generally expressed in decibels per unit length.

Campus Backbone Cabling between buildings that share telecommunications facilities.

Attenuation to Crosstalk Ratio (ACR) The difference between attenuation and crosstalk measured in decibels.

Campus Distributor (CD) The international term for main cross-connect. The distributor from which the campus backbone cable emanates.

Auxiliary Disconnect Outlet (ADO) A device usually located within the tenant or living unit used to terminate the ADO cable or backbone cable.

Category

Auxiliary Disconnect Outlet (ADO) Cable In residential applications, the cable from the auxiliary telecommunications disconnect outlet/connector or the distribution device in a customer's premises to the backbone facility or the point of demarcation. Backbone Cabling Cable and connecting hardware that comprise the main and intermediate cross-connects, as well as cable runs that extend between telecommunications rooms, equipment rooms and entrance facilities. Balance An indication of signal voltage equality and phase polarity on a conductor pair. Perfect balance occurs when the signals across a twisted-pair are equal in magnitude and opposite in phase with respect to ground.

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B series of documents, the North American standards for cabling describes mechanical properties and transmission characteristics of unshielded twisted-pair (UTP) cables and screened twisted-pair (ScTP) cables and assigns a unique number classification (category 3, category 5e, and category 6). 2. ISO/IEC IS 11801 2nd edition, the international standard for cabling and local standardization documents define cabling component categories based on transmission performance parameters such as attenuation and NEXT loss, over a specified frequency range. Component categories category 5, category 6 and category 7.

Balanced Signal Transmission Two voltages, equal and opposite in phase with respect to each other, across the conductors of a twisted-pair (commonly referred to as tip and ring).

Channel The end-to-end transmission path connecting any two points at which application specific equipment is connected. Equipment and work area cables are included in the channel.

Balun An impedance matching transformer used to convert unbalanced coaxial signals to balanced signals.

Classification Application classes for cabling have been identified for the purpose of the ISO/IEC 11801 standard;

Bandwidth A range of frequencies, usually the difference between the upper and lower limits of the range, typically expressed in megahertz (MHz). It is used to describe the information-carrying capacity of a medium. In copper and optical fibers, the bandwidth decreases with increasing length. Optical fiber bandwidth is specified in megahertz kilometers (MHz-km). Bonding The permanent joining of metallic parts to form an electrically conductive path that will assure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any current likely to be imposed on it. Break Test Access Method of disconnecting a circuit that has been electrically bridged to allow testing on either side of the circuit without disturbing cable terminations. Devices that provide break test access include: disconnect blocks, bridge clips, plug-on protection modules, and plug-on patching devices. Bridged Tap The multiple appearances of the same cable pair or fiber at several distribution points. Also known as parallel connections. Bridging A means of providing through connections between conductors or pairs that are terminated on connecting blocks. These through connections are commonly provided by means of individual metallic “bridging” clips or multiple “bridging” clips that are housed in a plastic insulator. Building Distributor (BD) The international term for intermediate cross-connect. A distributor in which the building backbone cable(s) terminates and at which connections to the campus backbone cable(s) may be made.

Standards Update

– Class A: cabling is characterized up to 100 kHz – Class B: cabling is characterized up to 1 MHz – Class C: cabling is characterized up to 16 MHz – Class D: cabling is characterized up to 100 MHz – Class E: cabling is characterized up to 250 MHz – Class F: cabling is characterized up to 600 MHz – Optical Class: optical fiber links are characterized from 10 MHz and above. Collapsed Backbone A centralized network contained in one device. The network is said to be collapsed and made to fit into a box. Individual networks are connected to this central device and can then communicate with one another. Common Mode Transmission A transmission scheme where voltages appear equal in magnitude and phase across a conductor pair with respect to ground. May also be referred to as longitudinal mode. Consolidation Point (CP) A location for interconnection between horizontal cables that extend from building pathways and horizontal cables that extend into work area pathways. Cross-connect A facility enabling the termination of cables as well as their interconnection or cross-connection with other cabling or equipment. Also known as a distributor. Cross-connection A connection scheme between cabling runs, subsystems and equipment using patch cords or jumpers that attach to connecting hardware on each end. Crosstalk Noise or interference caused by electromagnetic coupling from one signal path to another. Crosstalk performance is generally expressed in decibels. Decibel (dB) A standard unit for expressing transmission gain or loss as derived from a ratio of signal voltages or power. Delay Skew The difference in propagation delay between the fastest and slowest pair in a cable or cabling system.

Glossary

Index

14.0

Cabling A combination of cables, wire, cords and connecting hardware used in the telecommunications infrastructure.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

GLOSSARY Web Resources

Demarcation Point (DP) A point at which two services may interface and identify the division of responsibility. Differential Mode Transmission A transmission scheme where voltages appear equal in magnitude and opposite in phase across a twisted-pair with respect to ground. May also be referred to as balanced mode. Distributor The term used for the functions of a collection of components (e.g. patch panels, patch-cords) used to interconnect cables. Ducting See Pathway. Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) The ability of a system to minimize radiated emissions and maximize immunity from external noise sources.

Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Operates at 100 megabits per second (Mb/s). Developed by the ANSI X3T9.5 committee. This is a token-passing, dual-ring architecture that provides redundancy using fiber optic cable with transmission up to 2 kilometers. Fiber Optic Transmission A communications scheme whereby electrical data is converted to light energy and transmitted through optical fibers. Firestop A material, device, or assembly of parts installed in a cable pathway at a fire-rated wall or floor to prevent passage of flame, smoke or gases through the rated barrier (e.g., between cubicles or separated rooms or spaces). Floor Distributor (FD) The international term for horizontal cross-connect. The distributor used to connect between the horizontal cable and other cabling subsystems or equipment.

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) The interference in signal transmission or reception caused by the radiation of electrical and magnetic fields.

Ground A conducting connection, whether intentional or accidental, between an electrical circuit (telecommunications) or equipment and earth, or to some conducting body that serves in place of the earth.

Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) An organization that sets standards for interfaces to ensure compatibility between data communications equipment and data terminal equipment.

Hertz (Hz) A measure of frequency as defined in units of cycles per second.

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable

Home-run Cabling A distribution method in which individual cables are run directly from the horizontal cross-connect to each telecommunications outlet. This configuration is also known as star topology.

Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

Electronic Industries Association A standards organization that specializes in the electrical and functional characteristics of interface equipment. The organization sets standards for interfaces to ensure compatibility between data communications equipment and data terminal equipment. Entrance Facility (EF) An entrance to a building for both public and private network service cables (including antennae), including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the entrance room or space. Entrance facilities are often used to house electrical protection equipment and connecting hardware for the transition between outdoor and indoor cable. Entrance Facility, Telecommunications An entrance to a building for both public and private network service cables (including antennae) beginning with the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the entrance room or space. Entrance Point, Telecommunications The point of emergence of telecommunications conductors through an exterior wall, a concrete floor slab, or from a rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit. Equal Level Far-end Crosstalk (ELFEXT) Crosstalk measured at the opposite end from which the disturbing signal is transmitted, normalized by the attenuation contribution of the cable or cabling. Equipment Cable A cable or cable assembly used to connect telecommunications equipment to horizontal or backbone cabling. Equipment Room (ER) A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of the building or multiple buildings in a campus environment. An equipment room is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because it is considered to be a building or campus serving (as opposed to floor serving) facility and because of the nature or complexity of the equipment that it contains.

Horizontal Cabling The cabling between and including the telecommunications outlet and the horizontal cross-connect. Horizontal Cross-connect (HC) A cross-connect of horizontal cabling to other cabling, e.g., horizontal, backbone, or equipment.

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Hub Equipment that serves as the centralized connection point for a network or portion thereof. Hubs are used for multiplexing, multi-port bridging functions, switching and test access. They can be either passive or active and are not considered to be part of the cabling infrastructure.

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management

Hybrid cable An assembly of two or more cables, of the same or different types or categories, covered by one overall sheath.

Industrial Products

Insertion loss 1. The loss resulting from the insertion of a device in a transmission line, expressed as the reciprocal of the ratio of the signal power delivered to that part of the line following the device to the signal power delivered to that same part before insertion.

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System

2. In an optical fiber system, the loss of optical power caused by inserting a component, such as a connector, coupler or splice, into a previously continuous optical path. Insulation Displacement Connection (IDC) A wire connection device that penetrates the insulation of a copper wire when it is being inserted (punched-down) into a metal contact, allowing the electrical connection to be made.

S110 Connecting Block System

Intelligent Hub A hub that performs bridging and routing functions in a collapsed backbone environment.

S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Equipment Room, Telecommunications A centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of the building. An equipment room is considered distinct from the telecommunications room because of the nature and complexity of the equipment it houses.

Interbuilding Backbone Telecommunications cable(s) that are part of the campus subsystem that connect one building to another.

Far-end Crosstalk (FEXT) Crosstalk measured at the opposite end from which the disturbing signal is transmitted.

Interconnection A connection scheme that provides direct access to the cabling infrastructure and the ability to make cabling system changes using equipment cords.

FC Connector A type of optical fiber connector identifiable by its round, screw-operated locking nut. It is usually metal. Its ruggedness leads it to be widely used in test equipment.

Intermediate Cross-Connect (IC) The connection point between a backbone cable that extends from the main cross-connect (first-level backbone) and the backbone cable from the horizontal cross-connect (second-level backbone).

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

14.1

GLOSSARY Web Resources

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Intermediate Distribution Frame (IDF) In a central office or customer premises, a frame that (a) cross connects the user cable media to individual user line circuits and (b) may serve as a distribution point for multipair cables from the main distribution frame (MDF) to individual cables connected to equipment in areas remote from these frames. Intrabuilding Backbone Telecommunications cable(s) that are part of the building subsystem that connect one equipment room to another. Jumper Wire An assembly of twisted-pairs without connectors on either end used to join telecommunications links at a cross-connect. Link An end-to-end transmission path provided by the cabling infrastructure. Cabling links include all cables and connecting hardware that comprise the horizontal or backbone subsystems. Equipment and work area cables are not included as part of a link. Local Area Network (LAN) A geographically limited data communications system for a specific user group consisting of a group of interconnected computers, sharing applications, data and peripheral devices such as printers and CD-ROM drives intended for the local transport of data, video, and voice. Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) The local regulated provider of public switched telecommunications services. Longitudinal Conversion Loss (LCL) A measure (in dB) of the differential voltage induced on a conductor pair as a result of subjecting that pair to longitudinal voltage. LCL is considered to be a measure of circuit balance.

Open Office Cabling The cabling that distributes from the telecommunications closet to the open office area utilizing a consolidation point or multi-user telecommunications outlet assembly. Outlet, Telecommunications A fixed connecting device where the horizontal cable terminates. The telecommunications outlet provides the interface to the work area cabling. Sometimes referred to as a telecommunications outlet/connector. Outlet/Connector, Telecommunications A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable terminates. Patch Cord A length of cable with connectors on one or both ends used to join telecommunications links at a cross-connect. Patch Panel Connecting hardware that typically provides means to connect horizontal or backbone cables to an arrangement of fixed connectors that may be accessed using patch cords or equipment cords to form cross-connections or interconnections. Pathway A facility (i.e., conduit) for the placement and protection of telecommunications cables. Same as raceway or ducting.

Main Cross-connect (MC) A cross-connect for first level backbone cables, entrance cables, and equipment cables.

Plenum A compartment or chamber to which one or more air ducts are connected and that forms part of the air distribution system.

MAU

Private Branch Exchange (PBX) A private switching system usually serving an organization, such as a business, located on the customer’s premises. It switches calls both inside a building or premises and outside to the telephone network, and can sometimes provide access to a computer from a data terminal.

1. Multi-station Access Unit in reference to Token Ring. 2. Medium Attachment Unit in reference to Ethernet A wiring concentrator used in Local Area Networks. A device that allows terminals, PCs, printers, and other devices to be connected in a star-based configuration to Token Ring or Ethernet LANs. MAU hardware can be either active or passive and is not considered to be part of the cabling infrastructure. Modular Jack A telecommunications outlet/connector for wire or cords as defined in the FCC Part 68 Subpart F. Modular jacks can have 4, 6 or 8 contact positions, but not all the positions need be equipped with contacts. Modular Plug A telecommunications connector for wire or cords as defined in the FCC Part 68 Subpart F. Modular plugs can have 4, 6 or 8 contact positions, but not all the positions need be equipped with contacts. Multimedia 1. An application that communicates to more than one of the human sensory receptors. 2. Applications that communicate information by more than one means or cabling media. Multimode Optical Fiber An optical fiber that will allow many bound modes to propagate. The fiber may be either a graded-index or step-index fiber. Multimode optical fibers have a much larger core than singlemode fibers. See also Optical Fiber Cable. Multi-user Telecommunications Outlet Assembly (MuTOA) A grouping in one location of several telecommunications/outlet connectors.

Propagation Delay The amount of time that passes between when a signal is transmitted and when it is received at the opposite end of a cable or cabling. Punch Down A method for securing wire to a quick clip in which the insulated wire is placed in the terminal groove and pushed down with a special tool. As the wire is seated, the terminal displaces the wire insulation to make an electrical connection. The punch down operation may also trim the wire as it terminates. Also called cut down. Quick Clip An electrical contact used to provide an insulation displacement connection to telecommunications cables. Raceway See Pathway. Return Loss Noise or interference caused by impedance discontinuities along the transmission line at various frequencies. Return loss is expressed in decibels. Ring Conductor A telephony term used to describe one of the two conductors in a cable pair used to provide telephone service. This term was originally coined from its position as the second (ring) conductor of a tip-ring-sleeve switchboard plug. Screened twisted-pair (ScTP) A balanced twisted-pair cable surrounded by metallic braid, foil (screen) or both and bound in a single cable sheath. Shielded twisted-pair (SSTP) A cable surrounded by a metallic braid, foil or both and bound in a single plastic sheath containing balanced twisted-pair conductors that are individually shielded.

Nanosecond (ns) One billionth of a second (10-9 seconds).

Singlemode Optical Fiber An optical fiber that will allow only one mode to propagate; this fiber is typically a step-index fiber.

Near-end Crosstalk (NEXT Loss) The undesired coupling of a signal from one pair of wires to another. Signal distortion as a result of signal coupling from one pair to another at various frequencies.

Small Form Factor An optical fiber connector and adapter that provide for two strands of fiber in a surface area similar to an unshielded twisted-pair (RJ-style) plug and socket.

Glossary

Index

14.2

Network Demarcation Point The point of interconnection between the local exchange carrier’s telecommunication facilities and the telecommunications systems wiring and equipment as the end user’s facility. This point shall be located on the subscriber side of the telephone company’s protector or the equivalent thereof in cases where a protector is not required.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

GLOSSARY Web Resources

Sneak Current A low-level current that is of insufficient strength to trigger electrical surge protectors and, therefore, is able to pass through them undetected. These currents may result from contact between communications lines and AC power circuits or from power induction, and may cause equipment damage unless secondary protection is used. Star Topology 1. A method of cabling each telecommunications outlet/connector directly to a cross-connect in a horizontal cabling subsystem. 2. A method of cabling each cross-connect (HC and IC) to the main cross-connect (MC) in a backbone cabling subsystem. Surge A rapid rise in current or voltage, usually followed by a fall back to a normal level. Also referred to as transient. Telecommunications Any transmission, emission or reception of signs, signals, writings, images, sounds or information of any nature by cable, radio, visual, optical or other electromagnetic systems. Telecommunications Room (TR) An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment, cable terminations and cross-connect cabling used to serve work areas located on the same floor. The telecommunications closet is the typical location of the horizontal cross-connect and is considered distinct from an equipment room because it is considered to be a floor serving (as opposed to building or campus serving) facility. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) An organization that sets standards for cabling, pathways, spaces, grounding, bonding, administration, field testing and other aspects of the telecommunications industry. Tip Conductor A telephony term used to describe the conductor of a pair that is grounded at the central office when the line is idle. This term was originally coined from its position as the first (tip) conductor of a tip-ring-sleeve switchboard plug. Topology The physical or logical layout of links and nodes in a network. These include star, ring and bus configurations. Transfer Impedance A measure (in Ω) of shield effectiveness. Transition Point (TP) A location in the horizontal cabling subsystem where flat under carpet cabling connects to round cabling. Trunk A communication line between two switching systems. The term “switching systems” typically includes equipment in a central office (the telephone company) and PBXs. A tie trunk connects PBXs. Central office trunks connect a PBX to the switching system at the central office. Twisted-Pair Physical Media Dependent (TP-PMD) Technology under review by the ANSI X3T9.5 working group that allows 100 Mb/s transmission over twisted-pair cable. Also referred to as CDDI or TPDDI. Twisted-Pair Distributed Data Interface (TP-DDI) Trademark of 3COM Corporation. (See Twisted-pair Physical Media Dependent.) Unshielded Twisted-Pair (UTP) A cable with multiple pairs of twisted insulated copper conductors bound in a single sheath. Webbed Conductors The manufacturing process that physically binds the conductor insulation of the wire pairs of an unshielded twisted-pair cable. Work Area The area where horizontal cabling is connected to the work area equipment by means of a telecommunication outlet. A station/desk which is served by a telecommunications outlet. Sometimes referred to as a work station. Work Area Cable A cable assembly used to connect equipment to the telecommunications outlet in the work area. Work area cables are considered to be outside the scope of cabling standards.

Acronyms & Abbreviations ACR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuation-to-crosstalk ratio ADO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Auxiliary disconnect outlet ADSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asynchronous Digital Subscriber Line ANSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . American National Standards Institute ATM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asynchronous transfer mode AWG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . American wire gauge BD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building distributor BER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bit Error Rate BFOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bayonet Fiber Optic Connector b/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bits per second CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Campus distributor CDDI® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copper Distributed Data Interface CM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common mode CP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consolidation point CPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Customer premises equipment CSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canadian Standards Association dB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Decibel DD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distribution device EF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entrance facility EIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electronic Industries Alliance ELFEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equal level far-end crosstalk EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic compatibility EMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic interference EMR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic radiation ER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment room FCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Federal Communications Commission FD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Floor distributor FDDI® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiber Distributed Data Interface ft. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feet FEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Far-end crosstalk FIPS PUB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Federal Information Processing Standard Publication FTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Foil twisted-pair Gb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gigabit per second GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gigahertz HC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal cross-connect HVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heating, ventilation and air conditioning Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hertz IC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermediate cross-connect IDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insulation displacement connection IDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Intermediate Distribution Frame IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers® ISDN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Services Digital Network ISO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . International Standards Organization JTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joint technical committee Kb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kilobit per second Km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kilometer KTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Key telephone system LAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local area network lbf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pounds force lx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lux LEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Local exchange carrier LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Light emitting diode m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meter µm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Micron; one millionth of a meter (0.000001); also micrometer

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

14.3

GLOSSARY Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

Mb/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megabits per second MC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main cross-connect MDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main distribution frame MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megahertz MHz*km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Megahertz kilometer mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Millimeter MT-RJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Transfer Registered Jack MuTOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-user Telecommunications Outlet Assembly NEC® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . National Electrical Code® NEMA® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . National Electrical Manufacturers Association® NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Near-end crosstalk NFPA® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . National Fire Protection Association® Ω . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ohm nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nanometer PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Private branch exchange PVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polyvinyl chloride RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio frequency

RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack mount space SC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Subscriber connector ScTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Screened twisted-pair SOHO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Small office home office STP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shielded twisted-pair TIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telecommunications Industry Association TO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telecommunications outlet TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transition point TP-PMD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twisted-Pair Physical Media Dependent TPDDI® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Twisted-Pair Distributed Data Interface TSB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Telecommunications System Bulletin UL® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Underwriters Laboratories Inc.® UPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uninterruptible power supply USOC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Universal Service Order Code UTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unshielded twisted-pair Vrms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Volts root mean square WA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Work area

METRIC CONVERSION CHART English-to-Metric. . . . . . . . Metric-to-English

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

DISTANCE To convert: Inches (in.)

Feet (ft.) Yards (yd.)

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Miles (mi.)

WEIGHT To convert:

Into:

Multiply by:

To convert:

Into:

Multiply by:

Millimeters (mm) Centimeters (cm) Meters (m) Centimeters (cm) Meters (m) Centimeters (cm) Meters (m) Kilometers (km)

25.4 2.54 0.0254 30.48 0.3048 91.4 0.914 1.609

Millimeters (mm)

Inches (in.) Feet (ft.)

0.039 0.003

Centimeters (cm)

Inches (in.) Feet (ft.) Feet (ft.) Yards (yd.) Miles (mi.)

0.394 0.033 3.281 1.093 0.621

Meters (m) Kilometers (km)

Into:

Multiply by:

To convert:

Into:

Multiply by:

28.35 0.028 0.454

Grams (gm)

Pounds (lb.)

Grams (gm) Kilograms (kg) Kilograms (kg)

Kilograms (kg)

Ounces (oz.) Pounds (lb.) Pounds (lb.)

0.035 0.002 2.203

FORCE To convert:

Into:

Multiply by:

To convert:

Into:

Multiply by:

Foot Pounds (lb-ft)

Newton Meters (N-m)

1.36

Newton Meters (N-m)

Foot Pounds (lb-ft)

0.738

TEMPERATURE To convert: Into:

Multiply by:

To convert:

Into:

Multiply by:

Fahrenheit (˚F)

0.56, then subtract 18

Celsius (˚C)

Fahrenheit (˚F)

1.8, then add 32

Ounces (oz.)

Celsius (˚C)

VOLUME To convert:

Into:

Multiply by:

To convert:

Into:

Multiply by:

Quarts (qt.) Gallons (gal.)

Liters (L) Liters (L)

0.946 3.785

Liters (L)

Quarts (qt.) Gallons (gal.)

1.057 0.264

Glossary

For a complete list of industry terminology, visit www.bicsi.org/Resources/Dictionary/Index.aspx Index

14.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

GLOSSARY Web Resources

WARRANTY Siemon delivers a full range of product and system warranty programs:

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products

• A one (1) year repair or replace warranty on Tools and Testers

Copper Patch Panels

• A five (5) year repair or replace warranty for all Siemon Products (cabling system connecting hardware) when not installed in a certified Siemon Cabling System®

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

• An extended Siemon Cabling System Warranty covering application assurance, product, cable, and labor for installations designed and installed by Siemon Certified InstallerSM which are registered with Siemon.

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

Please contact your local Siemon Company sales office or visit Siemon’s website for more information.

MapIT Intelligent Patching

LIMITED FIVE (5) YEAR PRODUCT WARRANTY Siemon warrants its products to be free from defects in material and workmanship. Should any product fail to conform, Siemon will, upon written notice from Distributor of such non-conforming product, within five (5) years after date of purchase, either replace it F.O.B. original point-ofdelivery, or refund the purchase price, at Siemon’s option, and shall have the right to require Distributor to return the defective product to Siemon’s plant unless such return is impracticable. The remedies provided herein shall be Buyer’s sole and exclusive remedies, and no statement or recommendation not contained herein shall

S210 Connecting Block System

have any force or effect unless in writing and signed by an authorized officer of Siemon. Siemon makes no warranty, expressed or implied, as to merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose of any product sold. In no event will Siemon be liable for any special incidental, or consequential damages, where asserted in contract, tort, or otherwise. This warranty applies only to those cabling products that are used to terminate or cross-connect telecommunications cabling. Warranty terms for other categories of cabling products (e.g., tools, test equipment, protection apparatus, etc.) may vary.

S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

14.5

INDEX Web Resources

System Overview

PRODUCT INDEX

Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories

157A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 157B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 157C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 1923-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 1923-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 1923-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 1923-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 1923-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10

700A-66-B1-25 . . . . . . . . . . 11.7

Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

10G 10GBP-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 10GBP-05-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 10GBP-07-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 10GBP-10-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 10GBP-15-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 10GBP-20-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 10GMC-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 10GMC-05-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 10GMC-07-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 10GMC-10-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 10GMC-15-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 10GMC-20-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 10GMCS-01M-(XX)L . . . . . . . 3.9 10GMCS-02M-(XX)L . . . . . . . 3.9 10GMCS-03M-(XX)L . . . . . . . 3.9 10GMCS-05M-(XX)L . . . . . . . 3.9 10GMX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 10GMX-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 10GMX-FPD06-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.12 10GMX-FPD08-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.12 10GMX-FPS02-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.12 10GMX-FPS04-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.12 10GMX-FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 10GMX-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 10GMX-KS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 10GMX-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 10GX-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 10GX-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 10GX-RWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7

C A A25B-DE-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 A25B-DE-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 A25B-DE-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 A25B-DE-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 A25B-SE-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 A25B-SE-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 A25B-SE-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 A25B-SE-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1.25

B B25A-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25A-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25A-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25A-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25B-DE-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25B-DE-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25B-DE-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25B-DE-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25B-SE-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25B-SE-15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25B-SE-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 B25B-SE-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 BC6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 BC612 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 BP5S-01M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 BP5S-02M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 BP5S-03M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 BP5S-05M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 BP6-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 BP6-05-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 BP6-07-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 BP6-10-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Index

15.0

W W W

S I E M O N

BP6-15-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 BP6-20-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

C O M

CC-2005-144 . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2005-145 . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2005-146 . . . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2014-NS-DC . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2014-NS-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2014-TB-DC . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2014-TB-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2014-TS-DC . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2014-TS-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2015-NS-DC . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2015-NS-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2015-TB-DC . . . . 11.10, 11.11 CC-2015-TB-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2015-TS-DC . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2015-TS-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2024-NS-DC . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2024-NS-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2024-TB-DC . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2024-TB-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2025-NS-DC . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2025-NS-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2025-TB-DC . . . . 11.10, 11.11 CC-2025-TB-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2025-TS-DC . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CC-2025-TS-NB . . . . . . . . . 11.11 CF-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 CF-51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 CF-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 CI-CUTTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 CI-KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 CI-KIT2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 CI-POUCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 CI-POUCH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 CI-SCISSORS . . . . . . . . . 5.9, 12.9 CJ5-W1-1000-03 . . . . . . . . . 3.13 CJ5-W1-1000-06 . . . . . . . . . 3.13 CJ5-W2-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13

CJ5-W2-1000-07 . . . . . . . . . 3.13 CJ6-W4-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13 CP-675-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 CPM-2PLUS . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 CPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CPT-DIE-EZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CPT-DIE-RG . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CPT-DIE-T4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CPT-DIE-TP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CPT-RGTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CPT-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CPT-WEB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.10 CT12-FP-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT2-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT2-HFP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CT2-HFPA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT4-BOX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 CT4-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT4-FP-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT4-FP-SS-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT4-RING-050-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.25 CT4-RING-100-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.25 CT8-BOX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 CT8-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT8-FP-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT8-FP-SS-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT8-RING-050-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.25 CT8-RING-100-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.25 CT-A-AC-AC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-A-BA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-A-BA-BA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-AC-4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-AC-AC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-A-FA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-A-LC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-A-LC-LC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-A-LCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-A-LCU-LCU-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-A-MT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-A-MT-MT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-A-RC-RC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-A-SA-SA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-A-SC-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-AUD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21

INDEX Web Resources

CT-BA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-BA-BA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-BLNK-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-C5-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 CT-C6-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 CT-DK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 CTE2-BOX-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CTE2-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CTE-45-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CTE4-BOX-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CTE4-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CTE4-FP22-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CTE-A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CT-FA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-FA-FA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-F-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-F-C5-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-F-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 CT-F-C6-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 CT-FMT-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 CT-FP-CVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 CT-FP-DKIT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CT-FP-LBL-104 . . . . . . . 1.15, 1.23 CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.9, 1.21, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15, 3.17 CT-ICON-LBL . . . . . . . . . 1.9, 1.21 CT-LC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-LC-LC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-LCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-LCU-LCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-MFP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 CT-MFP-AO3-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.24 CT-MFP-HMA-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.24 CT-MFP-HME-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.24 CT-MFP-KNL-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.24 CT-MMO-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29 CT-MMO-MAG . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29 CT-MT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-MT-MT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 CT-PNL-16-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 CT-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 CT-PNL-24-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 CT-PNL-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 CT-PNL-32-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 CT-PNL-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11

CT-PNL-48-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 CT-PNL-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 CT-PNL-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 CT-PNL-96-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.12 CT-RA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-RA-RA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-RC-RC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-RFP-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.27 CT-SA-4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-SA-SA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-SC-4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-SC-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 CT-SFP-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 CT-SFP-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 CT-U3-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-U3-U3-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-U3-U4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-U4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-U4-U3-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-U4-U4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19 CT-VA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CT-VH-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 CWD-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13

D D10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13 D13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13 DB09F-MJ8K . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 DB09M-MJ8K . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 DB25F-MJ8K . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 DB25M-MJ8K . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 DP-S-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 DR-D-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 DRE-D-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 DR-S-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14

F FC1-LC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . 5.6, 7.7 FC1-LC-SM-B02 . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 FC1-LC-SM-J02 . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 FC1-SA-MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SA-MM-80 . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SA-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . . 5.7

FC1-SA-MM-J01 . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SA-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SA-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SA-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SA-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SC-MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SC-MM-80 . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SC-MM-J01 . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SC-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SC-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC1-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC2-LC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 FC2-LC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 FC2-MT5MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 FC2-MT6MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 FC2-SC-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC2-SC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC2-SC-MM-J . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC2-SC-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FC2-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 FCP3-DWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 FCP3-RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.9 FE12-(X)MM(X)-(XXX) . . . . . . 4.13 FE6-(X)MM(X)-(XXX) . . . . . . . 4.13 FJ2-LCLC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-LCLC5L-(XX)AQ . . . . . . . . 5.3 FJ2-LCSA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-LCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-LCSC5L-(XX)AQ . . . . . . . . 5.3 FJ2-LCULCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-LCULCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.3 FJ2-LCUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-LCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-LCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . . 5.3 FJ2R-MTMT(X)MM-(XX) . . . . 5.4 FJ2R-MTSA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . 5.4 FJ2R-MTSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . 5.4 FJ2-SASA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-SASC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-SAUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-SAUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-SCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-SCSC5L-(XX)AQ . . . . . . . . 5.3 FJ2-SCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FJ2-SCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . . 5.3 FMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29

FOB2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB2-GRD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB-BZL-BL-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB-BZL-LC-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB-BZL-LC1-01 . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB-BZL-LCU-01 . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB-BZL-LCU1-01 . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB-BZL-MT-01 . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB-BZL-MT1-01 . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB-BZL-SA-01 . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FOB-BZL-SC-01 . . . . . . . . . . 1.31 FP12-LC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . 4.13 FP12-SC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . 4.13 FP1B-LC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FP1B-LC5L-01AQ . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 FP1B-LCU-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FP1B-LCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 FP1B-SA(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FP1B-SAU-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FP1B-SC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FP1B-SC5L-01AQ . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 FP1B-SCU-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 FP1B-SCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 FP24-LC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . 4.13 FP6-SA(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 FP6-SC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 FR12-(X)MM(X)-(XXX) . . . . . . 4.13 FR6-(X)MM(X)-(XXX) . . . . . . . 4.13 FS-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 FS-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 FSC3-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 FT-ADH-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-ALPAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-BSTRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-CKIT-L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-CRIMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FTERM-L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 FTERM-LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 FTERM-MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 FTERM-XLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 FT-FF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-JSTRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-LC2PUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 FT-MS400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-MSLC2HEAD . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 FT-PAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-PF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-PF12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

15.1

INDEX Web Resources

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels

FT-PF3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-PF6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-PRBOT-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-PUCK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-SCRIBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-SYRMTIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-TMPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 FT-VFL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8 FT-WIPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9

Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

H H50M-12MJ4 . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 H50M-12MJ4-ETH . . . . . . . . 1.35 H50M-6MJ8 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 H50M-6MJ8-ATT . . . . . . . . . 1.35 H50M-6MJ8-TIA . . . . . . . . . 1.35 H50M-8MJ6 . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 HC-EZ-(X)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 HC-RI-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 HD5-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 HD5-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 HD5-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 HD5-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 HD5-89D-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 HD5-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 HD5-ICON6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HD5-ICON6-LBL . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HD5-ICON8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HD5-ICON8-LBL . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HD5-LBL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HD5-LBL-480 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HD5-LBL6-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HD5-LBL-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HD5-QP-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HD5-RWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 HD5-S-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 HD6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 HD6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 HD6-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 HD6-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 HD6-89D-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 HD6-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 HD-RWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 HT-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 HT-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10

I IC5-8A-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-10-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-20-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-30-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-40-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-50-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8A-60-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-10-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-20-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-30-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-40-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-50-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC5-8T-60-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . 3.10 IC6-8A-10-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-10-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-20-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-20-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-30-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-30-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-40-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-40-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-50-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-50-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-60-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8A-60-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-10-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-10-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-20-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-20-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-30-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-30-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-40-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-40-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-50-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7

Index

15.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

IC6-8T-50-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-60-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 IC6-8T-60-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 ICON-OVAL-(XX) . . . . . 3.15, 3.17

J J2-LCLC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-LCLCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-LCMT(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-LCSA(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-LCSAP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-LCSC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-LCSCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-MTMT(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-MTSA(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-MTSC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-SASA(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-SASAP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-SASC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-SASCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-SCSC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 J2-SCSCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5

M M-A-1U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 M-A-6U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 M-A-IDC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 M-A-PCB-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 MC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 MC425 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 MC425LH-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13 MC4-LBL-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13 MC4LH-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13 MC4LH-HP-9 . . . . . . . . . . . 11.13 MC5-8-T-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8T-03-B(XX)C . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8-T-05-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8T-05-B(XX)C . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8-T-07-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8T-07-B(XX)C . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8-T-10-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8T-10-B(XX)C . . . . . . . . 3.10

MC5-8-T-15-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8T-15-B(XX)C . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8-T-20-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5-8T-20-B(XX)C . . . . . . . . 3.10 MC5S-01M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 MC5S-02M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 MC5S-03M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 MC5S-05M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 MC5-S-8-005 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 MC6-8-T-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8T-03-B01IP . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8-T-05-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8T-05-B01IP . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8-T-07-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8T-07-B01IP . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8-T-10-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8T-10-B01IP . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8-T-15-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8T-15-B01IP . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8-T-20-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC6-8T-20-B01IP . . . . . . . . . . 3.7 MC-8-005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 MC-BOOT-(XX)-100 . . . . . . . 3.10 M-EC-6U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 MFB-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 MFB-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 MFB-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.24 MFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 MFSCT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 MH-25-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 MH-50-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.12 M-HD6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 M-HD6-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 M-J2-LCLC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 8.7 M-J2-LCSC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 8.7 M-J2-LCULCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . . 8.7 M-J2-LCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . 8.7 M-J2-MTLC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . 8.7 M-J2-MTSC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . 8.7 M-J2-SCSC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 8.7 M-J2-SCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . 8.7 M-LA-1U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 M-LA-6U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 M-LINK-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 M-MA-IDC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 M-MA-PCB-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 M-MC6-(XX)-04 . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 M-MC6-(XX)-06 . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5

INDEX Web Resources

M-MINI-1U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 MODAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 M-RIC-LC192-01 . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 M-RIC-SC96-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 M-SA-1U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 M-SA-6U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 MT-5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 MX3-F-U3-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 MX3-F-U4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 MX3-U3-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 MX3-U4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 MX-45-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-45-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 MX5-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 MX5-FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 MX5-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 MX5-KS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 MX5-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 MX6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 MX6-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 MX6-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 MX-89D-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 MX-A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-AD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-BFP-S-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-BFP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-BFP-S-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-BFP-S-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-BFP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-BL-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 MX-D1-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-D2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-D4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-D4F-15-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 MX-D4F-15E-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 MX-D6F-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-E2A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-E2F-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-E4A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-E4F-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-F1-LC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-F1-LCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-FA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 MX-F-BA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 MX-F-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 MX-FD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8

MX-F-FA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 MX-F-MT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-FP-CVR-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.15 MX-FP-D-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-D-06-SS . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-D-06-SS-L . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-D-08-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-D-08-SS . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-D-08-SS-L . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-D-12-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-D-12-SS . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-D-12-SS-L . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-01-SS . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-01-SS-L . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-02-SS . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-02-SS-L . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-03-SS . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-03-SS-L . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-04-SS . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-04-SS-L . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-06-SS . . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-FP-S-06-SS-L . . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-F-RC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 MX-F-S2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-F-SA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-F-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-F-U3-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-F-U4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-F-VH-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 MX-HFP-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-HFP-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-HFP-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-HFP-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-K-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7 MX-MFP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15 MX-MFP-AO3-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.15 MX-MFP-HMA-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.15 MX-MFP-HME-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.15 MX-MFP-KNL-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.15 MX-MMO-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.29 MX-MT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 MX-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9

PG-MX6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 PH-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 PK-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PK-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PM-007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PM-027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PM-068 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PM-140 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PM-180 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PM-230 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PNL-BLNK-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 PNL-BLNK-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 PNL-BLNK-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 PP12-LC5LMM-01 . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP12-LC5MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP12-LC6MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP12-SC5LMM-01 . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP12-SC5MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP12-SC6MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP24-LC5LMM-01 . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP24-LC5MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP24-LC6MM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP6-SA5LMM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP6-SA5MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP6-SA6MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP6-SC5LMM-01 . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP6-SC5MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PP6-SC6MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . 4.13 PROBE-PIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.9 PS-8-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 PT-908 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 PT-908-D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 PT-DIE-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 PT-DIE-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11

MX-PNL-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 MX-PNL-48-A . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 MX-PNL-72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 MX-PNL-72-A . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 MX-PNL-LBL4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 MX-PNL-LBL6 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.9 MX-RC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 MX-RFP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.26 MX-S2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-SA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-SFP-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.15 MX-SM-BLNK-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.33 MX-SM1-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33 MX-SM2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33 MX-SM4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33 MX-SM6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.33 MX-SMB-MM-(XX) . . . . . . . 1.33 MX-SMB-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 1.33 MX-TFP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1.13 MX-U3-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-U4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 MX-WP-K5-SS . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-WP-K6-SS . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-WP-U3-SS . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 MX-WP-U4-SS . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14

P P1B-LC(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 P1B-LCP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 P1B-SA(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 P1B-SAP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 P1B-SC(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 P1B-SCP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 P2B-MT(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5 P-6-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 P-6-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 P-8-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 P-8-8SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 PCBSS-16-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 PCBSS-24-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.8 PG-06 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PG-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17 PG-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.17

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection

Q QP25M-AA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.12

Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

RG6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 RG-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 RG-T-DIE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.11 RHNG-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

15.3

INDEX Web Resources

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters

RHNG-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.10 RIC3-24-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 RIC3-36-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 RIC3-48-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 RIC3-72-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3 RIC-F-AC6-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-AC8-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-BLNK-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-FC6-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-FC8-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-LC12-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-LC16-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-LC24-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-LCU12-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-LCU16-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-LCU24-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-MT12-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-MT16-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-MT24-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-SA12-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-SA6-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-SA8-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-SC12-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-SC6-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RIC-F-SC8-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 RS-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 RS-07E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 RS3-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 RS3-RWM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 RS3-RWM-2DS . . . . . . . . . . . 6.3 RS-CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 RS-CNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 RS-CNL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7 RS-CNL-MGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 RS-P04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 RS-RWM-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 RS-RWM-2DS . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.5 RS-TRAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 RS-VCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 RWM-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 RWM-1DS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9

Standards Update

S Glossary

S100A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.9, 10.14 S100A2-01 . . . . . . . . . 9.9, 10.14

S110A1RMS . . . . . . . . 9.8, 10.14 S110A1RMS-01 . . . . . 9.8, 10.14 S110A2RMS . . . . . . . . 9.8, 10.14 S110A2RMS-01 . . . . . 9.8, 10.14 S110AA-100CB-(X) . . . . . . . 10.10 S110AA-100CBM-(X) . . . . . 10.10 S110AA-100CT-(X) . . . . . . . 10.10 S110AA-100CTM-(X) . . . . . 10.10 S110AA1-50FT . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110AA2-100FT . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110AA2-300FT . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110AA-300CB-(X) . . . . . . . 10.10 S110AA-300CBM-(X) . . . . . 10.10 S110AA-300CT-(X) . . . . . . . 10.10 S110AA-300CTM-(X) . . . . . 10.10 S110AB-100CB-(X) . . . . . . . 10.10 S110AB-100CBM-(X) . . . . . 10.10 S110AB-100CT-(X) . . . . . . . 10.10 S110AB-100CTM-(X) . . . . . 10.10 S110AB1-50FT . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110AB2-100FT . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110AB2-300FT . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110AB-300CB-(X) . . . . . . . 10.10 S110AB-300CBM-(X) . . . . . 10.10 S110AB-300CT-(X) . . . . . . . 10.10 S110AB-300CTM-(X) . . . . . 10.10 S110AB5-100JP . . . . . . . . . 10.13 S110AB5-200JP . . . . . . . . . 10.13 S110AB5-300JP . . . . . . . . . 10.13 S110AB5-50JP . . . . . . . . . . 10.13 S110AW1-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110AW2-100 . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110AW2-200 . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110AW2-300 . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110B1RMS . . . . . . . . 9.8, 10.14 S110B1RMS-01 . . . . . . 9.8, 10.14 S110B2RMS . . . . . . . . 9.8, 10.14 S110B2RMS-01 . . . . . . 9.8, 10.14 S110C-2A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110C-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110C-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110C-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110-CVR-100-(XX) . . . 9.9, 10.14 S110-CVR-50-(XX) . . . . 9.9, 10.14 S110DA1-100RCT . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DA1-100RFT . . . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DA1-200RCT . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DA1-200RFT . . . . . . . . . 10.7

Index

15.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S110DA1-300RCT . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DA1-300RFT . . . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DA1-50FT-89 . . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DA2-100RWM . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DA2-200RWM . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DAT-100RCT . . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DAT-200RCT . . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DAT-300RCT . . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DB1-100RCT . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DB1-100RFT . . . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DB1-200RCT . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DB1-200RFT . . . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DB1-300RCT . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DB1-300RFT . . . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DB1-50FT-89 . . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DB2-100RWM . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DB2-200RWM . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DB5-24RJP . . . . . . . . . 10.13 S110DB5-50JP89 . . . . . . . . 10.13 S110DBT-100RCT . . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DBT-200RCT . . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DBT-300RCT . . . . . . . . 10.11 S110DW1-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110DW1-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110DW1-50-89 . . . . . . . . . 10.7 S110DW2-100 . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3 S110-HLDR . . . . . . . . . 9.3, 10.15 S110-LBL-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . 10.15 S110MA2-300FT . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110MA2-400FT . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110MA2-500FT . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110MB2-300FT . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110MB2-400FT . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110MB2-500FT . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110MB5-300JP . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110MB5-400JP . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110MB5-500JP . . . . . . . . . 10.5 S110M-WM-300 . . . . . . 9.5, 10.5 S110M-WM-400 . . . . . . 9.5, 10.5 S110M-WM-500 . . . . . . 9.5, 10.5 S110P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P1-P1-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P1-U1-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P1-U4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P2-E2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P2-P2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P2-UT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.17

S110P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P4-A4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P4-P4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110P4-T4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.17 S110-RWM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 S110-RWM-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 S110-RWM2-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 S110-RWM2-02 . . . . . . . . . . . 6.9 S110-SHT-(X) . . . . . . . . 9.3, 10.15 S110-TC-1P-03 . . . . . . . . . . 10.15 S110-TC-2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.21 S143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 S144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 S145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 S146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 S147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.13 S188-300 . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5, 10.5 S188-400 . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5, 10.5 S188-500 . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5, 10.5 S188-GND . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5, 10.5 S188-WD . . . . . . . . . . . 9.5, 10.5 S20A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 S20B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 S20C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 S210AB2-128FT . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 S210AB2-192FT . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 S210AB2-64FT . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 S210C-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 S210DB1-32FT-89 . . . . . . . . . 9.7 S210DB1-48FT-89 . . . . . . . . . 9.7 S210DB2-128RFT . . . . . . . . . . 9.7 S210DB2-128RWM . . . . . . . . 9.7 S210DB2-192RFT . . . . . . . . . . 9.7 S210DB2-64RFT . . . . . . . . . . . 9.7 S210DB2-64RWM . . . . . . . . . 9.7 S210-LBL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.3 S210MB2-192FT . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 S210MB2-256FT . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 S210MB2-320FT . . . . . . . . . . 9.5 S210P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 S210P1-P1-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 S210P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 S210P2E2-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . 3.15 S210P2-P2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 S210P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15 S210P4A4-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . 3.15 S210P4-P4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 3.15

INDEX Web Resources

S210P4T4-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . 3.15 S606P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 S66B1-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 S66B1-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 S66B3-100MH-49 . . . . . . . 11.12 S66B3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 S66B3-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 S66B3-50MH-49 . . . . . . . . 11.12 S66B3-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 S66B3-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 S66B4-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 S66B4-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 S66B4-25MH-49 . . . . . . . . 11.12 S66B4-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.8 S66B4-50MH-49 . . . . . . . . 11.12 S66E3-25-49 . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 S66M1-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 S66M1-100MH-49 . . . . . . . 11.12 S66M1-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 S66M1-25MH-49 . . . . . . . . 11.12 S66M1-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 S66M1-50-3T25 . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 S66M1-50MH-49 . . . . . . . . 11.12 S66M1-50R . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.7 S66M2-3W . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 S66M2-5T-124LR . . . . . . . . . 11.5 S66M2-5T-124LR-125R . . . . 11.5 S66M2-5T-128LR . . . . . . . . . 11.5 S66M2-5T-68L . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 S66M2-5T-68L-125R . . . . . . 11.5 S66M2-5T-84L . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 S66M2-5T-84L-125R . . . . . . 11.5 S66M2-5T-86L . . . . . . . . . . . 11.5 S66M2-5T-86L-125R . . . . . . 11.5 S66M2-5W . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 S66M4-12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 S66M4-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 S66M425-128LR . . . . . . . . . 11.7 S66M425-2T2-8 . . . . . . . . . . 11.6 S66M4-2W . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 S66M4-4W . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4 S66M4-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 S66M6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 S66M6-36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 S66M6-75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 S700A110-B1-50 . . . . . . . . 10.11 S788J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S788J4-210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7

S788J4B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S788J4B-210 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S788J4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S788J4H-210 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S788J5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S788J5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S788J5H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S814 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S81401-110-88 . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S81401-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S814-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S814-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.7 S-857-916 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 S89B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 S89D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 S89E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 S89F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 SA1-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 SA1-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 SA1-SS-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 SA1-SS-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 SA2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 SA2-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 SA3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 SB6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 SB8-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.9 SBH-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 SBH-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 SBH-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 SBH-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 SCREW-1224 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 SF-035 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 SH-D19-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 SH-S19-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 SH-S19V-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 SMAK-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 SMAK-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 SMAK-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 SMAK-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 SMBC-2-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 SOB-CC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10 SP5-C5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.35 SPB-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 SPB-V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 SPB-V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 SPB-V4-ATT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.13 SR-1-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25 SR-2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.25

TM-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 TM-PNL-16-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 TM-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 TM-PNL-24-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 TP-4P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.18 TPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.14 TRAY-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 TRAY-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 TRAY-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 TRAY-B-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 TRAY-M-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 TRAY-M-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 TRAY-M-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 TRAY-R-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.10 TW-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9, 1.21

STM-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 STM8-R3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 STM8-RA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 STM8-RA-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 STM-8-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3 SWIC3-A-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 SWIC3-C-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 SWIC3G-AA-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 SWIC3G-AC-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 SWIC3G-CA-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 SWIC3G-CC-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 SWIC3-M-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5

T T1-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 T1U1-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . 3.3 T1VC-(XX)M-B01L . . . . . . . . . 3.3 T2E2-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . 3.3 T2UT-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . 3.3 T4-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . 3.3 T4A-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . 3.3 T4T-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . 3.3 T7F-01-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 T7P4-B(XX)-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 TAB-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9, 1.21, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.15, 3.17 TAP-110-A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TAP-110-T4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TAP-110-U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TAP-110-U3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TAP-110-U4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TAP-110-UT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TAP-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 TAP-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 TAP-50F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 TAP-50M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 TAP-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 TAP-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.15 TESTAR-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TESTAR-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TESTAR-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TESTAR-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TESTAR-8A-C5 . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TESTAR-8R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TESTAR-8T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5 TESTAR-8T-C5 . . . . . . . . . . . 12.5

System Overview Copper and Fiber Work Area Products Copper Patch Panels Copper Cable Assemblies, Plugs and Cable Fiber Enclosures and Splicing Accessories Fiber Cable Assemblies, Connectors and Kits

U UP-2468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11 US-126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11 US-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.11

Racks, Enclosures and Cable Management Industrial Products

V VCM-250-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . 6.13 VCM-250-12-(XX) . . . . . . . . 6.13 VCM-250-18-(XX) . . . . . . . . 6.13 VCM-25-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 6.13 VCM-25-12-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 6.13 VCM-25-18-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 6.13 VPC-6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.7

W WM-143-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 WM-144-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 WM-145-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.8 WM-3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 WM-6A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 WM-BK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.12 WPJP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

15.5

INDEX Web Resources

X X5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 X5S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 X5SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 X6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 X6S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 XC5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 XC5-(XX)-B05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 XC5S-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 XC5S-(XX)-B05 . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 XC5SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 XC5SM-(XX)-B05 . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 XC6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 XC6-(XX)-B05 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 X-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4, 7.7 XFP-D-04-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 XFP-S-01-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 XFP-S-02-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 X-IBOX-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 X-IBOX-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 X-IBOX-03 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5 X-IBOX-04 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.5

XL35-10800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL35-10800-W . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL35-5400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL35-5400-W . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-3600-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-7200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-7200-W . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-A-3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-A-5400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-B-3600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-B-5400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-CK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XLC-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 XL-K23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XL-K35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.9 XM-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 XP85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 XP85S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 XP85SM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 XP-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4 XPLC2-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.7 XPM-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4, 7.7

MapIT Intelligent Patching S210 Connecting Block System S110 Connecting Block System S66 Connecting Block System and Protection Tools, Testers and Test Adapters Standards Update

Glossary

Index

15.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

YA4-4U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 YA4-A3-U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 YA4-U2-U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 Y-BRIDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 YT4-4U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 YT4-E2-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 YT4-E2-U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 YT4-U2-U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 YU4-U2-U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34

ZU-MX-24-0515 . . . . . . . . . . 6.11 ZU-MX-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.11

WORLDWIDE LOCATIONS The Americas Siemon – USA

Siemon CALA– Latin America

Siemon – Andean Region

101 Siemon Company Drive Watertown, CT 06795-0400 USA Tel: (1) 866 474 1197 Customer Service Direct: Tel: (1) 866 548 5814 Fax: (1) 860 945 4225 info@siemon.com

2121 Ponce de Leon Blvd. Suite 1130 Coral Gables, Florida Tel: (1) 305 446 9150 Fax: (1) 305 446 4586 info_latinamerica@siemon.com

Calle.77 No. 11-19, Oficina 601 Bogota, Colombia Tel: (571) 317 2121 Fax: (571) 313 3617 info_andino@siemon.com

Siemon – Canada

Siemon – Brasil

Siemon – Mexico

71 Rossland Road East, Suite 357 Whitby, Ontario L1N 9K3 Tel: (1) 888 425 6165 Fax: (1) 860 945 8503 info_canada@siemon.com

Av. Dr. Chucri Zaidan, 920 - 9º Andar - Sala 9 - Morumbi Edifício Market Place - Torre I 04583-904 São Paulo/SP, Brasil Tel: (55) 11 3048 4094 Fax: (55) 11 3048 4099 info_brasil@siemon.com

Blvd. Manual Avila Camacho No. 36 Piso 10 Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico, D.F., 11000 Mexico Tel: (52) 55 91 71 16 24 Fax: (52) 55 52 84 22 23 info_mexico@siemon.com

Europe, Middle East, and Africa Siemon – UK

Siemon – Germany

36-48 Windsor Street Chertsey, Surrey KT16 8AX Tel: (44) (0) 1932 571771 Fax: (44) (0) 1932 575070 info_uk@siemon.com

Mainzer Landstrasse 16 60325 Frankfurt Germany Tel: (49) (0) 69 97168 184 Fax: (49) (0) 69 97168 304 info_deutsch@siemon.com

Siemon – France

Siemon – Italy

Paris Axe France ZAC Paris Rive Gauche 118-122 Avenue de France 75013 Paris, France Tel: (33) 1 46 46 11 85 Fax: (33) 1 46 46 10 00 info_france@siemon.com

Via Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano Italy Tel: (39) 02 64 672 209 Fax: (39) 02 64 672 400 info_italia@siemon.com

Japan

Asia Pacific Siemon – Australia (Sydney)

Siemon – Australia (Melbourne)

Unit 9/252 Allambie Road Allambie Heights NSW 2100 Sydney, Australia Tel: (61) 2 8977 7500 Fax: (61) 2 8977 7501 info_asiapacific@siemon.com

Unit 6 109 Whitehorse Road Blackburn Vic 3130 Melbourne, Australia Tel: (61) 3 9894 4111 Fax: (61) 3 9894 3446 info_asiapacific@siemon.com

Siemon – Australia (Brisbane)

Siemon – China (Shanghai)

Level 1 360 St. Pauls Terrace Fortitude Valley QLD 4006 Brisbane, Australia Tel: (61) 07 3854 1200 Fax: (61) 07 3854 1077 info_asiapacific@siemon.com

Rm. 3407 - 3408, Hong Kong Square S. No. 283, Huai Hai Road Shanghai, 200021, P.R. China Tel: (86) 21 6390 6778 Fax: (86) 21 6384 0167 info_china@siemon.com

Siemon – Southeast Asia

46 East Coast Road #07-01/02 East Gate Singapore 428766 Tel: (65) 6345 9119 Fax: (65) 6345 1120 info_singapore@siemon.com

Siemon – China (Beijing)

Suite 1108 SCITECH Tower 22 Jianguomenwai Avenue Beijing 100004, P.R. China Tel: (86) 10 6559 8860 Fax: (86) 10 6559 8867 info_china@siemon.com

Siemon – China (Guangzhou)

Rm. 1104, Middle Tower, Times Square 28 Tianhebei Road Guangzhou, 510620, P.R. China Tel: (86) 20 3882 0055 Fax: (86) 20 3882 0575 info_china@siemon.com

Siemon – China (Chengdu)

Rm. 1209-1210 Western China Business Tower No. 19,4 Section, Renminan Road Chengdu, Sichuan 610041, P.R. China Tel: (86) 28 6680 1100 Fax: (86) 28 6680 1096

Siemon — Japan

3F 32Mori Bldg. 3-4-30 Shiba koen, Minato-ku, Tokyo 105-0011 Japan Tel: 03-5405-7650 Fax: 03-5405-3619 info_japan@siemon.com

ÂŠ2004, 2005 Siemon

Bound Printed Matter Bulk Rate U.S. Postage

101 Siemon Company Drive Watertown, CT 06795-0400 USA CHANGE SERVICE REQUESTED

PAID Siemon

M I N I - C A T Á L O G O

S O L U Ç Õ E S D E C A B E A M E N T O E M C O B R E / F I B R A

VOL. 2-PORT

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CEM ANOS ANOS DE DE INOVAÇÃO INOVAÇÃO TECNOLÓGICA TECNOLÓGICA CEM A Tecnologia é o Núcleo de Todo Negócio A chegada do Século XXI trouxe uma forte dependência da informação. Seja vídeo digital, transferência de dados em altas velocidades, telefonia por Internet ou algumas outras aplicações de alta largura de banda uma coisa é certa: esta informação tornou-se o núcleo de nossos negócios e nossas vidas. Como esta demanda continua crescendo, a infra-estrutura pela qual esta informação flui está sendo solicitada além de sua capacidade. Aplicações de altos requisitos de largura de banda requerem uma rede construída para suportar seus rigores (destas aplicações) transmitidos por ela; uma rede capaz não apenas de lidar com o tráfego, mas também oferecer um ambiente capaz de atender a demandas crescentes. Assim, não importa em que negócio você esteja, sua infra-estrutura de tecnologia da informação (TI) formará, se isso ainda não aconteceu, a real fundação de seu negócio.

O Legado da SIEMON Fundada em 1903, a The Siemon Company completa cem anos de experiência no desenvolvimento de soluções inovadoras para atender às necessidades de seus clientes. Celebrando nosso centésimo ano em 2003, nós continuamos na liderança da tecnologia. O que começou a muitos anos atrás como uma experiência no novo campo de desenvolvimento de plástico moldado tornou-se hoje uma potência mundial na área de infra-estrutura de cabeamento para redes. Ao longo do caminho, a Siemon se tornou um modelo de sucesso do Século XXI, uma verdadeira fonte de idéias, ideologias e inovações. Por tudo isso, as principais competências da Siemon em manufatura, engenharia e qualidade amadureceram e cresceram. Aquele fóco em tecnologia e inovação nos levou a muitos “primeiros” da indústria: • Primeiro a entregar um sistema de cabeamento Categoria 5e quatro anos antes do padrão ser formalizado • Primeiro sistema de cabeamento Categoria 6/Classe E do mercado • Primeiro sistema Categoria 7/Classe F do mundo e ainda o único • Conectividade industrial aprovada pelas normas aplicáveis • Métodos de terminação óptica rápidos, patenteados

O Ritmo Crescente da Tecnologia Agora que entramos em nosso segundo século de operação , as necessidades do mercado nunca foram tão diversas. Aplicações emergentes de altos requisitos de largura de banda, como voz sobre IP (VoIP) e áudio e vídeo digitais, assim como a convergência destas aplicações a um único backbone de rede estão se tornando realidade. De forma crescente os negócios estão investindo em tecnologia da informação para impactar positivamente em seus resultados financeiros. O aumento das vendas diminui os custos operacionais, a melhoria da qualidade dos produtos, bem como do índice de satisifação dos clientes são objetivos universais dos negócios e hoje há uma expectativa de que os sistemas de TI sejam capazes de viabilizar tudo isso e muito mais. Agora, mais do que nunca, o informação desempenha um papel vital. O uso e disponibilidade da informação com sucesso em nossos negócios quer seja em uma única localidade ou através do globo é uma necessidade absoluta.

Especialistas em Cabeamento Com o Siemon Cabling System, a Siemon pode entregar os produtos e serviços que você precisa para projetar e construir uma infra-estrutura de TI capaz de atender às necessidades estratégicas atuais e futuras de seu negócio. A herança da Siemon é oferecer sistemas de cabeamento de melhor desempenho e com o mais alto nível de qualidade disponível. Nós somos especialistas no que fazemos e o fazemos melhor que qualquer outro. A Siemon oferece a mais completa linha de produtos da indústria de hoje. Temos os componentes de cabeamento Categoria 6 independentemente verificados que garantem um desempenho muito além dos limites estabelecidos pelos padrões da indústria, sistemas de cabeamento Categoria 5e de alto desempenho, soluções avançadas de fibras ópticas. Tudo isso com capacidade de atender às aplicações de hoje e de amanhã combinados com as melhores garantias da indústria e serviços de suporte a Siemon constrói uma solução para qualquer empreendimento, aplicação ou necessidade.

Investir no Futuro…Agora A Tecnologia da Informação está presente em cada aspecto de seu negócio. Se você quer protegê-lo amanhã, um sistema de cabeamento estruturado sólido, construído para lidar com aplicações futuras é a sua melhor política de segurança. Aqui na Siemon estamos prontos para servir as suas necessidades de infra-estrutura para tecnologia da informação. Com escritórios e distribuidores em cada principal mercado em várias localidades do mundo, a Siemon é uma operação global que tem como compromisso entregar a mais alta qualidade e o mais alto valor em soluções de cabeamento no mercado hoje.

GUIA DE REFERÊNCIA Padrões de Desempenho Atende aos requisitos da ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 & B.2 para Categoria 3 e Classe C da ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição. Estes requisitos são especificados para uma freqüência máxima de 16 MHz. Atende aos requisitos da ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 & B.2 para Categoria 5e e Classe D da ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição. Estes requisitos são especificados para uma freqüência máxima de 100 MHz. Esta classificação excede os requisitos da antiga Categoria 5. Atende aos requisitos da ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 para Categoria 6 e Classe F da ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição. Estes requisitos são especificados para uma freqüência máxima de 250 MHz. Esta classificação excede os requisitos da Categoria 5e. Excede as especificações de desempenho da ANSI/TIA/EIA568-B.2-1 para Categoria 6 e ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição. Estes requisitos são especificados para uma freqüência máxima de 300 MHz. Esta classificação excede os requisitos da Categoria 5e.

ÍNDICE

CABEAMENTO RESIDENCIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

PRODUTOS

PARA

ÁREA

APLICAÇÃO INDUSTRIAL . . . . . . . . . 3

FIBRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

DE TRABALHO

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29

PRODUTOS BLINDADOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33

PRODUTOS MODULARES

(MODULAR PATCHING)

. . . 34-37

Excede as especificações de desempenho do Draft da Categoria 7 e Classe F da ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição. Estes requisitos são especificados para uma freqüência máxima de 600 MHz. Esta classificação excede os requisitos da Categoria 6.

RACKS

Um produto elétrico, mecânico ou eletromecânico que traz a marca “ETL Verified” prova que ele foi testado e atende aos requisitos mínimos de um determinado padrão de mercado.

CORDÕES DE MANOBRA (PATCH CORDS), PLUGUES E CABOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-43

Padrões de Segurança Acessórios de Circuitos de Comunicações Listados conforme o Padrão UL 1863 do Underwriters Laboratories, ou Protetores Secundários para Circuitos de Comunicações Listados conforme Padrão UL 497A do Underwriters Laboratories, ou canaletas de superfície e demais acessórios não-metálicos Listados conforme UL 5A.

GERENCIADORES

PRODUTOS S210

CABOS . . . . . . . 38-39

S110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-45

PRODUTOS S66

FERRAMENTAS

EQUIPAMENTOS

PROTEÇÃO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46-47

Certificação pelo Underwriters Laboratories para os Padrões Americanos e Certificação C22.2 — Padrões de Telecomunicações Canadenses. Certificação pela Canadian Standards Association para C22.2 — Padrões de Telecomunicações Canadenses.

DE TESTE.

. . . 48-49

Compatibilidade Eletromagnética de acordo com o Artigo 10 da Diretriz 89/336/EEC do Conselho Europeu.

Informações para Pedidos

Pacotes de projeto a granel é a forma mais econômica e ambientalmente segura de adquirir produtos para grandes projetos. Um menor volume de empacotamento significa menos pacotes a abrir e menos sobras para limpar, o que economiza tempo e dinheiro. Produtos em pac

CABOS

COBRE

FIBRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-63

GARANTIA SIEMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Por estarmos continuamente melhorando nossos produtos, a The Siemon Company reserva-se ao direito de mudar as especificações, bem como disponibilidades sem notificação prévia. Para outras opções de produto, entre em contato com o Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente Siemon.

ISO 9001 e 14001

CABEAMENTO RESIDENCIAL A The Siemon Company tem o prazer de oferecer uma linha completa de produtos de cabeamento adaptados especificamente para o mercado residencial. Escolha uma opção entre uma variedade de produtos de Cabeamento Residencial Siemon de alta qualidade para atender às necessidades de voz, vídeo e dados dos exigentes proprietários residenciais atuais. Uma pequena amostra destes produtos é apresentada aqui. Solicite nosso Catálogo de Cabeamento Residencial para obter uma lista completa de nossos produtos residenciais.

FERRAMENTAS, EQUIPAMENTOS DE TESTE E TREINAMENTO A instalação adequada de um sistema de cabeamento residencial é tão importante quanto a qualidade dos produtos selecionados. Para garantir uma instalação adequada de nossos sistemas de cabeamento, a Siemon oferece uma linha completa de ferramentas e equipamentos de teste. Selecione um de nossos Instaladores Residenciais Certificados (Certified Residential InstallerSM) para projetar e instalar um sistema em sua residência, independente do seu tamanho.

TOMADAS MULTIMÍDIA A Siemon tem uma grande variedade de tomadas para cabeamento em cobre, fibra, vídeo e áudio, que oferecem desempenho e qualidade destacados, bem como uma aparência estética agradável, complementando qualquer decoração.

CABOS E CORDÕES DE MANOBRA (PATCH CORDS)

CABEAMENTO RESIDENCIAL

Os cabos e cordões de manobra (patch cords) de alto desempenho da Siemon garantem a integridade do Sistema de Cabeamento Residencial Siemon (Siemon Home Cabling SystemSM) de ponta a ponta. Especifique estes produtos para obter o máximo em qualidade, desempenho e confiabilidade para a sua rede residencial.

CENTRAIS DE DISTRIBUIÇÃO Os gabinetes de distribuição Command Center® podem ser configurados para distribuir qualquer combinação de serviços multimídia para a residência. Eles vêm em três tamanhos diferentes a fim de acomodar pequenas, médias e grandes instalações. Várias aplicações podem ser facilmente configuradas por meio de nossa linha de painéis de voz, dados, vídeo e áudio, que podem ser facilmente embutidos nos gabinetes Command Center. 2

THE SIEMON COMPANY CATÁLOGO DE CABEAMENTO RESIDENCIAL Para obter uma lista completa de todos os produtos de Cabeamento Residencial da Siemon, entre em contato com o escritório local da Siemon e obtenha uma cópia de nosso Catálogo de Cabeamento Residencial. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS DE APLICAÇÃO INDUSTRIAL

INDUSTRIAL MAX® - SOLUÇÃO INDUSTRIAL Nossos produtos tradicionais de conectividade vêm, há anos, oferecendo confiabilidade de serviço nos ambientes típicos de escritórios. Entretanto, quando expostos a condições extremas tais como excesso de poeira, variações de temperatura, umidade, interferência eletromagnética ou vibração por períodos prolongados de tempo, o desempenho destes conectores, bem como sua confiabilidade irão sofrer. Em ambientes hostís, conectores típicos podem ter seus contatos corroídos, partidos ou cheios de sujeira e, eventualmente falhar. Agora há um novo tipo de conector projetado para garantir uma conexão Ethernet mesmo nos mais severos ambientes - o conector MAX Industrial da SIEMON. Esta solução apresenta um invólucro especial do tipo baioneta resistente a contaminantes químicos presentes sob as mais extremas condições. Disponíveis nas versões UTP e ScTP.

A UMIDADE AFETA OS CONTATOS A umidade corrói os contatos das tomadas. A exposição repetida a esse fator pode destruir os contatos permanentemente tornando a tomada sem condições de uso. A tomada especial industrial MAX protege os contatos e previne a corrosão.

A VIBRAÇÃO CAUSA RACHADURAS Observados por meio de um microscópio após ciclos de vibração extrema, os contatos dentro de um conector modular comum e também da tomada podem apresentar rachaduras que levam a problemas intermitentes de transmissão.

Em breve! Categoria 6

O exclusivo estilo baioneta de conectividade (patente pendente) oferece uma vedação IP67 e proteje o componente contra poeira, umidade e vibrações.

TOMADA INDUSTRIAL MAX

Entre em contato com o Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente Siemon para maiores informações.

São construídos com materiais que são mais resistentes a agentes químicos e altas temperaturas de operação.

OS CONECTORES INDUSTRIAIS MAX ATENDEM À DEMANDA DOS AMBIENTES HOSTÍS Especialmente projetados, os conectores industriais MAX podem suportar as condinções ambientais de umidade, poeira, vibração e temperaturas extremas.

PLUG INDUSTRIAL MAX

A tomada industrial MAX abriga um módulo Categoria 5e em um invólucro protetor. A parte externa da tomada é feita com um material durável, resistente a contaminantes químicos; é feita de plástico de classificação industrial com o projeto de acoplamento estilo baioneta (patente pendente). Desempenho em Categoria 5e garantido na maioria dos ambientes severos.

O plug industrial MAX abriga um conector modular Categoria 5e em um invólucro de plástico de classificação industrial com acoplamento em estilo baioneta (patente pedente). O plug industrial pode ser terminado em campo permitindo que comprimentos personalizados de cordôes sejam montados rapidamente em um evento de cabo rompido ou danificado.

NO DA PEÇA

DESCRIÇÃO

X5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoria 5e, Tomada UTP Industrial X5S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoria 5e, Tomada ScTP Industrial X-CAP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tampa protetora de poeira para a Tomada Industrial

ESPELHO INDUSTRIAL MAX O espelho industrial MAX em aço inoxidável oferece uma proteção eficiente contra umidade e sujeira. NO DA PEÇA

DESCRIÇÃO

XFP-S-01-SS XFP-S-02-SS

Espelho 4x2”, 1 porta, Aço Inoxidável Espelho 4x2”, 2 portas, Aço Inoxidável

DESCRIÇÃO

XP85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Categoria 5e, Plugue Industrial UTP para teminação em campo XP85S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Categoria 5e, Plugue Industrial ScTP para terminação em campo XP-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tampa de proteção contra poeira para os Plugues Industriais

PATCH CORDS MODULARES MAX INDUSTRIAL São montados em fábrica e testados 100%. Você pode escolher cordões com os Plugues Industriais em ambas as extremidades ou cordões com um Plugue Industrial em uma extremidade e um plugue modular comum na outra. Disponíveis em versões UTP e ScTP. NO DA PEÇA

DESCRIÇÃO

XC5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Categoria 5e, UTP, com Plugue Modular Industrial em ambas as extremidades XC5-(XX)-B05 . . . . . . . . . . . .Categoria 5e, UTP, Plugue Modular Industrial – Plugue Modular Comum, boot amarelo XC5S-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Categoria 5e, ScTP, com Plugue Modular Industrial em ambas as extremidades XC5S-(XX)-B05 . . . . . . . . . . .Categoria 5e, ScTP, Plugue Modular Industrial – Plugue Modular Comum, boot amarelo Use (XX) para especificar o comprimento: 03=3 pés (0,9 m);05=5 pés (1,5 m); 07= 7 pés (2,1 m); 10=10 pés (3 m); 15=15 pés (4,5 m)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CENTRAL DE INTERCONEXÃO DE MONTAGEM EM RACK (RIC3)

Furos para acesso pelo fundo e pela parte posterior do gabinete permitem que as fibras sejam manejadas entre os gabinetes sem ter que passá-las por fora.

Novo e Aprimorado!

Etiquetagem aprimorada! Pode-se etiquetar virtualmente qualquer configuração de porta com nossas etiquetas aprimoradas. As novas etiquetas ficam presas à porta frontal para melhorar a visibilidade da identificação. Quando a porta estiver aberta as etiquetas mudam automaticamente de posição permitindo ao técnico ver as etiquetas e suas portas correspondentes de uma só vez.

O RIC3 permite que uma quantidade máxima de fibras seja manejada ou emendada em gabinetes de 2, 3 e 4 RMS (U) sem comprometer a acessibilidade das fibras/ conectores e emendas resultando maior eficiência de utilização de espaço do rack.

Anéis giratórios permitem a retenção dos cordões e fibras minimizando o stress nas mesmas devido aos seus raios de curvatura

BANDEJA REMOVÍVEL A bandeja de gerenciamento de cabos RIC3 está agora completamente removível pela frente ou pela parte posterior do gabinete permitindo que a bandeja inteira seja removida para uma bancada para a instalação dos painéis de adaptadores e pigtails.

TRAVAS DAS PORTAS O novo RIC3 tem travas de pressão em ambas as portas frontal e traseira. Espaços para uso de cadeados previnem acesso não-autorizado.

Articulações permitem uma fácil remoção das portas frontal e traseira para um acesso completo às conexões de fibras.

CENTRAL DE INTERCONEXÃO DE MONTAGEM EM RACK (RIC)

PLACAS DE ADAPTADORES QUICK-PACK™ Nunca mais mexa em um painel com alta densidade de fibras com medo de remover cabos/ adapatadores errados! As placas com os adaptadores QUICKPACK da Siemon podem ser inseridos ou removidos com um único dedo para um acesso fácil e rápido às fibras.

PATENTEADO ENHANCED

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

Os gabinetes RIC24, 36 e 48 da Siemon foram reprojetados para oferecer um melhor gerenciamento das fibras e facilidade de uso. Eles são compatíveis com as placas de adaptadores Quick-Pack. Com um melhor gerenciamento dos cabos, identificação de portas, acessibilidade e segurança das fibras, o RIC3 é a melhor forma de proteger as valiosas conexões em fibras. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RIC3-24-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central de Interconexão de Montagem em Rack com 24 a 96 portas, 2 RMS

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RIC3-36-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central de Interconexão de Montagem em Rack com 36 a 144 portas, 2 RMS

altura: 86,6 mm (3,41 pol); largura: 432 mm (17,00 pol); profundidade: 380 mm (14,95 pol)

RIC3-48-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central de Interconexão de Montagem em Rack com 48 a 192 portas, 3 RMS

RIC3-72-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central de Interconexão de Montagem em Rack com 72 a 288 portas, 4 RMS

altura: 133 mm (5,25 pol); largura: 432 mm (17,00 pol); profundidade: 380 mm (14,95 pol)

altura: 178 mm (7,00 pol); largura: 432 mm (17,00 pol); profundidade: 380 mm (14,95 pol)

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preta, 02 = branca Notas: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol)=1U Todos os produtos RIC incluem etiquetas para impressoras laser*, cintas para cabos, hardware de montagem em rack, e presilhas para gerenciamento de fibras pré-instaladas; *Visite nosso website ou entre em contato com o Departamento de Suporte Técnico para obter o software para impressão de etiquetas.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

CENTRAL DE INTERCONEXÃO DE MONTAGEM EM PAREDE (SWIC3) As portas no gabinete e a proteção dos jumpers podem ser solicitadas com opções de fechaduras ou fechos com chaves independentes

Suportes opcionais de bandeja de emenda estão disponíveis para a montagem de várias bandejas de emenda

Proteção articulada e integrada da fibra oferece proteção e gerenciamento dos jumpers

FÁCIL ACESSO As portas nos gabinetes e proteção dos jumpers abrem completamente em 180° para oferecer pleno acesso frontal e lateral.

SUPORTES DE FIBRA EM DOIS NÍVEIS Incorpora dois níveis independentes de armazenamento para permitir que a fibra seja orientada em níveis que correspondem aos adaptadores.

Um sistema removível adequado de identificação inclui suportes transparentes de etiquetas para o armazenamento e proteção da documentação das fibras

As placas de adaptador Quick-Pack estão disponíveis com adaptadores SC, ST, FC, MT-RJ, ou LC

™

Anéis à prova de poeira incluídos

CENTRAL DE INTERCONEXÃO DE MONTAGEM EM PAREDE (SWIC3)

PLACAS DE ADAPTADOR COM FECHO TIPO SNAP-IN Utiliza as mesmas placas de adaptador Quick-Pack utilizadas nos gabinetes RIC com fechos integrados para instalação tipo snap-in (encaixe sem ferramenta) e remoção com um só dedo.

PATENTEADO

O centro de interconexão de montagem em paredes é um gabinete com uma boa relação custo benefício para gerenciar e conectar até 96 fibras. Seu projeto compacto de perfil baixo o torna ideal para instalação em armários ou outras áreas em que o espaço na parede é de fundamental importância. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO SWIC3G-(X)(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central de Interconexão de Montagem em Parede para 24 a 96 portas com proteção de jumpers integrada. Inclui suportes de fibra em dois níveis, etiquetas para a designação de portas e suporte removível, anéis à prova de poeira, ferragens de suporte, cintas de cabos e hardware de montagem. altura: 311 mm (12,25 pol); largura: 406 mm (16 pol); profundidade: 82,6 mm (3,25 pol) Utilize o primeiro (X) para especificar o tipo de fechadura na porta (esquerda) do gabinete: A = fechadura com chave A, C = fecho manual Utilize o segundo (X) para especificar o tipo de fechadura na porta (direita) de proteção: A = fechadura com chave A, B = fechadura com chave B, C = fecho manual Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preta, 02 = branca SWIC3-(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Central de Interconexão de Montagem em Parede com 24 a 96 portas. Inclui suportes de fibra em dois níveis, etiquetas para a designação de portas e suporte removível, anéis à prova de poeira, ferragens de suporte, cintas de cabos e hardware de montagem.. altura: 311 mm (12,25 pol); largura: 311 mm (12,25 pol); profundidade: 82,6 mm (3,25 pol) Utilize (X) para especificar o tipo de fechadura no gabinete: A = fechadura com chave A, C = fecho manual Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preta, 02 = branca

MINICENTRAL DE INTERCONEXÃO DE MONTAGEM EM PAREDE (MINI-SWIC3)

PATENTEADO

A Mini SWIC3 permite a interconexão econômica de fibra em locais onde o espaço nas paredes é limitado, oferecendo muitos dos recursos da SWIC3 já conhecidos e populares entre os instaladores. Ao aceitar duas placas de adaptador chatas QuickPack, a MINI-SWIC3 pode acomodar de 12 a 48 fibras. Também estão incluídos dois anéis à prova de poeira que oferecem proteção contra contaminantes e guias de raio de curvatura para garantir armazenamento das fibras com folga. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO SWIC3-M-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1Centro de interconexão de montagem em parede para 12 a 48 portas. altura: 218,4 mm (8,6 pol); largura: 185,4 mm (7,3 pol); profundidade: 82,6 mm (3,25 pol) Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preta, 02 = branca Nota: O MINI-SWIC3 é compatível apenas com as placas de adaptadores tipo flat Quick-Pack (veja página 7). W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PAINEL DE CONEXÃO DE FIBRAS (FCP3) Lingüetas salientes oferecem pontos adequados de fixação de cabos para a entrada de cabos revestidos

Bandejas de emenda opcionais podem ser montadas para gerenciar e proteger emendas mecânicas ou por fusão

PATENTEADO Presilhas de fibra traseiras controlam a folga do cabo atendendo aos requisitos de raio de curvatura mínimo

ALTA DENSIDADE Quando utilizado com MT-RJ QuickPacks™ de 24 portas da Siemon, os gabinetes FCP3 podem acomodar até 72 fibras somente em 1 RMS, em um rack de 19 polegadas.

BANDEJA DESLIZANTE O FCP3-DWR (versão em gaveta) oferece uma bandeja que desliza para fora da parte frontal ou traseira, permitindo fácil acesso às conexões de fibra, mesmo em racks totalmente preenchidos.

Presilhas de fibra frontais gerenciam até 36 jumpers de fibra duplex (total de 72 fibras) Um suporte de etiquetas protege os jumpers de fibra e é facilmente removível por fechos instalados em fábrica

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FCP3-DWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de Conexão de Fibras de 6 a 72 portas, com bandeja deslizante. Inclui suportes de montagem, alojamento/bandeja, suportes de fibra, anéis, suportes de etiquetas e etiquetas. altura: 43,2 mm (1,7 pol); largura: 482,6 mm (19,0 pol); profundidade: 355,6 mm (14,0 pol) FCP3-RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de Conexão de Fibras de 6 a 72 portas, com bandeja fixa. Inclui suportes de montagem, alojamento/tampa, suportes de fibra e anel. altura: 43,2 mm (1,7 pol); largura: 482,6 mm (19,0 pol); profundidade: 241,3 mm (9,5 pol)

BANDEJA PARA GERENCIAMENTO DAS FIBRAS (FMT)

PATENTEADO

Nossas presilhas para gerenciamento de fibras duplas com patente pendente são utilizadas para o armazenamento das fibras com folga, atendendo aos requisitos de raio de curvatura mínimo

Tampa traseira presa por imãs de grande potência para permitir acesso sem chave (trava)

ALTA DENSIDADE A Bandeja de Gerenciamento de Fibras pode ser utilizada com os Painéis de Ligação (Patch Panels) MAX da Siemon para aplicações de fibra e multimídia de alta densidade.

As fibras podem ser encaminhadas a partir das laterais ou da parte traseira da bandeja

Os acopladores de adaptadores estão disponíveis para ST, SC, MT-RJ, LC e FC

Painéis opcionais CT® ou MAX® disponíveis em 1, 2 e 3 RMS (U) que acomodam até 96 portas

A bandeja é feita de chapa de aço Nº 18, com um acabamento preto que combina com os painéis de ligação (patch panels) CT e MAX

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS CT-FMT-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de fibra para os Painéis CT ou MAX com 16 portas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 altura: 43,2 mm (1,7 pol); largura: 432 mm (17 pol); profundidade: 254 mm (10 pol) CT-FMT-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de fibra para os Painéis CT ou MAX com 24 portas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 altura: 86,4 mm (3,4 pol); largura: 432 mm (17 pol); profundidade: 254 mm (10 pol) CT-FMT-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de fibra para o Painel CT com 48 portas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 altura: 129,5 mm (5,1 pol); largura: 432 mm (17 pol); profundidade: 254 mm (10 pol)

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

BANDEJA FIXA A tampa na versão de bandeja fixa pode ser completamente removida para facilitar o acesso durante o encaminhamento dos cabos.

ACESSO ÀS FIBRAS As bandejas de 1 e 2 RMS incluem uma porta articulada traseira para acesso adequado às fibras.

Para bandejas de emendas opcionais, veja página 8.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

PLACAS DE ADAPTADORES TIPO FLAT QUICK-PACK™

PATENTE PENDENTE

As placas de adaptadores Quick-Pack da Siemon possuem uma trava integrada (patente pendente) que possibilita acesso à fibra com um único dedo mesmo em gabinetes com uma grande ocupação. Escolha entre nossa ampla variedade de painéis para fibras multimodo e monomodo.

RIC-F-SA6-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 adaptadores ST duplex (6 fibras) e suportes para ícones de identificação

RIC-F-SA8-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 adaptadores ST duplex (8 fibras) e suportes para ícones de identificação RIC-F-SA12-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 adaptadores ST duplex (12 fibras, não mostrado)

RIC-F-SC6-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 adaptadores SC duplex (6 fibras) e suportes para ícones de identificação

RIC-F-SC8-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 adaptadores SC duplex (8 fibras) e suportes para ícones de identificação

RIC-F-SC12-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 adaptadores SC duplex (12 fibras)

RIC-F-MT12-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 adaptadores MT-RJ duplex (12 fibras) e suportes para ícones de identificação

RIC-F-MT16-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 adaptadores MT-RJ duplex (16 fibras) e suportes para ícones de identificação

RIC-F-MT24-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 adaptadores MT-RJ duplex (24 fibras)

RIC-F-LC(X)12-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 6 adaptadores LC duplex (12 fibras) e suportes para ícones de identificação Utilize (X) para especificar a cor do adaptador LC: em branco = bege, U = azul

RIC-F-LC(X)16-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 8 adaptadores LC (18 fibras) e pacote com ícones

RIC-F-BLNK-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa cega de adaptador

RIC-F-LC(X)24-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Adaptadores LC duplex (24 fibras) e pacote com ícones Utilize (X) para especificar a cor do adaptador LC: em branco = bege, U = azul

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor da Placa de Adaptador: 01 = preta, 02 = branca Cada placa de adaptador com suportes para ícones de identificação inclui ícones vermelhos, azuis, com correspondência de cor e transparentes, com etiquetas de papel. Todos os adaptadores são do tipo "universal" para atender a aplicações de fibra multimodo e monomodo.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ENHANCED

BANDEJAS DE EMENDA Estas bandejas de alumínio podem ser encomendadas com suportes para emendas por fusão, mecânicas ou por fusão com luva, e vêm com uma tampa em policarbonato transparente. A bandeja padrão comporta até 24 emendas. Para áreas estreitas está disponível uma minibandeja que acomoda até 12 emendas. As bandejas podem ser empilhadas para aplicações de alta densidade. DIMENSÕES DA BANDEJA PADRÃO altura: 103 mm (4,07 pol); largura: 298 mm (11,75 pol); profundidade: 8,13 mm (0,32 pol)

DIMENSÕES DA MINIBANDEJA altura: 103 mm (4,07 pol); largura: 179 mm (7,06 pol); profundidade: 8,13 mm (0,32 pol)

DIMENSÕES DA BANDEJA MASS/RIBBON altura: 103 mm (4,07 pol); largura: 179 mm (7,06 pol); profundidade: 8,13 mm (0,32 pol)

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO TRAY-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de emenda padrão para até 24 emendas por fusão de fibra nua TRAY-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja padrão de emenda para até 12 ULTRAsplice® (emenda mecânica) TRAY-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de emenda padrão para até 24 emendas por fusão com luva de proteção. TRAY-M-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minibandeja de emenda para até 12 emendas por fusão de fibra nua. TRAY-M-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minibandeja de emenda para até 6 emendas mecânicas ULTRAsplice. TRAY-M-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minibandeja de emenda para até 12 emendas por fusão com luva de proteção TRAY-R-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de emendas (grande densidade) para até 144 fibras. Compatível os protetores de emendas MASSsleeve® da Siemon. TRAY-R-4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de emenda mass ou ribbon para até 144 fibras. Compatível com luvas termo-retráteis.

TRAY-3

TRAY-M-2

TRAY-R-4

Os suportes de emendas por fusão com luva podem acomodar diâmetros de luva variando de 1,5 mm (0,059 pol) a 2 mm (0,079 pol). Os suportes de emendas por fusão padrão são projetados para fibras buffered de 900 mícrons ou fibras revestidas de 250 mícrons.

PROTETORES DE EMENDAS TERMO-ATIVADOS Protetores térmicos de emendas oferecem um método eficiente para proteger as fusões de fibras de 250 ou 900 mícrons. Estes protetores ativados pelo calor devem ser posicionados com a fibra passando por dentro deles antes da execução da fusão e posteriormente posicionados diretamente sobre a emenda e aquecidos em um forno ou aquecedor*.

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO HT-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Protetor de emenda ativado pelo calor de 40 mm (1,57 polegadas) HT-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Protetor de emenda ativado pelo calor de 60 mm (2,36 polegadas) DICA TÉCNICA! Para clivagens maiores que 12 mm (0,47 polegadas), HT-60 são recomendadas *Os tempos de aquecimento podem variar dependendo da fonte de energia utilizada.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

PATENTEADO

ULTRASPLICE® A emenda ULTRAsplice patenteada da Siemon é uma emenda mecânica de alto desempenho, ótima relação custo benefício e fácil de instalar em situações de emergência ou aplicações permanentes. A emenda apresenta um tubo capilar de vidro patenteado para alinhamento das fibras com gel casador de índice de refração para permitir a inspeção da fibra durante a instalação. Além disso a trava de ajuste permite aos usuários um ótimo alinhamento e retenção.

NO DA PEÇA

DESCRIÇÃO

US-126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monomodo, amarela US-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimodo, 125 mícrons, laranja

Desalinhamentos das fibras podem ser facilmente detectados e corrigidos utilizando-se um VFL durante a instalação. As emendas ULTRAsplice acomodam buffers de fibras de 250 a 900 mícrons

PATENTEADO

ULTRASLEEVE® Reduza bastante o tempo e o custo de instalação de emendas com o novo protetor ULTRAsleeve. Simplesmente insira a emenda por fusão na luva e feche-a; não é necessário aquecimento, cura, crimpagem ou colagem. O protetor de emendas por fusão ULTRAsleeve apresenta uma fita de acrílico macio que protege a emenda contra danos externos. O protetor ULTRAsleeve pode aceitar uma larga gama de buffers de 250 a 900 mícrons para uma única fibra ou até 4 fibras (monomodo ou multimodo).

NO DA PEÇA

DESCRIÇÃO

FS-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protetor de emenda por fusão de 40 mm (1,57 polegadas) FS-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protetor de emenda por fusão de 60 mm (2,36 polegadas) FSCT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferramenta para fechar o protetor ULTRAsleeve comprimento: 90 mm (3,5 pol.); profundidade: 55 mm (2,3 pol.); altura: 35 mm (1,4 pol.)

Embora os protetores de emendas por fusão ULTRAsleeve possam ser fechados sem o uso de ferramentas, recomenda-se o uso da ferramenta ULTRAsleeve para uma operação adequada.

PATENTEADO

MASSSLEEVE® A MASSsleeve oferece os mesmos benefícios de ganho de tempo que a ULTRAsleeve, porém para fibras mass ou ribbon (em grande número de fibras). Este protetor de emenda por fusão pode aceitar de 2 a 12 fibras mass ou ribbon (monomodo ou multimodo).

NO DA PEÇA

DESCRIÇÃO

MFS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . protetor de emenda por fusão para fibras ribbon de 40 mm (1,57 polegadas) MFSCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferramenta MASSsleeve

comprimento: 115 mm (4,5 pol.); profundidade: 51 mm (2,0 pol.); altura: 25 mm (1,0 pol.)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

A ferramenta MASSsleeve é necessária para assegurar uma instalação apropriada O prendedor da ferramenta mantém um alinhamento preciso.

JUMPERS E PIGTAILS XGLO™ Escolha jumpers e pigtails de fibra XGLO para aplicações de backbone ou fiberto-the-desk da próxima geração. Os cordões XGLO usam fibras premium que atendem aos requisitos do IEEE 802.3 para 10 GbE (Ethernet a 10 Gb/s), bem como as especificações IEC-60793-2-10 e TIA-492AAAC de largura de banda para laser DMD (Differential Mode Delay).

10 Gigabit Ethernet

A largura de banda otimizada para laser reduz as impurezas no núcleo da fibra assegurando uma transmissão robusta para 10 GbE

Jumpers disponíveis em comprimentos padrão de 1, 2, 3 e 5 metros

Conectores que atendem ao código de cores ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3

Capas para proteção contra poeira acompanham os cordões

Clips para cordões SC duplex permitem a correção de polaridade

Excedem os requisitos ANSI/TIA/EIA e ISO/IEC de envelhecimento, exposição à umidade, impacto, vibração, tensão de acoplamento e stress mecânico

Pigtails disponíveis em comprimentos de 1 metro

Disponíveis em versões multimodo 50/125 µm e monomodo

DESEMPENHO SUPERIOR Os cordões de fibra XGLO atendem a todas as especificações Telcordia e ISO/IEC para a geometria do ferrolho e da face do conector incluindo raio de curvatura, apex offset e corte esférico. O atendimento aos padrões assegura Perda de Retorno mínima reduzindo assim as reflexões de sinal que poderiam degradar o desempenho de transmissão ou danificar os tranceivers.

JUMPERS E PIGTAILS XGLO JUMPERS DUPLEX MULTIMODO XGLO 50/125µm

JUMPERS DUPLEX MONOMODO XGLO

N DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FJ2-SCSC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex SC-SC FJ2-LCLC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-LC FJ2-LCSC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-SC Use (XX) para especificar comprimento: 01=1m (3,3 pés), 02= 2m (6,6 pés), 03= 3m (9,8 pés), 05= 5m (16,4 pés)

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FJ2-SCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex SC-SC FJ2-LCULCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-LC FJ2-LCUSCUL-(XX). . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-SC Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

PIGTAILS SIMPLES MULTIMODO 50/125µm XGLO

PIGTAILS SIMPLEX MONOMODO XGLO

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FP1B-SC5L-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples, 900 mícrons, com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés)

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FP1B-SCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples SC com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés) FP1B-LCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples LC com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés)

FP1B-LC5L-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples LC, 900 mícrons, com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés)

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

ESPECIFICAÇÕES DE DESEMPENHO Multimodo 50/125µm Largura de Banda Mínima do Cabo (MHz.km)

Momomodo

850nm

1300nm

850nm*

n/a

1500

500

2000

n/a

Perda de Inserção Máxima (dB)

0,50 (0,10 Típica)

0,40 (0,10 Típica)

Perda de Retorno Mínima (dB)

30 (35 Típica)

55 (60 Típica)

*Largura de Banda Laser

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

PIGTAILS E JUMPERS LIGHTSYSTEM® A Siemon oferece uma linha completa de jumpers para conectar enlaces de fibra. Escolha desde cordões simples ou duplex, multimodo (62,5/125 ou 50/125) ou monomodo, SC ou ST, jumpers ou pigtails. As montagens estão disponíveis em comprimentos padronizados de 1, 2, 3 e 5 metros. Comprimentos sob encomenda estão também disponíveis. Cada conector terminado é testado quanto à transmissão óptica de modo a assegurar que 100% dos cabos montados pela Siemon atendem às especificações de desempenho mais exigentes (mostradas abaixo). Todos os jumpers são fabricados com os conectores da mais alta qualidade e fibras OFNR de classificação riser.

Gigabit Ethernet

JUMPERS MULTIMODO DUPLEX

JUMPERS MONOMODO DUPLEX

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FJ2-SCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . Jumper duplex SC-SC FJ2-SASA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . Jumper duplex ST-ST FJ2-SASC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . Jumper duplex ST-SC FJ2-LCLC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-LC FJ2-LCSC(X)MM-(XX). . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-SC FJ2-LCSA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-ST FJ2R-MTMT(X)MM-(XX) . . . . Jumper duplex MT-RJ-MT-RJ FJ2R-MTSC(X)MM-(XX). . . . . Jumper duplex MT-RJ-SC FJ2R-MTSA(X)MM-(XX). . . . . Jumper duplex MT-RJ-ST

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FJ2-SCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex SC-SC FJ2-SCASCA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex SC-SC APC* FJ2-SAUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex ST-ST FJ2-SAUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex ST-SC FJ2-LCULCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-LC FJ2-LCUSCU-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-SC FJ2-LCUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper duplex LC-ST

JUMPERS MONOMODO SIMPLES NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FJ1-SCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper simples SC-SC FJ1-SCASCA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper simples SC-SC APC* FJ1-SAUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper simples ST-ST FJ1-SAUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper simples ST-SC FJ1-LCULCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Jumper simples LC-LC FJ1-LCUSCU-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Jumper simples LC-SC FJ1-LCUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper simples LC-ST

JUMPERS MULTIMODO SIMPLES NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FJ1-SCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . Jumper simples SC-SC FJ1-SASA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . Jumper simples ST-ST FJ1-SASC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . Jumper simples ST-SC FJ1-LCLC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . . Jumper simples LC-LC FJ1-LCSC(X)MM-(XX). . . . . . . Jumper simples LC-SC FJ1-LCSA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . Jumper simples LC-ST

PIGTAILS SIMPLES MONOMODO PIGTAILS SIMPLES MULTIMODO

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FP1B-SCU-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples SC, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés) FP1B-SCA-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples SC, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés), APC* FP1B-SAU-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples ST, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés) FP1B-LCU-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples LC, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés)

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FP1B-SC(X)MM-01. . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples SC, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés) FP1B-SA(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples ST, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés) FP1B-LC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . . Pigtail simples LC, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés)

Use (X) para especificar fibra multimodo tipo/cor da capa: – = fibra 62.5/125µm , capa laranja, 6 = fibra 62.5/125µm , capa cinza, 5 = fibra 50/125µm , capa laranja Use (XX) para especificar comprimento do cabo: 01 = 1m (3,3 pés.), 02 = 2m (6,6 pés.), 03 = 3m (9,8 pés.), 05 = 5m (16,4 pés.) Comprimentos sob medida e outras cores de capas disponíveis. Consulte o Departamento de Serviço ao Cliente para mais informações. *Jumpers e Pigtails APC têm uma perda de retorno mínima de 65dB

ESPECIFICAÇÕES DE DESEMPENHO Multimodo 50/125µm Largura de Banda Mínima do Cabo (MHz.km)

Multimodo 62.5/125µm

1300nm

850nm

1300nm

n/a

500

200

500

n/a

Perda de Inserção Máxima (dB)

0,65 (0,40 Típica)

Perda de Retorno Mínima (dB)

20 (25 Típica)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Momomodo

850nm

0,40 (0,5 Típica) 50 (53 Típica)

PIGTAILS E JUMPERS VALULIGHT™ A Siemon tem o prazer de anunciar sua nova linha de cordões ópticos Valulight. Estes jumpers e pigtails oferecem um valor excepcional a um custo muito competitivo. Os cordões ValuLight de fibra atendem às especificações TIA/EIA-568B.3 e ISO/IEC 11801 para perda de inserção e perda de retorno. Eles são ideais para aplicações de dados em cabeamento comercial incluindo 1 Gb/s. Os cordões estão disponíveis nos tipos de conectores populares SC e ST em ambas as versões multimodo e monomodo.

JUMPERS DUPLEX MULTIMODO NO DA PEÇA

DESCRIÇÃO

J2-SCSC(X)-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . jumper duplex SC-SC J2-SASA(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . jumper duplex ST-ST J2-SASC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . jumper duplex ST-SC Use (X) para especificar o tipo da fibra: 5 = 50/125µm, 6 = 62,5/125µm Use (XX) para especificar o comprimento: 01 = 1m (3,3 pés.), 02 = 2m (6,6 pés.), 03 = 3m (9,8 pés.), 05 = 5m (16,4 pés.)

PIGTAILS SIMPLES MULTIMODO NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO P1B-SC(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . pigtail simples SC, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés.) P1B-SA(X)-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . pigtail simples ST, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés.) Use (X) para especificar o tipo da fibra: 5 = 50/125µm, 6 = 62,5/125µm

JUMPERS DUPLEX MONOMODO NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO J2-SCSCP-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . jumper duplex SC-SC J2-SASAP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . jumper duplex ST-ST J2-SASCP-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . jumper duplex ST-SC Use (XX) para especificar o comprimento: 01 = 1m (3,3 pés.), 02 = 2m (6,6 pés.), 03 = 3m (9,8 pés.), 05 = 5m (16,4 pés.)

PIGTAILS SIMPLES MONOMODO NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO P1B-SCP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pigtail simples SC, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés.) P1B-SAP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . pigtail simples ST, 900 mícrons com buffer, 1m (3,3 pés.)

ESPECIFICAÇÕES DE DESEMPENHO

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

Multimodo 50/125µm Largura de Banda Mínima do Cabo (MHz.km)

Multimodo 62.5/125µm

Momomodo

850nm

1300nm

850nm

1300nm

n/a

500

200

500

n/a

Perda de Inserção Máxima (dB)

0,75

Perda de Retorno Mínima (dB)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

KITS DE TERMINAÇÃO DE FIBRA ST, SC LIGHTSPEED® Faça terminações rápidas de fibras de alto desempenho com o Kit de Terminação LightSpeed da Siemon. O kit de terminação da Siemon contém todas as ferramentas necessárias para a terminação de até 200 conectores ST ou SC multimodo em uma bolsa robusta de lona que se pode carregar ao campo. Use o kit de atualização LC opcional (veja abaixo) para terminações de conectores LC. Todos os consumíveis, ferramentas e outros produtos fornecidos com o kit podem ser pedidos separadamente. O kit de terminação LightSpeed da Siemon vem com um sistema de adesivo com um tempo de cura de 30 segundos. O adesivo é colorido de verde para oferecer uma identificação visual facilitada durante o processo de terminação e tem uma validade de um ano.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FTERM-L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de terminação LightSpeed para conectores ST e SC multimodo* FT-CKIT-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumíveis (material de reposição) para o kit FTERM-L2**

*Todos os consumíveis incluindo o primer, adesivo e lixas de polimento fazem parte do kit de produtos de reposição e devem ser pedidos separadamente. Os componentes do kit de terminação FTERM estão também disponíveis separadamente.. ** Este produto contém material cuja validade é sensível ao tempo e a variações de temperatura. Armazene-o em locais com temperaturas entre 4,4 e 38,5 graus Celsius (40-100 F) e verifique a data de validade marcada no produto antes de usá-lo.

KIT DE ATUALIZAÇÃO PARA TERMINAÇÃO DE CONECTOR LC O kit de atualização LC da Siemon é utilizado em conjunto com o Kit de Terminação LightSpeed (FTERM-L) e tem todos os acessórios necessários para a terminação de conectores LC utilizando o adesivo LightSpeed exclusivo da Siemon. O kit inclui um cabeçote de microscópio LC (que conecta o microscópio incluído no FTERM-L), uma matriz de crimpagem LC (que é utilizada com a ferramenta de crimpagem incluída no FTERM-L), um disco de polimento e um micromaçarico* (para contrair os tubos das luvas de crimpagem LC codificados por cores).

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FTERM-LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de atualização LC (para ser usado em conjunto com o FTERM-L2)

Notas: O conteúdo do FTERM-LC também está disponível separadamente. Entre em contato com o nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente para obter mais informações. *Gás butano não incluído

KIT DE TERMINAÇÃO DE FIBRA MT-RJ

ENHANCED

O kit de terminação MT-RJ da Siemon torna a terminação em campo dos conectores MT-RJ fácil e rápida. Os conectores MT-RJ duplex podem ser terminados em menos de dois minutos, o que significa menos de um minuto por fibra! O kit emprega uma tecnologia comprovada de terminação sem polimento. Todas as ferramentas necessárias para terminar conectores MT-RJ estão incluídos em um robusto estojo.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FTERM-MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de Terminação de Fibra MT-RJ

Notas: O conteúdo do kit FTERM-MT pode ser pedido separadamente.. Entre em contato com o nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente para obter mais informações.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CONECTORES ST E SC CONECTORES SC DUPLEX Os conectores SC tem um clip para uma montagem duplex que permite que cada conector seja removido individualmente. No caso de inversão de polaridade durante a terminação, o conector não é perdido. Apenas remova os conectores do clip e inverta suas posições para corrigir o erro economizando tempo e dinheiro. O clip duplex também agiliza na pesquisa de falhas. Caso haja uma falha com uma conexão simples, um conector individual pode ser removido do clip e re-terminado sem qualquer dano ao conector adjacente.

Multimodo NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FC2-SC-MM-J . . . . . . . . . . . .Conector SC duplex, fibra com capa, um boot preto e um boot bege FC2-SC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . .Conector SC duplex, fibra com buffer, dois boots bege FC2-SC-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Conector SC duplex, fibra com capa/buffer, um boot preto e um boot bege (p/ fibra com capa), dois boots bege para fibra com buffer

Monomodo FC2-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . Conector SC duplex, fibra com capa FC2-SC-SM-B(XX). . . . . . Conector SC duplex, fibra com buffer Use (XX) para especificar a cor do boot: 02 = branca, 06 = azul

Adicionar "-B” ao final do número da peça para caixa com 50 peças.

CONECTORES SC SIMPLES Os conectores SC simples empregam uma capa externa codificada por cores de acordo com a TIA/EIA-568-B.3 e ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição (bege para multimodo e azul para monomodo).

Multimodo

Monomodo

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FC1-SC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . Conector SC simples, fibra com capa, boot bege FC1-SC-MM-J01 . . . . . . . . . . Conector SC simples, fibra com capa, boot preto FC1-SC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . . Conector SC simples, fibra com buffer, boot bege FC1-SC-MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . Conector SC simples, fibras com capa/buffer, um boot preto (para fibra com capa) e um boot bege para fibra com buffer FC1-SC-MM-80 . . . . . . . . . . . Conector SC simples, fibra com capa/buffer, um boot bege (para fibra com capa) e um boot bege para fibra com buffer

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FC1-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . . . Conector simples, fibra com capa FC1-SC-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . Conector simples, fibra com buffer FC1-SC-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Conector simples, fibras com capa/buffer, um boot p/ fibras com capa, um boot para buffer

Use (XX) para especificar a cor do boot: 02 = branca, 06 = azul Adicione “-B” ao final do número da peça para pacote com 100 peças.

CONECTORES ST Os conectores ST empregam um anel de acoplamento metálico estilo baioneta, robusto, de projeto radial que facilita o acoplamento no adaptador . Dois conectores ST estão disponíveis para fibras com capa, um com boot bege e um com boot preto. As duas cores permitem uma identificação facilitada das fibras terminadas em conectores individuais para formar um cordão duplex.

Multimodo NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FC1-SA-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . Fibra com capa, boot bege FC1-SA-MM-J01 . . . . . . . . . . Fibra com capa, boot preto FC1-SA-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . . Fibra com buffer, boot bege FC1-SA-MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . Fibra com capa/buffer, boot preto (p/ capa) e boot bege (p/ buffer) FC1-SA-MM-80 . . . . . . . . . . . Fibra com capa/buffer, boot bege (p/ capa) e boot bege (p/ buffer)

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

Monomodo NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FC1-SA-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . . . Fibra com capa FC1-SA-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . Fibra com buffer FC1-SA-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Fibra com capa/buffer, um boot (p/ capa) e um boot (p/ jumper) Use (XX) para especificar a cor do boot: 02 = branca, 06 = azul Adicione "-B" ao final do número da peça para pacote com 100 peças.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS PARA FIBRA

CONECTORES LC PARA INSTALAÇÃO EM CAMPO Os produtos LC da Siemon oferecem todos os benefícios das conexões SC e ST no novo conceito SFF Small Form Factor, de projeto de alta densidade. Os adaptadores LC são compatíveis com nossos populares produtos MAX®, CT®, FOB, e SM® para área de trabalho e salas de telecomunicações oferecendo uma ampla variedade de opções de instalação. Os conectores LC levam apenas dois minutos para serem terminados com o uso do kit de terminação LightSpeed® da Siemon.

Multimodo NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FC1-LC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . . Conector LC simples, multimodo, para fibra com buffer, boot bege FC2-LC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . Conector LC duplex, multimodo, para fibra com capa, boot bege

Monomodo NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FC1-LC-SM-B02 . . . . . . . . . . . Conector LC simples, monomodo, para fibra com buffer, boot branco FC1-LC-SM-J02 . . . . . . . . . . . Conector LC simples, monomodo, fibra com capa, boot branco

Nota: Os conectores LC para fibra com capa da Siemon requerem o uso de cabos com capas de 1,6 mm. Adicione “-B” ao final do número da peça para pacote com 100 peças (simples) ou 50 peças (duplex).

CONECTORES MT-RJ PARA INSTALAÇÃO EM CAMPO Os conectores MT-RJ da Siemon oferecem todos os benefícios de desempenho de fibras duplex em um conector compacto de estilo “RJ”. As terminações são rápidas e fáceis com o uso do comprovado método sem polimento/sem epoxy que leva menos de dois minutos, um minuto por fibra! Os conectores MT-RJ da Siemon trazem duas fibras pré-terminadas em fábrica dentro do ferrolho em um mecanismo eficiente de emenda mecânica. Apenas prepare o cabo e insira as fibras dentro do conector para completar a instalação. Não necessita de epoxy nem polimento. Dois avanços foram incorporados em nosso conector MT-RJ. O primeiro está na cor do corpo do conector MT-RJ de 62,5 mícrons que mudou de preto para bege claro para ajudar a diferenciar as duas versões multimodo. O segundo avanço é o tubo de entrada das fibras em ambos os conectores, de 62,5 mícrons e de 50 mícrons que mudaram de uma entrada única para um tubo com duas entradas para facilitar o roteamento das fibras dentro do conector.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO FC2-MT6MM. . . . . . . . . . . . . Conector MT-RJ duplex com pinos (macho), multimodo 62,5/125µm, bege FC2-MT5MM. . . . . . . . . . . . . Conector MT-RJ duplex com pinos (macho), multimodo 50/125µm, preto

DICA TÉCNICA! Já inverteu a polaridade de uma terminação duplex? O dispositivo de acoplamento da Siemon permite que você corrija o erro. Simplesmente quebre a trava integrada e gire o conector em 180° re-inserindo-o no adaptador. Nota: Os conectores MT-RJ da Siemon são compatíveis com cabos redondos de 3.0mm duplex com capa ou fibras com buffer.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

MÓDULOS 10G 6™ MAX® Em 1998, a Siemon foi o primeiro fabricante a oferecer componentes e sistemas de Categoria 6. Hoje a Siemon leva o desempenho da Categoria 6 para a próxima geração com o revolucionário módulo 10G 6 MAX. O 10G 6 MAX é o único conector que atende a todas as especificações de componentes ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.2-1 para hardware de conexão de 1 a 300 MHz.

PATENTEADO

300 MHz

Desempenho do componente de Categoria 6 para 300 MHz

EXCEDE OS REQUISITOS DA CATEGORIA 6 O projeto inovador da placa de circuito impresso de nossos conectores oferece um balanceamento ótimo em conjunto com a montagem dos contatos e demais partes do componente que maximiza a banda útil além dos requisitos da Categoria 6.

TERMINAÇÕES RÁPIDAS O sistema de entrada de fios Pyramid™ nos blocos S310® separa os pares dos condutores quando abertos para simplificar e reduzir o tempo de instalação.

Portas de proteção de contatos estão também disponíveis para minimizar a exposição a poeira e outros agentes contaminantes

Todas as tomadas são compatíveis com as opções de pinagem T568A e T568B

Utilizam ferramentas de terminação padrão 110 simples

MÓDULOS 10G 6 MAX

MX6-(XX)U*. . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular, configurações T568A/B e porta de proteção de borracha

Permite a instalação pela frente ou pela parte posterior do espelho

Compatibilidade retroativa com a Categoria 5e e patch cords de categorias inferiores

Componente compatível com a Categoria 6 até 300 MHz

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

MÓDULOS MAX 6

DESEMPENHO SUPERIOR Utilize cordões modulares 10G 6 MC® para obter o desempenho dos módulos 10G 6 MAX da Siemon.

Componente compatível com a Categoria 6 até 250 MHz

✓

MX6-F(XX)U* . . . . . . . . . Módulo reto, configurações T568A/B

MX6-K(XX)U*. . . . . . . . . Módulo Keystone, configurações T568A/B

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 09 = laranja, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 80 = marfim claro, 82 = branco alpino Os módulos incluem capas de alívio de tensão Os módulos incluem ícones coloridos: um da cor do módulo, um vermelho e um azul. A cor da porta é transparente para módulos angulares vermelho, amarelo, azul e laranja. A cor da porta é branca para módulos flat vermelho, azul e laranja. Acrescente "B" ao final do número da peça para pacotes de produto a granel com 100 módulos (inclui ícones). Adicione “-D” para opção com porta (apenas para módulos flat).

Um projeto otimizado permite o “empilhamento” dos módulos para oferecer soluções de alta densidade

MX6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular com pinagem T568A/B e porta protetora de borracha

MX6-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano com pinagem T568A/B

MÓDULOS MAX 5e

Componente compatível com a Categoria 5e até 160 MHz

MX5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular com pinagem T568A/B e porta protetora de borracha

MX5-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano com pinagem T568A/B

W W W

MX6-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo com fecho com pinagem T568A/B

MX5-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keystone com fecho com pinagem T568A/B

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

MÓDULOS DE TERMINAÇÃO RÁPIDA MAX® O módulo de terminação sem ferramenta MAX proporciona desempenho de sistema em Categoria 5e e recursos amigáveis de instalação. Nossa terminação rápida (sem necessidade de uso de ferramenta) permite que todos os oito condutores sejam terminados quando a tampa de terminação é pressionada no lugar. O tamanho compacto proporciona conectividade de alta densidade na Área de Trabalho e na Sala de Telecomunicações.

TERMINAÇÃO Execute terminação em massa à mão de todos os oito condutores ou utilize uma lâmina de terminação 110® de posição única na tampa de terminação MAX.

COLOCAÇÃO RÁPIDA DE PARES Os condutores podem ser colocados seqüencialmente na tampa de terminação minimizando o destrançamento dos pares e simplificando a terminação.

A barra flexível de montagem permite a instalação pela parte da frente ou de trás do espelho e fixa o módulo ao espelho com ou sem o uso da porta protetora de borracha

Não há necessidade de ferramentas de terminação

VERIFIQUE A PINAGEM CORRETA A tampa de terminação dispõe de um visor grande para a visualização das terminações.

PATENTEADO

✓

MÓDULOS DE TERMINAÇÃO RÁPIDA MAX

A tecnologia patenteada de balanceamento de pares multi-planar proporciona desempenho do sistema em Categoria 5e.

Etiquetas de identificação de ícones em 13 cores para codificação em cores

A abertura da tomada é compatível com o padrão IEC 60603-7

atí

O design delgado permite que as tomadas sejam empilhadas lateralmente para soluções de alta densidade

MX-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular com pinagem T568A/B

MX-F-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano com pinagem T568A/B

MX-K-C5-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Keystone com pinagem T568A/B

Nota: A versão keystone não é compatível com o hardware de montagem MAX. 01

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 09 = laranja, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 80 = marfim claro, 82 = branco alpino A porta é branca para módulos flat vermelho, amarelo, azul e laranja; transparente para angulares Adicionar “-D” para opção com porta opcional (versões flat e angular) Os módulos incluem um ícone colorido, um vermelho e um azul. Acrescente "B" ao final do número da peça para pacotes de produto a granel com 100 módulos (inclui ícones). W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PATENTEADO

MÓDULOS ADAPTADORES PARA FIBRA ÓPTICA MAX®

Os módulos adaptadores para fibra óptica MAX são compatíveis com todos os espelhos, adaptadores para móveis modulares, caixas de superfície* e patch panels da série MAX. Todos os adaptadores para fibra óptica são "universais" para aceitar conexões de fibra óptica multimodo ou monomodo.

MX-MT-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular com 1 adaptador MT-RJ duplex (2 fibras)

MX-F-SA-(XX)* . . . . . . . . Módulo plano com 1 adaptador ST simplex (1 fibra)

MX-SA-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular com 1 adaptador ST simplex (1 fibra)

MX-F-MT-(XX)* . . . . . . . . Acoplador modular com 1 adaptador MT-RJ duplex (2 fibras)

MX-F-S2-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano com 1 adaptador ST duplex (2 fibras)

MX-S2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular com 1 adaptador ST duplex (2 fibras)

MX-F1-LC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . Módulo plano com 1 adaptador LC duplex (2 fibras) Utilize (X) para especificar a cor do adaptador LC: em branco = bege, U = azul

MX-F-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano com 1 adaptador SC duplex (2 fibras)

MX-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular com 1 adaptador SC duplex (2 fibras)

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 80 = marfim claro Os módulos incluem tampas com proteção contra poeira, um ícone colorido, um vermelho e um azul por porta; *Compatível com as caixas SM®

PATENTEADO

MÓDULOS MAX COAXIAIS

Para a terminação de cabos coaxiais na Área de Trabalho ou na Sala de Telecomunicações, os módulos MAX coaxiais da Siemon fornecem adaptadores BNC e do tipo F. O tipo F é encontrado nas versões plana e angular, ao passo que o BNC é encontrado somente na versão plana. Cada um deles inclui um espaço para a utilização de ícones codificados por cores para identificar o tipo de serviço. MX-FA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular com adaptador do tipo F, 75 ohms

MX-F-FA-(XX)*. . . . . . . . . Módulo plano com adaptador do tipo F, 75 ohms

MX-F-BA-(XX)* . . . . . . . Módulo plano com 1 adaptador BNC, 75 ohms

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 80 = marfim claro Os módulos incluem um ícone colorido, um vermelho e um azul, *Compatível com as caixas SM

TAMPAS CEGAS E PORTAS PARA TOMADA MAX

PATENTEADO

Guarnições cegas para aberturas não utilizadas, expansão futura e para portas com o objetivo de proteger as tomadas contra contaminantes externos. MX-BL-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo cego, pacote com 10 unidades

MX-FD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto de portas para tomadas planas de 6 ou 8 posições, pacote com 20 unidades

MX-AD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto de portas para tomadas angulares de 6 ou 8 posições, pacote com 20 unidades

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 00 = transparente (MX-AD-XX apenas), 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante*, 80 = marfim claro *Não disponível para portas angulares. Recomenda-se o uso de transparente ou branca se necessário.

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

MAX HD15 - SUPORTES MX-D4F-15-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . Suporte para 4 portas MAX com adaptador HD15 (fêmea-fêmea) instalado MX-D4F-15E-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Suporte para 4 portas MAX, para adaptador HD15, vazio Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante*, 80 = marfim claro

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

ESPELHOS PADRÃO BRITÂNICO MAX® O espelho padrão britânico MAX é compatível com os padrões britânicos (85 mm x 85 mm). O espelho foi projetado para aceitar até seis módulos MAX angulares ou planos. Os espelhos incluem etiqueta(s) de designação, tampa(s) com etiqueta em branco e parafusos de montagem.

MX-BFP-S-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho para um módulo MAX

MX-BFP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho para dois módulos MAX

MX-BFP-S-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho para três módulos MAX

MX-BFP-S-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho para quatro módulos MAX

MX-BFP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho para seis módulos MAX

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 25 = branco brilhante, 82 = branco alpino

YOKES FLEXÍVEIS PADRÃO BRITÂNICO MAX Os Yokes flexíveis MAX permitem que um módulo MAX simples seja montado em aberturas de 37 mm x 22 mm padrão britânico.

Yoke flexível mostrado com módulo MAX plano opcional

FY-MX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suportes para os YOKES flexíveis apenas Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 25 = branco brilhante Entre em contato com nosso Departamento de Suporte Técnico para solucionar dúvidas sobre as dimensões de montagem.

ADAPTADORES PARA MÓVEIS MODULARES MAX Os adaptadores para móveis modulares MAX aceitam quatro módulos angulares ou planos MAX e encaixam-se diretamente nas aberturas de tomadas para comunicação* nos principais sistemas de móveis modulares, incluindo Steelcase, Hon Industries, Haworth, Kimball e DRG. Os adaptadores incluem etiqueta de designação e tampa com etiqueta em branco para permitir a identificação do circuito. MX-MFP-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador modular para mobiliário Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro Nota: Para painel vertical de 152 mm (6 pol) da Herman Miller Action Office Series 3, utilize nosso MX-FP-S-(XX)-(XX) para montar até seis módulos MAX. *As aberturas para tomada do móvel, a espessura do painel e a folga do encaminhamento podem variar. Consulte o fabricante do móvel para obter informações sobre as dimensões reais a fim de determinar a compatibilidade.

67,46 – 69,85 mm (2.656 – 2.750 pol)

34,16 – 35,69 mm (1,345 – 1,405 pol)

Requisitos de Recorte do Painel Espessura do painel: 0,76 – 2,03 mm (0,030 – 0,080 pol)

ESPELHOS INTERNACIONAIS MAX A Siemon Company fornece soluções de montagem que satisfazem muitos requisitos internacionais. Espelhos horizontais incluem etiqueta(s) de designação, tampas para etiquetas em branco e coloridas e tampas coloridas para parafusos.

MX-HFP-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho padrão australiano/italiano horizontal para um módulo MAX

MX-HFP-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho padrão australiano/italiano horizontal para dois módulos MAX

MX-HFP-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho padrão australiano/italiano horizontal para três módulos MAX

MX-HFP-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho padrão australiano/italiano horizontal para quatro módulos MAX

MX-DFP-02-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho branco para dois módulos MAX. Inclui porta etiquetas transparente

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro

ADAPTADORES INTERNACIONAIS MAX Estes adaptadores permitem que dois módulos MAX sejam montados em aberturas padrão.

MX-45-01-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de 45mm x 45mm, 1 porta Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 25 = branco brilhante, 82 = branco alpino

MX-45-02-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de 45mm x 45mm, 2 portas Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 25 = branco brilhante, 82 = branco alpino

MX-A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de 50 mm x 50 mm. Inclui etiqueta de designação e tampas de etiqueta em branco Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 25 = branco brilhante, 82 = branco alpino

MX-RFP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de 45 mm x 50 mm Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 25 = branco brilhante

Entre em contato com nosso Departamento de Suporte Técnico para solucionar dúvidas sobre as dimensões de montagem. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ESPELHOS MODULARES MAX® MX-FP-S-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho simples para um módulo MAX

MX-FP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho simples para dois módulos MAX

MX-FP-S-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho simples para quatro módulos MAX

MX-FP-D-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho duplo para seis módulos MAX

MX-FP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho simples para seis módulos MAX

MX-FP-D-08-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho duplo para oito módulos MAX

MX-FP-S-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho simples para três módulos MAX

MX-FP-D-12-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho duplo para doze módulos MAX

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto*, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza*, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro Os espelhos incluem etiquetas de designação, tampas de etiquetas em branco e parafusos de montagem. Acrescente "B" ao final do número da peça para pacotes de produto a granel com 100 espelhos. *Opções em preto e cinza, bem como pacotes com várias peças estão disponíveis para espelhos simples apenas.

ESPELHOS MAX DE AÇO INOXIDÁVEL Espelhos MAX de aço inoxidável simples e duplos para uso com módulos MAX planos e angulares. O acabamento escovado nas placas disfarça pequenos arranhões e riscos que possam ocorrer durante o uso cotidiano. Os espelhos incluem parafusos de montagem.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MX-FP-S-(XX)-SS-L . . . . . . . . Espelho de aço inoxidável simples com etiquetas e portaetiquetas

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MX-FP-D-(XX)-SS-L . . . . . . . . Espelho de aço inoxidável duplo com etiquetas e portaetiquetas

MX-FP-S-(XX)-SS . . . . . . . . . . Espelho de aço inoxidável simples

MX-FP-D-(XX)-SS. . . . . . . . . . Espelho de aço inoxidável duplo

Utilize (XX) para especificar o número de aberturas: 01 = 1 abertura, 02 = 2 aberturas, 03 = 3 aberturas, 04 = 4 aberturas, 06 = 6 aberturas

Utilize (XX) para especificar o número de aberturas: 06 = 6 aberturas, 08 = 8 aberturas, 12 = 12 aberturas

ESPELHO MAX À PROVA DE VIOLAÇÃO Os novos espelhos MAX da Siemon à prova de violações representam uma solução segura e discreta para a montagem de nossa linha completa de módulos MAX. Este projeto tem como principal característica uma base inteiriça que aceita até seis módulos MAX e é fixada por uma tampa sólida e uma opção de parafuso estrela inviolável ou parafuso padrão. A base pode ser montada em qualquer tomada simples. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MX-TFP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho simples à prova de violação para seis módulos MAX angulares

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 80 = marfim claro

ACESSÓRIOS NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT-FP-LBL-104* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 folhas de etiquetas para espelhos que podem ser usadas em qualquer impressora 8,5 x 11 padrão, 104 etiquetas por folha. MX-FP-CVR-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pacote com 100 tampas de etiquetas para espelhos MAX Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 00 = transparente, 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 80 = marfim claro *Visite nosso website ou entre em contato com o Departamento de Suporte Técnico para obter o software para impressão de etiquetas.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

PATENTEADO ENHANCED

MuTOA MAX® NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MX-MMO-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de tomada multiusuário/telecomunicações com cintas para cabos, parafusos de montagem e fita adesiva altura: 200,2 mm (7,88 pol); largura: 200,2 mm (7,88 pol); profundidade: 57,0 mm (2,25 cm pol) Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro Bandeja de gerenciamento para fibras ópticas vendida separadamente (veja abaixo) ACESSÓRIOS DESCRIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA CT-MMO-MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto de 3 ímãs para caixa multiusuário/multimídia FMT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja para gerenciamento de fibras ópticas, para uso com o MAX MUTOA

CAIXA DE TOMADA PARA FIBRA ÓPTICA

PATENTEADO

A discreta Caixa de Tomada para Fibra Óptica da Siemon (FOB2) é a solução ideal para trazer a fibra óptica até a mesa de trabalho. A caixa FOB2 oferece um método bem definido para o gerenciamento dos cabos de fibra óptica na Área de Trabalho, proporcionando um ponto de conexão para até 12 conectores de fibra óptica (ou 6 coaxiais) com o uso de engates deslizantes. Um espelho simples acoplado é montado na base da caixa FOB2 e acomoda até seis módulos MAX ou dois acopladores CT®.

FOB2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inclui base, tampa, etiquetas de designação, tampas com etiqueta em branco, hardware de montagem, cintas para cabos, ícones e três engates cegos

FOB2-GRD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inclui base, tampa estendida, etiquetas de designação, tampas com etiqueta em branco, hardware de montagem, cintas para cabos, ícones e três engates cegos

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 80 = marfim claro

PATENTEADO

ENGATES DE CAIXA DE TOMADA PARA FIBRA ÓPTICA

FOB-BZL-SA-01 . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador ST duplex, (2 fibras)

FOB-BZL-SC-01. . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador SC duplex, (2 fibras)

FOB-BZL-MT1-01 . . . . . . . . . 1 adaptador MT-RJ duplex, (2 fibras)

FOB-BZL-LC(X)1-01 . . . . . . . . 1 adaptador LC duplex, (2 fibras)

FOB-BZL-LC(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . 2 adaptadores LC duplex, (4 fibras)

FOB-BZL-BL-01 . . . . . . . . . . . Engate cego

FOB-BZL-MT-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 2 adaptadores MT-RJ duplex, (4 fibras)

Utilize (X) para especificar a cor do adaptador LC: cego = bege, U = azul; Todos os outros engates disponíveis somente na cor preta. Nota: Todos os adaptadores para fibra óptica são "universais" para aceitar conexões de fibra óptica multimodo ou monomodo.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ACOPLADORES CT® 6 As inovações únicas de engenharia da Siemon usadas no projeto dos acopladores CT 6 oferecem total compatibilidade com as especificações da Categoria 6 para hardware de conexão para todas as combinações de pares até 250 MHz.

Compatibilidade retroativa assegurada — pode ser utilizado com cabos modulares MC® 5 para compatibilidade com a Categoria 5e

Utiliza ferramentas de terminação 110 padrão

Todas as tomadas são compatíveis com as opções de pinagem T568A e T568B

Podem ser utilizados Acopladores CT 6 angulares com portas opcionais acionadas por molas para proteger as tomadas modulares contra contaminantes externos

O projeto de "alimentação por gravidade" dos acopladores angulares controla o raio de curvatura do cordão modular e proteje fisicamente o ponto de conexão contra danos externos

Encaixa-se rapidamente aos espelhos ou patch panels CT e pode ser facilmente removido com o uso de uma pequena chave de fenda para acessar o cabo

NEXT PERFORMANCE -40 -50

Limit (dB)

-60

Typical -70

Worst Case Margin at 250 MHz Worst Case 0.84 dB Typical 4.37 dB

-80 -90 -100

100

250

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

FREQUENCY (MHz)

EXCEDE A CATEGORIA 6 A tecnologia Tri-Balance™ patenteada garante total compatibilidade com as especificações propostas para a Categoria 6.

TERMINAÇÃO RÁPIDA O Pyramid™ Wire Entry System nos novos blocos S310® separa condutores de pares quando da amarração de cabos para simplificar e reduzir o tempo de instalação.

DESEMPENHO SUPERIOR Use os cordões modulares MC 6 para obter o máximo desempenho dos módulos CT 6 da Siemon.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

PATENTEADO

ACOPLADORES CT® 6 ACOPLADORES ANGULARES CT-C6-C6-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador angular duplo, pinagem universal T568A/B

A CT-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador angular único, pinagem universal T568A/B

DICA TÉCNICA! Os acopladores angulares são recomendados para aplicações na Área de Trabalho e os acopladores planos são recomendados para aplicações em patch panels.

Acrescente "D" para a opção de porta acionada por mola em acopladores angulares. ACOPLADORES PLANOS CT-F-C6-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador plano duplo, pinagem universal T568A/B

CT-F-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador plano único, pinagem universal T568A/B

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro, 82 = branco alpino Acrescente "B" ao final do número da peça para pacote de produto a granel com 100 acopladores (inclui somente acopladores e ícones — tampas de terminação e cintas para cabos estão disponíveis separadamente). Os acopladores incluem um ícone colorido (transparente para preto) e uma tampa de terminação para cada porta, além de um ícone vermelho e um azul.

PATENTEADO

ACOPLADORES CT 5E ACOPLADORES ANGULARES CT-C5-C5-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador angular duplo, pinagem universal T568A/B

CT-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador angular único, pinagem universal T568A/B

DICA TÉCNICA! Os acopladores angulares são recomendados para aplicações na Área de Trabalho e os acopladores planos são recomendados para aplicações em patch panels.

Acrescente "D" para a opção de porta acionada por mola em acopladores angulares. ACOPLADORES PLANOS CT-F-C5-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador plano duplo, pinagem universal T568A/B

CT-F-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador plano único, pinagem universal T568A/B

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro, 82 = branco alpino

Acrescente "B" ao final do número da peça para pacote de produto a granel com 100 acopladores (inclui somente acopladores e ícones — tampas de terminação e cintas para cabos estão disponíveis separadamente). Os acopladores incluem um ícone colorido (transparente para preto); 2 tampas de terminação e uma cinta para cabos para cada porta, além de um ícone vermelho e um azul.

OUTROS ACOPLADORES CT CT-AUD-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador plano com 2 conectores de áudio

CT-BLNK-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador cego plano

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro

OUTROS ACOPLADORES CT PLANOS

PATENTEADO

Os acopladores CT planos proporcionam uma grande variedade de configurações de pinagens para voz e para dados específicos. Eles estão disponíveis com tomadas modulares únicas ou duplas. ACOPLADORES DUPLOS CT-(XX)-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador plano duplo

OPÇÕES DE TOMADA: U3 = tomada de 3 pares e 6 posições, USOC U4 = tomada de 4 pares, USOC Obs: Use U3 para USOC de 1 e 2 pares.

Utilize 1º (XX) para especificar a tomada A (Veja à direita) Utilize 2º (XX) para especificar a tomada B (Veja à direita) Utilize 3º (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro, 82 = branco alpino W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ACOPLADORES CT® COM ADAPTADOR PARA FIBRA ÓPTICA MT-RJ E LC Os acopladores para fibra óptica CT MT-RJ e LC Siemon se encaixam em nossos espelhos da série CT existentes, adaptadores para Montagem de Tomadas de Telecomunicações Multiusuário (MuTOA) e para móveis modulares. Os acopladores estão disponíveis nas configurações para 2 e 4 cabos de fibra óptica. Estão disponíveis as versões plana e angular. Todos os adaptadores para fibra óptica são "universais" para aceitar conexões de fibra óptica multimodo ou monomodo.

MT-RJ CT-MT-(XX) Acoplador plano com 1 adaptador MT-RJ duplex (2 fibras)

CT-MT-MT-(XX) Acoplador plano com 2 adaptadores MT-RJ duplex (4 fibras)

CT-A-MT-(XX) Acoplador angular com 1 adaptador MT-RJ duplex (2 fibras)

CT-A-MT-MT-(XX) Acoplador angular com 2 adaptadores MT-RJ duplex (4 fibras)

LC CT-LC(X)-(XX) Acoplador plano com 1 adaptador LC duplex (2 fibras)

CT-LC(X)-LC(X)-(XX) Acoplador plano com 2 adaptadores LC duplex (4 fibras)

CT-A-LC(X)-(XX) Acoplador angular com 1 adaptador LC duplex (2 fibras)

CT-A-LC(X)-LC(X)-(XX) Acoplador angular com 2 adaptadores LC duplex (4 fibras)

Utilize (X) para especificar a cor do adaptador LC: em branco = bege, U = azul Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro Os acopladores incluem um ícone colorido (transparente para preto); além de um ícone vermelho e um azul.

ACOPLADORES CT PARA ADAPTADOR DE FIBRA ÓPTICA SC E ST

PATENTEADO

A linha de acopladores para fibra óptica CT consiste de adaptadores SC, ST e híbridos SC/ST. Os acopladores angulares destacam-se por nosso conceito patenteado de alimentação por gravidade para o controle do raio de curvatura dos cabos de fibra óptica na Área de Trabalho. Todos os adaptadores para fibra óptica são "universais" para aceitar conexões de fibra óptica multimodo ou monomodo. CT-SC-SC-(XX) Acoplador plano com 1 adaptador SC duplex (2 fibras)

CT-SA-SA-(XX) Acoplador plano com 1 adaptador ST duplex (2 fibras)

CT-AC-AC-(XX) Acoplador plano com 1 adaptador ST-para-SC duplex (lado da frente = SC) (2 fibras)

CT-A-SC-SC-(XX) Acoplador angular com 1 adaptador SC duplex (2 fibras)

CT-A-SA-SA-(XX) Acoplador angular com 1 adaptador ST duplex (2 fibras)

CT-A-AC-AC-(XX) Acoplador angular com 1 adaptador ST-para-SC duplex (lado da frente = SC) (2 fibras)

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro Os acopladores incluem um ícone colorido (transparente para preto); além de um ícone vermelho e um azul.

ACESSÓRIOS

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ícones coloridos (telefone em um lado, computador no verso) TAB-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ícones cegos coloridos para acopladores CT-ICON-LBL* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 folhas de etiquetas para etiquetas de identificação transparentes que podem ser usadas em qualquer impressora 8,5 x 11 padrão, 168 etiquetas por folha. S110-TC-2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Capas de terminação de dois pares para blocos S110 TW-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suportes para amarração de cabos de 102mm (4 pol.), pacote com 1000

Estão disponíveis também ícones de identificação Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 00 = transparente**, 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, impressos a laser (customized). 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde, 08 = violeta, 09 = laranja, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 60 = marrom, 80 = marfim claro Acrescentar "B" para pacote a granel com 100 ícones de identificação. *Visite nosso website ou entre em contato com o Departamento de Suporte Técnico para obter o software para impressão de etiquetas. **Disponível apenas em TAB-(XX). Outras cores disponíveis de CT-ICON. Entre em contato com nosso Departamento de Serviços ao 01 03 05 07 09 25 80 00 02 04 06 08 20 60 Cliente para obter informações sobre pedidos.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

ESPELHOS INTERNACIONAIS CT® CT-FP-DKIT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit único de espelhos padrão alemão, para um acoplador CT®. Inclui espelho, anel de montagem e quadro de afastamento

CT2-HFP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho horizontal padrão australiano/italiano para um acoplador CT

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 80 = marfim claro, 82 = branco alpino

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro

CT-FP-DKIT-02 mostrado com acoplador CT

ADAPTADORES INTERNACIONAIS CT Estes adaptadores encaixam-se em aberturas padrão para permitir o uso de um acoplador CT. CTE-A-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de 50mm x 50mm, inclui etiquetas e porta etiquetas transparentes

CTE-45-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de 45mm x 45mm Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 82 = branco alpino

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 80 = marfim claro, 82 = branco alpino

CT-RFP-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de 45mm X 50mm , branco

CTE-45-02 mostrado com acoplador CT

Entre em contato com nosso Departamento de Suporte Técnico para solucionar dúvidas sobre as dimensões de montagem.

ESPELHOS CT PADRÃO BRITÂNICO Os espelhos padrão britânico da série CT são compatíveis com os padrões britânicos (85mm X 85mm) e foram projetados para uso com nossa linha completa de acopladores CT.

CTE2-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit único de espelhos padrão britânico para um acoplador CT. (0,35mm de profundidade)

CTE4-FP22-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit único de espelhos padrão britânico para dois acopladores CT. Inclui etiqueta na parte superior do espelho. (0,63mm de profundidade)

CTE4-FP-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit duplo de espelhos padrão britânico para dois acopladores CT (0,35mm de profundidade)

CTE4-FP-02 mostrado com dois acopladores CT

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 82 = branco alpino

CAIXAS DE SUPERFÍCIE PADRÃO BRITÂNICO As caixas CTE2 e CTE4 oferecem recursos de montagem de superfície para os espelhos da série CT padrão britânico apresentados acima.

CTE4-BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de superfície dupla para espelhos CT padrão britânico, branco

CTE2-BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de superfície única para espelhos CT padrão britânico, branco

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ESPELHOS CT®

PATENTEADO ENHANCED

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT4-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Espelho plástico único para dois acopladores

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT8-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Espelho plástico duplo para quatro acopladores

CT2-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Espelho plástico único para um acoplador

CT2-HFPA-(XX)* . . . . . . . Espelho horizontal plástico único para um acoplador com capas para parafuso (parafusos nº 6-32)

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro Os espelhos incluem etiqueta(s) de designação, tampa(s) para etiqueta e parafusos. Acrescente "B" ao final do número da peça para pacote de produto a granel, (inclui 100 espelhos CT2 ou CT4 ou 50 espelhos CT8, parafusos, etiquetas de designação e tampas para etiqueta). *Não disponível em embalagens com grandes quantidades.

PATENTEADO

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

ESPELHOS CT DE AÇO INOXIDÁVEL

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT4-FP-SS-L. . . . . . . . . . Espelho de aço inoxidável único para dois acopladores com etiquetas e portaetiquetas

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT4-FP-SS . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho de aço inoxidável único para dois acopladores

CT8-FP-SS-L. . . . . . . . . . Espelho de aço inoxidável duplo para quatro acopladores com etiquetas e porta-etiquetas

CT8-FP-SS . . . . . . . . . . . Espelho de aço inoxidável duplo para quatro acopladores

ACESSÓRIOS NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT-FP-LBL-104* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 folhas de etiquetas para espelhos que podem ser usadas em qualquer impressora 8,5 x 11 padrão, 104 etiquetas por folha. CT-FP-CVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pacote com 100 tampas com etiqueta em branco para espelhos CT *Visite nosso website ou entre em contato com o Departamento de Suporte Técnico para obter o software para impressão de etiquetas.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

CAIXAS DE SUPERFÍCIE PARA ESPELHOS Estas caixas oferecem a opção de montagem em superfície para espelhos MAX® ou CT® simples e duplos. Estas caixas são perfeitas para instalações em que a tomada da Área de Trabalho não pode ser embutida em uma parede ou em uma caixa de piso. As caixas são compatíveis também com nossos anéis de afastamento caso seja necessária uma profundidade adicional atrás do espelho. Hardware de montagem não incluído.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT4-BOX-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de superfície para espelho único altura: 119,3 mm (4,70 pol); largura: 74,8 mm (2,95 pol); profundidade: 40,6 mm (1,60 pol)

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT8-BOX-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de superfície para espelho duplo altura: 119,3 mm (4,70 pol); largura: 120,8 mm (4,76 pol); profundidade: 40,6 mm (1,60 pol)

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adesivo posterior (pacote com 10) MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ímã posterior (pacote com 10)

Nota: Duas tampas com partes traseiras magnéticas ou auto-adesivas necessárias para caixas CT8.

ADAPTADORES PARA MÓVEIS MODULARES CT O adaptador modular para mobiliário CT aceita qualquer acoplador CT e encaixa-se diretamente nas aberturas de tomadas para comunicação* nos principais sistemas de móveis modulares, incluindo Steelcase, Hon Industries, Haworth, Kimball e DRG.

67,46 – 69,85 mm (2,656 – 2,750 pol)

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT-MFP-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador padrão (aceita um acoplador CT®)

34,16 – 35,69 mm (1,345 – 1,405 pol)

Requisitos de Recorte do Painel Espessura do painel: 0,76 – 2,03 mm (0,030 – 0,080 pol)

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro Nota: Para móveis Herman Miller Action Office Série 3, 152mm (6 pol.), painel vertical, use nosso CT4-FP padrão para montar dois acopladores CT (veja página 20). *As aberturas para tomada do móvel, a espessura do painel e a folga do encaminhamento podem variar. Consulte o fabricante do móvel para obter informações sobre as dimensões reais a fim de determinar a compatibilidade.

PATENTEADO

MUTOA CT NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CT-MMO-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de tomada multiusuário/telecomunicações com cintas para cabos, parafusos de montagem e fita adesiva altura: 200,2 mm (7,88 pol); largura: 200,2 mm (7,88 pol); profundidade: 57,0 mm (2,25 pol) Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro Bandeja para gerenciamento de fibra óptica vendida separadamente (veja abaixo) ACESSÓRIOS DESCRIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA CT-MMO-MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto de 3 ímãs para caixa multiusuário/multimídia FMT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja para gerenciamento de fibra óptica para CT MUTOA Nota: Chips de retenção de emenda disponíveis para emendas de cabos de fibra óptica internos. Entre em contato com nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente para obter informações sobre pedidos. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CAIXAS DE SUPERFÍCIE SM® As caixas de superfície SM apresentam um design compacto e fácil de instalar. Os componentes UTP, ScTP, de Fibra Óptica e Coaxiais podem ser pedidos pré-montados ou adquiridos separadamente e rapidamente instalados na base. Os recursos de terminação de cabos S110® e de gerenciamento de múltiplos cabos permitem uma instalação simples e bem organizada.

Tampa com presilha com áreas de designação para ícones/etiquetas de identificação e etiquetas para anotações

As caixas estão disponíveis em branco, cinza, marfim, branco brilhante, e marfim claro

Os pontos de fixação da cinta para cabos permitem um seguro alívio de tensão para o cabo

Previsão para perfurações nos três lados para entrada de cabo/conduíte

Disponíveis nos tamanhos para 1, 2, 4 e 6 aberturas As tomadas estâo disponíveis para cabos blindados e não blindados

Parafusos e fita adesiva incluídos; ímãs são opcionais Os engates para tomadas modulares oferecem portas de vedação acionadas por mola para maior proteção contra poeira e outros contaminantes

COMPATÍVEIS COM MÓDULOS MAX® PLANOS Todas as caixas de montagem de superfície SM da Siemon incluem um adaptador MX-SM que permite que módulos MT-RJ, FC, RCA, BNC, categorias 3, 5e e 6 (MAX planos) sejam instalados nas caixas SM.

GERENCIAMENTO DE FIBRAS As caixas de montagem em superfície SM4 e SM6 incluem suportes para gerenciamento de fibras ópticas e permitem o armazenamento de sobras de fibra na área de trabalho.

A SOLUÇÃO IDEAL DE MONTAGEM DE SUPERFÍCIE O design durável e discreto ajuda a proteger as tomadas contra contato indireto.

atí

CAIXAS SM MONTADAS NA FÁBRICA

SM1-5-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de superfície de 1saída

SM2-5-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de superfície de 2 saídas

SM4-5-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de superfície de 4 saídas

SM6-5-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de superfície de 6 saídas

Utilize 1º (XX) para especificar a pinagem para todas as saídas: T4 = pinagem T568A; A4 = pinagem T568B

Use o segundo (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 80 = marfim claro Para porta de vedação acionada por mola opcional, acrescente "D" Todas as caixas SM montadas em fábrica incluem: ícones, tampas de terminação, cintas para cabos, parafusos e fita adesiva; Para configurações personalizadas, consulte nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente.

ENHANCED

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

CAIXAS SM MONTADAS EM CAMPO As caixas de superfície montadas em campo não incluem conectores.

SM1-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de 1 saída com tampa, base, engate, ícones, tampas de terminação, cintas para cabos, parafusos, fita adesiva e um adaptador MAX plano

SM2-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de 2 saídas com tampa, base, engate, ícones, tampas de terminação, cintas para cabos, parafusos, fita adesiva e dois adaptadores MAX planos

SM4-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de 4 saídas com tampa, base, engate, ícones, tampas de terminação, cintas para cabos, parafusos, fita adesiva e quatro adaptadores MAX planos

SM6-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de 6 saídas com tampa, base, engate, ícones, tampas de terminação, cintas para cabos, parafusos, fita adesiva e seis adaptadores MAX planos

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 20 = marfim, 80 = marfim claro. Acrescente "D" para porta de vedação acionada por mola opcional.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SMC-5-T4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tomada modular, T568A

ÁREA DE TRABALHO

COMPONENTES DE TOMADA MODULAR SM®

PATENTEADO SMC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outras tomadas UTP

atí

SMC-5-A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tomada modular, T568B

Utilize (XX) para especificar a opção de tomada: U3 = tomada de 3 pares, 6 posições, USOC; U4 = tomada de 4 pares, 8 posições, USOC Obs: Use U3 para USOC de 1 e 2 pares.

ENGATES ADAPTADORES PARA FIBRA ÓPTICA SM

SMC-SA-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engate duplo com 2 adaptadores para fibra óptica ST (2 fibras)

SMC-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engate duplo com 1 adaptador para fibra óptica SC duplex (2 fibras)

PATENTEADO

SMC-LC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engate duplo com 2 adaptadores para fibra óptica LC (4 fibras)

Todos os adaptadores são "universais" para aceitar conexões de fibra óptica multimodo ou monomodo. Utilize (X) para especificar a cor do adaptador LC: em branco = bege, U = azul Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 04 = cinza, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 80 = marfim claro

A conectividade MT-RJ pode ser obtida por meio do uso dos módulos MT-RJ MAX® planos juntamente com os adaptadores MX-SM, que estão incluídos em todas as caixas SM montadas em campo.

ACESSÓRIOS DA SÉRIE SM

PATENTEADO

SM-BLNK-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserção cega única para a abertura não utilizada

MX-SM-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engate adaptador MAX que permite a montagem de módulos planos MAX em caixas SM, consulte a página 22

SM-DOOR-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engate duplo com 2 portas de vedação acionadas por mola

SM2-MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dois ímãs para montagem de caixas SM1, SM2 ou SM4 Encomende dois SM2-MAG para a montagem das caixas SM6

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 80 = marfim claro

ADAPTADORES EM Y MODULARES Adaptadores em Y são “divisores” que convertem uma tomada de 4 pares em múltiplas tomadas. Os adaptadores em Y utilizam o plugue UP-2468 patenteado pela Siemon, que permite a utilização dos adaptadores em tomadas de 6 ou 8 posições. O corpo do adaptador pode ser girado 180° para a visualização dos ícones coloridos ou das pinagens do adaptador em Y, que estão impressas no lado oposto. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO YA4-4U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splitter de 4 vias modular, T568B YT4-4U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splitter de 4 vias modular, T568A YA4-U2-U2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide uma tomada T568B de 4 pares para aplicações Token Ring ou de voz em qualquer uma das tomadas YT4-U2-U2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide uma tomada T568A de 4 pares para aplicações Token Ring ou de voz em qualquer uma das tomadas

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO YT4-E2-U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide uma tomada T568A/T568B de 4 pares para aplicações 10BASE-T, Token Ring ou de voz YT4-E2-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide uma tomada T568A/T568B de 4 pares para aplicações 10BASE-T em qualquer uma das tomadas Y-BRIDGE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liga em ponte todos os pares de tomada. Compatível com qualquer pinagem. Proporciona uma tomada de 4 pares adicional com a mesma pinagem

TERA™ Mais uma vez a Siemon ultrapassa as barreiras do cabeamento de cobre com o revolucionário conector TERA totalmente blindado. Quando instalado como parte de uma solução TERA ele oferece o dobro da largura de banda da Categoria 7/ Classe F. Esta largura de banda adicional é crítica para aplicações com altos requisitos de banda como vídeo de banda larga que opera com freqüências da ordem de 862 MHz. Vídeo de banda larga, dados de alta velocidade e aplicações de voz podem ser atendidas por uma única tomada com cabo SSTP (totalmente blindado). Os patch cords TERA vêm em opções de 1, 2 e 4 pares para atender à várias aplicações com uma única tomada TERA tanto na área de trabalho quanto na sala de telecomunicações.

Termina cabos de Categoria 7/Classe F totalmente blindados (SSTP)

PRODUTOS BLINDADOS

A identificação da porta do plugue é feita por meio das capas coloridas

OPÇÕES DE MONTAGEM As tomadas são compatíveis com todo hardware da série MAX®

O conector assegura a terminação adequada da malha do cabo

Um projeto compacto permite que várias tomadas sejam montadas em proximidade pela frente ou pela parte posterior dos espelhos

FÁCIL INSTALAÇÃO A ferramenta CPT-T reduz o tempo de preparo e terminação do componente para aproximadamente três minutos

O projeto de quadrante blindado isola completamente os pares, virtualmente eliminando o crosstalk

As tomadas incluem uma porta articulada para impedir a exposição à poeira e outros contaminantes.

PATCH CORDS TERA Os patch cords TERA estão disponíveis em 1, 2 e 4 pares para atender a uma grande variedade de aplicações

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS BLINDADOS

TOMADA TERA™ DE 4 PARES

PATENTEADO

As tomadas TERA são o fator-chave para o desempenho do TERA. As tomadas aceitam plugues de 1, 2 e 4 pares e terminam cabos totalmente blindados de Categoria 7/Classe F. As tomadas TERA podem ser usadas tanto na área de trabalho quanto na sala de telecomunicações.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO T7F-01-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tomada TERA com porta preta, ícone e boot

FERRAMENTA DE PREPARAÇÃO DE CABOS TERA A ferramenta de preparação de cabos TERA usa um processo com patente pendente para reduzir significativamente o tempo necessário para preparar cabos totalmente blindados (SSTP). A ferramenta inclui uma matriz de inserção com uma lâmina, que é especificamente projetada para retirar o revestimento e a isolação de cabos SSTP de quatro pares sem danificar os condutores. Um gabarito também está incluído para fazer o pré-alinhamento dos pares do cabo assegurando-se o posicionamento adequado dos mesmos durante a terminação.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CPT-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferramenta de preparação TERA Inclui a matriz CPT-DIE-T4 e o gabarito de preparação de cabos TERA. CPT-DIE-T4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matriz sobressalente de para cabos SSTP de 4 pares

PATENTEADO

PATCH CORDS TERA Expanda a potência e flexibilidade do seu sistema de cabeamento com uma variedade de cordões de manobra (patch cords) TERA projetados para ir ao encontro às suas necessidades de largura de banda hoje e no futuro. Estão disponíveis opções de cordões TERA-para-TERA e TERA-para plugue modular (RJ 45). A modularidade dos plugues de 1 e 2 pares permite que múltiplas aplicações sejam atendidas a partir de uma única tomada.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO T4-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatível com a Categoria 7, cordão de 4 pares TERA-TERA, capa marfim, boot colorido T4A-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatível com a Categoria 6, cordão de 4 pares TERA-MC® 6 blindado RJ-45, cabo LS0H capa marfim, boot colorido, configuração T568B T4T-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatível com a Categoria 6, 4 pares TERA-MC 6 RJ-45, cabo LS0H capa marfim, boot colorido, configuração T568A T2E2-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatível com a Categoria 5e, cordão de 2 pares TERA-MC 5 blindado RJ-45, cabo LS0H capa marfim, boot colorido, configuração 10BASE-T T2UT-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatível com a Categoria 5e, 2 pares TERA-MC 5 RJ-45, cabo LS0H capa cinza, boot colorido, configuração Token Ring T1U1-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 par UTP TERA-USOC de seis posições - RJ45, cabo LS0H, capa cinza, boot colorido, para voz

Use o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento: 01 = 1m (3,28 pés), 02 = 2m (6,56 pés.), 03 = 3m (9,84 pés), 05 = 5m (16,4 pés.) Utilize o segundo (XX) para especificar a cor da capa: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Nota: A terminação de cordões modulares com plugues modulares pelo instalador não é recomendada e tais cordões não estão em conformidade com a Garantia do TERA.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

MÓDULOS SCREENED (BLINDADOS) MAX® 5e E MAX 6

PATENTEADO

Os módulos screened (blindados) MAX 5e excedem as especificações de componentes das categorias 5e e 6 e ao mesmo tempo cumprem com os padrões da indústria quanto à eficiência da blindagem. Os módulos podem terminar o cabo ScTP ou o cabo totalmente blindado SSTP. As terminações são rápidas e fáceis, tanto a preparação do cabo quanto a terminação do módulo podem ser completadas em menos de 2 minutos.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MX5-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo blindado angular MAX 5e com pinagem T568A/B MX5-FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo blindado plano MAX 5e com pinagem T568A/B MX5-KS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo blindado tipo keystone MAX 5e com pinagem T568A/B MX6-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo blindado angular MAX 6 com pinagem T568A/B MX6-FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo blindado plano MAX 6 com pinagem T568A/B MX6-KS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo blindado tipo keystone MAX 6 com pinagem T568A/B Os módulos incluem um ícone vermelho e um azul. Nota: A versão de keystone foi projetada para a integração com a montagem de vários produtos internacionais e não é compatível com o hardware de montagem da série MAX. Os módulos screened MAX 5e e MAX 6 requerem um patch cord TERA™-MAX para aplicações em Salas de Telecomunicações. Para módulos angulares ou planos (flat) a porta deve ser pedida separadamente. Veja página 24 DICA TÉCNICA! Os módulos MAX blindados categorias 5e e 6 podem ser agrupados lateralmente apenas nos espelhos e adaptadores TERA-MAX (veja abaixo). Use tampas cegas MAX na área de trabalho como espaçadores quando necessário (exemplo, quatro MX6-S e dois MX-BL-(XX) são necessários em um espelho MX-FP-S-06-(XX)).

CORDÕES MODULARES DE MANOBRA SCREENED (BLINDADOS) MC® 5 E MC 6

PATENTEADO

Os cordões modulares screened (blindados) da Siemon são montados em fábrica e testados usando-se analisadores de rede de laboratório para assegurar que a montagem seja compatível com as Categorias 5, 5e ou 6. Os plugues modulares possuem uma blindagem global e estão de acordo com as especificações FCC CFR 47 parte 68 subparte F e da IEC 60603-7. As montagens com pinagens T568A/T568B incluem capas de alívio de tensão coloridas e estão disponíveis em comprimentos padrão ou personalizados.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MC5S-(XX)M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão Categoria 5 blindado, terminado em ambas as extremidades, 4 pares flexíveis, cabo LS0H, configurações T568A/T568B, capa colorida/boot MC6S-(XX)M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Cordão Categoria 6 blindado, terminado em ambas as extremidades, 4 pares flexíveis, cabo LS0H, configuração T568A/T568B, capa colorida/boot

Utilize o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento do cabo: : 01 = 1m (3,3 pés), 02 = 2m (6,6 pés.), 03 = 3m (9,8 pés.), 5 = 5m (16,4 pés.) Utilize o segundo (XX) para especificar a cor da capa: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Adicionar “B” ao final do número da peça para pacote com 100 cordões.

PRODUTOS BLINDADOS

SUPORTES PARA ATERRAMENTO Os suportes para aterramento fornecem pontos para fixação e de aterramento para cabos totalmente blindados (SSTP) ou screened (ScTP) encaminhados para a parte traseira dos patch panels CT®.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO SCTP-GRD-1RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oferece gerenciamento dos cabos, dezesseis cabos de jumper de 102mm (4 pol) e um terminal de aterramento para aplicações ScTP. SCTP-GRD-JMPR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dezesseis cabos de jumper de 102mm (4 pol)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS BLINDADOS

atí

PATENTEADO

COMPONENTES DE TOMADA MODULAR SM® 5e TIPO SCREENED (BLINDADA) Componentes de tomada modular SM 5e tipo screened (blindada) fornecem uma solução de montagem em superfície de Categoria 5e screened quando usados com as caixas de superfície Siemon série SM.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO SMC-5-A4-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo de montagem em superfície T568B, compatível com a Categoria 5e screened SMC-5-T4-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo de montagem em superfície T568A, compatível com a Categoria 5e screened

Para informações sobre as caixas de superfície da série SM,veja a página 28.

atí

PATENTEADO

O patch panel screened (blindado) tipo HD5 fornece uma solução modular de alta densidade para a terminação de cabo de 4 pares screened (ScTP). O patch panel HD5 ScTP fornece um desempenho de transmissão que está em conformidade com os requisitos da Categoria 5e e também está de acordo com as normas do CENELEC e ISO/IEC, no tocante à eficiência da blindagem. A tecnologia de contatos da Siemon permite o uso da ferramenta de impacto para multi-pares da Siemon para minimizar o tempo de terminação. A continuidade da blindagem pode ser conseguida usando-se a presilha de aterramento ou a haste. Dois terminais de aterramento são fornecidos (um em cada lado do painel) para fixar o cabo de aterramento de 4,115 mm (6 AWG) à terra e para conectar múltiplos painéis juntos. Um suporte opcional para gerenciamento de cabos está disponível para guiar adequadamente os cabos de/para a parte traseira do painel. O gerenciador de cabos embutido e o alívio de tensão ficam na traseira do painel.

PATCH PANELS (PAINÉIS DE LIGAÇÃO) SCREENED (BLINDADO) HD5®

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS HD5-S-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 24 portas screened, pinagem T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

DICA TÉCNICA! Painéis CT® com acopladores screened CT ou painéis TERA™-MAX® com módulos MAX screened também podem ser usados para soluções de ligações modulares. Os painéis incluem etiquetas de designação, cintas para cabos e suportes de montagem. Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U

TERA-MAX PATCH PANELS Os patch panels TERA-MAX de 19 polegadas oferecem um desempenho e confiabilidade superiores em uma solução modular blindada de alta densidade. Qualquer combinação de tomadas MAX blindadas e TERA pode ser obtida nestes painéis. Barras e cordões de aterramento devem ser usados para uma proteção máxima contra interferências externas. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO TM-PNL-16-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 16 portas TERA-MAX , preto, 1 RMS (1U) TM-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 16 portas TERA-MAX, metálico, 1 RMS (1U) TM-PNL-24-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 24 portas TERA-MAX , preto, 1 RMS (1U) TM-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 24 portas TERA-MAX, metálico, 1 RMS (1U) Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U

ESPELHOS E ADAPTADORES TERA-MAX Projetados para mercados onde sistemas de trunking são usados, os espelhos de 50 mm TERA podem alojar tomadas TERA em um ângulo adequado para manter o raio de curvatura apropriado. O espelho aceita um ou dois módulos MAX ou TERA blindados. Parafusos, placa de montagem em metal, porta etiquetas e etiquetas estão inclusos. Os adaptadores de 45 mm TERA-MAX permitem que dois módulos TERA ou MAX blindados sejam montados em aberturas padrão de espelhos de 45 mm. T50-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MX-45-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .

MX-45-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .

Espelho TERA-MAX de 50mm x 50mm para duas portas

Adaptador/espelho de 45mm x 45mm Uma porta

Adaptador/espelho de 45mm x 45mm Duas portas

Use (XX) para especificar a cor: 02 = branco, 80 = marfim claro, 82 = branco alpino W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Use (XX) para especificar a cor: 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 82 = branco alpino

PATCH PANELS 10G 6™ HD® O nível superior de desempenho do patch panel 10G 6 HD é obtido por meio de um projeto completo incluindo otimização da tomada da geometria de seus pinos, e procedimentos exigentes de inspeção e controle de qualidade. Quando usado com um patch cord 10G 6 MC o resultado é uma solução de cross-connect com margem típica de NEXT de 5 dB ao longo de toda a escala de freqüências entre 1 e 300 MHz. Combine os patch panels 10G 6 HD com os novos módulos 10G 6 MAX® da Siemon e patch cords 10G 6 MC para uma solução completa de canal com um PS ACR de pior caso além dos 300 MHz e resultados típicos acima de 300 MHz. Esta solução de cabeamento atende às especificações de desempenho das redes de hoje e está preparada para as aplicações multi-gigabit emergentes.

300 MHz

DICA TÉCNICA! Os patch panels HD oferecem esquemas de configurações universais de pinagem, ambas: T568A e T568B.

Componentes Categoria 6 com resposta até 300 MHz

Desempenho superior para interconexões, cross-connects ou aplicações em pontos de consolidação Saídas modulares em conformidade com as normas FCC CFR 47, Subparte F e IEC 60603-7 e possuem 50 micropolegadas de ouro nos contatos

Acabamento anodizado preto, bordas arrendodadas e painel livre de parafusos oferecem uma excelente aparência e estética

Terminação com ferramentas padrão bloco 110

Compatibilidade retroativa com a Categoria 5e e patch cords de categorias inferiores

LIGAÇÕES MODULARES

PYRAMID™ WIRE ENTRY SYSTEM O sistema de entrada de fios Pyramid nos blocos S310® separa os condutores dos pares na terminação dos cabos para reduzir o tempo de instalação.

PROTEÇÃO DE CIRCUITOS O gabinete metálico traseiro protege os circuitos impressos.

PATCH PANELS 10G 6 HD N DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS (U) HD6-24U . . . . . . . . Patch panel de 24 portas, configurações T568A/B . . . . . . . 1 HD6-48U . . . . . . . Patch panel de 48 portas, configurações T568A/B . . . . . . . 2 O

Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U

GERENCIADOR DE CABOS EMBUTIDO Inclui gerenciador de cabos traseiro para orientar corretamente os cabos até o ponto de terminação.

PATENTEADO Os painéis incluem gerenciador de cabos traseiro, porta-etiquetas de ícones, etiquetas de designação, cintas para cabos e suportes de montagem. Acrescente "B" para pacote de produto a granel de 5 painéis (gerenciadores de cabos traseiros e porta-etiquetas de ícones não incluídos, mas podem ser pedidos separadamente). Consulte o Serviço ao Cliente para outros tamanhos de painel.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

LIGAÇÕES MODULARES

PATENTEADO

PATCH PANELS HD® 6 NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS HD6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . painel de 16 portas, pinagem T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS HD6-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . painel de 96 portas, pinagem T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

HD6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . painel de 24 portas, pinagem T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

HD6-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . painel de 48 portas, pinagem T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Os painéis incluem gerenciador de cabos traseiro, porta-etiquetas de ícones, etiquetas de designação, cintas para cabos e suportes de montagem. Acrescente "B" para pacote de produto a granel de 5 painéis (gerenciadores de cabos traseiros e porta-etiquetas de ícones não incluídos, mas podem ser pedidos separadamente). Consulte o Serviço ao Cliente para outros tamanhos de painel. Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U

PATCH PANELS HD5®

PATENTEADO

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS HD5-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . painel de 24 portas, pinagem T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS HD5-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . painel de 96 portas, pinagem T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

HD5-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . painel de 48 portas, pinagem T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Os painéis incluem gerenciador de cabos traseiro, porta-ícones/etiqueta, etiquetas de designação, cintas para cabos e suportes de montagem. Acrescente "B" para pacote de produto a granel de 5 painéis (gerenciadores de cabos traseiros e porta-etiquetas de ícones não incluídos, mas podem ser pedidos separadamente). Consulte o Serviço ao Cliente para outros tamanhos de painel. Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U

HD 6 DE 12 PORTAS MONTADO EM SUPORTE S89D

HD5 DE 12 PORTAS MONTADO EM SUPORTE S89D

O HD6-89 propõe uma solução econômica para pequenas aplicações e é ideal para atualizar blocos de inserção S66™ em um design modular de alto desempenho.

O HD5-89 propõe uma solução econômica para pequenas aplicações e é ideal para atualizar blocos de inserção S66 em um design modular.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO HD6-89D-12. . . . . . . . . . . . Painel HD 6 de 12 portas, pinagem T568A/B, montado em suporte S89D altura: 254,0 mm (10,0 pol); largura: 85,9 mm (3,38 pol); profundidade: 60,2 mm (2,37 pol)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO HD5-89D-12. . . . . . . . . . . . Painel HD5 de 12 portas, pinagem T568A/B, montado em suporte S89D altura: 254,0 mm (10,0 pol); largura: 85,9 mm (3,38 pol); profundidade: 47,8 mm (1,88 pol)

l ve atí co

NOVO PATENTEADO

PAINEL HD5® QUICK-PATCH™ O novo painel HD Quick-Patch proporciona uma solução de ligações de Categoria 5 rápida e fácil para hubs 10/100BASE-T com conectores de 25 pares. O painel HD5 Quick-Patch incorpora muitos recursos e benefícios amigáveis, incluindo conectores traseiros que são levemente inclinados para possibilitar um fácil encaminhamento do cabo de 25 pares até o ponto de conexão e um gabinete metálico traseiro que protege os circuitos impressos. O painel anodizado na cor preta pode ser montado diretamente em um rack ou bastidor de 19 polegadas padrão com o hardware de montagem incluso. Porta-ícones/etiquetas e etiquetas de designação (inclusas).

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO HD5-QP-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel 10/100BASE-T de 48 portas (Pinos ativos 1, 2, 3 e 6 somente), quatro conectores de 25 pares (fêmea), 2 RMS

Os painéis incluem porta-ícones/etiquetas, etiquetas de designação e suportes de montagem. Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U

PATCH PANELS CT®

NO DA PEÇA

DESCRIÇÃO*

RMS

QUANTIDADE MÁXIMA DE ACOPLADORES CT

NO DA PEÇA

DESCRIÇÃO*

RMS

QUANTIDADE MÁXIMA DE ACOPLADORES CT

CT-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 16 portas . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

CT-PNL-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 48 portas . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CT-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 24 portas . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

CT-PNL-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 64 portas . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

CT-PNL-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 32 portas . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

LIGAÇÕES MODULARES

DICA TÉCNICA! Acopladores angulares são recomendados para aplicações em patch panels

CT-PNL-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 96 portas . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

*Número de portas quando configurado com dois acopladores de duas saídas CT Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U Para outros tamanhos de painel, entre em contato com o Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente Simeon.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

LIGAÇÕES MODULARES

PATCH PANELS MAX®

PATENTEADO

N DA PEÇA *DESCRIÇÃO* RMS MX-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 16 portas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 O

24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 24 portas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

MX-PNL-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel de 48 portas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Os painéis incluem gerenciador de cabos traseiro, etiquetas de designação, cintas para cabos e suportes de montagem. Os painéis MAX não são compatíveis com módulos MAX blindados. Use o painel TERA-MAX para aplicações que exigem blindagem (veja página 33). *Número de portas quando configurado com módulos MAX™ de porta simples (ou seja, o tamanho da porta pode ser o dobro se estiverem sendo utilizados módulos MT-RJ ou LC). Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U

ACESSÓRIOS OPCIONAIS

MX-PNL-LBL4* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 folhas de etiquetas para impressoras a laser para o painel MAX de 16 portas

MX-PNL-LBL6* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 folhas de etiquetas para impressoras a laser para os painéis MAX de 24 e de 48 portas

*Visite nosso website ou entre em contato com o Departamento de Suporte Técnico para obter o software para impressão de etiquetas

PAINÉIS CEGOS Os painéis cegos de preenchimento para racks são ideiais para instalações onde espaços abertos ou espaços de expansão em racks devem ser cobertos. Os painéis são cegos e em um dos lados há o logo da Siemon.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO PNL-BLNK-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Painel cego para rack de 19 polegadas

Utilize (X) para especificar a altura do espaço de montagem em rack do painel: 1 = 1 RMS; 2 = 2 RMS; 3 = 3 RMS; 4 = 4 RMS Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SISTEMAS DE RACK SIEMON RS

SISTEMA DE RACK RS2 DA SIEMON

SISTEMA DE RACK RS RS-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sistema de rack em alumínio para gerenciamento de cabos com dimensões 2,1 m (7 pés) x 19 pol. Inclui hardware de montagem do rack, 10 gerenciadores de cabos de alta capacidade, 10 gerenciadores de cabos de engate rápido, anéis de cabos e terminal de aterramento Adicionar "-S" para aço altura: 2,1 m (7 pés); largura: 609,6 mm (24 pol); profundidade: 457,2 mm (18 pol)

RS2-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sistema de rack enhanced, em alumínio para gerenciamento de cabos com dimensões 2,1 m (7 pés) x 19 pol. Inclui hardware de montagem do rack, gerenciadores de cabos verticais com tampa, e terminal de aterramento Adicionar "-S" para aço altura: 2,1 m (7 pol); largura: 685,8 mm (27 pol); profundidade: 457,2 mm (18 pol)

RACKS RS DE PROFUNDIDADE AMPLIADA RS-07E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sistema de rack para gerenciamento de cabos com profundidade ampliada (0,37 m 14,5 pol.) em alumínio, de 7 pés x 19 polegadas (2,1 m x 482 mm). Inclui parafusos, suportes de montagem, 19 gerenciadores de cabos de alta capacidade, 10 ganchos, anéis e suportes para aterramento. altura: 2,1 m (7 pés); largura: 609,6 mm (24 pol); profundidade: 609,6 mm (24 pol)

RACK-IT™

ENHANCED

Os suportes de montagem vertical Rack-it da Siemon podem ser montados em paredes para acomodar uma ampla gama de equipamentos para instalação em rack. Aberturas apropriadas permitem a instalação de equipamentos ativos de várias profundidades. HC-RI-5 ............Suporte de montagem vertical, 5 RMS Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U

ACESSÓRIOS RS-CNL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canal de gerenciamento de cabos vertical de 2,1 m x 76 mm (7 pés. x 3 pol.) para montagem entre racks profundos de 76 mm (3 pol.) (inclui hardware de montagem)

RS-CNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calha para gerenciamento de cabos, vertical de 2,1 m x 152 mm (7 pés. x 6 pol.) para montagem entre racks profundos de 152 mm (6 pol.) (inclui hardware de montagem)

RS-CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa de 10 gerenciadores de cabo de alta capacidade para a parte frontal do rack

RS-CNL-MGR. . . . . . . . . . Caixa de 10 bandejas de calhas para RS-CNL e RSCNL3

RS-VCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caixa com 10 ganchos de gerenciamento de cabos que travam com um quarto de volta e gerenciadores tipo “loop”; inclui gerenciador preto de 457,2 mm (18 polegadas).

GERENCIADORES DE CABO, DE 19” S110®/S210® Quando montado em um painel de montagem em rack de 19 polegadas, o gerenciador de cabos S110/S210, fornece uma solução superior de controle de cabos em um espaço reduzido. Os seus tamanhos de 1 RMS e 2 RMS e grande capacidade fornecem um excelente gerenciamento de cabos para instalações de montagem em rack de 19 pol.

RACKS E GERENCIADORES DE CABOS

MONTAGEM EM PAREDE GERENCIADORES DE CABO COM PERNAS

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS CAPACIDADE* S110-RWM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . Gerenciadores de Cabo com tampa . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . 50 preto, de 19 pol S110/S210 S110-RWM-02 . . . . . . . . . . . Gerenciadores de Cabo com tampa . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . 50 branco, de 19 pol S110/S210 NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS CAPACIDADE* S110-RWM2-01 . . . . . . . . . . Gerenciadores de Cabo com tampa . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . 130 preto, de 19 pol S110/S210 S110-RWM2-02. . . . . . . . . . . Gerenciadores de Cabo com tampa . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . 130 branco, de 19 pol S110/S210

S110A1RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gerenciador de cabo 1 RMS, branco com pernas

S110A1RMS-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gerenciador de cabo 1 RMS, preto com pernas

Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U *Número aproximado de cabos de quatro pares UTP

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

RACKS E GERENCIADORES DE CABOS

GERENCIADORES DE CABO PARA MONTAGEM EM RACK SÉRIE WM Os gerenciadores de cabo série WM fornecem uma resistência aumentada e não interferem com painéis montados acima ou abaixo. Eles constituem uma solução econômica e popular para oferecer meios de uma melhor e mais simples organização de pequenos a grandes feixes de cabos ou patch cords.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO RMS CAPACIDADE* WM-143-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gerenciador de cabo com cinco suportes S143 . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . 50 WM-144-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gerenciador de cabo com cinco suportes S144 . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . 100 WM-145-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gerenciador de cabo com cinco suportes S145 . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . 200 Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5 mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U *Número aproximado de cabos UTP de 4 pares

WM-143-5

WM-144-5

DICA TÉCNICA! Recomenda-se o uso de gerenciadores de cabos entre todos os patch panels e também no topo e na parte inferior do rack para painéis de capacidade maior.

WM-145-5

SUPORTES DE CABOS O design do suporte de cabos Siemon fornece integridade estrutural e uma aparência requintada. Estes suportes são ideais para rotear quantidades de cabos, de pequenas a muito grandes. A sua montagem em plástico durável assegura uma alta confiabilidade para qualquer aplicação.

NO DA PEÇA ALTURA LARGURA PROFUNDIDADE CAPAC.* S143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 mm (1,73 pol) . . . . . . . . . 38 mm (1,50 pol) . . . . . . . . . . 89 mm (3,35 pol). . . . . . 50 S144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 mm (3,43 pol) . . . . . . . . . 57 mm (2,25 pol) . . . . . . . . . . 74 mm (2,90 pol). . . . . . 100 S145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 mm (3,43 pol) . . . . . . . . . 57 mm (2,25 pol) . . . . . . . . . . 125 mm (4,93 pol). . . . . . 200 S146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 mm (5,95 pol) . . . . . . . . . 63 mm (2,5 pol) . . . . . . . . . . . 130 mm (5,15 pol). . . . . . 300 S147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 mm (10,00 pol) . . . . . . . . 63 mm (2,5 pol) . . . . . . . . . . . 130 mm (5,15 pol). . . . . . 500

S143

S144

S145

*Número aproximado de cabos UTP de 4 pares

S146

S147

GERENCIADOR PLANO DE CABO TRASEIRO A Siemon oferece produtos para gerenciamento de cabo traseiro englobando uma gama ampla de tamanhos de racks e métodos de roteamento de cabos. Os gerenciadores de cabos com montagem em rack permitem alívio de tensão em pontos chave adequados e também a organização de cabos horizontais sendo encaminhados à traseira de um patch panel. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO WM-BK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gerenciador de cabo traseiro com parafusos de montagem e porcas hexagonais

O WM-BK pode ser montado na parte traseira de um rack duplo (frente-costas) de 19 pol, ou pode ser montado na frente de um rack duplo de 19 pol, usando os mesmos parafusos que fixam o patch panel ao rack usando as porcas hexagonais fornecidas.

GERENCIADORES DE CABOS DE ENGATE RÁPIDO REUTILIZÁVEIS Estes gerenciadores de cabos são simples, entretanto extremamente eficazes quando usados para formar feixes de cabos. Para acomodar feixes de diferentes tamanhos, eles estão disponíveis nos tamanhos de 152 mm (6 pol), 305 mm (12 pol), e 457 mm (18 pol). Eles podem ser facilmente afrouxados e removidos para permitir a manutenção dos cabos e então reapertados quando os cabos forem novamente agrupados em feixes. A tensão ajustável impede as condições de aperto em demasia. Um furo de montagem em cada gerenciador de engate rápido permite que este seja fixado a uma parede ou rack.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO VCM-25-(XXX)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto com 25 gerenciadores de cabos VCM-250-(XXX)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comjunto com 250 gerenciadores de cabos

PATENTEADO Gerenciadores de cabos tipo wrap around permitem uma maneira simplificada para o gerenciamento de cabos... fixe-o em um cabo único e então faça o wrap around em todo o feixe.

Gerenciadores de cabos de engate rápido possuem uma cabeça grande para obter uma resistência aumentada e um furo para montagem está incluso para fixação a uma parede ou rack

Utilize (XXX) para especificar o comprimento: 060 = 152 mm (6 pol), segura um feixe de cabos de 51 mm (2 pol) de diâmetro, 120 = 305 mm (12 pol), segura um feixe de cabos de 102 mm (4 pol) de diâmetro, 180 = 457 mm (18 pol) segura um feixe de cabos de 153 mm (6 pol) de diâmetro. Utilize (X) para especificar a cor: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde, 09 = laranja W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CORDÃO MODULAR 10G 6™ MC® Utilizando o mais novo e avançado cordão modular 10G 6 MC da Siemon, você poderá experimentar o incrível desempenho dos novos componentes 10G 6 HD® e 10G 6 MAX® da Siemon. Utilizados em conjunto, o seu sistema irá operar bem acima das especificações da Categoria 6, mesmo em 300 MHz. Os patch cords 10G 6 MC foram especialmente projetados para manter os condutores em posições tais que o balanceamento dos pares seja otimizado no ponto de terminação. Boots para alívio de tensão na curvatura dos cabos oferecem proteção extra para o cabo e máximo desempenho de transmissão. O uso dos cordões modulares 10G 6 MC é necessário para a obtenção do desempenho em 300 MHz dos produtos 10G 6 da Siemon.

As capas para alívio de tensão aceitam ícones ovais para codificação adicional de cores nas extremidades do plugue modular

300 MHz

Componentes Categoria 6 com resposta até 300 MHz.

BLINDAGEM METÁLICA DE ISOLAÇÃO O "isolante metálico" patenteado Siemon blinda os pares dentro do plugue para um desempenho ótimo de NEXT

Os cordões flexíveis Ultra 6 excedem em muito as especificações de desempenho da Categoria 6

CORDÕES DE MANOBRA (PATCH CORDS), PLUGUES E CABOS

ALÍVIO DE TENSÃO E DE CURVATURA MOLDADO POR INSERÇÃO O boot assegura um raio de curvatura excelente (37 mm - 1,4 pol.), fator crítico para um desempenho satisfatório em Categoria 6

EXCEDE A CATEGORIA 6 Testes de transmissão asseguram em 100% um nível de desempenho além das especificações da Categoria 6 para cordões modulares e garantem um desempemho de campo ótimo

Uma crimpagem de 360 graus oferece um excelente alívio de tensão plugue-cabo sem causar deformação dos pares

O isolamento interno do cordão flexível oferece uma vida útil estendida e mantém a geometria ideal entre os pares

CORDÕES MODULARES 10G 6 MC

Os plugues modulares proporcionam resistência a longo prazo contra corrosão por umidade, temperaturas extremas e contaminantes transportados pelo ar

Há uma proteção para a trava do plugue evitando que a mesma seja danificada devido ao manuseio do cordão

PATENTEADO

N DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MC6-8-T-(XX)-(XX)U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão flexível modular 10G 6 MC de quatro pares, terminado em ambas as extremidades, configurações T568A/B, capa colorida/boot O

Utilize o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento do cordão: 03 = 0,9 m (3 pés), 05 = 1,5 m (5 pés), 07 = 2,1 m (7 pés), 10 = 3,1 m (10 pés), 15 = 4,6 m (15 pés), 20 = 6,1 m (20 pés)

Utilize o segundo (XX) para especificar a cor da capa: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde

Adicionar a letra “B” ao final do número da peça para pacotes com 100 unidades. Versões LSOH (Baixa emissão de fumaça) disponíveis sob encomenda.. Contate o departamento de serviço ao consumidor para mais informações.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CORDÕES DE MANOBRA (PATCH CORDS), PLUGUES E CABOS

CORDÕES MODULARES MC® 6

PATENTEADO

N DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MC6-8-T-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão flexível modular MC 6 de quatro pares, terminado em ambas as extremidades, configurações T568A/B, capa colorida/boot O

Utilize o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento do cordão: 03 = 0,9 m (3 pés), 05 = 1,5 m (5 pés), 07 = 2,1 m (7 pés), 10 = 3,1 m (10 pés), 15 = 4,6 m (15 pés), 20 = 6,1 m (20 pés)

Use o segundo (XX) para especificar a cor do boot: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Adicionar a letra “B” ao final do número da peça para pacotes com 100 unidades. Comprimentos específicos estão disponíveis sob encomenda. Versões LSOH (Baixa emissão de fumaça) disponíveis sob encomenda. Contate o Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente Siemon para mais informações.

CORDÕES MODULARES SÓLIDOS IC6 TERMINADOS EM UMA EXTREMIDADE

PATENTEADO

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO IC6-8A-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . . Cordão sólido IC6 de 4 pares, terminado em uma extremidade, não-plenum, configuração T568B, capa cinza e boot colorido IC6-8T-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . . Cordão sólido IC6 de 4 pares, terminado em uma extremidade, não-plenum, configuração T568A, capa cinza e boot colorido

Use o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento do cordão : 10 = 3,1m (10 pés), 20 = 6,1m (20 pés), 30 = 9,1m (30 pés), 40 = 12,2m (40 pés), 50 = 15,2m (50 pés), 60 = 18,3m (60 pés) Use o segundo (XX) para especificar a cor do boot: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Comprimentos específicos estão disponíveis sob encomenda. Versões LSOH (baixa emissão de fumaça) estão também disponíveis sob encomenda. Contate o Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente Siemon para mais informações.

CORDÕES MODULARES MC 5 COM CAPA DESCRIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA MC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão trançado modular, flexível de 4 pares, terminado em ambas as extremidades, revestimento/capa coloridos, pinagem T568A/T568B SEM CAPA DESCRIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA MC5-8-T-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão trançado modular, flexível de 4 pares, terminado em ambas as extremidades, revestimento colorido, pinagem T568A/T568B, sem capa MC-BOOT-(XX)-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boots coloridos (pacote com 100 peças)

Utilize o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento do cordão: 03 = 0,9 m (3 pés), 05 = 1,5 m (5 pés), 07 = 2,1 m (7 pés), 10 = 3,1 m (10 pés), 15 = 4,6 m (15 pés), 20 = 6,1 m (20 pés)

Utilize o segundo (XX) para especificar a cor da capa: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Acrescente "B" para pacote de produto a granel com 100 cordões modulares. Comprimentos diferentes disponíveis sob encomenda. Versões LSOH também disponíveis mediante solicitação. Entre em contato com o nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente para obter mais informações. Nota: Os produtos MAX® 6, CT® 6 e HD® 6 são compatíveis com versões anteriores de nossos cordões modulares MC 5 (compatíveis com a Categoria 5e). Por exemplo, quando for utilizado um cordão modular MC 5 em um canal do Siemon Cabling System com módulos MAX 6, a Siemon garante o desempenho do sistema em Categoria 5e.

CORDÕES MODULARES SÓLIDOS COM UMA EXTREMIDADE TERMINADA — IC5 NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO IC5-8T-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão IC5 , 4 pares, sólido, terminado em uma extremidade, configuração T568A, capa cinza, CMR, sem boot IC5-8A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão IC5, 4 pares, sólido, terminado em uma extremidade, configuração T568B, capa cinza, CMR, sem boot IC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão IC5, 4 pares, sólido, terminado em uma extremidade, configuração T568A, capa azul, CMP, com boot colorido IC5-8A-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão IC5, 4 pares, sólido, terminado em uma extremidade, configuração T568B, capa azul, CMP, com boot colorido Utilize o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento do cordão: 10 = 3,05 m (10 pés), 20 = 6,1 m (20 pés), 30 = 9,1 m (30 pés), 40 = 12,2 m (40 pés), 50 = 15,2 m (50 pés), 60 = 18,3 m (60 pés) Utilize o segundo (XX) para especificar a cor da capa: 01 = preto, 06 = azul Comprimentos diferentes disponíveis sob encomenda. Versões LSOH também disponíveis mediante solicitação. Entre em contato com o nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente para obter mais informações.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M PA N Y

PATENTEADO

PLUGUES S210®

A tecnologia da Siemon oferece os mais avançados sistemas de conexão do mundo. Os plugues S210 utilizam isolação interna entre os pares, compensação para-par e contatos em camadas para melhorar o desempenho de diafonia de modo que a conexão plugue-bloco exceda os requisitos da Categoria 6 para hardware de conexão. O invólucro transparente matém as posições e cores dos condutores visíveis para auxiliar durante o processo de terminação. Cada plugue tem polaridade para assegurar uma correta orientação e montagem além de facilitar sua conexão apropriada aos blocos S210. Os patch plugues podem ser terminados em campo com condutores entre 23 e 26 AWG (0,40 a 0,51 mm), de cabos flexíveis.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S210P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugue S210, Categoria 6, quatro pares, terminado em campo S210P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugue S210, de 2 pares, terminado em campo S210P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugue S210, de 1 par, terminado em campo

S210P4

S210P2

S210P1

PATENTEADO

CABOS DE MANOBRA MONTADOS — S210 Os cordões S210 montados pela Siemon usam os plugues S210P4 para conexões confiáveis entre os campos de terminação S210. Estes cordões utilizam cabos flexíveis Categoria 6 de alto desempenho que excedem as especificações da Categoria 6 e são 100% testados em fábrica quanto à transmissão para assegurar um desempenho ótimo de canal. Ícones coloridos estão disponíveis para a identificação dos plugues S210.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S210P4-P4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão flexível S210 Categoria 6, terminado em ambas as extremidades, quatro pares, capa branca Utilize o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento do cordão: 03 = 0,9 m (3 pés), 05 = 1,5 m (5 pés), 07 = 2,1 m (7 pés), 10 = 3,1 m (10 pés), 15 = 4,6 m (15 pés), 20 = 6,1 m (20 pés) Comprimentos diferentes disponíveis sob encomenda. Também estão disponíveis versões LSOH. Entre em contato com o nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente para obter mais informações.

PATENTEADO

CABOS DE MANOBRA MONTADOS — S210 PARA MC® Os cordões S210-MC da Siemon combinam os plugues mais modernos e de desempenho mais alto do mercado na conexão de equipamentos ativos aos blocos de conexão S210. A combinação dos plugues, cabos de alto desempenho e 100% de testes de transmissão em fábrica asseguram um desempenho compatível com as especificações de canal Categoria 6.

CORDÕES DE MANOBRA (PATCH CORDS), PLUGUES E CABOS

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S210P4A4-(XX)-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão flexível S210-MC 6 Categoria 6, de quatro pares, configuração T568B, capa colorida/boot S210P4T4-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão flexível S210-MC 6 Categoria 6, de quatro pares, configuração T568A, capa colorida/boot S210P2E2-(XX)-B(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão flexível S210-MC 6, de dois pares, configuração 10BASE-T, capa branca com boots coloridos

Utilize o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento do cordão: 03 = 0,9 m (3 pés), 05 = 1,5 m (5 pés), 07 = 2,1 m (7 pés), 10 = 3,1 m (10 pés), 15 = 4,6 m (15 pés), 20 = 6,1 m (20 pés)

Use o segundo (XX) para especificar a cor do boot: 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Comprimentos diferentes disponíveis sob encomenda. Também estão disponíveis versões LSOH. Entre em contato com o nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente para obter mais informações.

PLUGUES S110®

PATENTEADO ENHANCED

O primeiro de seu tipo que é compatível com a Categoria 5e e pode ser terminado em campo tanto em cordões sólidos quanto flexíveis. Os plugues de quatro pares S110 empregam um projeto patenteado pela Siemon que melhora a isolação elétrica entre seus pares, melhorando assim sua resposta de diafonia (crosstalk) de modo que a conexão casada plugue-bloco de conexão exceda os requisitos de transmissão da Categoria 5e estabelecidos pelo padrão ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S110P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugue S110, de 4 pares, Categoria 5e, terminado em campo S110P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugue S110, de 3 pares, terminado em campo S110P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugue S110 de 2 pares, terminado em campo S110P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugue S110 Obs: O plug S110P1 inclui capa protetora para uso com fios de cross-connect simples. Ícones coloridos não acompanham o produto. Veja os acessórios

S110P4

S110P1

S110P2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CORDÕES DE MANOBRA (PATCH CORDS), PLUGUES E CABOS

CORDÕES S110® TERMINADOS EM FÁBRICA

PATENTEADO

Os cordões S110P patenteados da Siemon oferecem uma conexão simples, rápida a blocos de conexão 110 e são fabricados de acordo nossos rigorosos padrões de desempenho de transmissão assegurando compatibilidade com a Categoria 5e. Eles podem ser usados para conectar equipamentos de rede a campos de terminação 110 ou ainda conectar equipamentos de testes a blocos de conexão 110. Ícones coloridos estão disponíveis para a codificação por cores dos plugues de 2 e 4 pares. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S110P4-P4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão S110 Categoria 5e, de quatro pares, terminado em ambas as extremidades S110P2-P2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão S110, de dois pares, terminado em ambas as extremidades S110P1-P1-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordão S110, de um par, terminado em ambas as extremidadesd

Utilize o primeiro (XX) para especificar o comprimento do cordão: 03 = 0,9 m (3 pés), 05 = 1,5 m (5 pés), 07 = 2,1 m (7 pés), 10 = 3,1 m (10 pés), 15 = 4,6 m (15 pés), 20 = 6,1 m (20 pés) Comprimentos diferentes disponíveis sob encomenda. Também estão disponíveis versões LSOH. Entre em contato com o nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente para obter mais informações.

ACESSÓRIOS NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO ICON-OVAL-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ícones coloridos (tipo oval) para plugues S110 de 2 e 3 pares CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ícones coloridos para plugues S110 de 4 pares (telefone em um lado e computador no outro) TAB-XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ícones coloridos para plugues S110 de 4 pares CT-ICON-(XX)

Utilize (XX) para especificar a cor: 00 = transparente*, 01 = preto, 02 = branco, 03 = vermelho, 04 = cinza, 05 = amarelo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde, 08 = violeta, 09 = laranja, 20 = marfim, 25 = branco brilhante, 60 = marrom, 80 = marfim claro (somente CT-ICON-(XX) Acrescentar "B" para pacote a granel com 100 unidades (não disponível para icon-oval-XX). *Disponível apenas em TAB-(XX).

ICON-OVAL-(XX)

Ícones personalizados impressos a laser agora disponíveis. Entre em contato com nosso Departamento de Serviços ao Cliente para obter informações sobre pedidos.

PLUGUE MODULAR Use plugues modulares para terminar cordões de manobra ou aplicaçoes na área de trabalho. O plugue modular pode ser terminado em um comprimento exato de cabo necessário para manter uma instalação organizada e limpa. O P-8-8 permite a instalação de cabos sólidos de pares trançados com bitolas entre 26 e 22 AWG (0,40 - 0,64 mm) com um isolante do condutor de diâmetro entre 0,86 e 0,99 mm (0,034 - 0,039 pol.). Os contatos dos plugues tem 50 micropolegadas (mínimo) de ouro sobre níquel e atendem às especificações FCC CFR 47, parte 68, subparte F e IEC 60603-7.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO P-8-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plugue de 8 posições com 8 contatos (compatível com as ferramentas de crimpagem Siemon e Tyco)

DICA TÉCNICA! Cordões modulares terminados em fábrica são requeridos para que se obtenha desempenho consistente de canal em categorias 5e e 6. A terminação em campo não é recomendada.

CONECTOR EZ-TWIST® Reduza significativamente o tempo de terminação de cabos coaxiais com o novo conector EZ-Twist da Siemon. Não são necessárias ferramentas de crimpagem. Para fazer a terminação simplesmente torça o conector em torno do cabo para uma conexão segura e de alto desempenho. O EZ-Twist elimina também a conexão "rosqueada" do cabo à tomada. Simplesmente empurre o conector contra a tomada para travá-lo fixo no lugar; puxe-o para removê-lo. Esta característica é ideal em instalações de alta densidade onde o espaço é limitado e conectores convencionais são difíceis de serem fixados às tomadas.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO HC-EZ-(X)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conector coaxial EZ-Twist, pacote com 50 peças Use o primeiro (X) para especificar o tipo do cabo: 5 = RG59, 6 = RG6 Use o segundo (X) para especificar o tipo de blindagem: T = Blindagem tripla, Q = Blindagem quádupla

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SISTEMA DE CONEXÃO S210® O bloco S210 da Siemon é o bloco de conexão de melhor desempenho da indústria de telecomunicações. Conhecido como bloco "secreto", seu desempenho de NEXT é tão bom que o torna praticamente invisível quando usado em um ponto de consolidação em um canal Categoria 6.

Tiras de designação com etiquetas coloridas intercambiáveis podem ser montadas entre cada fila de blocos de conexão

Utiliza os mesmos procedimentos de terminação que os produtos S110® e é compatível com todas as ferramentas de terminação de posição única do S110

BARREIRAS INTERNAS CONTRA DIAFONIA Atinge isolação de pares de 360° para oferecer desempenho de NEXT superior (margem de 13 dB de NEXT em relação às especificações da Categoria 6).

PYRAMID™ WIRE ENTRY SYSTEM (SISTEMA DE ENTRADA PARA FIOS) Separa os condutores dos pares na terminação dos cabos para simplificar e reduzir o tempo de instalação.

ABERTURAS PARA ACESSO DE CABOS Permite que os cabos sejam encaminhados através da parte traseira do bloco em direção ao ponto de terminação.

Pernas de afastamento patenteadas podem ser removidas do bloco, antes, durante, ou após a instalação da versão de 64 pares

Utiliza o mesmo encaixe da base de fiação que os produtos padrão S110 para ser totalmente compatível com soluções existentes de montagem e gerenciamento de cabos do S110

PAINÉIS DE 19 POLEGADAS S210 E S110 — TERMINADOS EM CAMPO

O cabo entrando através das aberturas para acesso na base é escondido pelas etiquetas de designação

PATENTEADO

PAINÉIS DE 19 POLEGADAS S210 TERMINADOS EM CAMPO DESCRIÇÃO RMS NO DA PEÇA S210DB2-64RFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 pares, 19 polegadas, kit de terminação em campo S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 S210DB2-128RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 pares, 19 polegadas, kit de terminação em campo S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 S210DB2-192RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 pares, 19 polegadas, kit de terminação em campo S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

PRODUTOS S210 E S110

PAINÉIS DE 19 POLEGADAS S110 TERMINADOS EM CAMPO DESCRIÇÃO RMS NO DA PEÇA S110D(X)1-100RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 pares, 19 polegadas, kit de terminação em campo S110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 S110D(X)1-200RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 pares, 19 polegadas, kit de terminação em campo S110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 S110D(X)1-300RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 pares, 19 polegadas, kit de terminação em campo S110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Utilize (X) para especificar os blocos de conexão: A = 5 pares, B = 4 pares, C = 3 pares, D = 2 pares Nota: 1 RMS = 44,5mm (1,75 pol) = 1 U

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS S210 E S110

KITS DE TERMINAÇÃO EM CAMPO S210® E S110®

PATENTEADO

Os kits completos de instalação incluem blocos de fiação com pernas removíveis, blocos de conexão e porta-etiquetas com etiquetas brancas de designação.

KITS DE TERMINAÇÃO EM CAMPO S210 DESCRIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA S210AB2-64FT*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 pares, kit de terminação em campo S210 altura: 45,7 mm (1,80 pol); width: 272 mm (10.71 pol); depth: 82.8 mm (3.26 pol) S210AB2-128FT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 pares, kit de terminação em campo S210 altura: 182,9 mm (7,20 pol); largura: 272 mm (10,71 pol); profundidade: 82,8 mm (3,26 pol) S210AB2-192FT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 pares, kit de terminação em campo S210 altura: 275 mm (10,81 pol); largura: 272 mm (10,71 pol); profundidade: 82,7 mm (3,26 pol) *Pernas removíveis apenas na versão de 64 pares. KITS DE TERMINAÇÃO EM CAMPO S110 DESCRIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA S110A(X)1-50FT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 pares, kit de terminação em campo S110 altura: 45,7 mm (1,80 pol); largura: 272 mm (10,71 pol); profundidade: 82,8 mm (3,26 pol) S110A(X)2-100FT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 pares, kit de terminação em campo S110 altura: 91,4 mm (3,60 pol); largura: 272 mm (10,71 pol); profundidade: 82,8 mm (3,26 pol) S110A(X)2-300FT**. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 pares, kit de terminação em campo S110 altura: 274 mm (10,80 pol); largura: 272 mm (10,71 pol); profundidade: 82,8 mm (3,26 pol)

Utilize (X) para especificar os blocos de conexão: A = 5 pares, B = 4 pares **Pernas removíveis apenas nas versões de 50 e 100 pares.

KITS DE TERMINAÇÃO EM CAMPO TOWER® S210 E S110

PATENTEADO

KITS DE TERMINAÇÃO EM CAMPO TOWER S210 DESCRIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA S210MB2-192FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 pares, kit de terminação em campo Tower S210 altura: 406 mm (16 pol); largura: 216 mm (8,50 pol) profundidade: 152 mm (6 pol) S210MB2-256FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 pares, kit de terminação em campo Tower S210 altura: 541 mm (21,31 pol); largura: 216 mm (8,50 pol), profundidade: 152 mm (6 pol) S210MB2-320FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 pares, kit de terminação em campo Tower S210 altura: 676 mm (26,62 pol); largura: 216 mm (8,50 pol, profundidade: 15 mm (6 pol) KITS DE TERMINAÇÃO EM CAMPO TOWER S110 DESCRIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA S110M(X)2-300FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 pares, kit de terminação em campo Tower S110 altura: 406,4 mm (16 pol); largura: 215,9 mm (8,50 pol); profundidade: 152,6 mm (6 pol) S110M(X)2-400FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 pares, kit de terminação em campo Tower S110 altura: 541,3 mm (21,31 pol); largura: 215,9 mm (8,50 pol); profundidade: 152,6 mm (6 pol) S110M(X)2-500FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 pares, kit de terminação em campo Tower S110 altura: 676,1 mm (26,62 pol); largura: 215,9 mm (8,50 pol); profundidade: 152,6 mm (6 pol) Utilize (X) para especificar os blocos de conexão: A = 5 pares, B = 4 pares

KITS DE TERMINAÇÃO DE CAMPO S210 MONTADOS VERTICALMENTE

PATENTEADO

Estes blocos S210 de 32 ou 48 pares podem ser montados sobre os mesmo suportes S89B ou S89D utilizados com os nossos blocos S66™. O kit de 48 pares de alta densidade oferece desempenho em Categoria 6 em um mesmo suporte padrão M1-50 66. Os kits para terminação em campo incluem blocos de conexão S210, etiquetas e suportes para as etiquetas.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S210DB1-48FT-89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de terminação em campo S210 de 48 pares em um suporte tipo 89* S210DB1-32FT-89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de terminação em campo S210 de 32 pares em um suporte tipo 89* *Os suportes S89 não estão incluídos e devem ser pedidos separadamente (veja página 46).

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PATENTEADO

BLOCO S66M1-50 O S66M1-50 é totalmente compatível com todos os acessórios padrão da indústria e ao mesmo tempo fornece uma solução econômica comprovada para a terminação de cabos de alto desempenho. A ampla gama de acessórios de montagem permite que o S66M1-50 seja instalado em praticamente todos os ambientes.

Desempenho em

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S66M1-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bloco M1-50 de 50 Pares

160 MHz

SUPORTES DE AFASTAMENTO PARA BLOCOS S66™

PATENTEADO

Todos os nossos suportes são projetados para criar instalações organizadas, eficientes e que economizem espaço, quando realizadas com os blocos de conexão S66. Elas são terminadas em aberto para permitir que os instaladores estendam os cabos antes de inserir um bloco no lugar. Os suportes são moldados a partir de material termoplástico com características de retardo à propagação de chamas.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S89D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suporte de afastamento para uso com cabeamento de 4 pares S89B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Suporte de afastamento para uso com cabeamento de alta densidade (25 ou mais pares)

S89D

S89B

PATENTEADO

PRESILHAS DE JUNÇÃO Estas presilhas de junção padrão da indústria são usadas para conectar presilhas rápidas adjacentes em blocos S66. Estas presilhas são de fácil remoção para isolar e testar pares de entrada e pares de saída e além disso são reutilizáveis. Disponível em liga de cobre - Grau A revestida com latão (voz e dados) ou aço inoxidável (voz apenas).

PRESILHAS DE LIGA DE COBRE REVESTIDAS COM ESTANHO: SA1-(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . Presilha de duas posições

PRESILHAS DE AÇO INOXIDÁVEL:* SA1-SS-(XXXX). . . . . . . . . Presilha de duas posições, aço inoxidável *Não recomendada para uso em aplicações com dados.

Use (XXXX) para especificar quantidades; 100 = 100/pacote, 1000 = 1000/pacote

PATENTEADO

PRESILHAS DE JUNÇÃO COLORIDAS Projetadas para se adequar ao bloco de conexão tipo 66M, cada um destes adaptadores plug-on contém duas presilhas padrão de junção, de modo que eles, na verdade, juntam um par completo instalado, e não apenas um fio único. Os alojamentos de plástico são codificados por cores e servem para proteção da presilha rápida. Os técnicos podem testar as linhas com estas presilhas no lugar, utilizando nossa ponta de prova TPE in-line.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO SMBC-2-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Presilha de Junção TPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ponta de Prova/Extrator

Utilize (X) para especificar a cor: 2 = branco, 3 = vermelho, 5 = amarelo, 6 = azul, 7 = verde, 8 = violeta

PRODUTOS S66 E PROTEÇÃO

INDICADOR DE STATUS DE LINHA Este elemento indicador duplo, a diodo se encaixa diretamente nas presilhas rápidas S66 para permitir a junção e uma indicação visual do status da linha. Ele permite ao técnico evitar a interrupção de uma linha ativa ao executar testes em campos de interligações (cross-connect). O indicador pisca vermelho e verde quando uma linha está chamando, e acende continuamente em vermelho ou verde (dependendo do sentido que o LED está apontando) significando que uma linha está em uso.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO STA-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicador de Status de Linha

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUTOS S66 E PROTEÇÃO

TAMPAS ARTICULADAS PERMANENTES Use estas tampas articuladas permanentes e você economizará até 90% do custo de um sistema colorido de fundo — e com o uso das tampas coloridas, o projetista ou instalador pode codificar em cores cada bloco individual ao invés de trabalhar com grupos de quatro ou oito.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MC4LH-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tampa para bloco tipo M450 MC4LH-HP-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tampa de alto perfil para bloco tipo M450, laranja Utilize (X) para especificar a cor: 6 = azul, 9 = laranja

TAMPAS DE ENCAIXAR Estas tampas de encaixar, econômicas, protegem as presilhas rápidas S66™ e ao mesmo tempo proporcionam uma visão clara das terminações da fiação e são construídas com plástico com características de retardo à propagação de chamas.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MC4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M4 X 50

TIRAS DE DESIGNAÇÃO As tiras de designação se encaixam rápida e facilmente nas tiras em leque dos blocos S66 da série M. As tiras possuem uma superfície para etiquetagem e são codificadas em cores.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO D10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tira de designação com linhas brancas

ETIQUETAS Estas etiquetas pautadas auto-adesivas permitem aos técnicos escrever e manter informações sobre os circuitos nas nossas tampas plásticas de encaixe MC4.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MC4-LBL-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Para tampa MC4 (bloco M 4X50) numeradas de 1 a 25

PATENTEADO

MÓDULO PICO PROTECTOR®

TENSÃO DE TENSÃO DE NO DA PEÇA RUPTURA CC (±15%) ISOLAÇÃO (VSO) PM-007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7,0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5,4 volts PM-027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27,0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,0 volts PM-068 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68,0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,0 volts

TENSÃO DE TENSÃO DE NO DA PEÇA RUPTURA CC (±15%) ISOLAÇÃO (VSO) PM-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140,0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102,0 volts PM-180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,0 volts PM-230* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230,0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,0 volts

*Para a proteção do equipamento que está ligado às linhas da Central de Comutação (voz, fax, modem etc.) o módulo PM-230 é sempre recomendado. Nota: Limitações sobre a largura de banda podem ser aplicáveis. Entre em contato com nosso Departamento de Suporte Técnico para obter informações adicionais.

KITS DE ATERRAMENTO NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO PG-06. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O kit de 6 pares inclui placa de aterramento de encaixe e quatro jumpers de conexão rápida de 203 mm (8 pol.) terminado com conectores fêmea

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STM-8 E STM-8-S

ADAPTADORES DE TESTE S110®

atí

PATENTEADO

Os adaptadores de Teste S110 de 1, 2, 3, ou 4 pares da Siemon oferecem uma forma conveniente para testar blocos de conexão tipo S110. Estes adaptadores podem ser plugados diretamente a qualquer bloco de conexão tipo 110 e possuem uma tomada modular para conexão a equipamentos de teste ou cordões de manobra (patch cords). Devido ao seu projeto com pino de contato retrátil, é o único adaptador de teste tipo 110 que pode ser conectado tanto a blocos de conexão tipo 110 terminados ou não-terminados. Os adaptadores de 1, 2, 3, ou 4 pares podem ser empilhados de lado e são polarizados para impedir a inserção incorreta. Os adaptadores de teste de 4 pares possuem uma área para um ícone colorido (um ícone azul e um vermelho são incluídos) para permitir uma identificação adicional. O adaptador de teste de 4 pares está disponível nas configurações de pinagem T568A e T568B e é compatível com a Categoria 5e para conexões de rede de alto desempenho ou teste de enlaces.

PATENTEADO

atí

TESTAR®

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO TAP-110-U4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de teste, 4 pares e 8 posições, pinagem USOC TAP-110-T4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de teste, 4 pares e 8 posições, pinagem T568A, compatível com a Categoria 5e TAP-110-A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de teste, 4 pares e 8 posições, pinagem T568B compatível com a Categoria 5e

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO TAP-110-U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de teste, 1 par e 6 posições, pinagem USOC TAP-110-UT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de teste, 2 pares e 8 posições, pinagem Token Ring/USOC TAP-110-U3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de teste, 3 pares e 6 posições, pinagem USOC

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO STM-8-S . . . . . . . . Testador de cabos de pares trançados blindados com estojo para transporte, dispositivo remoto ativo, dois cordões modulares blindados universais terminados, guia de pinagens, bateria alcalina de 9V, manual de instruções e cartão de garantia

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO STM-8 . . . . . . . . . . Testador de cabo UTP (não-blindado, par trançado) com caixa para transporte, dois cordões modulares com plugues universais em ambas as extremidades, dispositivo remoto "A", guia de pinagens, bateria alcalina de 9 V, e cartão de garantia.

PATENTEADO

O TESTAR proporciona o acesso fácil para teste às presilhas rápidas tipo 66. Ele pode ser plugado diretamente ao bloco S66™, estabelecendo uma conexão positiva e oferecendo uma tomada modular de 4 pares para conexão ao equipamento de teste. O corpo é moldado em plástico azul e possui entalhes moldados para os dedos para um fácil manejo.

FERRAMENTAS E EQUIPAMENTOS DE TESTE

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO TESTAR-8T-C5 . . . . . . . . . . . . TESTAR, 4 pares e 8 posições, pinagem T568A TESTAR-8A-C5. . . . . . . . . . . . TESTAR, 4 pares e 8 posições, pinagem T568B

PATENTEADO

MODAPT®

Este adaptador modular permite o teste em linha (in-line) para qualquer combinação de plugues/tomadas. Ele inclui duas tomadas de 4 pares além de um cordão modular de 152 mm (6 pol) terminado com o nosso plugue "universal" patenteado de 4 pares para acessar qualquer tomada padrão de 6 ou 8 posições. Os condutores individuais são abertos por pinos e correspondem a oito adaptadores de teste separados. O equipamento de teste pode ser fixado de maneira segura aos adaptadores de teste usando garras tipo jacaré. Para permitir uma rápida consulta em campo, os diagramas de pinagem USOC, T568A, e T568B estão impressos no corpo do Modapt. Quando usados com o adaptador TESTAR, o adaptador de teste S110, e os adaptadores de teste de desconexão o Modapt pode ser usado para testar conexões em blocos S66M®, S110 e blocos de desconexão S110T®.

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO MODAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de teste com um cordão modular terminado com plugue universal de 4 pares com 152 mm (6 pol)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

FERRAMENTAS E EQUIPAMENTOS DE TESTE

FERRAMENTA PARA MULTI-PARES E FERRAMENTA DE IMPACTO S814

PATENTEADO

A ferramenta de terminação de multi-pares S110®/S210® é uma ferramenta versátil projetada para terminar e cortar cabos UTP e acomodar blocos de conexão. A ferramenta de impacto S814 termina os fios nas presilhas tipo 66 e 110. A ferramenta é acionada por mola e é totalmente ajustável, uma característica muito útil ao trabalhar com fios de espessura variável. A montagem estilo baioneta permite que as lâminas sejam trocadas com rapidez e facilidade e um compartimento no cabo da ferramenta armazena uma lâmina extra. FERRAMENTA PARA TERMINAÇÃO DE MULTI-PARES

FERRAMENTA DE IMPACTO S814

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S788J4-210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferramenta de terminação, 4 pares S210 S788J4B-210. . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto sobressalente de lâmina de corte e conjunto de inserção para 4 pares S210 S788JH4-210. . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabeçote sobressalente para ferramenta de impacto, incluindo alojamento, lâmina de corte e conjunto de inserção para 4 pares S210 S788J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferramenta de terminação, 4 pares S110 S788J4B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto sobressalente de lâmina de corte e conjunto de inserção para 4 pares S110 S788J4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabeçote sobressalente para ferramenta de impacto, incluindo alojamento, lâmina de corte e conjunto de inserção para 4 pares S110 S788J5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferramenta de terminação, 5 pares S110 S788J5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto sobressalente de lâmina de corte e conjunto de inserção para 5pares S110 S788J5H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabeçote sobressalente para ferramenta de impacto, incluindo alojamento, lâmina de corte e conjunto de inserção para 5 pares S110

NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO S814 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apenas o corpo da ferramenta S814-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corpo da ferramenta com lâmina de terminação tipo 66 S814-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Corpo da ferramenta com lâmina de terminação tipo 110 S81401-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lâmina de terminação tipo 66 S81401-110-88 . . . . . . . . . . . Lâmina de terminação tipo 110

Ferramenta de terminação de multi-pares

Ferramenta de impacto S814

CI-KIT E CI-KIT2 O CI-KIT oferece todas as ferramentas que um técnico de telecomunicações precisa para as suas atividades diárias. Incluído no kit está uma ferramenta de impacto S814 com lâminas de terminação tipo 66 e 110, uma ponta de prova, uma tesoura de eletricista, chave de fenda de cabeça chata a uma ferramenta de preparação CPT-WEB. Estas ferramentas são armazenadas em uma bolsa leve, prática de afivelar no cinto, que permite que o instalador corte, decape e termine o cabo sem ter que carregar outras ferramentas em separado ou jogos maiores de ferramentas. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CI-KIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit tipo clip-on (de prender no cinto) com uma ferramenta de impacto S814 (com lâminas de terminação tipo 66 e 110), uma ponta de prova, uma tesoura de eletricista, chave de fenda de cabeça chata a uma ferramenta de preparação CPT-WEB. CI-POUCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Só a bolsa clip-on CI-KIT2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit tipo clip-on (de prender no cinto) com uma ferramenta de impacto S814 (com lâminas de terminação tipo 66 e 110), uma ponta de prova, uma tesoura de eletricista, chave de fenda de cabeça chata a uma ferramenta de preparação de cabos AllPrep™ CI-POUCH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Só a bolsa clip-on do CI-KIT2

CI-KIT

CI-KIT2

PALM GUARD

PATENTEADO

O palm guard da Siemon foi ergonomicamente projetado para oferecer um modo seguro e confortável de terminar os nossos acopladores CT® planos ou angulares e módulos MAX®. O palm guard absorve o impacto da terminação e ao mesmo tempo segura o conector para impedir o movimento. A pulseira elástica ajustável permite que o palm guard possa ser tirado ou colocado facilmente e ao mesmo tempo proporcionando um encaixe justo. O palm guard também inclui um insert removível, que pode ser usado para segurar os módulos MAX enquanto se faz a terminação em superfícies planas. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Palm guard com insert MAX PG-MX6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert de palm guard para todos os módulos tipo punch-down MAX Nota: O insert PG-MX6 está incluído com cada pacote padrão de 20 módulos punch-down MAX.

FERRAMENTA DE PREPARAÇÃO PARA CABOS ALLPREP®

PG com PG-MX6

PG-MX6

PATENTEADO

A ferramenta de preparação AllPrep oferece um método simples e eficiente para a preparação de cabos coaxiais e de par trançado para terminação. A ferramenta contém duas matrizes de alta confiabilidade, com código de cores e que são intercambiáveis para cada tipo de meio físico. A matriz coaxial decapa cabos coaxiais RG59 e RG6 e a matriz de par trançado decapa uma ampla gama de cabos UTP, screened e de fibra. NO DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CPT-RGTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferramenta de preparação AllPrep para cabos coaxiais/de par trançado CPT-DIE-RG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sobressalente, matriz coaxial (preta) CPT-DIE-TP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sobressalente, matriz de par trançado (amarela) HC-CPT-EXTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ferramenta de preparo de cabos para uso com o conector EZ-Twist, inclui gabaritos EZ-Twist e UTP Produtos relacionados à Ferramenta de Preparação de cabos TERA™, Página 31.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

TERA™ CABO REDONDO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES SSTP Nº DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO 9T7R4-E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Riser (CMR, CSA FT4), revestimento azul 9T7P4-E6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), revestimento azul – Respondem apenas até 600 MHz. 9T7L4-E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS0H (IEC 332.1), revestimento violeta

CONFORMIDADE • ISO/IEC Classe F • IEC 61156-5 Primeira Edição • Requisitos ISO/IEC para impedância de transferência e atenuação APLICAÇÃO • Voz • T1 • 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, 1000BASE-T • 4/16 Mbps Token Ring • 51/155 Mbps ATM, 100 Mbps TP-PMD • 100VG-AnyLAN CONSTRUÇÃO DO CABO • Cobre sólido 0,55 mm (23 AWG) • 4 pares (redondo):Diâmetro máximo da capa: 8,50 mm (0,33 polegadas) • Pares blindados individualmente com folhas de poliester-alumínio • Marcas seqüenciais na capa O cabo está disponível em caixas com 305 m (1000 pés) e carretéis de 500 m (1640 pés) e 1000 m (3281 pés). Cabo riser disponível em caixas de 305 m (1000 pés). Contate seu representante de vendas local para verificar disponibilidade e prazo de entrega. Projeto bem como especificações dos cabos estão sujeitos a mudanças sem notificação prévia.

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉTRICAS Impedância Característica (Valores médios de impedância não permitidos)

1-200 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 15% 200-900 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 25%

Velocidade Nominal de Propagação (NVP)

0,80

DESEMPENHO DE TRANSMISSÃO Freqüência (MHz) 1,0 4,0 10,0 16,0 20,0 31,25 62,5 100,0 160,0 200,0 250,0 300,0 350,0 400,0 550,0 600,0 750,0 900,0 1000,0 1200,0

CABOS

Desempenho Típico 1- 900 MHZ

Perda de Inserção Máxima* (dB/100m) 2,0 3,7 5,9 7,4 8,3 10,4 14,9 19,0 24,4 27,5 31,0 34,2 37,2 40,0 47,7 50,1 56,8 63,0 66,9 74,4

2,0 3,7 5,9 7,4 8,3 10,4 14,9 19,0 24,4 27,5 31,0 34,2 37,2 40,0 47,7 50,1 56,8 63,0 66,9 74,4 7% melhor que o pior caso

ISO/IEC

Perda de NEXT Mínima* (dB/100m) 78,0 78,0 78,0 78,0 78,0 78,0 75,5 72,4 69,3 67,9 66,4 65,2 64,2 63,4 61,3 60,7 59,3 58,1 57,4 56,2

78,0 78,0 78,0 78,0 78,0 78,0 75,5 72,4 69,3 67,9 66,4 65,2 64,2 63,4 61,3 60,7 59,3 58,1 57,4 56,2 5 dB melhor que o pior caso

Desempenho baseado em 100 metros de comprimento.

Perda de PS NEXT Mínima* (dB/100m) 75,0 75,0 75,0 75,0 75,0 75,0 72,5 69,4 66,3 64,9 63,4 62,2 61,2 60,4 58,3 57,7 56,3 55,1 54,4 53,2

75,0 75,0 75,0 75,0 75,0 75,0 72,5 69,4 66,3 64,9 63,4 62,2 61,2 60,4 58,3 57,7 56,3 55,1 54,4 53,2 7 dB melhor que o pior caso

VALORES

Perda de ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 94,0 82,0 74,0 69,9 68,0 64,1 58,1 54,0 49,9 48,0 46,0 44,5 43,1 42,0 39,2 38,4 36,5 34,9 34,0 32,4

75,0 75,0 74,0 69,9 68,0 64,1 58,1 54,0 49,9 48,0 46,0 44,5 43,1 42,0 39,2 38,4 36,5 34,9 34,0 32,4 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

PIOR CASO SIEMON

Perda de PS ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 75,0 75,0 71,0 66,9 65,0 61,1 55,1 51,0 46,9 45,0 43,0 41,5 40,1 39,0 36,2 35,4 33,5 31,9 31,0 29,4

75,0 75,0 71,0 66,9 65,0 61,1 55,1 51,0 46,9 45,0 43,0 41,5 40,1 39,0 36,2 35,4 33,5 31,9 31,0 29,4 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de Retorno Mínima* (dB/100m) 20,0 23,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 23,6 21,5 20,1 18,7 18,0 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3

20,0 23,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 23,6 21,5 18,7 18,7 18,0 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3 17,3

Atraso de Propagação Máximo (ns/100m) 570 552 545 543 542 540 539 538 537 537 536 536 536 536 536 536 535 535 535 535

1,8 dB melhor que o pior caso

512 494 487 485 484 482 481 480 479 479 478 478 478 478 478 478 477 477 477 477 20 ns melhor que o pior caso

Delay Skew Máximo 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0

20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 20,0 5 ns melhor que o pior caso

* Valores abaixo de 4 MHz são apenas informativos. Valores acima de 900 MHz são apenas informativos. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABOS

10G 6™ CABO REDONDO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES - 550 MHz Nº DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO 9C6R4-E5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9C6P4-E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9C6X4-E5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX, IEC 332.1), Capa Cinza, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9C6L4-E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSOH (IEC 332.1), Capa Violeta, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés)

CONFORMIDADE • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição (Categoria 6) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 Primeira Edição • LSOH:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754 e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR e CSA FT4 • UL CMP e CSA FT6

CONSTRUÇÃO DO CABO • UTP • Cobre sólido 0,57 mm (0,23 polegadas), 23 AWG • Marcação seqüencial na capa • Membro de separaçaõ central

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉTRICAS Resistência DC Máxima (@ 20° C)

9,4 ohms/100m

Impedância Característica (Valores médios de impedância não permitidos)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 22%

Velocidade Nominal de Propagação (NVP)

0,65

DESEMPENHO DE TRANSMISSÃO Freqüência (MHz) 1,0 4,0 10,0 16,0 20,0 31,25 62,5 100,0 160,0 200,0 250,0 300,0 350,0 400,0 550,0 Desempenho Típico 1- 550 MHZ

Perda de Inserção Máxima (dB/100m) 2,0 3,8 6,0 7,6 8,5 10,7 15,4 19,8 25,6 29,0 32,8 36,4 39,8 43,0 51,8

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

Perda de NEXT Mínima (dB/100m)

2,0 3,6 5,7 7,2 8,8 10,0 14,3 18,3 23,5 26,4 29,8 32,8 35,7 38,4 45,8

74,3 65,3 59,3 56,2 54,8 51,9 47,4 44,3 41,2 39,8 38,3 37,1 36,1 35,3 33,2

7% melhor que o pior caso

81,3 72,3 66,3 63,2 61,8 58,9 54,4 51,3 48,2 46,8 45,3 44,1 43,1 42,3 40,2 5 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de PS NEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 72,3 63,3 57,3 54,2 52,8 49,9 45,4 42,3 39,2 37,8 36,3 35,1 34,1 33,3 31,2

79,3 70,3 64,3 61,2 59,8 56,9 52,4 49,3 46,2 44,8 43,3 42,1 41,1 40,3 38,2 7 dB melhor que o pior caso

VALORES

Perda de ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 67,8 55,8 47,8 43,7 41,8 37,9 31,9 27,8 23,7 21,8 19,8 18,3 16,9 15,8 13,0

73,8 61,7 53,8 49,7 47,7 43,9 37,8 33,8 29,7 27,7 25,8 24,2 22,9 21,7 18,9 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de PS ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 64,8 52,8 44,8 40,7 38,8 34,9 28,9 24,8 20,7 18,8 16,8 15,3 13,9 12,8 10,0

70,8 58,7 50,8 46,7 44,7 40,9 34,8 30,8 26,7 24,7 22,8 21,2 19,9 18,7 15,9 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

PIOR CASO SIEMON

Perda de Retorno Mínima (dB/100m) 20,0 23,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 23,6 21,5 20,1 18,7 18,0 17,3 16,8 16,3 15,9 14,9

20,0 23,6 26,0 26,0 26,0 24,6 22,5 21,1 19,7 19,0 18,3 17,8 17,3 16,9 15,9 1,8 dB melhor que o pior caso

Atraso de Propagação Máximo (ns/100m) 570 552 545 543 542 540 539 538 537 537 536 536 536 536 536

550 532 525 523 522 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 516 516 20 ns melhor que o pior caso

Delay Skew Máximo 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0

35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 5 ns melhor que o pior caso

Desempenho baseado em 100 metros de comprimento.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SYSTEM 6® CABO REDONDO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES - 300 MHz Nº DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO 9C6R4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9C6P4-E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9C6X4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX, IEC 332.1), Capa Cinza, caixa com (305 m, 1000 pés) 9C6L4-E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSOH (IEC 332.1), Capa Violeta, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) CONFORMIDADE • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição (Categoria 6) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 Primeira Edição • LSOH:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754 e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR e CSA FT4 • UL CMP e CSA FT6

CONSTRUÇÃO DO CABO • UTP • Cobre sólido 0,5 mm (0,02 polegadas), 24 AWG • Marcação seqüencial na capa • Membro de separação central

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉTRICAS Resistência DC Máxima (@ 20° C)

9,4 ohms/100m

Impedância Característica (Valores médios de impedância não permitidos)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 22%

Velocidade Nominal de Propagação (NVP)

0,65

DESEMPENHO DE TRANSMISSÃO Freqüência (MHz) 1,0 4,0 10,0 16,0 20,0 31,25 62,5 100,0 160,0 200,0 250,0 300,0 350,0 400,0

CABOS

Desempenho Típico 1- 300 MHZ

Perda de Inserção Máxima (dB/100m) 2,0 3,8 6,0 7,6 8,5 10,7 15,4 19,8 25,6 29,0 32,8 36,4 39,4 43,0

2,0 3,7 5,9 7,5 8,4 10,6 15,2 19,6 25,4 28,7 32,6 36,1 36,1 42,6 7% melhor que o pior caso

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

Perda de NEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 74,3 65,3 59,3 56,2 54,8 51,9 47,4 44,3 41,2 39,8 38,3 37,1 39,1 35,3

75,3 68,3 62,3 59,2 57,8 54,9 50,4 47,3 44,2 42,8 41,3 40,1 34,1 38,3 5 dB melhor que o pior caso

Desempenho baseado em 100 metros de comprimento.

Perda de PS NEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 72,3 63,3 57,3 54,2 52,8 49,9 45,4 42,3 39,2 37,8 36,3 35,1 34,1 33,3

73,3 64,3 60,3 57,2 55,8 52,9 48,4 45,3 42,2 40,8 39,3 38,1 37,1 36,3 7 dB melhor que o pior caso

VALORES

Perda de ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 67,8 55,8 47,8 43,7 41,8 37,9 31,9 27,8 23,7 21,8 19,8 18,3 16,9 15,8

70,8 58,8 50,8 46,7 44,8 40,9 34,9 30,8 26,7 24,8 22,8 21,3 19,9 18,8 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de PS ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 64,8 52,8 44,8 40,7 38,8 34,9 28,9 24,8 20,7 18,8 16,8 15,3 13,9 12,8

68,8 56,8 48,8 44,7 42,8 38,9 32,9 28,8 24,7 22,8 20,8 19,2 17,9 16,8 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

PIOR CASO SIEMON

Perda de Retorno Mínima (dB/100m) 20,0 23,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 23,6 250 21,5 20,1 18,7 18,0 250 17,3 16,8 16,3 15,9

20,0 23,6 26,0 26,0 26,0 23,6 21,5 20,1 18,7 18,0 17,3 16,8 16,3 15,9

Atraso de Propagação Máximo (ns/100m) 570 552 545 543 542 540 539 538 537 537 536 536 536 536

1,8 dB melhor que o pior caso

550 532 525 523 522 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 516 20 ns melhor que o pior caso

Delay Skew Máximo 45,0 45,0 45,5 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0

35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 5 ns melhor que o pior caso

Valores acima de 300 MHz são apenas informativos.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABOS

SYSTEM 6® CABO REDONDO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES ScTP Nº DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO 9A6R4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9A6P4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9A6X4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX, IEC 332.1), Capa Cinza, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9A6L4-E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSOH (IEC 332.1), Capa Violeta, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) CONFORMIDADE • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição (Categoria 6) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 Primeira Edição • Requisitos ISO/IEC para impedância de transferência e atenuação • LSOH:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754 e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR e CSA FT4 • UL CMP e CSA FT6

CONSTRUÇÃO DO CABO • ScTP • Cobre sólido 0,5 mm (0,02 polegadas), 24 AWG • Diâmetro máximo da capa: 7,3 mm (0,29 polegadas) • Diâmetro máximo do isolante do condutor: 1,07 mm (0,042 polegadas) • Membro central de separação • Blindagem em folha de alumínio fechada (0,024 polegadas) com um condutor de dreno (em cobre) de 24 AWG

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉTRICAS Resistência DC Máxima (@ 20° C)

9,4 ohms/100m

Impedância Característica (Valores médios de impedância não permitidos)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 22%

Velocidade Nominal de Propagação (NVP)

0,65

DESEMPENHO DE TRANSMISSÃO Freqüência (MHz) 1,0 4,0 10,0 16,0 20,0 31,25 62,5 100,0 160,0 200,0 250,0 300,0 350,0 400,0 Desempenho Típico 1- 300 MHZ

Perda de Inserção Máxima (dB/100m) 2,0 3,8 6,0 7,6 8,5 10,7 15,4 19,8 25,6 29,0 32,8 36,4 39,8 43,0

Perda de NEXT Mínima (dB/100m)

2,0 3,7 5,9 7,5 8,4 10,6 15,2 19,6 25,4 28,7 32,6 36,1 39,4 42,6

74,3 65,3 59,3 56,2 54,8 51,9 47,4 44,3 41,2 39,8 38,3 37,1 36,1 35,3

7% melhor que o pior caso

75,3 68,3 62,3 59,2 57,8 54,9 50,4 47,3 44,2 42,8 41,3 40,1 39,1 38,3 5 dB melhor que o pior caso

Desempenho baseado em 100 metros de comprimento.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

VALORES

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

Perda de PS NEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 72,3 63,3 57,3 54,2 52,8 49,9 45,4 42,3 39,2 37,8 36,3 35,1 34,1 33,3

73,3 64,3 60,3 57,2 55,8 52,9 48,4 45,3 42,2 40,8 39,3 38,1 37,1 36,3 7 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 67,8 55,8 47,8 43,7 41,8 37,9 31,9 27,8 23,7 21,8 19,8 18,3 16,9 15,8

70,8 58,8 50,8 46,7 44,8 40,9 34,9 30,8 26,7 24,8 22,8 21,3 19,9 18,8 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de PS ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 64,8 52,8 44,8 40,7 38,8 34,9 28,9 24,8 20,7 18,8 16,8 15,3 13,9 12,8

68,8 56,8 48,8 44,7 42,8 38,9 32,9 28,8 24,7 22,8 20,8 19,2 17,9 16,8 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

PIOR CASO SIEMON

Perda de Retorno Mínima (dB/100m) 20,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 23,6 21,5 20,1 18,7 18,0 250 17,3 16,8 16,3 15,9

20,0 23,6 26,0 26,0 26,0 23,6 21,5 20,1 18,7 18,0 17,3 16,8 16,3 15,9 1,8 dB melhor que o pior caso

Atraso de Propagação Máximo (ns/100m) 570 552 545 543 542 540 539 538 537 537 536 536 536 536

550 532 525 523 522 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 516 20 ns melhor que o pior caso

Delay Skew Máximo 45,0 45,0 45,5 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0

35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 35,0 25,0 25,0 5 ns melhor que o pior caso

Valores acima de 300 MHz são apenas informativos.

CABO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES PREMIUM 5e® E 25 PARES CATEGORIA 5 CABO RÍGIDO DE 4 PARES Nº DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO 9C5R4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9C544-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CM, CSA FT6), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9C5X4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX, IEC 332.1), Capa Cinza, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9C5L4-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSOH (IEC 332.1), Capa Violeta, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés)

CABO RÍGIDO DE 25 PARES Nº DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO 9C5R25-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), Capa Azul 9C5X25-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX, IEC 332.1), Capa Cinza 9C5L25-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSOH (IEC 332.1), Capa Violeta O cabo de 25 pares é fornecido em carretéis de madeira.

CONFORMIDADE • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição (Categoria 5e) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 • IEC 61156-5 Primeira Edição • LSOH:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754 e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR e CSA FT4 • UL CMP e CSA FT6 CONSTRUÇÃO DO CABO • UTP • Grupos de 4 pares construídos juntos com rip cord • Cobre sólido 0,5 mm (0,02 polegadas), 24 AWG • Diâmetro máximo da capa: 5,5 mm (0,22 polegadas) - apenas para o cabo de 4 pares • Diâmetro máximo do isolante do condutor: 1,0 mm (0,04 polegadas) • Marca seqüencial de comprimento na capa do cabo

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉTRICAS Resistência DC Máxima (@ 20° C)

9,4 ohms/100m

Impedância Característica

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 15%

(Valores médios de impedância não permitidos)

Velocidade Nominal de Propagação (NVP)

0,65

DESEMPENHO DE TRANSMISSÃO* Freqüência (MHz) 1,0 4,0 10,0 16,0 20,0 31,25 62,5 100,0 160,0 200,0 250,0 300,0 350,0

CABOS

Desempenho Típico 1- 160 MHZ

Perda de Inserção Máxima (dB/100m) 2,0 4,1 6,5 8,2 9,3 11,7 17,0 22,0 28,6 32,4 36,9 41,0 44,9

2,0 4,1 6,5 8,2 9,2 11,5 16,4 21,0 26,8 30,2 34,0 37,4 40,7 5% melhor que o pior caso

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

Perda de NEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 65,3 56,3 50,3 47,2 45,8 42,9 38,4 35,3 32,2 30,8 29,3 28,1 27,1

68,3 59,3 53,3 50,2 48,8 45,9 41,4 38,3 35,2 33,8 32,3 31,2 30,2 5 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de PS NEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 62,3 53,3 47,3 44,2 42,8 39,9 35,4 32,3 29,2 27,8 26,3 25,1 24,1

66,3 57,3 51,3 48,3 46,8 43,9 39,4 36,3 33,3 31,8 30,3 29,2 28,2

Perda de ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 63,8 51,8 43,8 39,7 37,8 33,9 27,9 23,8 19,7 17,8 15,8 14,3 12,9

6 dB melhor que o pior caso

Desempenho baseado em 100 metros de comprimento. *For 4-pair cable. Contact Siemon Technical Support for 25-pair specifications.

VALORES

67,8 55,8 47,8 43,7 41,8 37,9 31,9 27,8 23,7 21,8 19,8 18,2 16,9 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de PS ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 60,8 48,8 40,8 36,7 34,8 30,9 24,9 20,8 16,7 14,8 12,8 11,3 9,9

65,8 53,7 45,8 41,7 39,7 35,9 29,8 25,8 21,7 19,7 17,8 16,2 14,9 13 dB melhor que o pior caso

PIOR CASO SIEMON

Perda de Retorno Mínima (dB/100m) 20,0 23,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 23,6 21,5 20,1 18,7 18,0 250 17,3 16,8 16,3

20,0 23,3 25,5 25,5 25,5 24,4 22,7 21,5 19,6 19,0 18,4 17,9 17,4

Atraso de Propagação Máximo (ns/100m) 569 552 545 543 542 540 538 538 537 536 536 536 536

3,5 dB melhor que o pior caso

550 532 525 523 522 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 35 ns melhor que o pior caso

Delay Skew Máximo 45,0 45,0 45,5 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 4,0

40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 20 ns melhor que o pior caso

Valores acima de 250 MHz são apenas informativos.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABOS

CABO SÓLIDO REDONDO DE 4 PARES PREMIUM 5e® ScTP Nº DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO 9A5R4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9A5P4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), Capa Azul, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9A5X4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX, IEC 332.1), Capa Cinza, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) 9A5L4-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSOH (IEC 332.1), Capa Violeta, (caixa com 305 m, 1000 pés) CONFORMIDADE • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição (Categoria 5e) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2 • IEC 61156-5 Primeira Edição • Requisitos ISO/IEC para impedância de transferência e atenuação • LSOH:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754 e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR e CSA FT4 • UL CMP e CSA FT6

CONSTRUÇÃO DO CABO • ScTP • Cobre sólido 0,5 mm (0,02 polegadas), 24 AWG • Diâmetro máximo da capa: 6,1 mm (0,24 polegadas) • Diâmetro máximo do isolante do condutor: 1,0 mm (0,04 polegadas) • Blindagem em folha de alumínio fechada (0,024 polegadas) com um condutor de dreno (em cobre) de 24 AWG

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉTRICAS Resistência DC Máxima (@ 20° C)

9,4 ohms/100m

Impedância Característica (Valores médios de impedância não permitidos)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 22%

Velocidade Nominal de Propagação (NVP)

0,65

DESEMPENHO DE TRANSMISSÃO Freqüência (MHz) 1,0 4,0 10,0 16,0 20,0 25,0 31,25 62,5 100,0 160,0 200,0 250,0 300,0 350,0 Desempenho Típico 1- 160 MHZ

Perda de Inserção Máxima (dB/100m) 2,0 4,1 6,5 8,2 9,3 10,4 11,7 17,0 22,0 28,6 32,4 36,9 41,0 44,9

Perda de NEXT Mínima (dB/100m)

2,0 4,1 6,5 8,2 9,2 10,3 11,5 16,4 21,0 26,8 30,2 34,0 37,4 40,7

65,3 56,3 50,3 47,2 45,8 44,3 42,9 38,4 35,3 30,3 30,8 29,3 28,1 27,1

5% melhor que o pior caso

68,3 59,3 53,3 50,2 48,8 47,3 45,9 41,4 38,3 35,2 33,8 32,3 31,2 30,2 5 dB melhor que o pior caso

Desempenho baseado em 100 metros de comprimento.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

VALORES

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

Perda de PS NEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 62,3 53,3 47,3 44,2 42,8 41,3 39,9 35,4 32,3 29,2 27,8 26,3 25,1 24,1

66,3 57,3 51,3 48,3 46,8 45,3 43,9 39,4 36,3 33,3 31,8 30,3 29,2 28,2 6 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 63,8 51,8 43,8 39,7 37,8 35,8 33,9 27,9 23,8 19,7 17,8 15,8 14,3 12,9

67,8 55,8 47,8 43,7 41,8 39,8 37,9 31,9 27,8 23,7 21,8 19,8 18,2 16,9 10 dB melhor que o pior caso

Perda de PS ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 60,8 48,8 40,8 36,7 34,8 32,8 30,9 24,9 20,8 16,7 14,8 12,8 11,3 9,9

65,8 53,7 45,8 41,7 39,7 37,8 35,9 29,8 25,8 21,7 19,7 17,8 16,2 14,9 13 dB melhor que o pior caso

PIOR CASO SIEMON

Perda de Retorno Mínima (dB/100m) 20,0 23,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 24,3 23,6 21,5 20,1 18,7 250 18,0 17,3 16,8 16,3

20,0 23,3 25,5 25,5 25,5 24,9 24,4 22,7 21,5 19,6 19,0 18,4 17,9 17,4 3,5 dB melhor que o pior caso

Atraso de Propagação Máximo (ns/100m) 569 552 545 543 542 541 540 538 538 537 536 536 536 535

550 532 525 523 522 521 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 35 ns melhor que o pior caso

Delay Skew Máximo 45,0 45,0 45,5 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0 45,0

40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 40,0 25,0 25,0 20 ns melhor que o pior caso

Valores acima de 250 MHz são apenas informativos.

FIO DE CROSS-CONNECT SYSTEM 6® CABO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES Nº DA PEÇA DESCRIÇÃO CJ6-W4-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Pares, 24 AWG (0,5 mm), Fio de cross-connect Categoria 6, pares coloridos: azul/ laranja/ verde/ marrom, bobina com 305 m

CONFORMIDADE • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição (Categoria 6) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 Primeira Edição CONSTRUÇÃO DO CABO • Condutores de cobre sólido 0,5 mm (0,02 polegadas), 24 AWG • Diâmetro nominal do isolante: 1,02 mm (0,04 polegadas)

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉTRICAS Resistência DC Máxima (@ 20° C)

9,4 ohms/100m

Impedância Característica (Valores médios de impedância não permitidos)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms +/- 22%

Velocidade Nominal de Propagação (NVP)

0,65

DESEMPENHO DE TRANSMISSÃO

Freqüência (MHz)

CABOS

1,0 2,0 4,0 10,0 16,0 25,0 31,25 62,5 100,0 125,0 160,0 175,0 200,0 250,0

Perda de Inserção Máxima (dB/100m) 2,0 2,7 3,8 6,0 7,6 8,5 10,7 15,4 19,8 22,4 25,6 26,9 29,0 32,8

2,0 2,7 3,8 6,0 7,6 8,5 10,7 15,4 19,8 22,4 25,1 29,9 29,0 32,8

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

Perda de NEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 74,3 69,8 65,3 59,3 56,2 54,8 51,9 47,4 44,3 42,8 41,2 40,7 39,8 38,3

74,3 69,8 65,3 59,3 56,2 54,8 51,9 47,4 44,3 42,8 41,2 40,7 39,8 38,3

Perda de PS NEXT* Mínima (dB) 72,3 67,8 63,3 57,3 54,2 52,8 49,9 45,4 42,3 40,8 39,2 38,7 37,8 36,3

72,3 67,8 63,3 57,3 54,2 52,8 49,9 45,4 42,3 40,8 39,2 38,7 37,8 36,3

VALORES

Perda de ELFEXT Mínima (dB/100m) 67,8 61,8 55,8 47,8 43,7 41,8 37,9 31,9 27,8 25,9 23,7 22,9 21,8 19,8

67,8 61,8 55,8 47,8 43,7 41,8 37,9 31,9 27,8 25,9 23,7 22,9 21,8 19,8

PIOR CASO SIEMON

Perda de PS ELFEXT* Mínima (dB/100m) 64,8 58,8 52,8 44,8 40,7 38,8 34,9 28,9 24,8 22,9 20,7 19,9 18,8 16,8

64,8 58,8 52,8 44,8 40,7 38,8 34,9 28,9 24,8 22,9 20,7 19,9 18,8 16,8

Perda de Retorno Mínima (dB/100m) 20,0 21,5 23,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 23,6 21,5 20,1 19,4 18,7 18,4 18,0 17,3

20,0 21,5 23,0 25,0 25,0 25,0 23,6 21,5 20,1 19,4 18,7 18,4 18,0 17,3

Desempenho baseado em 100 metros de comprimento. *Até 2 dB de melhoria em crosstalk (diafonia) pode ser esperada para cabos de cross-connect (jumpers) sem capa.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABOS

INFORMAÇÕES TÉCNICAS DIAGRAMA DE CÓDIGOS DE CORES PARA CABOS

Condutor de Ring Número do Par

Cor da Isolação

Condutor de Tip

Marca da Banda

Cor da Isolação

Marca da Banda

Azul

Branco

Azul

Laranja

Branco

Laranja

Verde

Branco

Verde

Marrom

Branco

Marrom

Ardósia

Branco

Ardósia

Azul

Vermelho

Azul

Laranja

Vermelho

Laranja

Verde

Vermelho

Verde

Marrom

Vermelho

Marrom

Ardósia

Vermelho

Ardósia

Azul

Preto

Azul

Laranja

Preto

Laranja

Verde

Preto

Verde

Marrom

Preto

Marrom

Ardósia

Preto

Ardósia

Azul

Amarelo

Azul

Laranja

Amarelo

Laranja

Verde

Amarelo

Verde

Marrom

Amarelo

Marrom

Ardósia

Amarelo

Ardósia

Azul

Violeta

Azul

Laranja

Violeta

Laranja

Verde

Violeta

Verde

Marrom

Violeta

Marrom

Ardósia

Violeta

Ardósia

DIAGRAMA DE EQUIVALÊNCIA CONTRA CHAMAS DO NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE (NEC) E DO IEC

Nível de Resistência Anti-Chama

Especificação NEC Artigo 800*

Especificação IEC equivalente

Plenum Cabos (Mais Alta)

CMP/CSA FT6

—

Cabos Riser (Múltiplos Andares)

CMP/CSA FT4

—

Finalidade Geral Estados Unidos

IEC 332.3, Categoria C

Finalidade Geral Europa

CMX**

IEC 332.1

Cabos Residenciais Uso Restrito (Mais Baixa)

CMX

IEC 332.1

*O Artigo 800 do National Electrical Code especifica os níveis de resistência anti-chama para cabos de comunicações para instalações internas. **Especificação NEC equivalente Notas: 1. Cabos com mais altas especificações anti-chama podem ser substituídos por cabos com mais baixas especificações anti-chama (como exemplo, um cabo plenum pode ser usado em uma aplicação riser). 2. Cabos classificados CM são especificados pela norma NEC 800-53 para cabos penetrando um andar. 3. Os cabos LS0H satisfazem uma classificação equivalente à NEC no tocante às especificações anti-chama dos cabos CM ou CMX. 4. A utilização de tecnologias e procedimentos adequados anti-chama é altamente recomendada independente da classificação do cabo. Siga os códigos locais e/ou nacionais aplicáveis. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABO DE FIBRA ÓPTICA PARA ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT XGLO™ — DISTRIBUIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA

QUANTIDADE DE FIBRAS

QUANTIDADE DE SUB-UNIDADES (FIBRAS/ SUB-UNIDADE) 9F(XX)B(X)-4A(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uma única unidade 9F(XX)B(X)-6B(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uma única unidade 9F(XX)B(X)-12D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uma única unidade 9F(XX)B(X)-24B(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (6) 9F(XX)B(X)-48D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (12) 9F(XX)B(X)-72D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 (12) 9F(XX)B(X)-96D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 (12) Use (XX) para especificar o tipo: 5L = Cabo multimodo otimizado para laser 50/125µm , 8L= Cabo monomodo otimizado para laser Use (X) para especificar a classificação do cabo: 1 = CMR, 2 = plenum, 3 = LS0H Use (XXXX) para especificar o comprimento em quilômetros, use quatro dígitos incluindo o ponto decimal. O último “X” deve ser zero (0) ou cinco (5) apenas. Exemplo P/N: 9F5LB1-12D1.50: (1,5 km [1500 metros] de cabo multimodo de 50/125µm otimizado para laser, 12 fibras classificação riser) Para compras de menos de 1 km, o primeiro "X" deve ser zero (0). Exemplo: 9F5LB1-12D0.55 (0,550 km [550 metros] de cabo óptico multimodo de 50/125µm otimizado para laser 12 fibras classificação riser) Projetos e especificações dos cabos sujeitos a alterações sem notificação prévia. CONFORMIDADE • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1 • LSOH:VW-1, IEC 1034, IEC 754 • CMR: Comunicações tipo OFNR (UL) e CSA FT4 (UL) • IEC-60793-2-10 • Especificação DMD de largura de banda para laser da TIA-492AAAC • Procedimentos de teste e medição IEC 60793-2-49 e TIA/EIA 455-220 DMD APLICAÇÃO • 10 Gigabit Ethernet • Gigabit Ethernet • 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet • ATM • FDDI • Vídeo de banda larga • Aplicações atuais e futuras aprovadas pela TIA, EIA, IEEE, ATM Forum, ANSI, IEC ou ISO que especificam compatibilidade com o tipo de cabo instalado de acordo com a ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1

CABOS

CONSTRUÇÃO DO CABO • Projeto de buffer tipo tight reduz o diâmetro do cabo e os espaços requeridos para seu lançamento • Flexível e leve para uma fácil instalação • Capas externas e internas (subunidades) termoplásticas • Membros de tração de aramida de alta resistência • Membro de tração central de material dielétrico • Código de cores padrão da indústria para buffers e sub-unidades: azul, laranja, verde, marrom, ardósia, branco, vermelho, preto, amarelo, violeta, rosa e azul claro

4 & 6 FIBRAS (mostrado 6 Fibras) 58

12 FIBRAS

24 FIBRAS

4 e 6 Fibras

12 Fibras

24 Fibras

48 Fibras

72 e 96 Fibras

48 FIBRAS

72 e 96 FIBRAS (mostrado 72 Fibras) W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABOS

CABO DE FIBRA ÓPTICA PARA ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT XGLO™ — DISTRIBUIÇÃO ESPECIFICAÇÕES ÓPTICAS - RISER, PLENUM E LSOH Parâmetros de Desempenho Mínimo para Fibra Multimodo 50/125 XGLO Distância (m)

Distância (m)

Largura de Banda Mínima

Atenuação Máxima

Índice de Grupo

Garantida para

(MHz.km)

(dB/km)

DE REFRAÇÃO

TRANSMISSÃO Gigabit

TRANSMISSÃO 10 Gigabit

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm†

1300 nm††

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm

1300 nm

900

600

300

Laser - 2000 OFL - 1500

Laser - 500 OFL - 500

3,5

1,5

1,483

1,478

† 10GBASE-S †† 10GBASE-LX4

Parâmetros de Desempenho Mínimo para Fibra Monomodo XGLO Fibra

Tipo de Cabo

Atenuação Máxima

Dispersão Zero

Índice de

(dB/km)

Monomodo

1310 nm

1550 nm

ComprimentodeOnda(nm)

Slope (nm2-km)

1310 nm

1550 nm

0,70

1300-1322

<0,092

1,466

1,467

Uso Interno

Dimensão do Núcleo

Tipo de Fibra e Modo

REFRAÇÃO

Dimensão do Núcleo +

Dimensão do

Casca

Revestimento

(microns)

50/125µm

50 ± 3

125 ± 2

Monomodo

8,3 ± 1

125 ± 2

245 ± 5

Dimensão do Buffer (microns)

900 ± 50

Concentricidade Casca-Núcleo (microns)

<12

ESPECIFICAÇÕES FÍSICAS — Riser apenas (Para cabos Plenum e LSOH visite nosso web site e consulte nossas folhas de especificações técnicas de produtos) Tensão Máxima de Puxamento Newtons (lbs)

(pol.)

Instalação

Descanso/Repouso

5,10

(0,201)

1000 (225)

290 (65)

22 (15)

5,21

(0,205)

1000 (225)

290 (65)

27 (18)

7,62

(0,300)

1400 (315)

500 (112)

13,59

(0,535)

2670 (600)

600 (135)

15,04

(0,592)

4450 (1000)

1000 (225)

19,56

(0,770)

5560 (1250)

1245 (280)

22,70

(0,894)

7340 (1650)

1670 (375)

Número de Fibras

Resistência Mínima de Esmagamento (N/cm)

Ciclos Mínimos de Impacto

500

1485

1000

1500

Raio Mínimo de Curvatura Instalação

15x Diâmetro Externo

Descanso/Repouso

10x Diâmetro Externo

36,9 (25) 140 (94) 193,5 (130)

20x Diâmetro Externo

300 (202) 426 (286)

Ciclos Mínimos de

Temperatura de

Resistência à

Operação

Armazenagem

Flexão

(° C)

1000

-20/70

-40/70

1000

W W W

Peso Líqüido Máximo kg/km (lbs/1000 pés)

Diâmetro Nominal do Cabo

Número de Fibras

S I E M O N

C O M

CABO DE FIBRA ÓPTICA PARA ETHERNET GIGABIT LIGHTSYSTEM® — DISTRIBUIÇÃO NO DA PEÇA

QUANTIDADE DE FIBRAS

QUANTIDADE DE SUB-UNIDADES (FIBRAS/ SUB-UNIDADE) 9F(X)B(Y)-4A(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uma única unidade 9F(X)B(Y)-6B(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uma única unidade 9F(X)B(Y)-12D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uma única unidade 9F(X)B(Y)-24B(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (6) 9F(X)B(Y)-48D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (12) 9F(X)B(Y)-72D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 (12) 9F(X)B(Y)-96D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 (12) Use (X) para especificar tipo: 5 = 50/125µm, Multimodo 6 = 62.5/125µm, Multimodo 8 = Monomodo Use (Y) para especificar a classificação do cabo: 1 = CMR, 2 = plenum, 3 = LS0H Use (XXXX) para especificar o comprimento em km, quatro dígitos incluindo o ponto decimal O último “X” deve ser zero (0) ou cinco (5) apenas. Exemplo: P/N: 9F6B1-96D1.15; (Cabo Riser, 62.5/125µm Multimodo, 96 fibras, 8 sub-unidades, 12 fibras/sub-unidade, 1,15km ). Para pedidos de menos de 1 km, o primeiro “X” deve ser zero (0). Exemplo: 9F5B1-12D0.55 (0,550 km [550 metros] de fibra otimizada para laser de 50/125µm, 12-fibras de classificação riser Projetos e especificações dos cabos estão sujeitos a alterações sem notificação prévia.

CONFORMIDADE • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição • TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • LS0H: VW-1, IEC 1034, IEC 754 • Comunicações tipo OFNR (UL) e CSA FT4 (UL)

CABOS

4 e 6 FIBRAS

12 FIBRAS

12 Fibras

24 Fibras

APLICAÇÃO • Gigabit Ethernet • 10/100 Mb/s Ethernet • ATM • FDDI • Vídeo de banda larga • Aplicações atuais e futuras aprovadas pela TIA, EIA, IEEE, ATM Forum, ANSI, IEC ou ISO que especificam compatibilidade com o tipo de cabo instalado de acordo com a ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 • Backbones Intrabuilding (dentro de um único edifício) • Lançamento vertical em shafts dentro do edifício • Dutos secos e conduítes

(mostrado 6 Fibras)

4 e 6 Fibras

24 FIBRAS

48 Fibras

72 e 96 Fibras

48 FIBRAS

72 e 96 FIBRAS (mostrado 72 Fibras)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABOS

CABO DE FIBRA ÓPTICA PARA ETHERNET GIGABIT LIGHTSYSTEM® —DISTRIBUIÇÃO

ESPECIFICAÇÕES ÓPTICAS - RISER, PLENUM E LSOH

Tipo de Fibra

50/125 62.5/125 Monomodo

Modo e Tipo de Fibra

Comprimento de onda

Atenuação Típica (dB/km)

Atenuação Máxima (dB/km)

Largura de Banda Modal Mínima (MHz-km)

Distância de Transmissão Garantida* (m) Padrão

Padrão

850

2,6

3,5

500

550

1300

0,6

1,0

500

550

850

2,9

3,5

200

275

1300

0,9

1,0

500

550

1310

0,35

1,0

N/D

1550

0,25

1,0

N/D

Dimensão do Núcleo (Microns)

Dimensão do Núcleo + Casca (Microns)

Dimensão do Revestimento (Microns)

Dimensão do Buffer (Microns)

50/125µm

50 ± 3

125 ± 2

250 ± 15

900 ± 50

62,5/125µm

62,5 ± 3

125 ± 2

250 ± 15

900 ± 50

Monomodo

8,3 ± 1

125 ± 1

250 ± 15

900 ± 50

ESPECIFICAÇÕES FÍSICAS — Riser apenas (Para cabos Plenum e LSOH visite nosso web site e consulte nossas folhas de especificações técnicas de produtos) Peso Líqüido Máximo kg/km (lbs/1000 pés)

Diâmetro Nominal do Cabo

Tensão Máxima de Puxamento Newtons (lbs)

(pol.)

Instalação

Descanso/Repouso

5,10

(0,201)

1000 (225)

290 (65)

22 (15)

5,21

(0,205)

1000 (225)

290 (65)

27 (18)

7,62

(0,300)

1400 (315)

500 (112)

13,59

(0,535)

2670 (600)

600 (135)

15,04

(0,592)

4450 (1000)

1000 (225)

19,56

(0,770)

5560 (1250)

1245 (280)

22,70

(0,894)

7340 (1650)

1670 (375)

Número de Fibras

Resistência Mínima de Esmagamento (N/cm)

Ciclos Mínimos de Impacto

500

Instalação

15x Diâmetro Externo

Descanso/Repouso

10x Diâmetro Externo

36,9 (25) 140 (94) 193,5 (130)

20x Diâmetro Externo

300 (202) 426 (286)

Ciclos Mínimos de

Temperatura de

Resistência à

Operação

Armazenagem

Flexão

(° C)

1000

-20/70

-40/70

1000

12 24

Raio Mínimo de Curvatura

1485

1000

1500

*O protocolo pertinente à distância de transmissão para Gigabit Ethernet é o IEEE 802.3:2002. Contate seu representante de vendas local para obter disponibilidade e prazos de entrega. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABO DE INTERCONEXÃO - LIGHTSYSTEM® GIGABIT ETHERNET CABO DE FIBRA ÓPTICA ZIPCORD DUPLEX E SIMPLEX NO DA PEÇA

QUANTIDADE DE FIBRAS

QUANTIDADE DE SUB-UNIDADES (FIBRAS/ SUB-UNIDADE) 9F(X)C(X)-1E(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (1) 9F(X)C(X)-2E(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (1) Utilize o primeiro "X" para especificar o tipo de fibra: 5 = fibra 50/125µm, Multimodo 6 = fibra 62,5/125µm, Multimodo 8 = Monomodo Utilize o segundo "X" para especificar a classificação do material do cabo: 1 = riser, 2 = plenum, 3 = LS0H Utilize "XXXX" para especificar o comprimento em quilômetros: quatro caracteres incluindo o ponto decimal O último "X" deve ser zero (0) ou cinco (5) apenas Adicione "P" ao fim do Número da Peça para desempenho classificado como premium. Exemplo: Nº da Peça (P/N): 9F6C1-2E1.15P; (Classificação Riser , 62,5/125µm Multimodo, Cabo Duplex , 2 sub-unidades, 1 fibra/sub-unidade, 1,15km de comprimento, classificação premium) Projeto do cabo e especificações estão sujeitas a alterações sem notificação prévia.

Simplex

CONFORMIDADE CLASSIFICAÇÃO RISER • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição • TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • Comunicações tipo OFNP (UL) e CSA FT6 c(UL) CLASSIFICAÇÃO PLENUM • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • IEC 754 • Comunicações tipo OFNP (UL) e CSA FT6 c(UL)

Duplex

CLASSIFICAÇÃO LSOH • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 Segunda Edição • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • IEC 754 • VW-1, IEC 1034

APLICAÇÃO • Fibra até a mesa do usuário (FTTD – Fiber To The Desk) • Conexão ao equipamento de transmissão • Conjuntos de jumpers para armários • Conjuntos de jumpers para patch panel

CONSTRUÇÃO DO CABO • Revestimento flexível e resiliente • Resistência de fio de aramida • Projeto de Buffer tipo Tight e flexível para uma fácil terminação

CABOS

Simplex

Duplex

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABOS

CABO DE INTERCONEXÃO - LIGHTSYSTEM® GIGABIT ETHERNET CABO DE FIBRA ÓPTICA ZIPCORD SIMPLEX E DUPLEX ESPECIFICAÇÕES ÓPTICAS Tipo de Fibra

50/125 62.5/125 Monomodo

Comprimento de onda

Atenuação Típica (dB/km)

Atenuação Máxima (dB/km)

Largura de Banda Modal Mínima (MHz.km)

Distância de Transmissão Garantida* (m)

(nm)

Padrão

850

2,6

3,5

500

550

1300

0,6

1,0

500

550

850

2,9

3,5

200

275

1300

0,9

1,0

500

550

1310

0,35

1,0

N/D

1550

0,25

1,0

N/D

ESPECIFICAÇÕES FÍSICAS — SIMPLEX Diâmetro

Diâmetro Nominal do Cabo

Tensão Máxima de Tração Newtons (Libras)

Raio Mínimo de Curvatura (mm)

(pol)

Instalação

Descanso/ Repouso

Instalação

Descanso/ Repouso

(lb/1000 pés)

3,05

(0,120)

400 (90)

133 (30)

9,7 (6,5)

Riser Plenum

8,3 (5,6)

LSOH

Diâmetro

9,7 (6,5)

Resistência Mínima de Flexão (N/cm)

Raio Mínimo de Flexão

Resistência Mínima de Flexão *

750

1000

Riser Plenum

Peso Líquido (máx.) kg/km

Temperatura de operação (° C)

Temperatura de armazenagem (° C)

-20/70

LSOH

-20/50

-40/70

-20/70

ESPECIFICAÇÕES FÍSICAS — DUPLEX Diâmetro

Diâmetro Nominal do Cabo mm (pol)

Tensão Máxima de Tração Newtons (Libras)

Raio Mínimo de Curvatura mm (pol)

Peso Líquido (máx.) kg/km

“X”

“Y’

Instalação

Descanso/ Repouso

Instalação

Descanso/ Repouso

(lb/1000 pés)

2,9 (0,114)

6,0 (0,235)

600 (135)

300 (67)

43,4 (1,71)

29,0 (1,14)

17,4 (11,7)

Riser Plenum LSOH

Diâmetro

Riser Plenum

Resistência Ciclos Ciclos Ciclos Temperatura Mínima de Mínimos de Mínimos de de Operação de Esmagamento Impacto Resistência à (° C) Armazenagem (N/cm) Flexão (° C) -20/70 750

1000

LSOH

1000

-20/50

-40/70

-20/70

*O protocolo pertinente à distância de transmissão para Gigabit Ethernet é o IEEE 802.3:2002. Contate seu representante de vendas local para obter disponibilidade e prazos de entrega. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

GARANTIA A The Siemon Company oferece uma linha completa de programas de garantia para produtos e sistemas: ■ Um (1) ano de garantia de reparo ou substituição para Ferramentas e Equipamentos de Teste. ■ Cinco (5) anos de garantia de reparo ou substituição para todos os produtos Siemon (hardware de conexão do sistema de cabeamento), quando não instalados em um Sistema de Cabeamento Siemon (Siemon Cabling System®) certificado. ■ Oferecemos vinte (20) anos de garantia para o Siemon Cabling System® (System 5e®, LightSystem®) cobrindo garantia de aplicações, produtos, cabos, e mão-de-obra para instalações executadas pelo Instalador Certificado Siemon (Siemon Certified InstallerSM), em um sistema de cabeamento registrado utilizando hardware de conexão e cabos qualificados da Siemon. ■ Oferecemos vinte (20) anos de garantia premium para o Siemon Cabling System® (Premium 5e®, System 6®, 10G 6™ e XGLO™) cobrindo garantia de aplicações, produtos, cabos e mão-de-obra para instalações executadas pelo Instalador Certificado Siemon (Siemon Certified Installer), em um sistema de cabeamento registrado utilizando hardware de conexão e cabos premium da Siemon. Entre em contato com o escritório local da Siemon Company para obter detalhes da garantia quanto a condições e limitações.

*THE SIEMON COMPANY GARANTIA LIMITADA DE PRODUTOS DE CINCO (5) ANOS

GARANTIA

A Siemon garante que seus produtos estão isentos de defeitos de material e fabricação. Na ocorrência de falhas de conformidade das especificações em qualquer produto, após a notificação por escrito enviada pelo Distribuidor do produto envolvido, dentro do prazo de (5) cinco anos contados a partir da data de aquisição, a Siemon, a seu critério, substituirá o produto no ponto de entrega original F.O.B. ou efetuará o reembolso do preço de compra e terá o direito de solicitar ao Distribuidor a devolução do produto defeituoso para sua fábrica, a não ser que tal devolução seja impraticável. As reparações aqui oferecidas serão os únicos e exclusivos recursos disponíveis ao Comprador, e nenhuma afirmação ou recomendação não contida na presente garantia terá qualquer força ou efeito, a não ser que redigida e assinada por um funcionário graduado autorizado da Siemon. A Siemon não oferece nenhuma garantia, expressa ou implícita, quanto à utilidade e adequação de qualquer produto vendido para um propósito particular. Em nenhuma circunstância, a Siemon será responsável por quaisquer danos incidentais ou conseqüentes, previstos em contrato, por atos ilícitos ou qualquer outra forma. Esta garantia se aplica somente aos produtos de cabeamento utilizados para terminar ou efetuar conexões cruzadas (cross-connects) de cabeamento de telecomunicações. Os termos da garantia para outras categorias de produtos de cabeamento (por exemplo, ferramentas, equipamentos de teste, dispositivos de proteção, etc.) podem variar.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRESENÇA EM EM TODO TODO O O MUNDO MUNDO PRESENÇA The Americas

Europe, Middle East, Africa

Asia Pacific

Siemon – USA 27 Siemon Company Drive Watertown, CT 06795-0400 USA Tel: (1) 866 474 1197 Customer Service Direct: Tel: (1) 866 548 5814 Fax: (1) 860 945 4225 info@siemon.com

Siemon – UK Lansbury Estate 102 Lower Guildford Road Knaphill, Woking Surrey, GU21 2EP, England Tel: (44) (0) 1483 480040 Fax: (44) (0) 1483 480043 info_uk@siemon.com

Siemon – Australia (Sydney) Unit 9/252 Allambie Road Allambie Heights NSW 2100 Sydney, Australia Tel: (61) 2 8977 7500 Fax: (61) 2 8977 7501 info_asiapacific@siemon.com

Siemon – Canada 90 Allstate Parkway, Ste. 102 Markham, Ontario L3R 6H3 Tel: (1) 905 940 9223 Fax: (1) 905 940 1075 info_canada@siemon.com

Siemon – France Paris Axe France ZAC Paris Rive Gauche 118-122 Avenue de France 75013 Paris, France Tel: (33) 1 46 46 11 85 Fax: (33) 1 46 46 10 00 info_france@siemon.com

Siemon – Australia (Brisbane) Level 1 360 St. Pauls Terrace Fortitude Valley QLD 4006 Brisbane, Australia Tel: (61) 07 3854 1200 Fax: (61) 07 3854 1077 info_asiapacific@siemon.com

Siemon – Germany Mainzer Landstrasse 16 60325 Frankfurt Germany Tel: (49) (0) 69 97168 184 Fax: (49) (0) 69 97168 304 info_deutsch@siemon.com

Siemon – Australia (Melbourne) Unit 6 109 Whitehorse Road Blackburn Vic 3130 Melbourne, Australia Tel: (61) 3 9894 4111 Fax: (61) 3 9894 3446 info_asiapacific@siemon.com

Siemon – Latin America 2121 Ponce de Leon Blvd. Suite 1130 Coral Gables, Florida Tel: (1) 305 446 9150 Fax: (1) 305 446 4586 info_latinamerica@siemon.com Siemon – Brasil Av. Dr. Chucri Zaidan, 920 - 9º Andar - Morumbi Edifício Market Place - Torre I 04583-904 São Paulo/SP, Brasil Tel: (55) 11 3048 4094 Fax: (55) 11 3048 4099 info_brasil@siemon.com

Siemon – Italy Via Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano Italy Tel: (39) 02 64 672 209 Fax: (39) 02 64 672 400 info_italia@siemon.com

Siemon – Andean Region Carrerra 71 #50-48 Normandia Bogota, Colombia Tel: (571) 295 4393 Fax: (571) 416 9305 info_andino@siemon.com

Siemon – China (Beijing) Suite 1108 SCITECH Tower 22 Jianguomenwai Avenue Beijing 100004, P.R. China Tel: (86) 10 6559 8860 Fax: (86) 10 6559 8867 info_china@siemon.com Siemon – China (Chengdu) Rm. 2412, 24/F MinXing FinancialTower No. 88 Tidu Avenue, Chengdu Sichuan 610016, P.R. China Tel: (86) 28 8676 6658 Fax: (86) 28 8676 6818 info_china@siemon.com

Siemon – Mexico Blvd. Manual Avila Camacho No. 36 Piso 10 Lomas de Chapultepec Mexico, D.F., 11000 Mexico Tel: (52) 55 91 71 16 24 Fax: (52) 55 52 84 22 23 info_mexico@siemon.com

Siemon – China (Guangzhou) Rm. 1104, Middle Tower, Time Square No. 28, Tianhebei Road Guangzhou, 510620, P.R. China Tel: (86) 20 3882 0055 Fax: (86) 20 3882 0575 info_china@siemon.com Siemon – China (Shanghai) Rm. 3407 - 3408, Hong Kong Square S. No. 283, Huai Hai Road Shanghai, 200021, P.R. China Tel: (86) 21 6390 6778 Fax: (86) 21 6384 0167 info_china@siemon.com

www.siemon.com

Siemon – Southeast Asia 46 East Coast Road #07-01/02 East Gate Singapore 428766 Tel: (65) 6345 9119 Fax: (65) 6345 1120 info_singapore@siemon.com

A SIEMON COMEMORA 100 ANOS DE INOVAÇÃO EM TECNOLOGIA

MINI-C03-PORT

M I N I - C A T Á L O G O

S O L U C I O N E S D E C O B R E Y F I B R A

VOL. 2-SPAN

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

100 AÑOS AÑOS DE DE INNOVACIÓN INNOVACIÓN EN EN TECNOLOGÍA TECNOLOGÍA 100 La Tecnología es el Núcleo de los Negocios Actuales La llegada del siglo 21 ha revelado una abrumadora dependencia de la información. Ya sea video streaming, transferencia de datos de alta velocidad, telefonía sobre Internet, o cualquier otra aplicación de ancho de banda elevado, una cosa es bien cierta: la información se ha convertido en el núcleo de nuestros negocios y de nuestras vidas. Conforme su demanda aumenta, la infraestructura en la cual fluye la información está obligada a maximizar sus capacidades. Las aplicaciones de un gran ancho de banda requieren una red construida para soportar sus rigurosas demandas; una red capaz no sólo de manejar tráfico sino de hacerlo en un ambiente de escalabilidad interminable. No importa de que negocio se trate, la infraestructura de tecnologías de la información se convertirá, si no es que ya lo es, en los cimientos de tu negocio.

El Legado de Siemon Fundada en 1903, The Siemon Company tiene cien años de experiencia en fabricar soluciones innovadoras que satisfacen las necesidades de los clientes. Al celebrar nuestro centenario en el 2003, nos mantenemos en el liderazgo en tecnología. Lo que comenzó hace muchos años atrás al incursionar en el entonces naciente campo del moldeado de plásticos, se ha convertido hoy en día en una potencia global en el campo de la infraestructura de cableado de redes. A lo largo de los años, Siemon ha llegado a ser un modelo del éxito del siglo 20; una real fuente de ideas, ideologías e innovaciones. La manufactura, ingeniería y calidad de Siemon se han pluripotenciado a plenitud. Gracias al enfoque en técnología e innovación ha dado como resultado muchas primicias en la industria: • Total conformidad con los sistemas Categoría 5e cuatro años antes de la ratificación de la norma • Primero en comercializar un sistema de cableado Categoría 6/Clase E • El primero en el mundo y todavía el único en poseer un sistema disponible Categoría 7/Clase F • Connectividad industrial aprobada en normas • Métodos patentados de terminación de fibra óptica ahorradores de tiempo

El Paso Escalable de la Tecnología Pero ahora, al entrar a nuestro segundo siglo de operación, las necesidades del mercado nunca habían sido tan diversas. Las aplicaciones emergentes de ancho de banda intensivo (por ejemplo, voz sobre IP, audio y video digital) y la convergencia de tales aplicaciones en un mismo backbone de red se ha vuelto una realidad. Un creciente número de empresas están buscando invertir en tecnologías de la información para maximizar sus beneficios. Ventas incrementadas, costos operativos reducidos, calidad mejorada de productos y una mayor satisfacción de nuestros clientes son los objetivos universales de los negocios, y los negocios actuales esperan que su sistema de tecnología de información les de todo eso y más. Ahora, más que nunca, la información juega un papel vital. La entrega de información exitosa en nuestras empresas, ya sea en una sola localidad o a través del globo, es una necesidad absoluta.

Especialistas en Cableado Con el Sistema de Cableado Siemon, Siemon puede proveer los productos y servicios que usted requiere para diseñar y construir una infraestructura de Tecnologías de Información que sea útil a sus necesidades estratégicas de negocio actuales y futuras. La herencia de Siemon proporciona los sistemas de cableado estructurado de la más alta calidad y el mejor desempeño disponibles en el mercado. Somos especialistas en lo que hacemos y lo hacemos mejor que nadie. Siemon ofrece la más completa línea de productos en la industria actualmente. Incluye: componentes de cableado categoría 6 verificados por laboratorios independientes lo que garantiza que un desempeño muy por encima de las normas ratificadas, sistemas de cableado categoría 5e de alto desempeño, soluciones avanzadas de fibra, todo ello en soporte de las aplicaciones actuales y futuras, combinados con la mejor garantía y servicios de soporte de la industria. Siemon es capaz de construir una solución para cada necesidad o aplicación que una empresa requiera.

Invierta en el Futuro...Ahora Las Tecnologías de la Información permean cada aspecto de su negocio. Si usted quiere protegerse para el mañana, un sistema de cableado estructurado sólido, construido para manejar aplicaciones futuras, es su mejor póliza de seguros. En Siemon, estamos listos para atender las necesidades de su infraestructura de Tecnologías de Información. Contamos con oficinas e instalaciones de distribución en cada mercado mayor en el mundo, Siemon posee una verdadera operación global que puede cumplir con nuestro compromiso de proveer la más alta calidad los mayores valores agregados en soluciones de cableado en el mercado actual.

GUÍA DE REFERENCIA Indicadores de Desempeño Cumple con las especificaciones ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 y B.2 para categoría 3 y con las especificaciones ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2da. Edición para clase C. Requisitos especificados hasta una frecuencia límite de 16 MHz. Cumple con las especificaciones ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 y B.2 para categoría 5e y con las especificaciones ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2da. Edición para clase D. Requisitos especificados hasta una frecuencia límite de 100 MHz. Esta clasificación incluye y excede las especificaciones de CATEGORÍA 3 y CATEGORÍA 5. Cumple con las especificaciones ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 para categoría 6 y con las especificaciones ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2da. Edición para clase E. Requisitos especificados hasta una frecuencia límite de 250 MHz. Esta clasificación incluye y excede las especificaciones de CATEGORÍA 5e. Cumple con las especificaciones ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 para categoría 6 y con las especificaciones ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2da. Edición para clase E. Requisitos especificados hasta una frecuencia límite de 300 MHz. Esta clasificación incluye y excede las especificaciones de CATEGORÍA 5e. Cumple con las especificaciones propuestas para categoría 7 y con las especificaciones ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2da. Edición para clase F. Requisitos especificados hasta una frecuencia límite de 600 MHz. Esta clasificación incluye y excede las especificaciones de CATEGORÍA 6. An electrical, mechanical or electro-mechanical product bearing the ETL Verified mark is proof that it was tested and complies with the minimum requirements of a prescribed industry standard.

Símbolos de Seguridad Símbolos de Seguridad Accesorio de Circuito de Comunicaciones listado según Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 1863 o Protectores Secundarios para Circuitos de Comunicaciones listados según Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL 497A, o conductos eléctricos de superficie y accesorios listados según UL 5A.

ÍNDICE

CABLEADO RESIDENCIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

PRODUCTOS INDUSTRIALES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

PRODUCTOS

ÁREA

FIBRA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

DE TRABAJO

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-29

PRODUCTOS BLINDADOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30-33

PARCHEO MODULAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34-37

BASTIDORES Y ACOMODADORES

CABLES . . . 38-39

CORDONES DE PARCHEO MODULAR, CLAVIJAS Y CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40-43

PRODUCTOS S210 Y S110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44-45

PRODUCTOS Y PROTECTORES S66 . . . . . . . . . . 46-47

Certificación por Underwriters Laboratories conforme a las Normas Estadounidenses y Normas Canadienses de Telecomunicaciones C22.2. Certificación por la Asociación Canadiense de Normas conforme a las Normas Canadienses de Telecomunicaciones C22.2.

HERRAMIENTAS Y MEDIDORES . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-49

Compatibilidad Electromagnética de acuerdo con el Artículo 10 de la Directriz 89/336/EEC del Consejo Europeo

Información de Pedidos Para los proyectos de gran porte, la manera más económica y ambientalmente conveniente de adquirir productos es la de comprarlos embalados a granel para todo el proyecto. Menos embalajes significan menos aperturas de paquetes y menos residuos para desechar, lo que ahorra tiempo y dinero. Los productos embalados a granel están identificados por el símbolo de embalaje a granel.

CABLES

COBRE Y

FIBRA . . . . . . . . . . . . 50-63

GARANTÍA SIEMON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Debido a que continuamente mejoramos nuestros productos, The Siemon Company se reserva el derecho de cambiar las especificaciones y disponibilidad sin previo aviso. Para otras opciones de productos, contacte con Servicio al Cliente.

ISO 9001 y 14001

CABLEADO RESIDENCIAL The Siemon Company se complace en ofrecer una línea completa de productos para cableado desarrollada específicamente para el mercado residencial. Elija entre la gran variedad de productos Siemon de alta calidad para Cableado Residencial que han sido diseñados para atender a los requisitos de voz, video, datos y audio de los dueños de casa más exigentes. Aquí se exhibe una pequeña muestra de esos productos. Por favor, si desea obtener una lista completa de nuestros productos para uso residencial, solicite nuestro Catálogo de Cableado Residencial.

HERRAMIENTAS, CAPACITACIÓN

MEDIDORES

La instalación correcta de un sistema de cableado doméstico es tan importante como la calidad de los productos seleccionados. Para asegurar la instalación correcta de sus sistemas de cableado, Siemon ofrece una línea completa de herramientas y medidores. Para el proyecto y la instalación de un sistema para su hogar, sin que importe si es grande o pequeño, recurra a uno de nuestros Instaladores Residenciales Certificados, altamente capacitados.

TOMA MULTIMEDIA Siemon tiene una amplia variedad de tomas para cobre, fibra, video y audio que ofrecen un excelente funcionamiento y calidad, así como una agradable apariencia estética que complementa todo tipo de decoración.

CABLES Y CORDONES DE PARCHEO

CABLEADO RESIDENCIAL

Los cables y cordones de parcheo de Siemon garantizan la integridad del sistema de extremo a extremo en los Sistemas de Cableado Residencial SM de Siemon. Para estar a la vanguardia en materia de calidad, desempeño y fiabilidad en su red doméstica, siempre especifique cables y cordones de parcheo Siemon.

CENTROS DE DISTRIBUCIÓN Los centros de distribución Command Center® (Centro de Mando) pueden configurarse para distribuir cualquier combinación de servicios multimedia por todo el hogar. Los Command Centers son ofrecidos en tres tamaños diferentes para acomodar instalaciones pequeñas, medias y grandes. Por medio de nuestra línea de paneles de voz, datos, video y audio, que encajan con total facilidad en los armarios Command Center, pueden configurarse una gran variedad de aplicaciones, fácilmente. 2

THE SIEMON COMPANY CATÁLOGO DE CABLEADO RESIDENCIAL Para obtener una lista completa de los productos Siemon para Cableado Doméstico, por favor contacte a su oficina local Siemon y solicite un ejemplar de nuestro Catálogo de Cableado Residencial. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS INDUSTRIALES

SOLUCIÓN INDUSTRIAL MAX® Los productos de conectividad tradicional brindan a los usuarios un servicio confiable duradero en un ambiente típico de oficinas. Sin embargo, al estar expuestos a condiciones extremas, tales como polvo, temperatura, humedad, interferencia electromagnética o vibración por periodos prolongados de tiempo, el desempeño y confiabilidad de dichos conectores se afecta gravemente. En ambientes severos, la conexión típica puede corroerse, desgastarse, atascarse con partículas, y eventualmente colapsarse. Ahora hay una nueva generación de conectores diseñados para soportar una conexión Ethernet incluso en el ambiente más severo: el conector Industrial MAX. Esta solución incluye cubiertas protectoras especiales, acoplamiento estilo bayoneta y materiales resistentes a químicos que resisten las condiciones más extremas.

LA HUMEDAD AFECTA A LAS SALIDAS TÍPICAS La humedad corroe los contactos en el interior de una salida típica. La exposición prolongada puede eventualmente destruir los contactos, dejando la salida inservible. Las cubiertas protectoras especiales de la salida Industrial MAX previene esta corrosión.

Disponible en las versiones UTP y ScTP LA VIBRACIÓN CAUSA MICROCORROSIÓN ALVEOLAR ('PICADO')

Modelo exclusivo de acoplamiento de bayoneta, patente en trámite, que proporciona un sello IP67 y protege contra polvo, humedad y vibración

SALIDA INDUSTRIAL MAX

¡Lanzamiento inminente! Categoría 6

Para obtener información, contacte con Servicio al Cliente

Visto al microscopio, después de estar expuesto a una vibración intensa, el contacto entre una clavija y una toma modular típica puede corroer las patillas de contacto, y ocasionar problemas intermitentes de transmisión.

Construido con materiales más resistentes a productos químicos y a temperaturas de operación mayores.

LOS CONECTORES INDUSTRIAL MAX SOPORTAN LAS CONDICIONES DE LOS AMBIENTES SEVEROS Los especialmente diseñados conectores Industrial MAX soportan condiciones ambientales de humedad, polvo, vibración y temperaturas extremas.

PLUG INDUSTRIAL MAX

La salida Industrial MAX incluye un módulo MAX categoría 5e protegido por una cubierta. Esta cubierta protectora está hecha de un plástico grado industrial durable, resistente a químicos y posee un diseño de acoplamiento estilo bayoneta. Posee un desempeño garantizado categoría 5e aun en las condiciones más severas.

El plug Industrial MAX incluye un plug modular categoría 5e contenido en una cubierta protectora grado industrial y posee un diseño de acoplamiento estilo bayoneta de patente pendiente Siemon. El plug Industrial puede ser terminado en campo, permitiendo rápidos ensamblajes a la medida realizados en sitio en caso de cables cortados o dañados.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN X5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e, Toma Industrial UTP X5S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e, ScTP Toma Industrial X-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapa Antipolvo Toma Industrial

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN XP85 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e, UTP Clavija Industrial Terminado en Campo XP85S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e, ScTP Clavija Industrial Terminado en Campo XP-CAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapa Antipolvo Clavija Industrial

FACEPLATE INDUSTRIAL MAX El faceplate de acero inoxidable Industrial MAX proporciona un sellado protector contra humedad y partículas. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN XFP-S-01-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple, 1 puerto, Acero inoxidable XFP-S-02-SS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple, 2 puertos, Acero inoxidable

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PATCH CORDS MODULARES INDUSTRIAL MAX Construidos en fábrica y 100% probados. Seleccione Clavija Industrial a Clavija Industrial, o Clavija Industrial a Clavija Modular; versiones UTP y ScTP. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN XC5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e, UTP Clavija Modular Industrial a Clavija Modular Industrial XC5-(XX)-B05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e, UTP Clavija Modular Industrial a Clavija Modular, refuerzo amarillo XC5S-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e, ScTP, Clavija Modular Industrial a Clavija Modular Industrial XC5S-(XX)-B05. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e, ScTP, Clavija Modular Industrial a Clavija Modular, refuerzo amarillo Use (XX) para especificar la longitud: 03= 1m (3 ft); 05= 1.6 m (5 ft); 07= 2.3 m (7 ft); 10= 3.3 m (10 ft); 15= 4.9 m (15 ft); 25= 8.2 m (25 ft).

CENTRO DE INTERCONEXIÓN DE MONTAJE EN BASTIDOR (RIC3) Los accesos superiores e inferiores localizados en la parte posterior de la caja permiten enrutar la fibra entre cajas apiladas sin tener que sacar la fibra de las mismas

¡Nuevo y mejorado!

¡Rotulado mejorado! Rotule virtualmente cualquier configuración de puertos con nuestras etiquetas mejoradas. Las nuevas etiquetas cuelgan en la puerta frontal para mejor visibilidad. Cuando la puerta se abre, las etiquetas se abren permitiendo al técnico mirar las etiquetas y su correspondientes puertos en conjunto

El RIC3 permite conectar o empalmar y conectar una máxima cantidad de fibras en 2, 3 y 4 RMS sin comprometer la accesibilidad de fibras, conectores o empalmes lo que da como resultado una utilización de espacio de rack más eficiente

Los pasacables giratorios facilitan la instalación y sujeción de los puentes al mismo tiempo que reducen la tensión producida por radios de curvatura inferiores al mínimo al utilizar la bandeja deslizable

BANDEJA REMOVIBLE La nueva bandeja organizadora de cable del RIC3 es ahora completamente removible tanto del frente como de la parte posterior de la caja, permitiendo colocar la bandeja sobre una mesa de trabajo para una mejor instalación de adaptadores y pigtails. La bandeja se traba en la posición central para prevenir su movimiento durante el acoplamiento o desacoplamiento de conectores.

SEGURO DE PUERTAS La nueva RIC3 incluye seguros de lengueta en las puertas frontal y posterior para prevenir accesos no autorizados

Bisagras con resortes de liberación rápida que permiten la fácil retirada de las puertas frontal y trasera para una completa accesibilidad de las conexiones de fibra

CENTRO DE INTERCONEXIÓN DE MONTAJE EN BASTIDOR (RIC)

PLACAS ADAPTADORAS QUICK-PACK™ ¡Nunca más se complicará con el manejo de fibras en situaciones de alta densidad! Las placas adaptadoras Quick-Pack de Siemon pueden insertarse o removerse con un simple dedo para una más rápida y eficaz accesibilidad.

PATENTE MEJORADA

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

Las cajas RIC3 de 24, 36 y 48 puertos han sido rediseñadas para una mejor organización de fibras y facilidad de uso. Son compatibles con toda la gama de placas adaptadoras Quick-Pack. Debido a su mejor organización de cable, identificación de puertos, accesibilidad de fibra y seguridad, la caja RIC3 es el mejor medio para proteger las valiosas conexiones de fibra. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RIC3-24-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centro de Interconexión de Montaje en Rack de 24 a 96 puertos. 2 RMS

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RIC3-36-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centro de Interconexión de Montaje en Rack de 36 a 144 puertos. 3 RMS

altura: 86.6 mm (3.41 in); ancho: 432 mm (17.00 in); profundidad: 380 mm (14.95 in)

RIC3-48-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centro de Interconexión de Montaje en Rack de 48 a 192 puertos. 3 RMS

RIC3-72-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centro de Interconexión de Montaje en Rack de 72 a 288 puertos. 4 RMS

altura: 133 mm (5.25 in); ancho: 432 mm (17.00 in); profundidad: 380 mm (14.95 in)

altura: 178 mm (7.00 in); ancho: 432 mm (17.00 in); profundidad: 380 mm (14.95 in)

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco Notas: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in); Todos los productos RIC incluyen etiquetas para impresión láser*, abrazaderas para cables, accesorios para montaje en bastidor, y presillas preinstaladas para acomodo de las fibras; *Visite nuestro sitio en web o contacte a nuestro Departamento de Apoyo Técnico acerca del software de etiquetado.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

CENTRO DE INTERCONEXIÓN DE MONTAJE EN PARED (SWIC3) Las puertas del gabinete y del protector de puentes pueden solicitarse con opciones independientes de cerradura a llave o picaporte manual

Soporte opcional para montaje de varias bandejas de empalmes

Protector articulado para fibras que protege y acomoda a los puentes ACCESO FÁCIL Las puertas de los gabinetes y del protector de puentes se abren 180˚ para dar acceso pleno frontal y lateral.

ACOMODADORES DE DOS NIVELES PARA FIBRAS Incorporan dos niveles de almacenaje independientes para permitir el enrutamiento de las fibras a los niveles de los adaptadores que les correspondan.

Conveniente sistema de etiquetado que incluye portaetiquetas removibles transparentes para guardar y proteger la documentación relativa a la fibra

Las placas adaptadoras Quick-Pack™ están disponibles con adaptadores SC, ST, FC, MT-RJ, o LC

Pasacables herméticos al polvo incorporados

PLACAS ADAPTADORAS DE ENCAJE RÁPIDO Utiliza las mismas placas adaptadoras Quick-Pack que los gabinetes RIC, con lengüetas integradas para instalación por encaje rápido y retiro con un solo dedo.

CENTRO DE INTERCONEXIÓN DE MONTAJE EN PARED (SWIC3)

PATENTE

El Centro de Interconexión de Montaje en Pared en una caja de fibra costo-eficiente diseñada para organizar y conectar hasta 96 fibras. Su diseño compacto de bajo perfil lo hacen ideal para cuartos de telecomunicaciones o áreas de instalación donde el espacio es limitado. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN SWIC3G-(X)(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centro de Interconexión de Montaje en Pared de 24 a 96 puertos con protección de jumpers integrada. Incluye acomodadores de dos niveles para fibras, etiquetas de designación de puertos y bolsa removible, pasacables herméticos al polvo, liberadores de tensión, abrazaderas para cables y accesorios de montaje altura: 311 mm (12.25 in); ancho: 406 mm (16 in); profundidad: 82.6 mm (3.25 in) Use la 1a (X) para especificar el tipo de cierre de la puerta del gabinete (izquierda): A = cerradura con llave A, C = picaporte manual Use la 2a (X) para especificar el tipo de cierre de la puerta del protector (derecha): A = cerradura con llave A, B = cerradura con llave B, C = picaporte manual Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco SWIC3-(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Centro de Interconexión de Montaje en Pared de 24 a 96 puertos. Incluye acomodadores de dos niveles para fibras, etiquetas de designación de puertos y bolsa removible, pasacables herméticos al polvo, liberadores de tensión, abrazaderas para cables y accesorios de montaje altura: 311 mm (12.25 in); ancho: 311 mm (12.25 in); profundidad: 82.6 mm (3.25 in) Use (X) para especificar el tipo de cierre del gabinete: A = cerradura con llave A, C = picaporte manual Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco

MINICENTRO DE INTERCONEXIÓN DE MONTAJE EN PARED (MINI-SWIC3)

PATENTE

El Mini-SWIC3 permite la interconexión económica de fibras en locales donde el espacio de pared es limitado y, al mismo tiempo, ofrecen muchas de las características de simplicidad ya populares del SWIC3. Como acepta dos placas adaptadoras planas Quick-Pack, el MINI-SWIC3 puede acomodar entre 12-48 fibras. También cuenta con pasacables herméticos al polvo para dar protección contra contaminantes y guías de radio de curvatura para asegurar una óptima distribución del seno de las fibras. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN SWIC3-M-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minicentro de Interconexión de Montaje en Pared de 12 a 48 puertos altura: 218.4 mm (8.6 in); ancho: 185.4 mm (7.3 in); profundidad: 82.6 mm (3.25 in) Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco Nota: El MINI-SWIC3 sólo es compatible con placas adaptadoras planas Quick-Pack (consulte la página 7) W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PANEL PARA CONEXIÓN DE FIBRAS (FCP3) Lengüetas perforadas que proveen puntos de anclaje convenientes para cables enchaquetados entrantes

Bandejas de empalmes opcionales pueden montarse para acomodar y proteger empalmes mecánicos o por fusión

PATENTE Presillas para fibra trasera sostienen la holgura del cable y mantienen los radios de curvatura mínimos exigidos ALTA DENSIDAD Cuando se usan con Quick-Packs™ MT-RJ Siemon de 24 puertos, los paneles FCP3 pueden acomodar hasta 72 fibras en sólo 1 RMS en un bastidor de 19 pulgadas.

BANDEJA DESLIZABLE El panel FCP3-DWR (versión cajón) cuenta con una bandeja que desliza hacia fuera del frente o de atrás, facilitando el acceso a las conexiones de fibras aun en los bastidores totalmente cargados. Presillas para fibra frontal sostienen hasta 36 puentes de fibra dúplex (72 fibras en total)

Portaetiquetas que protege los puentes de fibra, de fácil extracción soltando las lengüetas de encaje instaladas en fábrica

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FCP3-DWR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel para Conexión de Fibra 6- a 72-puertos con bandeja deslizable. Incluye soportes de montaje, alojador/bandeja, acomodadores para fibra, pasacables, portaetiquetas y etiquetas altura: 43.2 mm (1.7 in); ancho: 482.6 mm (19.0 in); profundidad: 355.6 mm (14.0 in) FCP3-RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel para Conexión de Fibra 6- a 72-puertos con bandeja fija. Incluye soportes de montaje, alojador/tapa, acomodadores para fibra y pasacables altura: 43.2 mm (1.7 in); ancho: 482.6 mm (19.0 in); profundidad: 241.3 mm (9.5 in)

BANDEJA PARA ACOMODO DE FIBRAS (FMT) Tapa trasera sostenida por medio de imanes fuertes para permitir la apertura sin llave

PATENTE

Nuestras presillas para acomodo de fibra doble, patente en trámite, se utilizan para almacenar holguras de fibras al mismo tiempo que mantienen los radios mínimos de curvatura exigidos

ALTA DENSIDAD La Bandeja de Acomodo de Fibras puede utilizarse con los Paneles de Interconexión Siemon MAX para lograr mayor densidad de fibras y aplicaciones multimedia.

La fibra puede enrutarse desde los lados o desde atrás de la bandeja

Acopladores adaptadores disponibles en ST, SC, MT-RJ, LC y FC

Paneles opcionales CT® o MAX® disponibles en 1, 2, y 3 RMS, y acomodan hasta 96 puertos

Bandeja de chapa de acero calibre 18 con acabado negro que combina con los paneles de empalmes CT y MAX

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS CT-FMT-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja para fibras para Panel CT o Panel MAX 16 puertos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 altura: 43.2 mm (1.7 in); ancho: 432 mm (17 in); profundidad: 254 mm (10 in) CT-FMT-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja para fibras para Panel CT o Panel MAX 24 puertos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 altura: 86.4 mm (3.4 in); ancho: 432 mm (17 in); profundidad: 254 mm (10 in) CT-FMT-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja para fibras para Panel CT 48 puertos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 altura: 129.5 mm (5.1 in); ancho: 432 mm (17 in); profundidad: 254 mm (10 in)

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

BANDEJA FIJA La tapa de la bandeja de la versión fija puede retirarse por completo para facilitar el acceso durante el acomodo del cable.

ACCESO A LAS FIBRAS Las bandejas RMS 2 y 3 incluyen una puerta trasera articulada para ofrecer un cómodo acceso a la fibra.

Para bandejas opcionales de empalme, consulte la página 8.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

PATENTE EN TRÁMITE

PLACAS ADAPTADORAS QUICK-PACK™ PLANAS

Las placas adaptadoras Quick-Pack de Siemon incluyen una lengueta integrada de patente pendiente que proporciona accesibilidad a la fibra con un solo dedo incluso en cajas muy congestionadas. Se dispone de una gran variedad de opciones de placas en monomodo y multimodo.

RIC-F-SA6-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 adaptadores dúplex ST (6 fibras) y cavidades para íconos

RIC-F-SA8-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 adaptadores dúplex ST (8 fibras) y cavidades para íconos RIC-F-SA12-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 adaptadores dúplex ST (12 fibras, no exhibidas)

RIC-F-SC6-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 adaptadores dúplex SC (6 fibras) y cavidades para íconos

RIC-F-SC8-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 adaptadores dúplex SC (8 fibras) y cavidades para íconos

RIC-F-SC12-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 adaptadores dúplex SC (12 fibras)

RIC-F-MT12-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 adaptadores dúplex MT-RJ (12 fibras) y cavidades para íconos

RIC-F-MT16-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 adaptadores dúplex MT-RJ (16 fibras) y cavidades para íconos

RIC-F-MT24-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 adaptadores dúplex MT-RJ (24 fibras)

RIC-F-LC(X)12-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 6 adaptadores dúplex LC (12 fibras) y cavidades para íconos Use (X) para especificar el color del adaptador LC: en blanco = beige, U = azul

RIC-F-LC(X)16-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 8 adaptadores LC dúplex (16 fibras) y portaiconos

RIC-F-BLNK-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa adaptadora ciega

RIC-F-LC(X)24-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . 12 adaptadores LC dúplex (24 fibras) y portaiconos Use (X) para especificar el color del adaptador LC: en blanco = beige, U = azul

Use (XX) para especificar el color de la Placa Adaptadora: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco Cada placa adaptadora con cavidades para íconos incluye íconos rojos, azules, color similar y transparentes con etiquetas de papel. Todos los adaptadores son "universales" para trabajar en aplicaciones de fibras multimodo y monomodo.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

MEJORADAS

BANDEJAS DE EMPALMES Estas bandejas de aluminio pueden solicitarse con soportes de empalmes por fusión, mecánicos o por fusión con manga, y vienen con una tapa encajable de policarbonato, transparente. La bandeja estándar sostiene hasta 24 empalmes. Para áreas reducidas, se encuentran disponibles minibandejas que acomodan hasta 12 empalmes. Las bandejas pueden apilarse para aplicaciones de alta densidad. DIMENSIONES BANDEJA ESTÁNDAR altura: 103 mm (4.07 in); ancho: 298 mm (11.75 in); profundidad: 8.13 mm (0.32 in)

DIMENSIONES MINIBANDEJA altura: 103 mm (4.07 in); ancho: 179 mm (7.06 in); profundidad: 8.13 mm (0.32 in)

DIMENSIONES BANDEJA PARA FIBRA EN CINTA altura: 103 mm (4.07 in); ancho: 179 mm (7.06 in).; profundidad: 8.13 mm (0.32 in)

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN TRAY-1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de empalmes estándar hasta 24 empalmes por fusión desnudas TRAY-2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja estándar para hasta 12 empalmes mecánicos ULTRAsplice® TRAY-3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de empalmes estándar hasta 24 empalmes por fusión con protección de manga. TRAY-M-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minibandeja de empalmes hasta 12 empalmes por fusión desnudas TRAY-M-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minibandeja de empalmes hasta 6 empalmes mecánicos ULTRAsplice TRAY-M-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minibandeja de empalmes hasta 12 empalmes por fusión con protección de manga TRAY-R-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja para hasta 144 empalmes masivos o en listón. Compatible con los protectores de empalme MASSsleeve TRAY-R-4A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de empalmes para cintas de hasta 144 fibras. Compatible con mangas termocontráctiles

TRAY-3

TRAY-M-2

TRAY-R-4

Los sostenes de empalmes por fusión con manga pueden acomodar diámetros de mangas de 1.5 mm (0.059 in) a 2 mm (0.079 in). Los sostenes de fusión estándar están proyectados para fibras recubiertas de 900 micrones o fibras revestidas de 250 micrones.

MANGAS TERMOCONTRÁCTILES Las mangas temocontráctiles proveen un método seguro y eficaz para proteger los empalmes de fusión de fibras con recubrimiento ya sea de 250 o 900 micras. Las mangas termocontráctiles se colocan a la fibra antes del fusionado y luego se posiciona directamente sobre el empalme y se calienta con un horno o con un soplete*.

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN HT-40. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manga termocontráctil de 40 mm (1.57 in) HT-60. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manga termocontráctil de 60 mm (2.36 in)

*El tiempo de calentado varía dependiendo de la fuente de calor

¡CONSEJO TÉCNICO! Para cortes mayores a 12 mm (0.47 in) se recomienda la manga HT-60

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

PATENTE

ULTRASPLICE® El ULTRAsplice es un empalme mecánico patentado, de alto desempeño, costo-efectivo, reusable y de fácil terminación para instalaciones permanentes o provisionales. El empalme posee un tubo de alineación capilar patentado, precargado con un gel de acoplamiento de índice, que permite la inspección del posicionamiento de la fibra durante su instalación. Adicionalmente, las tuercas de ajuste permite a los usuarios calibrar y asegurar la fibra para una óptima alineación y retención.

PARTE #

DESCRIPCIÓN

US-126 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monomodo, amarillo US-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimodo, 125 micras, anaranjado

Al utilizar un VFL durante la instalación, puede detectarse y corregirse fácilmente cualquier desalineamiento. Los conectores ULTRAsplice se adaptan a recubrimientos de fibra de 250 a 900 micras

PATENTE

ULTRASLEEVE® Reduzca dramáticamente el tiempo y costo de instalación con las mangas de empalmes ULTRAsleeve. Simplemente introduzca la fibra y cierre el empalme - no requiere calentado, curado, crimpeado o engomado. El protector de empalmes de fusión ULTRAsleeve posee una cinta de espuma acrílica que sella el empalme y protege contra daños. El protector de empalmes de fusión ULTRAsleeve acepta un rango de recubrimientos de fibra desde 250 hasta 900 micras para cada fibra o hasta 4 grupos de fibras en masa o listón (monomodo o multimodo).

PARTE #

DESCRIPCIÓN

FS-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manga protectora de empalmes de fusión de 40 mm (1.57 in) FS-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Manga protectora de empalmes de fusión de 60 mm (2.36 in) FSCT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Herramienta cerradora ULTRAsleeve largo: 90 mm (3.5 in); ancho: 55 mm (2.3 in); alto: 35 mm (1.4 in)

Aunque el protector de empalme ULTRAsleeve puede ser cerrado a mano, la herramienta de cerrado ULTRAsleeve se recomienda para una operación adecuada

PATENTE

MASSSLEEVE® El MASSsleeve proporciona las mismas ventajas en economía de tiempo que el ULTRAsleeve para empalmes en masa o listón. Esta manga protectora de empalmes de fusión acepta grupos de 2 hasta 12 fibras en masa o listón (monomodo o multimodo).

PARTE #

DESCRIPCIÓN

MFS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubierta protectora para empalmes de fusión en listón de 40 mm (1.47 in) MFSCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Herramienta de cerrado MASSsleeve

largo: 115 mm (4.5 in); ancho: 51 mm (2.0 in); alto: 25 mm (1.0 in)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Se requiere la herramienta de cerrado MASSsleeve para asegurar una apropiada instalación. El soporte de forma suave y las puntas de alineación aseguran una mejor aplicación

JUMPERS Y PIGTAILS XGLO™ Elija los ensamblajes de cable de fibra óptica XGLO para aplicaciones de backbone y fibra al escritorio de próxima generación. Los ensamblajes XGLO están hechos de cable premium que cumple con los requisitos para 10 Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3 así como con las especificaciones IEC-60793-2-10 y TIA492AAAC para DMD (Differential Mode Delay) de ancho de banda para láser.

10 Gigabit Ethernet

El cable con ancho de banda optimado para láser reduce las impurezas en el núcleo de la fibra, asegurando una transmisión 10 gigabit Ethernet robusta

Jumpers disponibles en 1, 2, 3 y 5 metros de longitud

Colores de conectores codificados conforme a ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3

Tapones incluidos para proteger el pulido de daños y suciedad Clip dúplex SC para permitir la corrección de polaridad

Excede los requisitos de ANSI/TIA/EIA e ISO/IEC para durabilidad, exposición a la humedad, temperatiras extremas, vibración, fuerza de acoplamiento y resistencia del cable a la tensión

Pigtails disponibles en 1 metro de longitud

Ensamblajes disponibles en monomodo y multimodo 50/125 micras

DESEMPEÑO SUPERIOR Los ensamblajes de cable de fibra óptica XGLO cumplen con todas las especificaciones Telcordia e ISO/IEC para geometría de cara de férula incluyendo radio de curvatura, apex offset y corte esférico. Su conformidad asegura pérdida de retorno mínima, reduciendo con ello los reflejos de energía láser que pueden degradar el desempeño de transmisión o daños en los transceivers

JUMPERS Y PIGTAILS XGLO JUMPERS DÚPLEX MULTIMODO 50/125 MICRAS XGLO

JUMPER DÚPLEX MONOMODO XGLO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FJ2-SCSC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex SC-SC FJ2-LCLC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . . ..Jumper dúplex LC-LC FJ2-LCSC5L-(XX).Jumper dúplex LC-SC Use (XX) para especificar longitud: 01 = 1 m (3.3 ft), 02 = 2 m (6.6 ft), 03 = 3 m (9.8 ft), 05 = 5 m (16.4 ft)

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FJ2-SCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex SC-SC FJ2-LCULCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex LC-LC FJ2-LCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex LC-SC Use (XX) para especificar longitud: 01 = 1 m (3.3 ft), 02 = 2 m (6.6 ft), 03 = 3 m (9.8 ft), 05 = 5 m (16.4 ft)

PIGTAILS SÍMPLEX MULTIMODO 50/125 MICRAS XGLO

PIGTAILS SÍMPLEX MONOMODO XGLO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FP1B-SC5L-01 . . . . . . . . . . . .Pigtail símplex SC, recubrimiento de 900 micras, 1 m (3.3 ft)

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FP1B-SCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . . . .Pigtail símplex SC, recubrimiento 900 micras, 1 m (3.3 ft) FP1B-LCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . . . .Pigtail símplex LC, recubrimiento 900 micras, 1 m (3.3 ft)

FP1B-LC5L-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pigtail símplex LC, recubrimiento de 900 micras, 1 m (3.3 ft)

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

ESPECIFICACIONES DE DESEMPEÑO Multimodo 50/125 µm Min. Ancho de Banda del Cable (MHz km) Max. Pérdida de Inserción (dB) Min. Pérdida de Retorno (dB)

Monomodo

850nm

1300nm

850nm*

n/a

1500

500

2000

n/a

0.50 (0.10 Típico)

0.40 (0.10 Típico)

30 (35 Típico)

55 (60 Típico)

* Ancho de banda para láser

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

JUMPERS Y PIGTAILS LIGHTSYSTEM® Siemon ofrece una línea completa de jumpers para conectar enlaces de fibra. Elija cordones símplex o dúplex, multimodo (62.4/125 o 50/125) o monomodo, SC o ST, jumpers o pigtails. Los ensamblajes están disponibles en longitudes estándar de 1, 2, 3 y 5 metros. ongitudes a medida también están disponibles. Cada uno de los conectores terminados es verificado para asegurar que el 100% de los ensamblajes fabricados por Siemon cumplen con las más exigentes especificaciones de desempeño (mostradas en la parte inferior). Todos los jumpers se fabrican usando la más fina calidad en conectores y cable grado riser OFNR.

Gigabit Ethernet

JUMPERS DÚPLEX MULTIMODO

JUMPERS DÚPLEX MONOMODO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FJ2-SCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . .Jumper dúplex SC-SC FJ2-SASA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . .Jumper dúplex ST-ST FJ2-SASC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . .Jumper dúplex ST-SC FJ2-LCLC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex LC-LC FJ2-LCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex LC-SC FJ2-LCSA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . .Jumper dúplex LC-ST FJ2R-MTMT(X)MM-(XX) . . . .Jumper dúplex MT-RJ-MT-RJ FJ2R-MTSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . .Jumper dúplex MT-RJ-SC FJ2R-MTSA(X)MM-(XX). . . . .Jumper dúplex MT-RJ-ST

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FJ2-SCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex SC-SC FJ2-SCASCA-(XX) . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex SC-SC, APC* FJ2-SAUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex ST-ST FJ2-SAUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex ST-SC FJ2-LCULCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex LC-LC FJ2-LCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex LC-SC FJ2-LCUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . .Jumper dúplex LC-ST

SINGLEMODE SÍMPLEX JUMPERS PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FJ1-SCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper símplex SC-SC FJ1-SCASCA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper símplex SC-SC, APC* FJ1-SAUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper símplex ST-ST FJ1-SAUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper símplex ST-SC FJ1-LCULCU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Jumper símplex LC-LC FJ1-LCUSCU-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Jumper símplex LC-SC FJ1-LCUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper símplex LC-ST

JUMPERS SÍMPLEX MULTIMODO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FJ1-SCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . .Jumper símplex SC-SC FJ1-SASA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . .Jumper símplex ST-ST FJ1-SASC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . .Jumper símplex ST-SC FJ1-LCLC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . .Jumper símplex LC-LC FJ1-LCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . .Jumper símplex LC-SC FJ1-LCSA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . .Jumper símplex LC-ST

PIGTAILS SÍMPLEX MONOMODO PIGTAILS SÍMPLEX MULTIMODO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FP1B-SCU-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail SC símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft) FP1B-SCA-0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail SC símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft), APC* FP1B-SAU-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail ST símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft) FP1B-LCU-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail LC símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft)

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FP1B-SC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . .Pigtail SC símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft) FP1B-SA(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . .Pigtail ST símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft) FP1B-LC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . . .Pigtail LC símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft)

Use (X) para especificar el tipo de fibra multimodo/color del forro: - = 62.5/125 µm, forro anaranjado; 6 = fibra 62.5/125 µm, forro gris; 5 = fibra 50/125 µm, forro anaranjado Use (XX) para especificar la longitud del cable: 01 = 1 m (3.3 ft), 02 = 2 m (6.6 ft), 03 = 3 m (9.8 ft), 05 = 5 m (16.4 ft) Otras longitudes y colores de forro están disponibles sobre pedido. Contacte nuestro Departamento de Servicio a Clientes para mayor información. * Los Jumpers y Pigtails APC tienen una pérdida de retorno mínima de 65 dB

ESPECIFICACIONES DE DESEMPEÑO Multimodo 50/125 µm Min. Ancho de Banda del Cable (MHz km) Max. Pérdida de Inserción (dB) Min. Pérdida de Retorno (dB)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Multimodo 62.5/125 µm

850nm

1300nm

850nm

1300nm

500

200

500

Monomodo n/a n/a

0.65 (0.40 Típico)

0.40 (0.25 Típico)

20 (25 Típico)

50* (53 Típico)

JUMPERS Y PIGTAILS VALULIGHT™ Siemon se complace en anunciar su nueva línea de ensamblajes de fibra ValuLight. Estos jumpers y pigtails proveen un valor excepcional a un costo muy competitivo. Los ensamblajes de fibra ValuLight cumplen con las especificaciones de TIA/EIA568-B.3 e ISO/IEC 11801 para pérdida de inserción y pérdida de retorno. Estos ensamblajes son ideales para aplicaciones de datos para cableados comerciales incluyendo gigabit. Los jumpers están disponibles en conectores tipo ST y SC tanto en multimodo como en monomodo.

JUMPERS DÚPLEX MULTIMODO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN J2-SCSC(X)-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . Jumper dúplex SC-SC J2-SASA(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Jumper dúplex ST-ST J2-SASC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Jumper dúplex ST-SC Use (X) para especificar el tipo de fibra multimodo: 6 = 62.5/125 µm, 5 = 50/125 µm Use (XX) para especificar la longitud del cable: 01 = 1 m (3.3 ft), 02 = 2 m (6.6 ft), 03 = 3 m (9.8 ft), 05 = 5 m (16.4 ft)

PIGTAILS SÍMPLEX MULTIMODO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN P1B-SC(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail SC símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft) P1B-SA(X)-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail ST símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft) Use (X) para especificar el tipo de fibra multimodo: 6 = 62.5/125 µm, 5 = 50/125 µm

JUMPERS DÚPLEX MONOMODO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN J2-SCSCP(X)-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Jumper dúplex SC-SC J2-SASAP(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Jumper dúplex ST-ST J2-SASCP(X)-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Jumper dúplex ST-SC Use (XX) para especificar la longitud del cable: 01 = 1 m (3.3 ft), 02 = 2 m (6.6 ft), 03 = 3 m (9.8 ft), 05 = 5 m (16.4 ft)

PIGTAILS SÍMPLEX MONOMODO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN P1B-SCP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail SC símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft) P1B-SAP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pigtail ST símplex, 900 micras, tubo apretado, 1 m (3.3 ft)

ESPECIFICACIONES DE DESEMPEÑO PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

Multimodo 50/125 µm Min. Ancho de Banda del Cable (MHz km) Max. Pérdida de Inserción (dB) Min. Pérdida de Retorno (dB)

Multimodo 62.5/125 µm

Monomodo

850nm

1300nm

850nm

1300nm

n/a

500

200

500

n/a

0.75

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

KIT DE TERMINACIÓN DE FIBRA LIGHTSPEED® PARA CONECTORES ST Y SC Logre terminaciones más rápidas de fibra y mejor desempeño con el Kit de Terminación LightSpeed de Siemon. El kit de terminación de fibra de Siemon contiene todas las herramientas necesarias para la terminación de hasta 200 conectores ST o SC, multimodo o monomodo — contenidas en un estuche portátil de lona resistente. Use el kit opcional de ampliación LC (mostrado en la parte inferior) para la terminación de conectores LC. Todos los consumibles, herramientas y otros productos de terminación pueden ser ordenados por separado. El kit de terminación incluye el sistema adhesivo LightSpeed el cual tiene un tiempo de curado de 30 segundos. El adhesivo viene en color verde para proveed una indicación visual sencilla durante el proceso de terminación y tiene un periodo de vida extendido de un año.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FTERM-L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de Terminación de Fibra LightSpeed para conectores ST y SC* FT-CKIT-L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de consumibles para FTERM-L2** *El kit de consumibles incluye primer, adhesivo y lijas y debe ser ordenado por separado. Los contenidos del Kit de terminaci'on FTERM pueden ser ordenados por separado. **Este producto contiene material con un periodo de vida sensible al tiempo y temperatura. Almacene entre 4.4 y 38.5 grados centígados y verifique la fecha de expiración marcada en el producto antes de usarse.

KIT DE AMPLIACIÓN PARA TERMINACIÓN DE FIBRA LC El kit de ampliación Siemon LC se utiliza en conjunto con el Kit de Terminación LightSpeed (FTERM-L) y contiene todos los accesorios necesarios para la terminación de conectores LC utilizando el adhesivo LightSpeed, exclusivo de Siemon. El kit incluye un cabezal LC para microscopio (que se adapta al microscopio incluido en el FTERM-L), una matriz para engarzar LC (que se utiliza con la herramienta de engarzar incluida en el FTERM-L), un disco de caucho para pulir LC y un microsoplete* (para encoger las mangas codificadas a color de los engarces LC).

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FTERM-LC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de Ampliación para Terminación de Fibra LC (usado en conjunto con FTERM-L2)

Notas: El contenido del FTERM-LC también está disponible individualmente. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente para obtener más informaciones. *No incluye el combustible Butano

KIT DE TERMINACIÓN DE FIBRA MT-RJ

MEJORADO

El kit para terminación MT-RJ de Siemon proporciona una terminación en campo, rápida y fácil, de conectores MT-RJ. Un conector dúplex MT-RJ puede ser terminado en menos de dos minutos, ¡lo cual equivale a menos de un minuto por fibra! El kit emplea su comprobada tecnología de terminación sin epoxy y sin pulido. Todas las herramientas necesarias para terminar conectores MT-RJ están alojadas en un robusto maletín de lona.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FTERM-MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit para Terminación de Fibra MT-RJ

Nota: los contenidos del FTERM-MT pueden ser ordenados por separado Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente para obtener más informaciones.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CONECTORES ST Y SC CONECTORES SC DÚPLEX Los conectores SC dúplex tienen una presilla doble que permite la retirada de cada conector individualmente. En el caso de una eventual inversión de polaridad de la fibra durante la terminación, no es necesario descartar el conector. Simplemente retire los conectores de la presilla e invierta las posiciones para corregir el error, con lo cual se ahorra un valioso tiempo de instalación y dinero. La presilla doble también acorta el tiempo de búsqueda y resolución de fallos. En caso de haber una falla en una conexión simple, puede retirarse de la presilla el conector individual y realizarse una nueva terminación sin afectar al conector adyacente.

Multimodo PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FC2-SC-MM-J . . . . . . . . . . . .Fibra enchaquetada, una funda negra y una funda beige FC2-SC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . .Fibra recubierta, dos fundas beige FC2-SC-MM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Fibra enchaquetada/recubierta, Una funda enchaquetada negra y una beige; dos fundas recubiertas beige

Monomodo PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FC2-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . Fibra enchaquetada dúplex FC2-SC-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . Fibra recubierta dúplex Use (XX) para especificar el color de la bota: 02 = blanco, 06 = azul

Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para embalaje a granel (50/caja).

CONECTORES SC SÍMPLEX Los conectores SC símplex poseen una cubierta externa con el código de color de acuerdo con los requisitos de TIA/EIA-568-B.3 e ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ndEdición (beige para multimodo y azul para monomodo).

Multimodo

Monomodo

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FC1-SC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada, funda beige FC1-SC-MM-J01 . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada, funda negra FC1-SC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex recubierta, funda beige FC1-SC-MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada/recubierta, una funda negra (enchaquetada) y una funda beige (recubierta) FC1-SC-MM-80 . . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada/recubierta, una funda beige (enchaquetada) y una funda beige (recubierta)

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FC1-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada FC1-SC-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex recubierta FC1-SC-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada/recubierta, una funda para fibra enchaquetada y una funda para fibra recubierta Use (XX) para especificar el color de la bota: 02 = blanco, 06 = azul

Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para embalaje a granel (100/caja).

CONECTORES ST Los conectores ST emplean un robusto anillo de acoplamiento de bayoneta metálica con rampas radiales que facilitan el encaje en los túneles del adaptador de acoplamiento. Se dispone de dos conectores ST para fibra enchaquetada, uno con funda beige y otro con funda negra. Los dos colores permiten la identificación fácil de las fibras al efectuar la terminación individual de los conectores para formar un puente dúplex.

Multimodo

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FC1-SA-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada, funda beige FC1-SA-MM-J01 . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada, funda negra FC1-SA-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex recubierta, funda beige FC1-SA-MM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada/recubierta, una funda negra (enchaquetada) y una funda beige (recubierta) FC1-SA-MM-80 . . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada/recubierta, una funda beige (enchaquetada) y una funda beige (recubierta)

Monomodo PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FC1-SA-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . . .Fibra símplex enchaquetada FC1-SA-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex recubierta FC1-SA-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Fibra símplex enchaquetada/recubierta, una funda para fibra enchaquetada y una funda para fibra recubierta

Use (XX) para especificar el color de la bota: 02 = blanco, 06 = azul Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para embalaje a granel (100/caja).

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS PARA FIBRA

CONECTORES LC INSTALABLES EN CAMPO Los conectores Siemon LC reúnen todos los beneficios de ls conectores SC o ST en un diseño SFF (Small Form Factor) de alta densidad. Los adaptadores LC son compatibles con nuestras soluciones para áreas de trabajo y cuartos de telecomunicaciones MAX®, CT®, FOB y SM®, proporcionando una amplia variedad de opciones de instalación. Los conectores LC se conectorizan en tan solo dos minutos, utilizando el kit de terminación LightSpeed®.

Multimode PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FC1-LC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . . . Conector LC símplex, multimodo, fibra recubierta, funda beige FC2-LC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . . . Conector LC dúplex, multimodo, fibra enchaquetada, funda beige

Monomodo PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FC1-LC-SM-B02 . . . . . . . . . . . Conector LC símplex, monomodo, fibra recubierta, funda blanca FC1-LC-SM-J02 . . . . . . . . . . . Conector LC símplex, monomodo, fibra enchaquetada, funda blanca

Nota: Los conectores LC enchaquetados requieren el uso de cables de fibra con chaqueta de 1.6 mm. Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para embalaje a granel (símplex: 100/caja; dúplex: 50/caja).

CONECTORES MT-RJ INSTALABLES EN CAMPO Los conectores Siemon MT-RJ reúnen todos los beneficios del desempeño de la fibra óptica dúplex en un diseño compacto de estilo "RJ". Las terminaciones son rápidas y fáciles, utilizando un método comprobado sin epoxy ni pulido, que lleva tan solo 2 minutos en total ¡uno por cada fibra! Los conectores Siemon MT-RJ se caracterizan por sus dos fibras terminadas en fábrica dentro de la férula provista con guías de acoplamiento y con un mecanismo de empalme preinstalado. Sólo prepare el cable e inserte las fibras en el conector para completar la terminación. No se requiere epoxi ni pulido. Dos mejoras se han incorporado en el conector MT-RJ. La primera mejora es el color del conector de 62.5 micras el cual ha cambiado de negro a beige. Esto para ayudar a distinguir entre las dos versiones de conectores multimodo. La segunda mejora es el cambio de una a dos guías de inserción, una por cada fibra, para ayudar a enrutar las fibras dentro del conector.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN FC2-MT6MM. . . . . . . . . . . . . Conector dúplex MT-RJ con guías (macho), multimodo 62,5/125 µm, beige FC2-MT5MM. . . . . . . . . . . . . Conector dúplex MT-RJ con guías (macho), multimodo 50/125 µm, negro

¡TIP TÉCNICO! ¿Alguna vez invirtió la polaridad en una terminación de fibra dúplex? El seguro abatible de Siemon le permite corregir ese error. Simplemente suelte el seguro integrado en el adaptador, gire el conector 180º e insértelo en el adaptador. Nota: Los conectores MT-RJ de Siemon son compatibles con cables de fibra recubierta o echaquetada redonda de 3.0 mm

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

MÓDULOS 10G 6™ MAX® En 1998, Siemon fue la primera empresa que ofreció componentes y sistemas categoría 6. Actualmente, Siemon condujo el desempeño de la categoría 6 hasta el próximo nivel con el revolucionario módulo 10G 6 MAX. 10G 6 MAX es el único conector que cumple todas las especificaciones ANSI/TIA/EIA-568B.2-1 de componente para hardware de conexión de 1 a 300 MHz.

PATENTADO

300 MHz

Desempeño de componente Categoría 6 hasta 300 MHz

EXCEDE A LA CATEGORÍA 6 La tecnología patentada Tri-Balance™ asegura total cumplimiento de las especificaciones propuestas para la categoría 6 hasta 300 MHz.

TERMINACIONES RÁPIDAS El Sistema de Entrada de cables Pyramid™ en los bloques S310® separa los conductores de cada para al acomodar los cables para simplificar y reducir el tiempo de instalación.

Todas las tomas son compatibles con ambas opciones de cableado, T568A y T568B

Para minimizar la exposición al polvo y otros contaminantes, se dispone de puertas protectoras

Utiliza herramientas de terminación de par simple 110 estándar

Permite instalación desde el frente o desde atrás de la placa frontal

Compatible retroactivamente con patch cords categoría 5e e inferiores

MÓDULOS 10G 6 MAX

Cumplimiento de componentes a la categoría 6 a 300 MHz

MX6-(XX)U* . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular, con cableado T568A/B, y puerta protectora de caucho

MX6-F(XX)U* . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano, con cableado T568A/B

Diseño delgado que permite adosar clavijas, lado a lado, para lograr soluciones de alta densidad

MÓDULOS MAX 6

MX6-K(XX)U* . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo tipo Keystone, con cableado T568A/B

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 09 = anaranjado, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro , 82 = blanco alpino Los módulos incluyen tapa liberadora de tensión Los módulos incluyen un ícono del mismo color que el módulo, uno rojo y uno azul. El color de la puerta es transparente para los módulos angulares rojo, amarillo, azul y anaranjado. El color de la puerta es blanco para los módulos planos rojo, amarillo, azul y anaranjado. Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para envase a granel para proyecto de 100 módulos (incluye íconos). Agregue “-D” para puerta (módulos planos únicamente)

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

Cumplimiento de componentes a la categoría 6 a 250 MHz

✓

MX6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular con alambrado T568A/B, y puerta protectora de caucho

MÓDULOS MAX 5e

DESEMPEÑO SUPERIOR Use cordones modulares 10G 6 MC® para aprovechar todo el desempeño de los módulos Siemon 10G 6 MAX .

MX5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular con alambrado T568A/B, y puerta protectora de caucho

MX6-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano con esquema T568A/B

MX6-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo keystone con alambrado T568A/B

Cumplimiento de componentes a la categoría 5e a 160MHz

MX5-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano con alambrado T568A/B

W W W

MX5-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo keystone con alambrado T568A/B

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

MÓDULOS MAX® SIN HERRAMIENTAS El módulo MAX, sin herramientas, provee un desempeño de sistema de categoría 5e y características muy simples de instalación. Nuestra terminación sin herramientas permite la terminación de ocho conductores en el momento en que se fija la tapa de terminación en su lugar. El tamaño compacto proporciona una conectividad de alta densidad en el área de trabajo y en el cuarto de telecomunicaciones. TERMINACIÓN Termine en masa los ocho conductores a mano o use una lámina de terminación 110® de posición única en la tapa de terminación MAX.

COLOCACIÓN RÁPIDA DE LOS PARES Los conductores pueden colocarse secuencialmente dentro de la tapa de terminación, lo que minimiza el destrenzado del par de cables y simplifica la terminación.

La tecnología patentada de balance de par multi-planar provee un desempeño de sistema de categoría 5e

Íconos disponibles en 13 colores para codificación en colores

La lengüeta flexible para montaje permite la instalación desde el frente o por detrás de la placa frontal y sostiene al módulo dentro de la placa frontal, con o sin uso de la puerta protectora de caucho

No requiere herramientas de terminación

VERIFIQUE EL ALAMBRADO CORRECTO La tapa de terminación tiene una ventana grande para observar las terminaciones.

PATENTADO

✓

MÓDULOS MAX SIN HERRAMIENTAS

ble

La abertura de la toma atiende a la norma IEC 60603-7

ati

El diseño delgado permite adosar las tomas lado a lado para proveer soluciones de alta densidad

MX-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular con alambrado T568A/B

MX-F-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano con alambrado T568A/B

MX-K-C5-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo keystone con alambrado T568A/B

Nota: La versión keystone no es compatible con los elementos de montaje MAX. 01

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 09 = anaranjado, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro , 82 = blanco alpino El color de la puerta es blanco para los módulos planos (transparente para los angulados) rojo, amarillo, azul y anaranjado. Agregue “-D” para puerta opcional (módulos planos únicamente) Los módulos incluyen un ícono del mismo color, uno rojo y uno azul. Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para envase a granel para proyecto de 100 módulos (incluye íconos). W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PATENTADO

MÓDULOS ADAPTADORES PARA FIBRA MAX®

Los módulos adaptadores para fibra Siemon MAX son compatibles con todas las placas frontales, adaptadores para mobiliario modular, cajas de montaje de superficie y paneles de parcheo, de la serie MAX. Todos los adaptadores para fibra son "universales" para trabajar con conexiones de fibra multimodo o monomodo.

MX-MT-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular con 1 adaptador dúplex MT-RJ (2 fibras)

MX-F-SA-(XX)* . . . . . . . . Módulo plano con 1 adaptador símplex ST (1 fibra)

MX-SA-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angulares con 1 adaptador símplex ST (1 fibra)

MX-F-MT-(XX)* . . . . . . . . Módulo plano con 1 adaptador dúplex MT-RJ (2 fibras)

MX-F-S2-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano con 1 adaptador dúplex ST (2 fibras)

MX-S2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular con 1 adaptador dúplex ST (2 fibras)

MX-F1-LC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . Módulo plano con 1 adaptador dúplex LC (2 fibras) Use (X) para especificar el color del adaptador LC: en blanco = beige, U = azul

MX-F-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano con 1 adaptador dúplex ST (2 fibras)

MX-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular con 1 adaptador dúplex SC (2 fibras)

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro Los módulos incluyen tapas contra polvo, un ícono del mismo color, uno rojo y uno azul

* Compatible con las cajas SM

PATENTADO

MÓDULOS COAX MAX

Para terminación de cables coaxiales en el área de trabajo o cuarto de telecomunicaciones, los módulos Siemon coax MAX proveen adaptadores de los tipos BNC y F. El tipo F está disponible tanto plano como angular, mientras que el BNC está disponibles solamente en plano. Todos incluyen un espacio para utilizar íconos codificados en color para identificación del tipo de servicio. MX-FA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular con 1 adaptador tipo F, 75 ohms

MX-F-FA-(XX)*. . . . . . . . . Módulo plano con 1 adaptador tipo F, 75 ohms

MX-F-BA-(XX)* . . . . . . . Módulo plano con 1 adaptador BNC, 75 ohms

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro Los módulos incluyen un ícono del mismo color, uno rojo y uno azul. * Compatible con las cajas SM

PUERTAS Y TAPAS CIEGAS PARA TOMAS MAX

PATENTADO

Insertos ciegos para puertos sin uso y expansión futura, y puertas para proteger las tomas de contaminantes externos. MX-BL-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo ciego, bolsa de 10

MX-FD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto de puerta para tomas planas, 6 u 8posiciones, bolsa de 20

MX-AD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conjunto de puerta para tomas angulares, 6 u 8posiciones, bolsa de 20

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 00 = transparente (MX-AD-XX únicamente), 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante*, 80 = marfil claro * No disponible para puertas anguladas. Se recomienda usar colores blanco o transparente en caso de requerirse.

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

MARCO DE MONTAJE MAX HD15 MX-D4F-15-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . Marco de montaje de 4 puertos MAX con adaptador instalado HD15 hembra a hembra MX-D4F-15E-(XX). . . . . . . . . . Marco de montaje de 4 puertos MAX vacio

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

PLACAS FRONTALES BRITÁNICAS MAX® La MAX placa frontal Británica es compatible con las normas Británicas (85 mm x 85 mm). La placa frontal está diseñada para aceptar hasta seis módulos angulares o plano MAX. Las placas frontales incluyen etiqueta(s) de designación, cubierta(s) transparentes para etiqueta(s) y tornillos para montaje.

MX-BFP-S-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para un módulo MAX

MX-BFP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para dos módulos MAX

MX-BFP-S-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para tres módulos MAX

MX-BFP-S-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para cuatro módulos MAX

MX-BFP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para seis módulos MAX

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 25 = blanco brillante, 82 = blanco alpino

FLEXYOKES BRITÁNICOS MAX Los flexyokes MAX permiten que se monte un módulo de puerto simple MAX en las aberturas británicas 37 mm x 22 mm. FY-MX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cubierta Flexyoke únicamente Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 25 = blanco brillante Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Apoyo Técnico para cuestiones relativas a las dimensiones para montaje.

Flexyoke exhibido con módulo plano MAX opcional

ADAPTADORES PARA MOBILIARIO MODULAR MAX Los adaptadores para mobiliario modular MAX aceptan cuatro MAX módulos angulares o planos, y encajan directamente en las aberturas* de las tomas de comunicaciones en la mayoría de los principales sistemas de muebles modulares, incluso Steelcase, Hon Industries, Haworth, Kimball y DRG. Los adaptadores incluyen etiqueta de designación y cubierta transparente para etiqueta, a fines de identificación del circuito. MX-MFP-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador mobiliario modular Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro Nota: Para el panel vertical de 152 mm (6 in), de Herman Miller Action Office Series 3, use nuestro MX-FP-S-(XX)-(XX) para montar hasta seis módulos MAX *Las aberturas de las tomas de salida, el espesor de los paneles y la tolerancia de los conductos eléctricos pueden variar. Por favor, consulte al fabricante del mobiliario acerca de las dimensiones reales a fin de determinar la compatibilidad.

67.46 – 69.85 mm (2.656 – 2.750 in)

34.16 – 35,69 mm (1.345 – 1.405 in)

Requisitos de corte para el panel Ancho del panel: 0,76 – 2.03 mm (0.030 – 0.080 in)

PLACAS FRONTALES INTERNACIONALES MAX The Siemon Company provee soluciones de montaje para atender a muchas exigencias internacionales. Placas frontales horizontales, que incluyen etiqueta(s) de designación, cubiertas del mismo color y transparentes para etiquetas, y tapas del mismo color para tornillos.

MX-HFP-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple horizontal Australiana/Italiana para un módulo MAX

MX-HFP-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple horizontal Australiana/Italiana para dos módulos MAX

MX-HFP-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple horizontal Australiana/Italiana para tres módulos MAX

MX-HFP-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple horizontal Australiana/Italiana para cuatro módulos MAX

MX-DFP-02-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal blanco Dinamarqués para dos módulos MAX. Incluye cubiertas transparentes para etiquetas de designaciones

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro

ADAPTADORES INTERNACIONALES MAX Estos adaptadores permiten el montaje de dos módulos MAX en una abertura estándar.

MX-45-01-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de un puerto de 45 mm x 45 mm Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 25 = blanco brillante, 82 = blanco alpino

MX-45-02-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de dos puertos de 45 mm x 45 mm Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 25 = blanco brillante, 82 = blanco alpino

MX-A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de 50 mm x 50 mm. Incluye etiqueta de designación y cubiertas transparentes para etiquetas Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 25 = blanco brillante, 82 = blanco alpino

MX-RFP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador de 45 mm x 50 mm Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 25 = blanco brillante

Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Apoyo Técnico para cuestiones relacionadas con las dimensiones para montaje. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PLACAS FRONTALES MODULARES MAX® MX-FP-S-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para un módulo MAX

MX-FP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para dos módulos MAX

MX-FP-S-04-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para cuatro módulos MAX

MX-FP-D-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado doble para seis módulos MAX

MX-FP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para seis módulos MAX

MX-FP-D-08-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado doble para ocho módulos MAX

MX-FP-S-03-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple para tres módulos MAX

MX-FP-D-12-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado doble para doce módulos MAX

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro*, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris*, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro Las placas frontales incluyen etiqueta(s) de designaciones, cubierta(s) de etiqueta(s) y tornillos. Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para envase a granel para proyecto de 100 placas frontales. *Las opciones negro y gris y empaques a granel están disponibles para placas de acoplado simple únicamente

PLACAS FRONTALES ACERO INOXIDABLE MAX Placas frontales, simple y acoplado doble, de acero inoxidable MAX para usar con módulos planos y angulares MAX. El acabado escobado de las placas enmascara los pequeños arañazos y rayones que pueden ocurrir en el uso diario. Las placas frontales incluyen los tornillos para montaje.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MX-FP-S-(XX)-SS-L . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple acero inoxidable, con etiquetas y portaetiquetas.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MX-FP-D-(XX)-SS-L . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado doble acero inoxidable, con etiquetas y portaetiquetas

MX-FP-S-(XX)-SS . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado simple acero inoxidable

MX-FP-D-(XX)-SS. . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal acoplado doble acero inoxidable

Use (XX) para especificar la cantidad de puertos: 01 = 1 puerto, 02 = 2 puertos, 03 = 3 puertos, 04 = 4 puertos, 06 = 6 puertos

Use (XX) para especificar número de puertos: 06 = 6 puertos, 08 = 8 puertos, 12 = 12 puertos

PLACA FRONTAL PROTECTORA MAX Las nuevas placas frontales Siemon protectora MAX proveen una solución segura, de perfil bajo para montaje de nuestra línea completa de módulos MAX. Su diseño se caracteriza por una base enteriza que acepta hasta seis módulos angulares MAX y está asegurada por una tapa robusta, con cierre optativo, a estrella contra violación o con tornillo de cabeza ranurada estándar. La base puede montarse en cualquier toma de salida acoplado simple. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MX-TFP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal protectora, acoplado simple, para seis módulos angulares MAX

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

Use (XX) para especificar color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro

ACCESORIOS PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT-FP-LBL-104* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hojas con etiquetas para placas frontales que se adaptan a cualquier impresora estándar 8.5 x 11, 104 etiquetas/hoja MX-FP-CVR-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolsa con 100 cubiertas para etiquetas para placas frontales MAX Use (XX) para especificar color: 00 = transparente, 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro, 82 = blanco alpino *Visite nuestro sitio en web o contacte a nuestro Departamento de Apoyo Técnico para el software para etiquetas.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

MEJORADO PATENTADO

MAX® MUTOA PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MX-MMO-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de salida multiusuario, con abrazaderas para cables, tornillos para fijación y cinta adhesiva altura: 200.2 mm (7.88 in); ancho: 200.2 mm (7.88 in); profundidad: 57.0 mm (2.25 in) Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro Las Bandejas de Acomodo de Fibra Óptica se venden por separado (ver parte inferior) AACCESORIOS PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT-MMO-MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Juego de 3 imanes para caja multiusuario/multimedia FMT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de acomodación de fibras para MUTOA MAX

CAJA DE SALIDA PARA FIBRA

PATENTADO

La caja Siemon de salida para fibra (FOB2), de perfil bajo, es la solución óptima para llevar la fibra al escritorio. FOB2 ofrece un método bien definido para el acomodo de cableado de fibra hasta el área de trabajo proveyendo un punto de conexión para 12 conectores para fibras (o 6 coaxiales) utilizando marcos deslizantes. Una placa frontal de acoplado simple se monta en la base FOB2 y acomoda hasta seis módulos MAX o dos acopladores CT®.

FOB2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incluye base, tapa, etiquetas para designaciones, cubiertas transparentes para etiquetas, accesorios para montaje, abrazaderas para cables, íconos, y tres engarces ciegos

FOB2-GRD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Incluye base, tapa extendida, etiquetas para designaciones, cubiertas transparentes para etiquetas, accesorios para montaje, abrazaderas para cables, íconos, y tres engarces ciegos

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 80 = marfil claro

PATENTADO

ENGARCES PARA CAJAS DE SALIDA PARA FIBRA

FOB-BZL-SA-01 . . . . . . . . . . Adaptadores dúplex ST, (2 fibras)

FOB-BZL-SC-01. . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador dúplex SC, (2 fibras)

FOB-BZL-MT1-01 . . . . . . . . . 1 adaptador dúplex MT-RJ, (2 fibras)

FOB-BZL-LC(X)1-01 . . . . . . . . 1 adaptador dúplex MT-RJ, (2 fibras)

FOB-BZL-LC(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . 2 adaptadores dúplex LC, (4 fibras)

FOB-BZL-BL-01 . . . . . . . . . . . Engarce ciego

FOB-BZL-MT-01 . . . . . . . . . . 2 adaptadores dúplex MT-RJ, (4 fibras)

Use (X) para especificar el color del adaptador LC: en blanco = beige, U = azul; Todos los otros engarces sólo están disponibles en negro. Nota: Todos los adaptadores para fibra son "universales" para operar con conexiones para fibras multimodo y monomodo.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ACOPLADORES CT® 6 Las innovaciones de ingeniería exclusivas utilizadas por Siemon para el diseño de los acopladores CT 6 permiten cumplir completamente con las especificaciones para hardware de conexión categoría 6 para todas las combinaciones de pares hasta 250 MHz.

Compatible con categorías inferiores — puede utilizarse con cordones modulares MC® 5 para compatibilidad con la categoría 5e

Utiliza herramientas de terminación 110 estándar

Todas las tomas son compatibles con ambas opciones de alambrado, T568A y T568B

Diseño patentado de "alimentación por gravedad" que controla el radio de curvatura del cordón modular acoplado y protege físicamente el punto de conexión contra daños

Están disponibles Acopladores Angulares CT 6 con puerta opcional con resorte para protección de las tomas modulares contra contaminantes externos

Encaja rápidamente en placas frontales CT o paneles de parcheo y puede retirarse fácilmente utilizando un pequeño destornillador para acceder al cable

TERMINACIÓN RÁPIDA El sistema de entrada de alambre Pyramid™ de los nuevos bloques S310® separa los conductores pareados al enlazar los cables para simplificar y reducir el tiempo de instalación.

DESEMPEÑO SUPERIOR Use cordones modulares MC 6 para conseguir el pleno desempeño de los módulos Siemon CT 6.

NEXT PERFORMANCE -40 -50

Limit (dB)

-60

Typical -70

Worst Case Margin at 250 MHz Worst Case 0.84 dB Typical 4.37 dB

-80 -90 -100

100

250

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

FREQUENCY (MHz)

EXCEDE A LA CATEGORÍA 6 Tecnología patentada Tri-Balance™ garantiza total cumplimiento con las especificaciones propuestas para la categoría 6.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

PATENTADO

ACOPLADORES CT® 6 ACOPLADORES ANGULARES CT-C6-C6-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angular, acoplador doble, alambrado universal T568A/B

CT-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angular, acoplador simple, alambrado universal T568A/B

¡CONSEJO TÉCNICO! Los Acopladores Angulares se recomiendan para aplicaciones en el área de trabajo y los acopladores planos se recomiendan para aplicaciones en panel de parcheo.

Adicione "D" para la opción de puerta con resorte en los acopladores angulares. ACOPLADORES PLANOS CT-F-C6-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plano, acoplador doble, alambrado universal T568A/B

CT-F-C6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plano, acoplador simple, alambrado universal T568A/B

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro, 82 = blanco alpino Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para envase a granel para proyecto de 100 acopladores (incluye solamente acopladores e íconos — las tapas de terminación y las abrazaderas para cables están disponibles separadamente). Los acopladores incluyen un ícono del mismo color (transparente, para negro) y una tapa de terminación por puerto, más un ícono rojo y uno azul.

PATENTADO

ACOPLADORES CT 5E ACOPLADORES ANGULARES CT-C5-C5-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angular, acoplador doble, alambrado universal T568A/B

CT-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angular, acoplador simple, alambrado universal T568A/B

¡CONSEJO TÉCNICO! Los Acopladores Angulares se recomiendan para aplicaciones en el área de trabajo y los acopladores planos se recomiendan para aplicaciones en panel de parcheo.

Adicione "D" para puerta con resorte opción en acopladores angulares. ACOPLADORES PLANOS CT-F-C5-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plano, acoplador doble, alambrado universal T568A/B

CT-F-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plano, acoplador simple, alambrado universal T568A/B

OTROS ACOPLADORES CT CT-AUD-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador plano con 2 conectores de audio

CT-BLNK-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acoplador plano ciego

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro

OTROS ACOPLADORES PLANOS CT

PATENTADO

Los acopladores planos CT proveen una gama completa de voz y configuraciones específicas de cableado de datos. Están disponibles con tomas modulares simples o dobles. ACOPLADORES DOBLES CT-(XX)-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plano, acoplador doble

OPCIONES DE TOMA: U3 = 3 pares, toma 6 posiciones, USOC U4 = 4 pares, toma, USOC Nota: Use U3 para USOC 1 par y 2 pares.

Use las 1.as (XX) para especificar la toma A (vea a la derecha) Use las 2.as (XX) para especificar la toma B (vea a la derecha) Use las 3.as (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro, 82 = blanco alpino W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ACOPLADORES CT® CON ADAPTADORES MT-RJ Y LC PARA FIBRA Los acopladores Siemon CT MT-RJ y LC para fibra encajan en nuestras placas frontales serie CT existentes, MuTOA (del inglés, Multi-user Telecommunications Outlet Assembly - Ensamble de salida multiusuario de telecomunicaciones) y adaptadores de mobiliario modular. Los acopladores están disponibles en configuraciones de 2 y 4 fibras. Están disponibles ambas versiones, plana y angular. Todos los adaptadores para fibra son "universales" para admitir conexiones de fibra multimodo o monomodo. MT-RJ CT-MT-(XX) Acoplador plano con 1 adaptador dúplex MT-RJ (2 fibras)

CT-MT-MT-(XX) Acoplador plano con 2 adaptado res dúplex MT-RJ (4 fibras)

CT-A-MT-(XX) Acoplador angular con 1 adaptador dúplex MT-RJ (2 fibras)

CT-A-MT-MT-(XX) Acoplador angular con 2 adaptador es dúplex MT-RJ (4 fibras)

CT-LC(X)-LC(X)-(XX) Acoplador plano con 2 adaptadores dúplex LC (4 fibras)

CT-A-LC(X)-(XX) Acoplador angular con 1 adaptador dúplex LC (2 fibras)

CT-A-LC(X)-LC(X)-(XX) Acoplador angular con 2 adaptador es dúplex LC (4 fibras)

LC CT-LC(X)-(XX) Acoplador plano con 1 adaptador dúplex LC (2 fibras)

Use (X) para especificar el color del adaptador LC: en blanco = beige, U = azul Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro Los acopladores incluyen un ícono del mismo color (transparente, para negro); más un ícono rojo y uno azul.

ACOPLADORES CT CON ADAPTADORES SC Y ST PARA FIBRA

PATENTADO

La línea de acopladores CT para fibra consiste en adaptadores SC, ST, e híbrido SC/ST. Los acopladores angulares presentan nuestro diseño patentado de "alimentación por gravedad" que sirve para controlar el radio de curvatura de los cables de fibra en el área de trabajo. Todos los adaptadores para fibra son "universales" para admitir conexiones de fibra multimodo o monomodo. CT-SC-SC-(XX) Acoplador plano con 1 adaptador dúplex SC (2 fibras)

CT-SA-SA-(XX) Acoplador plano con 1 adaptador dúplex ST (2 fibras)

CT-AC-AC-(XX) Acoplador plano con 1 adaptador dúplex ST a SC (lado frontal = SC) (2 fibras)

CT-A-SC-SC-(XX) Acoplador angular con 1 adaptador dúplex SC (2 fibras)

CT-A-SA-SA-(XX) Acoplador angular com 1 adaptador ST duplex (2 fibras)

CT-A-AC-AC-(XX) Acoplador angular con 1 adaptador dúplex ST a SC (lado frontal = SC) (2 fibras)

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro Los acopladores incluyen un ícono del mismo color (transparente, para negro); más un ícono rojo y uno azul.

ACCESORIOS PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 íconos en colores (teléfono de un lado, computadora en el otro) TAB-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 íconos lisos en colores para acopladores CT-ICON-LBL* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hojas de etiquetas para íconos transparentes que se adaptan a cualquier impresora estándar 8.5 x 11 printer, 168 etiquetas por hoja S110-TC-2P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapas de terminación de dos pares para bloques S110 TW-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cintillo para cable de 102 mm (4 in), bolsa de 100

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 00 = transparente**, 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 05 = amarillo, También están disponibles íconos impresos a láser 06 = azul, 07 = verde, 08 = violeta, 09 = anaranjado, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 60 = marrón, 80 = marfil claro (CT-ÍCONO-(XX) solamente), 82 = blanco alpino Adicione "B" para envase a granel de 100 íconos o etiquetas. *Visite nuestro sitio en web o contacte a nuestro Departamento de Apoyo Técnico para obtener el software para etiquetas. **Disponibles en TAB-(XX) solamente. Otros colores de CT-ÍCONO disponibles. 01 03 05 07 09 25 80 Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente 00 02 04 06 08 20 60 acerca de la información para pedidos.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

PLACAS FRONTALES INTERNACIONALES CT® CT-FP-DKIT-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit placa frontal Alemana, acoplado doble, para un acoplador CT. Incluye placa frontal, anillo de montaje y marco expansor

CT2-HFP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal horizontal Australiana/Italiana, para un acoplador CT

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 80 = marfil claro, 82 = blanco alpino

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro

CT-FP-DKIT-02 exhibido con acoplador CT

ADAPTADORES INTERNATIONAL CT Estos adaptadores encajan en las aberturas estándar para permitir el uso de un acoplador CT. CTE-A-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 mm x 50 mm, el adaptador incluye etiqueta de designación y tapa transparente de etiqueta Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 82 = blanco alpino

CTE-45-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 mm x 45 mm, adaptador Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 82 = blanco alpino CT-RFP-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 mm X 50 mm, adaptador blanco

CTE-45-02 exhibido con acoplador CT

Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Apoyo Técnico para las cuestiones relacionadas con las dimensiones de montaje.

PLACAS FRONTALES BRITÁNICAS CT La serie de placas frontales Británicas CT es compatible con las normas Británicas (85 mm X 85 mm) y están proyectadas para trabajar con nuestra línea completa de acopladores CT.

CTE2-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal estilo Británico, acoplado simple, para un acoplador CT (0.35 mm de profundidad)

CTE4-FP22-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal estilo Británico, acoplado simple, para dos acopladores CT. Incluye etiqueta en la parte superior de la placa frontal. (0.63 mm de profundidad)

CTE4-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal estilo Británico, acoplado doble, para dos acopladores CT (0.35 mm de profundidad)

CTE4-FP-02 exhibida con dos acopladores CT

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 82 = blanco alpino

CAJAS BRITÁNICAS PARA MONTAJE DE SUPERFICIE Las cajas CTE2 y CTE4 ofrecen la posibilidad de montaje sobre superficie para las placas frontales Británicas de la serie CT descritas más arriba.

CTE4-BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de montaje de superficie, acoplado doble, para placas frontales Británicas CT, blanco

CTE2-BOX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de montaje de superficie, acoplado simple, para placas frontales Británicas CT, blanco

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PLACAS FRONTALES CT®

MEJORADO PATENTADO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT4-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal plástica, acoplado simple, para dos acopladores

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT8-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal plástica, acoplado doble, para cuatro acopladores

CT2-FP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal plástica, acoplado simple, para un acoplador

CT2-HFPA-(XX)* . . . . . . . Placa frontal plástica, acoplado simple, para un acoplador con tornillos (#6-32 tornillos)

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro Las placas frontales incluyen etiqueta(s) de designaciones, cubierta(s) de etiqueta(s) y tornillos. Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para envases a granel para proyectos, (incluye 100 placas frontales CT2 o CT4, o 50 placas frontales CT8, tornillos, etiquetas para designaciones, y cubiertas para etiquetas). * No disponible en empaques a granel

PATENTADO

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

PLACAS FRONTALES DE ACERO INOXIDABLE CT

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT4-FP-SS-L. . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal de acero inoxidable, acoplado simple, para dos acopladores con etiquetas y portaetiquetas

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT4-FP-SS . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal de acero inoxidable, acoplado simple, para dos acopladores

CT8-FP-SS-L. . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal de acero inoxidable, acoplado doble, para cuatro acopladores con etiquetas y portaetiquetas

CT8-FP-SS . . . . . . . . . . . Placa frontal de acero inoxidable, acoplado doble, para cuatro acopladores

ACCESSORIOS PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT-FP-LBL-104* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hojas de etiquetas para placas frontales que se adaptan a cualquier impresora 8,5 x 11, 104 etiquetas por hoja CT-FP-CVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolsa con 100 cubiertas transparentes para etiquetas para placas frontales CT *Visite a nuestro sitio en web o contacte a nuestro Departamento de Apoyo Técnico para el software de etiquetas.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

CAJAS PARA MONTAJE DE SUPERFICIE DE PLACA FRONTAL Estas cajas ofrecen una opción de montaje en superficie para placas frontales dobles o sencillas MAX® o CT®. Estas cajas son perfectas para las instalaciones donde la toma de salida del área de trabajo no puede empotrarse en la pared o en la caja de piso. Las cajas también son compatibles con nuestros marcos expansores (stand-off rings) si se requiere una profundidad extra detrás de la placa frontal. No se incluyen accesorios de montaje.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT4-BOX-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja para montaje de superficie para placa frontal simple altura: 119.3 mm (4.70 in); ancho: 74.8 mm (2.95 in); profundidad: 40.6 mm (1.60 in)

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT8-BOX-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . .Caja para montaje de superficie para placa frontal doble altura: 119.3 mm (4.70 in); ancho: 120.8 mm (4.76 in); profundidad: 40.6 mm (1.60 in)

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro AB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Respaldo adhesivo (paquete de 10) MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Respaldo magnético (paquete de 10)

Nota: Para las cajas CT8 se necesitan dos respaldos magnéticos o adhesivos.

ADAPTADORES PARA MOBILIARIO MODULAR CT El adaptador para mobiliario modular CT acepta cualquier acoplador CT y encaja directamente en las aberturas* de tomas de comunicaciones en la mayoría de los sistemas de muebles modulares, incluso Steelcase, Hon Industries, Haworth, Kimball y DRG.

67.46 – 69.85 mm (2.656 – 2.750 in)

PARTE # CT-MFP-(XX)

DESCRIPCIÓN Adaptador estándar (acepta un acoplador CT)

34.16 – 35.69 mm (1.345 – 1.405 in)

Requisitos de corte para el panel Ancho de panel: 0.76 – 2.03 mm (0.030 – 0.080 in)

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro Nota: Para el panel vertical de 152 mm (6 in.) de Herman Miller Action Office Series 3, use nuestro CT4-FP estándar para montar dos acopladores CT (consulte la página 20). *Las aberturas de las tomas de salida, el espesor de los paneles y la tolerancia de los conductos eléctricos pueden variar. Por favor, consulte al fabricante del mobiliario acerca de las dimensiones reales a fin de determinar la compatibilidad.

PATENTADO

MUTOA CT PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT-MMO-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de salida multiusuario, con abrazaderas para cables, tornillos para fijación y cinta adhesiva altura: 200.2 mm (7.88 in); ancho: 200.2 mm (7.88 in); profundidad: 57.0 mm (2.25 in. Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro Las Bandejas de Acomodo de Fibra Óptica se venden por separado (ver parte inferior) ACESSÓRIOS PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CT-MMO-MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Juego de 3 imanes para caja multiusuarios/multimedia FMT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandeja de acomodación de fibras para MUTOA CT Nota: Están disponibles chips de empalmes para empalmes internos de fibra. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente sobre la manera de solicitarlos. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CAJAS PARA MONTAJE DE SUPERFICIE SM® Las cajas para montaje de superficie SM tienen un diseño compacto y son fáciles de instalar. Los componentes UTP, ScTP, Fibra, Video y Coaxiales pueden solicitarse previamente montados o pueden comprarse de manera separada, y se instalan rápidamente en la base. La terminación de cable S110® y los recursos de acomodo de múltiples cables proveen una instalación simple y bien organizada.

Tapa de encaje a presión con áreas para íconos/etiquetas de designación y etiquetas en blanco

Las cajas están disponibles en color blanco, gris, marfil, blanco brillante y marfil claro

Puntos de anclaje para cintillos que permiten asegurar el cable libre de tensión

Pasajes en tres lados para entrada de cables/conductos

Disponibles en tamaños de 1, 2, 4 y 6 puertos Jacks disponibles para cable apantallado o sin blindaje

Tornillos y cinta adhesiva inclusos; los imanes son optativos Los engarces para tomas modulares ofrecen contrapuertas opcionales con cierre a resorte para protección adicional contra polvo y otros contaminantes

COMPATIBLE CON MÓDULOS PLANOS MAX® Todas las cajas de montaje sobre superficies Siemon SM incluyen un marco adaptador (P/N: MX-SM) que permite la instalación de módulos MAX planos, MT-RJ, FC, RCA, BNC, categorías 3, 5e y 6 en las cajas de la serie SM.

ACOMODO DE FIBRA Las cajas de montaje en superficie SM4 y SM6 incluyen postes acomodadores de fibra para permitir almacenar reserva de cable de fibra en el área de trabajo.

SOLUCIÓN IDEAL PARA MONTAJE DE SUPERFICIE Durable, diseño de perfil bajo que ayuda a proteger las tomas contra contactos imprevistos.

ati

ble

CAJAS MONTADAS EN FÁBRICA SM

SM1-5-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de montaje de superficie, 1 puerto

SM2-5-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de montaje de superficie, 2 puertos

SM4-5-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de montaje de superficie, 4 puertos

SM6-5-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de montaje de superficie, 6 puertos

Use las 1.as (XX) para especificar el alambrado para todos los puertos: T4 = alambrado T568A; A4 = alambrado T568B Use las 2.as (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 04 = gris, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro Para la contrapuerta a resorte adicione "D"; para toma blindado opcional adicione "S"; para contrapuerta a resorte y toma blindada opcionales adicione "DS". Todas las cajas montadas en fábrica SM incluyen: íconos, tapas de terminaciones, abrazaderas para cables, tornillos y cinta adhesiva; para configuraciones personalizadas contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente.

MEJORADO

CAJAS PARA MONTAJE EN CAMPO SM

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

Las cajas para montaje de superficie, en campo, no incluyen conectores.

SM1-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de 1 puerto con tapa, base, engarce, íconos, tapas de terminaciones, abrazaderas para cables, tornillos, cinta adhesiva, y un adaptador plano MAX

SM2-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de 2 puertos con tapa, base, engarce, íconos, tapas de terminaciones, abrazaderas para cables, tornillos, cinta adhesiva, y dos adaptadores plano MAX

SM4-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja de 4 puertos con tapa, base, engarce, íconos, tapas de terminaciones, abrazaderas para cables, tornillos, cinta adhesiva, y cuatro adaptadores plano MAX

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 20 = marfil, 80 = marfil claro. Adicione "D" para la contrapuerta opcional a resorte.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SMC-5-T4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toma modular, T568A

ÁREA DE TRABAJO

COMPONENTES DE TOMA MODULAR SM®

PATENTADO SMC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Otros tomas UTP

ati

ble

SMC-5-A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toma modular, T568B

Use (XX) para especificar la opción de toma: U3 = toma 3 pares, 6 posiciones, USOC; U4 = toma 4 pares, 8 posiciones, USOC Nota: Use U3 para USOC 1 par y 2 pares.

ENGARCES ADAPTADORES PARA FIBRA SM

SMC-SA-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engarce doble con 2 adaptadores para fibra ST (2 fibras)

SMC-SC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engarce doble con 1 adaptador dúplex para fibra SC (2 fibras)

PATENTADO

SMC-LC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engarce doble con 2 adaptadores dúplex LC (4 fibras)

Todos los adaptadores son "universales" para operar con conexiones para fibra multimodo o monomodo. Use (X) para especificar LC adaptador color: en blanco = beige, U = azul Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro (beige)

La conectividad MT-RJ puede lograrse mediante el uso de módulos planos MT-RJ MAX® conjuntamente con los adaptadores MX-SM que están incluidos en todas las cajas SM de montaje en campo

ACCESORIOS SERIE SM

PATENTADO

SM-BLNK-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserto ciego simple para puerto sin uso

MX-SM-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marco adaptador MAX que permite que las cajas SM encajen módulos MAX planos (página 22)

SM-DOOR-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Engarce doble con 2 contrapuertas a resorte

SM2-MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dos imanes para montaje de cajas SM1, SM2 o SM4 Solicite dos SM2-MAG para montaje de cajas SM6

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 80 = marfil claro

ADAPTADORES EN "Y" MODULARES Los adaptadores-Y son “divisores” que convierten una toma de 4 pares en múltiples tomas. Los adaptadores-Y utilizan la clavija UP-2468, patentado por Siemon, el cual permite que los adaptadores puedan utilizarse en tomas de 6 u 8 posiciones. El cuerpo adaptador puede girarse 180° para ver los iconos de colores o la configuración de patillas del adaptador-Y, que están impresas en el lado opuesto. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN YA4-4U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divisor modular 4 vías, T568B YT4-4U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divisor modular 4 vías, T568A YA4-U2-U2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide una toma T568B 4 pares para aplicaciones Token Ring o voz, en cada toma YT4-U2-U2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide una toma T568A 4 pares para aplicaciones Token Ring o voz, en cada toma

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN YT4-E2-U2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide una toma T568A/T568B 4 pares para aplicaciones 10BASE-T, Token Ring o voz YT4-E2-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Divide una toma T568A/T568B 4 pares para aplicaciones 10BASE-T, en cada toma Y-BRIDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Puentea todos los pares de toma. Compatible con cualquier alambrado de toma. Provee una toma adicional de 4 pares con el mismo alambrado

TERA™ Nuevamente, Siemon expande las fronteras del desempeño del cableado de cobre el revolucionario producto totalmente blindado: el conector TERA. Cuando se instala como parte de una solución TERA, ofrece casi el doble del ancho de banda que las especificaciones de categoría 7/clase F. Este ancho de banda extra es fundamental para aplicaciones exigentes como video en banda ancha, con un requisito de frecuencia superior de 862 MHz. Mediante la utilización de un cable simple de 4 pares totalmente blindado (SSTP) pueden operarse aplicaciones de video en banda ancha, datos de alta velocidad y voz. Los cordones de parcheo TERA están disponibles en 1, 2 y 4 pares para soportar múltiples aplicaciones en una sola salida de 4 pares. Las salidas TERA pueden usarse tanto en el área de trabajo como en el cuarto de telecomunicaciones (TR).

Termina cable categoría 7/clase F totalmente blindado (SSTP)

PRODUCTOS BLINDADOS

Identificación del puerto de la clavija mediante fundas en color

OPCIONES DE MONTAJE Las salidas son compatibles con todo el hardware de la serie MAX®

El conector garantiza la terminación apropiada del blindaje del cable

Diseño delgado y compacto que permite a las salidad ser colocadas lado con lado y poder insertarse tanto por el frente como por detrás del faceplate

FÁCIL INSTALACIÓN La herramienta CPT-T reduce el tiempo de preparación y terminación a aproximadamente tres minutos

El diseño de cuadrante blindado aisla completamente los pares, eliminando virtualmente la diafonía

Las tomas incluyen una tapa articulada para prevenir la exposición al polvo y a otros contaminantes

CORDONES DE PARCHEO TERA Los cordones de parcheo TERA están disponibles en 1, 2 y 4 pares para soportar una gran diversidad de aplicaciones

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS BLINDADOS

PATENTADO

TOMA TERA™ 4 PARES Las salidas TERA son la clave del desempeño del TERA. Las salidas aceptan plugs de 1, 2, y 4 pares y permiten terminar cable totalmente blindado categoría 7/clase F. Las salidas TERA pueden usarse tanto en el área de trabajo como en el cuarto de telecomunicaciones.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN T7F-01-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Salida TERA con puerta negra, ícono y funda

HERRAMIENTA DE PREPARACIÓN DE CABLE TERA La herramienta de preparación de cable TERA utiliza un proceso, cuya patente está en trámite, para reducir significativamente el tiempo necesario para la preparación de cable totalmente blindado (SSTP). La herramienta incluye una matriz de inserción con una cuchilla que fueron diseñadas específicamente para desforrar tanto el forro como los blindajes del cable SSTP de 4 pares, sin dañar los conductores. También se incluye una plantilla para la alineación previa de los pares de cable y asegurar la posición apropiada del par durante la terminación.

PART # DESCRIPCIÓN CPT-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Herramienta de preparación TERA. Incluye matriz CPT-DIE-T4 y plantilla de preparación de cable TERA CPT-DIE-T4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matriz de repuesto para cable SSTP 4 pares

CORDONES DE PARCHEO TERA

PATENTADO

Libere el poder y la flexibilidad de su cableado TERA con una variedad de cordones de parcheo TERA diseñados para atender a sus exigencias de ancho de banda actuales y futuras. Están disponibles ambos tipos de opciones de cordón, TERA a TERA y TERA a clavija modular. La modularidad de clavijas de 1 y 2 pares permite el servicio de múltiples aplicaciones desde una sola toma.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN T4-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamble de cable de 4 pares TERA a TERA compatible categoría 7, chaqueta marfil, funda de color T4A-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamble de cable LS0H de 4 pares TERA a plug modular MC® 6 blindado compatible categoría 6, chaqueta marfil, funda de color, T568B T4T-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamble de cable LS0H de 4 pares TERA a plug modular MC6 blindado compatible categoría 6, chaqueta marfil, funda de color, T568A T2E2-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamble de cable LS0H de 2 pares TERA a plug modular MC5 blindado compatible categoría 5e, chaqueta marfil, funda de color, 10BASE-T T2UT-(XX)M-B(XX)L.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamble de cable LS0H de 2 pares TERA a plug modular MC5 blindado compatible categoría 5e, chaqueta marfil, funda de color, Token Ring T1U1-(XX)M-B(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamble de cable LS0H de 1 par TERA a plug modular USOC de 6 posiciones, chaqueta marfil, funda de color, Voz

Use las primeras (XX) para especificar la longitud: 01 = 1 m (3.28 ft), 02 = 2 m (6.56 ft), 03 = 3 m (9.84 ft), 05 = 5 m (16.4 ft) Use las segundas (XX) para especificar el color de la funda: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Nota: No se recomienda la terminación en campo de patch cords con plug modulares y no son considerados para la garantía TERA.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

MÓDULOS APANTALLADOS MAX® 5E Y MAX 6

PATENTADO

Los módulos apantallados MAX 5e exceden las especificaciones para componentes de las categorías 5e y 6 al mismo tiempo que cumplen con las normas industriales sobre eficacia de blindaje. Los módulos pueden terminar cables ScTP o SSTP totalmente blindado. La terminación es rápida y fácil — la preparación del cable junto con la terminación del módulo puede completarse en menos de 2 minutos.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MX5-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular apantallado MAX 5e, alambrado T568A/B MX5-FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano apantallado MAX 5e, alambrado T568A/B MX5-KS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo keystone apantallado MAX 5e, alambrado T568A/B MX6-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo angular apantallado MAX 6, alambrado T568A/B MX6-FS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo plano apantallado MAX 6, alambrado T568A/B MX6-KS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Módulo keystone apantallado MAX 6, alambrado T568A/B

Los módulos incluyen un ícono rojo y uno azul. Nota: La versión keystone está diseñada para su integración con varios productos de montaje internacional y no es compatible con hardware de montaje MAX. Los módulos apantallados MAX 5e y MAX 6 exigen un panel de conexión TERA™-MAX para aplicación de cableado en el cuarto de telecomunicaciones. Para módulos planos o angulados, la puerta puede solicitarse separadamente. Véase la página 24. ¡CONSEJO TÉCNICO! Los módulos apantallados MAX Categoría 5e y 6 sólo pueden adosarse lado a lado en faceplates y adaptadores TERA MAX (ver parte inferior). Use insertos ciegos MAX como espaciadores, en faceplates del área de trabajo (p. ej., se necesitan cuatro MX6-S y dos MX-BL-(XX) para un faceplate MX-FP-S-06-(XX).

CORDONES DE PARCHEO MODULARES MC® 5 Y MC 6 APANTALLADOS

PATENTADO

Los cordones modulares apantallados de Siemon son montados y probados en fábrica utilizando analizadores de red de grado Laboratorio para garantizar que el conjunto es compatible con los enlaces de categoría 5, 5e ó 6. Las clavijas modulares tienen un blindaje total y atienden a las especificaciones FCC CFR 47 parte 68 subparte F, e IEC 60603-7. Los ensambles alambrados T568A/T568B incluyen fundas de colores liberadoras de tensión y se encuentran disponibles en longitudes estándar o por encargo.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MC5S-(XX)M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordón modular multifilar, apantallado, 4 pares, doble terminado, categoría 5e, LS0H, T568A/T568B, forro y fundas del mismo color MC6S-(XX)M-(XX)L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordón modular multifilar, apantallado, 4 pares, doble terminado, categoría 6, LS0H, T568A/B, forro y fundas del mismo color

Use las 1.as (XX) para especificar la longitud del cordón: 01 = 1 m (3.3 ft), 02 = 2 m (6.6 ft), 03 = 3 m (9.8 ft), 05 = 5 m (16.4 ft) Use las segundas (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Adicione "B" al final del número de parte para empaques a granel de 100 cordones

PRODUCTOS BLINDADOS

MÉNSULAS DE PUESTA A TIERRA Las ménsulas de puesta a tierra proveen un punto de anclaje y de puesta a tierra para los cables blindados (SSTP) o apantallados (ScTP) que se enrutan a la parte trasera de los paneles de conexiones CT®.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN SCTP-GRD-1RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Provee acomodo de cables, 16 cables de puenteo de 102 mm (4 in) y una lengüeta de puesta a tierra para aplicaciones ScTP SCTP-GRD-JMPR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 cables de puenteo de 102 mm (4 in)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ble

PRODUCTOS BLINDADOS

TOMAS MODULARES 5E SM® APANTALLADAS

ati

PATENTADO

Las tomas modulares 5e SM apantalladas proveen una solución de montaje sobre superficies de categoría 5e apantallado cuando se les usa con las cajas de montaje sobre superficies serie Siemon SM..

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN SMC-5-A4-S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apantallado compatible categoría 5e, T568B módulo montaje superficie SMC-5-T4-S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apantallado compatible categoría 5e, T568A módulo montaje superficie

Para las cajas de montaje sobre superficies serie SM consulte la página 28.

PANELES DE PARCHEO HD5® APANTALLADOS

ati

ble

PATENTADO

El panel de parcheo HD5 apantallado provee una solución modular de alta densidad para la terminación de cable de 4 pares apantallados (ScTP). El panel HD5 ScTP proporciona un desempeño de transmisión que cumple las exigencias de la categoría 5e y que atiende completamente a la eficacia de blindaje definida en las normas CENELEC e ISO/IEC. La tecnología de clavijas según Siemon permite el uso de herramienta de impacto multipar para minimizar el tiempo de terminación. La continuidad del blindaje puede lograrse mediante el empleo de una presilla o pala de puesta a tierra. Se proveen dos lengüetas de puesta a tierra (una a cada lado del panel) para la fijación de alambre de tierra 4.115 mm (6 AWG) y conexión de múltiples paneles juntos. Una ménsula opcional para acomodo de cables traseros está disponible para la guía adecuada de los cables que llegan y que salen de la parte trasera del panel. Dispone de acomodadores de cables y elementos para atenuación de deformaciones en el reverso del panel.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS HD5-S-24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 24 puertos apantallado, alambrado T568A/B. . . . . . . . . . . . 1

¡CONSEJO TÉCNICO! Los paneles CT® con acopladores CT apantallados o los paneles TERA™-MAX® con módulos MAX apantallados también pueden utilizarse para soluciones de parcheo modular. Los paneles incluyen etiquetas de designación, abrazaderas para cables y elementos de montaje. Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in)

PANELES DE PARCHEO TERA-MAX Los patch panels modulares TERA-MAX de 19 pulgadas, proporcionan una solución modular de alta densidad, blindada, de desempeño y fiabilidad sin precedentes. En los paneles TERA-MAX pueden configurarse cualesquier combinaciones de tomas TERA y MAX blindadas. Las lenguetas elásticas y terminales de tierra aseguran que cada salida y cada cable está apropiadamente puesta a tierra para su máxima protección de interferencias externas. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN TM-PNL-16-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel TERA-MAX 16 puertos, color negro, 1 RMS TM-PNL-16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel TERA-MAX 16 puertos, color metálico, 1 RMS TM-PNL-24-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel TERA-MAX 24 puertos, color negro, 1 RMS TM-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel TERA-MAX 24 puertos, color metálico, 1 RMS Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in)

FRONTALES Y ADAPTADORES TERA-MAX Diseñados para mercados donde los sistemas troncales se usan para enrutar cables, los faceplates TERA de 50 mm permiten el montaje de las salidas TERA en un ángulo apropiado para mantener el radio mínimo de curvatura. Los faceplates aceptan ya sea una o dos salidas TERA o MAX apantalladas. Cada faceplate incluye tornillos, placa metálica de montaje, etiquetas de designación y portaetiquetas transparente. Los adaptadores TERA-MAX de 45 mm permiten el montaje de dos módulos TERA o MAX apantallados en una abertura estándar de 45 mm.

W W W

T50-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MX-45-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . .

MX-45-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Faceplate TERA-MAX de 50 mm x 50 mm de dos puertos Use (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 80 = marfil claro, 82 = blanco alpino

Adaptador para faceplate de 45 mm x 45 mm de un puerto

Adaptador para faceplate de 45 mm x 45 mm de dos puertos

S I E M O N

C O M

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 20 = marfil, 25 = blanco brillante, 82 = blanco alpino

PANELES DE PARCHEO 10G 6™ HD® El nivel superior de desempeño del patch panel 10G HD se ha logrado por medio del diseño completamente renovado de circuito impreso, la optimización de la geometría de pines del jack y estrictos procedimientos de inspección y control de calidad. Al usarse en combinación con un patch cord 10G 6 MC® , el resultado es una solución de conexión cruzada con un márgen sobre NEXT típico de 5 dB en todo el rango de frecuencias 1-300 MHz. ¡Combine los patch panels 10G 6 HD, con los nuevos módulos 10G 6 MAX® y los cordones 10G 6 MC para una solución completa de canal con un peor caso de PS ACR mas allá de los 300 MHz y resultados típicos muy por encima de 300 MHz! Este sistema de cableado superior ofrece un desempeño para las redes actuales y soporte para las aplicaciones emergentes Ethernet multigigabit.

300 MHz

¡CONSEJO TÉCNICO! Los paneles de parcheo HD posibilitan cableado universal para ambas aplicaciones, T568A y T568B.

Componente categoría 6 cumple hasta 300 MHz

Desempeño superior para aplicaciones de interconexión, conexión cruzada o puntos de consolidación Las tomas modulares están en conformidad con FCC CFR 47 parte 68 subparte F e IEC 60603-7 y poseen contactos de oro de 50 micropulgadas de espesor

Los paneles anodizados en negro, con cantos redondeados y frente libre de tornillos proporcionan una apariencia agradable y estética

PARCHEO MODULAR

SISTEMA PYRAMID™ DE ENTRADA DE ALAMBRE El sistema Pyramid de entrada de alambre en los bloques S310® separa los conductores pareados, al atar los cables, para reducir el tiempo de instalación.

Terminación por medio de herramientas estándar 110 Compatibilidad retroactiva con patch cords categoría 5e e inferiores

PROTECCIÓN DE CIRCUITOS El alojamiento metálico trasero protege los circuitos impresos.

PANELES DE PARCHEO 10G 6 HD PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS HD6-24U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 24 puertos, cableado T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HD6-48U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 48 puertos, cableado T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

ACOMODADOR DE CABLES INTEGRADO Incluye acomodador trasero de cables para guiar adecuadamente los cables hasta el punto de terminación.

PATENTADO Los paneles incluyen acomodador trasero de cables, porta etiquetas ó íconos, etiquetas de designaciones, abrazaderas para cables y elementos de montaje. Adicione "B" para envases a granel para proyectos de 5 paneles (los acomodadores traseros de cables y los porta etiquetas de íconos no están incluidos y pueden pedirse separadamente). Contacte al Servicio al Cliente sobre otros tamaños de paneles. Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in) W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS HD6-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 16 puertos, alambrado T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

PARCHEO MODULAR

PANELES DE PARCHEO HD® 6

PATENTADO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS HD6-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 96 puertos, alambrado T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

HD6-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 24 puertos, alambrado T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

HD6-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 48 puertos, alambrado T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Los paneles incluyen acomodador trasero de cables, porta etiquetas ó íconos, etiquetas de designaciones, abrazaderas para cables y elementos de montaje. Adicione "B" para envases a granel para proyectos de 5 paneles (los acomodadores traseros de cables y los porta etiquetas de íconos no están incluidos y pueden pedirse separadamente). Contacte al Servicio al Cliente sobre otros tamaños de paneles. Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in)

PANELES DE PARCHEO HD5® PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS HD5-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 24 puertos, alambrado T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

PATENTADO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS HD5-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 96 puertos, alambrado T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

HD5-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 48 puertos, alambrado T568A/B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Los paneles incluyen acomodador trasero de cables, porta etiquetas de íconos, etiquetas de designaciones, abrazaderas para cables y elementos de montaje. Adicione "B" para envases a granel para proyectos de 5 paneles (los acomodadores traseros de cables y los porta etiquetas de íconos no están incluidos y pueden pedirse separadamente). Contacte al Servicio al Cliente sobre otros tamaños de paneles. Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in)

HD 6 12 PUERTOS MONTADO EN SOPORTE S89D

HD5 12 PUERTOS MONTADO EN SOPORTE S89D

HD6-89 es una solución económica para aplicaciones de pequeño porte ideal para readecuar bloques de conexión S66™ dándoles un diseño modular de alto desempeño.

HD5-89 es una solución económica para aplicaciones de pequeño porte ideal para readecuar bloques de conexión S66 dándoles un diseño modular.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN HD6-89D-12. . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 12 puertos HD 6, alambrado T568A/B, montado en soporte S89D altura: 254.0 mm (10.0 in); ancho: 85.9 mm (3.38 in); profundidad: 60.2 mm (2.37 in)

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN HD5-89D-12. . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 12 puertos HD5 alambrado T568A/B, montado en soporte S89D altura: 254.0 mm (10.0 in); ancho: 85.9 mm (3.38 in); profundidad: 47.8 mm (1.88 in)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

ble ati co

NUEVO PATENTADO

PANEL HD5® QUICK-PATCH™ El nuevo panel Siemon HD5 Quick-Patch provee una solución de parcheo, rápida y fácil, de canal categoría 5 para concentradores 10/100BASE-T con conectores de 25 pares. El panel HD5 Quick-Patch incorpora varias características y beneficios en materia de facilidad de manejo, incluso conectores traseros escalonados para permitir el fácil encaminamiento de cable de 25 pares hasta el punto de conexión y un alojamiento metálico trasero que protege los circuitos impresos. El panel anodizado en negro puede montarse directamente en un gabinete o bastidor estándar de 19 pulgadas con los elementos de montaje inclusos. Las porta etiquetas/íconos y etiquetas de designaciones están incluidas.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN HD5-QP-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 48 puertos 10/100BASE-T (Pines activos 1, 2, 3 y 6 solamente), cuatro conectores de 25 pares (hembra), 2 RMS Los paneles incluyen porta etiquetas/íconos, etiquetas de designaciones y elementos de montaje. Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in)

PANELES DE PARCHEO CT®

PARTE #

DESCRIPCIÓN*

RMS

CANTIDAD MÁXIMA DE ACOPLADORES CT

PARTE #

DESCRIPCIÓN*

RMS

CANTIDAD MÁXIMA DE ACOPLADORES CT

CT-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . panel 16 puertos . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

CT-PNL-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . panel 48 puertos . . . . . . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

CT-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . panel 24 puertos . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

CT-PNL-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . panel 64 puertos . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

CT-PNL-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . panel 32 puertos . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

PARCHEO MODULAR

¡CONSEJO TÉCNICO! Flat couplers are recommended for patch panel applications

CT-PNL-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . panel 96 puertos . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

* Número de puertos al configurarse con acopladores CT de dos puertos Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in) Contacte con Servicio al Cliente para otros tamaños de paneles

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PARCHEO MODULAR

PANELES DE PARCHEO MAX®

PATENTADO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN* RMS MX-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 16 puertos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

MX-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 24 puertos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

MX-PNL-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel 48 puertos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Los paneles incluyen acomodador trasero de cables, porta etiquetas de íconos, etiquetas de designaciones, abrazaderas para cables y elementos de montaje. Los Paneles MAX no son compatibles con los módulos blindados MAX. Para aplicaciones blindadas utilice el panel TERA™-MAX (consulte la página 33). *Cantidad de puertos cuando se configuran con módulos MAX de puerto simple (i.e. la cantidad de puertos puede duplicarse si se usan los módulos MT-RJ o LC). Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in)

ACCESORIOS OPTATIVOS

MX-PNL-LBL4* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hojas de etiquetas imprimibles a láser para panel MAX de 16 puertos

MX-PNL-LBL6*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hojas de etiquetas imprimibles a láser para panel MAX de 24 y 48 puertos

*Visite nuestro sitio en web o contacte a nuestro Departamento de Apoyo Técnico con respecto al software para etiquetado.

PANELES DE RELLENO Los paneles de relleno son ideales para las instalaciones en las cuales existen racks con espacios abiertos o para expansión que deben cubrirse. Los paneles tienen un lado en blanco y en el otro presentan el logotipo Siemon.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN PNL-BLNK-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panel de relleno para bastidor de 19 pulgadas

Use (X) para especificar la altura del panel correspondiente al espacio de montaje en el bastidor: 1 = 1 RMS; 2 = 2 RMS; 3 = 3 RMS; 4 = 4 RMS Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in) W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SISTEMAS DE BASTIDORES SIEMON RS

SISTEMA DE RACK RS2 DE SIEMON

SISTEMA DE RACK RS RS-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sistema de bastidor de aluminio para acomodar cables, 2.1 m (7 ft) x 19 pulgadas Incluye elementos de montaje en bastidor, 10 acomodadores de cable de alta capacidad, 10 acomodadores de cable de cinturón, pasacables y lengüeta para tierra Añada "S" para acero alto: 2.1 m (7 ft); ancho: 609.6 mm (24 in); profundidad: 457.2 mm (18 in)

RS2-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sistema de bastidor de aluminio, mejorado, para acomodar cables, 2.1 m (7 ft) x 19 pulgadas Incluye elementos de montaje en bastidor, acomodadores verticales de cable, con tapas y lengüeta para tierra Añada "S" para acero alto: 2.1 m (7 ft); ancho: 685.8 mm (27 in); profundidad: 457.2 mm (18 in)

RACKS RS DE PROFUNDIDAD EXTENDIDA RS-07E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sistema Rack de organización de cable de aluminio de 7 ft x 19 in (2.1 m x 482 mm) con profundidad extra (0.37 m [14.5 in]). Incluye hardware de ensamblaje de rack, organizadores de cable de 19" de alta capacidad, 10 acomodadores de gancho y bucle, terminal de tierra y pasacables. alto: 2.1 m (7 ft) ancho: 609.6 mm (24 in) profundidad: 609.5 mm (24 in)

MEJORADO

RACK-IT™ Los soportes de montaje vertical Rack-IT de Siemon pueden montarse en pared para acomodar un amplio rango de equipos de montaje en rack. Sus ranuras permiten el montaje de equipo de red de varias profundidades HC-RI-5 ............Soporte de montaje vertical, 5 RMS Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in)

ACCESORIOS RS-CNL3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canal organizador vertical de cable, de 2.1 m x 76 mm (7 ft x 3 in) para montaje entre bastidores de 76 mm (3 in) de profundidad (incluye hardware de montaje)

RS-CNL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Canal organizador vertical de cable, de 2.1 m x 152 mm (7 ft x 6 in) para montaje entre bastidores de 152 mm (6 in) de profundidad (incluye hardware de montaje)

RS-CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja con 10 organizadores de cables de gran capacidad, para el frente del bastidor

RS-CNL-MGR. . . . . . . . . . Caja con 10 retenedores de canal, para RS-CNL y RS-CNL3

RS-VCM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caja con 10 organizadores de cables, gancho y lazo de un cuarto de vuelta (cierre por torsión) [incluye organizador de 457.2 mm (18 in) negro]

ACOMODADORES DE CABLES S110®/S210® 19 PULGADAS Cuando se les instala en un panel de 19 pulgadas montado en bastidor, los acomodadores de cables S110/S210 proporcionan una solución superior y económica para alojar cables en un espacio reducido. Sus tamaños 1 RMS y 2 RMS juntamente con su gran capacidad proveen un excelente acomodo de cables para montajes en bastidores de 19 pulgadas.

BASTIDORES Y ACOMODADORES DE CABLES

MONTAJE EN PARED ACOMODADORES DE CABLE, CON PATAS

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS CAPACIDAD* S110-RWM-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 19 in S110/S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . 50 acomodador de cable, con tapas, negro S110-RWM-02 . . . . . . . . . . . 19 in S110/S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. . . . . . . . . . 50 acomodador de cable, con tapas, blanco PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS CAPACIDAD* S110-RWM2-01. . . . . . . . . . . 19 in S110/S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . 130 acomodador de cable, con tapas, negro S110-RWM2-02. . . . . . . . . . . 19 in S110/S210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . 130 acomodador de cable, con tapas, blanco

S110A1RMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RMS blanco, acomodador de cables, con patas

S110A1RMS-01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 RMS negro, acomodador de cables, con patas

Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in) * Cantidad aproximada de cables de 4 pares UTP

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

BASTIDORES Y ACOMODADORES DE CABLES

ACOMODADORES DE CABLES SERIE WM PARA MONTAJE EN BASTIDOR Los acomodadores de cables de la serie WM proporcionan mayor resistencia y no interfieren con los paneles montados arriba o abajo. Son una solución popular y económica para proveer una manera pulcra y simple de lograr la organización de pequeños a grandes manojos de cables y de cordones de parcheo.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS CAPACITY* WM-143-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acomodador de cable con 5 ganchos S143 . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . 50 WM-144-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acomodador de cable con 5 ganchos S144 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . 100 WM-145-5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acomodador de cable con 5 ganchos S145 . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . 200 Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in) * Cantidad aproximada de cables de 4 pares UTP

WM-143-5

WM-144-5

¡CONSEJO TÉCNICO! Se recomiendan los acomodadores WM de cables entre cada panel de parcheo, y en las partes superior e inferior, para los paneles de mayor capacidad.

WM-145-5

GANCHOS DE CABLES El diseño de los ganchos de cables está caracterizado por su integridad estructural y aspecto elegante. Estos ganchos de cables son ideales para el enrutamiento de pequeñas a grandes cantidades de cables. Su constitución de plástico durable los hace ideales para cualquier aplicación.

PARTE # ALTURA ANCHO PROFUNDIDAD CAPAC.* S143 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 mm (1.73 in) . . . . . . . . . . 38 mm (1.50 in) . . . . . . . . . . . 89 mm (3.35 in). . . . . . . 50 S144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 mm (3.43 in) . . . . . . . . . . 57 mm (2.25 in) . . . . . . . . . . . 74 mm (2.90 in). . . . . . . 100 S145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 mm (3.43 in) . . . . . . . . . . 57 mm (2.25 in) . . . . . . . . . . . 125 mm (4.93 in). . . . . . . 200 S146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151 mm (5.95 in) . . . . . . . . . . 63 mm (2.5 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 mm (5.15 in). . . . . . . 300 S147 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 mm (10.00 in) . . . . . . . . . 63 mm (2.5 in) . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 mm (5.15 in). . . . . . . 500

S143

S144

S145

* Cantidad aproximada de cables de 4 pares UTP

S146

S147

ACOMODADOR POSTERIOR PLANO PARA CABLES Siemon ofrece productos para acomodar cables posteriores que abarcan una amplia gama de tamaños de bastidores y de métodos de enrutamiento de cables. Los acomodadores de cables montados en bastidor proporcionan puntos de anclaje que atenúan las deformaciones y organizan los cables horizontales que se enrutan en la parte posterior de un panel de parcheo. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN WM-BK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acomodador de cable posterior con tornillos para montaje y tuercas hexagonales

El WM-BK puede montarse en la parte trasera de un bastidor de 19 pulgadas, de dos lados, o puede montarse en la parte frontal de un bastidor de 19 pulgadas, de dos lados, utilizando los mismos tornillos que sostienen el panel de parcheo al bastidor, mediante las tuercas hexagonales provistas.

ACOMODADORES DE GANCHO Y CINTURÓN REUTILIZABLES PARA CABLES Estos acomodadores de cables son simples pero muy eficaces al utilizarlos para juntar cables. Para acomodar diferentes tamaños de haces, se encuentran disponibles en longitudes de 152 mm (6 in), 305 mm (12 in) o 457 mm (18 in). Se les puede aflojar y retirar con facilidad para trabajar en el cable y, después, ajustar e reinstalar cuando se reagrupe a los cables. La tensión ajustable previene condiciones de "sobre cinchado". Un orificio de montaje en cada acomodador de gancho y cinturón permite el montaje del mismo en una pared o bastidor.

PATENTADO Los acomodadores envolventes de cables ofrecen una manera simplificada de organizar los cables... sujételos en un manojo y, después, envuélvalos formando un haz único.

PARTE# DESCRIPCIÓN VCM-25-(XXX)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bobina de 25 cinturones de cable VCM-250-(XXX)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bobina de 250 cinturones de cable

Los acomodadores de gancho y cinturón para cables poseen un cabezal grande para reforzar su resistencia y que incluye un agujero de montaje para fijarlo en una pared o bastidor.

Use (XXX) para especificar la longitud: 060 = 152 mm (6 in), sujeta manojos de cable de 51 mm (2 in) de diámetro; 120 = 305 mm (12 in), sujeta manojos de cable de 102 mm (4 in) de diámetro; 180 = 457 mm (18 in), sujeta manojos de cable de 153 mm (6 in) de diámetro Use (X) para especificar el color: 1 = negro, 2 = blanco, 3 = rojo, 4 = gris, 5 = amarillo, 6 = azul, 7 = verde, 9 = anaranjado W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CORDONES MODULARES 10G 6™ MC® Utilizando el cordón modular Siemon 10G 6 MC, nuevamente mejorado, podrá constatar el increíble desempeño ofrecido por los nuevos componentes 10G 6 HD® y 10G 6 MAX®, de Siemon. Usados en conjunto, su sistema funcionará más allá de las especificaciones de la categoría 6, aún a 300 MHz. Los cordones de parcheo 10G 6 MC están diseñados especialmente para mantener la posición de los conductores a fin de obtener un balance óptimo del par con el punto de terminación. Los refuerzos para aliviar las curvas proveen una protección extra del cable y un máximo desempeño de transmisión. Para obtener el desempeño 300 MHz de los productos Siemon 10G 6 deben utilizarse cordones modulares 10G 6 MC.

Las fundas moldeadas liberadoras de tensión aceptan íconos ovalados como codificación adicional en colores de los extremos de las clavijas modulares

300 MHz

Componente categoría 6 cumple hasta 300 MHz

AISLANTE METÁLICO El aislante metálico patentado blinda los pares dentro del plug para un desempeño óptimo de NEXT

El cordón multifilar 10G 6 excede enormemente las especificaciones de desempeño de categoría 6

FUNDAS MOLDEADAS LIBERADORAS DE TENSIÓN La funda de 37 mm (1.4 in) asegura un excelente limitador de curvatura para el desempeño crítico de categoría 6

CORDONES DE PARCHEO, CLAVIJAS Y CABLES

EXCEDE LA CATEGORÍA 6 Las pruebas de transmisión al 100% aseguran un margen por encima de las especificaciones de categoría 6 para cordones modulares y garantiza un desempeño óptimo en campo

El apretado a 360 grados provee un excelente liberador de tensión plug a cable sin causar deformación de pares

El aislante de cordón multificar interno provee una flexibilidad de vida extendida y mantiene una geometría de pares ideal

Las clavijas modulares proporcionan una prolongada resistencia contra la corrosión por humedad, temperaturas extremadas y contaminantes atmosféricos

CORDONES MODULARES 10G 6 MC

Las fundas deslizables proveen un empaque para proteger al plug de zafarse al jalarse a través de canales u organizadores

PATENTADO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MC6-8-T-(XX)-(XX)U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordón modular multifilar 10G 6 MC, doble terminado, 4 pares, T568A/B, mismo color en forro y fundas Use las primeras (XX) para especificar longitud: 03 = 0.9 m (3 ft), 05 = 1.5 m (5 ft), 07 = 2.1 m (7 ft), 10 = 3.1 m (10 ft), 15 = 4.6 m (15 ft), 20 = 6.1 m (20 ft) Use las segundas (XX) para especificar color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde

Adicione “B” para paquetes de 100 cordones modulares, a granel, para proyectos. Por encargo, también se dispone de versiones LSOH. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicios al Cliente para obtener más informaciones.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CORDONES DE PARCHEO, CLAVIJAS Y CABLES

CORDONES MODULARES MC® 6

PATENTADO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MC6-8-T-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cordón modular multifilar MC 6, doble terminado, 4 pares, T568A/B, mismo color en forro y fundas

Use las primeras (XX) para especificar longitud: 03 = 0.9 m (3 ft), 05 = 1.5 m (5 ft), 07 = 2.1 m (7 ft), 10 = 3.1 m (10 ft), 15 = 4.6 m (15 ft), 20 = 6.1 m (20 ft) Use las 2.as (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Adicione "B" para envases a granel de 100 cordones modulares, para proyectos. Las longitudes especiales están disponibles por encargo. Las versiones LS0H también están disponibles por encargo. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente para obtener más informaciones.

CORDONES MODULARES SÓLIDOS IC6 TERMINADOS EN UNA SOLA PUNTA

PATENTADO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN IC6-8A-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC6, un extremo terminado, no-plenum, cordón modular sólido 4 pares, T568B, forro gris con refuerzo colorido IC6-8T-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IC6, un extremo terminado, no-plenum, cordón modular sólido 4 pares, T568A, forro gris con refuerzo colorido

Use las primeras (XX) para especificar la longitud del cordón: 10 = 3.1 m (10 ft), 20 = 6.1 m (20 ft), 30 = 9.1 m (30 ft), 40 = 12.2 m (40 ft), 50 = 15.2 m (50 ft), 60 = 18.3 m (60 ft) Use las segundas (XX) para especificar el color de la funda: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Por encargo, se dispone de otras longitudes. Las versiones LSOH también están disponibles por encargo. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicios al Cliente para obtener más informaciones.

CORDONES MODULARES MC 5 CON FUNDA PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doble terminado, cordón multifilar modular 4 pares, forro y funda del mismo color, alambrado T568A/T568B SIN FUNDA PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MC5-8-T-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doble terminado, cordón multifilar modular 4 pares, forro de cordón en color, alambrado T568A/T568B, sin funda MC-BOOT-(XX)-100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Funda de Colores (paquete de 100)

Use las 1.as (XX) para especificar la longitud del cordón: 03 = 0.9 m (3 ft), 05 = 1.5 m (5 ft), 07 = 2.1 m (7 ft), 10 = 3.1 m (10 ft), 15 = 4.6 m (15 ft), 20 = 6.1 m (20 ft) Use las 2.as (XX) para especificar el color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde Adicione "B" para empaques a granel de 100 cordones modulares, para proyectos. Las longitudes especiales están disponibles por encargo. Las versiones LS0H también están disponibles por a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente para obtener más informaciones. Nota: Los productos MAX® 6, CT® 6, y HD®6 son compatibles para menos con nuestros cordones modulares MC 5 (categoría 5e compatibles). Por ejemplo, cuando se utiliza un cordón modular MC 5 en un canal System 6® con módulos MAX 6, Siemon garantiza un desempeño del sistema en la categoría 5e.

CABLES MODULARES IC5 SÓLIDOS CON UN SOLO EXTREMO TERMINADO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN IC5-8T-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamblaje de cable sólido IC5, con un solo extremo terminado, 4 pares, T568A, forro gris, CMR, sin funda IC5-8A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamblaje de cable sólido IC5, con un solo extremo terminado, 4 pares, T568B, forro gris, CMR, sin funda IC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamblaje de cable sólido IC5, con un solo extremo terminado, 4 pares, T568A, forro azul, CMR, con funda de color IC5-8A-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamblaje de cable sólido IC5, con un solo extremo terminado, 4 pares, T568B, forro azul, CMR, con funda de color Use las 1.as (XX) para especificar la longitud del cordón: 10 = 3.1 m (10 ft), 20 = 6.1 m (20 ft), 30 = 9.1 m (30 ft), 40 = 12.2 m (40 ft), 50 = 15.2 m (50 ft), 60 = 18.3 m (60 ft) Use las 2.as (XX) para especificar el color: 02 = blanco, 06 = azul Las longitudes especiales están disponibles por encargo. Las versiones LS0H también están disponibles por encargo. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente para obtener más informaciones.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M PA N Y

PATENTADO

CLAVIJAS DE PARCHEO S210®

La tecnología de Siemon ofrece el sistema de conexión más avanzado del mundo. Las clavijas de parcheo Siemon S210 utilizan un aislante de par interno, compensación par a par y contactos estratificados para mejorar el desempeño de diafonía, dando como resultado que el acoplamiento de la clavija con el bloque de conexión excedan enormemente los requisitos de transmisión para hardware de conexión categoría 6. El alojamiento externo es transparente para poder observar los conductores y verificar sus posiciones en cada extremo. Cada clavija incluye polarización para asegurar una orientación apropiada de la clavija al momento de conectarse a los bloques de conexión S210. Las clavijas S210 pueden terminarse en campo en conductores de 23 a 26 AWG (0.40 mm a 0.51 mm) sólidos o multifilares.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S210P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clavija S210 categoría 6 de 4 pares para terminación en campo S210P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 pares, terminado en campo, clavija de parcheo S210 S210P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 par, terminado en campo, clavija de parcheo S210

S210P4

S210P2

S210P1

PATENTADO

ENSAMBLES DE CABLES S210 Los ensambles de cables S210 utilizan las clavijas Siemon S210P4 para realizar conexiones fiables, con facilidad, entre campos de terminación S210. Estos ensambles usan cable multifilar de alto desempeño que excede las especificaciones para la categoría 6 y su transmisión es 100% comprobada en fábrica para garantizar que su funcionamiento es compatible con las especificaciones de canal categoría 6. Para la codificación en colores de las clavijas S210 se ofrecen íconos en varios colores.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S210P4-P4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamblaje de cable multifilar ategoría 6, 4 pares, doble terminado S210

Use las 1.as (XX) para especificar la longitud del cordón: 03 = 0.9 m (3 ft), 05 = 1.5 m (5 ft), 07 = 2.1 m (7 ft), 10 = 3.1 m (10 ft), 15 = 4.6 m (15 ft), 20 = 6.1 m (20 ft) Las longitudes especiales están disponibles por encargo. Las versiones LS0H también están disponibles por encargo. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente para obtener más informaciones.

PATENTADO

ENSAMBLES DE CABLE S210 A MC® Los ensamble de cable S210 a MC combinan las clavijas Siemon más recientes y de desempeño superior para parcheo de equipos de red a bloques de conexión S210 o para dar acceso de prueba a campos de terminación S210. La combinación de clavijas, cable de alto desempeño y la prueba de transmisión 100% en fábrica garantizan que el funcionamiento es compatible con las especificaciones de canalpara la categoría 6. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S210P4A4-(XX)-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamblaje de cable multifilar categoría 6 , 4 pares, S210P4 a MC 6, alambrado T568B, forro y funda del mismo color S210P4T4-(XX)-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamblaje de cable multifilar categoría 6, 4 pares, S210P4 a MC 6 , alambrado T568A, forro y funda del mismo color S210P2E2-(XX)-B(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ensamblaje de cable multifilar 10BASE-T , 4 pares, S210P2 a MC 6, forro blanco y funda de color

Use las 1.as (XX) para especificar la longitud del cordón: 03 = 0.9 m (3 ft), 05 = 1.5 m (5 ft), 07 = 2.1 m (7 ft), 10 = 3.1 m (10 ft), 15 = 4.6 m (15 ft), 20 = 6.1 m (20 ft) Use las segundas (XX) para especificar color: 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde

CORDONES DE PARCHEO, CLAVIJAS Y CABLES

Las longitudes especiales están disponibles por encargo. Las versiones LS0H también están disponibles por encargo. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente para obtener más informaciones.

CLAVIJAS DE PARCHEO S110®

MEJORADO PATENTADO

Primeros en su clase, que atienden a la categoría 5e y que pueden terminarse en campo tanto con cable sólido como multifilar, las clavijas de parcheo S110, de 4 pares, emplean un diseño patentado para mejorar el desempeño de diafonía con lo cual el conjunto del clavija con el bloque de conexión excede los requisitos de transmisión de la categoría 5e ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B. S110P4 PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S110P4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e, 4 pares, terminado en campo, clavija de parcheo S110 S110P3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 pares, terminado en campo, clavija de parcheo S110 S110P2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 pares, terminado en campo, clavija de parcheo S110 S110P1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 par, terminado en campo, clavija de parcheo S110 Nota: S110P1 incluye un inserto protector para utilizar con alambre de parcheo de par simple. No se incluyen íconos en color.

S110P1

S110P2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CORDONES DE PARCHEO, CLAVIJAS Y CABLES

ENSAMBLES DE CABLES S110® TERMINADOS EN FÁBRICA

PATENTADO

Los cordones Siemon S110 patentados proporcionan una conexión rápida y simple a los bloques de conexión 110 y se fabrican conforme a los más estrictos estándares de desempeño de transmisión para asegurar su compatibilidad con la categoría 5e. Estos cordones pueden usarse para conexiones entre el equipo de red a bloques de conexión 110 entre bloques 110 o para conectar equipo de prueba a campos 110. Se tienen disponibles iconos de colores para codificar clavijas de 2 y 4 pares. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S110P4-P4-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patch cord S110 categoría 5e, 4 pares, doble terminado S110P2-P2-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patch cord S110, 1 par, doble terminado S110P1-P1-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patch cord S110, 1 par, doble terminado

Use las primeras (XX) para especificar longitud: 03 = 0.9 m (3 ft), 05 = 1.5 m (5 ft), 07 = 2.1 m (7 ft), 10 = 3.1 m (10 ft), 15 = 4.6 m (15 ft), 20 = 6.1 m (20 ft) Las longitudes especiales están disponibles por encargo. Las versiones LS0H también están disponibles por encargo. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente para obtener más informaciones.

ACCESORIOS PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN ICON-OVAL-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 íconos ovalados de colores para clavijas de parcheo S110 de 2 y 3 pares CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 etiquetas íconos de colores para clavijas de parcheo S110 de 4 pares (teléfono en un lado, computadora a la inversa) TAB-XX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 etiquetas rectangulares coloridas para clavijas de parcheo S110 de 4 pares

CT-ICON-(XX)

Use (XX) para especificar el color: 00 = incoloro*, 01 = negro, 02 = blanco, 03 = rojo, 04 = gris, 05 = amarillo, 06 = azul, 07 = verde, 08 = violeta, 09 = anaranjado, 20 = marfil, 60 = marrón, 80 = marfil claro (CT-ICON-(XX) solamente) Adicione "B" para envase a granel de 100 (no disponible para ícono ovalado-XX). *Disponible solamente en TAB-(XX)

ICON-OVAL-(XX) Ya pueden adquirirse etiquetas personalizadas impresas a láser. Consulte a nuestro Departamento de Servicio al Cliente sobre el modo de pedirlas.

PLUG MODULAR Use los plugs modulares para terminar cordones modulares para aplicaciones en el cuarto de telecomunicaciones o en el área de trabajo. Los plugs modulares pueden terminarse en la longitud exacta de cable necesaria para mantener una instalación más nítida y ordenada. El P-8-8 permite la terminación de cable de par trenzado con conductores de 26 a 22 AWG (0.40 mm a 0.51 mm) sólido o multifilar con un diámetro de aislante de conductor de 0.86 mm a 0.99 mm (0.034-0.039 in). Los contactos del plug tienen una chapa de al menos 50 micropulgadas de oro sobre niquel y cumplen con las especificaciones FCC CFR 47 parte 68, subparte F e IEC 60603-7.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN P-8-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plug de 8 posiciones con 8 contactos (compatible con herramientas de apretado Siemon y Tyco)

¡CONSEJO TÉCNICO! Se requieren cordones terminados y probados en fábrica para alcanzar un desempeño de canal consistente categoría 5e o 6. La terminación en campo no se recomienda.

CONECTOR EZ-TWIST® Reduzca dramáticamente el tiempo de terminación de cable coaxial con el nuevo conector EZ-Twist. No se requieren herramientas ni apretado. Para terminarlo, simplemente gire el conector dentro del cable para una conexión segura y de alto desempeño. El conector EZ-Twist elimina las conexiones de atornillado a las salidas. Simplemente presione el conector en la salida para asegurarlo en su lugar y jálelo para retirarlo. Esta característica es ideal para instalaciones de alta densidad donde el espacio es limitado y los conectores convencionales son difíciles de asegurar a las salidas.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN HC-EZ-(X)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conector coax EZ-Twist, bolsa de 50 Use la primera (X) para especificar tipo de cable: 5 = RG59, 6 = RG6 Use la segunda (X) para especificar tipo de blindaje: T = Blindaje triple, Q = Blindaje cuádruple

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SISTEMA DE CONEXIÓN S210® Siemon S210 ofrece el mejor desempeño en bloques de conexión en la industria de las telecomunicaciones. Conocido como el bloque "sigiloso", su desempeño NEXT es tan bueno que es virtualmente invisible al ser usado como punto de consolidación en un canal categoría 6.

Entre cada hilera de bloques de conexión pueden montarse tiras de designaciones con etiquetas de colores intercambiables

Utiliza las mismas técnicas de terminación empleadas para los productos S110® existentes y es compatible con todas las herramientas de terminación S110 de posición única

BARRERAS INTERNAS CONTRA DIAFONÍA Consigue aislamiento del par en 360° para proporcionar un desempeño NEXT superior (13dB de margen NEXT sobre las especificaciones para la categoría 6).

SISTEMA PYRAMID™ DE ENTRADA DE ALAMBRE Separa los conductores pareados al enlazar los cables para simplificar y reducir el tiempo de instalación.

ABERTURAS DE ACCESO PARA CABLES Permiten enrutar los cables a través del fondo del bloque directamente para el punto de terminación.

Patas patentadas que pueden retirarse del bloque antes, durante o después de la instalación, en la versión de 64 pares

Utiliza la misma área de base de cableado que los productos estándar S110 para ser totalmente compatible con las soluciones ya existentes S110 de montaje y acomodación de cables

PANELES DE 19 PULGADAS S210 Y S110 TERMINADOS EN CAMPO

El cable entrante a través de las aberturas de acceso en la base es ocultado por las etiquetas de designaciones

PATENTADO

PRODUCTOS S210 Y S110

PANELES DE 19 PULGADAS S210 TERMINADOS EN CAMPO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS S210DB2-64RFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 pares, 19 in, kit de terminación en campo S210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 S210DB2-128RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 pares, 19 in, kit de terminación en campo S210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 S210DB2-192RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 pares, 19 in, kit de terminación en campo S210. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 PANELES DE 19 PULGADAS S110 TERMINADOS EN CAMPO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN RMS S110D(X)1-100RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 pares, 19 in, kit de terminación en campo S110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 S110D(X)1-200RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 pares, 19 in, kit de terminación en campo S110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 S110D(X)1-300RFT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 pares, 19 in, kit de terminación en campo S110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Use (X) para especificar bloques de conexión: A = 5 pares, B = 4 pares Nota: 1 RMS = 44.5 mm (1.75 in)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS S210 Y S110

KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S210® Y S110®

PATENTADO

Los kits de instalación completos incluyen bloques de cableado con patas separables*, bloques de conexión y portaetiquetas con etiquetas blancas para designaciones.

KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S210 PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S210AB2-64FT*. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 pares, kit de terminación en campo S210 altura: 45.7 mm (1.80 in); ancho: 272 mm (10.71 in); profundidad: 82.8 mm (3.26 in) S210AB2-128FT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 pares, kit de terminación en campo S210 altura: 182.9 mm (7.20 in); ancho: 272 mm (10.71 in); profundidad: 82.8 mm (3.26 in) S210AB2-192FT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 pares, kit de terminación en campo S210 alto: 275 mm (10.81 in); ancho: 272 mm (10.71 in); profundidad: 82.7 mm (3.26 in) *Patas separables solamente en la versión de 64 pares.

KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S110 PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S110A(X)1-50FT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 pares, kit de terminación en campo S110 altura: 45.7 mm (1.80 in); ancho: 272 mm (10.71 in); profundidad: 82.8 mm (3.26 in) S110A(X)2-100FT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 pares, kit de terminación en campo S110 altura: 91.4 mm (3.60 in); ancho: 272 mm (10.71 in); profundidad: 82.8 mm (3.26 in) S110A(X)2-300FT**. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 pares, kit de terminación en campo S110 altura: 274 mm (10.80 in); ancho: 272 mm (10.71 in); profundidad: 82.8 mm (3.26 in) Use (X) para especificar bloques de conexión: A = 5 pares, B = 4 pares ** Patas retirables solamente en las versiones de 50 y 100 pares.

KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S210 Y S110 TOWER®

PATENTADO

KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S210 TOWER PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S210MB2-192FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 pares, kit de terminación en campo S210 Tower altura: 406 mm (16 in); ancho: 216 mm (8.50 in); profundidad: 152 mm (6 in) S210MB2-256FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 pares, kit de terminación en campo S210 Tower altura: 541 mm (21.31 in); ancho: 216 mm (8.50 in); profundidad: 152 mm (6 in) S210MB2-320FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 pares, kit de terminación en campo S210 Tower altura: 676 mm (26.62 in); ancho: 216 mm (8.50 in); profundidad: 152 mm (6 in) KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S110 TOWER PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S110M(X)2-300FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 pares, kit de terminación en campo S110 Tower altura: 406.4 mm (16 in); ancho: 215.9 mm (8.50 in); profundidad: 152.6 mm (6 in) S110M(X)2-400FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 pares, kit de terminación en campo S110 Tower altura: 541.3 mm (21.31 in); ancho: 215.9 mm (8,.0 in); profundidad: 152.6 mm (6 in) S110M(X)2-500FT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 pares, kit de terminación en campo S110 Tower altura: 676.1 mm (26.62 in); ancho: 215.9 mm (8.50 in); profundidad: 152.6 mm (6 in) Use (X) para especificar bloques de conexión: A = 5 pares, B = 4 pares

KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S210 DE MONTAJE VERTICAL

PATENTADO

Estos bloques S210 de 32 o 48 pares pueden montarse en los mismos soportes S89B o S89D para nuestros bloques S66. Los kits de alta densidad de 48 pares brinda un desempeño categoría 6 en el mismo espacio de un bloque S66 estándar. Los kits terminables en campo incluyen bloques de conexión S210, etiquetas designadoras y portaetiquetas. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S210DB1-48FT-89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de terminación en campo de 48 pares S210 en un retenedor tipo 89* S210DB1-32FT-89 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de terminación en campo de 32 pares S210 en un retenedor tipo 89* *Los soportes S89 no están incluidos y pueden ordenarse por separado (véase la página 46).

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PATENTADO

BLOQUE S66M1-50 El bloque S66M1-50 es totalmente compatible con todos los accesorios estándar de la industria y al mismo tiempo provee una solución económica comprobada para la terminación de cables de alto desempeño. La vasta gama de accesorios de montaje permite la instalación del S66M1-50 en casi todos los ambientes.

Desempeño 160 MHz

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S66M1-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 pares, bloque M1-50

SOPORTES PARA BLOQUES S66™

PATENTADO

Todos nuestros soportes están diseñados para crear instalaciones limpias, eficaces y que ocupan poca espacio al utilizarlas junto con los bloques de conexiones S66. Tienen sus extremos abiertos para permitir que los instaladores tiendan el cable antes de encajar un bloque en su lugar. Los soportes están moldeados con termoplástico retardador de llamas.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S89D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soporte para uso con cableado de 4 pares S89B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soporte para uso con cableado de gran cantidad de pares (i.e. 25 pares o más)

S89D

S89B

PATENTADO

CLIPS PARA PUENTEO Estos clips para puenteo, estándar en la industria, se utilizan para conectar clips de terminación adyacentes en los bloques S66. Los clips pueden retirarse fácilmente para aislar y probar los pares entrantes de los pares salientes, y son reutilizables. Están disponibles en aleación de cobre estañado grado A (voz y datos) o de acero inoxidable (voz solamente). CLIPS DE ALEACIÓN DE COBRE ESTAÑADA: SA1-(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . clip de 2 posiciones

CLIPS DE ACERO INOXIDABLE:* SA1-SS-(XXXX). . . . . . . . . clip de 2 posiciones, acero inoxidable *No es recomendado para uso en aplicaciones de datos.

Use (XXXX) para especificar la cantidad; 100 = 100/bolsa, 1000 = 1000/bolsa

PATENTADO

CLIPS DE COLORES PARA PUENTEO Diseñados para encajar en el bloque de conexiones tipo 66M, cada adaptador de encajar contiene dos clips para puenteo SA-1 estándar, por lo cual, al ser instalado, puentea un par completo y no tan solamente un alambre único. Los alojamientos plásticos tienen algún color codificado y sirven para proteger al clip de terminación. Los técnicos pueden probar las líneas, con los clips en sus lugares, utilizando nuestro aparato de prueba en línea TPE.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN SMBC-2-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clip de puenteo TPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aparato de Prueba/Extractor

PRODUCTOS S66 Y DE PROTECCIÓN

Use (X) para especificar el color: 2 = blanco, 3 = rojo, 5 = amarillo, 6 = azul, 7 = verde, 8 = violeta

INDICADOR DE ESTADO DE LÍNEA Este diodo indicador de elemento dual se enchufa directamente en los clips de terminación S66 para proveer el puenteo y una indicación visual del estado de la línea. Permite que el técnico evite la interrupción de una línea activa durante la realización de una prueba en el campo de interconexión. El indicador emite destellos rojos y verdes cuando una línea está llamando, y permanece encendido en rojo o verde (dependiendo desde cuál dirección se observa el diodo fotoemisor) para indicar que la línea está en uso.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN STA-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicador de estado de línea

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS S66 Y DE PROTECCIÓN

TAPAS ABISAGRADAS DURABLES Utilice estas tapas abisagradas durables y ahorrará hasta 90% del costo de un sistema de panel posterior de color — y, con las tapas de colores, el proyectista o el instalador podrá identificar mediante un código de colores los bloques individuales en lugar de trabajar con grupos de cuatro u ocho.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MC4LH-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapa para bloque tipo M450 MC4LH-HP-9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tapa de perfil alto para bloque tipo M450, anaranjado Use (X) para especificar el color: 2 6 = azul, 9 = anaranjado

TAPAS DE ENCAJAR A PRESIÓN Estas económicas tapas de encajar a presión protegen los clips de terminación S66™ al mismo tiempo que permiten visualizar claramente las terminaciones del cableado. Fabricadas con plástico retardador de llamas.

PARTE # MC4

DESCRIPCIÓN M4 X 50

TIRAS DE DESIGNACIONES Las tiras de designaciones se instalan rápida y fácilmente sobre las tiras en abanico de la serie M de bloques S66. Las tiras proporcionan una superficie para etiquetar y están codificadas en colores.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN D10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tira de designaciones blanca, rayada

ETIQUETAS Estas etiquetas adhesivas, rayadas, permite que los técnicos escriban y mantengan la información de circuitos sobre nuestras tapas plásticas de encajar a presión MC4.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MC4-LBL-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Para tapa MC4 (4 X 50 bloque M) numeradas 1-25

PATENTADO

MÓDULO PICO PROTECTOR®

VOLTAJE DE VOLTAJE DE PARTE # RUPTURA CC (±15%) OPERACIÓN (VSO) PM-007 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 volts PM-027 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.0 volts PM-068 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68.0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50.0 volts

VOLTAJE DE VOLTAJE DE PARTE # RUPTURA CC (±15%) OPERACIÓN (VSO) PM-140. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140.0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102.0 volts PM-180. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180.0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131.0 volts PM-230* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230.0 volts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180.0 volts

*Para la protección del equipo que está conectado a líneas de la Oficina Central (voz, fax, módem, etc.), siempre se recomienda el módulo PM-230. Nota: Pueden existir algunas limitaciones en el ancho de banda de frecuencias. Contacte a nuestro Departamento de Apoyo Técnico para obtener más informaciones.

JUEGOS DE PUESTA A TIERRA PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN PG-06. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Juego de 6 pares, incluye placa de tierra de encaje a presión y cuatro puentes de conexión rápida, 203 mm (8 in), terminación hembra

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

STM-8 Y STM-8-S

Los adaptadores para pruebas Siemon S110 de 1, 2, 3 y 4 pares proveen una manera conveniente para probar bloques de conexiones del tipo 110. Estos adaptadores se enchufan directamente en cualquier bloque de conexiones tipo 110 y cuentan con una clavija modular para conexión a equipo de prueba o cordones de parcheo. Debido al diseño de su patilla de contacto retráctil, es el único adaptador de pruebas de estilo 110 que puede adosarse tanto a bloques de conexiones tipo 110 terminados como a los no terminados. Los adaptadores de 2, 3 y 4 pares son adosables por su extremo y están polarizados para prevenir inserciones incorrectas. Los adaptadores de prueba de 4 pares disponen de un área para un ícono de colores (se incluyen un ícono azul y uno rojo) para identificación adicional. El adaptador de 4 pares está disponible en configuraciones de alambrado T568A y T568B, y es compatible en la categoría 5e para prueba de conexiones de red o enlaces de alto desempeño.

TESTAR®

PATENTADO

ble

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN TAP-110-U4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pares, 8 posiciones, adaptador para prueba, alambrado USOC TAP-110-T4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e compatible, 4 pares, 8 posiciones, adaptador para prueba, alambrado T568A TAP-110-A4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Categoría 5e compatible, 4 pares, 8 posiciones, adaptador para prueba, alambrado T568B

ati

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN TAP-110-U1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 par, 6 posiciones, adaptador para prueba, alambrado USOC TAP-110-UT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 pares, 8 posiciones, adaptador para prueba, alambrado Token Ring/USOC TAP-110-U3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 pares, 6 posiciones, adaptador para prueba, alambrado USOC

ati co

PATENTADO

ADAPTADORES PARA PRUEBAS S110®

ble

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN STM-8-S . . . . . . . . Probador de cable trenzado apantallado con maleta de transporte, remoto activo, dos cordones modulares terminados conplug universal, guía de cableado, batería alcalina 9V, instrucciones, y tarjeta de garantía

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN STM-8 . . . . . . . . . . Probador de cable (no blindado, par trenzado) con maleta de transporte, unidad remota "A", dos cordones modulares terminados con clavija universal, guía de alambrado, batería alcalina 9V, instrucciones, y tarjeta de garantía

PATENTADO

TESTAR crea un acceso fácil a los clips de terminación 66 para pruebas. Se enchufa directamente en el bloque S66™, estableciendo una conexión positiva y ofreciendo una clavija modular de 4 pares para enchufar en el equipo de prueba. El cuerpo es de plástico azul moldeado y tiene agarraderas incorporadas para facilitar la manipulación. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN TESTAR-8T-C5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pares, 8 posiciones, TESTAR, alambrado T568A TESTAR-8A-C5. . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pares, 8 posiciones, TESTAR, alambrado T568B

PATENTADO

MODAPT®

HERRAMIENTAS Y PROBADORES

Este adaptador modular permite la prueba en línea de cualquier combinación de clavija/clavija. Incluye dos clavijas de 4 pares más un cordón modular de 152 mm (6 in) terminado con nuestra clavija "universal" de 4 pares para acceder a cualquier clavija de 6 u 8 posiciones. Los conductores individuales están separados por número de terminal y corresponden a ocho haces de prueba separados. El equipo de prueba puede fijarse en el haz de prueba utilizando pinzas de caimán. Para servir como rápida referencia en campo, en el cuerpo del Modapt están impresos los diagramas de alambrado USOC, T568A y T568B. Cuando se lo utiliza con el adaptador Siemon TESTAR, adaptador para prueba S110 y adaptadores para prueba de desconexión S110T el adaptador Modapt puede utilizarse para probar conexiones en los bloques S66M, bloques S110 y bloques de desconexión S110T. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MODAPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptador para prueba, con un cordón modular de 152 mm (6 in) terminado con clavija universal de 4 pares

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

HERRAMIENTAS Y PROBADORES

HERRAMIENTAS MULTIPARES Y S814 DE IMPACTO

PATENTADO

La herramienta de terminación multipar S110®/S210® es una herramienta versátil diseñada para terminar y cortar cable UTP y asentar bloques de conexión. La herramienta de impacto S814 termina alambres en los clips 66 y 110. La herramienta es accionada por resorte y es totalmente ajustable, característica muy útil cuando se trabaja con alambres de espesores diferentes. El montaje en estilo bayoneta permite que se cambien los cabezales rápida y fácilmente, y un compartimiento en el mango aloja un cabezal de repuesto. HERRAMIENTA PARA TERMINACIÓN DE MULTIPARES

HERRAMIENTA DE IMPACTO S814

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S788J4-210 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pares S210‚ herramienta para terminación S788J4B-210. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pares S210‚ lámina de corte, de repuesto, y conjunto de inserción S788JH4-210. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pares S210‚ cabeza para herramienta de impacto, de repuesto, que incluye alojamiento, lámina de corte y conjunto de inserción S788J4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pares S110‚ herramienta para terminación S788J4B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pares S110‚ lámina de corte, de repuesto, y conjunto de inserción S788J4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 pares S110‚ cabeza para herramienta de impacto, de repuesto, que incluye alojamiento, lámina de corte y conjunto de inserción S788J5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 pares S110‚ herramienta para terminación S788J5B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 pares S110‚ lámina de corte, de repuesto, y conjunto de inserción S788J5H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 pares S110‚ cabeza para herramienta de impacto, de repuesto, que incluye alojamiento, lámina de corte y conjunto de inserción

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S814 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cuerpo de la Herramienta, solo S814-66. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cuerpo de la Herramienta con cabezal de terminación 66 S814-110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cuerpo de la Herramienta con cabezal de terminación 110 S81401-66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabezal de terminación 66 S81401-110-88 . . . . . . . . . . . Cabezal de terminación 110

Herramienta de terminación multipar

Herramienta de impacto S814

CI-KIT Y CI-KIT2 El CI-KIT provee todas las herramientas necesarias para las actividades diarias de un técnico en telecomunicaciones. El kit incluye una herramienta de impacto S814 con cabezales de terminación 66 y 110, un lápiz de prueba, tijera de electricista, destornillador pequeño de cabeza plana y una herramienta CPT-WEB para preparación de cables. Estas herramientas están alojadas en una bolsita con presilla, lo que permite que el instalador pueda cortar, desforrar y terminar cables sin necesidad de llevar consigo herramientas sueltas o kit de herramientas mayores. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CI-KIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de herramientas Clip-on con herramienta de impacto S814 (con cabezales de terminación 66 y 110), punta de prueba, tijera de electricista, destornillador pequeño de cabeza plana y una herramienta CPT-WEB CI-POUCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolsita con presilla, para CI-KIT, sola CI-KIT2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Kit de herramientas Clip-on con herramienta de impacto S814 (con cabezales de terminación 66 y 110), punta de prueba, tijera de electricista, destornillador pequeño de cabeza plana y una herramienta AllPrep™ para preparación de cables CI-POUCH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bolsita con presilla, para CI-KIT2, sola

CI-KIT

CI-KIT2

PROTECTOR DE PALMA

PATENTADO

El protector de palma Siemon ha sido diseñado ergonómicamente para proveer una manera segura y conveniente de terminar nuestros acopladores CT® planos o angulares y los módulos MAX®. El protector de palma absorbe el impacto de la terminación al mismo tiempo que sostiene al conector para impedir su movimiento. La tira elástica ajustable permite colocar y retirar fácilmente el protector de palma, ciñéndolo firmemente. El protector de palma también incluye un inserto extraíble, que puede utilizarse para sostener módulos MAX durante la terminación sobre superficies planas. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN PG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protector de palma con inserto MAX PG-MX6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserto de protector de palma para todos los módulos MAX ponchables Nota: El inserto PG-MX6 está incluido con cada paquete estándar de 20 módulos MAX ponchables.

HERRAMIENTA PARA PREPARACIÓN DE CABLES ALLPREP®

PG con PG-MX6

PG-MX6

PATENTADO

La herramienta para preparación de cables AllPrep provee un método simple y eficaz de preparación de cables, coaxial y de par trenzado, para terminación. La herramienta posee dos matrices fiables, codificadas en color, que son intercambiables para cada tipo de medio. El dado coaxial desforra cables coaxiales RG59 y RG6, y el dado para par trenzado desforra una amplia variedad de cables UTP, apantallados y fibras. PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CPT-RGTP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AllPrep herramienta de preparación de cables para cables coaxiales y de par trenzado CPT-DIE-RG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dado para coaxial, de repuesto (negra) CPT-DIE-TP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dado para par trenzado, de repuesto (amarilla) HC-CPT-EXTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . Herramienta de preparación de cable para su uso con conectores EZ-Twist, incluye dados EZ-Twist y UTP Productos relacionados: Herramienta TERA™ para Preparación de Cable, página 31. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

TERA™ SSTP CABLE DE 4 PARES SÓLIDO REDONDO PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN 9T7R4-E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Riser (CMR, CSA FT4), forro azul 9T7P4-E6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), forro azul – Conforme sólo hasta 600 MHz 9T7L4-E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS0H (IEC 332.1), forro violeta

CONFORMIDAD • ISO/IEC Clase F • IEC 61156-5 1ª edición • ISO/IEC requisitos para impedancia de transferencia y atenuación de acoplamiento APLICACIONES • Voz • T1 • 10BASE-T, 100BASE-T, 1000BASE-T • 4/16 Mbps Token Ring • 51/155 Mbps ATM, 100 Mbps TP-PMD • 100VG-AnyLAN CONSTRUCCIÓN DEL CABLE • Cobre sólido desnudo 0.55 mm (23 AWG) • 4 pares (redondo): 8.50 mm (0.33 in) diámetro máximo del forro • Pares blindados individualmente con lámina de aluminio-poliéster • Marcas secuenciales sobre el forro El cable está disponible en bobinas de 305 m (1000 ft), 500 m (1640 ft) y 1000 m (3281 ft). El cable tipo Riser está disponible en bobinas de 305 m (1000 ft). Contacte a su representante local de ventas acerca de la disponibilidad y del plazo de entrega. Los diseños y las especificaciones del cable están sujetos a alteraciones sin aviso previo.

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉCTRICAS Impedancia Característica (No se permite promediación de impedancia)

1-200 MHz: 100 ohms ± 15% 200-900 MHz: 100 ohms ± 25%

Velocidad Nominal de Propagación (NVP)

0.80

DESEMPEÑO DE TRANSMISIÓN Frecuencia (MHz) 1.0 4.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 31.25 62.5 100.0 160.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 550.0 600.0 750.0 900.0 1000.0 1200.0

CABLE

Desempeño Típico 1- 900 MHZ

Máxima* Pérdida de Inserción (dB/100m) 2.0 3.7 5.9 7.4 8.3 10.4 14.9 19.0 24.4 27.5 31.0 34.2 37.2 40.0 47.7 50.1 56.8 63.0 66.9 74.4

2.0 3.7 5.9 7.4 8.3 10.4 14.9 19.0 24.4 27.5 31.0 34.2 37.2 40.0 47.7 50.1 56.8 63.0 66.9 74.4 7% bajo el peor caso

Todo el desempeño se basa en 100 m.

ISO/IEC

Mínimo* NEXT (dB/100m) 78.0 78.0 78.0 78.0 78.0 78.0 75.5 72.4 69.3 67.9 66.4 65.2 64.2 63.4 61.3 60.7 59.3 58.1 57.4 56.2

78.0 78.0 78.0 78.0 78.0 78.0 75.5 72.4 69.3 67.9 66.4 65.2 64.2 63.4 61.3 60.7 59.3 58.1 57.4 56.2 5 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo* PS NEXT (dB/100m) 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 72.5 69.4 66.3 64.9 63.4 62.2 61.2 60.4 58.3 57.7 56.3 55.1 54.4 53.2

75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 75.0 72.5 69.4 66.3 64.9 63.4 62.2 61.2 60.4 58.3 57.7 56.3 55.1 54.4 53.2 7 dB sobre el peor caso

PEOR CASO SIEMON

Mínimo ELFEXT (dB/100m) 94.0 82.0 74.0 69.9 68.0 64.1 58.1 54.0 49.9 48.0 46.0 44.5 43.1 42.0 39.2 38.4 36.5 34.9 34.0 32.4

75.0 75.0 74.0 69.9 68.0 64.1 58.1 54.0 49.9 48.0 46.0 44.5 43.1 42.0 39.2 38.4 36.5 34.9 34.0 32.4 10 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo PS ELFEXT (dB/100m)

Mínima* Pérdida de Retorno (dB/100m)

Máximo Retardo de Propagación (ns/100m)

75.0 75.0 71.0 66.9 65.0 61.1 55.1 51.0 46.9 45.0 43.0 41.5 40.1 39.0 36.2 35.4 33.5 31.9 31.0 29.4

20.0 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.7 18.0 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3

570 552 545 543 542 540 539 538 537 537 536 536 536 536 536 536 535 535 535 535

75.0 75.0 71.0 66.9 65.0 61.1 55.1 51.0 46.9 45.0 43.0 41.5 40.1 39.0 36.2 35.4 33.5 31.9 31.0 29.4 10 dB sobre el peor caso

20.0 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 21.5 18.7 18.7 18.0 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 17.3 1.8 dB sobre el peor caso

512 494 487 485 484 482 481 480 479 479 478 478 478 478 478 478 477 477 477 477 20 ns mejor que el peor caso

Máximo Sesgo de Retardos 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0

20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 5 ns mejor que el peor caso

* Los valores por debajo de 4 MHz son para información únicamente Los valores por encima de 900 MHz son para información únicamente W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABLE

10G 6™ 550 MHz CABLE REDONDO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN 9C6R4-E5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9C6P4-E5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9C6X4-E5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX IEC 332.1), forro gris, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9C6L4-E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LSOH (IEC 332.1), forro violeta, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja

CONFORMIDAD • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición (categoría 6) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 1ª Edición • LS0H:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754, e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR y CSA FT4 • UL CMP y CSA FT6 CONSTRUCCIÓN DEL CABLE • UTP • Cobre sólido desnudo 0.57 mm (0.023 in) (23 AWG) • 6.35 mm (0.25 in) diámetro máximo del forro • Marcas secuenciales sobre el forro • Separador de cruceta central

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉCTRICAS Máxima Resistencia DC (@ 20° C)

9.4 ohms/100m

Impedancia Característica (No se permite promediación de impedancia)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms ± 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms ± 22%

Velocidad Nominal de Propagación (NVP)

0.65

DESEMPEÑO DE TRANSMISIÓN Frecuencia (MHz) 1.0 4.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 31.25 62.5 100.0 160.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 550.0 Desempeño Típico 1-550 MHZ

Máxima Pérdida de Inserción (dB/100m) 2.0 3.8 6.0 7.6 8.5 10.7 15.4 19.8 25.6 29.0 32.8 36.4 39.8 43.0 51.8

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

Mínimo NEXT (dB/100m)

2.0 3.6 5.7 7.2 8.8 10.0 14.3 18.3 23.5 26.4 29.8 32.8 35.7 38.4 45.8

74.3 65.3 59.3 56.2 54.8 51.9 47.4 44.3 41.2 39.8 38.3 37.1 36.1 35.3 33.2

7% bajo el peor caso

81.3 72.3 66.3 63.2 61.8 58.9 54.4 51.3 48.2 46.8 45.3 44.1 43.1 42.3 40.2 5 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo PS NEXT (dB/100m) 72.3 63.3 57.3 54.2 52.8 49.9 45.4 42.3 39.2 37.8 36.3 35.1 34.1 33.3 31.2

79.3 70.3 64.3 61.2 59.8 56.9 52.4 49.3 46.2 44.8 43.3 42.1 41.1 40.3 38.2 7 dB sobre el peor caso

PEOR CASO SIEMON

Mínimo ELFEXT (dB/100m) 67.8 55.8 47.8 43.7 41.8 37.9 31.9 27.8 23.7 21.8 19.8 18.3 16.9 15.8 13.0

73.8 61.7 53.8 49.7 47.7 43.9 37.8 33.8 29.7 27.7 25.8 24.2 22.9 21.7 18.9 10 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo PS ELFEXT (dB/100m)

Mínima Pérdida de Retorno (dB/100m)

Máximo Retardo de Propagación (ns/100m)

64.8 52.8 44.8 40.7 38.8 34.9 28.9 24.8 20.7 18.8 16.8 15.3 13.9 12.8 10.0

20.0 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.7 18.0 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.9 14.9

570 552 545 543 542 540 539 538 537 537 536 536 536 536 536

70.8 58.7 50.8 46.7 44.7 40.9 34.8 30.8 26.7 24.7 22.8 21.2 19.9 18.7 15.9 10 dB sobre el peor caso

20.0 23.6 26.0 26.0 26.0 24.6 22.5 21.1 19.7 19.0 18.3 17.8 17.3 16.9 15.9 1.8 dB sobre el peor caso

550 532 525 523 522 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 516 516 20 ns mejor que el peor caso

Máximo Sesgo de Retardos 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0

35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 5 ns mejor que el peor caso

Todo el desempeño se basa en 100 m.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SYSTEM 6® 300 MHz CABLE REDONDO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN 9C6R4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9C6P4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9C6X4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX IEC 332.1), forro gris, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9C6L4-E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSOH (IEC 332.1), forro violeta, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja CONFORMIDAD • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición (categoría 6) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 1ª Edición • LS0H:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754, e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR y CSA FT4 • UL CMP y CSA FT6 CONSTRUCCIÓN DEL CABLE • UTP • Cobre sólido desnudo 0.5 mm (0.02 in) (24 AWG) • 5.8 mm (0.23 in) diámetro máximo del forro • Marcas secuenciales sobre el forro • Separador de cruceta central

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉCTRICAS Máxima Resistencia DC (@ 20° C)

9.4 ohms/100m

Impedancia Característica (No se permite promediación de impedancia)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms ± 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms ± 22%

Velocidad Nominal de Propagación (NVP)

0.65

DESEMPEÑO DE TRANSMISIÓN Frecuencia (MHz) 1.0 4.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 31.25 62.5 100.0 160.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0

CABLE

Desempeño Típico 1-300 MHZ

Máxima Pérdida de Inserción (dB/100m) 2.0 3.8 6.0 7.6 8.5 10.7 15.4 19.8 25.6 29.0 32.8 36.4 39.4 43.0

2.0 3.7 5.9 7.5 8.4 10.6 15.2 19.6 25.4 28.7 32.6 36.1 36.1 42.6

Mínimo NEXT (dB/100m) 74.3 65.3 59.3 56.2 54.8 51.9 47.4 44.3 41.2 39.8 38.3 37.1 39.1 35.3

7% bajo el peor caso

Todo el desempeño se basa en 100 m.

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

75.3 68.3 62.3 59.2 57.8 54.9 50.4 47.3 44.2 42.8 41.3 40.1 34.1 38.3 5 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo PS NEXT (dB/100m) 72.3 63.3 57.3 54.2 52.8 49.9 45.4 42.3 39.2 37.8 36.3 35.1 34.1 33.3

73.3 64.3 60.3 57.2 55.8 52.9 48.4 45.3 42.2 40.8 39.3 38.1 37.1 36.3 7 dB sobre el peor caso

PEOR CASO SIEMON

Mínimo ELFEXT (dB/100m) 67.8 55.8 47.8 43.7 41.8 37.9 31.9 27.8 23.7 21.8 19.8 18.3 16.9 15.8

70.8 58.8 50.8 46.7 44.8 40.9 34.9 30.8 26.7 24.8 22.8 21.3 19.9 18.8 10 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo PS ELFEXT (dB/100m) 64.8 52.8 44.8 40.7 38.8 34.9 28.9 24.8 20.7 18.8 16.8 15.3 13.9 12.8

68.8 56.8 48.8 44.7 42.8 38.9 32.9 28.8 24.7 22.8 20.8 19.2 17.9 16.8 10 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínima Pérdida de Retorno (dB/100m) 20.0 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 250 21.5 20.1 18.7 18.0 250 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.9

20.0 23.6 26.0 26.0 26.0 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.7 18.0 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.9 1.8 dB sobre el peor caso

Máximo Retardo de Propagación (ns/100m) 570 552 545 543 542 540 539 538 537 537 536 536 536 536

550 532 525 523 522 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 516 20 ns mejor que el peor caso

Máximo Sesgo de Retardos 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0

35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 5 ns mejor que el peor caso

Valores superiores a 300 MHz son informativos únicamente.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABLE

SYSTEM 6® ScTP CABLE REDONDO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN 9A6R4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9A6P4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9A6X4-E3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX IEC 332.1), forro gris, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9A6L4-E3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSOH (IEC 332.1), forro violeta, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja CONFORMIDAD • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición (categoría 6) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 1ª Edición • ISO/IEC requisitos para impedancia de transferencia y atenuación de acoplamiento • LS0H:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754, e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR y CSA FT4 • UL CMP y CSA FT6 CONSTRUCCIÓN DEL CABLE • ScTP • Cobre sólido desnudo 0.5 mm (0.02 in) (24 AWG) • 7.3 mm (0.29 in) diámetro máximo del forro • 1.07 mm (0.042 in) diámetro máximo de aislamiento de conductor • Separador de cruceta central • El blindaje es una cinta de pantalla de aluminio que alberga un cable de 7 filamentos de 0.6 mm (0.024 in) (24 AWG) como alambre de drenado de cobre estañado

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉCTRICAS Máxima Resistencia DC (@ 20° C)

9.4 ohms/100m

Impedancia Característica (No se permite promediación de impedancia)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms ± 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms ± 22%

Velocidad Nominal de Propagación (NVP)

0.65

DESEMPEÑO DE TRANSMISIÓN Frecuencia (MHz) 1.0 4.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 31.25 62.5 100.0 160.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 Desempeño Típico 1-300 MHZ

Máxima Pérdida de Inserción (dB/100m)

Mínimo NEXT (dB/100m)

2.0 3.8 6.0 7.6 8.5 10.7 15.4 19.8 25.6 29.0 32.8 36.4 39.8 43.0

74.3 65.3 59.3 56.2 54.8 51.9 47.4 44.3 41.2 39.8 38.3 37.1 36.1 35.3

2.0 3.7 5.9 7.5 8.4 10.6 15.2 19.6 25.4 28.7 32.6 36.1 39.4 42.6 7% bajo el peor caso

Todo el desempeño se basa en 100 m.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PEOR CASO SIEMON

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

75.3 68.3 62.3 59.2 57.8 54.9 50.4 47.3 44.2 42.8 41.3 40.1 39.1 38.3 5 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo PS NEXT (dB/100m) 72.3 63.3 57.3 54.2 52.8 49.9 45.4 42.3 39.2 37.8 36.3 35.1 34.1 33.3

73.3 64.3 60.3 57.2 55.8 52.9 48.4 45.3 42.2 40.8 39.3 38.1 37.1 36.3 7 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo ELFEXT (dB/100m)

Mínimo PS ELFEXT (dB/100m)

Mínima Pérdida de Retorno (dB/100m)

Máximo Retardo de Propagación (ns/100m)

67.8 55.8 47.8 43.7 41.8 37.9 31.9 27.8 23.7 21.8 19.8 18.3 16.9 15.8

64.8 52.8 44.8 40.7 38.8 34.9 28.9 24.8 20.7 18.8 16.8 15.3 13.9 12.8

20.0 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.7 18.0 250 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.9

570 552 545 543 542 540 539 538 537 537 536 536 536 536

70.8 58.8 50.8 46.7 44.8 40.9 34.9 30.8 26.7 24.8 22.8 21.3 19.9 18.8 10 dB sobre el peor caso

68.8 56.8 48.8 44.7 42.8 38.9 32.9 28.8 24.7 22.8 20.8 19.2 17.9 16.8 10 dB sobre el peor caso

20.0 23.6 26.0 26.0 26.0 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.7 18.0 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.9 1.8 dB sobre el peor caso

550 532 525 523 522 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 516 20 ns mejor que el peor caso

Máximo Sesgo de Retardos 45.0 45.0 45.5 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0

35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 35.0 25.0 25.0 5 ns mejor quel peor caso

Valores superiores a 300 MHz son informativos únicamente.

PREMIUM 5e® CABLE REDONDO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES Y CABLE CATEGORÍA 5 DE 25 PARES CABLE SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN 9C5R4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9C5P4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9C5X4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX IEC 332.1), forro gris, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9C5L4-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .LSOH (IEC 332.1), forro violeta, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja

CABLE SÓLIDO DE 25 PARES PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN 9C5R25-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), Forro Azul 9C5X25-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX, IEC 332.1), Forro Gris 9C5L25-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LS0H (IEC 332.1), Forro Violeta El cable de 25 paresse suministra en bobina de madera

CONFORMIDAD • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición (categoría 5e) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 1ª Edición • LS0H:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754, e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR y CSA FT4 • UL CMP y CSA FT6 CONSTRUCCIÓN DEL CABLE • UTP • 4 pares reunidos junto con un hilo de rasgado • Cobre sólido desnudo 0.5 mm (0.02 in) (24 AWG) • 5.5 mm (0.22 in) diámetro máximo del forro (sólo 4 pares) • 1.0 mm (0.04 in) diámetro máximo de aislamiento de conductor • Marcas secuenciales sobre el forro

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉCTRICAS Máxima Resistencia DC (@ 20° C)

9.4 ohms/100m

Impedancia Característica

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms ± 15%

(No se permite promediación de impedancia)

Velocidad Nominal de Propagación (NVP)

0.65

DESEMPEÑO DE TRANSMISIÓN* Frecuencia (MHz) 1.0 4.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 31.25 62.5 100.0 160.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0

CABLE

Desempeño Típico 1-160 MHZ

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

Máxima Pérdida de Inserción (dB/100m)

Mínimo NEXT (dB/100m)

2.0 4.1 6.5 8.2 9.3 11.7 17.0 22.0 28.6 32.4 36.9 41.0 44.9

65.3 56.3 50.3 47.2 45.8 42.9 38.4 35.3 32.2 30.8 29.3 28.1 27.1

2.0 4.1 6.5 8.2 9.2 11.5 16.4 21.0 26.8 30.2 34.0 37.4 40.7 5% bajo el peor caso

68.3 59.3 53.3 50.2 48.8 45.9 41.4 38.3 35.2 33.8 32.3 31.2 30.2 5 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo PS NEXT (dB/100m) 62.3 53.3 47.3 44.2 42.8 39.9 35.4 32.3 29.2 27.8 26.3 25.1 24.1

66.3 57.3 51.3 48.3 46.8 43.9 39.4 36.3 33.3 31.8 30.3 29.2 28.2 6 dB sobre el peor caso

PEOR CASO SIEMON

Mínimo ELFEXT (dB/100m)

Mínimo PS ELFEXT (dB/100m)

Mínima Pérdida de Retorno (dB/100m)

Máximo Retardo de Propagación (ns/100m)

63.8 51.8 43.8 39.7 37.8 33.9 27.9 23.8 19.7 17.8 15.8 14.3 12.9

60.8 48.8 40.8 36.7 34.8 30.9 24.9 20.8 16.7 14.8 12.8 11.3 9.9

20.0 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.7 18.0 250 17.3 16.8 16.3

569 552 545 543 542 540 538 538 537 536 536 536 536

67.8 55.8 47.8 43.7 41.8 37.9 31.9 27.8 23.7 21.8 19.8 18.2 16.9 10 dB sobre el peor caso

65.8 53.7 45.8 41.7 39.7 35.9 29.8 25.8 21.7 19.7 17.8 16.2 14.9 13 dB sobre el peor caso

Todo el desempeño se basa en 100 m. * Para cable de 4 pares. Contacte al Soporte Técnico de Siemon para especificaciones de cable de 25 pares.

20.0 23.3 25.5 25.5 25.5 24.4 22.7 21.5 19.6 19.0 18.4 17.9 17.4 3.5 dB sobre el peor caso

550 532 525 523 522 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 35 ns mejor que el peor caso

Máximo Sesgo de Retardos 45.0 45.0 45.5 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0

40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 20 ns mejor quel peor caso

Valores superiores a 250 MHz son informativos únicamente.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABLE

PREMIUM 5e® ScTP CABLE REDONDO SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN 9A5R4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9A5P4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), forro azul, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9A5X4-E2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PVC (CMX IEC 332.1), forro gris, (305 m [1000 ft]) caja 9A5L4-E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LSOH (IEC 332.1), forro violeta, (305 m [1000 Fft) caja CONFORMIDAD • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición (categoría 5e) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 1ª Edición • ISO/IEC requisitos para impedancia de transferencia y atenuación de acoplamiento • LS0H:IEC 332: Parte 1, IEC 754, e IEC 1034 • UL CMX • UL CMR y CSA FT4 • UL CMP y CSA FT6 CONSTRUCCIÓN DEL CABLE • ScTP • Cobre sólido desnudo 0.5 mm (0.02 in) (24 AWG) • 6.1 mm (0.24 in) diámetro máximo del forro • 1.0 mm (0.04 in) diámetro máximo de aislamiento de conductor • El blindaje es una cinta de pantalla de aluminio que alberga un cable de 7 filamentos de 0.6 mm (0.024 in) (24 AWG) como alambre de drenado de cobre estañado

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉCTRICAS Máxima Resistencia DC (@ 20° C)

9.4 ohms/100m

Impedancia Característica (No se permite promediación de impedancia)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms ± 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms ± 22%

Velocidad Nominal de Propagación (NVP)

0.65

DESEMPEÑO DE TRANSMISIÓN Frecuencia (MHz) 1.0 4.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 25.0 31.25 62.5 100.0 160.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 Desempeño Típico 1-160 MHZ

Máxima Pérdida de Inserción (dB/100m)

Mínimo NEXT (dB/100m)

2.0 4.1 6.5 8.2 9.3 10.4 11.7 17.0 22.0 28.6 32.4 36.9 41.0 44.9

65.3 56.3 50.3 47.2 45.8 44.3 42.9 38.4 35.3 30.3 30.8 29.3 28.1 27.1

2.0 4.1 6.5 8.2 9.2 10.3 11.5 16.4 21.0 26.8 30.2 34.0 37.4 40.7 5% bajo el peor caso

Todo el desempeño se basa en 100 m.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PEOR CASO SIEMON

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

68.3 59.3 53.3 5.2 48.8 47.3 45.9 41.4 38.3 35.2 33.8 32.3 31.2 30.2 5 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo PS NEXT (dB/100m) 62.3 53.3 47.3 44.2 42.8 41.3 39.9 35.4 32.3 29.2 27.8 26.3 25.1 24.1

66.3 57.3 51.3 48.3 46.8 45.3 43.9 39.4 36.3 33.3 31.8 30.3 29.2 28.2 6 dB sobre el peor caso

Mínimo ELFEXT (dB/100m)

Mínimo PS ELFEXT (dB/100m)

Mínima Pérdida de Retorno (dB/100m)

Máximo Retardo de Propagación (ns/100m)

63.8 51.8 43.8 39.7 37.8 35.8 33.9 27.9 23.8 19.7 17.8 15.8 14.3 12.9

60.8 48.8 40.8 36.7 34.8 32.8 30.9 24.9 20.8 16.7 14.8 12.8 11.3 9.9

20.0 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 24.3 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.7 250 18.0 17.3 16.8 16.3

569 552 545 543 542 541 540 538 538 537 536 536 536 535

67.8 55.8 47.8 43.7 41.8 39.8 37.9 31.9 27.8 23.7 21.8 19.8 18.2 16.9 10 dB sobre el peor caso

65.8 53.7 45.8 41.7 39.7 37.8 35.9 29.8 25.8 21.7 19.7 17.8 16.2 14.9 13 dB sobre el peor caso

20.0 23.3 25.5 25.5 25.5 24.9 24.4 22.7 21.5 19.6 19.0 18.4 17.9 17.4 3.5 dB sobre el peor caso

550 532 525 523 522 521 520 519 518 517 517 516 516 516 35 ns mejor que el peor caso

Máximo Sesgo de Retardos 45.0 45.0 45.5 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0

40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 40.0 25.0 25.0 20 ns mejor quel peor caso

Valores superiores a 250 MHz son informativos únicamente.

SYSTEM 6® ALAMBRE DE CONEXIÓN CRUZADA CABLE SÓLIDO DE 4 PARES PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN CJ6-W4-1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . Alambre para conexión cruzada, 4 pares, 24 AWG (0.5 mm), categoría 6, colores de pares azul/anaranjado/verde/marrón, Bobina de 305 mm (1000 ft)

CONFORMIDAD • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición (categoría 6) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5 1ª Edición CONSTRUCCIÓN DEL CABLE • Cobre sólido desnudo 0.5 mm (0.02 in) (24 AWG) • 1.02 mm (0.04 in) diámetro nominal de aislamiento

CARACTERÍSTICAS ELÉCTRICAS Máxima Resistencia DC (@ 20° C)

9.4 ohms/100m

Impedancia Característica (No se permite promediación de impedancia)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms ± 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms ± 22%

Velocidad Nominal de Propagación (NVP)

0.65

DESEMPEÑO DE TRANSMISIÓN Frecuencia (MHz)

CABLE

1.0 2.0 4.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 31.25 62.5 100.0 125.0 160.0 175.0 200.0 250.0

Máxima Pérdida de Inserción (dB/100m) 2.0 2.7 3.8 6.0 7.6 8.5 10.7 15.4 19.8 22.4 25.6 26.9 29.0 32.8

2.0 2.7 3.8 6.0 7.6 8.5 10.7 15.4 19.8 22.4 25.1 29.9 29.0 32.8

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC

Mínimo NEXT (dB/100m) 74.3 69.8 65.3 59.3 56.2 54.8 51.9 47.4 44.3 42.8 41.2 40.7 39.8 38.3

74.3 69.8 65.3 59.3 56.2 54.8 51.9 47.4 44.3 42.8 41.2 40.7 39.8 38.3

Mínimo PS NEXT (dB/100m) 72.3 67.8 63.3 57.3 54.2 52.8 49.9 45.4 42.3 40.8 39.2 38.7 37.8 36.3

72.3 67.8 63.3 57.3 54.2 52.8 49.9 45.4 42.3 40.8 39.2 38.7 37.8 36.3

PEOR CASO SIEMON

Mínimo ELFEXT (dB/100m) 67.8 61.8 55.8 47.8 43.7 41.8 37.9 31.9 27.8 25.9 23.7 22.9 21.8 19.8

67.8 61.8 55.8 47.8 43.7 41.8 37.9 31.9 27.8 25.9 23.7 22.9 21.8 19.8

Mínimo PS ELFEXT* (dB/100m)

Mínima Pérdida de Retorno (dB/100m)

64.8 58.8 52.8 44.8 40.7 38.8 34.9 28.9 24.8 22.9 20.7 19.9 18.8 16.8

20.0 21.5 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 21.5 20.1 19.4 18.7 18.4 18.0 17.3

64.8 58.8 52.8 44.8 40.7 38.8 34.9 28.9 24.8 22.9 20.7 19.9 18.8 16.8

20.0 21.5 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 21.5 20.1 19.4 18.7 18.4 18.0 17.3

Todo el desempeño se basa en 100 m. * Hasta 2 dB de mejora en diafon'ia puede esperarse de los cables para conexi'on cruzada sin forro.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABLE

INFORMACIÓN TÉCNICA TABLA DE CÓDIGOS DE COLORES PARA CABLES

Conductor de Timbre Cantidad de pares

Conductor de Punta

Color del aislamiento

Banda de identificación

Color del aislamiento

Banda de identificación

Azul

Blanco

Azul

Anaranjado

Blanco

Anaranjado

Verde

Blanco

Verde

Marrón

Blanco

Marrón

Gris

Blanco

Gris

Azul

Rojo

Azul

Anaranjado

Rojo

Anaranjado

Verde

Rojo

Verde

Marrón

Rojo

Marrón

Gris

Rojo

Gris

Azul

Negro

Azul

Anaranjado

Negro

Anaranjado

Verde

Negro

Verde

Marrón

Negro

Marrón

Gris

Negro

Gris

Azul

Amarillo

Azul

Anaranjado

Amarillo

Anaranjado

Verde

Amarillo

Verde

Marrón

Amarillo

Marrón

Gris

Amarillo

Gris

Azul

Violeta

Azul

Anaranjado

Violeta

Anaranjado

Verde

Violeta

Verde

Marrón

Violeta

Marrón

Gris

Violeta

Gris

TABLA DE RESISTENCIA AL FUEGO SEGÚN EL CÓDIGO ELÉCTRICO NACIONAL (NEC) Y SU EQUIVALENTE SEGÚN IEC

Nivel de Resistencia al fuego

Clasificación NEC Artículo 800*

Clasificación IEC equivalente

Cables Plenum (Superior)

CMP/CSA FT6

—

Cables Risers (Varios Pisos)

CMR/CSA FT4

—

Uso general Estados Unidos

IEC 332.3, Categoría C

Uso general Europa

CMX**

IEC 332.1

Cables domésticos Uso restringido (Inferior)

CMX

IEC 332.1

*El Artículo 800 del Código Eléctrico Nacional especifica los niveles de resistencia al fuego para cable de comunicación para instalaciones en predios. **Clasificación NEC equivalente. Notas: 1. Los cables con una clasificación más alta de resistencia al fuego pueden utilizarse para sustituir cables con una clasificación menor de resistencia al fuego (i.e. puede utilizarse un cable plenum para una aplicación riser). 2. Los cables clasificados como CM son especificados por NEC 800-53 para cables que penetran un piso. 3. Los cables LS0H satisfacen a una clasificación NEC de resistencia al fuego CM o CMX. 4. Independientemente de la clasificación de cable indicada, se recomienda la utilización de tecnologías y procedimientos apropiados de combate contra incendios. Siga los códigos nacionales y locales aplicables. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

XGLO™ CABLE DE FIBRA ÓPTICA ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT — DISTRIBUCIÓN NÚMERO DE PARTE

# DE FIBRAS

# DE SUBUNIDADES (FIBRAS/SUBUNIDADES) 9F(XX)B(X)-4A(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unidad Sencilla 9F(XX)B(X)-6B(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unidad Sencilla 9F(XX)B(X)-12D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unidad Sencilla 9F(XX)B(X)-24B(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (6) 9F(XX)B(X)-48D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (12) 9F(XX)B(X)-72D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 (12) 9F(XX)B(X)-96D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 (12) Use (XX) para especificar el modo: 5L = Multimodo 50/125 µm optimizado para láser, 8L = Monomodo optimizado para láser Use (X) para especificar clasificación: 1 = riser, 2 = plenum, 3 = LS0H Use (XXXX) para especificar la longitud en kilómetros, cuatro cifras incluyendo el punto decimal. La última "X" sólo debe ser 0 (cero) o 5 (cinco). Ejemplo P/N: 9F5LB1-12D1.50: (1.5 kilómetros [1500 metros] de cable de 12 fibras ópticas multimodo 50/125 µm tipo riser) Para pedidos menores a 1 Km, la primera "X" debe ser cero (0). Ejemplo P/N: 9F5LB1-12D0.55: (0.55 kilómetros [550 metros] de cable de 12 fibras ópticas multimodo 50/125 µm tipo riser) Diseño y especificaciones de cables están sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso. CONFORMIDAD • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1 • LSOH:VW-1, IEC 1034, IEC 754 • OFNR (UL) y CSA FT4 c(UL) • IEC-60793-2-1 • TIA-492AAAC ancho de banda láser especificaciones DMD • Procedimientos de mediciones de pruebas IEC 60793-2-49 y TIA/EIA 455-220 DMD APLICACIÓN • 10 Gigabit Ethernet • Gigabit Ethernet • 10/100 Ethernet • ATM • FDDI • Video Banda Ancha • Aplicaciones existentes y futuras aprobadas por TIA, EIA, IEEE, ATM Forum, ANSI, IEC o ISO que especifiquen compatibilidad con el tipo de cable instalado ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 CONSTRUCCIÓN DE CABLE • El diseño de tubo apretado reduce los requisitos de diámetro de cable y espacio en ducterías • Flexible y ligero para facilidad de instalación • Forros externos e internos (subunidades) termoplásticos • Refuerzo de fibra aramida • Refuerzo central dieléctrico • Código de colores estandarizados para recubrimientos y subunidades: azul, anaranjado, verde, marrón, gris,blanco, rojo,negro, amarillo, violeta, rosa y agua

CABLE

4 y 6 FIBRAS (6 Fibras exhibidas)

12 FIBRAS

24 FIBRAS

4 y 6 Fibras

12 Fibras

24 Fibras

48 Fibras

72 y 96 Fibras

48 FIBRAS

72 y 96 FIBRAS (72 Fibras exhibidas)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABLE

XGLO™ CABLE DE FIBRA ÓPTICA ETHERNET 10 GIGABIT —DISTRIBUCIÓN ESPECIFICACIONES ÓPTICAS— RISER, PLENUM y LS0H Parámetros Mínimos de Desempeño para Fibra Multimodo 50/125 XGLO Distancia (m)

Distancia (m)

Ancho de Banda Mínimo

Atenuación Máxima

Índice de Grupo

Garantizada para

(MHz-KM)

(dB/KM)

DE REFRACCIÓN

TRANSMISIÓN Gigabit

TRANSMISIÓN 10 Gigabit

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm†

1300 nm††

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm

1300 nm

900

600

300

Laser - 2000 OFL - 1500

Laser - 500 OFL - 500

3.5

1.5

1.483

1.478

† 10GBASE-S †† 10GBASE-LX4

Parámetros Mínimos de Desempeño para Fibra Monomodo XGLO Fibra

Tipo de Cable

Atenuación Máxima

Dispersión Cero

Índice de

(dB/km)

Monomodo

Refracción

1310 nm

1550 nm

Longitud de Onda (nm)

Cuesta (nm2-km)

1310 nm

1550 nm

0.70

1300-1322

<0.092

1.466

1.467

Planta Interna

Diámetro de Núcleo

Diámetro de Corteza

(Micras)

50/125µm

50 ± 3

125 ± 2

Monomodo

8.3 ± 1

125 ± 2

Modo y Tipo de Fibra

Diámetro de

Diámetro de Tubo

Recubrimiento

Apretado

(Micras)

245 ± 5

900 ± 50

<12

ESPECIFICACIONES FÍSICAS— RISER únicamente (para Plenum o LS0H visite nuestro web y consulte nuestra hoja de especificaciones) Diámetro Nominad

Tensión Máxima de Jalado en

de Cable

Newtons (lbs)

Número de

Peso Neto Radio de Curvatura Mínimo

(in.)

Instalación

Largo Plazo

5.21

(0.205)

1000 (225)

290 (65)

Instalación

Largo Plazo

(lbs/1000 ft) 22 (15)

5.72

(0.225)

1000 (225)

290 (65)

27 (18)

6.60

(0.260)

1425 (325)

500 (112)

36.9 (25)

13.97

(0.550)

2670 (600)

600 (135)

16.76

(0.660)

4450 (1000)

1000 (225)

19.94

(0.785)

5560 (1250)

1245 (280)

22.43

(0.883)

7340 (1650)

1670 (375)

Número de Fibras

Resistencia Máxima al Aplastamiento (N/cm)

Ciclos Mínimos de Impacto

500

1000

1485

1000

1500

15 x DIA.

10 x DIA.

140 (94) 193.5 (130)

20 x DIA.

300 (202) 426 (286)

Ciclos Mínimos de

Temperatura de

Resistencia a la

Operación

Almacenaje

Flexión

(° C)

1000

-20/70

-40/70

500

W W W

Máximo kg/km

Fibras

S I E M O N

C O M

LIGHTSYSTEM®. CABLE DE FIBRA ÓPTICA ETHERNET GIGABIT — DISTRIBUCIÓN NÚMERO DE PARTE

# DE FIBRAS

# DE SUBUNIDADES (FIBRAS/SUBUNIDADES) 9F(X)B(Y)-4A(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unidad Sencilla 9F(X)B(Y)-6B(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unidad Sencilla 9F(X)B(Y)-12D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unidad Sencilla 9F(X)B(Y)-24B(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (6) 9F(X)B(Y)-48D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (12) 9F(X)B(Y)-72D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 (12) 9F(X)B(Y)-96D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 (12) Use (X) para especificar el modo: 5 = Multimodo 50/125 µm, 6 = Multimodo 62.5/125 µm, 8 = Monomodo Use (Y) para especificar clasificación: 1 = riser, 2 = plenum, 3 = LS0H Use (XXXX) para especificar la longitud en kilómetros, cuatro cifras incluyendo el punto decimal. La última "X" sólo debe ser 0 (cero) o 5 (cinco). Ejemplo P/N: 9F6B1-96D1.15: (1.15 kilómetros de cable de 96 fibras ópticas, 8 subunidades, multimodo 62.5/125 µm tipo riser) Para pedidos menores a 1 Km, la primera "X" debe ser cero (0). Ejemplo P/N: 9F5B1-12D0.55: (0.55 kilómetros [550 metros] de cable de 12 fibras ópticas multimodo 50/125 µm tipo riser) Diseño y especificaciones de cables están sujetos a cambios sin previo aviso. CONFORMIDAD • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • LSOH:VW-1, IEC 1034, IEC 754 • OFNR (UL) y CSA FT4 c(UL)

CONSTRUCCIÓN DE CABLE • Diseño de tubo apretado para facilidad de conectorización • Flexible y ligero para facilidad de instalación • Forros externos e internos (subunidades) termoplásticos • Refuerzo de fibra aramida • Refuerzo central dieléctrico • Código de colores estandarizados para recubrimientos y subunidades: azul, anaranjado, verde, marrón, gris,blanco, rojo,negro, amarillo, violeta, rosa y agua

CABLE

4 y 6 FIBRAS

12 Fibras

24 Fibras

APLICACIÓN • Gigabit Ethernet • 10/100 Ethernet • ATM • FDDI • Video Banda Ancha • Aplicaciones existentes y futuras aprobadas por TIA, EIA, IEEE, ATM Forum, ANSI, IEC o ISO que especifiquen compatibilidad con el tipo de cable instalado ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 • Backbone Intraedificio • Conductos verticales dentro de edificios • Conductos secos, conduits

(6 Fibras exhibidas)

4 y 6 Fibras

12 FIBRAS

24 FIBRAS

48 Fibras

72 y 69 Fibras

48 FIBRAS

72 y 96 FIBRAS (72 Fibras exhibidas)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABLE

LIGHTSYSTEM® CABLE DE FIBRA ÓPTICA ETHERNET GIGABIT — DISTRIBUCIÓN

ESPECIFICACIONES ÓPTICAS— RISER, PLENUM y LS0H Tipo de Fibra

50/125 62.5/125 Monomodo

Modo y Tipo de Fibra

Longitud de Onda nm

Atenuación Típica (dB/Km)

Atenuación Máxima (dB/Km)

Ancho de Banda Modal Mínimo (MHz-Km)

Distancia (m) Garantizada para* Transmisión Estándar

Estándar

850

2.6

3.5

500

550

1300

0.6

1.5

500

550

850

2.9

3.5

200

275

1300

0.9

1.0

500

550

1310

0.35

1.0

N/A

1550

0.25

1.0

N/A

Diámetro de Núcleo (Micras)

Diámetro de Diámetro de Diámetro de Corteza Recubrimiento Tubo Apretado (Micras) (Micras) (Micras)

50/125mm

50 ± 3

125 ± 2

250 ± 15

62.5/125mm

62.5 ± 3

125 ± 2

250 ± 15

900 ± 50 900 ± 50

Monomodo

8.3 ± 1

125 ± 1

250 ± 15

900 ± 50

ESPECIFICACIONES FÍSICAS— RISER únicamente (para Plenum o LS0H visite nuestro web y consulte nuestra hoja de especificaciones) Diámetro Nominal

Tensión Máxima de Jalado en

de Cable

Newtons (lbs)

Número de

Peso Neto Radio de Curvatura Mínimo

Máximo kg/km

Fibras mm

(in.)

Instalación

Largo Plazo

5.21

(0.205)

1000 (225)

290 (65)

Instalación

Largo Plazo

(lbs/1000 ft) 22 (15)

5.72

(0.225)

1000 (225)

290 (65)

27 (18)

6.60

(0.260)

1425 (325)

500 (112)

36.9 (25)

13.97

(0.550)

2670 (600)

600 (135)

16.76

(0.660)

4450 (1000)

1000 (225)

19.94

(0.785)

5560 (1250)

1245 (280)

22.43

(0.883)

7340 (1650)

1670 (375)

Número de Fibras

Resistencia Máxima al Aplastamiento (N/cm)

Ciclos Mínimos de Impacto

15 x DIA.

10 x DIA.

140 (94) 193.5 (130)

20 x DIA.

300 (202) 426 (286)

Ciclos Mínimos de

Temperatura de

Resistencia a la

Operación

Almacenaje

Flexión

(° C)

1000

-20/70

-40/70

500

4 6

500

1000

1485

1000

1500

* El protocolo pertinente de distancia de transmisión que se señala es Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3:2002. Contacte a su representante de ventas para disponibilidad de cable y tiempo de entrega. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

LIGHTSYSTEM® GIGABIT ETHERNET — CABLE DE INTERCONEXIÓN CABLE DE FIBRA ÓPTICA SÍMPLEX Y DÚPLEX ZIPCORD NÚMERO DE PARTE

# DE FIBRAS

# DE SUBUNIDADES (FIBRAS/SUBUNIDADES) 9F(X)C(X)-1E(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 (1) 9F(X)C(X)-2E(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (1) Use la primera (X) para especificar el modo: 5 = Multimodo 50/125 µm, 6 = Multimodo 62.5/125 µm, 8 = Monomodo Use la segunda (X) para especificar clasificación: 1 = riser, 2 = plenum, 3 = LS0H Use (XXXX) para especificar la longitud en kilómetros, cuatro cifras incluyendo el punto decimal. La última "X" sólo debe ser 0 (cero) o 5 (cinco). Adicione "P" al final de P/N para funcionamiento en grado premium. Ejemplo P/N: 9F6C1-2E1.15P; (Clase Riser, 62.5/125 µm Multimodo, cable Dúplex, 1 fibra/subunidad,1.15 km longitud, grado premium) Los diseños y especificaciones de los cables están sujetos a alteraciones sin aviso previo.

Simplex

CONFORMIDAD RISER • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición • TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • Tipo Comunicaciones OFNP (UL) y CSA FT6 c(UL) PLENUM • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • IEC 754 • Tipo Comunicaciones OFNP (UL) y CSA FT6 c(UL)

Dúplex

LSOH • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2ª Edición • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • IEC 754 • VW-1, IEC 1034

APLICACIONES • Fibra al escritorio • Conexión a equipos de transmisión • Ensamblajes de jumpers para cuartos • Ensamblajes de jumpers para patch panels

CONSTRUCCIÓN DEL CABLE • Chaqueta elástica flexible • Refuerzo de fibras aramidas • Tubo apretado flexible para fácil conectorización

CABLE

Símplex

Dúplex

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

CABLE

LIGHTSYSTEM® GIGABIT ETHERNET — CABLE DE INTERCONEXIÓN CABLE DE FIBRA ÓPTICA SÍMPLEX Y DÚPLEX ZIPCORD ESPECIFICACIONES ÓPTICAS Tipo de Fibra

50/125 62.5/125 Monomodo

Longitud de Onda (nm)

Atenuación Típica (dB/km)

Atenuación Máxima (dB/Km)

Ancho de Banda Modal Mínimo (MHz-km)

Distancia (m) Garantizada para* Transmisión Estándar

Estándar

850

2.6

3.5

500

550

1300

0.6

1.0

500

550

850

2.9

3.5

200

275

1300

0.9

1.0

500

550

1310

0.35

1.0

N/A

1550

0.25

1.0

N/A

ESPECIFICACIONES FÍSICAS — SÍMPLEX Clasificación

Diámetro Nominal de Cable

Tensión Máxima de Jalado en Newtons (lbs)

Radio de Curvatura Mínimo (mm)

(in.)

Instalación

Largo Plazo

Instalación

Largo Plazo

(lbs/1000 ft.)

3.05

(0.120)

400 (90)

133 (30)

9.7 (6.5)

Riser Plenum

8.3 (5.6)

LSOH

Clasificación

9.7 (6.5)

Resistencia Ciclos Máxima al Mínimos de Aplastamiento Impacto (N/cm)

Ciclos Temperatura Temperatura Mínimos de de Operación de Almacenaje Resistencia (° C) (° C) a la Flexión

Riser Plenum

Peso Neto Máximo kg/km

-20/70 750

1000

LSOH

-20/50

-40/70

-20/70

ESPECIFICACIONES FÍSICAS — DÚPLEX Clasificación

Diámetro Nominal de Cable mm (in.)

Tensión Máxima de Jalado en Newtons (lbs)

Radio de Curvatura Mínimo mm (in.)

Peso Neto Máximo kg/km

“X”

“Y”

Instalación

Largo Plazo

Instalación

Largo Plazo

(lbs/1000 ft.)

2.9 (0.114)

6.0 (0.235)

600 (135)

300 (67)

43.4 (1.71)

29.0 (1.14)

17.4 (11.7)

Riser Plenum LSOH

Clasificación

Resistencia Ciclos Máxima al Mínimos de Aplastamiento Impacto (N/cm)

Ciclos Temperatura Temperatura Mínimos de de Operación de Almacenaje Resistencia (° C) (° C) a la Flexión

Riser Plenum

-20/70 750

1000

LSOH

1000

-20/50

-40/70

-20/70

* El protocolo pertinente de distancia de transmisión que se señala es Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3:2002 Contacte a su representante de ventas para disponibilidad de cable y tiempo de entrega. W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

GARANTÍA The Siemon Company ofrece una gama completa de programas de garantía de productos y sistemas: ■

Garantía de 1 (un) año para reparación o sustitución de Herramientas y Medidores

■

Garantía de 5 (cinco) años para reparación o sustitución de cualesquier Productos Siemon (artículos para conexiones en sistemas de cableado) cuando no estén instalados en un Sistema de Cableado Siemon® certificado

■

Una garantía de 20 (veinte) años Siemon Cabling System® (System 5e®, LightSystem®) que cubre garantía de la aplicación, producto, cable, y mano de obra para instalaciones realizadas por un instalador certificado por Siemon (Siemon Certified InstallerSM) en un sistema de cableado registrado, utilizando hardware de conexión Siemon y cable Siemon.

■

Una garantía de 20 (veinte) años Premium Siemon Cabling System® (Premium 5e®, System 6®, 10G 6™, y XGLO™) que cubre garantía de la aplicación, producto, cable, y mano de obra para instalaciones realizadas por un instalador certificado por Siemon (Siemon Certified Installer) en un sistema de cableado registrado, utilizando hardware de conexión Siemon y cable Siemon. Para obtener detalles acerca de las condiciones y limitaciones de las garantías, por favor contacte a su oficina local de ventas de The Siemon Company.

*THE SIEMON COMPANY GARANTÍA DE PRODUCTOS LIMITADA DE 5 (CINCO) AÑOS

GARANTÍA

Siemon garantiza sus productos contra defectos de material y mano de obra. Si algún producto estuviese defectuoso, Siemon, después de recibir del Distribuidor la comunicación por escrito de tal producto no conformante, dentro del periodo de 5 (cinco) años a partir de la fecha de compra, lo sustituirá en el local de embarque original o devolverá el valor del precio de compra - a opción de Siemon - y tendrá el derecho de requerir al Distribuidor que devuelva el producto defectuoso a la fábrica de Siemon, a menos que tal devolución sea imposible. Los remedios aquí ofrecidos serán sólo y exclusivamente para el Comprador, y ninguna declaración o recomendación que no esté aquí mencionada tendrá cualquier fuerza o efecto a menos que lo sea por escrito y refrendada por un responsable autorizado de Siemon. Siemon no garantiza, de forma explícita o implícita, la comerciabilidad o la adecuación para ningún propósito en particular de ningún producto vendido. Siemon no se responsabilizará, bajo ninguna circunstancia, de cualesquier daños incidentales o consecuentes, tanto sean convenidos en contrato, delito civil o de otra manera. Esta garantía se aplica solamente para los productos de cableado que se utilizan para terminar o interconectar cableados de telecomunicaciones. Los términos de las garantías para otras categorías de productos para cableado (por ejemplo, herramientas, equipos de prueba, aparatos de protección, etc.) pueden variar.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

UBICACIONES EN EN EL EL MUNDO MUNDO UBICACIONES América

Europa, Medio Oriente, África

Asia Pacífico

Siemon – USA 27 Siemon Company Drive Watertown, CT 06795-0400 USA Tel: (1) 866 474 1197 Customer Service Direct: Tel: (1) 866 548 5814 Fax: (1) 860 945 4225 info@siemon.com

Siemon – Reino Unido Lansbury Estate 102 Lower Guildford Road Knaphill, Woking Surrey, GU21 2EP, England Tel: (44) (0) 1483 480040 Fax: (44) (0) 1483 480043 info_uk@siemon.com

Siemon – Australia (Sydney) Unit 9/252 Allambie Road Allambie Heights NSW 2100 Sydney, Australia Tel: (61) 2 8977 7500 Fax: (61) 2 8977 7501 info_asiapacific@siemon.com

Siemon – Canadá 90 Allstate Parkway, Ste. 102 Markham, Ontario L3R 6H3 Tel: (1) 905 940 9223 Fax: (1) 905 940 1075 info_canada@siemon.com

Siemon – Francia Paris Axe France ZAC Paris Rive Gauche 118-122 Avenue de France 75013 Paris, France Tel: (33) 1 46 46 11 85 Fax: (33) 1 46 46 10 00 info_france@siemon.com

Siemon – Australia (Brisbane) Level 1 360 St. Pauls Terrace Fortitude Valley QLD 4006 Brisbane, Australia Tel: (61) 07 3854 1200 Fax: (61) 07 3854 1077 info_asiapacific@siemon.com

2121 Ponce de Leon Blvd. Suite 1130 Coral Gables, Florida Tel: (1) 305 446 9150 Fax: (1) 305 446 4586 info_latinamerica@siemon.com

Siemon – Alemania Mainzer Landstrasse 16 60325 Frankfurt Germany Tel: (49) (0) 69 97168 184 Fax: (49) (0) 69 97168 304 info_deutsch@siemon.com

Siemon – Brasil Av. Dr. Chucri Zaidan, 920 - 9º Andar - Morumbi Edifício Market Place - Torre I 04583-904 São Paulo/SP, Brasil Tel: (55) 11 3048 4094 Fax: (55) 11 3048 4099 info_brasil@siemon.com

Siemon – Italia Via Senigallia 18/2 20161 Milano Italy Tel: (39) 02 64 672 209 Fax: (39) 02 64 672 400 info_italia@siemon.com

Siemon – Australia (Melbourne) Unit 6 109 Whitehorse Road Blackburn Vic 3130 Melbourne, Australia Tel: (61) 3 9894 4111 Fax: (61) 3 9894 3446 info_asiapacific@siemon.com

Siemon – Latinoamérica

Siemon – Región Andina Carrerra 71 #50-48 Normandia Bogotá, Colombia Tel: (571) 295 4393 Fax: (571) 416 9305 info_andino@siemon.com

Siemon – México Blvd. Manual Avila Camacho No. 36 Piso 10 Lomas de Chapultepec México, D.F., 11000 México Tel: (52) 55 91 71 16 24 Fax: (52) 55 52 84 22 23 info_mexico@siemon.com

www.siemon.com

Siemon – Sudeste Asiático 46 East Coast Road #07-01/02 East Gate Singapore 428766 Tel: (65) 6345 9119 Fax: (65) 6345 1120 info_singapore@siemon.com

SIEMON CELEBRA 100 AÑOS DE INNOVACIÓN EN TECNOLOGÍA

MINI-C03-SPAN

10G 6™ MAX® MODULES

Combine the 10G 6 MAX jack with Siemon’s new 10G 6 MC® patch cords or 10G 6 BladePatch™ and 10G 6 Patch Panels for a complete 10G 6 channel solution. This superior 10G 6 cabling system delivers unparalleled network performance today and support for multi-gigabit Ethernet applications expected in the future. In addition to superior performance, these outlets feature a variety of user and installer benefits. Its compact design allows up to six modules to fit into a single gang faceplate (twelve in a double gang) for maximum work area density. The angled version provides a gravity fed, low-profile design that improves modular cord management and protection at the work area.

500 MHz Supports 10GBASE-T Applications

Install from either front or rear of faceplate

Terminates with standard 110 termination tools

Icons provided for port identification

T568A and T568B wiring compatible Backward compatible with category 6/class E and lower patch cords

Protective doors (not shown) minimize exposure to dust and other contaminants

Circuit board is tuned and balanced using our patent-pending Phase-Delay™ technology to maximize performance to 500 MHz Pyramid wire entry system on S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time For superior performance, use 10G 6 MC modular cords to unlock the performance of 10G 6 MAX modules

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

WORK AREA

Part of Siemon’s new 10G ip™ Cabling Solution, 10G 6 MAX modules exceed all category 6 component requirements, and also provides channel performance to 500 MHz for support of the future 10GBASE-T application standard. This superior level of performance is achieved via an enhanced circuit board design, optimization of jack pin geometry, and stringent inspection and quality control procedures. The end result is the best performing UTP outlet available.

4 Connector Channel Performance Data for 10G 6™ UTP Solution* Return Loss

0 250 MHz

100 MHz

ELFEXT 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

100 MHz

500 MHz

250 MHz

500 MHz

250 MHz

500 MHz

Insertion Loss 60 50

40 30 20 10

Augmented Cat 6 Limit

Worst Case

†

500 MHz

Typical

Performance from 250-500 MHz based on extrapolated TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Draft 1.3

†

10G 6™ MAX® Modules: 10GMX-(XX)..................Angled module with T568A/B wiring, rear strain relief cap and protective rubber door 10GMX-F(XX) ................Flat module with T568A/B wiring and rear strain relief cap 10GMX-K(XX) ...............Keystone module with T568A/B wiring and rear strain relief cap

10GMX

10GMX-F

10GMX-K

Because we continuously improve our products, Siemon reserves the right to change specifications and availability without prior notice. 10G 6™, 10 G ip™, MC®, BladePatch™, MAX®,TERA®, Pyramid™, S210® and S310® are trademarks of Siemon

The Americas Watertown, CT USA Phone (1) 860 945 4200

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

100 MHz

*4 Connector Channel Performance Data utilizes 10G 6 Patch Panel, 10G 6 MAX® UTP Modules, and 10G 6 MC® UTP Modular Cords or 10G 6 BladePatch™ UTP Patch Cord

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white Add “-D” for color-matching door for flat version Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 modules Angled and flat modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon Door color is clear for angled red, yellow, blue and orange modules, white for flat Note: Keystone version is designed for integration with various international mounting products and is not compatible with MAX mounting hardware For additional resource information: Visit our web site at www.siemon.com For related product information request Spec Sheet(s): 10G 6 Patch Panels (PROD-SS-10GPP) 10G 6 MC Patch Cords (PROD-SS-MC10G6) 10G 6 BladePatch (PROD-SS-BDP) S210® Wiring Block (PROD-SS-210)

Europe/Middle East/Africa Surrey, England Phone (44 ) 0 1932 571771

Asia Pacific Shanghai, P.R. China Phone (86) 21 6390 6778

PROD-SS-MX10G6 Rev. B 2/05

250 MHz

100 MHz

WORK AREA

P R O D U C T I N F O R M AT I O N

10G 6™ MC® MODULAR CORDS

A variety of plug and cable enhancements contribute to the cord’s groundbreaking performance – including a patented cross-pair isolator, extended frequency cable and an innovative 360° crimp which provides excellent plugto-cable strain relief without causing pair deformation. Combine the 10G 6 MC modular cord with Siemon’s new 10G 6 MAX® modules and 10G 6 patch panels for a complete 10G 6 channel solution. This superior 10G 6 cabling system delivers unparalleled network performance today and supports emerging Internet Protocol (IP) like Voice Over IP (VoIP), IP video and future multi-gigabit applications.

500 MHz Supports 10GBASE-T Applications

10G 6 stranded cordage far exceeds category 6 performance specifications

Bend relief boots accept oval icons for additional color coding of modular plug ends

Internal stranded cordage isolator provides extended flex life and maintains ideal pair geometry

High quality modular plugs provide long-term resistance to corrosion, humidity, extreme temperatures and airborne contaminants

360 degree crimp provides excellent plug-to-cable strain relief without causing pair deformation

Slide on boots feature a latch guard to protect plug from snagging when pulling through pathways or cable managers

Patented metallic isolator shields pairs inside plug for optimum NEXT performance 37 mm (1.4 in.) boot ensures excellent bend relief, critical for category 6 and higher performance 100% transmission testing ensures margin well beyond category 6 modular cord specifications and guarantees optimum field performance

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PATCH CORDS, PLUGS & CABLE

Siemon takes patch cord performance to the next level with our new 10G 6 MC modular patch cords. Part of Siemon’s 10G ip™ Cabling Solutions, these next generation cords exceed all category 6 component requirements and provide channel performance to 500 MHz. Each cord is transmission tested using test methodology specified by TIA/EIA for category 6 requirements.

4 Connector Channel Performance Data for 10G 6™ UTP Solution* Return Loss

0 250 MHz

100 MHz

ELFEXT

250 MHz

500 MHz

250 MHz

500 MHz

Insertion Loss 60 50 40 dB

30 20 10

250 MHz

100 MHz

Augmented Cat 6 Limit

Worst Case

†

500 MHz

Typical

Performance from 250-500 MHz based on extrapolated TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10 Draft 1.3

†

100 MHz

*4 Connector Channel Performance Data utilizes 10G 6 Patch Panel, 10G 6 MAX® UTP Modules, and 10G 6 MC® UTP Modular Cords or 10G 6 BladePatch™ UTP Patch Cord

10G 6 MC® Modular Cords: 10GMC-(XX)-(XX) ..........10G 6 MC, double-ended, 4-pair UTP stranded modular cord, T568A/B, color matching jacket/boot Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Add “B” for bulk project pack of 100 modular cords

The Americas Watertown, CT USA Phone (1) 860 945 4200

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

For additional resource information: Visit our web site at www.siemon.com For related product information request Spec Sheet(s): 10G 6 Patch Panels (PROD-SS-10G6PP) 10G 6 MAX® Modules (PROD-SS-MX10G6) S210® Wiring Block (PROD-SS-210)

Europe/Middle East/Africa Surrey, England Phone (44 ) 0 1932 571771

Asia Pacific Shanghai, P.R. China Phone (86) 21 6390 6778

PROD-SS-MC10G6 Rev. B 2/05

45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

100 MHz

500 MHz

PATCH CORDS, PLUGS & CABLE

P R O D U C T I N F O R M AT I O N

Rev 04-2005

Siemon Part Number

9F5E4-6B

Product Description:

6 Fiber, Loose Tube, Single Unit, Armored OSP Cable, 50/125 µm, LightSystem

Product Construction

Six (6) colorized fibers are pulled in with gel and jacket. The components are cabled around a central strength member and secured with a binder, two ripcords are pulled in under the armor.

Strength Member:

Epoxy/glass rod central strength member with aramid fiber yarn or fiberglass overall strength member

Jacket Material:

Flame retardent, UV and moisture-resistant polyethylene

Jacket Color:

Black

Cable O.D. (nominal):

11.8mm (0.466 in.)

Wall Thickness (nominal):

1.14mm (0.045 in.)

Armor Construction:

0.15mm (0.006 in.) Corrugated Steel Tape

Sequential Markings:

Sequential Meter Markings

No. of Fibers:

Fiber Grade:

LightSystem

Fiber Color:

Color Coding per TIA/EIA-598-B

Fiber Type:

50/125 µm Multimode

Core Diameter:

50.0 ± 3.0 µm

Cladding Diameter:

125.0 ± 2.0 µm

Coating Diameter:

245 ± 10 µm

Minimum OFL Bandwidth @ 850nm:

500 MHz●km

Minimum OFL Bandwidth @ 1300nm:

500 MHz●km

Minimum RML Bandwidth @ 850nm:

N/A

Maximum Attenuation @ 850nm:

3.0 dB/km

Maximum Attenuation @ 1300nm:

1.0 dB/km

Gigabit Ethernet @ 850nm:

550 m

Gigabit Ethernet @ 1300nm:

550 m

10 Gigabit Ethernet @ 850nm:

86 m

Approximate Weight: Numerical Aperture: Minimum Bend Radius: Tension Rating:

116.6 kg/1000 km 78.3 lbs/1000 ft. 0.200 ± 0.015 Installation: 20 x O.D. Operation: 10 x O.D. Installation: 2670 N (600 lbs.) Operation: 600 N (200 lbs.)

Operating Temperature:

-40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)

Storage Temperature:

-40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)

Installation Temperature:

-40°F to 158°F (-40°C to 70°C)

Applications:

● ●

Interbuilding voice or data communication backbones Installed in ducts, underground conduit, aerial/lashed or direct buried

Because we are continuously improving our products, Siemon reserves the right to change specifications and availability without prior notice.

LOOSE TUBE

Outside Plant Fiber Optic Cable PART NUMBER & DESCRIPTION: PART NUMBER

Fiber Count

# Of Sub-Units (Fibers/ Sub-Unit)

9F(X)D4-4A(XXXX) 9F(X)D4-6B(XXXX) 9F(X)D4-8C(XXXX) 9F(X)D4-12D(XXXX) 9F(X)D4-16A(XXXX) 9F(X)D4-72D(XXXX) 9F(X)D4-144D(XXXX)

4 6 8 12 16 72 144

Single Unit Single Unit Single Unit Single Unit 4 (4) 6 (12) 12 (12)

FIBER CABLES

Use “X” to specify mode: 5 = 50/125µm Multimode 6 = 62.5/125µm Multimode 8 = Singlemode Use “XXXX” to specify length in kilometers, four characters including a decimal point The last “X” is to be a zero (0) or five (5) only Add “P” to end of P/N for premium grade performance Example P/N: 9F6D4-144D1.15P; (OSP, 62.5/125µm Multimode,144 count, 12 sub-units, 12 fibers/sub-unit, 1.15km length, premium grade) COMPLIANCE • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A • ISO/IEC 11801 APPLICATIONS • Direct burial and underground conduit • Campus, building-to-building interconnections • Aerial • Recommended for optimum ozone, moisture and weather resistance PRODUCT CONSTRUCTION/FEATURES • Thermoplastic inner and outer jackets • Water-blocking, gel-filled loose tubes • Aramid yarn strength members • Dielectric central strength members • High fiber counts • Multiple fibers in single tube isolates the fibers from environmental and mechanical stresses • Industry standard fiber coating colors are as follows: blue, orange, green, brown, slate, white, red, black, yellow, violet, rose and aqua • Buffer tube colors for 4, 6, 8 & 12 fiber counts: natural beige. Buffer tube colors for 16, 72 & 144 fiber counts are in accordance with industry standards, as follows: blue, orange, green, brown, slate, white, red, black, yellow, violet, rose and aqua

4, 6, 8 & 12 FIBER (6 fiber shown)

16 FIBER

4, 6, 8 and 12 FIBER

16 FIBER

72 FIBER

144 FIBER

Fiber cable supplied on wooden reels in lengths per order

72 FIBER

144 FIBER Note: Illustrations not to scale Cable designs and specifications are subject to change without notice.

LOOSE TUBE

Outside Plant Fiber Optic Cable OPTICAL CHARACTERISTICS FIBER TYPE

Typical Attenuation (dB/Km)

Wavelength nm

850 1300 850 1300 1310 1550

50/125 62.5/125 Singlemode

Maximum Attenuation (dB/Km)

Minimum Modal Bandwidth (MHz-Km)

Guaranteed Transmission Distance* (Meters)

Standard

Premium

Standard

Premium

Standard

Premium

Standard

Premium

2.6 0.6 2.9 0.9 0.35 0.25

3.5 1.0 3.5 1.0 0.5 0.5

3.0 1.0 3.5 1.0 0.4 0.3

500 500 200 500 N/A N/A

500 1000 220 1000 N/A N/A

550 550 275 550 N/A N/A

600 600 300 550 N/A N/A

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATION FIBER COUNT

NOMINAL CABLE DIAMETER

MAXIMUM PULLING TENSION NEWTONS (POUNDS)

MINIMUM BEND RADIUS

(LBS/1000 FT.)

(in.)

8.89

(0.350)

58 (39)

8.89

(0.350)

58 (39)

8.89

(0.350)

8.89

(0.350)

9.78

(0.385)

12.57

(0.495)

124 (87)

144

16.71

(0.658)

245 (165)

MIN. CRUSH RESISTANCE (N/CM)

350

875

144

875

Long Term

2670

600

(600)

(135)

Long Term

58 (39) 20 x DIA.

10 x DIA.

77 (52)

MIN. IMPACT CYCLES

MIN. FLEX RESISTANCE CYCLES

OPERATING TEMP (° C)

STORAGE TEMP (° C)

1000

2000

-40/80

MODE AND FIBER TYPE

CORE SIZE (MICRONS)

CLADDING SIZE (MICRONS)

50/125 M/M

50 ± 3

125 ± 2

62.5/125 M/M

62.5 ± 3

125 ± 2

Singlemode

8.3 ± 1

125 ± 1

58 (39)

FIBER CABLES

FIBER COUNT

Installation

NET WEIGHT (MAX) KG/Km

COATING SIZE (MICRONS)

250 ± 15

*The protocol pertinent to the transmission distance as noted is gigabit ethernet per IEEE 802.3Z. Contact your local sales representative for cable availability, and delivery lead time.

Work Area

Modular Patching

FIBER PRODUCTS

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

RACK MOUNT WALL MOUNT FIBER FIBER INTERCONNECT INTERCONNECT CONNECT PANEL MANAGEMENT CENTER (RIC3) CENTER (SWIC3) (FCP3) TRAY (FMT)

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

Product Applications

(pages 5.2 – 5.3)

(pages 5.4 – 5.5)

(page 5.8)

(page 5.9)

High density, low-to-high fiber count, feature-rich rack mounting solution

High density, low-to-medium fiber count, wall mount

High density, low profile, economical enclosure ideal for low-to-medium fiber count, rack mount applications

Standard density low cost enclosure for use with CT® or MAX® patch panels to accommodate fiber or mixed media applications

2-4 RMS

Wall

1 RMS

1-3 RMS

Quick-Pack™ Adapter Plates

Quick-Pack Adapter Plates

CT Couplers or MAX Modules

S210 Products Mounting Space S110 Products Adapters S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in. )

Tools and Testers

Maximum Fiber Capacity

Web Resources

System Design Guide

# Fibers per Quick-Pack

Adapter Options

FCP

SWIC3-M

SWIC3

RIC24

RIC36

RIC48

RIC72

ST, SC, ST/SC, FC

ST, SC, MT-RJ, LC

144

MT-RJ, LC

128

192

MT-RJ, LC

144

192

288

Maximum Splicing Capacity Standards Update

Glossary

Splice Type

FCP

SWIC3-M

SWIC3

RIC24

RIC36

RIC48

RIC72

Fusion

N/A1

144

Mechanical

N/A1

SWIC3-M does not accept splice trays

Index

5.0

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

SECTION CONTENTS

Modular Patching

Rack Mount Interconnect Center (RIC3) . . . . . . . . . . 5.2 Fiber Storage Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3

Racks and Cable Management

Wall Mount Interconnect Center (SWIC3) . . . . 5.4 – 5.5 Mini Wall Mount Interconnect Center (MINI-SWIC3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Flat Quick-Pack™ Adapter Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.6 Pre-Loaded Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.7 Fiber Connect Panel (FCP3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.8

Fiber

Fiber Management Tray (FMT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Compression Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Compression Fitting Conversion Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9 Bend Radius Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.9

Industrial

Splice Trays. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10

1940s

Heat Shrink Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.10

With the onset of World War II and the ensuing post-war years,

ULTRAsplice® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11

Siemon’s reputation for excellence in molded plastics continued

ULTRAsleeve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11

to grow. Contracted by the U.S. Navy, The Siemon Company began

MASSsleeve® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.11 Plug and Play Fiber Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.12 Plug and Play Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.13 Plug and Play Reel and Extender System . . . . . . . . 5.13 LightSystem ® XGLO ™ Jumpers & Pigtails . . . 5.14 – 5.15

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

producing stackable plastic dinnerware that was used onboard ships and submarines. Virtually indestructible, these products carried a lifetime warranty and soon found their way into the general population as the Watertown Dinnerware Collection.

LightSystem Jumpers and Pigtails . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.16

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

ValuLight™ Jumpers and Pigtails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.17 Residential

LC Field-Installable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18 MT-RJ Field-Installable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.18

Tools and Testers

ST and SC Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.19 LightSpeed ® Termination Products . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20 Automated Fiber Polisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.20

Web Resources

Lightspeed ST, SC Fiber Termination Kits . . . . . . . . 5.21 LC Fiber Termination Upgrade Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21

System Design Guide

MT-RJ Fiber Termination Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.21

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.1

Work Area

RACK MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (RIC3)

Modular Patching

The new, improved RIC3 provides the best overall value for fiber management available. The RIC3 enclosure offers superior fiber density (up to 288 fibers in just 4 RMS) without sacrificing fiber protection and accessibility. New features include a fully removable tray, improved labeling, standard front and rear door locks, and single-finger door latch. With better cable management, port identification, fiber accessibility and security, the RIC3 is the best way to protect valuable fiber connections.

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

6 4 2

3 1

S210 Products 1

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

Spring loaded quick-release hinges enable easy removal of front and rear doors for complete access to fiber connections

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Quick-Release Hinges

Rotating Grommets

Rotating grommets facilitate loading and retention of jumpers and fiber while minimizing microbending stress when using the sliding tray

Enhanced Labeling

Label virtually any port configuration with our improved labels. The new labels hang on the front door for improved visibility. When the door is opened, labels flip down letting the technician view the label and corresponding ports together

Improved Door Latching and Locking

New Removable Tray

The RIC3 enables a maximum amount of fibers to be patched or patched and spliced in a 2, 3, and 4 RMS enclosure without compromising the accessibility of fibers/connectors/splices resulting in more efficient utilization of rack space

Complete Access Management tray has a positive stop in both front and rear working positions providing complete access to patch cords/connectors for moving adding, changing, or cleaning of fibers

Maximum Capacity

Superior Design Top and bottom access holes located at the rear of the enclosure allow fibers to be routed between tandem enclosures without having to run fibers outside of the enclosure

Quick-Packâ&#x201E;˘ Adapter Plates

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

5.2

W W W

S I E M O N

The new RIC3 features a single-finger latch on both front and rear doors. Included door locks prevent unauthorized access for enhanced security.

C O M

Never fumble with clumsy nylatches in a densely packed fiber enclosure again! Siemon Quick-Pack Adapter Plates can be inserted or removed with a single-finger for quick and easy access to fiber even in fully loaded enclosures.

Work Area

RACK MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (RIC3) Siemon RIC3 enclosures have been redesigned for enhanced fiber management and ease of use. They are compatible with an array of Siemon flat Quick-Packâ&#x201E;˘ adapter plates, which can be found on page 5.6

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber Part #

Description

Part #

Description

RIC3-24-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 24- to 96-port Rack Mount Interconnect Center, 2 RMS

RIC3-36-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 36- to 144-port Rack Mount Interconnect Center, 2 RMS

height: 86.6mm (3.41 in.); width: 432mm (17.00 in.); depth: 380mm (14.95 in.)

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products

RIC3-48-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 48- to 192-port Rack Mount Interconnect Center, 3 RMS

RIC3-72-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 72- to 288-port Rack Mount Interconnect Center, 4 RMS

height: 133mm (5.25 in.); width: 432mm (17.00 in.); depth: 380mm (14.95 in.)

height: 178mm (7.00 in.); width: 432mm (17.00 in.); depth: 380mm (14.95 in.)

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) Note: All RIC products include laser-printable labels*, cable ties, rack-mounting hardware, and pre-installed fiber management clips *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software. Quick-Pack Adapter Plates page 5.6, Splice Trays page 5.10

Web Resources

FIBER STORAGE CENTER (FSC3)

System Design Guide

The Siemon 3 RMS rack mount Fiber Storage Center (FSC3) is typically utilized in tandem with a Rack Mount Interconnect Center (RIC). Fiber jumpers exiting the front of the RIC are routed into the FSC to store slack. The enhanced design features new bend radius compliant managers which facilitate loading of jumpers and a new single-finger latch on door for easier access. Part #

Tools and Testers

Standards Update

Description

FSC3-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . Fiber Storage Center, 3 RMS

Glossary

height: 133mm (5.25 in.); width: 432mm (17.00 in.); depth: 380mm (14.95 in.) Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.3

Work Area

Modular Patching

WALL MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (SWIC3)

Racks and Cable Management

1 2

Modular Patch Cords and Components

3 4

Fiber

5 Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

The Wall Mount Interconnect Center (SWIC3) is a cost-effective fiber enclosure designed to manage and connect up to 96 fibers. The low-profile, compact design makes it ideal for telecommunications closets or other installation areas where wall space is at a premium. The adapter mounting method is standardized via the utilization of the same snap-in Quick-Packâ&#x201E;˘ adapter plates used in our family of Rack Mount Interconnect Centers (RICs).

Convenient Labeling

Door Options Doors on enclosure and jumper guard can be ordered with independent key lock or latching options

Optional Bracket

Available with QuickPack Adapter Plates Quick-Pack adapter plates are available with SC, ST, FC, MT-RJ, or LC adapters

Fiber Guard Integrated hinged fiber guard provides jumper protection and management

Accessories Dust-proofing grommets included

Optional splice tray bracket available for mounting multiple splice trays (not shown for clarity)

Dual-Level Fiber Managers

Easy Access

Convenient labeling system includes removable clear label holders for storing and protecting fiber documentation

Snap-in Adapter Plates

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

5.4

Doors on enclosures and jumper guard swing open a full 180Â° to provide complete front and side access.

W W W

S I E M O N

Incorporates two independent levels of storage to enable the fiber to be routed at levels that correspond to the adapters.

C O M

Utilizes same Quick-Pack adapter plates as RIC enclosures with integrated latches for snap-in installation and single-finger removal.

Work Area

WALL MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (SWIC3) Part #

Modular Patching

Description

SWIC3-(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 24- to 96-port Wall Mount Interconnect Center. Includes dual-level fiber managers, port designation labels and removable pocket, dust-proofing grommets, strain relief hardware, cable ties, and mounting hardware.

Racks and Cable Management

height: 311mm (12.25 in); width: 311mm (12.25 in); depth: 82.6mm (3.25 in)

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Use 1st (X) to specify type of lock on the enclosure: A = key lock A, C = thumb-turn latch Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white

Part #

Fiber

Industrial

Description

SWIC3G-(X)(X)-(XX). . . . . . 24- to 96-port Wall Mount Interconnect Center with integrated jumper guard. Includes dual-level fiber managers, port designation labels and removable pocket, dust-proofing grommets, strain relief hardware, cable ties, and mounting hardware.

Shielded/ Screened

height: 311mm (12.25 in); width: 406mm (16 in); depth: 82.6mm (3.25 in)

S210 Products

Use 1st (X) to specify type of lock on the enclosure (left) door: A = key lock A, C = thumb-turn latch Use 2nd (X) to specify type of lock on the guard (right) door: A = key lock A, C = thumb-turn latch Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white

Part #

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Description

TRAY-B-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . Bracket for mounting up to 4 mini splice trays to SWIC3 base

Residential

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white Fiber Adapter Plates page 5.6, Splice Trays page 5.10

Tools and Testers

MINI WALL MOUNT INTERCONNECT CENTER (MINI-SWIC3)

Web Resources

The Mini-SWIC3 enables the economical interconnection of fiber in locations where wall space is limited while still providing many of the popular, installer-friendly features of the SWIC3. By accepting two flat Quick-Packâ&#x201E;˘ adapter plates, the MINI-SWIC3 can accommodate from 6â&#x20AC;&#x201C;48 fibers. Also included are dust-proofing grommets to provide protection from contaminants and bend radius guides to ensure proper storage of fiber slack. Part #

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Description

SWIC3-M-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 12- to 48-port Mini Wall Mount Interconnect Center height: 218.4mm (8.6 in.); width: 185.4mm (7.3 in.); depth: 82.6mm (3.25 in.)

Glossary

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.5

Work Area

FLAT QUICK-PACK™ ADAPTER PLATES Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

Siemon Quick-Pack adapter plates feature a patent pending integrated latch, which provides single-finger access to fiber even in fully populated enclosures. Choose from our wide variety of singlemode and multimode plate options. RIC-F-SC6-(XX) . . . . . . .

RIC-F-SC8-(XX) . . . . . . .

RIC-F-SC12-(XX) . . . . . .

3 duplex SC adapters (6 fibers)

4 duplex SC adapters (8 fibers)

6 duplex SC adapters (12 fibers)

RIC-F-SCA6-(XX). . . . . .

RIC-F-SCA8-(XX). . . . . .

RIC-F-SCA12-(XX). . . . .

3 duplex SC/APC adapters (6 fibers)

4 duplex SC/APC adapters (8 fibers)

6 duplex SC/APC adapters (12 fibers)

RIC-F-SA6-(XX) . . . . . . .

RIC-F-SA8-(XX) . . . . . . .

RIC-F-SA12-(XX) . . . . . .

3 duplex ST adapters (6 fibers)

4 duplex ST adapters (8 fibers)

6 duplex ST adapters (12 fibers)

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

Only recommended for push-pull design connectors due to access constraints

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

RIC-F-LC12-(XX) . . . . . . .

RIC-F-LC16-(XX) . . . . . . .

RIC-F-LC24-(XX) . . . . . . .

6 duplex LC adapters (12 fibers), beige adapters

8 duplex LC adapters (16 fibers), beige adapters

12 duplex LC adapters (24 fibers), beige adapters

RIC-F-LCU12-(XX) . . . . . .

RIC-F-LCU16-(XX) . . . . . .

RIC-F-LCU24-(XX) . . . . . .

6 duplex LC adapters (12 fibers), blue adapters

8 duplex LC adapters (16 fibers), blue adapters

12 duplex LC adapters (24 fibers), blue adapters

RIC-F-MT12-(XX). . . . . .

RIC-F-MT16-(XX). . . . . .

RIC-F-MT24-(XX) . . . . . . .

6 duplex MT-RJ adapters (12 fibers)

8 duplex MT-RJ adapters (16 fibers)

12 duplex MT-RJ adapters (24 fibers)

RIC-F-AC6-(XX). . . . . . .

RIC-F-FC6-(XX) . . . . . . .

RIC-F-BLNK-(XX) . . . . . .

3 duplex ST-SC adapters (6 fibers, front side = SC)

6 FC adapters (6 fibers)

Blank adapter plate

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

5.6

RIC-F-FC8-(XX) . . . . . . .

RIC-F-AC8-(XX). . . . . . .

8 FC adapters (8 fibers) (not shown)

4 duplex ST-SC adapters (8 fibers, front side = SC) (not shown)

Use (XX) to specify adapter plate color: 01 = black, 02 = white Each adapter plate with icon pockets includes red, blue, color-matching, and clear icons with paper labels. All adapters are “universal” to support multimode and singlemode.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

PRE-LOADED ENCLOSURES Modular Patching

Need to reduce backbone installation time yet maintain superior quality? Siemon offers the perfect solution with our pre-terminated RIC3 fiber enclosures. Choose from RIC3 enclosures with a variety of connector interfaces pre-loaded with adapters and pigtails for patch and splice applications. All solutions feature Siemon high quality factory fiber terminations, guaranteeing significant margin over TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC specifications. Siemon offers a choice of two grades of fiber for these pre-loaded enclosures – LightSystem® (for Gigabit Ethernet) or LightSystem XGLO™ (10 Gigabit Ethernet). To order pre-loaded RIC3 enclosures, use the part numbering matrix below, or call Customer Service for assistance.

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

R 2 4

J B 0 2 4 J

0 1 Industrial

Shielded/ Screened Enclosure:

Color:

24 = RIC3-24

B = Black

# of Fibers Terminated

Pigtail Length in Meters:

36 = RIC3-36

C = White

for example:

48 = RIC3-48

024 = 24 fibers

72 = RIC3-72

036 = 36 fibers

05 = 5 meters 10 = 10 meters 99 = 99 meters

048 = 48 fibers

Contact Customer Service for lengths 100 meters or greater

144 = 144 fibers

Connector/ Adapter type:

See fiber enclosure capacity chart on page 5.0

Singlemode A = SCUPC

D = LCUPC Multimode J = SC K = ST L = LC

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

B = SCAPC C = STUPC

S210 Products

Cable Type: Tools and Testers

Singlemode A = pigtail, buffered, XGLO B = pigtail, jacketed, XGLO

Web Resources

D = pigtail buffered E = pigtail, jacketed Multimode F = 50/125µm pigtail, buffered, XGLO G = 50/125µm pigtail, jacketed, XGLO

System Design Guide

H = 50/125µm pigtail, buffered I = 50/125µm pigtail, jacketed

Standards Update

J = 62.5/125µm pigtail buffered K = 62.5/125µm pigtail, jacketed

Glossary Splice Trays page 5.10, Heat Shrink Sleeves page 5.10, ULTRAsplice ® page 5.11, ULTRAsleeve ® page 5.11

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

5.7

Work Area

FIBER CONNECT PANEL (FCP3)

Modular Patching

Up to 3 optional splice trays can be mounted to manage and protect either mechanical or fusion splices

Lanced tabs provide convenient cable anchor points for incoming jacketed cables

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Front fiber clips manage up to 36 duplex fiber jumpers (72 fibers total)

Fiber

High Density Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

FCP3 enclosures accommodate up to 72 fibers in only 1 RMS on a 19 inch rack.

Label holder protects fiber jumpers and is readily removable via release of factory-installed snap-latches

Sliding Tray

Rear fiber clips manage cable slack while maintaining minimum bend radius requirements

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Part #

he Fiber Connect Panel (FCP3-DWR and FCP3-RACK) rack mount enclosures economically connect, protect, and manage up to 72 fibers within one Rack Mount Space (RMS). It accepts Siemonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s Quick-Packâ&#x201E;˘ adapter plates with patented single-finger access. The FCP3-DWR makes access to the connections easy via a tray that slides out the front or the rear.

Description

FCP3-DWR . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- to 72-port Fiber Connect Panel with sliding tray. Includes mounting brackets, housing/tray, fiber managers, grommets, label holders, and labels height: 43.2mm (1.7 in.); width: 482.6mm (19.0 in.); depth: 355.6mm (14.0 in.) FCP3-RACK . . . . . . . . . . . 6- to 72-port Fiber Connect Panel with fixed tray. Includes mounting brackets, housing/cover, fiber managers and grommet height: 43.2mm (1.7 in.); width: 482.6mm (19.0 in.); depth: 241.3mm (9.5 in.)

Glossary

Quick-Pack Adapter Plates page 5.6, Compression Fittings page 5.9, Splice Trays page 5.10

Index

5.8

FCP3-RACK

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

FIBER MANAGEMENT TRAY (FMT) Siemon Fiber Management Trays (FMT) are an economical solution for managing fiber cable slack and splice trays. The management trays have been designed to easily retrofit any standard 1, 2, or 3 RMS CT® or MAX® Series Patch Panel and can organize up to 96 fibers. The tray is only 254mm (10 in.) deep, allowing it to readily fit into cabinet enclosures. Each enclosure can accept up to two fiber splice trays. Part #

Description

RMS

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

CT-FMT-16 . . . . . . . Fiber tray for 1 RMS CT or MAX Panels. . . . . . . . . . 1

Modular Patch Cords and Components

CT-FMT-24 . . . . . . . Fiber tray for 2 RMS CT or MAX Panels. . . . . . . . . . 2 CT-FMT-48 . . . . . . . Fiber tray for 3 RMS CT Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in. ) CT Panels pages 2.8 – 2.9, CT Couplers pages 1.14 – 1.19, MAX Panels pages 2.6 – 2.7, MAX Modules pages 1.2 – 1.7, Fiber Splice Trays page 5.10

Industrial

COMPRESSION FITTINGS Compression fittings are utilized as an alternate method for securing cables to FCP3 fiber enclosures. Compression fittings resist water pressure up to 70psi. Acme threads on the body prevent skipping, allowing for faster installations of lock-nuts. Polymer material resists salt water, weak acids, gasoline, alcohol, oil, greases and common solvents. Part #

Fiber

Shielded/ Screened

Description

S210 Products

CF-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compression fitting Use (XX) to specify size: 40 = Used for 24-fiber cable; 51 = Used for 36-fiber cable; 60 = Used for 72-fiber cable; 70 = Used for 96-fiber cable

S110 Products

COMPRESSION FITTING CONVERSION KITS Conversion kits provide a means of securing fiber in Siemon rack and wall mount enclosures. These fittings are liquid tight up to 70 psi water pressure and resist salt water, weak acids, gasoline, alcohol, oil, grease and common solvents. Part #

Description Residential

CF-(XX)-(X)P-(XX). . . . . . . . Compression fitting conversion kit Use first (XX) to specify cable accommodation size: 40 = 24-fiber distribution cable, 51 = 36-fiber distribution cable, 60 = 72-fiber distribution cable (for RIC72 enclosures only) Note: For 96-fiber distribution cable, use Siemon p/n CF-70 compression fitting and mount directly to RIC3 or SWIC3 enclosures. Use (X) to specify enclosure type: R = kit for RIC3 rack mount enclosures, S = kit for SWIC3 and SWIC3G wall mount enclosures. Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white. Rack Mount Interconnect Center pages 5.2 – 5.3, Wall Mount Interconnect Center pages 5.4 – 5.5

CF-(XX)-SP-01

SWIC3 with conversion kit

Tools and Testers

Web Resources CF-(XX)-RP-01

RIC24-F with conversion kit

System Design Guide

Standards Update

BEND RADIUS GUIDE The Bend Radius Guide (BRG2) maintains optimal fiber bend radius and is divided into two sections for independent management of multiple fibers. the BRG2 locks into the bottom of Siemon enclosures via a quarterturn post on the base. Part #

S66 Products/ Protection

Glossary

Description

BRG2-02 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bend radius guide, white

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.9

Work Area

SPLICE TRAYS Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

These aluminum trays can be ordered with either fusion, mechanical or fusion with sleeve splice holders and come with a clear, snap-on polycarbonate cover. The standard tray holds up to 24 splices. For tight areas, a mini-tray is available which accommodates up to 12 splices. Trays can be stacked for high-density applications. The splice trays are compatible with RIC, SWIC, FCP and CT-FMT fiber enclosures.

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber Part #

Description

TRAY-1 . . . . . . . . . . Standard splice tray for up to 24 bare fusion splices

Industrial

TRAY-2 . . . . . . . . . . Standard splice tray for up to 12 ULTRAsplice速 mechanical splices TRAY-3 . . . . . . . . . . Standard splice tray for up to 24 fusion splices with sleeve protection

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products

TRAY-3

TRAY-M-1 . . . . . . . . Mini splice tray for up to 12 bare fusion splices TRAY-M-2 . . . . . . . . Mini splice tray for up to 6 ULTRAsplice mechanical splices TRAY-M-3 . . . . . . . . Mini splice tray for up to 24 fusion splices with sleeve protection TRAY-R-4 . . . . . . . . Mass or ribbon splice tray for up to 144 fibers Compatible with Siemon MASSsleeve速 splice protectors TRAY-R-4A . . . . . . . Mass or ribbon splice tray for up to 144 fibers Compatible with heat shrink sleeves

TRAY-M-2

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Standard Tray Dimensions

Mini Tray Dimensions

height: 103mm (4.07 in.); width: 298mm (11.75 in.); depth: 8.13mm (0.32 in.)

height: 103mm (4.07 in.); width: 179mm (7.06 in.); depth: 8.13mm (0.32 in.)

Mass/Ribbon Tray Dimensions height: 103mm (4.07 in.); width: 179mm (7.06 in.); depth: 8.13mm (0.32 in.)

TRAY-R-4

Web Resources

HEAT SHRINK SLEEVES System Design Guide

Standards Update

Heat shrink sleeves provide a safe and efficient method for protecting fusion splices on either 250 or 900 micron coated fibers. Heat shrink sleeves are threaded on to fibers prior to fusion splicing and then positioned directly over splice and heated via oven or heat gun*. Part #

Description

HT-40. . . . . . . . . . . 40mm (1.57 in.) heat shrink sleeve HT-60. . . . . . . . . . . 60mm (2.36 in.) heat shrink sleeve

Glossary

Technical Tip! For cleave lengths greater than 12mm (0.47 in.), HT-60 sleeves are recommended.

Index

5.10

*Heating times may vary depending on heat source

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

ULTRASPLICE® The patented ULTRAsplice is a high performance, cost effective, mechanical fiber optic splice that is reusable and easy to install for emergency or permanent installations. The splice features a patented glass capillary alignment tube, pre-loaded with index matching gel, to allow inspection of fiber location during installation. Additionally, the collet locking nuts allow users to tune and secure the fiber for optimum alignment and retention. Part #

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Description

US-126 . . . . . . . . . Singlemode, yellow US-128 . . . . . . . . . Multimode, 125 micron, orange By utilizing a VFL during installation, fiber misalignment can easily be detected and corrected ULTRAsplice connectors accommodate fiber buffer sizes from 250-900 microns

When fibers are properly aligned, no light will be visible. This feature allows the installer to obtain a low loss splice quickly and efficiently

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

ULTRASLEEVE® Dramatically reduce fiber splicing installation time and cost with Siemon’s innovative ULTRAsleeve splice cover. Simply load the fused fiber and close the sleeve – no heat shrink, curing, crimping or gluing required. ULTRAsleeve features an acrylic foam tape, which seals the sleeve and protects the splice from damage. The ULTRAsleeve fusion splice protector can accept a range of fiber buffer sizes from 250-900 microns for a single fiber or up to a 4 strand mass or ribbon fiber (singlemode or multimode). Part #

Fiber

S210 Products

S110 Products

Description

FS-40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40mm (1.57 in.) fusion splice protection sleeve

S66 Products/ Protection

FS-60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60mm (2.36 in.) fusion splice protection sleeve FSCT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ULTRAsleeve closing tool length: 90mm (3.5 in.); width: 55mm (2.3 in.); height: 35mm (1.4 in.)

Residential

Technical Tip!

Although the ULTRAsleeve splice protectors can be closed by hand the ULTRAsleeve closing tool is recommended for proper operation.

For cleave lengths greater than 12mm (0.47 in.), FS-60 sleeves are recommended.

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

MASSSLEEVE ® System Design Guide

Standards Update

Description

MFS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40mm (1.57 in.), fusion splice protection cover for fused ribbon fiber MFSCT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MASSsleeve closing tool

The MASSsleeve fusion splice protector can accept 2-12 fused ribbon fiber

MASSsleeve closing tool is required to insure proper installation. The tool’s soft form holder and alignment pins assure accurate alignment

length: 115mm (4.5 in.); width: 51mm (2.0 in.); height: 25mm (1.0 in.)

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.11

Work Area

P L U G A N D P L AY FIBER PRODUCTS

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

Connectivity is completed by plugging 6- or 12-fiber MPO connectors in Plug and Play modules which can be snapped into wall or rack mount enclosures

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Factory termination significantly reduces labor costs during installation and ensures 100% high performance and reliability of the installed system Available in 50/125µm and 62.5/125µm fiber with either ST or SC interfaces

Fiber

Industrial

Pre-Terminated Fiber Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

All fiber connections are factory terminated and tested, enabling faster installation to meet tight deadlines.

Plug and Play Modules No connectors, termination kits or consumables required

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Other options available. Contact Siemon Customer Service for availability.

Modules feature integrated latches for snap-in installation and singlefinger removal.

he Siemon Company offers a solution for labor intensive fiber installation and termination — the fiber Plug and Play system. This system eliminates all of the labor and logistics of standard fiber installations by providing a pre-terminated, pre-tested fiber optic connection system.

Rack Mount Solution

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

5.12

Siemon’s Plug and Play modules can be use any Siemon enclosure (RIC3, SWIC3, FCP3).

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

PLUG AND PLAY MODULES Modular Patching

The Plug and Play modules snap into any Siemon enclosure (RIC3, SWIC3, FCP3) to provide individual port access when transitioning from MPO connectors at the rear. The modules are factory terminated and tested for 100% guaranteed performance with either ST or SC interfaces. Installer-friendly snap-in design ensures fast and reliable installation. Part #

Racks and Cable Management

Description

PP6-SA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . 6-port, multimode ST Plug and Play module

Modular Patch Cords and Components

PP6-SC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . . 6-port, multimode SC Plug and Play module PP12-SC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . 12-port, multimode SC Plug and Play module Use (X) to specify fiber type: 5 = 50/125µm multimode; 6 = 62.5/125µm multimode Use (XX) to specify module color: 01 = black, 02 = white

Fiber 12-Port SC Module

RIC3 Enclosures page 5.3, SWIC3 Enclosures page 5.5, FCP3 Enclosures page 5.8

6-Port ST Module

Industrial

PLUG AND PLAY REEL AND EXTENDER SYSTEM The cable for the Plug and Play system is provided on cable reels with 6- or 12-fiber MPO connectors on each end. The cable is available in 50/125µm or 62.5/125µm multimode riser grade fiber cable and can be ordered in any length. A cable pulling eye on one end protects the fiber during installation and facilitates fast installation. Cable extenders are also available to add onto existing Plug and Play reels and include an adapter to join the extender to the cable reel.

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers Part #

Description

FR6-(X)MMR-(XXX) . . . . . . MPO-to-MPO Plug and Play reel, 6-fiber, with pulling eye

Web Resources

FR12-(X)MMR-(XXX) . . . . . MPO-to-MPO Plug and Play reel, 12-fiber, with pulling eye FE6-(X)MMR-(XXX) . . . . . . MPO-to-MPO Plug and Play fiber extender, 6-fiber, with adapter and pulling eye FE12-(X)MMR-(XXX). . . . . . MPO-to-MPO Plug and Play fiber extender, 12-fiber, with adapter and pulling eye

PARAMETER

62.5/125µm (850nm/1300nm)

System Design Guide

50/125µm (850nm/1300nm)

Max. Attenuation (dB/Km)

3.5/1.0

Min. Bandwidth (MHz-Km)

200/500

500/500

275/550

550/550

Standards Update

Min. Gigabit Transmission Distance (m)

Glossary

Use (X) to specify fiber type: 5 = 50/125µm multimode, 6 = 62.5/125µm multimode Use (XXX) to specify length in meters (last X to be “0” or “5” only)

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.13

Work Area

LIGHTSYSTEM® XGLO™ J U M P E R S & P I G TA I L S

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Laser bandwidth optimized cable reduces impurities in the core of fiber, ensuring robust 10 gigabit Ethernet transmission

10 Gigabit Ethernet

Jumpers available in 1, 2, 3, and 5 meter standard lengths

Superior Performance

Industrial

Connectors color coded per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3

Shielded/ Screened Dust caps included to protect polish from dirt and damage

S210 Products

S110 Products

SC duplexing clip allows for polarity correction

S66 Products/ Protection

Exceeds ANSI/TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC requirements for aging, exposure to humidity, temperature extremes, impact, vibration, coupling strength, and cable resistance to stress and strain

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

LightSystem XGLO fiber optic cable assemblies meet all Telcordia and ISO/IEC specifications for ferrule end face geometry – including radius of curvature, apex offset, and spherical undercut. Compliance ensures minimum Return Loss, thereby reducing back reflection of laser energy which could degrade transmission performance or damage transceivers.

Index

5.14

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Pigtails available in 1 meter lengths 50/125µm multimode and singlemode assemblies available

Work Area

LIGHTSYSTEM® XGLO™ JUMPERS & PIGTAILS

Modular Patching

Choose LightSystem XGLO fiber optic cable assemblies for next generation backbone or fiber-to-the-desk applications. XGLO cable assemblies feature premium fiber that meets IEEE 802.3 10 Gigabit Ethernet requirements as well as IEC-60793-2-10 and TIA-492AAAC specifications for laser bandwidth Differential Mode Delay (DMD) specifications. In addition, these assemblies offer a superior connector polish that meets stringent Telcordia and ISO/IEC specifications for end-face geometry and exceeds all ANSI/TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC insertion loss and return loss requirements.

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

These precision cable assemblies are warranted for 20 years and ensure optimum applications support for 10 Gigabit Ethernet serial transmission when installed in a qualified LightSystem XGLO system. 100% inspection ensures superior performance and quality.

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

LIGHTSYSTEM XGLO 50/125µm MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS FJ2-SCSC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . SC-SC duplex jumper FJ2-LCLC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . LC-LC duplex jumper FJ2-LCSC5L-(XX) . . . . . . . . LC-SC duplex jumper Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

S210 Products

LIGHTSYSTEM XGLO 50/125µm MULTIMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS

S110 Products

FP1B-SC5L-01 . . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) FP1B-LC5L-01 . . . . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

S66 Products/ Protection

LIGHTSYSTEM XGLO SINGLEMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS FJ2-SCUSCUL-(XX). . . . . . . SC-SC duplex jumper

Residential

FJ2-LCULCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . LC-LC duplex jumper FJ2-LCUSCUL-(XX) . . . . . . . LC-SC duplex jumper Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

Tools and Testers

LIGHTSYSTEM XGLO SINGLEMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS FP1B-SCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) FP1B-LCUL-01 . . . . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

Web Resources

System Design Guide

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 50/125µm Multimode Min. Cable Bandwidth (MHz km) Max. Insertion Loss (dB) Min. Return Loss (dB)

Standards Update

Singlemode

850nm

1300nm

850nm*

n/a

1500

500

2000

n/a

0.50 (0.10 Typical)

0.40 (0.10 Typical)

30 (35 Typical)

55 (60 Typical)

Glossary

*Laser Bandwidth

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.15

Work Area

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

LIGHTSYSTEM® JUMPERS AND PIGTAILS The Siemon Company offers a comprehensive line of fiber jumpers for connecting fiber links. Choose from simplex or duplex, multimode (62.5/125 or 50/125) or singlemode, SC or ST, jumpers, or pigtails. Assemblies are available in standard lengths of 1, 2, 3, and 5 meters. Custom lengths are also available. Each and every terminated connector is optically tested so that you can be assured that 100% of the Siemon-built cable assemblies meet the stringent performance specifications (shown below). All jumpers are manufactured using the finest quality connectors and OFNR riser grade fiber.

Gigabit Ethernet

MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS

SINGLEMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS

FJ2-SCSC(X)MM-(XX). . . . . SC-SC duplex jumper

FJ2-SCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . SC-SC duplex jumper

FJ2-SASA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . ST-ST duplex jumper

FJ2-SCASCA-(XX) . . . . . . . SC-SC duplex jumper, APC*

FJ2-SASC(X)MM-(XX). . . . . ST-SC duplex jumper

FJ2-SAUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . ST-ST duplex jumper

FJ2-LCLC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . LC-LC duplex jumper

FJ2-SAUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . ST-SC duplex jumper

FJ2-LCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . LC-SC duplex jumper

FJ2-LCULCU-(XX). . . . . . . . LC-LC duplex jumper

FJ2-LCSA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . LC-ST duplex jumper

FJ2-LCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . LC-SC duplex jumper

FJ2R-MTMT(X)MM-(XX) . . . MT-RJ-MT-RJ duplex jumper

FJ2-LCUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . LC-ST duplex jumper

S210 Products

FJ2R-MTSC(X)MM-(XX). . . . MT-RJ-SC duplex jumper

S110 Products

MULTIMODE SIMPLEX JUMPERS

FJ1-SCASCA-(XX) . . . . . . . SC-SC simplex jumper, APC*

FJ1-SCSC(X)MM-(XX). . . . . SC-SC simplex jumper

FJ1-SAUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . ST-ST simplex jumper

FJ1-SASA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . ST-ST simplex jumper

FJ1-SAUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . ST-SC simplex jumper

FJ1-SASC(X)MM-(XX). . . . . ST-SC simplex jumper

FJ1-LCULCU-(XX). . . . . . . . LC-LC simplex jumper

FJ1-LCLC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . LC-LC simplex jumper

FJ1-LCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . LC-SC simplex jumper

FJ1-LCSC(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . LC-SC simplex jumper

FJ1-LCUSAU-(XX) . . . . . . . LC-ST simplex jumper

FJ2R-MTSA(X)MM-(XX) . . . MT-RJ-ST duplex jumper

SINGLEMODE SIMPLEX JUMPERS FJ1-SCUSCU-(XX) . . . . . . . SC-SC simplex jumper

S66 Products/ Protection

FJ1-LCSA(X)MM-(XX) . . . . . LC-ST simplex jumper

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

SINGLEMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS MULTIMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS

FP1B-SCU-01 . . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

FP1B-SC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

FP1B-SCA-01 . . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.), APC*

FP1B-SA(X)MM-01 . . . . . . ST simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

FP1B-SAU-01 . . . . . . . . . . ST simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

FP1B-LC(X)MM-01 . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

FP1B-LCU-01 . . . . . . . . . . LC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 50/125µm Multimode

System Design Guide Min. Cable Bandwidth (MHz km)

Standards Update

Glossary

62.5/125µm Multimode

Singlemode

850nm

1300nm

850nm

1300nm

n/a

500

200

500

n/a

Max. Insertion Loss (dB) Min. Return Loss (dB)

0.65 (0.40 Typical)

0.40 (0.25 Typical)

20 (25 Typical)

50* (53 Typical)

Use (X) to specify multimode fiber type/jacket color: – = 62.5/125µm fiber, orange jacket, 6 = 62.5/125µm fiber, gray jacket, 5 = 50/125µm fiber, orange jacket Use (XX) to specify cable length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

Index

5.16

Custom lengths and jacket colors are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information. *APC Jumpers and Pigtails have a minimum return loss of 65dB

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

VALULIGHT™ JUMPERS AND PIGTAILS Modular Patching

The Siemon Company is pleased to announce its new ValuLight line of fiber cable assemblies. These jumpers and pigtails provide exceptional value at a very competitive cost. ValuLight fiber cable assemblies meet TIA/EIA-568-B.3 and ISO/IEC 11801 specifications for insertion loss and return loss. They are ideal for commercial cabling data applications up to and including 1 gigabit. Cords are available in popular SC and ST connector types and in both multimode and singlemode fiber versions.

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber MULTIMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS J2-SCSC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . SC-SC duplex jumper

Industrial

J2-SASA(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . ST-ST duplex jumper J2-SASC(X)-(XX) . . . . . . . . ST-SC duplex jumper Use (X) to specify fiber type: 5 = 50/125µm, 6 = 62.5/125µm Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

Shielded/ Screened

MULTIMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS

S210 Products

P1B-SC(X)-01. . . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) P1B-SA(X)-01 . . . . . . . . . . ST simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) Use (X) to specify fiber type: 5 = 50/125µm, 6 = 62.5/125µm

S110 Products

SINGLEMODE DUPLEX JUMPERS J2-SCSCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . SC-SC duplex jumper

S66 Products/ Protection

J2-SASAP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . ST-ST duplex jumper J2-SASCP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . ST-SC duplex jumper Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

Residential

SINGLEMODE SIMPLEX PIGTAILS P1B-SCP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . SC simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) P1B-SAP-01 . . . . . . . . . . . ST simplex pigtail, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 50/125µm Multimode Min. Cable Bandwidth (MHz km)

62.5/125µm Multimode

Standards Update

Singlemode

850nm

1300nm

850nm

1300nm

n/a

500

200

500

n/a

Max. Insertion Loss (dB)

0.75

Min. Return Loss (dB)

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.17

Work Area

LC FIELD-INSTALLABLE CONNECTORS Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Siemon LC products offer all the benefits of SC and ST connections in a Small Form Factor (SFF), high-density design. LC adapter products are compatible with our popular MAX,® CT,® FOB, and SM® work area and telecommunications room products, providing a wide variety of installation options. LC connectors take just 2 minutes to terminate, using the Siemon LightSpeed ® Termination Kit. Multimode FC1-LC-MM-B80 . . . . . . . . LC Simplex connector, multimode, buffered fiber, beige boot FC2-LC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . LC Duplex connector, multimode, jacketed fiber, beige boots

Fiber

Singlemode FC1-LC-SM-B02 . . . . . . . . LC Simplex connector, singlemode, buffered fiber, white boot

Industrial

FC1-LC-SM-J02. . . . . . . . . LC Simplex connector, singlemode, jacketed fiber, white boot

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

Note: Siemon LC jacketed fiber connectors require the use of 1.6mm jacketed fiber cables. Add “-B” to the end of part number for bulk pack (simplex: 100/box; duplex: 50/box). LightSpeed Termination Kit page 5.21, LC Upgrade Kit page 5.21

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

MT-RJ FIELD-INSTALLABLE CONNECTORS Siemon MT-RJ connectors pack all the benefits of duplex fiber optic performance into a compact “RJ” style design. Terminations are quick and easy, utilizing a proven no epoxy/no polish method, which takes less than 2 minutes total — 1 minute per fiber! Siemon MT-RJ connectors feature two fibers factory-terminated to the ferrule with protruding stubs engaged within a pre-installed splice mechanism. Just prep the cable and insert the fibers into the connecter to complete termination. No epoxy or polish is necessary. Two enhancements have been incorporated into the MT-RJ connector. The first enhancement is in the color of the 62.5 micron MT-RJ connector which has changed from a black body to a light beige color. To help distinguish between the two multimode versions. The second enhancement is the lead-in tube of both the 62.5 and 50 micron connectors which have changed from a single entrance tube to a dual entrance tube to facilitate routing or fibers into connector. Part #

Standards Update

Description

FC2-MT6MM . . . . . . . . . . MT-RJ duplex connector with pins (male), multimode 62.5/125µm, beige FC2-MT5MM . . . . . . . . . . MT-RJ duplex connector with pins (male), multimode 50/125µm, black

Technical Tip!

Note: Siemon MT-RJ connectors are compatible with 3.0mm round duplex jacketed or buffered fiber cables

Ever reversed polarity on a duplex fiber termination? Siemon’s hinged latch allows you to correct the mistake. Simply defeat the integrated latch, rotate the connector 180°, and re-insert into adapter.

Glossary

MT-RJ Termination Kit page 5.21

Index

5.18

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

ST AND SC CONNECTORS SC DUPLEX CONNECTORS

Modular Patching

SC connectors have a duplexing clip, which allows each connector to be removed individually. In the event fiber polarity is reversed during termination, there’s no need to discard the connector. Simply remove connectors from the clip and switch to correct the mistake, saving valuable installation time and money. The duplexing clip also speeds troubleshooting. In the event there’s a fault with a single connection, an individual connector can be removed from the clip and re-terminated without disturbing the adjacent connector.

Racks and Cable Management

Multimode

Modular Patch Cords and Components

FC2-SC-MM-J . . . . . . . . . . Duplex, jacketed fiber, one black boot and one beige boot FC2-SC-MM-B80. . . . . . . . Duplex, buffered fiber, two beige boots

Fiber

FC2-SC-MM . . . . . . . . . . . Duplex, jacketed/buffered fiber, one black and one beige jacketed boot; two beige buffered boots

Singlemode FC2-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . Duplex, jacketed fiber

Industrial

FC2-SC-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . Duplex, buffered fiber Use (XX) to specify boot color: 02 = white, 06 = blue Add “-B” to the end of part number for bulk pack (50/box).

Shielded/ Screened

Singlemode

FC1-SC-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . Simplex, jacketed fiber, beige boot

FC1-SC-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . Simplex, jacketed fiber

FC1-SC-MM-J01 . . . . . . . . Simplex, jacketed fiber, black boot

FC1-SC-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . Simplex, buffered fiber

FC1-SC-MM-B80. . . . . . . . Simplex, buffered fiber, beige boot

FC1-SC-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . Simplex, jacketed/buffered fibers, one jacketed boots, one buffered boots

FC1-SC-MM-01 . . . . . . . . Simplex, jacketed/buffered fibers, one black jacketed boot and one beige buffered boot

S110 Products

Use (XX) to specify boot color: 02 = white, 06 = blue

FC1-SC-MM-80 . . . . . . . . Simplex, jacketed/buffered fiber, one beige jacketed boot and one beige buffered boot

S210 Products

S66 Products/ Protection

Add “-B” to the end of part number for bulk pack (100/box).

Residential

ST CONNECTORS The ST connector employs a rugged metal bayonet coupling ring with radial ramps which facilitate engagement to the studs of the mating adapter. Two ST connectors are available for jacketed fiber, one with a beige boot and one with a black boot. The two colors enable easy identification of the fibers when terminating individual connectors to form a duplex jumper.

Tools and Testers

Multimode

Web Resources

FC1-SA-MM-J80 . . . . . . . . Jacketed fiber, beige boot FC1-SA-MM-J01 . . . . . . . . Jacketed fiber, black boot FC1-SA-MM-B80 . . . . . . . Buffered fiber, beige boot

System Design Guide

FC1-SA-MM-01 . . . . . . . . Jacketed/Buffered fiber, black jacketed boot and beige buffered boot FC1-SA-MM-80 . . . . . . . . Jacketed/Buffered fiber, beige jacketed boot and beige buffered boot

Standards Update

Singlemode FC1-SA-SM-J(XX) . . . . . . . Jacketed fiber FC1-SA-SM-B(XX) . . . . . . . Buffered fiber

Glossary

FC1-SA-SM-(XX) . . . . . . . . Jacketed/Buffered fiber, one jacketed boot, one buffered boot Use (XX) to specify boot color: 02 = white, 06 = blue Add “-B” to the end of part number for bulk pack (100/box).

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.19

Work Area

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

TERMINATING FIBER IS FAST AND EASY WITH SIEMON’S LIGHTSPEED ® TERMINATIONS Terminate fiber faster and more accurately with Siemon’s LightSpeed Termination process. Using Siemon’s ST or SC Connectors, LightSpeed Fiber Termination Kit, and Automated Fiber Polisher, you can complete the entire fiber termination process in less than two minutes!

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

ST/SC Connectors

LightSpeed ® Termination Kit

Automated Fiber Polisher

Siemon multimode ST and Duplex SC connectors feature design simplicity and exacting tolerances, which enable easy termination and precise fiber alignment. High quality connector components provide the accuracy and reliability needed for superior performance.

The Siemon Fiber Termination Kit contains all the tools and consumables needed to terminate 200 ST or SC multimode connectors. It also includes a user-friendly, tinted adhesive which not only speeds the termination process, but also increases the reliability of the connection via improved resistance to environmental extremes.

The Siemon Company automated Fiber Polisher (FPOL) is battery operated and performs a high-quality, consistent polish on two multimode connectors in just 15 seconds! Saves critical installation time while providing optimum termination quality.

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

AUTOMATED FIBER POLISHER The Siemon Company’s Automated Fiber Polisher (FPOL) is designed to perform a high-quality polish in just 15 seconds (7.5 seconds per connector), reducing polishing time by 66% for two ST, SC, or FC multimode connectors. Even with the increased speed in polishing time, the insertion loss is typically 0.2dB or less. The FPOL is compact, lightweight, portable, and can complete a minimum of 250 polishing cycles (500 connectors) using a standard 9V alkaline battery (AC adapter also included).

Part #

Description

FPOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automated fiber polisher includes: one 9V battery, one spare 9V battery, 100 polishing discs, 10 air polishing sheets, work holder, water bottle, 120 volt AC adapter, hard shell carrying case, and instructions

ACCESSORIES Standards Update

Part #

Description

FP-PFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polishing discs, 3µm, aluminum oxide 100 discs/bag FP-PFD1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Super polishing discs, 1µm, diamond, 10 discs/bag

Glossary

FP-APF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Air polishing sheets, 5µm, aluminum oxide 10 sheets/bag

Index

5.20

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

LIGHTSPEED ® ST, SC FIBER TERMINATION KITS Modular Patching

Achieve faster fiber terminations and higher performance with Siemon’s LightSpeed Termination Kit. The Siemon fiber termination kit contains all the tools and consumables required for termination of up to 200 multimode ST or SC connectors — packaged in a rugged canvas carrying case. Use the optional LC Upgrade Kit (see below) for LC connector terminations. All consumables, tools and other termination products supplied with the kit can be ordered separately.

Racks and Cable Management

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Part #

Fiber

Description

FTERM-L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . LightSpeed Fiber Termination Kit for ST and SC multimode connectors* FT-CKIT-L2 . . . . . . . . . . . . Consumables Kit for FTERM-2L** *All consumables including primer, adhesive and polishing films are contained in the consumables kit and must be ordered separately. Contents of FTERM Termination Kit are also available individually. **This product contains material with a time and temperature sensitive shelf life. Store between 40 – 100 degrees F (4.4 – 38.5°C) and verify expiration date marked on product prior to use.

Industrial

LC FIBER TERMINATION UPGRADE KIT

S210 Products

The Siemon LC upgrade kit is used in conjunction with the LightSpeed Termination Kit (FTERM-L2) and has all the accessories to terminate LC connectors using Siemon’s exclusive LightSpeed adhesive. The kit includes an LC microscope head (that attaches to the microscope included with the FTERM-L2), an LC polishing puck and a micro-torch* (to shrink the colorcoded LC crimp sleeve tubings).

S110 Products

Part #

Shielded/ Screened

S66 Products/ Protection

Description

FTERM-LC. . . . . . . . . . . . . LC Fiber Termination Upgrade Kit (used in conjunction with FTERM-L2)

Residential Note: Contents of FTERM-LC are also available individually. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information. *Butane fuel not included

Tools and Testers

MT-RJ FIBER TERMINATION KIT

Web Resources

The Siemon MT-RJ termination kit makes field termination of MT-RJ connectors quick and easy. MT-RJ duplex connectors can be terminated in less than 2 minutes, which equates to less than 1 minute per fiber! The kit employs proven no-epoxy/no-polish termination technology. All tools required to terminate MT-RJ connectors are included in a durable canvas carrying case.

System Design Guide

Part #

Description

Standards Update

FTERM-MT . . . . . . . . . . . . MT-RJ Fiber Termination Kit

Glossary Note: Contents of FTERM-MT are also available individually. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

5.21

XGLO™ FIBRE OPTIC CABLE

Installation applications include: Intrabuilding backbones, vertical shafts within buildings — riser, and dry ducts, conduits.

900mm tight buffer design enables easy connectorization

Dielectric central strength member

Data Applications: • 10 Gigabit Ethernet • Gigabit Ethernet • 10/100 Ethernet

Aramid yarn strength member

• ATM Available in both CMR and LS0H

Industry standard color codes for buffers and sub-units

Tight buffer design reduces cable OD and pathway space requirements

Cable available in 50 metre increments

• FDDI • Broadband video • Existing and future applications approved by TIA, EIA, IEEE, ATM Forum, ANSI, IEC or ISO that specify compatibility with the type of cable installed per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1

Compliance: • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 2nd Edition • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3-1 • IEC 61156-5 1st Edition • LS0H:VW-1, IEC 1034, IEC 754 • CMR: Communications Type ONFR (UL) and CSA FT4 c(UL) • IEC-60793-2-10 • TIA-492AAAC laser bandwidth DMD specification • IEC 60793-2-49 and TIA/EIA 455-220 DMD measurement test procedures 72 Fibre Version shown

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

FIBRE PRODUCTS

Part of Siemon’s 10G ip™ cabling solution, XGLO fibre optic cable is ideal for next generation backbone or fibre-to-the-desk applications. XGLO cable meets IEC-60793-2-10 and TIA-492AAAC specifications for laser bandwidth Differential Mode Delay (DMD). These high performance cables dramatically reduce impurities in the fibre core, ensuring optimum applications support for laser based applications, such as 10 Gigabit Ethernet serial transmission.

FIBRE PRODUCTS

PRODUCT INFORMATION OPTICAL SPECIFICATIONS — RISER, PLENUM & LS0H Minimum Performance Parameters for XGLO™ 50/125 Multimode Fibre

Guaranteed Gigabit Transmission Distance (m)

†

Guaranteed 10 Gigabit Transmission Distance (m)

Minimum Bandwidth (MHz-km)

Maximum Attenuation (dB/km)

Group Index of Refraction

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm†

1300 nm††

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm

1300 nm

850 nm

1300 nm

900

600

300

Laser - 2000 OFL - 1500

Laser - 500 OFL - 500

3.5

1.5

1.483

1.478

10GBASE-S

††

10GBASE-LX4

Minimum Performance Parameters for XGLO Singlemode Fibre

Fibre

Maximum Attenuation (dB/km)

Cable Type

Singlemode

Inside Plant

Zero Dispersion

Index of Refraction

1310 nm

1550 nm

Wavelength (nm)

Slope (nm2-km)

1310 nm

1550 nm

0.70

1300-1322

<0.092

1.466

1.467

Mode and Fibre Type

Core Size (Microns)

Cladding Size (Microns)

Coating Size (Microns)

Buffer Size (Microns)

Core Cladding Concentricity (Microns)

50/125µm Singlemode

50 ± 3 8.3 ± 1

125 ± 2 125 ± 2

245 ± 5

900 ± 50

<12

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS — RISER Nominal Cable Diameter mm

Installation

Long Term

4 6 12 24 48 72 96

5.21 5.72 6.60 13.97 16.76 19.94 22.43

1000 1000 1425 2670 4450 5560 7340

290 290 500 600 1000 1245 1670

Fibre Count

S I E M O N

Minimum Bend Radius Installation

Long Term

15 x DIA.

Maximum Net Weight kg/km 22 27 36.9 140 193.5 300 426

10 x DIA.

20 x DIA.

Minimum Crush Resistance (N/cm)

Minimum Impact Cycles

Minimum Flex Resistance Cycles

Operating Temperature (° C)

Storage Temperature (° C)

1485

500 500 1000 1000 1000 1000 1500

1000

-20/70

-40/70

4 6 12 24 48 72 96

T H E

Maximum Pulling Tension Newtons

Fibre Count

C O M P A N Y

PRODUCT INFORMATION

Maximum Pulling Tension Newtons

Fibre Count

Nominal Cable Diameter mm

Installation

Long Term

4 6 12 24 48 72 96

5.10 5.21 7.62 13.59 15.04 19.56 22.70

1000 1400 1400 2670 4450 5560 7340

290 400 500 600 1000 1245 1670

Fibre Count

Maximum Net Weight kg/km

Minimum Bend Radius Installation

Long Term

15 x DIA.

22 24 59.6 160.8 198 300 426

10 x DIA.

20 x DIA.

Minimum Crush Resistance (N/cm)

Minimum Impact Cycles

Minimum Flex Resistance Cycles

Operating Temperature (° C)

Storage Temperature (° C)

1485

500 500 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500

1000

-20/50

-40/70

4 6 12 24 48 72 96

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS — LS0H Maximum Pulling Tension Newtons

Fibre Count

Nominal Cable Diameter mm

Installation

Long Term

4 6 12 24 48 72 96

5.36 5.72 6.60 14.91 17.09 19.56 22.70

1000 1400 1425 4450 4450 5500 7340

290 400 500 1000 1000 1245 1670

Fibre Count 4 6 12 24 48 72 96

Maximum Net Weight kg/km

Minimum Bend Radius Installation

Long Term

15 x DIA.

22 23.8 36 156 211 300 426

10 x DIA.

Minimum Crush Resistance (N/cm)

Minimum Impact Cycles

Minimum Flex Resistance Cycles

Operating Temperature (° C)

Storage Temperature (° C)

1485

500 500 1000 1000 1500 1500 1500

1000

-20/50

-40/70

T H E

S I E M O N

C O M P A N Y

FIBRE PRODUCTS

PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS — PLENUM

Distribution — XGLO™ Fibre Optic Cable Part Number & Description: PART #

4 & 6 FIBRE

FIBRE COUNT

9F(XX)B(X)-4A(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . 4 9F(XX)B(X)-6B(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . . 6 9F(XX)B(X)-12D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . 12 9F(XX)B(X)-24B(XXXX). . . . . . . . . . 24 9F(XX)B(X)-48D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . 48 9F(XX)B(X)-72D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . 72 9F(XX)B(X)-96D(XXXX) . . . . . . . . . 96

# OF SUB-UNITS (FIBERS/SUB-UNIT) . . . . . . . . . . . .Single Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .Single Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .Single Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 (6) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 (12) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 (12) . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 (12)

Use (XX) to specify mode: 5L = 50/125µm multimode laser optimized cable 8L = Singlemode laser optimized cable Use (X) to specify cable rating: 1 = CMR, 2 = plenum, 3 = LS0H Use (XXXX) to specify length in kilometer, use four characters including decimal point. The last “X” must be a zero (0) or five (5) only. Example P/N: 9F5LB1-12D1.50; (1.5 kilometers [1500 meters] of 50/125µm laser optimized 12-strand riser rated fibre optic cable) For orders of less than 1 KM, the first “X” must be zero (0). Example: 9F5LB1-12D0.55 (.550 kilometers [550 meters] of 50/125µm laser optimized 12-strand riser rated fibre optic cable)

4 & 6 FIBRE (6 fibre shown)

12 FIBRE

24 FIBRE

48 FIBRE

24 FIBRE

48 FIBRE

72 & 96 FIBRE (72 fibre shown)

PROD-SS-LXFC Rev. C 8/03

72 & 96 FIBRE

Because we are continuously improving our products, The Siemon Company reserves the right to change specifications and availability without prior notice. XGLO™ is a trademark of The Siemon Company

Siemon — EMEA HQ & UK United Kingdom Tel: +44 (0) 1483 480040

W W W

S I E M O N

Siemon — France Paris Tel: +33 1 46 46 11 85

C O M

Siemon — Deutschland Frankfurt Tel: +49 (0) 69 97168 184

Siemon — Italia Milano Tel: +39 (02) 64 672 209

FIBRE PRODUCTS

O R D E R I N G I N F O R M AT I O N

XGLO™ JUMPERS & PIGTAILS

Supports 10 Gigabit Ethernet

Laser bandwidth optimized cable reduces impurities in the core of fiber, ensuring robust 10 gigabit Ethernet transmission

Jumpers available in 1, 2, 3, and 5 meter standard lengths

Connectors color coded per TIA/EIA-568-B.3

Singlemode jacket is yellow in compliance with TIA/EIA-568B.3, multimode assemblies are aqua per de facto industry specification Dust caps included to protect polish from dirt and damage

50/125µm multimode and singlemode assemblies available

SC duplexing clip allows for polarity correction

Pigtails available in 1 meter lengths Exceeds TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC requirements for aging, exposure to humidity, temperature extremes, impact, vibration, coupling strength, and cable resistance to stress and strain

XGLO fiber optic cable assemblies meet all Telcordia and ISO/IEC specifications for ferrule end face geometry – including radius of curvature, apex offset, and spherical undercut. Compliance ensures minimum Return Loss, thereby reducing back reflection of laser energy which could degrade transmission performance or damage transceivers

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

FIBER PRODUCTS

Part of Siemon’s 10G ip™ Cabling Solution, XGLO fiber optic cable assemblies are ideal for next generation backbone or fiber-to-the-desk applications. XGLO cable assemblies feature premium fiber that meets IEEE 802.3 10 Gigabit Ethernet Standard as well as IEC-60793-2-10 and TIA-492AAAC specifications for laser bandwidth Differential Mode Delay (DMD) specifications. In addition, these assemblies offer a superior connector polish that meets stringent Telcordia and ISO/IEC specifications for end-face geometry and exceeds all ANSI/TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC insertion loss and return loss requirements.

Use, Care and Maintenance: This procedure is a general guide for the use, care, and maintenance of fiber jumpers sold by Siemon and is included on each fiber jumper/pigtail bag. • Keep all connectors clean. Replace protective dust caps on connectors when not in use. • Clean the connector ferrule with a lint-free wipe soaked in isopropyl alcohol, followed with a dry lint-free wipe. • Do not touch the connector ferrule tip prior to installation. • Observe a minimum bend radius of 30mm (1.2 in.) during handling, installation and use.

PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 50/125µm Multimode

850 1500

Wavelength (nm) Min. Cable Bandwidth (MHz-km) Max. Insertion Loss (dB) Min. Return Loss (dB)

1300 500 0.50 (0.10 Typical) 30 (35 Typical)

Singlemode

850* 2000

n/a n/a 0.40 (0.10 Typical) 55 (60 Typical)

*Laser Bandwidth

XGLO™ 50/125µm Multimode Duplex Jumpers:

XGLO Singlemode Duplex Jumpers:

FJ2-SCSC5L-(XX)AQ ......SC to SC aqua duplex jumper FJ2-LCLC5L-(XX)AQ .......LC to LC aqua duplex jumper FJ2-LCSC5L-(XX)AQ.......LC-SC aqua duplex jumper

FJ2-SCUSCUL-(XX) .........SC to SC yellow duplex jumper FJ2-LCULCUL-(XX) ..........LC to LC yellow duplex jumper FJ2-LCUSCUL-(XX) .........LC to SC yellow duplex jumper

XGLO 50/125µm Multimode Simplex Pigtails:

XGLO Singlemode Simplex Pigtails:

FP1B-SC5L-01AQ ..........SC simplex pigtail, aqua, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.) FP1B-LC5L-01AQ...........LC simplex pigtail, aqua, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3 ft.)

FP1B-SCUL-01 ...............SC simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3. ft.) FP1B-LCUL-01................LC simplex pigtail, yellow, 900 micron, buffered, 1m (3.3. ft.)

Because we continuously improve our products, Siemon reserves the right to change specifications and availability without prior notice. 10G ip™ and XGLO™ are trademarks of Siemon The Americas Watertown, CT USA Phone (1) 860 945 4200

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

For related product information request Spec Sheet(s): ST & SC Fiber Connectors (PROD-SS-SFC) LC Connector Products (PROD-SS-LCC) Rack Mount Interconnect Center (PROD-SS-RIC)

Europe/Middle East/Africa Surrey, England Phone (44 ) 0 1932 571771

Asia/Pacific Shanghai, P.R. China Phone (86) 21 6390 6778

PROD-SS-LOF Rev. E 3/05

Use (XX) to specify length: 01 = 1m (3.3 ft.), 02 = 2m (6.6 ft.), 03 = 3m (9.8 ft.), 05 = 5m (16.4 ft.)

FIBER PRODUCTS

P R O D U C T I N F O R M AT I O N

10G 6™ CABLE

Center isolation member maintains pair geometry before, during and after installation for optimal NEXT performance

CABLE

Siemon 10G 6 cable provides industry leading category 6/class E transmission performance. When combined with our 10G 6 series connectivity, the result is a channel capable of delivering usable bandwidth to 625 MHz, in support of 10 Gigabit application. Choose 10G 6 for the ultimate in full duplex highspeed data and streaming multimedia applications support.

Cable Construction • UTP • 0.57mm (0.023 in.) (23 AWG) solid bare copper • 6.35mm (0.25 in.) max jacket diameter

Sequential measurement marking on jacket

• Round jacket • Center isolation member

Insulation

LS0H, CMX, CMR and CMP jacket options available

Conductor

Rip Cord Isolation Member

Jacket

Compliance • ISO/IEC 11801:2002 (Category 6) • ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 • IEC 61156-5:2002 • LS0H: IEC 60332-1, IEC 60754, and IEC 61034 • UL CMX

Cable packaged in a reel-in-a-box (305m) to protect product during shipping and facilitate tangle-free installation

W W W

S I E M O N

• UL CMR and CSA FT4 • UL CMP and CSA FT6

C O M

TRANSMISSION PERFORMANCE Frequency Insertion Loss (MHz) (dB) 1.0 4.0 10.0 16.0 20.0 31.25 62.5 100.0 160.0 200.0 250.0 300.0 350.0 400.0 550.0 625.0 750.0

2.0 3.8 6.0 7.6 8.5 10.7 15.4 19.8 25.6 29.0 32.8 36.4 39.8 43.0 51.8 55.8 62.3

1.8 3.3 5.2 6.7 7.5 9.4 13.7 17.8 22.7 25.8 29.2 31.5 33.8 37.9 42.1 44.9 49

TIA/EIA & ISO/IEC*

NEXT (dB) 74.3 65.3 59.3 56.2 54.8 51.9 47.4 44.3 41.2 39.8 38.3 37.1 36.1 35.3 33.2 32.4 31.2

96.0 89.0 83.0 80.0 79.0 76.0 71.0 68.0 65.0 64.0 62.0 61.0 60.0 59.0 57.0 53.0 51.0

PS NEXT (dB) 72.3 63.3 57.3 54.2 52.8 49.9 45.4 42.3 39.2 37.8 36.3 35.1 34.1 33.3 31.2 30.4 29.2

SIEMON TYPICAL

ELFEXT (dB)

92.0 83.0 77.0 74.0 73.0 70.0 65.0 62.0 59.0 58.0 56.0 55.0 54.0 53.0 51.0 50.0 49.0

67.8 55.8 47.8 43.7 41.8 37.9 31.9 27.8 23.7 21.8 19.8 18.3 16.9 15.8 13.0 11.9 10.3

92.0 80.0 72.0 68.0 66.0 62.0 56.0 52.0 48.0 46.0 44.0 42.0 41.0 40.0 39.0 36.0 35.0

PS ELFEXT (dB)

Return Loss (dB)

Propagation Delay (ns)

64.8 52.8 44.8 40.7 38.8 34.9 28.9 24.8 20.7 18.8 16.8 15.3 13.9 12.8 10.0 8.9 7.3

20.0 23.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 23.6 21.5 20.1 18.7 18.0 17.3 16.8 16.3 15.9 14.9 14.5 14.0

570 552 545 543 542 540 539 538 537 537 536 536 536 536 536 535 535

85.0 73.0 65.0 61.0 59.0 55.0 49.0 45.0 41.0 39.0 37.0 35.0 34.0 33.0 32.0 29.0 27.0

29.0 32.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 34.0 34.0 33.0 32.0 31.0 31.0 29.0 28.0 27.0 26.0 25.0 25.0

540 522 515 513 512 510 509 507 506 506 506 505 505 505 505 505 —

Delay Skew 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0 45.0

25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0

*Values above 250 MHz are informational only.

ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Maximum DC Resistance (@ 20° C)

9.4 ohms

Characteristic Impedance (no impedance averaging allowed)

1-100 MHz: 100 ohms ± 15% 100-250 MHz: 100 ohms ± 22%

Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP)

0.68

Other cable lengths also available: Add “-5CR” for 500m (1640 ft.) reel, “-1KR” for 1000m (3,281 ft.) reel Contact your local sales representative for cable availability and delivery lead time

9C6R4-E5/9C6P4-E5

9C6X4-E5

Because we are continuously improving our products, The Siemon Company reserves the right to change specifications and availability without prior notice. MAX®, MC® and 10G 6™ are trademarks of The Siemon Company

The Americas Watertown, CT USA Phone (1) 860 945 4200

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

9C6L4-E5

For related product information request Spec Sheet(s): 10G 6 MAX® Modules (PROD-SS-MX10G6) 10G 6 MC® Modular Patch Cords (PROD-SS-MC10G6)

Europe/Middle East/Africa Surrey, England Phone (44 ) 0 1483 480040

Asia/Pacific Shanghai, P.R. China Phone (86) 21 6390 6778

PROD-SS-CBLP6 Rev. F 3/04

10G 6™ 4-Pair Solid UTP Cable: 9C6R4-E5 .....................PVC (CMR, CSA FT4), Blue Jacket, 305m (1000 ft.) box 9C6P4-E5 .....................Plenum (CMP, CSA FT6), Blue Jacket, 305m (1000 ft.) box 9C6X4-E5 .....................PVC (CMX, IEC 60332-1), Gray Jacket, 305m (1000 ft.) box 9C6L4-E5......................LS0H (IEC 60332-1), Violet Jacket, 305m (1000 ft.) box

CABLE

P R O D U C T I N F O R M AT I O N

10G 6™ HD® PATCH PANEL

Part of Siemon’s new 10G ip™ Cabling Solution, the 10G 6 HD modular patch panel exceed all category 6 component requirements to 250 MHz, and is also fully qualified out to 300 MHz*. This superior level of performance is achieved via a completely new circuit board design, optimization of jack pin geometry, and stringent inspection and quality control procedures. When used with a 10G 6 MC® patch cord, the result is a cross-connect solution with typical NEXT margin of 5 dB across the entire frequency range from 1-300 MHz. Combine 10G 6 patch panels with Siemon’s new 10G 6 MAX® modules and 10G 6 modular cords for a complete 10G 6 channel solution with worst case PS ACR beyond 300 MHz and typical results out to 350 MHz! This superior 10G 6 cabling system delivers unparalleled network performance today and support for multi-gigabit Ethernet applications expected in the coming years.

300 MHz

Category 6 component compliant to 300MHz

Superior performance for interconnect, cross-connect or consolidation point applications

Terminates with standard 110 termination tools

Designation area provided for panel identification Black anodized finish and rolled steel edges provide an aesthetic appearance

Backward compatible with category 5e and lower patch cords

T568A and T568B wiring compatible

Durable modular outlets are FCC CFR 47 part 68 subpart F and IEC 60603-7 compliant. Outlet contacts are plated with 50 miroinches of gold

Pyramid™ wire entry system on S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time Protective rear metal housing prevents accidental damage of internal circuit board Includes rear cable manager to properly guide cables to point of termination *Performance from 250-300 MHz based on extrapolated TIA/EIA and ISO/IEC limits.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

MODULAR PATCHING

The greatest challenge to achieving superior NEXT performance in a channel is at the cross-connect in the telecommunications room. With two outlets in close proximity connected by a short modular cord, achieving NEXT margin above category 6 is a challenge for common patch panels. Not so with Siemon’s 10G 6 HD modular patch panel!

Return Loss

58 56 54 52 50 48 46 44 42 40

250 MHz

100 MHz

300 MHz

FEXT

30 28 26 24 22 20 18 16 14 12 10

100 MHz

250 MHz

300 MHz

250 MHz

300 MHz

Insertion Loss

46 44 42 40 38 36 34 32 30

0.4 0.35 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.15 0.1 0.05 0

100 MHz

Limit

250 MHz

Worst Case

300 MHz

100 MHz

Typical

10G 6™ HD® Patch Panels:

HD6-24U ......................24-port panel, T568A/B wiring, 1 RMS PROD-SS-HD6U Rev. C 6/03

Panels include rear cable manager, icon label holders, designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 5 panels (rear cable managers and icon label holders not included but can be ordered separately). Contact our Customer Service Department for other panel sizes. Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) Because we are continuously improving our products, The Siemon Company reserves the right to change specifications and availability without prior notice. 10G 6™, 10 G ip™, HD®, MC®, MAX®, Pyramid™, S210® and S310® are trademarks of The Siemon Company

For additional resource information: Visit our web site at www.siemon.com For related product information request Spec Sheet(s): 10G 6 MC Patch Cords (PROD-SS-MCU) 10G 6 MX Modules (PROD-SS-MXU) The Americas Watertown, CT USA Phone (1) 860 945 4200

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

HD6-48U ......................48-port panel, T568A/B wiring, 2 RMS

Europe/Middle East/Africa Surrey, England Phone (44 ) 0 1483 480040

Asia/Pacific Shanghai, P.R. China Phone (86) 21 6390 6778

MODULAR PATCHING

P R O D U C T I N F O R M AT I O N

Work Area

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

MODULAR PATCH CORDS AND COMPONENTS

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

MC® MODULAR CORDS

Industrial

(pages 4.2 – 4.4)

Residential

Consolidation Point, Telecommunications Room

Field Termination

Telecommunications Room, Work Area

Modular

Modular, 25-Pair

UTP

Stranded

Solid

Stranded

Black, White, Red, Gray, Yellow, Blue, Green

Gray (non-plenum), Blue (plenum)

White

Varies by product

Work Area, Telecommunications Room

ibl

S66 Products/ Protection

Media Types

Category

Conductor Types

Cable Colors Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

4.0

(page 4.6)

S110 Products

Connector Type

(page 4.5)

S210 Products

Product Applications

(pages 4.3 – 4.4)

OTHER CABLE ASSEMBLIES

Shielded/ Screened

SOLID IC CABLE CABLE ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLIES COMPONENTS

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

Section Contents

Modular Patching

Ultra™ MC® 6 Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 – 4.3 MC 6 Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3

Racks and Cable Management

Solid IC6 Single-Ended Modular Cords. . . . . . . . . . 4.3 MC 5 Modular Cords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Solid IC5 Single-Ended Modular Cords. . . . . . . . . . 4.4

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Universal Modular Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Modular Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5 Stranded Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.5

Fiber

Category 5e and 3 25-Pair Cable Assemblies . . . . . 4.6 EZ-Twist ® Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Industrial

F-Type Coax Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Category 6 Cross-Connect Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Category 5e Cross-Connect Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7 Cross-Connect Wire Dispenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.7

Shielded/ Screened

1920s – 1930s In 1923, The Siemon Company recognized that the roaring twenties and society’s new obsession with music entertainment made good business sense, and acquired the Bell Record Company. This was the first entry into the record business for Siemon, and although a departure from telecommunications, represented significant business in an

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

increasingly difficult economy. It proved to be a very wise decision. Residential

Combining its business savvy with its technological expertise, The Siemon Company was actively involved in the invention of a non-

Tools and Testers

breakable plastic record to serve the needs of a booming entertainment industry. By 1934, Siemon was manufacturing records for five

Web Resources

separate labels. Its association with Decca Records is most notable. With recording stars like swooning crooner Bing Crosby and his new “White Christmas” album, Siemon produced over one-million Decca records per month to meet the insatiable demand.

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

4.1

Work Area

Modular Patching

U LT R A M C 6 MODULAR CORDS ™

Racks and Cable Management

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

2 Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Category 6 Component Compliant to 300 MHz Siemon takes patch cord performance to the next level with our new Ultra MC 6 modular patch cords. These next generation cords exceed all category 6 component requirements out to 300 MHz*.

Easy Identification Optional color-coded oval icons available for port identification

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

Metallic Isolator

Exceeds Category 6

Innovative Strain Relief 360° crimp provides excellent plug-to-cable strain relief without causing pair deformation

Superior Quality Internal stranded cordage isolator provides extended flex life and maintains ideal pair geometry

Exceeds Category 6 Ultra 6 stranded cordage far exceeds category 6 performance specifications

Durability High quality modular plugs provide long-term resistance to corrosion, extreme temperatures and airborne contaminants

Residential

Latch Guard Slide-on boots feature a latch guard to protect plug from snagging when pulling through pathways or cable managers

Excellent Bend Relief

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

4.2

Patented metallic isolator shields pairs inside plug for optimum NEXT performance

100% transmission testing ensures margin beyond category 6 modular cord specifications and guarantees optimum field performance

*Performance from 250-300 MHz based on extrapolated TIA/EIA limits.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

37 mm (1.4 in.) boot ensures excellent bend relief, critical for category 6 performance

Work Area

ULTRA™ MC® 6 MODULAR CORDS Part #

Modular Patching

Description

MC6-8-T-(XX)-(XX)U . . . . . . Ultra MC 6, double-ended, 4-pair stranded modular cord, T568A/B, color-matching jacket/boot

Racks and Cable Management Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.),15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07=green Add “B” for bulk project pack of 100 modular cords

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Ultra HD® 6 Patch Panels page 2.2 – 2.3, Ultra MAX® 6 Modules page 1.2 – 1.3

Fiber

MC 6 MODULAR CORDS

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

Part #

S210 Products

Description

MC6-8-T-(XX)-(XX). . . . . . . MC 6, double-ended, 4-pair stranded modular cord, T568A/B, color matching jacket/boot Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.),15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07=green Add “B” for bulk project pack of 100 modular cords Custom lengths are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

S110 Products Technical Tip! Factory terminated and tested modular cords are required to achieve consistent category 5e or 6 channel performance. Field termination is not recommended.

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

SOLID IC6 SINGLE-ENDED MODULAR CORDS

Tools and Testers

Siemon’s IC6 solid single-ended modular cords are designed for use in System 6 applications requiring a consolidation point (CP) or cross-connect (as an equipment cord). The IC6 cords are 100% factory transmission tested to 250 MHz and feature the same plug construction used in MC 6 modular cords. These cords are available in plenum and nonplenum versions and are single-ended for direct termination. Part #

Web Resources

Description

IC6-8A-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . . IC6, single-ended, non-plenum, 4-pair solid modular cord, T568B, gray jacket with colored boot

System Design Guide

IC6-8T-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . . IC6, single-ended, non-plenum, 4-pair solid modular cord, T568A, gray jacket with colored boot IC6-8A-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . IC6, single-ended, plenum, 4-pair solid modular cord, T568B, blue plenum jacket with colored boot

Standards Update

IC6-8T-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . IC6, single-ended, plenum, 4-pair solid modular cord, T568A, blue plenum jacket with colored boot

Glossary

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

4.3

Work Area

MC® 5 MODULAR CORDS Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

All Siemon MC 5 modular cords are assembled using premium stranded cable that meets all category 5e specifications. MC 5 modular cords are available in several colors with or without a colored boot. WITH BOOT Part #

Description

MC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)C . . . . . MC 5 Double-ended, 4-pair modular stranded cord, T568A/T568B, color matching jacket/boot,

WITHOUT BOOT Fiber

Part #

Description

MC5-8-T-(XX)-(XX). . . . . . . MC 5 Double-ended, 4-pair modular stranded cord, T568A/T568B, no boot MC-BOOT-(XX)-100 . . . . . Color Boots (pack of 100)

Industrial Technical Tip!

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.91m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.52m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.13m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.05m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.57m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.10m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify boot color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Add “B” for bulk project pack of 100 modular cords Custom lengths are available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

Note: MAX® 6, CT® 6, and HD® 6 products are backward compatible with our MC 5 (category 5e compatible) modular cords. For example when a MC 5 modular cord is used in a System 6® channel with MAX 6 modules, Siemon guarantees category 5e system performance.

Description

IC5-8T-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . IC5, single-ended, 4-pair solid cable assembly, T568A, gray jacket, CMR, no boot IC5-8A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . IC5, single-ended, 4-pair solid cable assembly, T568B, gray jacket, CMR, no boot IC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)P. . . . . . . IC5, single-ended, 4-pair solid cable assembly, T568A, blue jacket, CMP, with colored boot IC5-8A-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . IC5, single-ended, 4-pair solid cable assembly, T568B, blue jacket, CMP, with colored boot

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

4.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

UNIVERSAL MODULAR PLUG Modular Patching

Our patented “universal” modular plug eliminates the need to stock more than one size modular plug. The UP-2468 permits field-termination of modular cords in 2-, 3-, or 4-pair increments and terminates twisted pair cable with 26-22 AWG (0.40mm to 0.64mm) solid or 7- strand conductors with insulated conductor diameter of 0.86–0.99mm (0.034–0.039 in.). Plug contacts have 50 microinches minimum of gold plating over nickel and meet FCC CFR 47 part 68 subpart F, and IEC 60603-7 specifications. Part #

Racks and Cable Management

Description

UP-2468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Universal” modular plug

Modular Patch Cords and Components

AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool page 12.8, PT-908 Crimp Tool page 12.9, Stranded cable below

Fiber

MODULAR PLUGS We offer modular plugs in standard configurations to terminate modular cords for patching or work area applications. Modular plugs can be terminated to the exact cable length needed in order to maintain a neater, more organized installation. The plugs terminate twisted-pair cable with 26-22 AWG (0.40mm to 0.64mm) solid or 7-strand conductors with an insulated conductor diameter of 0.86–0.99mm (0.034–0.039 in.). All plug contacts have 50 microinches minimum of gold plating over nickel and meet FCC CFR 47 part 68 subpart F, and IEC 60603-7 specifications.

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

P-8-8 . . . . . . . . . .

P-8-8SS . . . . . . . .

P-6-6 . . . . . . . . . .

8-position modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Tyco crimp tools)

8-position modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Stewart crimp tools)

6-position modular plug with 6 contacts*

S210 Products

P-8-8K . . . . . . . . .

PS-8-8 . . . . . . . . .

P-6-4 . . . . . . . . . .

S110 Products

8-position keyed modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Tyco crimp tools)

8-position shielded modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Tyco crimp tools)

6-position modular plug with 4 contacts*

S66 Products/ Protection

Technical Tip!

*Siemon 6-position plugs provide empty slots in the outer positions to prevent deformation of jack pins 1 & 8 when inserted into an 8-position modular jack. AllPrep Cable Preparation Tool page 12.8, PT-908 Crimp Tool page 12.9, Stranded Cable below

Factory terminated and tested modular cords are required to achieve consistent category 5e or 6 channel performance. Field termination is not recommended.

Residential

Tools and Testers

STRANDED CABLE

Web Resources

The same high-grade, stranded cable used to make Siemon modular cords is also available in dispenser packs for field termination. The cable is shipped in a “tangle-free” carton for hassle-free use in the field. Part #

System Design Guide

Description

9E6R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 6 cable, 4-pair stranded, 24 AWG (7 strands @ 0.20mm), white jacket, 305m (1,000 ft.) dispenser pack

Standards Update

9E5R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e cable, 4-pair stranded, 24 AWG (7 strands @ 0.20mm), white jacket, 305m (1,000 ft.) dispenser pack 9E5R2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e cable, 2-pair stranded, 24 AWG (7 strands @ 0.20mm), white jacket, 305m (1,000 ft.) dispenser pack 9E5R1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 5e cable, 1-pair stranded, 24 AWG (7 strands @ 0.20mm), white jacket, 305m (1,000 ft.) dispenser pack

Glossary

S110® Patch Plugs page 9.11, S210® Patch Plugs page 8.9

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

4.5

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

CATEGORY 5e CABLE ASSEMBLIES QP25M-AA-(XX) . . . . . . . . 25-pair, double ended 110-to-110, cable assembly with male connectors

CATEGORY 3 CABLE ASSEMBLIES A25B-DE-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, double-ended, cable assembly with female connectors

Category 5e

A25B-SE-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, single-ended, cable assembly with one female connector B25A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, double-ended, cable assembly with one male and one female connector B25B-DE-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, double-ended, cable assembly with male connectors B25B-SE-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, single-ended, cable assembly with one male connector Use (XX) to specify length: 05 = 1.52m (5 ft.), 10 = 3.05m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.57m (15 ft.), 25 = 7.62m (25 ft.)

S110 Products

EZ-TWIST® CONNECTOR

Residential

Our 25-pair cable assemblies are factory-tested for opens, shorts, and continuity. They feature FCC part 68 subpart F compliant gold plated contacts for extended reliability over time. Category 3 connector ends are available in single-ended male or female, double-ended male or female, or one male/one female configurations. All 25-pair cable assemblies are made with ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B-2 category 5e or 3 compliant cable.

S210 Products

S66 Products/ Protection

ibl

CATEGORY 5e AND 3 25-PAIR CABLE ASSEMBLIES

Modular Patching

Work Area

Category 3

Dramatically reduce coax cable termination time with Siemon’s new EZ-Twist connector. No tools or crimping are required. To terminate, simply twist the connector onto the cable for a secure, high performance connection. EZ-Twist also eliminates screwon connections to outlets. Simply push the connector onto an outlet to lock it in place, pull to remove. This feature is ideal in high-density installations where space is limited and conventional connectors are difficult to secure to outlets. Part #

Description

HC-EZ-(X)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . EZ-Twist coax connector, bag of 50

Tools and Testers

Use 1st (X) to specify cable type: 5 = RG59, 6 = RG6 Use 2nd (X) to specify shield type: T = Tri-shield, Q = Quad-shield

Web Resources

RG6 F-TYPE COAX CONNECTOR System Design Guide

Standards Update

The RG6 connector is a high quality coaxial connector designed to terminate RG6 coaxial cable that has a standard diameter over jacket (DOJ) of 6.9mm (0.27 in). The connector meets SCTE and Bellcore specifications and is constructed of high quality brass with corrosion-resistant plating. The long ribbed ferrule ensures maximum connector/cable retention. Part #

Description

RG6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG6 F-type connector

Glossary

Coaxial Crimp Tool page 12.9, AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool (CPT-RGTP) page 12.8

Index

4.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

CATEGORY 6 CROSS-CONNECT WIRE Modular Patching

Siemon’s category 6 cross-connect is ideal for cross-connect applications up to 5 meters. It can be used for category 6 or category 5e installations using S66,™ S110® and S210® wiring blocks. Part #

Racks and Cable Management

Description

CJ6-W4-1000 . . . . . . . . . Category 6, 4-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm), cross-connect wire, pair colors blue/orange/green/brown, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Cross-Connect Wire Dispenser see below

Fiber

CATEGORY 5e CROSS-CONNECT WIRE

Industrial

Siemon’s cross-connect wire utilizes a unique “webbing” manufacturing process which binds conductors of a twisted-pair together to maintain consistent conductor spacing and pair twists that will not loosen during crossconnect installation. This high performance product exceeds category 5e specifications and is ideal for use with our S66 and S110 wiring blocks.

Shielded/ Screened

Part #

S210 Products

Description

CJ5-W4-1000 . . . . . . . . . Category 5e, 4-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire, pair colors blue/orange/green/brown, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool

S110 Products

CJ5-W2-1000 . . . . . . . . . Category 5e, 2-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire, pair colors blue/orange, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool

S66 Products/ Protection

CJ5-W2-1000-07 . . . . . . . Category 5e, 2-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire, pair colors orange/green, 305m. (1,000 ft.) spool CJ5-W1-1000-03 . . . . . . . Category 5e, 1-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire with red/white conductors, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool CJ5-W1-1000-06 . . . . . . . Category 5e, 1-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire with blue/white conductors, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool

Cross-Connect Wire Dispenser see below

Residential Technical Tip! Use the Siemon cable preparation tool CPT-WEB (see page 12.8) to quickly separate CJ5 webbed conductors prior to termination.

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

CROSS-CONNECT WIRE DISPENSER

System Design Guide

Siemon’s new cross-connect wire dispenser is designed to mount to standard EIA 19 in. (482.6mm) racks to facilitate quick and easy installation of cross-connect wire. The dispenser has 431.8mm (17.0 in.) of horizontal capacity for loading up to five (5) spools of 1-pair cross-connect wire and can also accommodate other configurations. The dispenser bar is supported by open-end brackets on each side for easy access when reloading spools. Part #

Standards Update

Glossary

Description

CWD-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 in. (482.6mm) cross-connect wire dispenser

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

4.7

Work Area

Modular Patching

S210® PRODUCTS

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 CONNECTION SYSTEM

VERTICALLY MOUNTED S210 BLOCKS

S210 TOWER SYSTEM

(pages 8.2 – 8.7)

(page 8.7)

(pages 8.4 – 8.5)

(pages 8.6 – 8.7)

Product Applications

S210 Products

S110 Products

Mounting Options

S66 Products/ Protection

Capacity

High performance connectivity for telecommunications rooms or consolidation points.

Mounts on S89D brackets, ideal for system upgrades from S66 fields.

Medium to high density applications requiring superior cable management.

Rack mounting of blocks eliminates need for separate wall fields and enables patching to active equipment.

Wall

89D Bracket (Wall)

Wall

19 inch Rack

64-192 Pair

32-48 Pair

192-320 Pair

64-192 Pair

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

8.0

S210 FIELD TERMINATED 19 INCH PANELS

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

SECTION CONTENTS

Modular Patching

S210® Connection System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 S210 Field Termination Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3

Racks and Cable Management

S210 Connecting Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 S210 Designation Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 S110®/S210 Designation Label Sheets . . . . . . . . . 8.3

Modular Patch Cords and Components

S210 Tower® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 S210 Tower Field Termination Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Large-Scale Vertical Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . 8.5

Fiber

Small-Scale Vertical Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 S210 Tower Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 Industrial

S210 Field Terminated 19 Inch Panels . . . . . . 8.6 – 8.7 S210 Field-Terminated 19 Inch Panels with Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 Vertically Mounted S210 Field Termination Kits . . . . 8.7

1970s

S210 Patch Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 – 8.9

During the 1970s, The Siemon Company’s “66” product line continued

S210 Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9

to grow, offering greater variety for the telecommunications industry.

S210 to MC ® Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9

Siemon pioneered and patented the pre-wired block, reducing

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9

Shielded/ Screened

installation time, improving installation quality, and better serving the needs of its customers.

The 1970s was also a decade of significant growth in the interconnect

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

industry, fueled by the mounting electronic PBX and key system revolution and contributing to Siemon’s growth in the U.S. and expansion into Canada and Puerto Rico.

Residential

Tools and Testers

But something even more exciting was happening at The Siemon Company. Renowned for its manufacturing excellence, Siemon had

Web Resources

essentially been an OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) supplier, that is, it manufactured products for other companies and received

System Design Guide

little or no brand recognition. All of this started to change in the late ’70s, however, as “66” block sales and the company’s reputation for

Standards Update

high quality and innovation continued to increase. Customers now began to specify Siemon-made products. They wanted Siemon because

Glossary

they recognized the name and wanted the best. Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

8.1

Work Area

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

S210 ® CONNECTION SYSTEM

1 4

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

The Siemon S210 offers the best connecting block performance in the telecommunications industry. Known as the stealth™ block, its NEXT performance is so good that it is virtually invisible when used as a consolidation point in a category 6 channel. The Siemon S210 block is the ideal migration path for Voice over IP (VoIP) applications. It can be used to support existing cross-connects for standard phone systems today and enables upgrades to a category 6 rated solution for a seamless network transition. The S210’s inherent high performance helps to maximize throughput, thereby improving the overall Quality of Service (QoS) required for VoIP.

3 2 5

Colored Labels

Designation strip with interchangeable colored labels can be mounted between each row of connecting blocks 2

Superior Design

Easy Termination Utilizes same termination practices as existing S110 product and is compatible with all single-position S110 termination tools

Cable entering through access openings in base is concealed by designation labels

Pyramid™ Wire Entry System

Internal Crosstalk Barriers

Utilizes same wiring base footprint as standard S110® products to be fully compatible with existing S110 mounting and cable management solutions

Stand-Off Legs Patented stand-off legs may be detached from the block before, during, or after installation on 64-pair version

Compatibility

Cable Access Openings

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

8.2

Provide superior NEXT performance (13dB NEXT margin over category 6 specifications) via 360° pair isolation.

W W W

S I E M O N

Separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time.

C O M

Allow cables to be routed through the rear of the block directly to the point of termination.

Work Area

S210® FIELD TERMINATION KITS Modular Patching

Complete S210 installation kits include S210 wiring blocks with detachable legs*, S210 connecting blocks, and label holders with white designation labels. Part#

Description

Racks and Cable Management

S210AB2-64FT . . . . . . . . . 64-pair, S210 field termination kit height: 45.7mm (1.80 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.7mm (3.26 in.) S210AB2-128FT . . . . . . . . 128-pair, S210 field termination kit

Modular Patch Cords and Components

height: 91.4mm (3.60 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.7mm (3.26 in.) S210AB2-192FT . . . . . . . . 192-pair, S210 field termination kit height: 275mm (10.81 in.), width: 272mm (10.71 in.), depth: 82.7mm (3.26 in.)

S110 ®/S210 Multi-Pair Impact Tool, page 12.6, S210 Cable Assemblies, page 8.9 S210 Patch Plug, page 8.8 – 8.9 Category 6 Cross-connect Wire, page 4.7

*Legs detachable on 64-pair version only

4-pair S210 impact tool seats S210 connecting blocks and terminates and trims wires on both the cable and cross-connect side of the connecting blocks.

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 CONNECTING BLOCK

S210 Products

Siemon S210 blocks terminate 22-26 AWG (0.64mm – 0.40mm) solid or 7-strand wires. They also incorporate markings to designate tip and ring conductors, color-coded pairs on each block and Siemon’s patent-pending Pyramid™ wire entry system to expedite lacing of pairs. Part #

Fiber

S110 Products

Description

S210C-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair, S210 connecting block

S66 Products/ Protection

S210 DESIGNATION LABELS

Residential

Tools and Testers

Description

S110-HLDR. . . . . . . . . . . . Transparent plastic label holders, bag of six S210-LBL-2. . . . . . . . . . . . 4-pair S210 marked white labels, bag of six

Web Resources

System Design Guide

S110/S210 DESIGNATION LABEL SHEETS Siemon’s S110/S210 designation label sheets provide the ability to custom print labels used on S110 or S210 blocks.* The sheets can be used to print 2-, 3-, 4-, or 5-pair labels and eliminate the need to order separate sheets for different configurations. There are 20 labels per side and both sides are marked so they can be reversed and re-printed in case of an error. Part #

Standards Update

Glossary

Description

S110-SHT-(X) . . . . . . . . . . S110/S210 Designation label sheets, package of six Use (X) to specify color: 2 = white, 3 = red, 4 = gray, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue, 7 = green, 8 = violet, 9 = orange, 60 = brown *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

8.3

Work Area

S210 ® TOWER ® SYSTEM

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

Each Tower comes complete with the appropriate quantity of S210 connecting blocks and mounting hardware

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Optional vertical cable managers can be mounted between towers and provide greater access to cables

Includes S110B1RMS cable managers with covers for horizontal cable distribution

Fiber

Industrial

S210 Block Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Features Siemon’s high performance S210 block for performance far exceeding category 6 specifications.

Vertical Cable Management Optional cable duct available for providing a single, large pathway at base of Tower for routing cables horizontally

Residential

Designation label holders with white designation strips are provided for circuit identification

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Tower assembly provides pathways for routing and protecting cables from entry all the way to the point of termination.

Robust Design

Standards Update

Glossary

Screws are used to secure wiring bases and cable managers to Tower frame. Index

8.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Designation Label Sheets page 8.3, S210 Cable Assemblies page 8.9

Work Area

S210速 TOWER速 FIELD TERMINATION KITS Part #

Modular Patching

Description

S210MB2-192FT. . . . . . . . 192-pair, S210 Tower field termination kit height: 406mm (16 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

Racks and Cable Management

S210MB2-256FT. . . . . . . . 256-pair, S210 Tower field termination kit height: 541mm (21.31 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.) S210MB2-320FT. . . . . . . . 320-pair, S210 Tower field termination kit height: 676mm (26.62 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Each kit includes adequate connecting blocks to fully populate Tower

Fiber

LARGE-SCALE VERTICAL CABLE MANAGERS Industrial

The S188 large scale vertical cable manager for the S110 速/S210 Towers has been enhanced to accommodate our quarter-turn RS-CH cable managers. With the RS-CH managers installed, additional vertical channels can be integrated into the main channel to better segregate cables and cross-connect wire. Part #

Shielded/ Screened

Description

S188-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . Large-scale vertical cable manager for use with 192-pair S210 Tower height: 406mm (16 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

S210 Products

S188-400 . . . . . . . . . . . . Large-scale vertical cable manager for use with 256-pair S210 Tower height: 541mm (21.31 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.) S188-500 . . . . . . . . . . . . Large-scale vertical cable manager for use with 320-pair S210 Tower height: 676mm (26.62 in.), width: 216mm (8.50 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

RS-CH High Capacity Cable Managers page 3.5

Residential

SMALL-SCALE VERTICAL CABLE MANAGERS Part #

Description

S110M-WM-300 . . . . . . . Small-scale vertical cable manager, for use with 192-pair S210 Tower height: 406mm (16 in.), width: 76.2mm (3.0 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

Tools and Testers

S110M-WM-400 . . . . . . . Small-scale vertical cable manager, for use with 256-pair S210 Tower height: 541mm (21.31 in.), width: 76.2mm (3.0 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.) S110M-WM-500 . . . . . . . Small-scale vertical cable manager, for use with 320-pair S210 Tower height: 676mm (26.62 in.), width: 76.2mm (3.0 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.)

Web Resources

System Design Guide

S210 TOWER OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES Part #

Standards Update

Description

S188-WD . . . . . . . . . . . . Metal duct for additional horizontal cable management at base of S210 Tower height: 114.3mm (4.50 in.), width: 215.9mm (8.50 in.), depth: 203.2mm (8 in.)

S188-GND

S188-GND . . . . . . . . . . . Ground kit consists of one, 3-position grounding busbar height: 9.0mm (.35 in.), width: 50.8mm (2.0 in.), depth: 12.3mm (.49 in.)

S188-WD

W W W

S I E M O N

Glossary

Index

C O M

8.5

Work Area

S210 ® FIELD TERMINATION 19 INCH PANELS

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

Black anodized panels can be mounted directly to a 19 inch EIA standard rack or cabinet

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Covers Included Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Panels with cable managers include covers to hide cables and provide a clean appearance.

Each panel comes complete with the appropriate quantity of S210 connecting blocks, mounting hardware, and label holders with white designation labels

Superior Cable Routing

Field-terminated panels are available with or without S110®/S210 cable managers and covers

Residential Features Siemon‘s S210 connecting blocks for ultimate performance far exceeding category 6 specifications

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Patented cable access openings in base allow cables to be routed from behind the panel directly to the point of termination.

Pyramid™ Wire Entry System

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

8.6

Separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time.

W W W

S I E M O N

Designation Label Sheets page 8.3, 19 inch S210 Cable Managers page 8.7

C O M

Work Area

S210ÂŽ FIELD-TERMINATED 19 INCH PANELS Part #

Description

Modular Patching

RMS

S210DB2-64RFT . . . . . . . . . . . 64-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit . . . . . . . 1 S210DB2-128RFT . . . . . . . . . . 128-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit . . . . . . . 2

Racks and Cable Management

S210DB2-192RFT . . . . . . . . . . 192-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit . . . . . . . 3

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) Each kit includes adequate connecting blocks to fully populate panel.

Industrial

S210 FIELD-TERMINATED 19 INCH PANELS WITH CABLE MANAGERS Part #

Description

Shielded/ Screened

RMS

S210DB2-64RWM . . . . . . . . . 64-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit. . . . . . . . 2 with cable managers and covers

S210 Products

S210DB2-128RWM . . . . . . . . 128-pair, 19 inch S210 field termination kit . . . . . . . 3 with cable managers and covers

S110 Products

See Cable Management Capacity table on page 3.0

S66 Products/ Protection

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) Each kit includes adequate connecting blocks to fully populate panel.

Residential

VERTICALLY MOUNTED S210 FIELD TERMINATION KITS

Tools and Testers

These 32-pair or 48-pair S210 blocks can be mounted on the same S89B or S89D brackets that hold our S66â&#x201E;˘ blocks. The high density 48-pair kit provides category 6 performance in the same footprint as a standard M1-50 66 block. Field-terminated kits include the S210 connecting blocks, designation labels and label holders. Part #

Web Resources

Description

S210DB1-48FT-89 . . . . . . . . . 48-pair S210 field termination kit on an 89-type retainer.*

System Design Guide

S210DB1-32FT-89 . . . . . . . . . 32-pair S210 field termination kit on an 89-type retainer.*

Standards Update

Glossary

*S89 brackets are not included and must be ordered separately (see page 10.8).

S210DB1-48FT-89

W W W

S210DB1-32FT-89

S I E M O N

C O M

Index

8.7

Work Area

S210 ® PATCH PLUGS

Modular Patching

Directional arrow provided to assist in proper insertion orientation

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Tapered lacing details enable easy field termination

Ergonomic handle aids insertion and removal of patch plug

Fiber

Industrial

Field Installable Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Siemon is the only company to offer a field installable category 6 patching solution.

Durable, flame-retardant, clear thermoplastic housing keeps conductors visible during and after termination

Performance NEXT Performance for a Siemon S210 Patch Plug mated to a S210 Connecting Block*

-40

Technical Tip!

-50

Residential

-60

Limit

(dB)

-70

Typical

-80

Worst Case

-90

Tools and Testers

Margin at 250 MHz Worst Case 2.2 dB Typical 6.7 dB

-100 -110 -120 1

100

250

Frequency (MHz)

Web Resources

System Design Guide

The S210 4-pair plug provides unparalleled performance, with 6.7dB NEXT (typical) and 2.2dB NEXT (worst case) at 250 MHz.

Easy termination

Glossary

8.8

Simply snap the base and cover together to mass terminate all conductors.

W W W

S I E M O N

Each plug housing includes polarization to ensure proper orientation of the plug when connecting to the S210 connecting block

Standards Update

Index

When S210 to MC® 6 cable assemblies are configured in the field, The Siemon Company recommends that Siemon MC 6 modular cords be purchased (see page 4.3) and cut in half. The cut end of the cord can then be field terminated to the S210P patch plug while the factory terminated and tested modular plug end remains undisturbed.

C O M

Work Area

S210® PATCH PLUGS Modular Patching

S210 patch plugs can be field-terminated to 23 to 26 AWG (0.40mm to 0.51mm) solid or 7-strand twisted-pair cable S210P4 . . . . . .

S210P2 . . . . . .

S210P1 . . . . . .

Category 6, 4-pair, fieldterminated, S210 patch plug

2-pair, fieldterminated, S210 patch plug

1-pair, fieldterminated, S210 patch plug

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

4-Pair Stranded Cable page 4.5

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

Description

S210P4-P4-(XX) . . . . . . . . Category 6, 4-pair, double-ended, S210 stranded cable assembly, white jacket

Use (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Custom lengths available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

S210P2-P2-(XX) . . . . . . . . 2-pair, double-ended, S210 stranded cable assembly, white jacket S210P1-P1-(XX) . . . . . . . . 1-pair, double-ended, S210 stranded cable assembly, white jacket

S210 Products

S110 Products

S210 TO MC ® CABLE ASSEMBLIES

S66 Products/ Protection

The S210 to MC cable assemblies combine Siemon’s latest and highest performing plugs for patching network equipment to S210 connecting blocks or providing test access to S210 termination fields. The combination of plugs, high performance cable and 100% factory transmission testing ensures performance is compatible with category 6 channel specifications. Part #

Residential

Description

S210P4A4-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . Category 6, 4-pair, S210P4 to MC 6 stranded cable assembly, T568B wiring, color matching jacket/boot

Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03 = 0.9m (3 ft.), 05 = 1.5m (5 ft.), 07 = 2.1m (7 ft.), 10 = 3.1m (10 ft.), 15 = 4.6m (15 ft.), 20 = 6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green Custom lengths available upon request. Contact our Customer Service Department for more information.

S210P4T4-(XX)-(XX). . . . . . Category 6, 4-pair, S210P4 to MC 6 stranded cable assembly, T568A wiring, color matching jacket/boot S210P2E2-(XX)-B(XX). . . . . 2-pair, S210P2 to MC 6 stranded cable assembly, 10Base-T wiring, white jacket with colored boot

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

ACCESSORIES Part #

Description

Standards Update

ICON-OVAL-(XX) . . . . . . . 25 Colored oval icons for 1-pair S210 patch plugs CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 25 Colored icon tabs for 2- and 4-pair S210 patch plugs (phone on one side, computer on reverse) TAB-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Colored blank tabs for 2- and 4-pair S210 patch plugs Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear (TAB-(XX) only), 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 07 = green, 08 = violet, 09 = orange, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white*, 60 = brown, 80 = light ivory Add “B” for bulk pack of 100* *Not available for ICON-OVAL-(XX) Laser-printed customized tabs now available. Contact our Customer Service Department for ordering information.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Glossary

Index

8.9

Entre cada hilera de bloques de conexión pueden montarse tiras de designaciones con etiquetas de colores intercambiables

Utiliza las mismas técnicas de terminación empleadas para los productos S110® existentes y es compatible con todas las herramientas de terminación S110 de posición única

BARRERAS INTERNAS CONTRA DIAFONÍA Consigue aislamiento del par en 360° para proporcionar un desempeño NEXT superior (13dB de margen NEXT sobre las especificaciones para la categoría 6).

SISTEMA PYRAMID™ DE ENTRADA DE ALAMBRE Separa los conductores pareados al enlazar los cables para simplificar y reducir el tiempo de instalación.

ABERTURAS DE ACCESO PARA CABLES Permiten enrutar los cables a través del fondo del bloque directamente para el punto de terminación.

Patas patentadas que pueden retirarse del bloque antes, durante o después de la instalación, en la versión de 64 pares

Utiliza la misma área de base de cableado que los productos estándar S110 para ser totalmente compatible con las soluciones ya existentes S110 de montaje y acomodación de cables

PANELES DE 19 PULGADAS S210 Y S110 TERMINADOS EN CAMPO

El cable entrante a través de las aberturas de acceso en la base es ocultado por las etiquetas de designaciones

PATENTADO

PRODUCTOS S210 Y S110

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS S210 Y S110

KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S210® Y S110®

PATENTADO

Los kits de instalación completos incluyen bloques de cableado con patas separables*, bloques de conexión y portaetiquetas con etiquetas blancas para designaciones.

KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S210 Y S110 TOWER®

PATENTADO

KITS DE TERMINACIÓN EN CAMPO S210 DE MONTAJE VERTICAL

PATENTADO

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PATENTADO

Desempeño 160 MHz

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN S66M1-50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 pares, bloque M1-50

SOPORTES PARA BLOQUES S66™

PATENTADO

S89D

S89B

PATENTADO

CLIPS DE ACERO INOXIDABLE:* SA1-SS-(XXXX). . . . . . . . . clip de 2 posiciones, acero inoxidable *No es recomendado para uso en aplicaciones de datos.

Use (XXXX) para especificar la cantidad; 100 = 100/bolsa, 1000 = 1000/bolsa

PATENTADO

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN SMBC-2-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Clip de puenteo TPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aparato de Prueba/Extractor

PRODUCTOS S66 Y DE PROTECCIÓN

Use (X) para especificar el color: 2 = blanco, 3 = rojo, 5 = amarillo, 6 = azul, 7 = verde, 8 = violeta

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN STA-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicador de estado de línea

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

PRODUCTOS S66 Y DE PROTECCIÓN

PARTE # MC4

DESCRIPCIÓN M4 X 50

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN D10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tira de designaciones blanca, rayada

ETIQUETAS Estas etiquetas adhesivas, rayadas, permite que los técnicos escriban y mantengan la información de circuitos sobre nuestras tapas plásticas de encajar a presión MC4.

PARTE # DESCRIPCIÓN MC4-LBL-25. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Para tapa MC4 (4 X 50 bloque M) numeradas 1-25

PATENTADO

MÓDULO PICO PROTECTOR®

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

S210® CONNECTION SYSTEM ✓

Part of Siemon’s 10G ip solution, the S210 block is the ideal for Voice over IP (VoIP) applications. It can be used to support existing cross-connects for standard phone systems today and enables upgrades to a category 6 rated solution for a seamless network transition. The S210 block’s inherent high performance helps to maximize throughput, thereby improving the overall Quality of Service (QoS) required for VoIP. Patented stand-off legs may be detached from the block before, during, or after installation on 64pair version

Utilizes same termination practices as existing S110® product and is compatible with all single-position S110 termination tools

Utilizes same wiring base footprint as standard S110 products to be fully compatible with existing S110 mounting and cable management solutions

4-pair S210C series connecting blocks with color-coded pairs on each block

Designation strip with interchangeable colored labels can be mounted between each row of connecting blocks Cable entry through access opening in base is concealed by designation labels Internal crosstalk barriers provide superior NEXT performance (13dB margin over category 6 specifications) via 360° pair isolation Pyramid™ wire entry system separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time Cable access openings allow cables to be routed through the rear of the block directly to the point of termination

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

210 PRODUCTS

The Siemon Company S210速 connecting block exceeds all industry requirements describing category 6 connecting hardware performance. The Siemon S210 connecting block is backward compatible with connecting blocks and systems of lower performing categories. Siemon S210 Near-End Crosstalk Performance:

-40 -50 -60

Limit

-70

(dB)

210 PRODUCTS

PERFORMANCE CHART

Typical

-80

Worst Case Margin at 250 MHz Worst Case 12.7 dB Typical 13.9 dB

-90 -100 -110 -120

100

250

Frequency (MHz)

FEXT Loss at 250 MHz (dB)

Return Loss at 250 MHz (dB) 24 22

+ 5.3 dB Margin

+ 5.9 dB Margin

20 18 16 14 12 10 Limit

T H E

Worst Case

S I E M O N

70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30

Typical

C O M P A N Y

+ 22.1 dB Margin

+ 26.1 dB Margin

Attenuation at 250 MHz (dB) 0.35 0.3 0.25 0.2 0.15 0.1

+ .12 dB Margin

+ .15 dB Margin

Worst Case

Typical

0.05 Limit

Worst Case

0 Typical

Limit

ORDERING INFORMATION S210 Tower Field Termination Kits:

Complete S210 field termination kits include S210 wiring blocks with detachable legs*, S210 connecting blocks, and label holders with white designation labels. S210AB2-64FT ............64-pair, field termination kit S210AB2-128FT ..........128-pair, field termination kit S210AB2-192FT ..........192-pair, field termination kit *Legs detachable on 64-pair version only

S210MB2-192FT .........192-pair, Tower field termination kit S210MB2-256FT .........256-pair, Tower field termination kit S210MB2-320FT .........320-pair, Tower field termination kit Each kit includes adequate connecting blocks to complete each 16-pair termination strip on the S210 wiring block

S210 Field Terminated 19 inch Panels:

S210 Field-Terminated 19 inch panels with Cable Managers:

S210DB2-64RFT ........64-pair, 19 inch field termination kit, 1 RMS S210DB2-128RFT ......128-pair, 19 inch field termination kit, 2 RMS S210DB2-192RFT ......192-pair, 19 inch field termination kit, 3 RMS Each panel includes adequate connecting blocks to complete each16-pair termination strip on the S210 wiring block

S210DB2-64RWM .......64-pair, 19 inch field termination kit with cable managers and covers, 2 RMS S210DB2-128RWM .....128-pair, 19 inch field termination kit with cable managers and covers, 3 RMS Each panel includes adequate connecting blocks to complete each16-pair termination strip on the S210 wiring block

210 PRODUCTS

S210速 Field Termination Kits:

Wall Mount S210 Cable Managers:

S110B1RMS

S110B2RMS

S110B1RMS.................White cable manager without legs, 1 RMS S110B2RMS.................White cable manager without legs, 2 RMS

S110A1RMS

S110A2RMS

S110A1RMS ................White cable manager with legs, 1 RMS S110A2RMS ................White cable manager with legs, 2 RMS

T H E

S I E M O N

C O M P A N Y

S210® Connecting Block:

S210 Designation Labels:

S110-HLDR

S210-LBL

S110-SHT

S210C-4................4-pair, S210 connecting block

S110/S210 Covers:

Tools:

S110-CVR-50-(XX) .............................. 32-pair S210 cover S110-CVR-100-(XX) ............................ 64-pair S210 cover Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear, 01 = black, 20 = ivory

S814-110..............Single-position 110 or S210 impact tool S788J4-210...........4-pair S210 termination tool S788J4B-210.........4-pair replacement cutting blade for 4-pair S210 head S788J4H-210 ........4-pair replacement head, including housing, cutting blade and insertion assembly

S210 Patch Plug:

S210 to S210 Patch Cords:

S210 TO MC® 6 Patch Cords:

S210P4.................................................. 4-pair, category 6, field-terminated, S210 patch plug

S210P4-P4-(XX)...................................... 4-pair, category 6, double-ended S210 stranded cable assembly, white jacket Use (XX) to specify length of factoryterminated and tested cable assemblies: 03=0.91m (3 ft.), 05=1.5m (5 ft.), 07=2.13m (7 ft.), 10=3.05m (10 ft.), 15=4.57m (15 ft.), 20=6.1m (20 ft.)

S210P4A4-(XX)-B(XX) ............................. 4-pair, category 6, S210P4 to MC6 stranded cable assembly, T568B wiring, color matching jacket/boot S210P4T4-(XX)-B(XX) .............................. 4-pair,category 6, S210P4 to MC6 stranded cable assembly, T568A wiring, color matching jacket/boot Use 1st (XX) to specify cord length: 03=0.91m (3 ft.), 05=1.5m (5 ft.), 07=2.13m (7 ft.), 10=3.05m (10 ft.), 15=4.57m (15 ft.), 20=6.1m (20 ft.) Use 2nd (XX) to specify boot color: 01=black, 02=white, 03=red, 05=yellow, 06=blue, 07=green

Because we are continuously improving our products, The Siemon Company reserves the right to change specifications and availability without prior notice. S210®, S110® , Pyramid™ and 10G ip™ are trademarks of The Siemon Company

Custom lengths are available upon request. Contact out Customer Service Department for more information

The Americas Watertown, CT USA Phone (1) 860 945 4200

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Europe/Middle East/Africa Surrey, England Phone (44 ) 0 1483 480040

Asia/Pacific Shanghai, P.R. China Phone (86) 21 6390 6778

PROD-SS-210 Rev. F 8/03

S110-HLDR ............Transparent plastic label holders, bag of 6 S210-LBL-2 ............4-pair S210 marked white labels, bag of 6 S110-SHT-(X)*........S110®/S210 designation label sheets, package of 6 Use (X) to specify color: 2 = white, 3 = red, 4 = gray, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue, 7 = green, 8 = violet, 9 = orange, 60 = brown *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software

210 PRODUCTS

O R D E R I N G I N F O R M AT I O N

Work Area

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

RACKS AND CABLE MANAGEMENT

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products

Vertical Side Rail Capacity Cable Manager Covers Accessories

S66 Products/ Protection

RS2 RACK SYSTEM

RS RACK SYSTEM

RS-E RACK SYSTEM

(page 3.3)

(page 3.4)

(page 3.5)

117mm x 152mm (4.6 in. x 6.0 in.)

76mm x 152mm (3.0 in. x 6.0 in.)

76mm x 370mm (3.0 in. x 14.5 in.)

Multi-piece snap-on

None

•

Rack top cable tray Power strip • Double-sided rack mount cable manager • Rear cable managers

•

Rack top cable tray Power strip • Vertical patching channels • Rear cable managers

•

Power strip Vertical patching channels • Rear cable managers

Residential CABLE MANAGER CAPACITY TABLE

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

The following capacity table is provided for planning purposes. The values shown reflect a combination of actual and calculated capacity and represent a 100% fill. These values were derived using properly dressed cables and can be adversely reduced by poor cable routing practices.

Index

3.0

Catalog Page Numbers

Part Number

W W W

Cable Diameter 0.15

0.17

0.19

0.21

0.23

0.25

99 203 422 737 1159 122 126 306

77 158 328 574 902 95 98 238

62 126 263 459 722 76 78 190

50 103 215 376 591 62 64 156

42 86 179 313 493 51 53 130

35 73 152 265 417 43 45 110

CABLE MANAGEMENT RACKS AND ACCESSORIES RS2* 3.2 834 649 RS* 3.4 496 386 RS-E* 3.5 1488 1158 RS-CH, PH-3 3.5, 3.8 283 220 RS-CNL 3.5 1292 1006 RS-CNL3 3.5 832 647 * Values shown are for the interior of each vertical channel and should be doubled to determine total rack capacity.

519 309 927 176 805 518

425 253 759 144 659 424

354 210 633 120 549 353

300 178 535 101 465 299

CABLE MANAGERS S143, WM-143-5 S144, WM-144-5 S145, WM-145-5 S146 S147 RWM-1, RWM-1DS S110B1RMS-(XX), S110A1RMS-(XX), S110-RWM-(XX) S110B2RMS, S110A2RMS-(XX), S110-RWM2-(XX), S110-RWM-2DS

S I E M O N

C O M

3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.9 3.13, 9.21 3.13, 9.21

Work Area

SECTION CONTENTS

Modular Patching

RS2 Rack System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2 – 3.3 Rack Top Cable Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3

Racks and Cable Management

Double-Sided Rack Mount Cable Managers . . . . . . 3.3 RS Rack System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4 – 3.5 Extended Depth RS Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Rack Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5 Zone Unit Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6 – 3.7 Consolidation Point Enclosures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7

Fiber

Panel Access Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Stand-Off Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Industrial

Rack-it ™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.8 Rack Hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 Multi-Access Horizontal Cable Managers . . . . . . . . 3.9 WM Series Rack Mount Cable Managers . . . . . . . . 3.9 Cable Hangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.9 Double-Sided 19 Inch Equipment Shelf . . . . . . . . . 3.10 Single-Sided 19 Inch Equipment Shelves . . . . . . . . 3.10 19 to 23 Inch Panel Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.10

Shielded/ Screened

1910s During the early decades that followed, The Siemon Company developed into a true plastics manufacturing and engineering powerhouse. A walk through the company museum in the Siemon

Rear Cable Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.11

Company’s world headquarters office, now located in Watertown, CT,

Reusable Hook and Loop Cable Managers . . . . . . 3.11

USA, bears testament to this fact and is quite like a trip through an

19 Inch S110 /S210 Cable Managers . . . . . . . . 3.12

antique novelty shop. In addition to the stag-horn handles and

S100A2 Wire Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 Wall Mount S110/S210 Cable Managers . . . . . . 3.13 S110/S210 Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.13

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

3-pole connecting blocks mentioned previously, Siemon manufactured such items as ear and mouth pieces for early telephones, rifle butts,

Residential

lamp switches, battery terminals, and buttons. From the beginning, The Siemon Company was a recognized leader in the plastics field and

Tools and Testers

built a well-earned reputation for high-quality, dependable products. Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

3.1

Work Area

RS2 RACK SYSTEM

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

Headers with slotted carriage bolt holes on top of rack easily locate standard 304.8mm (12 in.) ladder tray

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Ladders can be brought in from sides, front or rear

Modular snap-on design of vertical cable manager covers eliminates the need to remove full length covers for each patch cord addition or change

Fiber

Industrial

High Capacity Side Rails Shielded/ Screened

Relocatable quarter-turn hook and loop cable managers can be attached in side channels to manage various size cable bundles

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

117 mm (4.6 in.) x 152mm (6 in.) vertical side rails provide additional space for easy routing of horizontal or backbone cables.

Integrated Vertical Management

Cable access holes on side rails allow cables to be routed between adjacent racks

Mounting holes provided for anchoring rack to floor

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Vertical cable management enables easy, quick addition and removal of patch cords while effectively retaining them through the channel.

Standards Update

Glossary

iemon RS2 series cable management rack system provides high volume cable management for proper routing of both horizontal/backbone cabling as well as patch cords. Vertical channels and cable managers conceal and route cable for a neat and clean installation.

Covered Cable Channels

Covers on vertical cable management channel conceal cable slack and present a clean, professional appearance.

Double-Sided Rack Mount Cable Manager page 3.3 Rack Top Cable Tray page 3.5, Rear Cable Managers page 3.11

Index

3.2

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

RS2 RACK SYSTEM Modular Patching

RS2-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ft. x 19 in. (2.1m x 482mm) aluminum enhanced cable management rack system. Includes: rack assembly hardware, vertical cable managers with covers, and ground lug

Racks and Cable Management

height: 2.1m (7 ft.), width: 685.8mm (27 in.), depth: 457.2mm (18 in.)

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Add “-S” for steel Note: Aluminum racks are intended for use with connecting hardware and cable managers only. For mounting of active equipment, steel racks are recommended.

Fiber

RACK TOP CABLE TRAY

Industrial

This product is designed for use with Siemon’s RS and RS2 series cable management racks. The tray supports and manages cable bundles routed above the racks and eliminates the need for installing a ladder rack for routing cables. It easily fits into place without the use of tools or hardware and includes up to three (3) separate cable paths featuring relocatable quarter-turn cable managers for maximum flexibility. Re-usable hook and loop cable managers allow for quick cable additions or changes. Part #

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

Description

RS-TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack top cable tray includes nine quarter-turn cable managers and nine 457mm (18 in.) hook and loop cable managers

S110 Products

DOUBLE-SIDED RACK MOUNT CABLE MANAGERS

Residential

S66 Products/ Protection

These cable managers are designed for use with Siemon’s RS2 series cable management racks and use the same managers as the existing 2 RMS S110®/S210® cable manager but with a one piece, plastic cover. The front, cover snaps easily over cable managers and extends to meet flush with the vertical cable management channels of the RS2 to provide a clean patching environment. Part #

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

Description

S110-RWM-2DS . . . . . . . . Double-sided 19 inch cable manager, 2 RMS

System Design Guide

S110-RWM-2DS-front with cover

Standards Update

Glossary

See Cable Management Capacity table on page 3.0 Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

S110-RWM-2DS-rear

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

3.3

Work Area

RS RACK SYSTEM

Modular Patching

Twist-lock hook and loop cable managers can be custom located in side channels to manage various size cable bundles

Ladder channels on top of rack easily accommodate standard 305mm (12 in.) ladder tray

Racks and Cable Management

Cable management channel is available in 76mm (3 in.) or 152mm (6 in.) versions. Hook and loop cable managers can be inserted at the back of the channel for routing additional horizontal or backbone cables

Modular Patch Cords and Components Mounting holes for twist-lock cable managers are located in many positions on the front, side, back, and within channel for maximum flexibility

Fiber

Industrial

High Capacity Side Rails Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Mounting holes provided for anchoring rack to floor

76mm (3 in.) x 152mm (6 in.) vertical side rail channels on rack provide large area for routing high volumes of horizontal or backbone cables.

Twist-Lock Cable Managers

Residential Cable access holes allow cables to be routed from frontto-back on the rack

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

High capacity twist-lock cable managers lock into place quickly without use of screws or mounting tools. They can be easily located in a wide range of mounting holes to customize cable management to your application.

Optional Vertical Cable Channels

Glossary

3.4

Optional vertical cable management channels allow a high volume of patch cords to be routed between two racks or on a single rack.

W W W

S I E M O N

An optional 1.2m (4 ft.) power strip (page 3.5) is available and mounts directly to rear of rack for providing power to active electronics mounted in rack

iemonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s cable management rack system (RS) combines a 2.1 meter (7 ft.) x 19 inch black rack with cable management accessories to provide a complete cable management solution. Ideal for all size installations, the rack features fully usable 45 RMS capacity.

Standards Update

Index

Removable channel retainers can be hinged left or right and located in any position along the vertical channel

C O M

Work Area

RS RACK SYSTEM RS-07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ft. x 19 inch (2.1m x 482mm) aluminum cable management rack system. Includes: rack assembly hardware, 10 high-capacity cable managers, 10 hook and loop cable managers, grommets, and ground lug

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

height: 2.1m (7 ft.), width: 609.6mm (24 in.), depth: 457.2mm (18 in.)

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Add “-S” for steel Note: Aluminum racks are intended for use with connecting hardware and cable managers only. For mounting of active equipment, steel racks are recommended.

Fiber

EXTENDED DEPTH RS RACKS

Industrial

Siemon has developed a rack for managing extra large volumes of horizontal cable. The new extended depth rack features vertical channels which are 0.37m (14.5 in.) deep. These channels include multiple mounting holes allowing the user of Siemon’s quarter-turn, twist-lock hook and loop cable managers for properly managing large individual bundles of cables. The footers have also been re-designed to retain the (0.61m) 24 in. footprint. Part #

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

Description

RS-07E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ft. x 19 inch (2.1m x 482mm) aluminum extra-deep (0.37m [14.5 in]) cable management rack system. Includes rack assembly hardware, 19 high-capacity cable managers, 10 hook and loop managers, grommets and ground lug.

S110 Products

height: 2.1m (7 ft.), width: 609.6mm (24 in.), depth: 609.6mm (24 in.)

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

RACK ACCESSORIES RS-CNL. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS-CNL3 . . . . . . . . . . . .

RS-P04 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.1m x 152mm (7 ft. x 6 in.) vertical patching channel for mounting between 152mm (6 in.) deep racks (includes mounting hardware)

2.1m x 76mm (7 ft. x 3 in.) vertical patching channel for mounting between 76mm (3 in.) deep racks (includes mounting hardware)

1.2m (4 ft.) power strip for rear of rack, 10 outlets (includes mounting hardware)

Compatible for use with Siemon XLBET frames (see pages 9.8 – 9.9)

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

RS-CH . . . . . . . . . .

RS-CNL-MGR . . . . .

RS-VCM . . . . . . . .

Box of 10 high capacity cable managers for front of rack

Box of 10 channel retainers for RS-CNL and RS-CNL3

Box of 10 quarterturn (twist-lock) hook and loop cable managers [includes black 457.2mm (18 in.) manager]

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

3.5

Work Area

2 RMS ZONE UNIT ENCLOSURE (ZU-2) Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

The 19 inch 2 RMS Zone Unit Enclosure is a durable, user-friendly enclosure designed to house connecting hardware under raised flooring systems. The unit houses a 2 RMS rotating hinge to support Siemon’s HD,® CT,® or MAX® series patch panels. The ZU-2 is constructed of rugged 12 gauge aluminum and features brush guards on entry points to protect connections from dust and other contaminants. Siemon’s quarter-turn hook and loop cable managers facilitate proper routing of cables entering and exiting the enclosure. The hinged covers have independent locks for added security.

Part #

Description

ZU-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone unit enclosure, 2 RMS height: 107mm (4.2 in.), width: 541mm (21.3 in.), depth: 508mm (20.0 in.)

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

HD Series Patch Panels pages 2.2 – 2.5, MAX Patch Panels pages 2.6 – 2.7, CT Patch Panels pages 2.8 – 2.9

3 RMS ZONE UNIT ENCLOSURE (ZU-3) Siemon’s 19 inch 3 RMS Zone Unit Enclosure (ZU-3) provides additional capacity over our ZU-2, while maintaining all of its user-friendly features. The design allows the use of 3 RMS panels to provide additional port capacity necessary for higher density applications. The rotating hinge design provides easy access to both the front and rear of the panel for termination and patching.

Part #

Description

ZU-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone unit enclosure, 3 RMS height: 157mm (6.2 in.), width: 541mm (21.3 in.), depth: 508mm (20.0 in.)

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) HD Series Patch Panels pages 2.2 – 2.5, MAX Patch Panels pages 2.6 – 2.7, CT Patch Panels pages 2.8 – 2.9

Index

3.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

MAX® ZONE UNIT ENCLOSURE Modular Patching

The MAX zone unit enclosure is an economical, high-density solution designed for use with low-profile sub-floor applications including Cablefloor and SMED. Enclosures are available to accommodate up to 48 ports of media using flat MAX series modules and feature a 44.5 x 101.6mm (1.8 x 4.08 in.) opening for cable entry. Cable tie anchor points (hook and loop cable managers included) and fiber managers are conveniently located within the enclosure for proper routing and securing of cabling.

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Description

ZU-MX-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-port MAX zone unit enclosure

Industrial

height: 44.5mm (1.8 in.), width: 254.0mm (10 in.), depth: 377.8mm (14.9 in.)

Shielded/ Screened

ZU-MX-24-0515 . . . . . . . . 24-port MAX zone unit enclosure height: 44.5mm (1.8 in.), width: 114.3mm (4.5 in.), depth: 377.8mm (14.9 in.)

S210 Products

MAX Modules pages 1.2 – 1.7

S110 Products

CONSOLIDATION POINT ENCLOSURE

S66 Products/ Protection

The Consolidation Point Enclosure (CPE) is an enclosure designed to house telecommunications termination hardware being utilized as a Consolidation Point (CP) per ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1. It is designed to mount on a column or wall adjacent to the work area and has been aesthetically designed for use in an office environment. The enclosure features a smoked plexiglass window to view the connection while closed and a tamper proof lock prevents unauthorized access. Part #

Residential

Description

Tools and Testers

CPEV-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . S110/S210 vertical consolidation point enclosure, light ivory with window height: 734.8mm (28.93 in.), width: 465.3mm (18.30 in.), depth: 193.6mm (7.62 in.)

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary Use (XX) to specify enclosure color: 01 = black, 80 = light ivory S210 Blocks pages 8.2 – 8.3, S110 Blocks pages 9.2 – 9.3, Binding Post Wrench page 12.9

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Index

3.7

Work Area

PANEL ACCESS HINGE Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Siemon’s panel access hinge allows 2 RMS wall or rack-mounted 19 inch patch panels to rotate forward, providing access to the termination field on the back of panels. Once mounted, the panel can be hinged in either the 90° or 120° position to facilitate the use of a single-position or multi-pair impact tool. The integrated 1 RMS cable manager has removable cable managers to prevent interference when hinging stacked units. This innovative design is compatible with 19 inch free standing racks, wall-mount racks and stand-off brackets. Part #

PH-3 closed

Description

PH-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 RMS panel access hinge includes integral 1 RMS panel with 5 removable cable managers and accepts one 2 RMS or two 1 RMS patch panels

Fiber See Cable Management Capacity table on page 3.0 PH-3 hinged open

Industrial

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Shielded/ Screened

STAND-OFF BRACKETS

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Siemon hinged stand-off brackets can be mounted to a wall. With the hinge on either side for convenient access to the back of the panel and a series of cable tie holes provide internal wire management. The sides of the brackets will accept our S144 or S145 cable hangers (see page 3.9) for external cable management. The brackets can be used and accept any combination of Siemon patch panels and rack-mount cable management. Mounting hardware included.

Part #

RMS

Part #

SBH-2 . . . . . . . . . . 2

RMS

SBH-3 . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part #

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

height: see RMS information, width: 483mm (19 in.), depth: 152mm (6 in.) *Add -2 for (3) independent 2 RMS hinges (instead of a single 6 RMS) Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

System Design Guide

RACK-IT ™ Standards Update

Glossary

Siemon’s Rack-it vertical mounting brackets can be wall mounted to accommodate a wide range of rack mounted equipment. The brackets can also mount any combination of Siemon patch panels and rack-mount cable management. Slotted openings allow mounting of network equipment at various depths. Part #

Description

HC-RI-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical mounting bracket, 5 RMS

Index

3.8

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

RMS

SBH-4 . . . . . . . . . . 4

Part #

RMS

SBH-6* . . . . . . . . . . 6

Work Area

RACK HINGE Modular Patching

The Siemon rack hinges are designed to allow rack mounted patch panels to swing out (horizontally) from the rack. They mount directly to a standard EIA rack. The hinges are available in 2 and 3 RMS sizes which can be combined to mount 4 and 6 RMS panels. The 2 RMS hinge is capable of mounting one 2 RMS or two 1 RMS panels. Part #

Description

Racks and Cable Management

RMS

RHNG-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Modular Patch Cords and Components

RHNG-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rack hinge . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Fiber

MULTI-ACCESS HORIZONTAL CABLE MANAGERS The multi-access horizontal cable managers are designed to provide both front and rear cable management in a compact, 1 RMS size. The managers feature high capacity slots for entering and exiting cables, removable covers to hide excess patch cord length, and an innovative cable retention design to prevent patch cords from falling out when the covers are removed. There are also pass-through holes for routing cables between the front and rear of the managers. The rear of the RWM-1 features attachments for using Siemon’s hook and loop cable managers (see page 3.11). Part #

RWM-1

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened RWM-1DS

Description

S210 Products

RWM-1 . . . . . . . . . Single-sided horizontal cable manager with cover RWM-1DS . . . . . . . Double-sided horizontal cable manager with covers Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

See Cable Management Capacity table on page 3.0

S110 Products

WM SERIES RACK MOUNT CABLE MANAGERS

S66 Products/ Protection

The WM series cable managers provide increased strength and do not interfere with panels mounted above or below. They are a popular and economical solution for providing a clean and simple means of organizing small-to-large bundles of cables and patch cords. Part #

Description

WM-143-5

Residential

RMS

WM-143-5 . . . . . . . Cable manager with five S143 hangers . . . . 1

WM-144-5

WM-144-5 . . . . . . . Cable manager with five S144 hangers . . . . 2 WM-145-5 . . . . . . . Cable manager with five S145 hangers . . . . 2

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

See Cable Management Capacity table on page 3.0

WM-145-5

Web Resources

System Design Guide

CABLE HANGERS

Part #

Tools and Testers

Width

S143 S146

Depth

Standards Update

S143* . . . . . . . . . . 44mm (1.73 in.) . . . . 38mm (1.50 in.) . . . 89mm (3.35 in.) S144* . . . . . . . . . . 87mm (3.43 in.) . . . . 57mm (2.25 in.) . . . 74mm (2.90 in.) S145* . . . . . . . . . . 87mm (3.43 in.) . . . . 57mm (2.25 in.) . . . 125mm (4.93 in.) S146 . . . . . . . . . . . 151mm (5.95 in.) . . . . 63mm (2.5 in.) . . . . 130mm (5.15 in.) S147 . . . . . . . . . . . 254mm (10.00 in.) . . . 63mm (2.5 in.) . . . . 130mm (5.15 in.)

See Cable Management Capacity table on page 3.0

S144

Glossary

S145

*Add “-A” for optional adhesive backing

W W W

S I E M O N

S147

C O M

Index

3.9

Work Area

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

DOUBLE-SIDED HEAVY DUTY 19 INCH EQUIPMENT SHELF Siemonâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s double-sided 19 inch equipment shelf is designed to support heavy equipment loads up to 68.1 kg (150 lbs.). The shelf is designed for use with any 152mm (6 in.) deep rack and is secured to the front and rear of the rack channels. Mounting holes conform to EIA specifications for 19 inch racks. Shelf accommodates equipment up to 432mm (17 in.) wide. Part #

Description

SH-D19-01. . . . . . . . . . . . 19 inch double-sided equipment shelf for 152mm (6 in.) deep racks, solid, 3 RMS height: 133mm (5.25 in.), width: 483mm (19 in.), depth: 457mm (18 in.)

Fiber

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

SINGLE-SIDED 19 INCH EQUIPMENT SHELVES These 19 inch single-sided solid or vented equipment shelves are ideal for mounting telecommunications devices in 19 inch racks or cabinets. The sturdy 2.5mm (0.1 in.) thick aluminum construction supports up to 22.7kg (50 lbs.). The vented design features air flow perforations to provide additional ventilation for telecommunications equipment. Mounting holes conform to EIA specifications for 19 inch racks (can also be wall mounted). Shelves accommodate equipment up to 438mm (17.25 in.) wide. Part #

SH-S19-01

Description

SH-S19-01 . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 inch single-sided equipment shelf, solid, 3 RMS height: 133mm (5.25 in.), width: 483mm (19 in.), depth: 381mm (15 in.) SH-S19V-01 . . . . . . . . . . . 19 inch single-sided equipment shelf, vented, 3 RMS height: 133mm (5.25 in.), width: 483mm (19 in.), depth: 381mm (15 in.)

Tools and Testers

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

19 TO 23 INCH PANEL ADAPTERS These adapters allow 19 inch panels to be mounted to 23 inch racks. The adapters are designed so the panels fit flush with other 23 inch products when mounted (screws included). The adapters can be end-stacked to support larger panel sizes. Part #

Description

1923-(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 to 23 inch panel adapter (set of 2)

Glossary

Index

3.10

Use (X) to specify adapter size: 2 = 2 RMS, 3 = 3 RMS, 4 = 4 RMS, 5 = 5 RMS, 6 = 6 RMS Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

SH-S19V-01

Work Area

REAR CABLE MANAGERS Siemon offers rear cable management products to encompass a wide range of rack sizes and cable routing methods. Rackmounted cable managers provide strain relief anchor points and organization of horizontal cables being routed to the back of a patch panel. ANGLED REAR CABLE MANAGERS WM-3A AND WM-6A

WM-3A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled rear cable manager for 76mm (3 in.) channel racks Includes eight 190mm (7.5 in.) cable ties and mounting hardware.

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

The WM-3A and WM-6A feature an innovative, angled “V-shaped” design which provides direct and smooth routing of cables to the patch panel from either above or below. There are cable eyelets for securing cable ties (included) and cutouts for inserting our hook and loop cable managers (available separately-see below). The designs keep the wire manager at an adequate distance from the panel to provide proper space to route the cables.

WM-BK

WM-6A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Angled rear cable manager for 152mm (6 in.) channel racks Includes eight 190mm (7.5 in.) cable ties and mounting hardware.

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

FLAT REAR CABLE MANAGERS S210 Products

S110 Products WM-BK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cable manager with mounting screws and hex nuts The WM-BK can be mounted to the back side of a double-sided 19 inch rack, or can be mounted to the front of a double-sided 19 inch rack, using the same screws that hold the patch panel to the rack using the hex nuts provided.

Residential

Tools and Testers

Description

Web Resources

Wrap-around cable managers offer a simplified approach to cable management... secure it to a single cable and then wrap it around the entire bundle.

VCM-25-(XX)-(X) . . . . . . . . Roll of 25 cable managers VCM-250-(XX)-(X) . . . . . . . Spool of 250 cable managers Use (XX) to specify length: 06 = 152mm (6 in.), holds 51mm (2 in.) diameter cable bundle 12 = 305mm (12 in.), holds 102mm (4 in.) diameter cable bundle 18 = 457mm (18 in.), holds 153mm (6 in.) diameter cable bundle Use (X) to specify color: 1 = black, 2 = white, 3 = red, 4 = gray, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue, 7 = green, 9 = orange

S66 Products/ Protection

See Cable Management Capacity table on page 3.0

W W W

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary Hook and Loop cable managers have a large head for added strength and a mounting hole is included for securing to a wall or rack.

S I E M O N

C O M

Index

3.11

Work Area

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

19 INCH S110速/S210速 CABLE MANAGERS When mounted on a 19 inch rack-mount panel, the S110/S210 cable managers provide an economical, superior cable management solution in a compact space. Their 1 RMS and 2 RMS size and large capacity provide excellent cable management for 19 inch rack mount installations.

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened Covers are included with the cable managers to provide a clean patching appearance.

S210 Products Part # S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Description

RMS

S110-RWM-01 . . . . . . . . . 19 inch S110/S210 cable manager with covers, black . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 S110-RWM-02 . . . . . . . . . 19 inch S110/S210 cable manager with covers, white . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 S110-RWM2-01 . . . . . . . . 19 inch S110/S210 cable manager with covers, black . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 S110-RWM2-02 . . . . . . . . 19 inch S110/S210 cable manager with covers, white . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

See Cable Management Capacity table on page 3.0

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

S100A2 WIRE MANAGER The S100A2 wire manager snaps onto the legs of the S110 or S210 blocks/legs to provide a channel for routing crossconnect wire or patch cords. One S100A2 is designed to be used with each 100-/64-pair leg (2 for 200-/128-pair, 3 for 300-/172-pair) to allow space to access the wires. The S100A2 can also be mounted side-by-side. The outside edges are flared and tapered for smoother wire entry and exit and preventing damage to the conductor insulation. Part#

Description

S100A2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Snap-on S110/S210 wire manager, white S100A2-01 . . . . . . . . . . . Snap-on S110/S210 wire manager, black

Index

3.12

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

WALL MOUNT S110速/S210速 CABLE MANAGERS

Modular Patching

The Siemon S110/S210 cable managers are the foundation of a series of cable management products that are designed to support S110 or S210 cross-connects and patch panel applications. They can be ordered individually for field assembly in wall-mount applications. The cable managers are manufactured with high-strength, flame-retardant thermoplastic, and have been designed for easy cable insertion or withdrawal. The 2 RMS cable manager provides additional capacity for high-density patching applications. Siemon S110/S210 covers can be snapped on to provide color-coding and keep cables hidden.

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

CABLE MANAGERS WITHOUT LEGS S110B1RMS . . . . . . . . . . .

S110B2RMS . . . . . . . . . . .

1 RMS white cable manager without legs

2 RMS white cable manager without legs

Fiber

Industrial S110B1RMS-01 . . . . . . . .

S110B2RMS-01 . . . . . . . .

1 RMS black cable manager without legs

2 RMS black cable manager without legs

Shielded/ Screened

CABLE MANAGERS WITH LEGS S110A1RMS. . . . . . . . . . .

S110A2RMS. . . . . . . . . . .

1 RMS white cable manager with legs

2 RMS white cable manager with legs

S110A1RMS-01 . . . . . . . .

S110A2RMS-01 . . . . . . . .

1 RMS black cable manager with legs

2 RMS black cable manager with legs

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

See Cable Management Capacity table on page 3.0 Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

S110/S210 Covers see below

Tools and Testers

S110/S210 COVERS The Siemon Company S110/S210 covers are available in 50- and 100-pair sizes (32- and 64-pair for S210). The cover easily snaps on and off wiring blocks and S110/S210 cable managers, and enhances the appearance of the S110/S210 installation. Removable icon tabs provide color-coding on the front for compliance with the ANSI/TIA/EIA606-A administration standard. Part#

Residential

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Description

S110-CVR-50-(XX) . . . . . . 50-pair S110 cover/32-pair S210 cover

Standards Update

S110-CVR-100-(XX) . . . . . 100-pair S110 cover/64-pair S210 cover

Glossary

Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear, 01 = black, 20 = ivory

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

3.13

Work Area

Modular Patching

WORK AREA

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

MAX® SERIES

CT® SERIES

(pages 1.2 – 1.13)

(pages 1.14 – 1.25)

FIBER OUTLET BOX (FOB2)

SM® SERIES (pages 1.30 – 1.33)

(pages 1.28 – 1.29) Industrial

Product Applications

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products Connectors

CT Couplers provide a sleek, clean appearance for medium density work area requirements. Flat couplers can also be mounted in CT patch panels.

The FOB2’s ability to manage fiber slack and protect connections makes it the best mounting solution for fiber-tothe-desk applications. Also supports a mix of fiber and copper outlets.

Ideal for surface mount work area applications where outlet boxes are not practical. Supports a variety of copper, fiber, and coax outlets.

MAX Modules

CT Couplers

FOB Fiber Bezels, CT Couplers, MAX Modules

SM Modules, Flat MAX Modules

UTP, Coax, Fiber, Video

S310, Tool-less, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-TYPE, RCA, SVHS, HD15

S110, S310, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-Type, RCA, SVHS

S310, Tool-less, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-Type, RCA

S110, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-Type, RCA

Wall, Surface

Wall

Surface

Single Gang: 1-6 ports Double Gang: 1-12 ports

Single Gang: 1-4 ports Double Gang: 1-8 ports (with dual CT Couplers)

2-12 ports Fiber, 1-6 ports Copper

1-6 ports

Stand-off rings, surface mounting boxes, service fitting plates, hinged doors

Extended cover for added fiber protection

Magnets, shutter door

S110 Products Media Types S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Category

Termination Types

Mounting Options Capacity (Ports)

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Options

Standards Update Colors Glossary

Index

1.0

All products not available in all colors.

Work Area

SECTION CONTENTS

Modular Patching

Ultra™ MAX ® 6 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2 – 1.3 MAX 6 Modules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3 MAX 5e Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4 MAX 3 Modules

Racks and Cable Management

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4

Tool-Less MAX Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5 – 1.6

Modular Patch Cords and Components

MAX Fiber Adapter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 MAX Outlet Blanks and Doors Coax MAX Modules

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7

MAX Audio/Video Modules

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.7

Fiber

MAX Modular Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.8 – 1.9 Tamper-Proof MAX Faceplate

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9

MAX Modular Mounting Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10 Wall Phone Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.10

1903

MAX Service Fitting Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11

The year was 1903. Boston won baseball’s very first world series,

MAX Modular Furniture Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.11 Surface Mounting Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12 Stand-off Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.12

Henry Ford sold his first Model-T, and the Wright brothers defied gravity for 12 seconds. The American Dream is alive and well!

MAX International Faceplates and Adapters . . 1.12 – 1.13 CT® 6 Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.14 – 1.15 CT 5e Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.16 – 1.17 CT 3 Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.17 Fiber Adapter CT Couplers

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.18

In a small city in Connecticut, U.S.A., a transplanted mid-westerner with a flair for chemistry, was mixing up his own version of the American dream. An accomplished chemist with renowned experience

Coax, Video and Other CT Couplers. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.19

in the newly emerging field of plastics, Carl F. Siemon combined his

CT Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.20 – 1.21

unique chemical composition with an equally ambitious $2,500

Modular Furniture Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22 CT Service Fitting Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22

investment (equivalent to over $50,000 today), to create the Siemon

CT Modular Furniture Adapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.22

Hard Rubber Company. The new company created imitation stag-horn

Stand-off Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23

knife handles out of Siemon’s durable plastic compound that offered

Surface Mounting Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23 Sheetrock Ring for Faceplates

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

superior resistance to extreme temperatures and boiling water.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.23

International CT Faceplates and Adapters . . . 1.24 – 1.25 Multi-User Telecommunications Outlet Assembly (MUTOA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.26 – 1.27 Fiber Outlet Box (FOB2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.28 – 1.29

From the day Carl F. Siemon opened the doors of the Siemon Hard Rubber Company in Bridgeport, Connecticut to today, there has

SM® Surface Mount Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.30 – 1.31

been one thing that has defined the company: plastic. In 1903,

SM Modular Jack Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32

plastic was a new technology, destined to become, over the next cen-

SM Bezels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.32 – 1.33 Perimeters™ Raceway System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.34 – 1.35

tury, one of the most significant contributors to society and

Modular Y-Adapters and Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.36

technology. Plastics, and the way The Siemon Company used it to

6-Port SP5 Surface Pack Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37

create innovative products, was, from the very beginning, the main

Harmonicas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37

core competency of the company.

Modular RS232 Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.37

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.1

Work Area

Modular Patching

U LT R A ™ M A X ® 6 M O D U L E S 1

Racks and Cable Management

3 4

Modular Patch Cords and Components

5 2

Fiber

Industrial

7 Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

Category 6 component compliant to 300 MHz Siemon’s new Ultra MAX 6 module not only exceeds all category 6 component requirements to 250 MHz, they are also fully qualified out to 300 MHz*. This superior level of performance is achieved via an enhanced circuit board design, optimization of jack pin geometry, and stringent inspection and quality control procedures. The end result is the best performing UTP outlet available.

Easy Installation

Install from either front or rear of faceplate

Icons provided for port identification 6

Universal Wiring High-Density Solutions Side-stackable for maximum density

Familiar Termination Terminates with standard 110 termination tools

Revolutionary PCB Tuning

Quick Installation

Protective Doors Protective doors available to minimize exposure to dust and other contaminants

T568A and T568B wiring compatible 3

Quick Identification

Backward Compatibility Backward compatible with category 5e and lower patch cords

Superior Performance

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.2

Our printed circuit board is tuned and balanced in conjunction with our highperformance block and jack to maximize margin above category 6 specifications.

Pyramid™ wire entry system on S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time

*Performance from 250-300 MHz based on extrapolated TIA/EIA limits.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

For superior performance use Ultra MC ® 6 modular cords to unlock the performance of Ultra MAX 6 modules

Work Area

ULTRA™ MAX® 6 MODULES Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components MX6-(XX)U . . . . . . . . . . . .

MX6-F(XX)U . . . . . . . . . . .

MX6-K(XX)U . . . . . . . . . . .

Angled module with T568A/B wiring rear strain relief cap and protective color-matching rubber door

Flat module with T568A/B wiring and rear strain relief cap

Keystone module with T568A/B wiring and rear strain relief cap

Ultra HD® 6 Patch Panels see page 2.2 – 2.3, Ultra MC ® 6 Patch Cords see pages 4.2 – 4.3 MAX Patch Panels pages 2.6 – 2.7, MAX Faceplates pages 1.8 – 1.13

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

MAX 6 MODULES

S210 Products

S110 Products

MX6-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MX6-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . .

MX6-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . .

Angled MAX 6 module with T568A/B wiring, rear strain relief cap and protective color-matching rubber door

Flat module with T568A/B wiring and rear strain relief cap

Keystone module with T568A/B wiring and rear strain relief cap

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

MAX Patch Panels pages 2.6 – 2.7, MAX Faceplates pages 1.8 – 1.13, MC 6 Patch Cords see page 4.3, HD 6 Patch Panels see page 2.4

Tools and Testers

ORDERING INFORMATION FOR ULTRA MAX 6 AND MAX 6 MODULES

Web Resources 01

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white*, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 09 = orange,20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory*, 82 = alpine white

Glossary

Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 modules (angled and flat modules include icons). *Ultra MAX modules available as FOCUS items for these colors only.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

1.3

Work Area

MAX® 5e MODULES Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

Punch-down MAX 5e modules significantly exceed category 5e performance with component and channel performance to 160 MHz*! These modules offer all the functional advantages of our MAX 6 outlets (see page 1.2) and feature our S310 ® punch-down block — making termination quick and easy.

160 MHz

Featuring universal T568A/B wiring with component and channel performance to 160 MHz.

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

MX5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . .

MX5-F(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . .

MX5-K(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . .

Angled module with T568A/B wiring, rear strain relief cap and protective color-matching rubber door

Flat module with T568A/B wiring and rear strain relief cap

Keystone module with T568A/B wiring and rear strain relief cap

Angled modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon. Door color is clear for red, yellow, blue and orange angled modules. Flat modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon. 01 02 03 Add “-D” for optional color-matching door Door color is white for red, yellow, blue and orange modules. Keystone version is designed for integration with various international mounting products and is not compatible with MAX mounting hardware. Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 03 = red, 04 = gray, 05 = yellow, 06 = blue, 09 = orange,20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory, 82 = alpine white * Performance from 100 – 160 MHz based upon extrapolated TIA/EIA limits

Add “B” to end of part number for bulk project pack of 100 modules (angled and flat modules include icons). HD5® Patch Panels page 2.5, MAX Patch Panels pages 2.6 – 2.7, MAX Faceplates pages 1.8 – 1.13, MC® 5 Patch Cords page 4.4

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

MX3-F-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . .

Angled module with rear strain relief cap and protective color-matching rubber door

Flat module with rear strain relief cap

Glossary

Index

1.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

TOOL-LESS MAX® MODULES

Modular Patching

Slim design allows outlet to be side-stackable for high-density solutions

No termination tools required

Icon tabs available in 13 colors for color-coding

Racks and Cable Management

Termination

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Mass terminate all eight conductors by hand or use a single-position S110® termination tool in the MAX termination cap.

Industrial

Quick Pair Placement Shielded/ Screened

Patented multi-planar pair balancing technology provides category 5e system performance

S210 Products

Flexible mounting tab allows installation from front or rear of faceplate and secures module into the faceplate

Conductors can be sequentially placed into termination cap, minimizing cable pair untwist and simplifying termination.

Verify Proper Wiring

he tool-less MAX module provides category 5e system performance and user-friendly installation features. Our toolless termination allows all eight conductors to be terminated simultaneously when the termination cap is pressed into place. The compact size provides high-density connectivity in the work area and telecommunications room.

Angled module with T568A/B wiring

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

The termination cap has a large window for viewing terminations.

TOOL-LESS MAX MODULES MX-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . .

S110 Products

p om

ibl

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

MX-F-C5-(XX). . . . . . .

MX-K-C5-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .

Flat module with T568A/B wiring

Keystone module with T568A/B wiring

System Design Guide

Keystone version is designed for integration with various international mounting products and is not compatible with MAX mounting hardware.

Standards Update

Glossary MAX Patch Panels pages 2.6 – 2.7, MAX Faceplates pages 1.8 – 1.13

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Index

1.5

Work Area

TOOL-LESS MAX® 3 MODULES Modular Patching

MAX modules provide a full range of voice and specific data wiring configurations.

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

MX-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .

MX-F-(XX)-(XX) . . . . . . . . .

Angled module

Flat module

Fiber

MAX FIBER ADAPTER MODULES Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

Siemon MAX fiber adapter modules are compatible with all MAX series faceplates, modular furniture adapters, surface mount boxes and patch panels. All fiber adapters are “universal” to support either multimode or singlemode fiber connections.

MX-F-SA-(XX)* . . . .

MX-SA-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-MT-(XX) . . . . . .

Flat module with 1 simplex ST adapter (1 fiber)

Angled module with 1 simplex ST adapter (1 fiber)

Angled module with 1 duplex MT-RJ adapter (2 fibers)

MX-F-S2-(XX) . . . . .

MX-S2-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-F-MT-(XX)* . . . .

Flat module with 1 duplex ST adapter (2 fibers)

Angled module with 1 duplex ST adapter (2 fibers)

Flat module with 1 duplex MT-RJ adapter (2 fibers)

MX-F-SC-(XX) . . . . .

MX-SC-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-F1-LC(X)-(XX) . .

Flat module with 1 duplex SC adapter (2 fibers)

Angled module with 1 duplex SC adapter (2 fibers)

Flat module with 1 duplex LC adapter (2 fibers)

System Design Guide

MAX OUTLET BLANKS AND DOORS Standards Update

Blank inserts for unused ports and future growth and doors to protect outlets from outside contaminants. MX-BL-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .

MX-FD-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .

MX-AD-(XX). . . . . . . . . .

Blank module, bag of 10

Door assembly for flat 6- or 8-position outlets, bag of 20

Door assembly for angled 6- or 8-position outlets, bag of 20

Glossary

Index

1.6

Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear (MX-AD-XX only), 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white*, 80 = light ivory *Not available for angled doors. Recommend using clear or white if required.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

COAX MAX® MODULES For terminating coaxial cables at the work area or telecommunications room, Siemon’s coax MAX modules are available with both BNC and F-type adapters. The F-type is available in both flat and angled while the BNC is available in flat only. They each include a space for using color coded icons to identify type of service. MX-FA-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .

MX-F-FA-(XX)* . . . . . . . .

MX-F-BA-(XX)* . . . . . . . .

Angled module with 1 F-type adapter, 75 ohms, 2 GHz

Flat module with 1 F-type adapter, 75 ohms, 2 GHz

Flat module with 1 BNC adapter, 75 ohms

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

EZ-Twist page 11.5

Industrial

MAX AUDIO/VIDEO MODULES Siemon audio/video MAX modules provide connectivity for a wide range of applications. Available media types include RCA, SVHS and HD15. MX-F-RC-(XX)* . . . . . . . . .

MX-RC-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . .

Flat module with 1 RCA connector with solder tail

Angled module with 1 RCA connector with solder tail

MX-F-VH-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . MAX series SVHS connector, S110® punch-down style (uses 2-port space in MAX mounting hardware)

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products

MX-D4F-15-(XX) . . . . . . . . 4-port MAX mounting frame with HD15 female-female adapter installed

S66 Products/ Protection

MX-D4F-15E-(XX) . . . . . . . 4-port MAX mounting frame, HD15 cut-out, empty Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory RCA Modules include one color-matching, one red, and one blue icon. *Compatible with SM boxes

Residential

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

ACCESSORIES Part #

Description

CT-ICON-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . 25 colored icon tabs (phone on one side, computer on reverse)

System Design Guide

TAB-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 colored blank tabs for couplers CT-ICON-LBL* . . . . . . . . . . 10 label sheets for clear tabs that will fit any standard 8.5 x 11 printer, 168 labels per sheet S110-TC-2P . . . . . . . . . . . 2-pair termination caps for S110 blocks

Laser-printed customized tabs now available.

TW-4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102mm (4 in.) cable tie (bag of 1000)

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.7

Work Area

M A X ® M O D U L A R FA C E P L AT E S

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Faceplates available in black, white, bright white, gray, ivory, light ivory, and stainless steel

Slide-in color-coded icons allow users to instantly identify different types of devices or applications

Fiber

Industrial

Installation Flexibility Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Flexible mounting tab on MAX modules allows installation from front or rear of faceplate.

Superior Density Complete multimedia support

Residential

Sheets of designation labels can be ordered for use with printers

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Single and double gang faceplates available

Fits up to 6 outlets in a single gang or 12 in a double gang faceplate.

Labeling

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

1.8

Faceplates include pressure-release designation label covers for quick, tool-less removal.

W W W

S I E M O N

Modular Furniture Brackets page 1.22, MAX Modules pages 1.2 – 1.7

C O M

Work Area

MAX® MODULAR FACEPLATES MX-FP-S-01-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-FP-S-04-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-FP-D-06-(XX) . . . . . .

Single gang faceplate for one MAX module

Single gang faceplate for four MAX modules

Double gang faceplate for six MAX modules

MX-FP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-FP-S-06-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-FP-D-08-(XX) . . . . . .

Single gang faceplate for two MAX modules

Single gang faceplate for six MAX modules

Double gang faceplate for eight MAX modules

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber MX-FP-S-03-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-FP-D-12-(XX) . . . . . .

Single gang faceplate for three MAX modules

Double gang faceplate for twelve MAX modules

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

TAMPER-PROOF MAX FACEPLATE

S110 Products

S66 Products/ Protection

Part #

Description

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update MX-FP-S-(XX)-SS-L . . . . . . . Single gang stainless steel faceplate with labels and label holder

MX-FP-D-(XX)-SS-L. . . . . . . Double gang stainless steel faceplate with labels and label holder

MX-FP-S-(XX)-SS . . . . . . . . Single gang stainless steel faceplate

MX-FP-D-(XX)-SS . . . . . . . . Double gang stainless steel faceplate

Use (XX) to specify number of ports: 01 = 1-port, 02 = 2-port, 03 = 3-port, 04 = 4-port, 06 = 6-port Faceplates include mounting screws.

Use (XX) to specify number of ports: 06 = 6-port, 08 = 8-port, 12 = 12-port Faceplates include mounting screws.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Glossary

Index

1.9

Work Area

MAX® DUPLEX AND DESIGNER™ FACEPLATES Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

The MAX Duplex and Designer faceplates are designed for use with Siemon’s MAX series mounting frames. They are ideal for today’s small office, home office, or residential environment. Faceplates include designation labels and color-matching label covers for circuit identification.

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products

DP-S-(XX) . . . . . .

DR-S-(XX) . . . . . .

DRE-D-(XX) . . . . .

DR-D-(XX) . . . . . .

Single gang, plastic Duplex faceplate

Single gang, plastic Designer faceplate

Double gang Designer/Duplex faceplate

Double gang Designer faceplate

MAX Modules pages 1.2 – 1.7

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory

MX-E2A-(XX) . . .

MX-E4F-(XX). . . .

MX-E4A-(XX) . . .

Duplex mounting frame, accepts two flat MAX modules

Duplex mounting frame, accepts two angled MAX modules

Duplex mounting frame, accepts four flat MAX modules

Duplex mounting frame, accepts four angled MAX modules

S66 Products/ Protection DESIGNER MOUNTING FRAMES Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

MX-D1-(XX) . . . .

MX-D2-(XX) . . . .

MX-D4-(XX) . . . .

MX-D6F-(XX) . . .

Designer mounting frame, accepts one flat or angled MAX module

Designer mounting frame, accepts two flat or angled MAX modules

Designer mounting frame, accepts four flat or angled MAX modules

Designer mounting frame, accepts six flat MAX modules

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory

WALL PHONE FACEPLATES WPJP . . . . . . . . . . .

MX-WP-(XX)-SS . . . .

MX-WP-SS . . . . . . .

Plastic Wall Phone Faceplate with 4-pair USOC jack included

MAX Series Stainless Steel Wall Phone Faceplate with keystone MAX module included

MAX Series Stainless Steel Wall Phone Faceplate for keystone MAX modules

Glossary

Index

1.10

HD15 Mounting Frame page 1.7

Use (XX) to specify wiring option: C5 = 4-pair, category 5e, T568A/B; U3 = 3-pair, 6-position USOC; U4 = 4-pair, 8-position USOC

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

MAX ® SERVICE FITTING PLATES Modular Patching

Racks and Cable Management

Use (X) to specify number of ports: 2 = 2-ports, 4 = 4-ports, 6 = 6-ports* *Shielded MAX modules are not side stackable. Maximum density is 4 shielded modules in the 6-port plate. MAX blanks can be used as a spacer.

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Part#

Description

Fiber

MAX MODULAR FURNITURE ADAPTERS The MAX modular furniture adapters will accept four MAX angled or flat modules and snaps directly into communication outlet openings* in most major modular furniture systems, including Steelcase, Hon Industries, Haworth, Kimball and DRG. Adapters include designation label and clear label cover to allow for circuit identification. 67.46 – 69.85mm (2.656 – 2.750 in.)

34.16 – 35.69mm (1.345 – 1.405 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements

Shielded/ Screened

73.15mm (2.88 in.)

45.47mm (1.79 in.)

Panel thickness: 0.76 – 2.03mm (0.030 – 0.080 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements

S210 Products

Panel thickness: 1.24mm (0.05 in.)

MX-MFP-(XX) . . . . . . . . . .

MX-MFP-KNL-(XX) . . . . . . .

Modular furniture adapter for standard openings including steelcase

Modular furniture adapter for Knoll Group openings (not available in white or ivory)

MAX Modular Furniture adapters mount into modular furniture openings, providing superior density with proper circuit designation.

75.74mm (2.982 in.)

72.01mm (2.835 in.)

44.45mm (1.750 in.)

Industrial

Panel Cutout Requirements Panel thickness: 2.41mm (0.095 in.)

47.80mm (1.882 in.)

76.86mm (3.026 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements

48.26mm (1.90 in.)

Panel thickness: 1.52mm (0.060 in.)

Panel Cutout Requirements Panel thickness: 0.76 – 2.03mm (0.030 – 0.080 in.)

MX-MFP-HME-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-MFP-HMA-(XX) . . . . . .

MX-MFP-AO3-(XX) . . . . . .

Modular furniture adapter for Herman Miller Ethospace Beltline openings (not available in white or ivory)

Modular furniture adapter for Herman Miller Action Office Series 2 and Ethospace base openings

Modular furniture adapter for Herman Miller Action Office Series 3 base opening

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

ACCESSORIES Part #

S110 Products

Description

CT-FP-LBL-104* . . . . . . . . . 10 sheets of labels for faceplates that will fit any standard 8.5 x 11 printer, 104 labels/sheet

Glossary

MX-FP-CVR-(XX) . . . . . . . . Bag of 100 label covers for MAX faceplates Use (XX) to specify color: 00 = clear, 01 = black, 02 = white, 20 = ivory, 25 = bright white, 80 = light ivory *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

1.11

Work Area

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

SURFACE MOUNTING BOXES FOR MAX® AND CT ® FACEPLATES These boxes offer a surface mounting option for MAX or CT single and double gang faceplates. These boxes are perfect for installations where the work area outlet cannot be recessed into a wall or floor box. The boxes are also compatible with our stand-off rings if extra depth is required behind the faceplate. Mounting hardware not included. CT4-BOX-(XX). . . . . . . . . .

CT8-BOX-(XX). . . . . . . . . .

Surface mount box for single gang MAX or CT faceplate

Surface mount box for double gang MAX or CT faceplate

height: 119.3mm (4.70 in) width: 74.8mm (2.95 in) depth: 40.6mm (1.60 in)

height: 119.3mm (4.70 in) width: 120.8mm (4.76 in) depth: 40.6mm (1.60 in)

AB. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive backing (package of 10)

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products

MB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Magnetic backing (package of 10)

Perimeters™ Raceway pages 1.34 – 1.35, MAX Faceplates pages 1.8 – 1.9, CT Faceplates pages 1.20 – 1.21

Note: Two magnetic or adhesive backings required for double gang boxes.

S66 Products/ Protection

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory

Description

CT4-RING-050-(XX). . . . . . 12.7mm (0.50 in.) stand-off ring for single gang MAX or CT faceplate CT4-RING-100-(XX). . . . . . 25.4mm (1.0 in.) stand-off ring for single gang MAX or CT faceplate CT8-RING-050-(XX). . . . . . 12.7mm (0.50 in.) stand-off ring for double gang MAX or CT faceplate CT8-RING-100-(XX). . . . . . 25.4mm (1.0 in.) stand-off ring for double gang MAX or CT faceplate

Residential MAX Faceplates page 1.8 – 1.9, CT Faceplates page 1.20 – 1.21

Use (XX) to specify color: 01 = black, 02 = white, 04 = gray, 20 = ivory, 80 = light ivory

Tools and Testers

MAX BRITISH FACEPLATES Web Resources

The MAX British faceplate is compatible with British standards (85mm x 85mm). The faceplate is designed to accept up to six angled or flat MAX modules. Faceplates include designation label(s), clear label cover(s), and mounting screws.

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

MX-BFP-S-01-(XX). . . .

MX-BFP-S-02-(XX). . . .

MX-BFP-S-03-(XX). . . .

MX-BFP-S-04-(XX). . . .

MX-BFP-S-06-(XX). . . .

Single gang faceplate for one MAX module

Single gang faceplate for two MAX modules

Single gang faceplate for three MAX modules

Single gang faceplate for four MAX modules

Single gang faceplate for six MAX modules

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 25 = bright white, 82 = alpine white British Surface Mount Boxes page 1.24

Index

1.12

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

MAXÂŽ AUSTRALIAN/ITALIAN FACEPLATES Modular Patching MX-HFP-01-(XX). . . . . . .

MX-HFP-03-(XX). . . . . . .

Single gang horizontal Australian/Italian faceplate for one MAX module

Single gang horizontal Australian/Italian faceplate for three MAX modules

Racks and Cable Management

MX-HFP-02-(XX). . . . . . .

MX-HFP-04-(XX). . . . . . .

Single gang horizontal Australian/Italian faceplate for two MAX modules

Single gang horizontal Australian/Italian faceplate for four MAX modules

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Use (XX) to specify color: 01=black, 02=white, 20=ivory, 80=light ivory Note: Faceplates include designation label(s), color-matching and clear label covers, and color-matching screw covers.

MAX BRITISH FLEXYOKES The MAX flexyokes allow a single port MAX module to be mounted in British 37mm x 22mm openings. FY-MX-(XX). . . . . . . . . . . .

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

MAX DANISH FACEPLATE MX-DFP-02-02. . . . . . . .

S210 Products

Danish white faceplate for two MAX modules. Includes clear designation label covers

Flexyoke housing only

S110 Products

Use (XX) to specify color: 02 = white, 25 = bright white

S66 Products/ Protection

MAX Modules pages 1.2 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 1.7

Residential

MAX INTERNATIONAL ADAPTERS

Tools and Testers

These adapters allow two MAX modules to be mounted into standard openings. MX-45-01-(XX) . . . . . . . . .

MX-45-02-(XX) . . . . . . . . .

45mm x 45mm 1-port adapter

45mm x 45mm 2-port adapter

Web Resources

Use (XX) to specify color: 02=white, 25 = bright white, 82 = alpine white

System Design Guide

MX-RFP-S-02-(XX) . . . . . . .

Standards Update

MX-A-(XX) . . . . . . . . . . . . 50mm x 50mm adapter. Includes designation label and clear label covers. Use (XX) to specify color: 01=black, 02=white, 25 = bright white, 82 = alpine white

45mm x 50mm adapter Use (XX) to specify color: 02=white, 25 = bright white

Glossary

Contact our Technical Support Department for questions on mounting dimensions.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

1.13

Work Area

Modular Patching

MODULAR PATCHING

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

HD® PANELS

MAX® PANELS

CT® PANELS

(pages 2.2 – 2.5)

(pages 2.6 – 2.7)

(pages 2.8 – 2.10)

Fiber

Industrial Product Applications

High density, high performance modular patching for UTP

Multimedia (used in conjunction with MAX modules at work area)

Multimedia (used in conjunction with CT couplers at work area)

Integral

MAX Modules

CT Couplers

UTP

UTP, Coax, Fiber, Video

S310®, S110®, 25-pair

S310, Tool-less, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-type, RCA, SVHS

S310, S110, SC, ST, MT-RJ, LC, BNC, F-type, RCA, SVHS

12-Port on 89D Bracket, 16, 24, 32, 48, 96

12-Port on 89D Bracket, 16, 24, 48

16, 24, 32, 48, 64, 96

Rear Cable Management Bar, Icon/Label Holders, Designation Labels, Cable Ties, Mounting Hardware

Rear Cable Management Bar, Designation Labels, Cable Ties, Mounting Hardware

Mounting Hardware

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

Connectors

Media Types S110 Products Category S66 Products/ Protection

Termination Types

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

Capacity (Ports)

Included Accessories

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

2.0

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

SECTION CONTENTS

Modular Patching

Ultra™ HD ® 6 Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 – 2.3 Optional HD Panel Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3

Racks and Cable Management

HD 6 Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 HD5® Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 12-Port HD5 and HD 6 Panels on S89D Bracket . . . 2.5

Modular Patch Cords and Components

HD5 Quick-Patch™ Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 MAX® Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 – 2.7 12-Port MAX Panel on S89D Bracket . . . . . . . . . . 2.7

Fiber

Optional MAX Panel Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 CT® Patch Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8 – 2.9 Oversized CT Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 CT-DK Designation Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.10 Modular Patch Blocks® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11 Blank Filler Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.11

Industrial

1906 In 1906, The Siemon Company entered the fledgling telecommunications market with its 3-pole connecting block –

Shielded/ Screened

a product that offered superior performance to the standard ceramic connecting block of the day. Fashioned out of a refined hardened

S210 Products

plastic compound, affectionately known as “Connecticut River Mud,” the Siemon 3-pole connecting block resisted the cracking and

S110 Products

breaking so common with the ceramic blocks. As such, it soon became a staple product for a new customer – Western Electric (better known as AT&T). Though the products may have changed over the years, The Siemon Company is still supplying AT&T and other Bell

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

companies with innovative products, and today remains one of their longest continuous suppliers.

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.1

Work Area

Modular Patching

U LT R A ™ H D ® 6 PAT C H PA N E L S 1

Racks and Cable Management

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

6 2

Category 6 component compliant to 300 MHz Siemon’s new Ultra HD 6 modular patch panel not only exceeds all category 6 component requirements to 250 MHz, it is also fully qualified out to 300 MHz*. This superior level of performance is achieved via enhanced circuit board and jack designs.

Superior Performance

Superior performance for interconnect, cross-connect or consolidation point applications 2

Backward Compatibility

Black anodized finish, rolled edges and screw-free front surface provide an aesthetically pleasing appearance 5

Familiar Termination Terminates with standard 110 termination tools

Pyramid™ System

Circuit Protection

Durability Durable modular outlets are FCC CFR 47 part 68 subpart F and IEC 60603-7 compliant. Outlet contacts are plated with 50 microinches of gold

Backward compatible with category 5e and lower patch cords 3

Aesthetics

Universal Wiring T568A and T568B wiring compatible

Built-In Cable Manager

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

2.2

Pyramid wire entry system on S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to simplify and reduce installation time

Protective rear metal housing prevents accidental damage of internal circuit board

*Performance from 250-300 MHz based on extrapolated TIA/EIA limits.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Includes rear cable manager to properly guide cables to point of termination

Work Area

ULTRA™ HD® 6 PATCH PANELS The superior level of performance of the Ultra HD 6 patch panel is achieved via a completely new circuit board design, optimization of jack pin geometry, and stringent inspection and quality control procedures. When used with an Ultra MC® 6 patch cord, the result is a cross-connect solution with typical NEXT margin of 5 dB across the entire frequency range from 1-300 MHz. Combine Ultra HD 6 patch panels with Siemon’s new Ultra MAX® 6 modules and Ultra MC 6 modular cords for a complete channel solution with worst case PS ACR beyond 300 MHz and typical results out to 350 MHz! This superior cabling system delivers unparalleled network performance today and support for multi-gigabit Ethernet applications expected in the coming years. Part #

Description

RMS

HD6-24U . . . . . . . . 24-port panel, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 T568A/B wiring

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

HD6-48U . . . . . . . . 48-port panel, . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 T568A/B wiring

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

Ultra MC 6 Patch Cords pages 4.2 – 4.3, Ultra MAX 6 Modules pages 1.2 – 1.3

S110 Products

OPTIONAL HD PANEL ACCESSORIES Part #

S66 Products/ Protection

Description

HD-RWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rear cable management bracket for HD patch panels HD5-ICON6 . . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive-backed strips in a package of 8 for colorcoding and port designation for 24-, 48-, or 96-port panels (icons not included)

Residential

HD5-ICON6-LBL . . . . . . . . 10 sheets of labels for HD5-ICON6 for laser printing (16 labels per sheet)*

Tools and Testers

HD5-ICON8 . . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive-backed strips in a package of 4 for colorcoding and port designation for 16-, or 32-port panels (icons not included)

Web Resources

HD5-ICON8-LBL . . . . . . . . 20 sheets of labels for HD5-ICON8 for laser printing (8 labels per sheet)*

System Design Guide

HD5-LBL-ID . . . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive designation strips in a package of twenty for 24-, 48-, or 96-port panels HD5-LBL-480 . . . . . . . . . . Adhesive strips for sequentially numbering panel ports 1 through 480 for 24-, 48-, or 96-port panels HD5-LBL-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . White removable designation strips in a package of fifty for all versions of HD panels

HD5-LBL-ID

HD5-LBL-480

HD5-LBL6-(X) . . . . . . . . . . Removable designation strips in a package of eight for 24-, 48-, or 96-port panels Use (X) to specify color: 2 = white, 5 = yellow, 6 = blue *Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

Standards Update

Glossary HD5-LBL-2

HD5-LBL6-(X)

Colored Icons page 1.7

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.3

Work Area

H D ® 6 PAT C H PA N E L S

Modular Patching

HD 6 Patch Panels feature universal wiring for both T568A and T568B applications.

Racks and Cable Management

Modular outlets are FCC CFR 47 part 68 subpart F and IEC 60603-7 compliant and have 50 microinch gold plated contacts

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Pyramid™ Wire Entry System

Icon label holders and designation labels included

Shielded/ Screened Black anodized panels can be mounted directly to an EIA standard 19 inch relay rack or cabinet

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Pyramid wire entry system on S310® blocks separates paired conductors when lacing cables to reduce installation time.

breakthrough in patch panel performance. Siemon’s HD 6 is the industry’s first patch panel to exceed category 6 connecting hardware specifications for all pair combinations up to 250 MHz. Get revolutionary performance and user-friendly termination, labeling, and cable management features with Siemon’s popular HD 6 patch panel.

Circuit Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

Front surface is uninterrupted by screw heads for a clean appearance

HD 6 PATCH PANELS

Rear metal enclosure protects printed circuitry.

Part #

Description

RMS

HD6-16 . . . . . . . . . 16-port panel, T568A/B wiring . . . . . 1

System Design Guide

Built-In Cable Manager

HD6-24 . . . . . . . . . 24-port panel, T568A/B wiring . . . . . 1 HD6-32 . . . . . . . . . 32-port panel, T568A/B wiring . . . . . 2 HD6-48 . . . . . . . . . 48-port panel, T568A/B wiring . . . . . 2 HD6-96 . . . . . . . . . 96-port panel, T568A/B wiring . . . . . 4

Standards Update

Panels include rear cable manager, icon label holders, designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware Add “B” for bulk project pack of 5 panels (rear cable managers and icon label holders not included but can be ordered separately). Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Glossary

Includes rear cable manager to properly guide cables to point of termination.

MC ® 6 Modular Cords page 4.3, MAX® 6 modules page 1.3

Index

2.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

HD5® PATCH PANELS HD5 series patch panels offer the most robust patching solution in the industry. HD5 panels feature universal T568A/B wiring and exceed category 5e requirements with component and channel performance to 160 MHz*. Panels include a rear cable manager, icon/label holders, designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware. Part #

Description

160 MHz

Featuring universal T568A/B wiring with component and channel performance to 160 MHz.*

RMS

HD5-16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-port panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HD5-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-port panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 HD5-32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32-port panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 HD5-48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48-port panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 HD5-96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96-port panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Panels include rear cable manager, icon/label holders, designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware Add “B” for bulk project pack of 5 panels (rear cable managers and icon label holders not included but can be ordered separately). Note: 16- and 32-port HD5 panels feature S310 ® termination blocks and are not compatible with S110 ® multi-pair termination tools. Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.) * Performance from 100 – 160 MHz based upon extrapolated TIA/EIA limits. HD Panel accessories page 2.3 ®

12-PORT HD 6 MOUNTED ON S89D BRACKET The HD6-89 offers an economical solution for small applications and is ideal for retrofitting S66™ punch down blocks to a high performance modular design.

height: 254.0mm (10.0 in), width: 85.9mm (3.38 in), depth: 60.2mm (2.37 in)

height: 254.0mm (10.0 in.), width: 85.9mm (3.38 in.), depth: 47.8mm (1.88 in.)

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

ibl

HD5 QUICK-PATCH™ PANEL

Siemon’s HD5 Quick-Patch panel provides a quick and easy category 5e channel patching solution for 10/100BASE-T hubs with 25-pair connectors. The HD5 Quick-Patch Panel incorporates many user-friendly features and benefits, including rear connectors that are staggered to enable easy routing of 25-pair cable to the connection point and a rear metal enclosure that protects printed circuitry. The black anodized panel can be mounted directly to a standard 19 inch rack or cabinet with the mounting hardware included. Icon/label holders and designation labels (included). Part #

Racks and Cable Management

S110 Products

The HD5-89 offers an economical solution for small applications and is ideal for retrofitting S66 punch down blocks to a modular design. HD5-89D-12 . . . . . . . . . . 12-port HD5 panel, T568A/B wiring, mounted on S89D bracket

Modular Patching

S210 Products

12-PORT HD5 MOUNTED ON S89D BRACKET

HD6-89D-12 . . . . . . . . . . 12-port HD 6 panel, T568A/B wiring, mounted on S89D bracket

Work Area

Description

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

HD5-QP-48 . . . . . . . . . . . 48-port 10/100BASE-T panel (Active pins 1, 2, 3 & 6 only), four 25-pair connectors (female), 2 RMS Panels include icon/label holders, designation labels, and mounting hardware Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Glossary

Category 5e 25-pair cable assemblies page 4.6

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.5

Work Area

M A X ÂŽ PAT C H PA N E L S

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

Panels can be mounted directly on standard 19 inch relay rack or cabinet

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Bold port numbering enables quick identification of outlets

Fiber

Industrial

Modularity Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Individual modules snap into place from front or rear of panel for added installation flexibility.

Combines modular design with high density for ultimate flexibility

Port Identification

Lightweight, high strength brushed aluminum with black anodized protective finish

Residential

Multimedia capability: mix and match many different type of connectors

Technical Tip!

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Use flat MAX modules for patch panel applications.

Removable designation labels can be laser printed and enable proper circuit identification for each port.

Cable Management

Standards Update

Glossary

Rear cable management bar included for routing horizontal cables to terminations. MAX Modules pages 1.2 â&#x20AC;&#x201C; 1.7, Fiber Management Tray page 5.9

Index

2.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

MAX® PATCH PANELS Part #

Description

Modular Patching

RMS

MX-PNL-16 . . . . . . . . . . . 16-port panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

MX-PNL-24 . . . . . . . . . . . 24-port panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Fiber MX-PNL-48 . . . . . . . . . . . 48-port panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products Panels include rear cable manager, designation labels, cable ties, and mounting hardware. MAX Panels not compatible with shielded MAX modules. Use the TERA™-MAX panel (see page 7.5). Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

12-PORT MAX PANEL MOUNTED ON S89D BRACKET The MAX S89D offers an economical solution for smaller applications while allowing for a range of different media using the full line of MAX modules. Part #

Residential

Description

MX-89D-12 . . . . . . . . . . . 12-port MAX panel mounted on an 89D bracket height: 254.0mm (10.0 in.), width: 85.9mm (3.38 in.), depth: 47.8mm (1.88 in.)

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES MX-PNL-LBL4*. . . . . . . . . .

MX-PNL-LBL6*. . . . . . . . . .

10 sheets of laser printable labels for 16-port MAX panel

10 sheets of laser printable labels for 24- and 48-port MAX panels

Standards Update

Glossary

*Visit our web site or contact our Technical Support Department for labeling software.

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.7

Work Area

C T ® PAT C H PA N E L S

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

Couplers can be easily removed from the panel making moves, adds, and changes quick and easy

Cutouts allow terminated couplers to pass through panels from front to back or back to front

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Multimedia Capability Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

For optimum flexibility, the CT Panel accepts a wide variety of CT couplers, including UTP, fiber, and coax.

Rear Labeling System Black anodized aluminum panels can be mounted directly to an EIA standard 19 inch relay rack or cabinet

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

CT Panels are labeled on rear to assist in cable identification while terminating.

Rear Cable Management

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

2.8

Siemon offers a wide range of rear cable management products to encompass a wide range of rack sizes and cable routing methods — see page 3.11 for more information.

W W W

S I E M O N

Note: use optional fiber management tray when mixing copper and fiber in CT panel (see page 5.9)

CT Couplers pages 1.14 – 1.19, Fiber Management Tray page 5.9

C O M

Work Area

CT速 PATCH PANELS Part #

Description*

RMS

Modular Patching

Maximum Quantity of CT Couplers

Racks and Cable Management

CT-PNL-16. . . . 16-port panel . . . . . 1 . . . . . . . . . . 8

Modular Patch Cords and Components

CT-PNL-24. . . . 24-port panel . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . 12

Fiber

CT-PNL-32. . . . 32-port panel . . . . . 2 . . . . . . . . . . 16

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened CT-PNL-48. . . . 48-port panel . . . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . . 24

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

CT-PNL-64. . . . 64-port panel . . . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . . 32

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

CT-PNL-96. . . . 96-port panel . . . . . 6 . . . . . . . . . . 48

System Design Guide

Standards Update Technical Tip! Flat couplers are recommended for patch panel applications.

Glossary

*Number of ports when configured with two-port CT couplers Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

2.9

Work Area

OVERSIZED CT速 PANELS Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Oversized CT panels are available for applications that require additional labeling space. They provide the same flexibility as our standard CT panels and feature a write-on designation surface above each coupler opening that can also be used as a space for adhering your own label. Siemon offers adhesive-backed label holders with replaceable write-on labels that mount above the entire row of CT couplers. Maximum Maximum Quantity of Quantity of Part # Description* RMS CT Couplers Part # Description* RMS CT Couplers CT-PNL-16-ID . . . 16-port panel. . . . 2. . . . . . . . . . 8

CT-PNL-48-ID . . . 48-port panel. . . . 4 . . . . . . . . . 24

Fiber CT-PNL-24-ID . . . 24-port panel. . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . 12

Industrial CT-PNL-96-ID . . . 96-port panel. . . . 7 . . . . . . . . . 48

Shielded/ Screened CT-PNL-32-ID . . . 32-port panel. . . . 3 . . . . . . . . . 16

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

*Number of ports when configured with two-port CT couplers Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in.)

System Design Guide Part # Standards Update

Description

CT-DK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bag of 6 adhesive backed, clear plastic holders with paper designation strips

Glossary Peel-off adhesive strip

Index

2.10

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

MODULAR PATCH BLOCKS速 Modular Patching

Racks and Cable Management

Description

SPB-V1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . One, 25-pair connector wired to 24, 1-pair 6-position modular jacks, USOC wiring. Black universal holddown

Modular Patch Cords and Components

SPB-V2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two, 25-pair connectors, each wired to 24, 2-pair 6-position modular jacks, USOC wiring. One black, one blue universal holddown SPB-V4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Four, 25-pair connectors, each wired to 24, 4-pair modular jacks, USOC wiring. Black, blue, red, and green universal holddowns

Fiber

SPB-V4-ATT . . . . . . . . . . . Four, 25-pair connectors, each wired to 24, 4-pair modular jacks, T568B wiring. Black, blue, red, and green universal holddowns

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

BLANK FILLER PANELS Blank filler panels are ideal for installations where open or expansion rack space is to be covered. Panels are blank on one side and feature the Siemon logo on the other side. Part #

Description

S110 Products

PNL-BLNK-(X) . . . . . . . . . . Blank filler panel for 19 inch rack

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary Use (X) to specify rack mount space height of panel: 1 = 1 RMS, 2 = 2 RMS, 3 = 3 RMS, 4 = 4 RMS, Note: 1 RMS = 44.5mm (1.75 in)

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

2.11

Work Area

Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management

MODULAR PATCH CORDS AND COMPONENTS

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

MC® MODULAR CORDS

Industrial

(pages 4.2 – 4.4)

Residential

Consolidation Point, Telecommunications Room

Field Termination

Telecommunications Room, Work Area

Modular

Modular, 25-Pair

UTP

Stranded

Solid

Stranded

Black, White, Red, Gray, Yellow, Blue, Green

Gray (non-plenum), Blue (plenum)

White

Varies by product

Work Area, Telecommunications Room

ibl

S66 Products/ Protection

Media Types

Category

Conductor Types

Cable Colors Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

4.0

(page 4.6)

S110 Products

Connector Type

(page 4.5)

S210 Products

Product Applications

(pages 4.3 – 4.4)

OTHER CABLE ASSEMBLIES

Shielded/ Screened

SOLID IC CABLE CABLE ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLIES COMPONENTS

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

Section Contents

Modular Patching

Ultra™ MC® 6 Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 – 4.3 MC 6 Modular Cords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3

Racks and Cable Management

Solid IC6 Single-Ended Modular Cords. . . . . . . . . . 4.3 MC 5 Modular Cords. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 Solid IC5 Single-Ended Modular Cords. . . . . . . . . . 4.4

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Category 5e and 3 25-Pair Cable Assemblies . . . . . 4.6 EZ-Twist ® Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.6 Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

increasingly difficult economy. It proved to be a very wise decision. Residential

Combining its business savvy with its technological expertise, The Siemon Company was actively involved in the invention of a non-

Tools and Testers

breakable plastic record to serve the needs of a booming entertainment industry. By 1934, Siemon was manufacturing records for five

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

4.1

Work Area

Modular Patching

U LT R A M C 6 MODULAR CORDS ™

Racks and Cable Management

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

2 Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Easy Identification Optional color-coded oval icons available for port identification

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

Metallic Isolator

Exceeds Category 6

Innovative Strain Relief 360° crimp provides excellent plug-to-cable strain relief without causing pair deformation

Superior Quality Internal stranded cordage isolator provides extended flex life and maintains ideal pair geometry

Exceeds Category 6 Ultra 6 stranded cordage far exceeds category 6 performance specifications

Durability High quality modular plugs provide long-term resistance to corrosion, extreme temperatures and airborne contaminants

Residential

Latch Guard Slide-on boots feature a latch guard to protect plug from snagging when pulling through pathways or cable managers

Excellent Bend Relief

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

4.2

Patented metallic isolator shields pairs inside plug for optimum NEXT performance

100% transmission testing ensures margin beyond category 6 modular cord specifications and guarantees optimum field performance

*Performance from 250-300 MHz based on extrapolated TIA/EIA limits.

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

37 mm (1.4 in.) boot ensures excellent bend relief, critical for category 6 performance

Work Area

ULTRA™ MC® 6 MODULAR CORDS Part #

Modular Patching

Description

MC6-8-T-(XX)-(XX)U . . . . . . Ultra MC 6, double-ended, 4-pair stranded modular cord, T568A/B, color-matching jacket/boot

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Ultra HD® 6 Patch Panels page 2.2 – 2.3, Ultra MAX® 6 Modules page 1.2 – 1.3

Fiber

MC 6 MODULAR CORDS

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

Part #

S210 Products

Description

S110 Products Technical Tip! Factory terminated and tested modular cords are required to achieve consistent category 5e or 6 channel performance. Field termination is not recommended.

S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

SOLID IC6 SINGLE-ENDED MODULAR CORDS

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

Description

IC6-8A-(XX)-B(XX) . . . . . . . IC6, single-ended, non-plenum, 4-pair solid modular cord, T568B, gray jacket with colored boot

System Design Guide

Standards Update

IC6-8T-(XX)-B(XX)P . . . . . . IC6, single-ended, plenum, 4-pair solid modular cord, T568A, blue plenum jacket with colored boot

Glossary

W W W

S I E M O N

Index

C O M

4.3

Work Area

MC® 5 MODULAR CORDS Modular Patching Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Description

MC5-8T-(XX)-B(XX)C . . . . . MC 5 Double-ended, 4-pair modular stranded cord, T568A/T568B, color matching jacket/boot,

WITHOUT BOOT Fiber

Part #

Description

MC5-8-T-(XX)-(XX). . . . . . . MC 5 Double-ended, 4-pair modular stranded cord, T568A/T568B, no boot MC-BOOT-(XX)-100 . . . . . Color Boots (pack of 100)

Industrial Technical Tip!

Shielded/ Screened

S210 Products

S110 Products S66 Products/ Protection

Residential

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Description

Standards Update

Glossary

Index

4.4

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

UNIVERSAL MODULAR PLUG Modular Patching

Racks and Cable Management

Description

UP-2468 . . . . . . . . . . . . . “Universal” modular plug

Modular Patch Cords and Components

AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool page 12.8, PT-908 Crimp Tool page 12.9, Stranded cable below

Fiber

MODULAR PLUGS We offer modular plugs in standard configurations to terminate modular cords for patching or work area applications. Modular plugs can be terminated to the exact cable length needed in order to maintain a neater, more organized installation. The plugs terminate twisted-pair cable with 26-22 AWG (0.40mm to 0.64mm) solid or 7-strand conductors with an insulated conductor diameter of 0.86–0.99mm (0.034–0.039 in.). All plug contacts have 50 microinches minimum of gold plating over nickel and meet FCC CFR 47 part 68 subpart F, and IEC 60603-7 specifications.

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

P-8-8 . . . . . . . . . .

P-8-8SS . . . . . . . .

P-6-6 . . . . . . . . . .

8-position modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Tyco crimp tools)

8-position modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Stewart crimp tools)

6-position modular plug with 6 contacts*

S210 Products

P-8-8K . . . . . . . . .

PS-8-8 . . . . . . . . .

P-6-4 . . . . . . . . . .

S110 Products

8-position keyed modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Tyco crimp tools)

8-position shielded modular plug with 8 contacts (compatible with Siemon and Tyco crimp tools)

6-position modular plug with 4 contacts*

S66 Products/ Protection

Technical Tip!

Factory terminated and tested modular cords are required to achieve consistent category 5e or 6 channel performance. Field termination is not recommended.

Residential

Tools and Testers

STRANDED CABLE

Web Resources

System Design Guide

Description

9E6R4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category 6 cable, 4-pair stranded, 24 AWG (7 strands @ 0.20mm), white jacket, 305m (1,000 ft.) dispenser pack

Standards Update

Glossary

S110® Patch Plugs page 9.11, S210® Patch Plugs page 8.9

W W W

Index

S I E M O N

C O M

4.5

Racks and Cable Management Modular Patch Cords and Components

Fiber

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

CATEGORY 5e CABLE ASSEMBLIES QP25M-AA-(XX) . . . . . . . . 25-pair, double ended 110-to-110, cable assembly with male connectors

CATEGORY 3 CABLE ASSEMBLIES A25B-DE-(XX) . . . . . . . . . 25-pair, double-ended, cable assembly with female connectors

Category 5e

S110 Products

EZ-TWIST® CONNECTOR

Residential

S210 Products

S66 Products/ Protection

ibl

CATEGORY 5e AND 3 25-PAIR CABLE ASSEMBLIES

Modular Patching

Work Area

Category 3

Description

HC-EZ-(X)-(X) . . . . . . . . . . EZ-Twist coax connector, bag of 50

Tools and Testers

Use 1st (X) to specify cable type: 5 = RG59, 6 = RG6 Use 2nd (X) to specify shield type: T = Tri-shield, Q = Quad-shield

Web Resources

RG6 F-TYPE COAX CONNECTOR System Design Guide

Standards Update

Description

RG6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RG6 F-type connector

Glossary

Coaxial Crimp Tool page 12.9, AllPrep™ Cable Preparation Tool (CPT-RGTP) page 12.8

Index

4.6

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

Work Area

CATEGORY 6 CROSS-CONNECT WIRE Modular Patching

Racks and Cable Management

Description

CJ6-W4-1000 . . . . . . . . . Category 6, 4-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm), cross-connect wire, pair colors blue/orange/green/brown, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool

Modular Patch Cords and Components

Cross-Connect Wire Dispenser see below

Fiber

CATEGORY 5e CROSS-CONNECT WIRE

Industrial

Shielded/ Screened

Part #

S210 Products

Description

CJ5-W4-1000 . . . . . . . . . Category 5e, 4-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire, pair colors blue/orange/green/brown, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool

S110 Products

CJ5-W2-1000 . . . . . . . . . Category 5e, 2-pair 24 AWG (0.51mm) webbed cross-connect wire, pair colors blue/orange, 305m (1,000 ft.) spool

S66 Products/ Protection

Cross-Connect Wire Dispenser see below

Residential Technical Tip! Use the Siemon cable preparation tool CPT-WEB (see page 12.8) to quickly separate CJ5 webbed conductors prior to termination.

Tools and Testers

Web Resources

CROSS-CONNECT WIRE DISPENSER

System Design Guide

Standards Update

Glossary

Description

CWD-19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 in. (482.6mm) cross-connect wire dispenser

Index

W W W

S I E M O N

C O M

4.7